DP-8060 ServiceManual Ver.1.4

Order Number: MGCS060601C1
H21
Digital Imaging Systems
DP-8060 / 8045 / 8035

For USA version only
[ Version 1.4 ]
WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service
or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2008.

Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
Precautions
For Your Safety
To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic
machine to ensure proper, and safe operation of your machine.
Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet, and is easily accessible.
This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must not be performed.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.
WARNING
Power and Ground Connection Cautions
Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated
connector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventually
cause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time.
Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord is
required, always use a properly rated cord.
120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 A
If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, it may be underrated, and the machine,
or plug may emit smoke, orbecome hot to the touch.
Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not
place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.
Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.
If the power cord is damaged, or insulated wires are exposed, contact the authorized
Panasonic dealer for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric
shocks.
Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or
abnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire.
Immediately switch Off and unplug the machine, and contact the authorized Panasonic
.
dealer.
Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position.
Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug and
cause fire.
When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cord
forcibly can damage it, and cause fire, or an electric shock.
When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it.
If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulation
can cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.
Be sure to switch Off, and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine
for cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine's interior can cause
an electric shock.
Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual
condition, contact your authorized Panasonic
.
dealer
The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.
The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.
The plug and receptacle are free of dust.
The cord is not cracked or frayed.
Operating Safeguards
Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may cause
severe burns.
Do not place any liquid container such as a vase, or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or
shock hazard.
Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the
machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.
If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately.
Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can cause
smoke or fire.
Consumable Safeguards
Never dispose of toner, toner cartridge, or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in the
cartridge/bottle can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries.
Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children to prevent chocking or poisoning. If a button
battery/verification stamp is swallowed accidentally, get medical treatment immediately.
Notice: California only:

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
CAUTION
Installation and Relocation Cautions
Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that
may catch fire.
Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty, or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure to
these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.
Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand the weight of the machine.
Refer to the Specifications section for the weight of the machine.
If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.
When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machine
e with proper
packing materials for shipping.
When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the
power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
Operating Safeguards
Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the
machine accidentally, resulting in injuries.
Do not use a highly flammable spray, or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.
When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the scanning
glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.
Never touch a labelled area found on, or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet of
paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries or
burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbon paper and coated paper. When a
paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.
Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over, or the
heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.
Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimize
the ozone density in the air.
When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.
Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or eye injury.
Pull the paper trays out slowly to prevent injuries.
When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine.
A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrapped
around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see,
do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch Off the
machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Consumable Safeguards
Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated, or scratched drum can be
hazardous to your health.
Do not mix new and old batteries together, as they can burst or leak, causing a fire or
injuries. Be sure to use the specified type of batteries
.
only.
Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can
burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.
Others
When clearing a paper jam or other fault, follow the appropriate procedure given in this manual.
The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightning
strikes in your neighborhood, maintain an ample distance from the machine, and do not touch it
until the lightning stops.
If you notice flickering, distorted images, or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may
be causing radio interference. Switch it Off, and if the interference disappears, the machine is the
cause of the radio interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.
Move the machine, and theTV and/or radio away from each other.
Reposition or reorient the machine, and theTV and/or radio.
Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets operating on different circuits.
Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas, and cables until the interference stops. For an outdoor
antenna, ask your local electrician for support.
Use a coaxial cable antenna.
10
11
Table of Contents
Specifications Table .............................. 14
3.25. LVPS for Finisher Unit.......................... 245
1.1.
Copy Function........................................ 14
3.26. APF PC Board...................................... 246
1.2.
Fax, Printer, Network Scanner,

and Internet Fax Functions .................... 22
3.27. LCT PC Board ...................................... 252

3.28. FXB PC Board...................................... 256
1.3.
System Combination.............................. 31
1.4.
Options and Supplies List ...................... 32
1.5.
External View ......................................... 34
4.1.
Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart.......... 258
1.6.
Control Panel ......................................... 37
4.2.
Improper LCD Display .......................... 259
1.7.
Fans and Motors .................................... 38
4.3.
Printed Copy Quality Problems ............ 260
1.8.
Sensors.................................................. 39
4.4.
Troubleshooting the LAN Interface....... 276
1.9.
Clutches and Switches........................... 40
4.5.
Error Codes (For Copier)...................... 284
1.10. PC Boards.............................................. 41
4.6.
Information Codes Table

(For Facsimile) ..................................... 299
Disassembly Instructions ..................... 42
4.7.
Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile) ........ 306
4.8.
Troubleshooting (For Printer) ............... 313
2.1.
General Disassembly............................. 42
2.2.
Disassembly Instructions ....................... 43
2.3.
Screw Identification Template.............. 123
Troubleshooting .................................. 258
Service Modes ..................................... 316
Maintenance, Adjustments, and Check

Points.................................................... 129
3.1.
Preventive Maintenance ...................... 129
3.2.
Required Tools..................................... 131
3.3.
Preventive Maintenance Points ........... 132
3.4.
Preventive Maintenance Check List..... 134
3.5.
Resetting the P/M

(Preventive Maintenance) Counter ...... 137
3.6.
Updating the Firmware......................... 138
3.7.
Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure

(Order) ................................................. 147
3.8.
Adjusting the Printer Registration,

LSU Image Side to Side....................... 153
3.9.
Calibrating the LCD.............................. 155
5.1.
Service Modes (For Copier) ................. 316
5.2.
Service Modes (For Facsimile)............. 349
System Description ............................. 378

6.1.
Copy Process ....................................... 378
6.2.
Precautions with Consumables ............ 379
6.3.
New Digital Image Control Qualitative

Reasoning Based Adaptive Controller
(New Digital QUANTUM)...................... 381
6.4.
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder

(i-ADF).................................................. 382
6.5.
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations..... 384
Installation............................................ 393
3.10. Signal Waveform.................................. 156

3.11. SC PC Board ....................................... 165
3.12. PNL1 PC Board ................................... 182
7.1.
Precautions During Set Up................... 393
7.2.
Unpacking ............................................ 396
7.3.
Installation Procedure........................... 397
Options, and Supplies......................... 405
3.13. ADF PC Board ..................................... 183

3.14. SPC PC Board ..................................... 193
3.15. DRV PC Board..................................... 217
3.16. ACD PC Board..................................... 233
3.17. NFL PC Board...................................... 235
3.18. DC PC Board ....................................... 236
8.1.
Service Notes Firmware Update for

PCL-IPX/SPX*1 or PS/PCL-IPX/SPX
Option Installation................................. 405
8.2.
Installing the Printer Controller Module

for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC800) ........... 409
8.3.
Installing the Multi Page Description

Language Controller Module for
PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-MC800) ........ 411
8.4.
Installing the Fax Communication Board

(DA-FG600)......................................... 413
8.5.
Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit

(DA-HD60)
(Except USA, and Canada) .................. 424
3.19. DCB PC Board..................................... 238

3.20. CCD PCB............................................. 240
3.21. LSU ...................................................... 241
3.22. PRCON PCB........................................ 242
3.23. HVPS ................................................... 243
3.24. LVPS.................................................... 244
12
Table of Contents
8.6.
Installing the DDS Unlock Module

(DA-UK10) ...........................................431
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail

Account Type (SMTP, or POP) ............ 557
8.7.
Installing the Accounting Software

(DA-WA10) ...........................................432
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

(DHCP) - Extended Feature ................. 558
8.8.
Installing the DD Server Software

(DA-WS20) ...........................................433
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications

(MDN) - Extended Feature ................... 561
8.9.
Installing the Sorting Image Memory

16/64/128 MB(DA-SM16B/64B/28B) ....434
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

(LDAP) - Extended Feature.................. 565
8.10. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory

Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048) .......436
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response

Mechanism POP (APOP)
- Extended Feature .............................. 566
8.11. Installing the System Console 1

(DA-DS603) / Console 2 (DA-DS604) ..437
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for

Authentication (SMTP Auth)
8.12. Installing the 3000-Sheet Tray

(DA-MA301)..........................................443
9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT

8.13. Installing the Letter / Legal Size Adapter

for 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-TK31)............446
8.14. Installing the Exit Tray (DA-XT600) ......452
Schematic Diagram ............................. 571
8.15. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600)455
10.1. General Circuit Diagram....................... 571
8.16. Installing the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch

Finisher (DA-FS605).............................466
Finisher Options .................................. 573
8.17. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP31).....479
11.1. DA-FS605, DA-FS600, DA-SP31......... 573
8.18. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330)484
11.2. DA-FS330 ............................................ 775
8.19. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch

Finisher (DA-FS355A) ..........................490
11.3. DA-FS355, DA-SP41 ........................... 813
8.20. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP41).....499

8.21. Installing the Printer Controller Module
for GDI-IPX/SPX (DA-GC601)
(Not Available in the USA/Canada) ......507
8.22. Installing the Finisher Power Supply
(DA-PW600) .........................................508
8.23. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit
(PJEEF2750PU) ...................................510
8.24. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater
(DZTQ000041)......................................512
8.25. Installing the Deluxe Stand
(DA1D351/DA-D352R)
for the USA/Canada only ......................520
8.26. Replacing the OPC Drum .....................523
General Network Information ............. 526

9.1.
Network Protocol ..................................526
9.2.
Layer Functions, and Technology.........528
9.3.
Network Layer.......................................532
9.4.
Transport Layer ....................................536
9.5.
Upper Layer ..........................................538
9.6.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) .543
9.7.
ITU T.37 and RFC2305 ........................544
9.8.
Communication Protocols.....................550
9.9.
POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)...553
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC...................556
13
DP-8060/8045/8035
1 Specifications Table
1.1.
Copy Function
Items
Basic Specifications
1 Type
2 Platen
3 Original Position
Platen
i-ADF
4 Recording Paper Path
5 Drum
6 Copy Process
7 Developing Process
8 Toner Recycle
9 Fusing System
10 Max Original Size
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
Remarks
DP-8035
Semi Console
Fixed
Left / Rear / Face Down
Left / Center / Face Up
Center
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)
Laser indirect Electrostatic
Dry Dual Component
No
Heat Roller type
Ledger (11 x 17 in) /
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
11 Paper Size
1st Paper Tray
(1,550 Sheet Paper Tray)
Paper Tray
Sheet Bypass
Sheet Bypass Envelope
12 Warm-up Time
13 First Copy Time

14 Copy Speed
Ledger / A3
Legal / B4, FLS
Letter-R
A4-R
LTR / A4
15 Zoom
Enlargement
Reduction
Zoom
LTR
A4
A4
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4 (FLS)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4 (FLS)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R
No
Less than
Less than
180 sec.
30 sec.
Less than
3.5 sec.
Less than
4.6 sec.
Less than
5.8 sec.
34 cpm
39 cpm
49 cpm
48 cpm
60 cpm
27 cpm
31 cpm
37 cpm
36 cpm
45 cpm
20 cpm
23 cpm
28 cpm
27 cpm
35 cpm
Selected Original size / Copy size

Selected Original size / Copy size
25 - 400%
14
For PU (USA/Canada, etc.)

For EU
For Other Destinations
For EU
For EU
75 F (20 C)
From Platen/ Letter/ A4
Portrait/ 1st Paper Tray.
The time period is after the
Start key is pressed, and
Paper is ejected.
1% Step
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
16 Maximum Tray Capacities
Paper Tray
Capacity
Auto Size Setting
Low Level Warning
Sheet Bypass
Capacity
Auto Size Setting
Paper Capacity
(Std. Configuration)
Max. Paper Capacity
17 Acceptable Paper Weight
Paper Tray
Sheet Bypass
Duplex
18 Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Duplex Type
Original Set
Scanning Method
Capacity (Original)
Description
DP-8060
DP-8045
DP-8035
Front loading universal Paper Tray
1,550 sheets x 1
550 sheets x 1
Yes (2nd Tray only)
Empty only
50 sheets
Yes
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
(L x W x H)
PU (USA/Canada, etc.)
LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
2,150 sheets
6,250 sheets
16-24 lb / 60-90 g/m2
14.6-34.6 lb / 55-130 g/m2
16-42 lb / 60-158 g/m2
Yes (Standard)
Face Up
Sheet Through
85 sheets (LTR)
70 sheets (A4)
SADF Mode
Free Stop
Multi Copy Range
Gradation
Text
Text / Photo
Photo
Resolution
Standard Sorting Memory
Size
Standard Page Memory Size
Exit Tray Capacity
Color
Dimensions
Remarks
Yes
Yes
1-999 sets
256 (Halftone by error diffusion)
256 scale
256 scale
600 dpi
LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
Available for single side
scanning only.
From 17 to 60 degrees.
Scanning and Printing.
32 MB
50 MB
250 sheets
No
29.8 x 23.6 x 35.4 in
(757 x 600 x 900 mm)
15
For Printing.
H: Up to i-ADF.
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
DP-8035
Remarks
27 Occupancy Area
29.8 x 46.7 in
(757 x 1,187 mm)
304 lb
298 lb
(138.0 kg)
(135.0 kg)
(L x W)
28 Weight
(Main Unit with i-ADF)
138.0 kg
Options
1 Paper Feed System
550 sheets x1 (3rd)
Paper Feed Module
Paper Size Detection
Low Level Paper Warning
Dimensions
Yes
<DA-DS604>
Manual (Control Panel)

Empty only
LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
28.7 x 23.6 x 11.4 in

(730 x 600 x 290 mm)
66 lb (30.0 kg)
Letter : 3,000 sheets
Letter-R : 2,500 sheets
Legal : 1,500 sheets
Empty only
Weight
3000 sheets
Paper Feed Module
Dimensions
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
<DA-MA301>
LTR / LGL : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
17.5 x 11.6 x 19.9 in

(445 x 295 x 505 mm)
17.5 x 17.4 x 19.9 in
(445 x 442 x 505 mm)
33 lb (15.0 kg)
(L x W x H)
Weight
2
3
4
5
6
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
Yes
(L x W x H)
With LTR-R / LGL Size

Adapter (DA-TK31)
With LTR-R / LGL Size
Adapter (DA-TK31)
42 lb (19.0 kg)
-
6,250 sheets
Yes
Yes
Yes
For EU, and

Other Destinations
LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
28.7 x 23.6 x 11.4 in

(730 x 600 x 290 mm)
64 lb (29.0 kg)
Weight
550 sheets x 2 (3rd/4th)
Paper Feed Module
Dimensions
<DA-DS603>

Empty only
(L x W x H)
Max. Paper Capacity

1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher
2-Bin Finisher
2-Bin Finisher
Counter
Key Counter Capability
135.0 kg
Includes Bypass Paper

Tray and exit Tray.
Yes
-
DA-FS355A
DA-FS330
DA-FS600
DA-FS605
Yes
7 Dehumidifier
Yes
16
Supplied as service part.

Part Number: DZTQ000041
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
8 Electronic Sorting Board
Optional Image Memory 1
(16 MB)
(64 MB)
(128 MB)
Features
1 Automatic Features
Auto Magnification Selection
Auto Paper Selection
Auto Density Control
Auto Paper Tray Selection
Description
DP-8060
DP-8045
DP-8035
Standard (32 MB)
Yes
Only one of three available

types can be installed.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Energy Saver Mode

Standby Mode
Energy Saver Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes (Approx. 20W)
Yes (Approx. 4W)
Shutdown Mode
Yes (Approx. 5W)
Remote Diagnostic
Machine Stops while Out of
Toner
2 Additional Features
Photo Mode
CODEC + 32 MB memory
Yes
Auto Start
Sleep Mode
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Empty only
Yes
Original Detection Release
Yes
Edit / Effects
Book Mode
Edge Mode
Margin Mode
X-Y Zoom
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page Numbering
Yes
Inverse Mode (Negative /

Positive)
Yes
17
Reservation while Power

On Initializing
Turns Off the Heater

Power.
NW Function available
For USA/Canada,
With Finisher Power Supply
NW Function not available
With Finisher Power Supply
NW Function not available
Requires the Fax
Communication Board
(DA-FG600) option.
Copier function
256-step (Gray Scale)

Manually overridden when
using the Original Size
keys.
25 - 400%
Available only when using
the ADF.
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
Centering Mode
Mirror Mode
Others (Inverting ADF &
ADU)
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
Yes
No
2-Page Copy Mode
Yes
2 in 1
4 in 1
6 in 1
8 in 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Booklet Mode
Duplex Copy
12
21
22
Book2
Book Format
Facing Pages
Image Rotation (90 degrees)
Electronic Sorting
Rotation Sorting
Insertion Job
Cover Mode
Page Insertion Mode
OHP Interleave Mode
Presentation Mode
Department Counter
Security Enhancement (CC)
i-ADF
Yes
Remarks
LDR LTR x 2
(A3 A4 x 2, B4 B5 x 2)
Copy from 4 single-sided

pages to 1 booklet mode
sheet.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (OP)
Multi Size Feed

SADF Mode
Original Counter
Job Memory
Job Time Display
Concurrent Copy
Tandem Copy Mode
Remote Copy Mode
Scan Once Print Many Mode
Job Complete Notice
Trial Copy Mode
Weekly Timer
User Mode
Interrupt
DP-8035
Yes
Yes
No
Yes (5)
No
Yes (12)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
18
Non-copy / Copy
300 Departments
Default Password: 00000000
LDR and LTR, LGL and
LTR-R, A3 and A4, B4 and
B5, A4-R and A5
HDD required
HDD required
HDD required
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
Electronic Counter
Digital Sky Shot Mode
Check / Slip Mode
3 Control Panel
Display
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
Yes
Yes
Yes
DP-8035
Remarks
Wide Touch Panel LCD
Status Lamp
Yes
Key
Original Size
Copy Size
Keypad
Clear
Stop
Start
Energy Saver
Function
Interrupt
Reset
One-Touch Key
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Mode Change
Yes
GREEN : Scanning /
Printing
RED
: Alarm / Warning
Copier / Printer / NW
Scanner / Fax, and Internet
Fax Mode change.
LCD Main Indication

Message Language
(Default)
Original Size / Image
Indication
Paper Size / Image
Indication
Paper Tray Selection
Selected Paper Tray
Status
Original Mode Selection
Copy Density Selection
Setting Confirmation
Zoom Magnification
Function Classification
Number of Copies
SADF / Multi Size Feed
Mode
Error Code
Finishing
Warning Indicators
Add Toner
English (American)
Specified Language

For EU, and Other
Destinations
Yes
(with Image)
Yes
(with Image)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
19
Text / Text-Photo / Photo
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
Toner Waste Container
Full
Add Paper (No Paper)
Add Paper
(Under 50 Sheets)
Paper Jam Indication
Paper Jam Location
Service Alert Call
User Error
Machine Error
History of Jam Errors
4 Main Unit
Total Counter
Max. Weight of Documents
on the Platen Glass
ADF with Document Guide
Clip Pocket
Operating Instructions
Pocket
Warning / Caution Label
5 Optical System
Original Detection Method
Scanning Method
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Standard)
Developer Life
Drum Life
Yes
Yes
Yes
Specified Language
Reflective Photo Sensor Type
600 dpi CCD
Supplied as a Service Part
Yes
No
Separate OPC Unit, and
Developer Unit Type
38K
37K
33K
240K
240K
240K
Dehumidifier
Yes
Manual Add Toner
Yes
Efficiency
1 Productivity
Warm-Up Time from
Standby
ADF Productivity (LTR / A4)
Inverting ADF
Mechanical Counter
11 lb (5 kg)
Mechanical Multi Copy

Mode
6 Process System
Toner
Remarks
Yes
Dehumidifier
Type
DP-8035
Less than
180 sec.
100%
20

For EU / Other Destinations

Manually adds toner to the
developer
(up to TDC threshold)
Less than
30 sec.
68 F (20 C)
Throughput
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
ADU Copy Productivity
(LTR / A4)
Transport Method
12
1 copy
5 copies
10 copies
PM Cycle
1 PM Cycle
Major PM
Minor PM (Cleaning)
Packing Configuration
1 Packing Dimension
(L x W x H)
2 Packing Weight
3 Accessories
OPC Unit
Developer
Toner
Outer Tray
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
2 Power Consumption
Ambient Conditions
1 Temperature
2 Relative Humidity
3 Safety
4 Energy Saver
5 EMI
6 EMC
Remarks
When ejecting to Outer
Tray
Stackless
45%
75%
90%
240K
120K
120K
-
A4 / Letter
Throughput
120K
-
35.8 x 28.5 x 42.9 in

(910 x 725 x 1090 mm)
348.3 lb
(158 kg)
155 kg
Yes
No
No
Yes
Option
Yes
Power Supply
1 Power Requirement
DP-8035

For EU, and
Other Destinations

For EU, and
Other Destinations
Yes
99 - 138 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz
Single phase
180 - 264 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz
Single phase
Less than 1.45 kW
50 - 80 F (10 - 30 C)
30 - 80%
UL60950 / CSA C22.2 No.60950
UL60950-1 / CSA C22.2 No.60950-1
120 VAC Power Supply

220 VAC Power Supply

For EU, and
Other Destinations
Energy Star Compliant

Class A computing device in FCC Rules
Part 15
EN55022 / EN55024
For EU
EN61000-3-2,-3
21
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.2.
1.2.1.
Fax, Printer, Network Scanner, and Internet Fax Functions

Fax Function
Items
Main Specifications
1 Compatibility
2 PSTN Line Port
3 Leased Line Port
4 V.24 Line Port
5 Modem Speed
6 Coding Scheme
7 ECM
8 Short Protocol
9 Transmission Speed
10 Communication Resolution
(pels/mm x lines/mm)
Scanner Mechanism
1 Scanning Device
2 Scanning Speed
Resolution
Std:
8 x 3.85
Fine:
8 x 7.7
S-Fine:
16 x 15.4
600dpi:
600 x 600
3 Scanning Resolution
(pel/mm x lines/mm)
4 Document Size (Max.)
5 Effective Scanning Width
6 A3 size TX / RX
7 Reduction XMT
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
DP-8035
G3
Yes
No
No
33.6 - 2.4 kbps
JBIG / MMR / MR / MH
Yes
Yes (B, D)
Approx. 3 sec.
Remarks
ITU-T Std. & Non-Std. (PCC)
1-Line Only
Conforms to ITU-T
ITU-T Image No. 1
(A4, Std. Resolution)
Transmission
Std.
8 x 3.85
Fine
8 x 7.7
S-Fine
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Reception
Std.
8 x 3.85
Fine
8 x 7.7
S-Fine
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
CCD (i-ADF / Platen)
Vertical
Horizontal
1.0 sec.
0.7 sec.
1.0 sec.
0.7 sec.
2.0 sec.
1.4 sec.
1.4 sec.
8 x 3.85
8 x 7.7
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
ADF: Ledger / A3
LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm)
Yes
A4, Scanned in Vertical, or

Horizontal Direction
2.0 sec.
Std.
Fine
S-Fine
Yes
22
Conforms to ITU-T A3
A3 to B4 / A3 to A4 / B4 to A4
Ledger to Legal / Ledger to
Letter / Legal to Letter
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
8 ADF/i-ADF
9 Collation Stack
Printer Mechanism
1 Recording Method
2 Recording Speed
3 Recording Resolution Fax
4 Recording Paper Size
5 Effective Printing Width

6 Recording Paper Capacity
7 Collation Stack
8 Consumables
Fax Memory
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
Yes
Yes
Ledger / Legal / Letter /

A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 / B5 / INV
11.4 in (289 mm)

2,150 sheets
Yes
Toner Bottle, Developer, and Staples
3 MB (180 pages)
2 Optional Memory
4 MB
8 MB
1 Address Book Dialing

2 Full Number Dialing
(Buffered Dialing)
3 Address Book Directory
Search Dialing
4 Total Auto Dialers
5 Program Dials
6 Max. Tel Number Digits
Remarks
Face-Up, feed from top page
Face Down
Laser Indirect Electrostatic

60 ppm
45 ppm
35 ppm
(Letter/A4
(Letter/A4
(Letter/A4
Horizontal) Horizontal) Horizontal)
600 x 600 dpi
1 Standard Memory
Dual Operation
1 Multi Task Operation
2 Direct XMT Reserve
3 Memory XMT Reserve
4 Number of Memory Job
Files
Dialing/Telephone Features
DP-8035
Invoice : Not supported.

Ledger size is transmitted as
A3 size for N. American
models. If A3 is received,
approx. 1" of image on both
edges are not printed on
Ledger size paper.
Conforms to ITU-T A3
Optional max. 6,250 sheets
Face Down
Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1

(A4, Std. Resolution)
Expansion Flash Memory
Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Max. 50 files)
200 Stations
Yes
Plus an additional 800 stations

available to select from, when
the optional Hard Disk Drive
(DA-HD60) is installed.
Max. 70 stations
Yes
270 Stations
12
36
23
200 Address Book + 70 Full

Number Dialing
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
7 Max. Station Name
Characters
8 Direct Dialing
(Monitor Dialing)
9 Automatic Redialing
10 Manual Redialing
11 Line Monitor Speaker
12 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial)
13 Pulse / Tone Dialing
14 Pulse to Tone Change
15 Flash Key
16 Handset
Transmission Features
1 Direct Transmission
2 Memory Transmission
3 Quick Memory
Transmission
4 Multi-Station Transmission
(Sequential Broadcasting)
5 Direct Deferred
Transmission
6 Deferred Transmission
7 Deferred Multi-Station
Transmission
8 Priority Direct
Transmission
9 Priority Memory
Transmission
10 Batch Transmission
11 90 Degree Rotation
Transmission
12 Cover Sheet
13 Confidential Mail Box
14 Multi-Copy Transmission
15 Memory Back-Up
16 Duplex Scanning
Reception Features
1 Substitute Reception
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
DP-8035
Remarks
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Voice mode
Available for Line-1 only

In Monitor Dialing mode only
10 pps / DTMF
Page Retransmission
Yes
Yes
Max. 270 Stations
No
ADF Deferred Transmission
Yes
Max. 50 Timers
Yes
Yes
Priority ADF Transmission
No
Yes
Real Time (up to 5 Files)
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
FAX : Back-up with Flash

Memory.
Copy / Printer : No Back-up
with SD-RAM
With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Yes
2 Fixed Reduction
Yes
3 Auto Reduction
Yes
24
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
(in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
(in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
4 Overlap Printing
5 Receive to Memory
6 Distinctive Ring Detector
(DRD)
7 90 Degree Rotation
Reception
8 Duplex Printing
Polling
1 Polling
2 Turnaround Polling
3 Multi-Station Polling
4 Deferred Polling
5 Deferred Multi-Station
Polling
6 Direct Polling Tx
7 Memory Polling Tx
8 Preset Polling Password
9 Temporary Polling
Password
10 Continuous Polling
Convenience
1 Panel Display
2 Voice Contact
3 Edit File Mode
4 Incomplete File Save
5 Automatic Cover Sheet
Certainty
1 Verification Stamp
2 Header / Total Page Print
3 Transaction Journal
4 Comm. Journal
5 Last Ind. XMT Journal
List Printouts
1 One-Touch List
2 ABBR. No. List
3 Program List
4 Address Book Search List
5 Fax Parameter List
6 File List
7 Ind. XMT Journal
8 Journal
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
Remarks
DP-8035
Yes
Page End Approx. 0.51 in

(13 mm)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Max. 270 Stations

Max. 50 Timers
Yes
Max. 50 Timers / 270 Stations
No
Yes
Yes
1 File
Yes
Yes
Wide Touch Panel Display
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
With View Mode

With View Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
25
200 Transactions / with View

Mode
With Image Data
Auto Dialer List

With View Mode
Last 200 Transactions
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
Identifications
1 Logo
2 Multiple Logo
3 Character ID
4 Numeric ID
Special Communications
1 Password XMT / RCV
2 Selective Reception
3 Relay XMT Request
4 Relay XMT Center
5 Confidential XMT / Polling
6 Confidential Center
7 Mailbox XMT / Polling
8 Mailbox Center
9 File XMT
10 Fax Forward
11 Sub-address XMT
12 Sub-address RCV
13 OMR-XMT
Standards
1 PSTN
Others
1 Fax Access Code
2 PIN Code Access
3 Department Code
4 Power Saver Mode
5 Self Diagnostic Function
6 Remote Diagnostic
Function
7 Check & Call Function
8 V.24 / Encryption Interface
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
DP-8035
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
FCC Part 68: / Industry Canada
No. CS-03: Issue 9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
26
Remarks
25 Characters
16 Characters
20 Digits
TSI Check
Received File Transfer

(Only with Internet Fax Option)
T. Routing
For USA and Canada only
For USA and Canada only

300 Departmental Codes
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.2.2.
Printer Function
Items
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F
2 LAN (Network)
3 USB Port
4 IEEE-1394
Printer Function
1 Printing Size
2
3
4
5
Bypass
Stapling
Printing Resolution (dpi)
Interface
6 OS
7 GDI
8 PDL (PCL6)
9 PDL (PS3)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Duplex Printing
Collation Stack
Status Monitor (Local)
Network Printing
Network Status Monitor
Smoothing
Applicable PC
Multi-Task Operation
Printing while Fax-XMT
from Memory
Printing while Fax-RCV into
Memory
Fax-XMT from Memory
while Printing
Fax-RCV into Memory while
Printing
18 Output to separate tray for
Printing, Fax, Copy
19 Font
20 Security Print
Mailbox
Secure Mailbox
21 Completion Notice
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
DP-8035
Centronics Parallel Interface

Ethernet 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX
No
No
Remarks
IEEE-1284 Compliant
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Invoice, A3, A4,

A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4
Yes
Yes
600 x 600
Selectable, 600 dpi Printer
Centronics Parallel Interface/Ethernet
Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 /
Win 2000 / XP / Windows Server 2003
Yes
Requires Optional PCL6
Yes
Emulation Kit
Requires Optional PS / PCL6
Yes
Emulation Kit
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
IBM PC, AT or Compatible
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
27
Requires Optional PCL6, or PS

/ PCL6 Emulation Kit
Requires Optional HDD Unit
Max. 100 Boxes
Max. 50 File
Auto Pop-up on the PC Screen
(requires Job Status Utility installed with Panasonic-DMS
Software)
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.2.3.
Network Scanner Function
Items
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F
2 LAN (Network)
3 USB Port
4 IEEE-1394
Network Scanning Function
1 Scanning Device
2 Halftone
3 Max. Document Size
DP-8060
Description
DP-8045
No
Ethernet 10Base-T/
100Base-TX
No
No
CCD (i-ADF / Platen)

256 Halftone Shades
A3, Ledger
600 x 600
300 x 300
(dpi)
150 x 150
Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 /
5 OS
Win 2000 / XP / Windows Server 2003
6 2-Sided Scanning
Yes
7 File Format
Mult-page TIFF / PDF
8 Protocol
TCP/IP, Non-Std
Network Scanner Address Features
1 Network Registration
120
2 Touch Panel Registration
60
28
Remarks
DP-8035
IEEE-1284 Compliant
Firewire
With Error Diffusion

Selectable, 600 dpi Optical
Scanner
With i-ADF.
With Error Diffusion
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.2.4.
Internet Fax Function
Items
Main Specifications
1 Communication
Protocols
2 Max. Modem Speed
3 Coding Scheme
4 File Format
5 Line Interface
Scanner Mechanism
1 Max. Document Size
2 Effective Scanning Width
(pel/mm x lines/mm)
Printer Mechanism
1 Printing Resolution
2 Effective Recording
Width
Transmission Features
Description
DP-8060 DP-8045 DP-8035
TCP / IP
SMTP / MIME
NA
MH / MMR / JBIG
Mult-page TIFF / PDF
RJ-45 (Ethernet)
Ledger, A3
11.4 in (289 mm)
Std
203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine
203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Selectable (PDF format can be used for

Scan-to-Email when sending to a PC.
However, since current Internet Fax
standards do not support this file
format, it cannot be used for sending to
another Internet Fax machine)
Ethernet LAN
LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 Scanning

Resolution is available with
Parameter setting
600 dpi
11.4 in (289 mm)
1 Multi-Task Operation
Yes
2 Memory Transmission
3 Sequential Multi-Station
Transmission
Yes
4 Simultaneous MultiStation Transmission
Remarks
Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax, and

LAN is available
Max. 270 Stations

(200 Address Book + 70 Full Number
Dialing)
Yes
5 Sender Selection
6 G3 / Email Mixed
Broadcasting
7 Deferred Transmission
Yes
Yes
8 Fax Forward
Yes
9 Sub-address RCV
Yes
Yes
Received File Transfer, only with
Internet FAX Option
Inbound Routing, only with Internet
FAX Option
29
DP-8060/8045/8035
Items
10 Mail Header
Email Header Print
Selection
Subject Line
LAN Features
1 Internet Fax
Communication
2 Internet Mail Reception
3 Internet Fax Server
Features
Internet Fax Relay XMT
Email Relay MXT
Received Fax / Email
Forward
PC to FAX Transmission
Inbound Routing
4
5
6
7
Address Book
Registration from PC
I-Fax Parameters
Registration via Email
Internet Delivery
Confirmation
Network Scanning
Network Printing
LPR / LPD
GDI
PDL
8 DHCP Client
9 LDAP
10 TIFF Viewer
Certainty
1 Comm. Journal
(w / Image)
ID
1 Email Address
Description
DP-8060 DP-8045 DP-8035
Yes
Remarks
All or From / To / Subject only
Random Entry
A3 Communication is available with
Parameter setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Internet Fax Internet Fax G3FAX

PC Internet Fax G3FAX
Yes
Local print available
Yes
Requires Panafax Desktop Software

Using Sub-Address
Local print available
Yes
Yes
Via Email
Yes
Yes
With MDN
Yes
600 dpi
Yes
Yes
600 dpi
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS
Emulation Kit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer
Email from RCV side to Panasonic
Internet FAX's only
Yes
Yes
30
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.3.
System Combination
31
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.4.
Options and Supplies List
1. Options
Option Name
Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/

SPX
Multi Page Description Language

Controller Module for PS/PCL6-IPX/SPX
DDS Unlock Module

Printer Controller Module for GDI-IPX/SPX
Document Distribution System (DDS)
Network Scanner Module
Internet Fax / E-Mail Module
Fax Communication Board
Hard Disk Drive Unit
Image Memory (16 MB)
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB
DD Server Software
Accounting Software
Data Security Kit
Deluxe Stand
Deluxe Stand (Short)
System Console 1 (Tray x 1)
System Console 2 (Tray x 2)
3000-Sheet Tray (LCT)
Letter-R / Legal Size Adapter
for LCT (DA-MA301)
Exit Tray (Outer)
2-Bin Finisher
Punch Unit for DA-FS600/605
Punch Unit for DA-FS355A
2-Bin Finisher
Option Number
Remark
DA-PC800
For PU version only (USA/Canada, etc.)

Program Expansion Board (FRM8) is
included with DA-PC800 options. The
PCL Firmware is included on the FRM8
board, therefore, firmware update is not
required.
DA-MC800

Program Expansion Board (FRM8) is
included with DA-MC800 options. The
PCL Firmware is not included on the
FRM8 board, therefore, firmware update
is required.
DA-UK10
DA-GC601
DA-WR10
DA-FG600
DA-HD60
DA-SM16B
DA-SM64B
DA-SM28B
UE-410047
UE-410048
DA-WS20
DA-WA10
DA-SC01
DA1D351
DA-D352R
DA-DS603
DA-DS604
DA-MA301
Except PU (USA/Canada, etc.)

Std. for DP-8060/8045/8035
Std. for DP-8060/8045/8035
G3 Fax Communication
Except PU (USA/Canada, etc.)
For Electronic Sorting
Additional Page Memory for Fax
Communication Board (DA-FG600)
For DD Server Function
For Accounting Function
For Specified Destinations
For USA, and Canada only
3,000-Sheet Large Capacity Tray
DA-TK31
For USA and Canada
DA-XT600
DA-FS600
DA-FS605
DA-SP31
DA-FS355A
DA-SP41
DA-FS330
Optional Power Supply (LVPS) for Finisher DA-PW600
32
For DP-8060/8045
For DP-8045/8035
For DP-8035
For PU (USA/Canada, etc.) : Std.
For PK, PT : Option
For PB and Other Destinations :
DP-8060/8045 : Std.
DP-8035 : Option
DP-8060/8045/8035
Option Name
Key Counter Harness Kit
Dehumidifier Heater
Option Number
Remark
PJEEF2750PU
DZTQ000041
Note:
PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
PS/PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.
2. Supplies
Part Name
Toner
Staple Cartridge
OPC Drum
Developer
Part Number
DQ-TU38R (PU)
DQ-TU37R (PB)
FQ-SS32
DQ-SS35
FQ-SS50
FQ-SS66
DQ-H360R
DQ-Z240R
Remarks
DP-8060/8045/8035 : 38K (Letter / 6%)
DP-8060 : 37K (A4 / 6%)
DA-FS330 : Staple Cartridge Refills (3)
DA-FS355/355A : Staple Cartridge Refills (3)
DA-FS605 (Saddle Stitch) : Staple Cartridge
Refills (3)
DA-FS605 / 600 : Staple Cartridge Refills (3)
240K
240K
Note:
The Part Number(s) may differ for other than PU (USA/Canada, etc.) destinations. Please ask your sales
company for details.
33
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.5.
External View
1. Standard Configuration
34
DP-8060/8045/8035
29.8 in (757 mm)
2. With Optional System Console Configuration
46.0 in (1169 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)
35
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.5.1.
Serial Number Contents
The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:
36
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.6.
Control Panel
DP-8060/8045/8035
Note1:
Model availability may differ as per destination. Please ask your sales company for details.
Note2:
LCD Display Brightness Adjustment
To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "Clear" key, keep
pressing the "Original Size", or the "Copy Size" key until the desired brightness is achieved.
Original Size : Dimmer
Copy Size
: Brighter
37
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.7.
Fans and Motors
38
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.8.
Sensors
39
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.9.
Clutches and Switches
40
DP-8060/8045/8035
1.10. PC Boards
41
DP-8060/8045/8035
2 Disassembly Instructions
2.1.
General Disassembly
Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.
Scanner Unit
2.2.4.
i-ADF
2.2.3.
LSU
2.2.12.
Control Panel Unit

2.2.5.
Sheet Bypass Unit

2.2.14.
Paper Exit Transportation

2.2.15.
Drive Unit
2.2.17.
Fuser Unit
2.2.11.
Paper Feed Module

2.2.13.
ADU
2.2.9.

2.2.19.
Corona Unit 2
2.2.10.
Drum Unit
2.2.8.
Hopper Unit
2.2.6.
Developer Unit
2.2.7.
System Console
2.2.18.
Filters
2.2.1.

2.2.2.
42
PC Boards
2.2.16.
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.
2.2.1.
Disassembly Instructions
Filters
(1) Turn the Power Switches to the OFF position.
(2) Disconnect the AC Power Cord (4911).
(3) Open the Right Cover.
(4) Remove 3 Screws (S6).
(5) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (117).
(6) Remove the Ozone Filter 1 (4204).
(7) Remove the Ozone Filter 6 (136) .
(8) Remove the Dust Filter Cover (4217).
43
DP-8060/8045/8035
(9) Remove the Dust Filter (4218) by pulling the

strip out.
(10) Remove the Ozone Filter 2 Cover (106).
<For PU version only (USA/Canada, etc.) >

(11) Remove the Ozone Filter 2 (107).
<For Euro, and Other Destinations>

(12) Remove the Ozone Filter 2 (4229) by pulling the
strip out.
44
DP-8060/8045/8035
<For Euro, and Other Destinations only>

(13) Remove 8 Screws (S6), and Remove 1
Screw (Y22).
(14) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (110).
(15) Remove the V-Ozone Filter 4 (4226) by pulling

the strip out.
(16) Remove 2 Screws (X5).
(17) Pull the Rear Frame 2 (3910), and remove the

V-Ozone Filter 7 (4228) by pulling the strip out.
Note:
To prevent Rear Frame 2 from warping, do not pull
hard on it.
45
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.2.

(3) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (117).
(4) Remove the Toner Waste Container (4108).
46
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.3.
Inverting-Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) Unit

(1) Lift up the Original Tray Assembly.
(2) Clean the Exit Roller (814).
(3) Open the ADF Cover.
(4) Clean the Pickup Roller (511), Paper Feed

Roller (508), Separation Roller (610), and
Registration Roller 1 (817) with a soft cloth,
saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(5) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).
47
DP-8060/8045/8035
(6) Remove the Paper Feed Roller Shaft (505)

Assembly in the arrow direction.
(7) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (508).
(8) Move the Pickup Bracket.

(9) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H7).
(10) Remove the Pickup Roller Shaft (510).

(11) Remove the Pickup Roller (511).
48
DP-8060/8045/8035
(12) Remove 3 Screws (Y37).

(13) Remove the Lower Opening, and Shutting
Guide 1 (601).
(14) Remove the Separation Roller Assembly.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Snap Ring is
installed properly as illustrated.
49
DP-8060/8045/8035
(16) Remove the Separation Roller Shaft (607).

(17) Remove the Separation Roller (610).
Note:
When reassembling the Separation Roller, make
sure that the Yellow Tooler's Die on the side of the
roller is positioned as illustrated (facing the Front
Frame).
(18) Lift the Lower Opening, and Shutting Guide 2

Assembly.
(19) Clean the Inverting Roller (809) with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(20) Open the ADF Unit.

(21) Remove 2 Screws (H5).
(22) Remove the ADF Front Cover (418).
(23) Close the ADF Unit.
Note:
Release 3 Latch Hooks to remove the ADF Front
Cover.
50
DP-8060/8045/8035
(24) Remove 1 Screw (J2).

(25) Loosen 3 Screws (S6).
(27) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (627).

(29) Remove the Jam Release Bracket (632).
(30) Remove 1 Screw (X5).

(31) Remove the Front ADF Cover Bracket (529).
(32) Release the ADF Cover Arm (624).

(33) Remove the ADF Cover Assembly (502).
51
DP-8060/8045/8035
Note:
When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly, make
sure that the Vibration Guide Sheet 1, and 2 are
reinstalled properly as illustrated.

(35) Remove the Registration Guide 2 (721).
(36) Clean the Registration Roller 2 (818).
(37) Remove the Snap Ring (G6).

(38) Remove the D8 Bearing (822).
52
DP-8060/8045/8035
(39) Remove 1 Screw.

(40) Loosen 1 Screw.
(41) Remove the Registration Limiter Plate (828)
as illustrated.
(42) Remove the Limiter Joint (827).

(43) Remove the Torque Limiter (829).
(44) Remove the Registration Joint (826).
(45) Remove 2 Snap Rings (G6).

(46) Remove the Clutch 1 (801).
(47) Remove the D8 Bearing (822).
53
DP-8060/8045/8035
(48) Remove the Registration Roller 2 (818).
(49) Remove 2 Registration Guide Sheets 1 (1119),

and 2 Registration Guide Sheets 2 (1120).
Caution:
Do not remove the 3 indicated Screws.
Note:
When reinstalling the Registration Guide Sheet 1,
and 2, make sure that the Sheets are placed on
the marks as illustrated.
Mark
Adhesive Double
Coated Tape
Registration
Guide Sheet
54
DP-8060/8045/8035
(50) Open the Lower Opening, and Shutting Guide

Assembly.
(52) Nudge the Inverting Guide Assembly towards
the right side to open it.

(54) Remove the Inverting Guide Assembly.

(56) Remove the Lower Exit Guide (716).
(57) Clean the Transport Roller (816).
55
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.4.
2.2.4.1.
Scanner Unit
Scanner Lamp, CCD Assembly
(1) Move the Scanning Lamp to the position where
it can be replaced. (See Sect. 5.1.7. F8-00.)
(3) Remove the Right Platen Cover (112).
(4) Remove the Glass Assembly (120).
(5) Remove 2 Lamp Holding Plates (1204).

(6) Release the Harness from the Clamp.
56
DP-8060/8045/8035
<Turn the Inverter PC Board Case upside down>

(8) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Inverter PC
Board (1209).

(10) Remove the Inverter PC Board (1209).
(11) Remove the Scanning Lamp (1228).
Note:
Ensure that the Scanning Lamp Harness is
reinstalled properly as illustrated.
57
DP-8060/8045/8035

(13) Remove the CCD Cover (1213).
(14) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the CCD PC Board

(CN850, and CN851).
Important:
Before proceeding, make a note of the position of
the alignment pointer. If the CCD is not reinstalled
at the same position, it will affect the copy quality.

(16) Remove the CCD Unit (1234).
58
DP-8060/8045/8035

(18) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Sensors.
(19) Remove 2 Multi Beam Sensors (1309).
Note:
1. Do not touch the surface of the Sensors with
your hands.
2. Clean any dirt, or fingerprints with a Dry Cotton
Swab.
3. Do not use Isopropyl Alcohol / any Alcohol.
(21) Disconnect the Harness on the Sensor.
(22) Remove the Multi Beam Sensor (1309).
(23) Clean the Mirror 1 (1202), and Mirror 2 (1214).

Note:
1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your
hands.
2. Clean any dirt, or fingerprints with a Dry Cotton
Swab.
3. Do not use Isopropyl Alcohol / any Alcohol.
59
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.4.2.
Scanning Motor
(1) Remove 8 Screws (S6), and remove 1
Screw (Y22).
(2) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (110).

(4) Remove the Harness Clamp 2 (3501).
(5) Disconnect the ADF Harness.

Note:
When reinstalling the ADF, take note of the
connector position, and its keys. Insert it gently,
and do not force the connector if it is facing the
wrong way.

(7) Remove 2 Screws (P4).
(8) Remove the ADF Unit.
60
DP-8060/8045/8035

(10) Remove the Left Platen Cover (111).
(12) Remove the Right Platen Cover (112).
(13) Remove 2 Screws (N6).

(15) Remove the Rear Platen Cover (113).
(16) Disconnect the Harness.

(18) Remove the Scanning Motor (1325).
61
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.5.
Control Panel Unit

(1) Open the Front Cover.
(2) Swing the Hopper Unit in the direction of the

arrow as illustrated.

(4) Remove the Battery Holder (338).
(5) Replace the Battery (339).

(6) Reinstall the Battery Holder, and
fasten it with 1 Screw.
62
DP-8060/8045/8035
CAUTION
Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
* THIS
PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE.
IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN
INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL
SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.
Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.
NOTICE: California only

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special
handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Avertissement
CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE AU LITHIUM. REMPLACEZ UNIQUEMENT AVEC LE MME TYPE DE PILE
OU UN TYPE QUIVALENT. UNE UTILISATION OU UN REMPLACEMENT IMPROPRE POURRAIT CAUSER
UNE SURCHARGE, UNE RUPTURE OU UNE EXPLOSION RSULTANT EN DES BLESSURES OU UN
INCENDIE. DBARASSEZ-VOUS DES PILES USES EN RESPECTANT LA RGLEMENTATION LOCALE SUR
LA MISE AU REBUT DES DCHETS SOLIDES.

(8) Remove the Lower Control Panel Cover (101).
(9) Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down.
63
DP-8060/8045/8035
(10) Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board

(CN220, CN221, CN222, and CN224).
(12) Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board

(CN223, CN225, CN229, and CN230).

(14) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (8503).
(15) Disconnect the Harness on the PNL2 PC Board

(CN251).
64
DP-8060/8045/8035

(19) Remove the Upper Control Panel Cover (322).
(20) Disconnect the Harness on the INV PC Board

(CN2).
(22) Remove the INV PC Board (329).


65
DP-8060/8045/8035
(27) Remove 4 Screws (H4).

(28) Remove the LCD Module (328).
(29) Remove the Touch Panel (327).

Note:
Reinstall the Battery Holder after reassembling the
Lower Control Panel Cover.
66
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.6.
Hopper Unit
(1) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side.
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Rotate the Toner Bottle counter-clockwise, and
remove it.
(4) Clean any toner residue from the Lower Hopper

Cover (1411).

(6) Release 2 Latch Hooks, and remove the Motor
Cover (1413).
(7) Disconnect the Harness on the Hopper Motor.
67
DP-8060/8045/8035

(9) Remove the Hopper Motor (1423).
68
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.7.
Developer Unit
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Remove 1 Screw (Y37).
(4) Remove the Connector Cover (3930).

(6) Pull the Developer Release Lever (3823) out,
and turn it clockwise.
(7) Remove the Developer Unit (1632).
(8) Remove the Developer Exchange Knob
(1405).
(9) Remove the old Splash Prevention Sheet

(1602).
Note:
When attaching the new Sheet, make sure that it is
aligned on the left side edge as illustrated.
69
DP-8060/8045/8035
(10) Release 3 Latch Hooks, and remove the Upper

Developer Cover (1601).
<Removing the old Developer, and Toner>

(11) Install the Developer Exchange Knob (1405).
(12) Turn the Developer Unit upside down over a
suitable container, and dump the used
Developer, and Toner by rotating the Knob.
(13) Remove the Duct Cover (1620).
(14) Clean the Duct Cover (1620) with a soft cloth,

saturated with water.
70
DP-8060/8045/8035
(15) Clean the Developer Unit (1632) with a dry soft

cloth.
Caution:
Clean the Developer, and Toner residue from the
encircled areas thoroughly as shown in the
illustrations.
If not properly cleaned, problems related to static
charge may occur.
If E3-13 occurs, clean contamination on the Bias
Terminal.
71
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.8.
Drum Unit
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
and turn it clockwise.
(4) Turn the Lifting Lever (2327) counter-clockwise.
(5) Loosen 1 Screw, and remove the Drum Unit.
Note:
When handling the Drum Unit, hold by the Handle
as illustrated.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.
Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight, or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).
<Removing the Old Separators>

(6) Turn the Drum Unit upside-down as illustrated.
72
DP-8060/8045/8035
Caution:
(7) Cover the Drum with 2 sheets of white paper as
illustrated.
(8) Remove 3 Split Lock Washers (1825).
(9) Remove 3 Separators (1826) by unhooking the

spring as illustrated.
Note:
When installing the Separators, hook the springs
by using a Tweezer, or a Small Screw Driver.
<Removing the Old OPC Drum>

(11) Remove the Corona Unit (1851).
(See steps (20 ~ 23), for cleaning instructions)
Caution:
73
DP-8060/8045/8035
(12) Release 2 Latch Hooks, and remove the Frame

Cover (1805).

(14) Remove the Front Fixation Plate (1822).
(15) Turn the Front Drum Bushing (1820)

counter-clockwise, and remove it.

(17) Remove the Rear Fixation Plate (1844).
74
DP-8060/8045/8035
(18) Turn the Rear Drum Bushing (1842) clockwise,

and remove it.
(19) Remove the OPC Drum (1811).
(20) Remove the Blade Pressure Spring (1807).

(22) Remove the Cleaning Blade (1847) Assembly.
75
DP-8060/8045/8035
Note:
When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade Assembly,
make sure that the Hooks are properly attached.
(23) Release 4 Latch Hooks, and remove the Front,

and Rear Cleaning Felt (1849, 1848)
Assemblies.
<Cleaning the Density Sensor>
(24) Clean the Density Sensor (CDS PC Board)
(1846) with a dry cloth.
<For DP-8060 only>

Perform step (25) first, then skip to step (28).
<For DP-8045/8035>
Proceed from step (26) onward.
(26) Pull the CL Lever (1955).
76
DP-8060/8045/8035
(28) Turn the Corona Unit upside down.

(29) Push-in the Grid Base (1910) to unlatch, and
remove the Corona Grid (1919).
(30) Clean the Corona Grid (1919) with a soft cloth,

saturated with isopropyl alcohol
(31) Remove the Front, and Rear Block Sheets

(1911, and 1920).
(32) Remove the Corona Wire (1915), and the

Tension Spring (1914).
77
DP-8060/8045/8035
(33) Remove the Cleaning Base 3 (1918).

(34) Replace the Cleaning Pad Assy (1957).
(35) Clean the Corona Case (1906) with a soft cloth,

or a cotton swab, saturated with isopropyl
alcohol.
78
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.9.
Auto Duplex Unit (ADU)

(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Turn the Lifting Lever (2327) counter-clockwise.
(4) Pull the ADU Unit out.
Note:
Clean the Guide Sheet (3932) with a soft Dry
Cloth. If the print is dirty.
(5) Clean the Exit Rollers A, B, and C (2520, 2521,

2522).
79
DP-8060/8045/8035

(7) Remove the Intermediate Paper Guide (2404).
(8) Clean the Intermediate Roller (2403).
(9) Clean the Registration Roller (2430).
(10) Pull out the 1st Paper Tray.

(12) Remove the Right Lock Plate (3810).
80
DP-8060/8045/8035

(14) Remove the Left Lock Plate (3812).
(15) Remove the ADU Unit (2351).

(17) Remove the Lifting Lever (2327).
(19) Remove the Registration Release Knob
(2328).
(21) Remove the Inner Cover (2332).
(22) Remove 2 Registration Guide Springs (2409),

and 2 Front Registration Springs (2413).
(23) Remove the Upper Registration Guide (2402).
81
DP-8060/8045/8035

(26) Remove the Clutch (2602).
Note:
Ensure the wire terminal is secured on the gear
frame to prevent shorting of the clutch harness.
(27) Remove the Registration Gear (2344).

(28) Remove 2 Snap Rings (K9).
(29) Remove the 2 Bearings (822).

(31) Remove 2 E-Rings (J7).

(32) Remove the Intermediate Roller Gear (2621).
(33) Remove 2 Bearings (2603).
82
DP-8060/8045/8035
(35) Open the Under Registration Guide (2416).

(37) Remove the Under Registration Guide (2416).
(38) Remove the Registration Roller (2430).

(39) Remove the Intermediate Roller (2403).
83
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.10. Corona Unit 2

(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Pull out the ADU Unit. (See Sect. 2.2.9.)
(4) Remove the Corona Unit 2 (2352).
(5) Remove the Front, and Rear Block Sheets

(2307, 2303).
(6) Remove the Tension Spring (2339).

(7) Remove the Corona Wire 1 (2335).
(8) Remove the Tension Spring (1914).
(9) Remove the Corona Wire 2 (2334).

84
DP-8060/8045/8035
<For DP-8060 only>

Follow the steps (12) ~ (14) below.
(13) Pull out the LED PC Board (2343).
(14) Remove the LED Knob (2319).
85
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.11.
Fuser Unit
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Open the Upper Exit Cover.
(4) Push the Release Lever (8136) down in order to

free the Exit Guide 7 (8126).

(6) Remove the Fuser Cover (121).
(7a) Disconnect 4 Harnesses. (For DP-8060/8045)

(7b) Disconnect 5 Harnesses. (For DP-8035)
(9) Remove the Fuser Unit (2035).
86
DP-8060/8045/8035
(10) Release the Harnesses from Hooks.
(11) Remove 2 Screws (K1).

(12) Remove the Cleaning Web Unit.

(14) Remove the Rear Cleaning Web Frame (2002).
(15) Remove the Cleaning Web Roller (2007) (Red).

(16) Remove the Cleaning Web (2003) (White).
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Cleaning
Web is spread out.
87
DP-8060/8045/8035

(18) Remove the Ground Plate 3 (2214).
(19) Remove 1 Screw (K1).
(20) Remove the Lower Paper Exit Guide (2213).
(21) Remove 2 Lower Separator Springs (2210).

(22) Remove 4 Lower Separators (2228).
Note:
Clean 4 Lower Separators (2228) with a soft dry
cloth.

(24) Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide (2223).

(26) Remove the Upper Separator Bracket (2120).
88
DP-8060/8045/8035
(27) Remove 5 Tension Springs (2219).

(28) Remove 5 Upper Separators (2227).
Note:
Clean 5 Upper Separators (2227) with a soft dry
cloth.
<For DP-8060/8045>
Follow steps (29) ~ (31) below.
(31) Remove the Rear Fuser Cover (2031).
<For DP-8035 only>

(34) Remove the Rear Fuser Cover (2031).

Note:
Remove 3 Screws (Y53) (DP-8035 only).
89
DP-8060/8045/8035
(37) Remove 2 Fuser Lamps (2027, 2028).

Note:
1. Do not touch the glass portion of the Fuser
Lamps with bare hands. Grease from finger
prints will shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl
alcohol to clean finger prints.
2. When reinstalling, install the longer harness
toward the rear side.
(38) Release the Harness from Hooks.

(40) Loosen 1 Screw inside of the Jam Release Knob
by turning clockwise.
(41) Remove the Jam Release Knob (2022).
Note:
The Jam Release Knob, and Screw are
assembled.

(43) Remove the Front Fuser Cover (2021).
<For DP-8060/8045>
(46) Remove the Thermostat Base (2034).
90
DP-8060/8045/8035

(48) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (2019).
(49) Remove 1 Screw (B2).

(50) Remove the Upper Front Guide (2102).
(52) Remove the Lower Front Guide (2113).
<For DP-8035 only>

(54) Remove the Thermostat Base (2034).

(56) Remove 2 Thermistor Assemblies (2019)
(2037).
91
DP-8060/8045/8035
(57) Remove 2 Screws (B2).

(58) Remove the Upper Front Guide (2102).
(60) Remove the Lower Front Guide (2113).

(63) Remove the Upper Fuser Bracket (2115).
(64) Remove the Fuser Roller (2105).
(65) Remove the Fuser Roller Gear (2108), 2 Fuser

Roller Bearings (2107), and 2 Insulation
Bushings (2106).
Note:
Before removing, note the position, and/or
direction of the Gear, Bearings, and the Bushings
for proper reinstallation.
92
DP-8060/8045/8035
(66) Remove the Pressure Roller (2205).
93
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.12. LSU
(1) Open the Sheet Bypass.
(4) Remove the LSU Cover (115).
(5) Remove the Right Platen Cover.

(See Sect. 2.2.4.)
(7) Remove the LSU Shield Bracket (4009).
(8) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.

(9) Remove the Glass Assembly (120).
(See Sect. 2.2.4.)
Important:
Before proceeding, make a note of the position of
the alignment pointer. If the LSU is not reinstalled
at the same position, it will affect the scanning
quality.
94
DP-8060/8045/8035
(10) Remove 3 Screws (L1).
Note: DP-8060/8035 only

The LSU and the Ground Harness are fixed
together with 1 screw.
When re-installing the LSU, secure the LSU and
Ground Harness together with 1 screw.
(11) Remove the LSU (4030).
(12) Turn the LSU upside down.

(13) Clean the LSU Glass with a soft cloth, saturated
with isopropyl alcohol.
95
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.13. Paper Feed Module

(1) Open the Right Cover (2908).
(2) Clean the Intermediate Rollers (3005, 3010)
with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(4) Remove the Right Cover (2908).

(5) Push the Pin, and remove the Right Cover
(2908).
(6) Pull out the 1st, and 2nd Paper Trays.

96
DP-8060/8045/8035
(9) Remove the 1st Paper Feed Module.

(11) Remove the Front Feed Guide (3122).
(12) Remove the Bushing 2 (208), and One Way

Clutch (3205).
(13) Lift the Reverse Roller (3219) Assembly, and

remove the Feed Roller (3204).
97
DP-8060/8045/8035

Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Latches, and
the Notches are aligned as illustrated.

(17) Remove the Reverse Roller (3219).
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Gears are
aligned, and that the Snap Ring is reinstalled
properly as illustrated.
98
DP-8060/8045/8035

(20) Remove the 2nd Paper Feed Module.

Note:
Follow the instructions for steps (10)~(17) of the
1st Paper Feed Module.
(21) Remove the Snap Ring (G6).

(22) Remove the 3 Intermediate Roller (3005, 3010)
Assemblies.
(23) Remove the Bearing (2603).

(24) Remove the E-RIng (K5).
(25) Remove the Coupling Roller (3001).
99
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.14. Sheet Bypass Unit

(1) Remove the LSU Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.12.)
(2) Clean the Front, and Rear Pickup Rollers
(4603, 4611).
(3) Pull out the ADU (2351). (See Sect. 2.2.9.)

Note:
Ref. No. 2351 does not include all individual parts.
(5) Remove the Sheet Bypass.

(7) Remove the Upper Sheet Bypass Guide
(4605).

(9) Remove 2 Stoppers (4601).
(10) Remove 2 Spacers (4602).
(11) Remove the Front Pickup Roller (4611)
(White), and the Rear Pickup Roller (4603)
(Black).
100
DP-8060/8045/8035

(13) Remove the Feed Cover (4638) Assembly.

(16) Remove the Feed Roller (4612).
101
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.15. Paper Exit Transportation

(1) Open the Lower Exit Cover (8011).
(3) Remove the Exit Cover 3 (8003).

(5) Open the Paper Exit Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.11.)
(7) Remove the Plate Assembly.
(8) Clean the Pressure Roller (8311), and Exit

Roller 3 (8312) with a soft cloth, saturated with
isopropyl alcohol.
Note:
Ensure that the Front Cover, and the Paper Exit
Cover are opened before reinstalling the Plate
Assembly back into the machine.
102
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.16. PC Boards
(1) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.
(See Sect. 2.2.4.2.)
(2) Disconnect All Harnesses on the DRV PC
Board.

(4) Remove the DRV PC Board (8601).

(6) Remove the SC Cover Bracket (3303).
(7) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SC PC Board.
103
DP-8060/8045/8035

(9) Remove the SC PC Board (8401).
(10) Remove 2 Screws.

(11) Remove the PRT PC Board (8402).

(14) Remove the Rear Lower Cover (108).
(15) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

(See Sect. 2.2.2.)
(16) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SPC PC
Board.
104
DP-8060/8045/8035

(18) Remove the SPC PC Board (8501).

(20) Remove NFL PC Board (8603) Assembly.
(21) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the NFL PC Board

(CN132, and CN133).

(24) Remove the Finisher Bracket (3508).
105
DP-8060/8045/8035

(26) Remove the Paper Exit Motor (8127) Assembly.

(29) Pull out 1st Paper Tray.
(31) Remove the LVPS Cover (203).

(33) Pull out the LVPS Assembly.
106
DP-8060/8045/8035
(34) Disconnect the All Harnesses on the DC PC

Board (CN141, CN142, CN143, CN144, and
CN145).
(36) Remove the DC PC Board (8701).

(38) Remove the Heat Sink (3311).

(40) Remove the LVPS (8702).
(41) Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the ACD PC Board

(CN101, CN105, and CN106).
107
DP-8060/8045/8035
(43) Pull out the ACD PC Board (8704) Assembly.

(44) Disconnect the Harness on the ACD PC Board
(CN102).
(45) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the ACD PC Board

(CN103, and CN104).
(47) Remove the ACD PC Board (8704).
108
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.17. Drive Unit

(See Sect. 2.2.2.)
(2) Remove the Rear Upper Plate.
(See Sect. 2.2.4.2.)
(3) Remove the Rear Lower Plate, and SC Cover
Bracket. (See Sect. 2.2.16.)
(4) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SC PC Board.
(See Sect. 2.2.16.)
(5) Loosen 5 Screws (X5).
(6) Remove the SC Bracket (3306).
(7) Release the Harnesses from 2 Clamps.
(8) Loosen 2 Screws (X5).

(9) Remove the SC Support Bracket (3305).
109
DP-8060/8045/8035

(12) Remove the Fan (4219) Assembly.

(14) Remove the Fan (4221) Assembly.

(16) Remove the Rear Cover (9301).

(18) Remove the Rear Frame 2 (3910).
110
DP-8060/8045/8035

(20) Move the Hopper Unit. (See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(21) Pull out the ADU (2351), and Drum Unit (1852).
Note:
Ref. No. 2351, and 1852 do not include all
individual parts.
(22) Remove the Fuser Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.11.)

(24) Pull out Fuser Unit (2035).
(25) Remove 1 Screw (L1).

(26) Remove the Flange Cap (2701).
(27) Remove the Fly Wheel (2702).
(28) Remove the Drum Drive Gear (2703).
111
DP-8060/8045/8035
(29) Remove the Pin (2743).

(31) Move the Harness Bracket (3525).
(32) Disconnect the Harness on the Toner Waste

Sensor.
(33) Disconnect the Harness on the HVPS (CN101).
(34) Lift up the Toner Waste Pipe 2 (4111).
112
DP-8060/8045/8035

(36) Remove the HVPS Bracket (3611).

(38) Remove the HVPS (8705).

(40) Remove the Belt Cover (2824).
(41) Release the F Belt (2820).
113
DP-8060/8045/8035

(44) Remove the Fan Assembly.

(46) Release the Harnesses from 7 Clamps.

(48) Remove the Drive Unit.
(49) Remove E-Ring (L2).
114
DP-8060/8045/8035
(50) Remove the Drum Drive Shaft (2704).
(51) Remove 4 E-Rings (J7, and K5), 2 Snap Rings

(G6), 2 Pins (2840), and 6 Gears (2806 x 2,
2808, 2833, 2834, and 2835).

(53) Remove the Drum Drive Plate (2709).

(55) Remove the Drum Motor (2708).
115
DP-8060/8045/8035
(56) Disconnect the Harness and release it from the

Clamp.
(57) Remove 2 Screws (M3).
(58) Remove the DC Brower (4220).
116
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.18. System Console

2.2.18.1. 3rd/4th Paper Feed Module
(1) Open the Release Cover (9324).
(2) Clean the Intermediate Roller (3010).
(3) Remove 1 Screw (S6).

(4) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (9319)
(6) Push the Right Cover Shaft (2914), and remove

Release Cover (9324).
117
DP-8060/8045/8035

(9) Remove 3rd Paper Feed Module.
Note:
Follow the instructions for steps (10)~(17) of the
1st Paper Feed Module.
(10) Remove the 4th Paper Feed Module, by
following the steps for the 3rd Paper Feed
Module.
(11) Remove 2 Intermediate Rollers (3010), by
following the steps for the ones in the Main Unit.
118
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.18.2. Drive Motor, Lift Motor 2, CST PC Board

(2) Remove the Rear Cover (9301).
(3) Disconnect the Harness on the System Console

Drive Motor.
(6) Remove the Drive Motor (9410).
(7) Release the Harness from 2 Clamps.

(8) Disconnect the Harness on the CST PC Board
(CN602).

(10) Remove the Timing Belt (9401), and the Motor
Bracket (9426) Assembly.
119
DP-8060/8045/8035

(13) Remove 2 Lift Motor 2 (4023) Assemblies.

(16) Remove the Lift Motor 2 (4023)
(17) Disconnect all Harnesses on the CST PC

Board.
(19) Release 5 Locking Supports (9419) on the

CST PC Board.
(20) Remove the APF PC Board (8707).
120
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.2.19. 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT)

(2) Remove the Front Guide (9142).
(3) Clean the Feed Roller (9129).

(5) Remove the Feed Roller (9129).
(6) Remove 4 Screws (J2).

(7) Remove the Top Cover (8801).
121
DP-8060/8045/8035

(9) Remove the Guide Bracket (9112).

(12) Remove the Reinforcement Bracket (9101).
(14) Disconnect All Harnesses on the LCT PC

Board.
(16) Release 5 Card Spacers (8903) on the LCT PC
Board.
(17) Remove the LCT PC Board (8408).
122
DP-8060/8045/8035
2.3.
Screw Identification Template

Ref. No.
Part No.
Figure
26
XTB4+8GFJ
Screw (M4 x 8)
3F
XYN3+F5FJ
Screw (M3 x 5)
3P
XTW3+6SFJ
Screw (M3 x 6)
B2
XYC3+FF8FJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
G6
FFPFJ0039B
Snap Ring
G7
XYA3+EF6FJ
Screw (M3 x 6)
H4
XTB26+8JFJ
Screw (M2.6 x 8)
H5
XTB4+10GFN
Silver Screw (M4 x 10)
H6
FFPFJ0033B
Snap Ring
H7
FFPFJ0041B
Snap Ring
H9
FFPFA01632
Shoulder Screw
J2
XTT4+8HFN
J6
XUC3VM
E-Ring
J7
XUC4VM
E-Ring
J8
XUC7VM
E-Ring
123
Remark
DP-8060/8045/8035
Ref. No.
Part No.
Figure
K1
FFPFA01071
Black Shoulder Screw
K2
XSN3+W8FJ-TP
Screw (M3 x 8)
K4
XYN4+F16FJ
Screw (M4 x 16)
K5
XUC5VM
E-Ring
K6
XUC6VM
E-Ring
K7
FFPFA01761
Shoulder Screw
K8
FFPFA01771
Shoulder Screw
K9
FFPFJ0043B
Snap Ring
L1
XYN4+F12FJ
Screw (M4 x 12)
L2
XUC9VM
E-Ring
L4
XTN4+34GFJ
Screw (M4 x 34)
L5
FFPFA01461
Screw
L6
XYC3+FG8FJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
L7
XUC2VM
E-Ring
M4
NS010416
Screw (M4 x 16)
124
Remark
DP-8060/8045/8035
Ref. No.
Part No.
Figure
M6
XTW4+12LFJ
Screw (M4 x 12)
M7
XTW3+8GFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
M9
XTB3+8GFN
N1
XSB2+6FJ
Screw (M2 x 6)
N2
XTB4+6HFJ
Screw (M4 x 6)
N4
XTN3+12FFJB
Blue Screw (M3 x 12)
N6
FFPFA01611
Shoulder Screw
N7
FFPFA01591
Screw
N8
FFPFA01471
Screw
N9
FFPFA00861
Shoulder Screw
P4
PF2217P319A
Screw
P5
XTN3+8G
Screw (M3 x 8)
P7
FFPFA0152
Screw
Q1
XYA4+FF10
Screw (M4 x 10)
Q2
XSB3+12FJ
Screw (M3 x 12)
125
Remark
DP-8060/8045/8035
Ref. No.
Part No.
Figure
Q3
XSB26+4FJ
Screw (M2.6 x 4)
Q7
XTW3+8F
Screw (M3 x 8)
R1
XTB4+7FFJ-RP
Screw (M4 x 7)
R8
XYN4+C6BN
Screw (M4 x 6)
S6
DZPA000086
Silver Screw
X1
XTB3+10GFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
X3
XYN3+F8FJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
X5
XTB3+6FFJ
Screw (M3 x 6)
X6
XTB3+8JFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
X8
XTB3+8GFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
X9
XTB3+8FFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
Y1
XTW3+8PFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
Y2
XTB3+6FFJ-RP
Screw (M3 x 6)
Y3
XTW3+6LFJ
Screw (M3 x 6)
Y10
XYN4+F6FJ
Screw (M4 x 6)
126
Remark
DP-8060/8045/8035
Ref. No.
Part No.
Figure
Y13
XTW3+8LFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
Y14
XTW3+8SFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
Y16
XYN3+F6FJ
Screw (M3 x 6)
Y18
XTB3+4GFN
Screw (M3 x 4)
Y19
XTB4+8FFJ
Screw (M4 x 8)
Y21
XTB4+6FFJ
Screw (M4 x 6)
Y22
XYA3+FF6FJ
Screw (M3 x 6)
Y23
XYN4+F8FJ
Screw (M4 x 8)
Y24
XTB4+10GFJ
Screw (M4 x 10)
Y25
XYN26+F6FJ
Screw (M2.6 x 6)
Y26
XYN3+F4FJ
Screw (M3 x 4)
Y28
XTW4+10PFJ
Screw (M4 x 10)
Y33
XTB4+10FFJ
Screw (M4 x 10)
Y36
XTW3+12QFJ
Screw (M3 x 12)
Y37
XTB3+6GFJ
Screw (M3 x 6)
127
Remark
DP-8060/8045/8035
Ref. No.
Part No.
Figure
Y38
XYC3+FG10FJ
Screw (M3 x 10)
Y40
XTN5+10FFJ
Screw (M5 x 10)
Y42
XTB3+12GFJ
Screw (M3 x 12)
Y43
DZPA000098
Shoulder Screw
Y46
XTB3+12FFJ
Screw (M3 x 12)
Y48
XTB3+4FFJ
Screw (M3 x 4)
Y53
XYN3+J8FJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
Y58
XTS3+8GFJ
Screw (M3 x 8)
128
Remark
DP-8060/8045/8035
3 Maintenance, Adjustments, and Check Points

3.1.
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine cleaning and parts
replacement. It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals for
customer satisfaction. The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.
- You should prepare the necessary PM kits, replacement parts, and tools for cleaning beforehand.
- After completing the preventive maintenance service, you should discard the used parts and
packaging, in accordance with local regulations and clean the surrounding area.
- Before servicing the equipment disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
- Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves and eye protection.
1. Timing
- Perform the preventive maintenance service in accordance with the chart of preventive maintenance
areas listed in the service manual.
2. Cleaning of Rollers
- Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.
- Use of IPA (Isopropyl alcohol) should be used sparingly.
3. Precautions for Disassembly, and Adjustment
Caution:
Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back, and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before disassembling the
machine.
- After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.
- When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful to avoid clothing being caught by
moving components.
- While electricity is applied, the connectors of any PC Board must not be connected or disconnected.
- Use of a vacuum cleaner for the cleaning of the TDC sensor could cause electrostatic damage,
therefore, use a blower brush or cotton swab for the cleaning of these parts. Before vacuuming the
developer unit remove the TDC sensor.
- When handling the drum, the precautions listed in section 3.4. should be followed.
- Make sure to use the correct screw sizes.
- Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical continuity.
- To re-assemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.
- Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.
4. Precautions for Handling Lasers
The laser optical system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by a protective housing
and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not stray or leak during photocopier operation.
However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:
1. Do not insert into the path of the laser, any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflectance
properties.
2. Before servicing the photocopier, take off any watches, rings, or other metallic objects that you may
be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser entering the eye by reflecting off the metallic
objects being worn.)
Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, please follow the above precautions for
maximum safety.
129
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Data Security Precautions during Maintenance, and Disposal

To secure highly-sensitive document data from unauthorized users during maintenance, or when
disposing of this equipment, follow the security measures described below.
1. Maintenance:
Make sure to remove the Flash Memory Card from the machine, if it was used for updating the
Firmware, etc.
2. Disposal:
a. Delete the customers data by initializing the Hard Disc Drive (overwriting, and deleting the data
area stored in the Hard Disc Drive).
b. Delete the customers data by initializing the System.
130
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.2.
Required Tools
No.
Tools
1 Soft Cloth
2 Isopropyl Alcohol
3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2)
4
Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2)
Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in)
Tweezer
3.2.1.
Preventive Maintenance Method
Memory Data
Important
Action
Check
Auto Document
Feeder (ADF)
Check &
Clean
Scanner Unit
Document Size
Sensor
Check &
Clean
Check &
Clean
Transmitter Unit
Mirrors
Inspection Items
No.
No.
Tools
7 Pliers
8 Cotton Swab
9 Brush
KS-660 - Conductive Grease
10 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc.
URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)
Molykote EM-50L Grease
11 (Available from Dow Corning,
URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
Part Description
Check &
Clean
Check &
Clean
Check
Gears, Rollers Shafts Check &

Grease
9 Timing Belts
Check &
Clean
10 Fuser Unit
Check &
Clean
Comments
1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a pre-caution.
2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM
DATA with the previously printed one.
1. Clean all Rollers and Separation Rubber with a soft cloth
saturated with water.
Note:
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth
saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a
soft cloth saturated with water.
1. Clean the Scanning Glass, or White Seal Guide with
Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
1. Do not touch the surface of the Sensors with your hands.
2. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a Dry Cotton Swab.
Note:
Do not use any type of Alcohol.
1. Remove any foreign obstacles.
2. Clean the Rollers with Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your hands.
2. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a Dry Cotton Swab.
Note:
1. Check the Harnesses.
2. Check the Connectors.
3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.
1. Check, and grease the required Gears and Shafts.
1. Check the belts for looseness, or abrasion.
2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.
1. Remove any foreign obstacles.
Note:
131
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.3.
Preventive Maintenance Points

8
12 13
24
23
10
17
11
19
26 25
20
2221
55 (14-16)
57
30 29 28
48
18
56
58
44
(31-43)
50
47 46
54
53
51
59
52
62
49
45
2
60
61
27
54
51
53
52
54
51
53
52
54
53 52
Note:
3
Except PU
132
51
DP-8060/8045/8035
35
36
39
33
40
34
38
31
37
32
41
42 43
DETAIL A
14
15
16
DETAIL B
133
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.4.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Preventive Maintenance Check List
Mechanical Parts
Main Unit
Ozone Filter 1
Ozone Filter 2
V-Ozone Filter 4
V-Ozone Filter 7
Ozone Filter 6
Dust Filter
i-ADF Unit
Ref. No.
Cleaning
Cycle
Method
(Sheet)
Replacement/Adjustment
Cycle
Procedure
(Sheet)
4204
107, 4229
4226
4228
136
4218
240K
240K
240K
240K
240K
240K
Pickup Roller
511
120K
Water 1
240K
Paper Feed Roller
508
120K
Water 1
240K
Separation Roller
610
120K
Water 1
240K
Registration Roller 1
817
120K
Water 1
10 Registration Roller 2
818
120K
Water 1
11 Transport Roller
816
120K
Water 1
12 Inverting Roller
809
120K
Water 1
13 Exit Roller
814
120K
Water 1
14 Toner Bottle Holder
1402
480K
Water 1
15 Toner Bottle Support
1407
480K
Water 1
16 Lower Hopper Cover
1411
480K
Water 1
240K *4
1602
720K
1620
240K
Water 1
1811
1847
1849
1848
240K *4
240K
240K
240K
1915
Ref.
Counter
Refer to
Sect 2.2.1.
F7-02
Total Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.3.
F7-02
ADF PM
Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.6.
F7-02
Total Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.7.
F7-02
Process
Unit Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.8.
F7-02
OPC Drum
Count
Hopper Unit
Developer Unit
- Developer
Splash Prevention
17
Sheet
18 Duct Cover
19
20
21
22
23
Drum Unit
OPC Drum
Cleaning Blade
Front Cleaning Felt
Rear Cleaning Felt
Corona Wire
(DP-8045/8035)
Corona Wire
(DP-8060)
24 Corona Case
1906
120K
240K
240K
Water 1
480K
480K
25 Corona Grid
1919
240K
Water 1
26 Cleaning Pad Assy

Toner Waste
27
Container
Density Sensor
28
(CDS PC Board)
1957
240K
4108
240K *4
1846
240K
Dry Cloth
134
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Mechanical Parts
Ref. No.
29 Split Lock Washer
1825
30 Separator
1826
Cleaning
Cycle
Method
(Sheet)
-
Ref.
Cycle
Counter
Procedure
(Sheet)
F7-02
480K
Refer to
OPC Drum
Sect 2.2.8.
480K
Count
2227
2228
2019
2037
33 Thermistor Assembly
(DP-8035
only)
34 Fuser Lamp
2027, 2028
35 Cleaning Web
2003
36 Cleaning Web Roller
2007
37 Fuser Roller
2105
38 Fuser Roller Bearing
2107
39 Fuser Roller Gear
2108
40 Insulation Bushing
2106
41 Lower Front Guide
2113
Pressure Roller
42 Assembly
2205
(DP-8060/8045)
Pressure Roller
43 Assembly
2232
(DP-8035)
Automatic Duplex Unit
120K
120K
-
Dry Cloth
Dry Cloth
-
480K
480K
480K
480K
240K
240K *5
1,200K
240K
720K
480K
240K
1,200K
480K
480K
44 Intermediate Roller
2403
120K
Water 1
2520, 2521,
2522
120K
Water 1
2430
120K
Water 1
1,200K
822, 2603
120K
Water 1
1,200K
3932
120K
Dry Cloth
Fuser Unit
31 Upper Separator
32 Lower Separator
45 Exit Roller
46 Registration Roller
Registration Roller
Bearing
48 Guide Sheet
47
49 Transfer Frame
50
480K
2310
240K
Water
Corona Wire 1
2335
120K
Water 1
240K
Corona Wire 2
2334
120K
Water 1
240K
3204
120K
Water 1
240K
120K
Water
240K
240K
Refer to
Sect 2.2.11.
Refer to
Sect 2.2.9.
F7-02
Fuser Web
Count
F7-03
2-Sided
Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.10.
Paper Feed Module

51 Paper Feed Roller
52 Reverse Roller
53 Pickup Roller
54 Intermediate Roller
3219
3211
120K
Water
3005, 3010
120K
Water 1
135
1,200K
Refer to
Sect 2.2.13.
F7-03
1st/2nd/
3rd/4th
Paper Tray
Count
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Mechanical Parts
Ref. No.
Cleaning
Cycle
Method
(Sheet)
Cycle
Procedure
(Sheet)
Ref.
Counter
Sheet Bypass
4608
120K
Water 1
240K
56 Feed Roller
4612
120K
Water 1
240K
4603, 4611
120K
Water 1
240K
120K
Water 1
120K
Water
57 Pickup Roller
Refer to
Sect 2.2.14.
F7-03
Sheet
Bypass
Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.15.
F7-02
Total Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.19.
F7-03
LCT Tray
Count
Paper Exit Transportation

58 Exit Roller 2
59 Exit Roller 3
8120
8312
3000-Sheet Large Capacity Tray

9111
120K
Water 1
240K
61 Feed Roller
9129
120K
Water 1
240K
62 Pickup Roller
9107
120K
Water 1
240K
Note:
1. Clean all Rollers and Separation Rubber with a soft cloth saturated with water.
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then
follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.
2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module.
To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic
counter - 00 (List print).
3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended
standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used and/or ambient
conditions.
4. The value is determined under the following test conditions. Four continuous prints per job using 6%
image coverage of LT/A4 size.
5. 240K, or 1 year whichever occurs first.
136
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.5.
Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) Counter
When the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show Call for P/M or Replace The Toner Waste
Container on the LCD Display. The PM Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.
3.5.1.
Call for P/M (Default: 120K (DP-8045/8035), 240K (DP-8060))
1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
2. Press the "Function, Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and 3 keys simultaneously to enter the Service
Mode.
3. Enter the password, and select OK button (default password is 00000000).
4. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-70 (PM cycle) and change to the desired value.
5. Press Function and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
3.5.2.
Call for P/M Fuser Web (Default: 240K)
Mode.
4. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-73 (Fuser web) PM cycle and change to the desired value.
3.5.3.
Call for P/M ADF (Default: Not shown)
Mode.
4. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87 (ADF) PM cycle and change to the desired value.
3.5.4.
U14 Replace The Toner Waste Container
A. Blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators

Upon detecting that the Toner Waste Container is full, the machine will complete the current job, and
stop operating.
A blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators will appear on the display.
To continue using the machine temporarily while waiting for the Service Technician, press
"FUNCTION" and "2" keys simultaneously (up to 5,000 copies max.).
B. Steady Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators
Upon reaching the 5,000 copies, the machine stops and will not allow further operation until the
Toner Waste Container is replaced.
Replace the Toner Waste Container. Refer to Section 2.2.2.
137
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.6.
Updating the Firmware
The Quickest and Most Reliable Way of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware
Program Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port, and a Crossover Cable.
The network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the CD included with PCL or
PS/PCL options.
Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, and Service Notes for Option Instalation
(8.1.) for the details.
3.6.1.
Firmware Configuration
A. Hardware Configuration
This machine is controlled by three (3) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC
Board, the Panel Control (PNL) PC Board, and the Scanner Printer Control (SPC) PC Board.
SC PC Board
On Board
PC
Ethernet Port
Standard
Configuration
F-ROM
CPU
4 MB
(A)
(1)
Program
With PCL Option

Configuration
With PS Option
Configuration
(B)
(2)
Program
(D)
(5)
Program
4 MB
4 MB
4 MB
PC
Parallel Port
Slot 1
FRM8 PCB
8 MB
Flash Memory
Card
4 MB or 8 MB
(C) 8MB
(3)
Program
(a)
2 MB
(E) 8MB
(6)
Program
(a)
4 MB
(4)
(7)
Program
Font
4 MB
(b)
Slot 2
FRM8 PCB
8 MB
PNL PC Board
F-ROM
CPU
4 MB
Panel Control Program (Display & Key In)

Bitmap Data
Font Data
SPC PC Board
F-ROM
CPU
512 KB
138
Scanner Control Program

Printer Control Program
4 MB
(b)
DP-8060/8045/8035
B. SC PC Board Firmware
The standard onboard Program Memory (F-ROM) mounted on the SC PCB is 4 MB. Two (2) Optional
Expansion 8 MB Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1 and SLOT 2.
The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard, the 8 MB of SLOT 1 / SLOT 2 depends upon the
configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options.
(1) Standard
The Standard Program is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (B).
(2) For PCL Option
The PCL Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
(B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C).
When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written at once.
Using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided into 2 Programs for
Program 4 MB (3) and Font 4 MB (4).
(3) For PS Option
The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
(D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E).
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7).
C. Panel (PNL) PC Board Firmware
The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is mounted on the PNL PCB as standard. The Programs for
Key Scan, Display Control, Energy Save Control, Bitmap Data, and Font Data are saved in this
Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from SC PCB.
D. SPC PC Board Firmware
The 512 KB Program Memory (F-ROM) is mounted on the SPC PCB as standard. The Programs for
Scanner Control, and Printer Control are saved in the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial
Data from SC PCB.
E. Firmware Updating Ports
Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.
(1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Reliable Way)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the
Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Caution (8.1.) and Service Notes (8.2.) for the details.
(2) Parallel Port (Back up)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Parallel Port. The Master Firmware Card
can also be created from a PC via Parallel Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation
Instructions, Caution (8.1.) and Service Notes (8.2.) for the details.
(3) Flash Memory Card
The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware
Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB, or
8 MB Flash Memory Card.
It requires 5 Flash Memory Cards to update the SC, PNL and SPC PCBs.
139
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.6.2.
Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
If the unit is not connected to a LAN, the Network Firmware Update Tool can be connected to the machine
using a crossover cable.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the
CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File, and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File:
DP-8060_8045_8035_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade
Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00). Make sure the unit's
Password (Service Mode F7-01: Application Password) is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
140
DP-8060/8045/8035
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder
\ DP-8060_8045_8035_xx_xxxxxx
Sub Firmware File Folder
\ PNL \ MMK3_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_STD \ SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_PCL \ SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_PS \ SFDM_MK3DxVxxxxx-xx
\ SPC \ MMK3_SPCAAVxxxxx
When you select the Parent Folder, the
following Firmware Type window
appears. Proper Sub File Folders are
selected automatically by selecting the
Firmware Type.
The transferring order is set up
automatically.
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware, or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name, or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.
141
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.6.3.
Updating the Firmware using a PC via the Parallel Port
1. Before starting, print the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) Lists.

2. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit (not the side of the unit) to the OFF (O) position.
3. Connect the machine to the PC with a Parallel Printer Cable.
4. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit to the ON (I) position.
5. Install the Panasonic Firmware Programming Wizard software into the PC.
(Refer to the Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions)
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-01 (Update from parallel port).
Now the machine is ready to accept programming firmware code from the PC.
7. Start the Panasonic Firmware Program using the Wizard.
8. The firmware is copied into the machine.
9. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
10. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-06-00 (Parameter initialize).
12. Disconnect the Parallel Printer Cable from the machine.
14. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the
settings are other than factory default.
3.6.4.
Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card
1. Before starting, print the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) Lists.

3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.
5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update from master card).
6. The firmware is copied into the machine.
7. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
8. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-06-00 (Parameter initialize).
10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.
12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the
settings are other than factory default.
Note:
After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9
Parameters F9-02-xx.
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to 3.6.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)
142
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.6.5.
Creating a Master Firmware Card
A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit

1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:
To:
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.6.7.)
2. Insert the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back, and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to
the ON position.
Mode.
6. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side, and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to
the OFF position. (See 3.6.7.)
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
the ON position.
Mode.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).
7. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.
8. After the backup is completed, press "Stop" first, and then press "Function" + "C(CLEAR) keys
simultaneously to return to standby.
10. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.
143
DP-8060/8045/8035
the ON position.
12. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
3.6.6.
Erasing the Master Firmware Card
2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.
the ON position.
Mode.
6. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
7. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts "Update Program Card?". Press "NO".
8. Press "Stop" first, and then press "Function" + "C(CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
10. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
11. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
3.6.7.
Notice after installing the HDD option
After the Hard Disc Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disc Scan Function from being performed (similar
to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below
when turing OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disc Drive
Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.
144
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.6.8.
Firmware Emergency Recovery
The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to either use the Local
Firmware Update Tool software by selecting the Independent File method, or using the Master Firmware
Flash Card method (3 Flash Cards required).
Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type
first, as it only requires 3 files to bring the machine to initial working condition. (Install the files in this
order: SC, SPC and PNL).
After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update
Tool or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level.
If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:
1. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit).
- Before proceeding to the next step, you must prepare either the Local Firmware Update Tool, or
create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first).
- If using the Master Firmware Card, insert the Master Firmware Flash Cards in the unit.
2. Turn the power On while holding the [Energy Saver] button.
3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the [Energy Saver] button.
- If using the Master Firmware Card, the unit will start updating the Firmware code files
automatically.
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port, or Master Firmware Card.
145
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.6.9.
Firmware Version
SC
: SFDM MK3 B x Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

Destination Code (Fax)
AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
Destination Code (Copier)
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
(When it is divided into (a) and (b))
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
b : English, French & Spanish
g : German, French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
B : Standard / Optional
C, D, E : Optional
Model Number
PNL
MK3
PNL A x Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

Destination Code (Fax)
AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
Destination Code (Copier)
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
(When it is devided into (a) and (b))
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
B : A-English, Spanish,German,
French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
Panel
Model Number
SPC
MMK3 SPC
A A Vxxxx
Firmware Version (Vxxxx)
AA: Fixed
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E, F : Optional
Model Number
146
147
TDC Sensor
LSU
SC PC Board
Optics
Clean
F6-17
Grid
Yes
---
F6-18
Laser
Yes
--F6-19
Bias
Yes
---
F6-80
Laser
Yes
---
F6-82
Grid
Yes
---
Auto Adjustment by Digital

QUANTUM (Read Only)
2
3
1
1
2
2
1
4
2
F6-95
Laser
--Yes
F6-96
Grid
--Yes
F6-97
Bias
--Yes
Manual Adjustment
(Digital QUANTUM OFF)
2. F6-28, and 29 should not be adjusted in the field. (The values must be set to "0")
Digital
QUANTUM ON/OFF
Digital QUANTUM: ON
Digital QUANTUM: OFF
Add on the QUANTUM

Compensation
1. Copy Quality Adjustment related to the Copier Service Mode F6 Codes.
12
13
14
15
Exposure Lamp
Platen Glass
OPC Drum
Developer
OPC Drum &
Developer
Corona Unit
Drum Unit
Toner Density
Sensor
Replace
Installation Main
Cleaning
Optics
Drum Unit
Toner Density
Sensor
Part Item
10
11
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
Work
3
4
2
2
3
3
2
5
3
Image
Copy
PWM
Toner
OPC
LSU
Drum
Density
Quality
Adj.
Density TDC Adj. Counter
Adj.
Unit
Adj. F6-49
F8-09
F6-39/52 (Note 5) Check
Sensor
Reset
Clean
/50/51
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Clean
F8-14
(Note 3, 4)
1
2
3
4
2
3
1
3
2
4
5
Input F5/F6 Parameter
Replace Developer
Remark
3.7.
No.
Adjustment
When the following items are replaced or cleaned, perform adjustments in the correct order.
DP-8060/8045/8035
Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (Order)
DP-8060/8045/8035
Note:
1. Copy Quality Check
1) Press the "Function, Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and 3 keys simultaneously to enter the Service
Mode.
2) Enter the password, and select OK button (default password is 00000000).
3) Press the "6", and then "Start" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
4) Select "29 QUANTUM Black Density".
5) Select "INPUT" button, and enter a number
(0 1 or 1 0).
6) Select "OK" button 2 times.
7) Wait approximately 30 seconds.
8) The Machine starts QUANTUM Control automatically.
2. PWM Adjustment
1) It is recommended to make continuous copies (50 ~ 300 copies, depending on the machine model)
to stabilize the Bias Voltage of the Developer.
DP-8035 : 250 ~ 300 copies
DP-8045 : 150 ~ 200 copies
DP-8060 : 50 ~ 100 copies
2) Ensure that Ledger / A3 Size Paper is loaded in one of the Trays, and pull out the remaining trays
(including the bypass tray) to disable them.
Mode.
4) Enter the password, and touch OK button (default password is 00000000).
5) Press the "8", and then "Start" keys to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).
6) Select "17 LSU PWM Pattern 1" to print the Test Pattern.
7) Observe the position of the uppermost visible gray patch.
Sample:
4 gray patches are visible in the illustration, the value of the uppermost patch position is "+2" in
our example.
(-5)
(0)
+2
(+5)
In our sample, 4 patches

are visible.
Test Pattern
148
DP-8060/8045/8035
8) Select the "OK" button.

10) Select "52 LSU Unit PWM Adjust 1".
11) Select "INPUT" button, and enter the value of the gray patch, as established in Step (6).
12) Select "OK" button 2 times.
13) Perform the Service Modes F8-18, and F6-39 in the same manner as steps (4) ~ (10) above.
3. QUANTUM Control Adjustment
3.1. Toner Density Control (TDC) Adjustment
Mode.
3. Press the 8 key to enter the F8 Mode.
4. Press the Start key.
5. Press the 0, 9, and "Start" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode code 09.
6. Press the Start key to begin the Automatic TDC sensor gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 7 minutes).
3.2 OPC Counter Reset
2. Press the Start key for OPC Counter Reset.
Note:
Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until operation ends.
Refer to the Sequence Chart below.
3. Press the Stop key.
5. Write the contents of F6-21, and 26 on the memory sheet (adhered to the inside the 2nd Paper
Tray).
[For your convenience, record these values on this sheet first, then transcribe them onto the memory
sheet.] F6-21 =
F6-26 =
7. Press the Function, and C (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
F8-09 (Installation & Developer Replace)
F8-14 (Installation & OPC Replace)
TDC Adjust
OPC
Counter Reset
7 min
3 sec
149
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.3. QUANTUM Control Timing

Refer to the following Table.
QUANTUM Control Timing

QUANTUM works in Copy, Print, or Fax mode.
No
QUANTUM Start Timing
Trigger
When F8-09 is performed
After performing F8-09
At 200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000 prints after F8-09 was
performed
Every 1000 prints from 1001 prints after F8-09 was
performed
When the F6-28 value is changed
Upon reaching the specified

number of prints *2
number of prints *2
Upon returning to F6 initial display
When the Power Switch is turned ON
At 100 prints after the Power Switch was turned ON
10 When the Auto Off mode is cancelled
Wait approximately
After the Power Switch is turned
30 - 90 sec for the
On
QUANTUM to start *1
number of prints *2
After cancelling the Auto off mode
11 At 100 prints after the Auto Off mode was cancelled
When reaching the counters *2
12 6 hours after the previous QUANTUM
After reaching the specified

number of prints
number of prints *2
number of prints *2
After F8-14 is performed
13 At 100 prints after the 6 hours lapse from the previous

QUANTUM
14 At 100 prints after canceling U13
15 When F8-14 is performed
<Note>
*1) Start timing of QUANTUM:
- QUANTUM starts when the machine is ready (It will not work during copy/print/fax operation)
- The start of QUANTUM may change depending on machine status
*2) Any print value numbers shown above, refers to the Total Counter
150
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Exposure Adjustment
Before making any adjustments, confirm that the following contents (F6-17, 18, and 19) are set to "-30",
-3, -10.
DO NOT adjust these codes in the field.
F6-17 : Standard Grid Voltage
F6-18 : Standard Laser Power
F6-19 : Std Bias DC Voltage
= -30
= -3
= -10
Mode.
3) Press the "2", and then "Start" keys to enter the F2 Mode.
4) Set the exposure to the center position.
Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
5) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011), and verify the density as shown
below. If it is within specification, skip to step (15).
a. Gray scale "1" should not be visible.
b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.
A
. . .
. . .
. . . . .. . . . . . 1 .
.
.
2
3
6) Press the "Reset" key to exit the F2 Mode.

8) Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).
9) Press the "INPUT" button.
10) Enter the new content.
11) Enter a 2-digit value.
Note:
The "RESET" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.
(+) : Lighter side
(-) : Darker side
12) Press "OK" button twice.
13) Enter F2 Mode.
14) Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
Repeat steps (4) to (12) until proper density is attained.
F6-49 : Text Mode
F6-51 : Photo Mode
15) Press "Function" and "C" (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
151
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Contrast Adjusting
-3, -10.
= -30
= -3
= -10
Mode.
3) Press the "2", and then "Start" keys to enter the F2 Mode.
4) Set the exposure to the center position.
Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
5) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011), and verify the density as shown
a. Gray scale "1" should not be visible.
b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.
A
. . .
. . .
. . . . .. . . . . . 1 .
.
.
2
3
6) Press the "Reset" key to exit the F2 Mode.

8) Enter F6-55 Mode (T/P Mode Contrast).
9) Select the "INPUT" button.
10) Enter the new content.
11) Enter a 3-digit value.
Note:
The "RESET" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.
(+) : Lighter side
(-) : Darker side
12) Select "OK" button twice.
13) Enter F2 Mode.
14) Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
Repeat steps (4) to (12) until proper density is attained.
F6-54 : Text Mode
F6-61 : Photo Mode
15) Press "Function" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
6. LSU Adjustment
Refer to 3.8.
152
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.8.
Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side
When installing the System Console / LCT option(s), or replacing the LSU, the following LSU Image Side to
Side adjustment must be performed.
The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, adjust it by the following
procedure.
3.8.1.
Printer Registration
1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 2nd tray, and change the tray setting to the appropriate
paper size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
Mode.
4. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).
5. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
7. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.
8. Press the Stop key first, then press the Function, and C (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the
Service Mode.
<Figure>
Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).

For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.
For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.
5 mm
Top (Lead edge)

Two lines are printed
5 mm
(5 mm)
3.8.2.
LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray
3.8.3.
LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU
1. Insert paper into the 1st tray, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or
pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
Mode.
5. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
6. Perform the Service Modes F6-10 to F6-15, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
7. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
Service Mode.
Mode.
153
DP-8060/8045/8035
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-16, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.

Service Mode.
154
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.9.
Calibrating the LCD
1. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) position, and leave the Power
Switch on the Left Side of the machine in the ON (I) position.
2. Ensure that the F-ROM Card with Firmware Update is not installed in the machine. If the Card is
installed in the machine, remove it.
3. Press and hold the Energy Saver and Function keys down simultaneously, then turn the Main
Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the ON (I) position, and continue holding the keys for
approximately 30 seconds until the Display becomes stable.
The LCD Display starts blinking, and shows a + on the upper left edge of the display.
Note:
If you do not hold the "Energy Saver" and "Function" keys down long enogh, the Display may go
OFF.
4. Press the + on the upper left edge of the display, press the + on the lower right edge, and press the
+ on the center of the display. Then the display goes to stand-by.
Caution:
Prevent any damage to the LCD Display by not pressing with Sharp Edged Objects such as a Ball
Point Pen, etc.
5. Reboot the machine by cycling the power. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF (O), and then back to the ON (I) positio0n.
155
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.10. Signal Waveform

3.10.1. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Signal Name
+12V
+24V
+24VD
+24VM
+24VO1
+24VO2
+24VS
+3.3V
+5V
+5VD
+5VL
+5VP
ACL
ACLD
ACLRLB
ACN
ACND
ACNRLB
ACSW
ADCLK
ADFRRSN1
ADUCRRSN
ADUINSN
ADURRSN
ADXSN
AFDIN
AFDOUT
AFENB
AFLD
AFLTH
AMMCLK
APMCLK
ARRCNT
ARRSN2
ARST
ARVCL1
ARVCL2
ATA0
ATA1
ATA2
ATAINT
ATCS0
ATCS1
Function
+12 VDC Power Supply
+3.3 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply (Though Front Door SW)
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply (Though Front Door SW)
AC Power Supply
Fuser Relay
FIFO Clock
Registration Sensor 1 Signal
ADU Intermediate Sensor Signal
ADU Sensor Signal
ADU Registration Sensor Signal
Inverting Path Sensor Detection Signal
FIFO Data Out
FIFO Data In
FIFO Enable
FIFO Load
FIFO Latch
ADF Main Motor Clock
ADF Paper Feed Motor Clock
Registration Roller Clutch Control Signal
System Reset Signal
Inverting Clutch 1 Control Signal
HDD Address Bus
HDD Address Bus
HDD Address Bus
HDD Interrupt Signal
Primary HDD Select Signal
Secondary HDD Select Signal
156
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
ATD0
ATD1
ATD10
ATD11
ATD12
ATD13
ATD14
ATD15
ATD2
ATD3
ATD4
ATD5
ATD6
ATD7
ATD8
ATD9
ATDASP
ATDMAACK
ATDMAREQ
ATIO16
ATIORD
ATIORDY
ATIOWR
ATRST
BLKCLP
BMA
BMAB
BMB
BMBB
BPSN
CDSN1
CDSN2
CHPSN1
CHPSN2
CLIPIN
CLMM1
CLMM2
CPPSN1
CPPSN2
CRRSN1
CSEL
CT
DDFL
DDFM
DFCLK
DFDIN
DFENB
Function
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
Device Active Signal
DMA ACK Signal
DMA Request Signal
HDD 16 bits Transfer Control Signal
HDD Data Read Signal
HDD Data Ready Signal
HDD Data Write Signal
Reset Signal
AFE Black Level Clamp Switch Signal
Toner Bottle Motor A Clock
Toner Bottle Motor AB Clock
Toner Bottle Motor B Clock
Toner Bottle Motor BB Clock
Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal
Density Sensor 1 Signal
Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 Signal
AFE Sample Hold Clamp Signal
Corona Wire Cleaner Motor Control Signal
Paper Path Sensor 1 Signal
Paper Path Sensor Signal
Cable Select Signal
Total Counter
Dust Fan Lock Detection Signal
Dust Fan Control Signal
Driver FIFO Load
Driver FIFO Data In
Driver FIFO Enable
157
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
DFLD
DFLTH
DFOUT
DFRST
DMBRAKE
DMCLK
DMCLK
DMLD
DMPS
DOSN
DXCL1
DXSLCNT1
DXSLCNT2
DXSN
ELPCNT
EXDOSN2
EXFL1
EXFL2
EXFL3
EXFM1
EXFM2
EXFM3
EXSN
FULP1
FULP2
FULP3
GND
GOPSW1
GREFCNT
HEATL
HFCL
HFSOL
HPESN
HPSN
HSSN1
HSSN2
HSSN3
HSYNC
HUMSN
HVBACCLK
HVBACCNT
HVBDCCNT
HVCNT
HVDACCNT
HVDDCCNT
HVLKB
HVLKC
Function
Driver FIFO Clock
Driver FIFO Latch
Driver FIFO Data Out
Driver FIFO Data Reset
OPC Drum Motor Brake
Drum Motor Clock
OPC Drum Motor Clock
OPC Drum Motor Lock Detection Signal
OPC Drum Motor Start/Stop
Door Open Sensor Detection Signal
ADU Clutch 1 Control Signal
Inverting Solenoid Control 1 Signal
Discharge Lamp
Paper Exit Door Sensor Detection Signal
Exit Fan 1 Lock Detection Signal
Exit Fan 1 Control Signal
Paper Exit Sensor Detection Signal
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
Ground
Developer Missing Detection
Grid Reference PWM
AC Power Supply
Sheet Bypass Clutch Control Signal
Sheet Bypass Solenoid Control Signal
Sheet Bypass Sensor Detection Signal
Scanner Home Position Sensor Signal
Sheet Bypass Sensor 1 Signal
Horizontal Synchronous Signal
Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
Bias AC Clock
Bias AC ON/OFF, PWM
Bias DC ON/OFF, PWM
Charge Corona ON/OFF, PWM
Separation AC ON/OFF, PWM
Separation DC ON/OFF, PWM
Bias Leak Detection
High Voltage Leak Detection
158
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
HVLKD
HVLKT
HVTCNT
IICSCL
IICSDA
IPRXD
IPTXD
KCS
KCT
KCTCNT
KYE
L1 (R)
L2 (T)
LAZENB
LAZERA
LAZERB
LAZREF
LBSN1
LBSN1
LBSN2
LCCFDIN
LCDOSN
LCLUM1
LCLUM2
LCMA
LCMAB
LCMB
LCMBB
LCRRSN
LCSDSN
LCSOL
LLBSN
LLUM
LMA
LMAB
LMB
LMBB
LMCLK
LOPSN
LPCNT
LPCNT
LPESN
LPESN
LPEWSN1
LPEWSN2
LPEWSN3
LPFCL
Function
Separation Leak Detection
Bias Transfer Leak Detection
Bias Transfer ON/OFF, PWM
IIC Transmission Clock
IIC Transmission Signal
Finisher IPC Reception
Finisher IPC Transmission
Counter Detect Signal
Key Counter
Card Counter
Connector Key
Line Signal
Line Signal
Laser Enable
Laser Compulsion Lighting A
Laser Compulsion Lighting B
Laser Reference
Upper Limit Sensor Signal
Upper Limit Sensor-1
LCC FIFO Data In
Lift Motor Control Signal 1
Motor A Signal
Motor AB Signal
Motor B Signal
Motor BB Signal
Set Sensor Signal
Paper Feed Solenoid-1 Control Signal
1st Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal
Scan Motor A Signal
Scan Motor AB Signal
Scan Motor B Signal
Scan Motor BB Signal
Scanner Motor Clock
Connection Detect Sensor Signal
Scanner Lamp Control Clock
Scanner Lamp Control Signal
Paper Sensor Detection Signal
Paper Sensor-1
Paper Remaining Sensor 1 Signal
Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal
159
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
LPFCL
LPPSN
LPUSOL
LUM1
LUM1-1
LUM1-2
LUM2-1
LUM2-2
MAGCL
MMA
MMAB
MMB
MMBB
MMCLK
MMFR
MMLD
MMPS
N.C.
nACK
nADFSES
nATT
nAUTFD
nCTON
nDUACK
nDUPRNT
nERROR
nFAXRST
nGARST
nHKOF
nLD1
nLD2
nLPOW1
nLPOW2
nPACK
nPCIRING
nPNLRST
nPRDY
nPRGDWN
nPRST
nPVSYNC
nSACK
nSELIN
nSENTIM
nSLPKY
nSREQ
nSTROB
nSTRX
Function
Paper Feed Solenoid Control Signal
2nd Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal
LUM1 Control Signal
LUM2 Control Signal
Magnetic Roller Clutch Control Signal
ADF Main Motor A Signal
ADF Main Motor AB Signal
ADF Main Motor B Signal
ADF Main Motor BB Signal
Main Motor Clock
Main Motor CW/CCW
Main Motor Lock Detection Signal
Main Motor Start/Stop
Not Used
ACK Signal
ADF Document Detect
Attention Signal
Auto Feed Signal
Ring Detection Signal
ADU Printer ACK Signal
ADU Print Request Signal
Error Signal
FAX Board Reset Signal
CCD PCB Reset Signal
External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal
Laser 1 Control Signal (-)
Not Used
Not Used
Printer ACK Signal
FAX Wake Up Signal
Panel Reset Signal
Printer Ready Signal
F-ROM Rewrite
SPC Reset Signal</p>0: Reset
Print Registration
Scan ACK Signal
Select Input Signal
Scanner LSYNC Signal
Sleep Key
Scanner Request Signal
Strobe Signal
Sorter Reception (-)
160
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
nSTTX
nSYNC
nVRDY
nVREQ
OE
OPSN
OQFCLK
OQFDIN
OQFDOUT
OQFENB
OQFLD
OQFLTH
OQMCLK
OQMCLK
OQMCT
OQMLK
OQRRCL
ORGSN
ORGSN
ORSIZ1
ORSIZ2
ORSIZ3
ORSIZ4
ORSIZ5
OZFL2
OZFM2
P12CNT
PASN
pBDA
pBDB
pBUSY
PCCL
pCMLD
PCRSN
PCSN
PCSSOL1
PCSSOL2
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PD8
PDIAG
pERROR
Function
Sorter Transmission Signal (-)
VSYNC Reset Signal
Print ACK Request Signal
AFE Digital Data Bus Enable
ADF Cover Open Detection Signal
OQ FIFO Clock
OQ FIFO Data In
OQ FIFO Data Out
OQ FIFO Enable
OQ FIFO Load
OQ FIFO Latch
OQ Motor FIFO Clock
Drive Motor Clock
Drive Motor Control
Drive Motor Lock Signal
Registration Clutch Control Signal
Original Sensor Signal
Original Sensor Detection Signal
Original Size Sensor Signal 0
Ozone Fan Lock Detection Signal
Ozone Fan Control Signal
Exit Fan Control Signal
Platen Cover Open Sensor Signal
Print BDA Signal
Print BDB Signal
Busy Signal
Intermediate Clutch Control Signal
Line Switching Relay Drive Signal
Intermediate Sensor Detection Signal
Platen Cover Angle Sensor Signal
Paper Tray Solenoid Control Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Diagnostic Bus Signal
No Paper Signal
161
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
PESN1
PESN1
PESN2
PEWSSN1
PEWSSN2
PEWSSN3
PFCL1
PFCL1
PFCL2
PFCLCNT
PFOSN1
PFOSN2
PFSIZSN1
PFSIZSN2
PFSIZSN3
PGND
pINIT
pLD1
pLD2
PMA
PMAB
PMB
PMBB
PMCLK
PMCNT
PMLOCK
PNLDO1
PNLSCLK1
POWSW
pPRXD
PPSOLCNT
pPTXD
PR1SN
pSELECT
pSPKOT
pSTRX
pSTTX
PTG
PTL
PUSOL1
PUSOL1
PUSOL2
PVCNT
PWFL
PWFM
QDOSN
RR1CLCNT
Function
Paper Sensor-1
Paper Sensor-2
Paper Feed Clutch-1 Control Signal
Paper Exit Sensor 1 Detection Signal
Paper Size Sensor 1 Signal
Ground
Initiation
Laser 1 Control Signal (+)
Paper Feed Motor A Signal
Paper Feed Motor AB Signal
Paper Feed Motor B Signal
Paper Feed Motor BB Signal
Polygon Motor Clock
Polygon Motor Control Signal
Polygon Motor Lock Signal
Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Data
Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Clock
POW SW
Reception Data Signal
Pinch Solenoid Control Signal
Transmission Data Signal
Paper Select Signal
Line Signal, Dial Tone
Sorter Reception Signal (+)
Sorter Transmission Signal (+)
CCD Shift GATE Signal
Pre Transfer Lamp
Printer 24V Control
PS Fan Lock Detection Signal
PS Fan Control Signal
Registration Roller 1 Clutch Control Signal
162
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
RR2CLCNT
RR2SN
RR3SN
RRCL
RRSN
RVCLK
RVEXSN
RVJAMSN
RVMA
RVMAB
RVMB
RVMBB
RVSN
RVSSOL1
RVSSOL2
SB1CLCNT
SB2CLCNT
SCFL
SCFM
SDCLCNT
SEPSOL
SH A
SH B
SIZE1SN
SIZE2SN
SIZE3SN
SIZE4SN
SPCRXD
SPCTXD
SPPSN
SSA1
SSA2
SSA3
STRVP
STSLCNT
SVCNT
TDREF
TDSNIN
TED
TENPSN
TFBOXSN
TFSN
THI1
THI2
TMGSN
TRBLSW1
VCDS
Function
Registration Sensor Signal
Inverting Motor Clock
Inverting Exit Sensor Detection Signal
Inverting JAM Sensor Detection Signal
Inverting Motor A Signal
Inverting Motor AB Signal
Inverting Motor B Signal
Inverting Motor BB Signal
Inverting Sensor Detection Signal
Inverting Solenoid Control Signal
Suction Fan Lock Detection Signal
Suction Fan Control Signal
Slow Down Clutch Control Signal
Separation Solenoid Control Signal
Sample Hold Signal A
Sample Hold Signal B
Original Size Sensor 1 Detection Signal
SPC Reception Data Signal
SPC Transmission Data Signal
System Paper Path Sensor Signal
Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal
Control Signal
Stamp Solenoid Control Signal
Scanner 24V Control
Toner Density Sensor Reference
Toner Density Sensor Signal
Toner Detect Sensor Signal
Toner Waste Container Sensor Detection Signal
Toner Waste Sensor Signal
Fuser Thermistor 1
Fuser Thermistor 2
Timing Sensor Detection Signal
Toner Waste Collect Signal
Density Sensor ON
163
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
Vcnt
VTED
WEBSOL
ZCIN
ZNSN1a
ZNSN1b
ZNSN1c
ZNSN2a
ZNSN2b
ZNSN2c
ZNSNa
ZNSNb
ZNSNc
Function
Inverter Control Signal
Toner Detect Sensor ON
Web Solenoid Control Signal
Zero Cross
Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Lower)
Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Lower)
Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Lower)
Paper Remaining Sensor a
Paper Remaining Sensor b
Paper Remaining Sensor c
164
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.11. SC PC Board
CN51
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN51-1
+24V
DC PCB
CN143-2
CN51-2
nLPOW1
DC PCB
CN143-3
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Power Control
+3.3V
0V
CN51-3
+5VD
DC PCB
CN143-4
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN51-4
+5VP
DC PCB
CN143-5
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN51-5
nLPOW2
DC PCB
CN143-6
Power Control
+5V
0V
CN51-6
+5V
DC PCB
CN143-7
CN51-7
GND
DC PCB
CN143-8
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN51-8
GND
Ground
DC PCB
CN143-9
0V
CN51-9
GND
Ground
DC PCB
CN143-10
0V
CN51-10
GND
DC PCB
CN143-11
Ground
0V
CN51-11
GND
Ground
DC PCB
CN143-12
0V
165
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN51-12
+3.3V
DC PCB
CN143-13
+3.3V
CN51-13
+3.3V
DC PCB
CN143-14
+3.3V
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
CN52
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN52-1
+24V
PNL1 PCB
CN220-1
+24V
CN52-2
+5VP
PNL1 PCB
CN220-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN52-3
+5V
PNL1 PCB
CN220-3
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN52-4
GND
PNL1 PCB
CN220-4
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN52-5
GND
PNL1 PCB
CN220-5
Ground
0V
CN52-6
pPTXD
PNL1 PCB
CN220-6
+3.3V
0V
CN52-7
pPRXD
PNL1 PCB
CN220-7
+3.3V
0V
CN52-8
nPNLRST
PNL1 PCB
CN220-8
+3.3V
RESET
166
0V
Panel Reset Signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN52-9
Signal Name
nLPOW2
Destination
Signal Waveform
PNL1 PCB
CN220-9
Function
+5V
Power Control
0V
CN52-10
nSLPKY
PNL1 PCB
CN220-10
+3.3V
PUSH
CN52-11
nLPOW1
PNL1 PCB
CN220-11
Sleep Key
0V
+3.3V
Power Control
0V
CN52-12
nFAXRST
PNL1 PCB
CN220-12
+3.3V
RESET
CN52-13
PNLSCLK1
PNL1 PCB
CN220-13
0V
Panel F-ROM Rewrite
Serial Clock
+3.3V
0V
CN52-14
PNLDO1
PNL1 PCB
CN220-14
Panel F-ROM Rewrite

Serial Data
+3.3V
0V
CN52-15
nPCIRING
PNL1 PCB
CN220-15
+3.3V
FAX Wake Up Signal
0V
CN53
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN53-1
Signal Name
nPRDY
Destination
Signal Waveform
SPC PCB
CN702-1
Function
+5V
0V
CN53-2
nVRDY
SPC PCB
CN702-2
+5V
VSYNC Reset Signal
0V
CN53-3
nPACK
SPC PCB
CN702-3
+5V
0V
167
Printer ACK Signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN53-4
Signal Name
nATT
Destination
Signal Waveform
SPC PCB
CN702-4
Function
+5V
Attention Signal
0V
CN53-5
nDUACK
SPC PCB
CN702-5
+5V
0V
CN53-6
pBDA
SPC PCB
CN702-6
Print BDA Signal
+3.3V
0V
CN53-7
pBDB
SPC PCB
CN702-7
Print BDB Signal
+3.3V
0V
CN53-8
nVREQ
SPC PCB
CN702-8
+5V
0V
CN53-9
nSACK
SPC PCB
CN702-9
+5V
Scan ACK Signal
0V
CN53-10
nPVSYNC
SPC PCB
CN702-10
+5V
Print Registration
0V
CN53-11
nDUPRNT
SPC PCB
CN702-11
+5V
0V
CN53-12
nSENTIM
SPC PCB
CN702-12
+5V
0V
CN53-13
nSREQ
SPC PCB
CN702-13
+5V
0V
CN53-14
nPRST
SPC PCB
CN702-14
+5V
0V
168
SPC Reset Signal

0: Reset
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN53-15
Signal Name
nPRGDWN
Destination
Signal Waveform
SPC PCB
CN702-15
Function
+5V
F-ROM Rewrite
0V
CN53-16
GND
SPC PCB
CN702-16
Ground
0V
CN54
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN54-1
Signal Name
IICSDA
Destination
Signal Waveform
SPC PCB
CN703-1
Function
+5V
0V
CN54-2
IICSCL
SPC PCB
CN703-2
+5V
0V
CN54-3
GND
SPC PCB
CN703-3
Ground
0V
CN54-4
GND
SPC PCB
CN703-4
Ground
0V
CN54-5
GND
SPC PCB
CN703-5
Ground
0V
CN54-6
GND
SPC PCB
CN703-6
Ground
0V
CN54-7
SPCRXD
SPC PCB
CN703-7
+5V
0V
CN54-8
SPCTXD
SPC PCB
CN703-8
+5V
0V
169
SPC Transmission Data

Signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN55
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN55-1
Signal Name
GACLK-
Destination
CCD PCB
CN850-1
Signal Waveform
+1.3V
Function
Gate Array Clock-
+1.1V
CN55-2
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-2
Ground
0V
CN55-3
GACLK-
CCD PCB
CN850-3
+1.3V
Gate Array Clock+
+1.1V
CN55-4
SCCLK+
CCD PCB
CN850-4
+1.3V
AFE Serial Date Clock+
+1.1V
CN55-5
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-5
Ground
0V
CN55-6
SCCLK-
CCD PCB
CN850-6
+1.3V
AFE Serial Date Clock-
+1.1V
CN55-7
nUN-USE
CCD PCB
CN850-7
Not Used
CN55-8
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-8
Ground
0V
CN55-9
pUN-USE
CCD PCB
CN850-9
CN55-10
MCLK+
CCD PCB
CN850-10
Not Used
+1.3V
Master Clock+
+1.1V
CN55-11
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-11
Ground
0V
170
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN55-12
Signal Name
MCLK-
Destination
CCD PCB
CN850-12
Signal Waveform
+1.3V
Function
Master Clock-
+1.1V
CN55-13
TXCLK+
CCD PCB
CN850-13
+1.3V
Image Date Transmission

Clock+
+1.1V
CN55-14
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-14
Ground
0V
CN55-15
TXCLK-
CCD PCB
CN850-15
+1.3V
Image Date Transmission

Clock-
+1.1V
CN55-16
TX2+
CCD PCB
CN850-16
+1.3V
Image Date Out2+
+1.1V
CN55-17
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-17
Ground
0V
CN55-18
TX2-
CCD PCB
CN850-18
+1.3V
Image Date Out2-
+1.1V
CN55-19
TX1+
CCD PCB
CN850-19
+1.3V
Image Date Out1+
+1.1V
CN55-20
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-20
Ground
0V
CN55-21
TX1-
CCD PCB
CN850-21
+1.3V
Image Date Out1-
+1.1V
CN55-22
TX0+
CCD PCB
CN850-22
+1.3V
+1.1V
171
Image Date Out0+
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN55-23
Signal Name
GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
CCD PCB
CN850-23
Function
Ground
0V
CN55-24
TX0-
CCD PCB
CN850-24
Image Date Out0-
+1.3V
+1.1V
CN55-25
CLIPIN
CCD PCB
CN850-25
AFE Sample Hold Clamp

Signal
3.3V
0V
CN55-26
nSEN1
CCD PCB
CN850-26
AFE Serial Date Output

Enable Signal 1
3.3V
0V
CN55-27
SDI
CCD PCB
CN850-27
AFE Serial Date Signal
3.3V
0V
CN55-28
nSEN2
CCD PCB
CN850-28
AFE Serial Date Output

Enable Signal 2
3.3V
0V
CN55-29
nSLSYNC
CCD PCB
CN850-29
Horizontal Svnchronous
Signal
3.3V
0V
CN55-30
OE
CCD PCB
CN850-30
0V
CN55-31
pBLKCLP
CCD PCB
CN850-31
Output Enable
3.3V
Enable
Disabl
3.3V
AFE Block Level Clamp

Switch Signal
0V
CN55-32
+12V
CCD PCB
CN850-32
CN55-33
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-33
+12V
Ground
0V
172
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN55-34
+12V
CCD PCB
CN850-34
CN55-35
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-35
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
+12V
Function
Ground
0V
CN55-36
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-36
Ground
0V
CN55-37
+5V
CCD PCB
CN850-37
CN55-38
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-38
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN55-39
+5V
CCD PCB
CN850-39
CN55-40
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-40
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN55-41
+5V
CCD PCB
CN850-41
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN55-42
+3.3V
CCD PCB
CN850-42
+3.3V
CN55-43
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-43
Ground
0V
CN55-44
+3.3V
CCD PCB
CN850-44
CN55-45
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-45
+3.3V
Ground
0V
173
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN55-46
+3.3V
CCD PCB
CN850-46
CN55-47
GND
CCD PCB
CN850-47
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
+3.3V
Ground
0V
CN55-48
nGARST
CCD PCB
CN850-48
RESE
0V
CN55-49
GND
3.3V
CCD PCB
CN850-49
Ground
0V
CN55-50
ITG
CCD PCB
CN850-50
TG Signal for Product Line
0V
CN57
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN57-1
+3.3V
LSU PCB
CN551-1
CN57-2
GND
LSU PCB
CN551-2
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
+3.3V
Ground
0V
CN57-3
pLD1
LSU PCB
CN551-3
+3.3V
0V
CN57-4
nLD1
LSU PCB
CN551-4
+3.3V
0V
CN57-5
pLD2
LSU PCB
CN551-5
+3.3V
0V
CN57-6
nLD2
LSU PCB
CN551-6
+3.3V
0V
174
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN58
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN58-1
Signal Name
GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
PR CON PCB
CN210-1
Ground
0V
CN58-2
GND
PR CON PCB
CN211-1
Ground
0V
CN58-3
GND
PR CON PCB
CN210-2
Ground
0V
CN58-4
+5V
PR CON PCB
CN211-2
+5V
CN58-5
PD8
PR CON PCB
CN210-3
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Data Signal
0V
CN58-6
+5V
PR CON PCB
CN211-3
+5V
CN58-7
PD7
PR CON PCB
CN210-4
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Data Signal
0V
CN58-8
GND
PR CON PCB
CN211-4
Ground
0V
CN58-9
PD6
PR CON PCB
CN210-5
+5V
Data Signal
0V
CN58-10
nSELIN
PR CON PCB
CN211-5
+5V
Select Input Signal
0V
CN58-11
PD5
PR CON PCB
CN210-6
+5V
0V
175
Data Signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN58-12
Signal Name
nAUTFD
Destination
Signal Waveform
PR CON PCB
CN211-6
Function
+5V
Auto Feed Signal
0V
CN58-13
PD4
PR CON PCB
CN210-7
+5V
Data Signal
0V
CN58-14
nERROR
PR CON PCB
CN211-7
+5V
Error Signal
0V
CN58-15
PD3
PR CON PCB
CN210-8
+5V
Data Signal
0V
CN58-16
pSELECT
PR CON PCB
CN211-8
+5V
Paper Select Signal
0V
CN58-17
PD2
PR CON PCB
CN210-9
+5V
Data Signal
0V
CN58-18
pINIT
PR CON PCB
CN211-9
+5V
Initiation
0V
CN58-19
PD1
PR CON PCB
CN210-10
+5V
Data Signal
0V
CN58-20
pERROR
PR CON PCB
CN211-10
+5V
No Paper Signal
0V
CN58-21
GND
Ground
PR CON PCB
CN210-11
0V
CN58-22
GND
PR CON PCB
CN211-11
Ground
0V
176
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN58-23
Signal Name
nSTROB
Destination
Signal Waveform
PR CON PCB
CN210-12
Function
+5V
Strobe Signal
0V
CN58-24
pBUSY
PR CON PCB
CN211-12
Busy Signal
+5V
0V
CN58-25
GND
PR CON PCB
CN210-13
Ground
0V
CN58-26
nACK
PR CON PCB
CN211-13
+5V
ACK Signal
0V
CN58-27
GND
PR CON PCB
CN210-14
Ground
0V
CN58-28
N.C.
PR CON PCB
CN211-14
Not Used
CN59
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN59-1
Signal Name
ATRST
Destination
HDD
CNSHD1-1
Signal Waveform
GND
Reset Signal
+5V
0V
CN59-2
Function
RESET
HDD
CNSHD1-2
Ground
0V
CN59-3
ATD7
HDD
CNSHD1-3
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-4
ATD8
HDD
CNSHD1-4
+5V
0V
177
HDD Data Bus
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN59-5
Signal Name
ATD6
Destination
Signal Waveform
HDD
CNSHD1-5
Function
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-6
ATD9
HDD
CNSHD1-6
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-7
ATD5
HDD
CNSHD1-7
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-8
ATD10
HDD
CNSHD1-8
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-9
ATD4
HDD
CNSHD1-9
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-10
ATD11
HDD
CNSHD1-10
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-11
ATD3
HDD
CNSHD1-11
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-12
ATD12
HDD
CNSHD1-12
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-13
ATD2
HDD
CNSHD1-13
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-14
ATD13
HDD
CNSHD1-14
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-15
ATD1
HDD
CNSHD1-15
+5V
0V
178
HDD Data Bus
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN59-16
Signal Name
ATD14
Destination
Signal Waveform
HDD
CNSHD1-16
Function
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-17
ATD0
HDD
CNSHD1-17
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-18
ATD15
HDD
CNSHD1-18
+5V
HDD Data Bus
0V
CN59-19
GND
HDD
CNSHD1-19
Ground
0V
CN59-20
KYE
HDD
CNSHD1-20
CN59-21
ATDMAREQ HDD
CNSHD1-21
Connector Key
+5V
DMA Request Signal
0V
CN59-22
GND
Ground
HDD
CNSHD1-22
0V
CN59-23
ATIOWR
HDD
CNSHD1-23
+5V
0V
CN59-24
GND
HDD
CNSHD1-24
Ground
0V
CN59-25
ATIORD
HDD
CNSHD1-25
+5V
0V
CN59-26
GND
Ground
HDD
CNSHD1-26
0V
179
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN59-27
Signal Name
ATIORDY
Destination
Signal Waveform
HDD
CNSHD1-27
Function
+5V
0V
CN59-28
CSEL
HDD
CNSHD1-28
+5V
Cable Select Signal
0V
CN59-29
ATDMAACK HDD
CNSHD1-29
+5V
DMA ACK Signal
0V
CN59-30
GND
HDD
CNSHD1-30
Ground
0V
CN59-31
ATAINT
HDD
CNSHD1-31
+5V
0V
CN59-32
ATIO16
HDD
CNSHD1-32
+5V
HDD 16-bit Transfer Control

Signal
0V
CN59-33
ATA1
HDD
CNSHD1-33
+5V
HDD Address Bus
0V
CN59-34
PDIAG
HDD
CNSHD1-34
+5V
0V
CN59-35
ATA0
HDD
CNSHD1-35
+5V
HDD Address Bus
0V
CN59-36
ATA2
HDD
CNSHD1-36
+5V
HDD Address Bus
0V
CN59-37
ATCS0
HDD
CNSHD1-37
+5V
0V
180
DP-8060/8045/8035
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN59-38
Signal Name
ATCS1
Destination
Signal Waveform
HDD
CNSHD1-38
Function
+5V
Secondary HDD Select

Signal
0V
CN59-39
ATDASP
HDD
CNSHD1-39
+5V
0V
CN59-40
GND
HDD
CNSHD1-40
Ground
0V
181
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.12. PNL1 PC Board

CN220
Refer to SC PC Board CN52.
CN221
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN221-1 nADFSES
DRV PCB
CN767-2
Signal Waveform
Function
ADF Document Detect
Detected
CN221-2
GND
DRV PCB
CN767-1
Ground
0V
CN222
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN222-1 POWSW
SW
Signal Waveform
Function
POW SW
OFF
SW ON
CN222-2
GND
SW
Ground
0V
CN224
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN224-1 +24V
INV PCB
CN1-1
CN224-2
CN224-3
Vcnt
GND
INV PCB
CN1-2
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Output
OFF
+5V
Output
ON
0V

H: Inverter Output ON
Ground
INV PCB
CN1-3
0V
182
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.13. ADF PC Board

CN650
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN650-1 N.C.
CN650-2
GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
SPC PCB
CN704-7
Ground
0V
CN650-3
AMMCLK
SPC PCB
CN704-8
+5V
0V
CLK
CN650-4
APMCLK
SPC PCB
CN704-9
+5V
ARVCL1
SPC PCB
CN704-10
+24V
OFF
ON
CN650-6
ARVCL2
SPC PCB
CN704-11
+24V
OFF
ARRCNT
SPC PCB
CN704-12
ON
CN650-8
CN650-9
ARRSN2
ADXSN
CN650-10 ADFRRSN1
CN650-11 ARST
SPC PCB
CN704-13
SPC PCB
CN704-14
SPC PCB
CN704-15
SPC PCB
CN704-16
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
Inverting Path Sensor

Detection Signal
0V
+5V
Detected
Registration Sensor 2
Signal
0V
+5V
Detected
Registration Roller Clutch

Control Signal
0V
Signal
0V
System Reset Signal
+5V
RESET
183
Inverting Clutch 2 Control

Signal
0V
+24V
OFF

Signal
0V
ON
CN650-7
ADF Paper Feed Motor

Clock
0V
CLK
CN650-5
0V
DP-8060/8045/8035
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN650-12 N.C.
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
CN651
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN651-1 AFDOUT
SPC PCB
CN704-1
Signal Waveform
+5V
AFENB
FIFO Data In
0V
Pluse
CN651-2
Function
SPC PCB
CN704-2
+5V
FIFO Enable
0V
CN651-3
AFLTH
SPC PCB
CN704-3
+5V
FIFO Latch
0V
CN651-4
ADCLK
SPC PCB
CN704-4
+5V
0V
CLK
CN651-5
AFLD
SPC PCB
CN704-5
FIFO Load
+5V
Shift
Load
CN651-6
AFDIN
FIFO Clock
SPC PCB
CN704-6
0V
+5V
Pluse
FIFO Data Out
0V
CN652
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN652-1 N.C.
CN652-2
GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
Size Sensor 1-3
Ground
0V
184
DP-8060/8045/8035
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN652-3 SIZE1SN
Size Sensor 1-2
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
CN652-4
+5V
Size Sensor 1-1
CN652-5
GND
Size Sensor 2-3
Function
+5V
Detected
Original Size Sensor 1

Detection Signal
0V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN652-6
SIZE2SN
Size Sensor 2-2
Not
Detected
CN652-7
+5V
Size Sensor 2-1
CN652-8
GND
Size Sensor 3-3
+5V
Detected

Detection Signal
0V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN652-9
SIZE3SN
Size Sensor 3-2
Not
Detected
CN652-10 +5V
Size Sensor 3-1
CN652-11 GND
Size Sensor 4-3
+5V
Detected

Detection Signal
0V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN652-12 SIZE4SN
Size Sensor 4-2
Not
Detected
CN652-13 +5V
Size Sensor 4-1
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
CN652-14 N.C.

Detection Signal
+5 VDC Power Supply
Not Used
185
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN653
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN653-1 GND
Registration
Sensor 1-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN653-2
PR1SN
Registration
Sensor 1-2
CN653-3
+5V
Registration
Sensor 1-1
CN653-4
GND
Original Sensor-3
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
Signal
0V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN653-5
ORGSN
Original Sensor-2
Not
Detected
CN653-6
+5VP
+5V
Detected
0V
Original Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN654
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN654-1 N.C.
CN654-2
GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
Ground
Inverting
Sensor-3
0V
CN654-3
CN654-4
DXSN
+5V
Inverting
Sensor-2
Not
Detected
Inverting
Sensor-1
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
186
Inverting Path Sensor

Detection Signal
+5 VDC Power Supply
DP-8060/8045/8035
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN654-5 GND
Registration
Sensor 2-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN654-6
RR2SN
Registration
Sensor 2-2
CN654-7
+5V
Registration
Sensor 2-1
CN654-8
GND
Registration
Sensor 3-3
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
Signal
0V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN654-9
RR3SN
CN654-10 +5V
Registration
Sensor 3-2
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
Signal
0V
Registration
Sensor 3-1
+5V
CN654-11 N.C.
+5 VDC Power Supply
Not Used
CN655
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN655-1 +24VO1
Paper Feed
Clutch
CN655-2
PFCLCNT
Paper Feed
Clutch
Signal Waveform
OFF
ON
CN655-3
N.C.
CN655-4
GND
Function
+24V
+24V
Paper Feed Clutch Control

Signal
0V
Not Used
Door Sensor-3
Ground
0V
187
DP-8060/8045/8035
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN655-5 OPSN
Door Sensor-2
Signal Waveform
+5V
Open
Close
CN655-6
+5V
Function
ADF Cover Open Detection
Signal
0V
Door Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN656
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN656-1 +24VO1
Registration
Clutch 2
CN656-2
RR2CLCNT
Registration
Clutch 2
Signal Waveform
OFF
Function
+24V
+24V
Registration Roller 2 Clutch

Control Signal
ON
0V
CN656-3
+24VO1
Registration
Clutch 1
+24V
CN656-4
RR1CLCNT
Registration
Clutch 1
+24V
Registration Roller 1 Clutch

Control Signal
OFF
ON
0V
CN658
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN658-1 +24VO1
Stamp
CN658-2
STSLCNT
Signal Waveform
Stamp
OFF
+24V
+24V
Stamp Solenoid Control

Signal
ON
CN658-3
GND
Function
0V
Exit Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN658-4
EXSN
Exit Sensor-2
Not
Detected
188
+5V
Detected
0V
Paper Exit Sensor Detection

Signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN658-5 +5V
Exit Sensor-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN659
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN659-1 N.C.
Destination
Signal Waveform
Not Used
CN659-2
+24VO1
Slow Down
Clutch
CN659-3
+24VO1
CN659-4
CN659-5
+24V
Inverting Clutch 1
+24V
+24VO1
Inverting Clutch 2
+24V
SDCLCNT
Slow Down
Clutch
+24V
Slow Down Clutch Control

Signal
OFF
ON
CN659-6
SB1CLCNT
Inverting Clutch 1
0V
+24V
OFF
ON
CN659-7
SB2CLCNT
Inverting Clutch 2

Signal
0V
+24V
OFF
ON
CN659-8
Function

Signal
0V
N.C.
Not Used
CN660
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN660-1 +24VO1
Pinch Solenoid
Signal Waveform
+24V
189
Function
DP-8060/8045/8035
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN660-2 PPSOLCNT Pinch Solenoid
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
OFF
ON
Pinch Solenoid Control

Signal
0V
CN660-3
N.C.
Not Used
CN660-4
N.C.
Not Used
CN660-5
DXSLCNT1
Inverting
Solenoid
+24V
OFF
ON
Inverting Solenoid Control 1

Signal
0V
CN660-6
+24VO1
Inverting
Solenoid
+24V
CN660-7
DXSLCNT2
Inverting
Solenoid
+24V
Inverting Solenoid Control 2

Signal
OFF
ON
0V
CN661
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN661-1 N.C.
CN661-2
PMA
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
Paper Feed
Motor-11
+24V
0V
CN661-3
+24VO1
Paper Feed
Motor-9
CN661-4
PMAB
Paper Feed
Motor-7
+24V
Paper Feed Motor AB

Signal
+24V
0V
CN661-5
PMB
Paper Feed
Motor-5
+24V
0V
190
DP-8060/8045/8035
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN661-6 +24VO1
Paper Feed
Motor-3
CN661-7
PMBB
Paper Feed
Motor-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Paper Feed Motor BB

Signal
+24V
0V
CN661-8
MMA
ADF Main
Motor-11
+24V
0V
CN661-9
+24VO1
CN661-10 MMAB
ADF Main
Motor-9
ADF Main
Motor-7
+24V
+24V
0V
CN661-11 MMB
ADF Main
Motor-5
+24V
0V
CN661-12 +24VO1
ADF Main
Motor-3
CN661-13 MMBB
ADF Main
Motor-1
+24V
+24V
0V
CN661-14 N.C.
Not Used
CN662
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN662-1 N.C.
CN662-2
+24VO1
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
DRV PCB
CN753-1
+24V
191
DP-8060/8045/8035
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN662-3 +24VO1
DRV PCB
CN753-2
CN662-4
PGND
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
DRV PCB
CN753-3
Ground
0V
CN662-5
PGND
DRV PCB
CN753-4
Ground
0V
CN662-6
+5V
DRV PCB
CN753-5
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN662-7
+5V
DRV PCB
CN753-6
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN662-8
+5VP
DRV PCB
CN753-7
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN662-9
ORGSN
DRV PCB
CN753-8
CN662-10 GND
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
Original Sensor Detection

Signal
0V
DRV PCB
CN753-9
Ground
0V
CN662-11 N.C.
Not Used
CN662-12 N.C.
Not Used
CN662-13 N.C.
Not Used
192
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.14. SPC PC Board

CN701
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN701-1 +5V
DRV PCB
CN752-1
CN701-2
+5V
DRV PCB
CN752-2
CN701-3
GND
DRV PCB
CN752-3
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN701-4
GND
DRV PCB
CN752-4
Ground
0V
CN701-5
PGND
DRV PCB
CN752-5
Ground
0V
CN701-6
PGND
DRV PCB
CN752-6
Ground
0V
CN701-7
+24VM
DRV PCB
CN752-7
+24V
CN701-8
+24VM
DRV PCB
CN752-8
+24V
CN702
CN703
CN704
Refer to ADF PC Board CN650 and CN651.
193
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN705
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN705-1 ORSIZ1
Original Size
Sensor 1-1
CN705-2
CN705-3
ORSIZ2
ORSIZ3
Original Size
Sensor 1-2
Original Size
Sensor 1-3
CN705-4
+5V
Original Size
Sensor 1-4
CN705-5
GND
Original Size
Sensor 1-5
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
Function
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected
Original Size Sensor

Signal 1
0V
+5V
Detected

Signal 0

Signal 2
0V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN705-6
+5V
Original Size
Sensor 2.-1
CN705-7
ORSIZ4
Original Size
Sensor 2-2
CN705-8
GND
Not
Detected
Detected
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V

Signal 3
0V
Ground
Original Size
Sensor 2-3
0V
CN705-9
+5V
CN705-10 ORSIZ5
CN705-11 GND
Original Size
Sensor 3-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Original Size
Sensor 3-2
+5V

Signal 4
Not
Detected
Detected
0V
Ground
Original Size
Sensor 3-3
0V
194
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN705-12 +5V
Scanner Home
Position Sensor
-1
CN705-13 HPSN
Signal Waveform
Scanner Home
Position Sensor
-2
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
Scanner Home Position

Sensor Signal
0V
CN705-14 GND
Scanner Home
Position Sensor
-3
Ground
0V
CN706
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN706-1 DFOUT
DRV PCB
CN766-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
0V
CN706-2
DFENB
DRV PCB
CN766-2
+5V
Driver FIFO Enable
0V
CN706-3
DFLTH
DRV PCB
CN766-3
+5V
Driver FIFO Latch
0V
CN706-4
DFLD
DRV PCB
CN766-4
+5V
CLK
CN706-5
DFCLK
DRV PCB
CN766-5
Driver FIFO Clock
0V
+5V
Driver FIFO Load
0V
CN706-6
DFDIN
DRV PCB
CN766-6
+5V
Driver FIFO Data In
0V
CN706-7
DFRST
DRV PCB
CN766-7
+5V
0V
195
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN706-8 LMCLK
DRV PCB
CN766-8
Signal Waveform
+5V
RVCLK
DRV PCB
CN766-9
+5V
DRV PCB
CN766-10
+5V
DRV PCB
CN766-11
+5V
Drum Motor Clock
0V
CLK
CN706-12 LPCNT
Main Motor Clock
0V
CLK
CN706-11 DMCLK
0V
CLK
CN706-10 MMCLK
Scanner Motor Clock
0V
CLK
CN706-9
Function
DRV PCB
CN766-12
+5V
Scanner Lamp Control

Clock
0V
CN706-13 PFOSN1
CN706-14 RVEXSN
CN706-15 SVCNT
DRV PCB
CN766-13
DRV PCB
CN766-14
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
DRV PCB
CN766-15
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected
Paper Exit Sensor 1

Detection Signal
Inverting Exit Sensor

Detection Signal
0V
+24V
Scanner 24V Control
ON
0V
CN706-16 PVCNT
DRV PCB
CN766-16
+24V
Printer 24V Control
ON
0V
CN706-17 P12CNT
DRV PCB
CN766-17
+5V
ON
OFF
CN706-18 GND
0V
Ground
DRV PCB
CN766-18
0V
196
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN706-19 GND
DRV PCB
CN766-19
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN706-20 +24V
DRV PCB
CN766-20
+24V
CN707
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN707-1 OQFDOUT System Console
Connector
CNA-2
CN707-2
OQFENB
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
OQ FIFO Data Out
0V
System Console
Connector
CNA-3
+5V
OQ FIFO Enable
0V
CN707-3
CN707-4
CN707-5
CN707-6
CN707-7
CN707-8
OQFLTH
OQFCLK
OQFLD
LCCFDIN
OQFDIN
OQMCLK
System Console
Connector
CNA-4
+5V
System Console
Connector
CNA-5
+5V
OQ FIFO Latch
0V
CLK
OQ FIFO Clock
0V
System Console
Connector
CNA-6
+5V
System Console
Connector
CNA-7
+5V
System Console
Connector
CNB-2
+5V
System Console
Connector
CNB-3
+5V
OQ FIFO Load
0V
LCC FIFO Data In
0V
OQ FIFO Data In
0V
CLK
197
0V
OQ Motor FIFO Clock
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN707-9 +5V
System Console
Connector
CNB-4
CN707-10 GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
System Console
Connector
CNB-5
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN708
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN708-1 nSTRX
Finisher
Connector-8
Signal Waveform
+5V
CLK
CN708-2
pSTRX
Finisher
Connector-9
GND
Sorter Reception Signal (-)
0V
+5V
CLK
CN708-3
Function
0V
Finisher
Connector-10
Ground
0V
CN708-4
nSTTX
Finisher
Connector-11
+5V
CLK
CN708-5
pSTTX
Finisher
Connector-12
CN708-6
IPRXD
Finisher
Connector-2
GND
Sorter Transmission Signal

(+)
0V
+5V
CLK
CN708-7
0V
+5V
CLK
Sorter Transmission Signal

(-)
0V
Finisher
Connector-3
Ground
0V
CN708-8
IPTXD
Finisher
Connector-4
+5V
CLK
198
0V
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN708-9 GND
Finisher
Connector-7
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN708-10 N.C.
Not Used
CN709
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN709-1 GND
Size Sensor 1-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN709-2
PFSIZSN1
Size Sensor 1-2
+5V
0V
CN709-3
+5V
Size Sensor 1-1
CN709-4
GND
Size Sensor 2-3
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN709-5
PFSIZSN2
Size Sensor 2--2
+5V
0V
CN709-6
+5V
Size Sensor 2-1
CN709-7
GND
Size Sensor 1-3
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN709-8
PFSIZSN3
Size Sensor 1-2
+5V
0V
199
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN709-9 +5V
Size Sensor 1-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN710
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN710-1 +24VM
Paper Feed
Clutch
CN710-2
PFCL1
Signal Waveform
Paper Feed
Clutch
Function
+24V
+24V

Signal
ON
0V
CN710-3
+24VM
Paper Feed
Solenoid
+24V
CN710-4
PUSOL1
Paper Feed
Solenoid
+24V
Paper Feed Solenoid

Control Signal
ON
0V
CN710-5
+5V
Paper Path
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN710-6
+5V
Paper Path
Sensor-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN710-7
CRRSN1
Paper Path
Sensor-3
+5V
CN710-8
CN710-9
LBSN1
GND
Upper Limit
Sensor-1
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected
0V
Ground
Upper Limit
Sensor-2
0V
CN710-10 GND
Upper Limit
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
200
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN710-11 +5V
Paper Sensor-1
CN710-12 +5V
Paper Sensor 1-1
CN710-13 PESN1
Paper Sensor-2
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
CN710-14 PEWSSN1
Paper Sensor 1-2
Not
Detected
CN710-15 GND
Detected
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
Paper Sensor Detection

Signal
0V
+5V
Detected
Paper Remaining Sensor 1

Signal
0V
Paper Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN710-16 GND
Paper Sensor 1-3
Ground
0V
CN710-17 +5V
Paper Sensor 2-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN710-18 +5V
Paper Sensor 3-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN710-19 PEWSSN2
Paper Sensor 2-2
+5V

Signal
Not
Detected
CN710-20 PEWSSN3
Paper Sensor 3-2
Not
Detected
CN710-21 GND
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected

Signal
0V
Paper Sensor 2-3
Ground
0V
201
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN710-22 GND
Paper Sensor 3-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN711
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN711-1 +24VM
2nd Tray Lift Up
Motor
CN711-2
LUM1
Signal Waveform
2nd Tray Lift Up

Motor
Function
+24V
+24V
2nd Tray Lift Up Motor

Control Signal
ON
0V
CN712
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN712-1 +24VM
Paper Feed
Clutch
CN712-2
LPFCL
Signal Waveform
Paper Feed
Clutch
Function
+24V
+24V

Signal
ON
0V
CN712-3
+24VM
Paper Feed
Solenoid
+24V
CN712-4
LPUSOL
Paper Feed
Solenoid
+24V
Paper Feed Solenoid

Control Signal
ON
0V
CN712-5
+5V
Paper Path
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN712-6
+5V
Upper Limit
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN712-7
LCRRSN
Paper Path
Sensor 1-3
+5V
Not
Detected
202
Detected
0V
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN712-8 LLBSN
Upper Limit
Sensor-2
CN712-9
GND
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
Function
+5V
Detected
0V
Paper Path
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN712-10 GND
Upper Limit
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN712-11 +5V
Paper Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN712-12 +5V
Paper Sensor 1-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN712-13 LPESN
Paper Sensor-2
+5V
Paper Sensor Detection

Signal
Not
Detected
CN712-14 LPEWSN1
Paper Sensor 1-2
Not
Detected
CN712-15 GND
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected

Signal
0V
Paper Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN712-16 GND
Paper Sensor 1-3
Ground
0V
CN712-17 +5V
Paper Sensor 2-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN712-18 +5V
Paper Sensor 3-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
203
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN712-19 LPEWSN2
Paper Sensor 2-2
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
CN712-20 LPEWSN3
CN712-21 GND
+5V
Detected
Paper Sensor 3-2
Not
Detected
Function
Signal
0V
+5V
Detected

Signal
0V
Paper Sensor 2-3
Ground
0V
CN712-22 GND
Paper Sensor 3-3
Ground
0V
CN712-23 N.C.
Not Used
CN712-24 N.C.
Not Used
CN713
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN713-1 +24VM
1st Tray Lift Up
Motor
CN713-2
LLUM
Signal Waveform
1st Tray Lift Up

Motor
Function
+24V
+24V
1st Tray Lift Up Motor

Control Signal
ON
0V
CN714
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN714-1 +24VM
ADU Clutch
CN714-2
LPFCL
Signal Waveform
ADU Clutch
Function
+24V
+24V
ADU Clutch 2 Control

Signal
ON
0V
204
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN714-3 +24VM
Intermediate
Clutch
CN714-4
PCCL
Signal Waveform
Intermediate
Clutch
Function
+24V
+24V
Intermediate Clutch Control

Signal
ON
0V
CN714-5
+24VM
Sheet Bypass
Clutch
+24V
CN714-6
HFCL
Sheet Bypass
Clutch
+24V
Sheet Bypass Clutch

Control Signal
ON
0V
CN715
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN715-1 +5V
Timing Sensor-1
CN715-2
+5V
Door Open
Sensor-1
CN715-3
TMGSN
Timing Sensor-2
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
CN715-4
QDOSN
Detected
Door Open
Sensor-2
GND
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
Timing Sensor Detection

Signal
0V
+5V
Close
CN715-5
Function
Door Open Sensor

Detection Signal
0V
Timing Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN715-6
GND
Door Open
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN715-7
+5V
Intermediate
Sensor-1
+5V
205
+5 VDC Power Supply
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN715-8 +5V
System Console
Sensor-1
CN715-9
PCRSN
CN715-10 SPPSN
CN715-11 GND
Intermediate
Sensor-2
System Console
Sensor-2
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
Intermediate Sensor
Detection Signal
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected
System Paper Path Sensor

Signal
0V
Intermediate
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN715-12 GND
System Console
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN716
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN716-1 +24VM
Pre Transfer
Lamp-1
CN716-2
PTL
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Pre Transfer
Lamp-2
+24V
Pre Transfer Lamp
ON
0V
CN716-3
+24VM
ADU Clutch
CN716-4
DXCL1
ADU Clutch
+24V
+24V
ADU Clutch 1 Control

Signal
ON
0V
CN716-5
+24VM
Registration
Clutch
+24V
CN716-6
RRCL
Registration
Clutch
+24V
Registration Clutch Control

Signal
ON
0V
206
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN716-7 +5V
ADU Sensor-1
CN716-8
+5V
ADU Registration
Sensor-1
CN716-9
ADUINSN
ADU Sensor-2
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
CN716-10 ADURRSN
CN716-11 GND
ADU Registration
Sensor-2
Not
Detected
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected
ADU Sensor Signal
ADU Registration Sensor

Signal
0V
ADU Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN716-12 GND
ADU Registration
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN716-13 +5V
ADU
Intermediate
Sensor-1
CN716-14 +5V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Registration
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN716-15 ADUCRRSN ADU

Intermediate
Sensor-2
+5V
ADU Intermediate Sensor

Signal
CN716-16 RRSN
CN716-17 GND
Registration
Sensor-2
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
ADU
Intermediate
Sensor-3
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected
0V
Ground
0V
207
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN716-18 GND
Registration
Sensor-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN717
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN717-1 +5V
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 3-1
CN717-2
CN717-3
HSSN3
GND
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 3-2
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
Detected
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
Sheet Bypass Sensor 3

Signal
0V
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 3-3
Ground
0V
CN717-4
+5V
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 2-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN717-5
HSSN2
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 2-2
+5V

Signal
CN717-6
GND
Not
Detected
Detected
0V
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 2-3
Ground
0V
CN717-7
+5V
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 1-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN717-8
HSSN1
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 1-2
+5V

Signal
CN717-9
GND
Not
Detected
Detected
0V
Ground
Sheet Bypass
Sensor 1-3
0V
CN717-10 N.C.
Not Used
208
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN718
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN718-1 +24VM
Sheet Bypass
Solenoid
CN718-2
HFSOL
Signal Waveform
Sheet Bypass
Solenoid
Function
+24V
+24V
Sheet Bypass Solenoid

Control Signal
ON
0V
CN718-3
+5V
Sheet Bypass
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN718-4
HPESN
Sheet Bypass
Sensor-2
+5V
Sheet Bypass Sensor

Detection Signal
CN718-5
GND
Not
Detected
Detected
0V
Sheet Bypass
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN719
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN719-1 BMBB
Toner Bottle
Motor-6
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
CLK
0V
CN719-2
+24VM
Toner Bottle
Motor-5
+24V
CN719-3
BMB
Toner Bottle
Motor-4
+24V
CLK
CN719-4
BMAB
Toner Bottle
Motor-3
CN719-5
+24VM
Toner Bottle
Motor-2
0V
+24V
209
0V
+24V
CLK
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN719-6 BMA
Toner Bottle
Motor-1
Signal Waveform
+24V
TED
Toner Detect
Sensor-2
+5V
VTED
Toner Detect
Sensor-3
+5V
ON
CN719-9
GND
0V
Pluse
CN719-8
0V
CLK
CN719-7
Function
0V
Toner Detect
Sensor-1
Ground
0V
CN719-10 +5V
Toner Bottle
Position Sensor
-1
CN719-11 BPSN
Toner Bottle
Position Sensor
-2
CN719-12 GND
Not
Detected
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
Toner Bottle Position

Sensor Signal
Detected
0V
Toner Bottle
Position Sensor
-3
Ground
0V
CN720
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN720-1 GOPSW1
CN720-6
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
Function
+5V
Detected
0V
CN720-2
+24VM
Toner Density
Sensor-2
+24V
CN720-3
TDREF
Toner Density
Sensor-1
8.5V
0V
210
Developer Missing
Detection
Toner Density Sensor

Reference
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN720-4 TDSNIN
Toner Density
Sensor-3
Signal Waveform
Function
5V
Toner Density Sensor

Signal
0V
CN720-5
GND
Toner Density
Sensor-4
Ground
0V
CN720-6
GND
CN720-1
Ground
0V
CN721
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN721-1 GND
Density Sensor-1
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN721-2
CDSN2
Density Sensor-2
5V
0V
CN721-3
VCDS
Density Sensor-3
+5V
ON
CN721-4
CDSN1
Density Sensor-4
Density Sensor ON
0V
5V
0V
CN722
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN722-1 +5V
Temp Humidity
Sensor-1
CN722-2
HUMSN
Signal Waveform
Temp Humidity
Sensor-2
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
5V
Temp Humidity Sensor

Signal
0V
211
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN722-3 GND
Temp Humidity
Sensor-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN722-4
TENPSN
Temp Humidity
Sensor-4
5V
Temp Humidity Sensor

Signal
0V
CN723
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN723-1 GND
ACD PCB
CN106-9
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN723-2
ZCIN
ACD PCB
CN106-8
+5V
Zero Cross
0V
CN723-3
SSA3
ACD PCB
CN106-7
+5V
Fuser Lamp 3 Control

Signal
0V
CN723-4
SSA2
ACD PCB
CN106-6
+5V

Signal
0V
CN723-5
SSA1
ACD PCB
CN106-5
+5V

Signal
0V
CN723-6
+5V
ACD PCB
CN106-4
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN723-7
+24V
ACD PCB
CN106-3
+24V
CN723-8
ACSW
ACD PCB
CN106-2
+24V
ON
0V
212
Fuser Relay
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN723-9 THI1
Thermistor
Signal Waveform
Function
5V
Fuser Thermistor 1
2.7V
CN723-10 THI2
Thermistor
Fuser Thermistor 2
0V
CN723-11 N.C.
Not Used
CN723-12 N.C.
Not Used
CN724
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN724-1 +24VM
HVPS
CNHV-1
CN724-2
PGND
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
HVPS
CNHV-2
Ground
0V
CN724-3
HVCNT
HVPS
CNHV-3
+5V
0V
CLK
CN724-4
CN724-5
HVLKC
GREFCNT
HVPS
CNHV-4
Not
Detected
HVPS
CNHV-5
CN724-6
HVBACCLK
HVPS
CNHV-6
Detected
HVBDCCNT HVPS
CNHV-7
213
Grid Reference PWM
0V
Bias AC Clock
0V
+5V
CLK
High Voltage Leak

Detection
0V
+5V
CLK
CN724-7
+5V
+5V
CLK
Charge Corona ON/OFF,

PWM
0V
Bias DC ON/OFF, PWM
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN724-8 HVBACCNT HVPS
CNHV-8
Signal Waveform
+5V
HVLKB
CN724-10 HVTCNT
HVPS
CNHV-9
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
HVPS
CNHV-10
HVPS
CNHV-11
+5V
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
+5V
Separation AC ON/OFF,
PWM
0V
CN724-13 HVDDCCNT HVPS

CNHV-13
+5V
Separation DC ON/OFF,
PWM
0V
CLK
Not
Detected
Bias Transfer Leak

Detection
0V
CLK
HVPS
CNHV-14
Bias Transfer ON/OFF,

PWM
0V
CN724-12 HVDACCNT HVPS

CNHV-12
CN724-14 HVLKD
Bias Leak Detection
0V
CLK
CN724-11 HVLKT
Bias AC ON/OFF, PWM
0V
CLK
CN724-9
Function
+5V
Detected
0V
CN725
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN725-1 +24VM
LSU
CN550-5
CN725-2
PGND
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
LSU
CN550-4
Ground
0V
CN725-3
PMLOCK
LSU
CN550-3
+5V
ON
0V
214
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN725-4 PMCNT
LSU
CN550-2
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
ON
Polygon
Signal
Motor
Control
0V
CN725-5
N.C.
CN725-6
PMCLK
Not Used
LSU
CN550-1
+5V
Polygon Motor Clock
0V
CLK
CN726
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN726-1 +5VL
LSU
CN552-1
CN726-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
LSU
CN552-2
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN726-3
GND
LSU
CN552-3
Ground
0V
CN726-4
HSYNC
LSU
CN552-4
+5V
Horizontal Synchronous
Signal
0V
CN726-5
SH A
LSU
CN552-5
+5V
0V
CN726-6
SH B
LSU
CN552-6
+5V
0V
CN726-7
LAZERA
LSU
CN552-7
ON
+5V
0V
215
Laser Compulsion Lighting

A
DP-8060/8045/8035
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN726-8 LAZERB
LSU
CN552-8
Signal Waveform
ON
Function
+5V
Laser Compulsion Lighting

B
0V
CN726-9
LAZREF
LSU
CN552-9
+5V
Laser Reference
ENABLED
0V
CN726-10 LAZENB
LSU
CN552-10
5V
0V
216
Laser Enable
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.15. DRV PC Board

CN750
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN750-1 +24V
LVPS
CN2-1
CN750-2
PGND
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
LVPS
CN2-2
Ground
0V
CN750-3
PGND
LVPS
CN2-3
Ground
0V
CN750-4
+24VD
LVPS
CN2-4
+24V
CN751
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN751-1 +5VP
DC PCB
CN144-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN751-2
+5V
DC PCB
CN144-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN751-3
+5V
DC PCB
CN144-3
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN751-4
+5V
DC PCB
CN144-4
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN751-5
+5V
DC PCB
CN144-5
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN751-6
GND
DC PCB
CN144-6
Ground
0V
217
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN751-7 GND
DC PCB
CN144-7
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN751-8
GND
DC PCB
CN144-8
Ground
0V
CN751-9
GND
DC PCB
CN144-9
Ground
0V
CN751-10 GND
DC PCB
CN144-10
Ground
0V
CN752
Refer to SPC PC Board CN701.
CN753
Refer to ADF PC Board CN662.
CN754
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN754-1 +24VO2
System Console
Connector
CNA-1
CN754-2
+24VO2
System Console
Connector
CNB-1
CN754-3
PGND
System Console
Connector
CNA-8
CN754-4
PGND
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
+24V
Ground
0V
System Console
Connector
CNB-8
Ground
0V
218
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN756
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN756-1 LMA
Scan Motor-1
Signal Waveform
Function
Scan Motor A Signal
+24V
0V
CN756-2
+24VS
Scan Motor-3
CN756-3
LMAB
Scan Motor-5
+24V
+24V
0V
CN756-4
LMB
Scan Motor-7
Scan Motor B Signal
+24V
0V
CN756-5
+24VS
Scan Motor-9
CN756-6
LMBB
Scan Motor-11
+24V
+24V
0V
CN756-7
PGND
Inverter-2
Ground
0V
CN756-8
LPCNT
Inverter-1
+5V
OFF
ON
CN756-9
+24VS
Inverter-3
Scanner Lamp Control

Signal
0V
+24V
CN756-10 N.C.
Not Used
CN756-11 N.C.
Not Used
219
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN756-12 N.C.
CN756-13 GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
ADF Angle
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN756-14 GND
ADF Open
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN756-15 PCSN
CN756-16 PASN
ADF Angle
Sensor-2
ADF Open
Sensor-2
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
Platen Cover Angle Sensor

Signal
0V
+5V
Detected
Platen Cover Open Sensor

Signal
0V
CN756-17 +5V
ADF Angle
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN756-18 +5V
ADF Open
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN757
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN757-1 PGND
Fan1-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN757-2
N.C.
CN757-3
EXFL1
Not Used
Fan1-2
Not
Detected
CN757-4
N.C.
+5V
Detected
Exit Fan 1 Lock Detection

Signal
0V
Not Used
220
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN757-5 EXFM1
Fan1-1
Signal Waveform
+24V
ON
OFF
CN757-6
Function
0V
N.C.
Not Used
CN758
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN758-1 PGND
Ozone Fan-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN758-2
PGND
Dust Fan-3
Ground
0V
CN758-3
OZFL2
Ozone Fan-2
Not
Detected
CN758-4
DDFL
OZFM2
Detected
Dust Fan-2
Not
Detected
CN758-5
+5V
Ozone Fan-1
OFF
DDFM
Dust Fan-1
OFF
CN758-7
PGND
0V
+24V
ON
Dust Fan Lock Detection

Signal
0V
+24V
ON
CN758-6
0V
+5V
Detected
Ozone Fan Lock Detection

Signal
0V
Suction Fan-3
Ground
0V
CN758-8
PGND
PS Fan-3
Ground
0V
221
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN758-9 SCFL
Suction Fan-2
Signal Waveform
Not
Detected
CN758-10 PWFL
CN758-11 SCFM
+5V
Detected
PS Fan-2
Not
Detected
Detected
Suction Fan-1
OFF
0V
+24V
ON
PS Fan Lock Detection

Signal
0V
+24V
PS Fan-1
Suction Fan Lock Detection

Signal
0V
+5V
ON
CN758-12 PWFM
Function
OFF
0V
CN759
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN759-1 PGND
Fan2-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN759-2
PGND
Fan3-3
Ground
0V
CN759-3
EXFL2
Fan2-2
Not
Detected
CN759-4
EXFL3
EXFM2
Detected
Fan3-2
Not
Detected
CN759-5
+5V
Fan2-1
OFF
EXFM3
Fan3-1
OFF
222
0V
+24V
ON

Signal
0V
+24V
ON
CN759-6
0V
+5V
Detected

Signal
0V
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN759-7 GND
Paper Exit
Sensor-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN759-8
CN759-9
PFOSN1
+5V
CN759-10 GND
Paper Exit
Sensor-2
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
Paper Exit Sensor 1

Detection Signal
0V
Paper Exit
Sensor-1
+5V
Paper Exit Door

Sensor-3
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN759-11 EXDOSN2
Paper Exit Door

Sensor-2
+5V
Close
Open
CN759-12 +5V
Paper Exit Door Sensor

Detection Signal
0V
Paper Exit Door

Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN759-13 N.C.
Not Used
CN759-14 N.C.
Not Used
CN760
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN760-1 +24VM
Main Drive Motor
CNMM1-1
CN760-2
PGND
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Main Drive Motor

CNMM1-2
Ground
0V
223
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN761
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN761-1 N.C.
Main Drive Motor
CNMM2-10
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
CN761-2
N.C.
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-9
Not Used
CN761-3
N.C.
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-8
Not Used
CN761-4
N.C.
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-7
Not Used
CN761-5
GND
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-6
Ground
0V
CN761-6
+5V
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-5
+5V
CN761-7
MMPS
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-4
+5V
OFF
ON
CN761-8
MMCLK
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-3
CN761-9
MMFR
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-2
Main Drive Motor

CNMM2-1
+5V
CCW
Not
Detected
CN761-11 N.C.
Main Motor Clock
0V
CW
CN761-10 MMLD
0V
+5V
CLK
+5 VDC Power Supply
0V
+5V
Detected
Main Motor CW/CCW
Main Motor Lock Detection

Signal
0V
Not Used
224
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN761-12 +24VM
OPC Drum Motor
CNDM1-10
CN761-13 +24VM
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-9
CN761-14 PGND
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-8
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
+24V
Ground
0V
CN761-15 PGND
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-7
Ground
0V
CN761-16 GND
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-6
Ground
0V
CN761-17 +5V
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-5
+5V
CN761-18 DMPS
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-4
+5V
OFF
ON
CN761-19 DMCLK
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-3
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-2
OPC Drum Motor

CNDM1-1
+5V
ON
Not
Detected
CN761-22 N.C.
0V
OFF
CN761-21 DMLD
0V
+5V
CLK
CN761-20 DMBRAKE
+5 VDC Power Supply
0V
+5V
Detected
OPC Drum Motor Lock

Detection Signal
0V
Not Used
225
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN762
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN762-1 CLMM1
Corona Wire
Cleaner Motor
Signal Waveform
+24V
CCW
CW
CN762-2
CLMM2
Corona Wire
Cleaner Motor
GND
Corona Wire Cleaner Motor

Control Signal
0V
CW +24V
CCW
CN762-3
Function
Corona Wire Cleaner Motor

Control Signal
0V
Cleaner Position
Sensor 1-3
Ground
0V
CN762-4
GND
Cleaner Position
Sensor 2-3
Ground
0V
CN762-5
CN762-6
CHPSN1
CHPSN2
Cleaner Position
Sensor 1-2
Cleaner Position
Sensor 2-2
Detected
Detected
+5V
Not
Detected
Cleaner Home Position

Sensor 1 Signal
0V
+5V
Not
Detected
Cleaner Home Position

Sensor 2 Signal
0V
CN762-7
+5V
Cleaner Position
Sensor 1-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN762-8
+5V
Cleaner Position
Sensor 2-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN763
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN763-1 RVMA
Inverting Motor-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
0V
CN763-2
+24VM
Inverting Motor-2
+24V
226
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN763-3 RVMAB
Inverting Motor-3
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
0V
CN763-4
RVMB
Inverting Motor-4
+24V
0V
CN763-5
+24VM
Inverting Motor-5
CN763-6
RVMBB
Inverting Motor-6
+24V
+24V
0V
CN763-7
RVSSOL1
Inverting
Solenoid
+24V
OFF
ON
Inverting Solenoid Control

Signal
0V
CN763-8
+24VM
Inverting
Solenoid
+24V
CN763-9
RVSSOL2
Inverting
Solenoid
+24V
Inverting Solenoid Control

Signal
OFF
ON
CN763-10 PCSSOL1
Paper Tray
Solenoid
0V
+24V
OFF
ON
Paper Tray Solenoid Control

Signal
0V
CN763-11 +24VM
Paper Tray
Solenoid
+24V
CN763-12 PCSSOL2
Paper Tray
Solenoid
+24V
Paper Tray Solenoid Control

Signal
OFF
ON
CN763-13 GND
0V
Paper Exit
Sensor 2-3
Ground
0V
227
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN763-14 GND
Inverting Exit
Sensor-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN763-15 PFOSN2
CN763-16 RVEXSN
Paper Exit
Sensor 2-2
Inverting Exit
Sensor-2
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected
Paper Exit Sensor 2

Detection Signal

Detection Signal
0V
CN763-17 +5V
Paper Exit
Sensor 2-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN763-18 +5V
Inverting Exit
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN763-19 GND
Inverting
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN763-20 GND
Inverting JAM
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN763-21 RVSN
CN763-22 RVJAMSN
Inverting
Sensor-2
Inverting JAM
Sensor-2
Not
Detected
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
Detected
Inverting Sensor Detection

Signal
Inverting JAM Sensor

Detection Signal
0V
CN763-23 +5V
Inverting
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN763-24 +5V
Inverting JAM
Sensor-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
228
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN764
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN764-1 +24VM
Separation
Solenoid
CN764-2
SEPSOL
Separation
Solenoid
Signal Waveform
OFF
Function
+24V
+24V
Separation Solenoid Control

Signal
ON
0V
CN764-3
+24VM
Magnetic Roller
Clutch
+24V
CN764-4
MAGCL
Magnetic Roller
Clutch
+24V
Magnetic Roller Clutch

Control Signal
OFF
ON
CN764-5
N.C.
CN764-6
TRBLSW1
CN764-7
GND
0V
Not Used
Toner Waste
Collect Coil
Not
Detected
+5V
Detected
0V
Toner Waste
Collect Coil
Ground
0V
CN764-8
N.C.
CN764-9
GND
Not Used
Ground
Toner Waste
Sensor-3
0V
CN764-10 N.C.
CN764-11 TFSN
Not Used
Toner Waste
Sensor-2
Detected
229
+5V
Not
Detected 0V
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN764-12 N.C.
Destination
Toner Waste
Sensor-1
CN764-14 GND
Toner Waste
Container
Sensor-3
CN764-16 +5V
Function
Not Used
CN764-13 +5V
CN764-15 TFBOXSN
Signal Waveform
Toner Waste
Container
Sensor-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
Not
Detected
Toner Waste
Container
Sensor-1
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
230

Sensor Detection Signal
+5 VDC Power Supply
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN765
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN765-1 +24VM
Key Counter
CN765-2
KCT
Signal Waveform
+24V
Key Counter
+24V
OFF
ON
CN765-3
GND
Function
Key Counter
0V
Key Counter
Ground
0V
CN765-4
KCS
Key Counter
Not
Detected
CN765-5
+5V
CN765-6
KCTCNT
+5V
Detected
0V
+5V
+24V
OFF
ON
+5 VDC Power Supply
Card Counter
0V
CN766
CN767
Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN221.
CN768
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN768-1 +24VM
ELP-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
CN768-2
+24VM
Total Counter-1
+24V
CN768-3
+24VM
Web Solenoid
+24V
231
DP-8060/8045/8035
DRV PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN768-4 ELPCNT
ELP-2
Signal Waveform
+24V
OFF
ON
CN768-5
CT
Total Counter-2
ON
WEBSOL
Web Solenoid
ON
CN768-7
+5V
Door Sensor-1
CN768-8
DOSN
Door Sensor-2
Close
Open
CN768-9
GND
Total Counter
0V
+24V
OFF
Discharge Lamp
0V
+24V
OFF
CN768-6
Function
Web Solenoid Control

Signal
0V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
Door Open Sensor

Detection Signal
0V
Door Sensor-3
Ground
0V
CN768-10 N.C.
Not Used
232
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.16. ACD PC Board

CN101
ACD PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN101-1 ACLD
Switch 1
CNSW1-2A
Signal Waveform
Function
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN101-2
ACND
Switch 1
CNSW1-1A
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN102
ACD PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN102-1 ACL
Option LVPS
CN64-1
Signal Waveform
Function
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN102-2
ACN
Option LVPS
CN64-3
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN103
ACD PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN103-1 ACL
LVPS
CN1-1
Signal Waveform
Function
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN103-2
N.C.
CN103-3
ACN
Not Used
LVPS
CN1-3
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
233
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN104
ACD PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN104-1 ACL
NFL PCB
CN133-3
Signal Waveform
Function
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN104-2
N.C.
CN104-3
ACN
Not Used
NFL PCB
CN133-1
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN105
ACD PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN105-1 HEATL
Thermostat
Thermal Fuse
Signal Waveform
Function
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN105-2
FULP1
Fuser Lamp 1
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN105-3
FULP3
Fuser Lamp 3
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN106
CN107 (DP-3510/3520/3530 only)
ACD PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN107-1 FULP2
Fuser Lamp A
Signal Waveform
Function
AC Power Supply
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
234
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.17. NFL PC Board

CN132
NFL PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN132-1 ACN
Switch 1
CNSW1-1B
Signal Waveform
Function
AC Power Supply
AC120V
CN132-2
ACL
Switch 1
CNSW1-2B
AC Power Supply
AC120V
CN133
Refer to ACD PC Board CN104.
CN134
NFL PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN134-1 ACNRLB
RLB PCB
CN171-1
Signal Waveform
Function
AC Power Supply
AC120V
CN134-2
N.C.
CN134-3
ACLRLB
Not Used
RLB PCB
CN171-3
AC Power Supply
AC120V
235
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.18. DC PC Board
CN141
DC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN141-1 GND
LVPS
CN3-1
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN141-2
GND
LVPS
CN3-2
Ground
0V
CN141-3
+24V
LVPS
CN3-3
+24V
CN141-4
+24V
LVPS
CN3-4
+24V
CN141-5
+3.3V
LVPS
CN3-5
+3.3V
CN142
DC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN142-1 GND
LVPS
CN4-1
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN142-2
GND
Ground
LVPS
CN4-2
0V
CN142-3
GND
Ground
LVPS
CN4-3
0V
CN142-4
GND
LVPS
CN4-4
Ground
0V
CN142-5
+5VP
LVPS
CN4-5
+5V
236
+5 VDC Power Supply
DP-8060/8045/8035
DC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN142-6 +5VP
LVPS
CN4-6
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN142-7
+5VP
LVPS
CN4-7
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN142-8
+5VP
LVPS
CN4-8
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN143
CN144
Refer to DRV PC Board CN751.
CN145
DC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN145-1 GND
DCB PCB
CN142-5
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN145-2
GND
DCB PCB
CN141-1
Ground
0V
CN145-3
+5V
DCB PCB
CN142-4
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN145-4
+24V
DCB PCB
CN141-3
+24V
237
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.19. DCB PC Board

CN141
Refer to DC PC Board CN145.
CN142
CN143
DCB PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN143-1 N.C.
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Not Used
CN143-2
N.C.
Not Used
CN143-3
N.C.
Not Used
CN143-4
N.C.
Not Used
CN143-5
+5V
CN143-6
N.C.
Not Used
CN143-7
N.C.
Not Used
CN143-8
GND
HDD
CNHD1-4
+5V
HDD
CNHD1-3
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN143-9
N.C.
CN143-10 GND
Not Used
Ground
HDD
CNHD1-3
0V
238
DP-8060/8045/8035
DCB PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN143-11 N.C.
Destination
Signal Waveform
Not Used
CN143-12 N.C.
CN143-13 +12V
Function
Not Used
HDD
CNHD1-1
+12V
CN143-14 N.C.
Not Used
CN143-15 N.C.
Not Used
239
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.20. CCD PCB

CN850
240
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.21. LSU
CN550
CN551
CN552
241
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.22. PRCON PCB

CN210, CN211
242
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.23. HVPS
CNHV
243
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.24. LVPS
CN1
CN2
Refer to DRV PC Board CN750.
CN3
CN4
244
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.25. LVPS for Finisher Unit

CN64
CN65
LVPS
Pin No.
CN65-1
Signal Name
STRVP
Destination
Finisher
Connector-1
Signal Waveform
+24V
ON
OFF
CN65-2
PGND
Function
Control Signal
0V
Finisher
Connector-5
Ground
0V
CN66
245
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.26. APF PC Board

CN601
Refer to SPC PC Board CN707 and DRV PC Board CN754.
CN602
APF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN602-1 +24VO2
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
CN602-2
+24VO2
OQM-1
+24V
CN602-3
+24VO2
OQM-2
+24V
CN602-4
+24VO2
OQRRCL-1
+24V
CN602-5
OQRRCL
OQRRCL-2
Registration Clutch Control

Signal
+5V
ON
CN602-6
PGND
0V
OQM-3
Ground
0V
CN602-7
PGND
OQM-4
Ground
0V
CN602-8
OQMCT
OQM-5
Drive Motor Control
+5V
ON
CN602-9
OQMLK
OQM-6
+5V
Rotation
CN602-10 OQMCLK
0V
OQM-7
0V
+5V
CLK
246
0V
Drive Motor Clock
DP-8060/8045/8035
APF PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN602-11 OQMCLK
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
Drive Motor Clock
0V
CLK
CN603
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN603-1 LUM1-1
LUM1-1
CN603-2
LUM1-2
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
LUM1-2
LUM1 Control Signal
ON
CN604
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN604-1 LUM2-1
LUM2-1
CN604-1
LUM2-2
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
LUM2-2
LUM2 Control Signal
ON
CN605
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN605-1
+5V
ZNSN1a-1
CN605-2
+5V
ZNSN1b-1
CN605-3
ZNSN1a
ZNSN1a-2
Signal Waveform
Detected
CN605-4
ZNSN1b
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Not
Detected
ZNSN1b-2
Detected
247
Not
Detected

Signal (Upper)

Signal (Upper)
DP-8060/8045/8035
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN605-5
GND
ZNSN1a-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN605-6
GND
ZNSN1b-3
Ground
0V
CN605-7
+5V
ZNSN1c-1
CN605-8
ZNSN1c
ZNSN1c-2
+5V
Detected
CN605-9
GND
Not
Detected
ZNSN1c-3
+5 VDC Power Supply

Signal (Upper)
Ground
0V
CN605-10
N.C.
Not Used
CN606
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN606-1
+5V
ZNSN2a-1
CN606-2
+5V
ZNSN2b-1
CN606-3
ZNSN2a
ZNSN2a-2
Signal Waveform
Detected
CN606-4
ZNSN2b
GND
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Not
Detected
ZNSN2b-2
Detected
CN606-5
Function
Not
Detected
ZNSN2a-3

Signal (Lower)

Signal (Lower)
Ground
0V
248
DP-8060/8045/8035
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN606-6
GND
ZNSN2b-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN606-7
+5V
ZNSN2c-1
CN606-8
ZNSN2c
ZNSN2c-2
+5V
Detected
CN606-9
GND
Not
Detected
ZNSN2c-3
+5 VDC Power Supply

Signal (Lower)
Ground
0V
CN606-10
N.C.
Not Used
CN607
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN607-1
+24VO2
PFCL1-1
CN607-2
+24VO2
PUSOL1-1
CN607-3
PFCL1
PFCL1-2
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
+24V
Paper Feed Clutch-1

Control Signal
ON
CN607-4
PUSOL1
CPPSN1-1
Paper Feed Solenoid-1

Control Signal
ON
CN607-5
+5V
CPPSN1-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN607-6
+5V
LBSN1-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
249
DP-8060/8045/8035
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN607-7
CPPSN1
CPPSN1-2
Signal Waveform
Function
Pass
CN607-8
LBSN1
LBSN1-2
Upper Limit
CN607-9
GND
CPPSN1-3
Ground
0V
CN607-10
GND
LBSN1-3
Ground
0V
CN607-11
+5V
PESN1-1
CN607-12
PESN1
PESN1-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Paper Sensor-1
Empty
CN607-13
GND
PESN1-3
Ground
0V
CN607-14
N.C.
Not Used
CN608
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN608-1
+24VO2
PFCL2-1
CN608-2
+24VO2
PUSOL2-1
CN608-3
PFCL2
PFCL2-2
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
+24V
Paper Feed Clutch-2

Control Signal
ON
250
DP-8060/8045/8035
APF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN608-4
PUSOL2
CPPSN2-1
Signal Waveform
Function
Control Signal
ON
CN608-5
+5V
CPPSN2-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN608-6
+5V
LBSN2-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN608-7
CPPSN2
CPPSN2-2
Pass
CN608-8
LBSN2
LBSN2-2
Upper Limit
CN608-9
GND
CPPSN2-3
Ground
0V
CN608-10
GND
LBSN2-3
Ground
0V
CN608-11
+5V
PESN2-1
CN608-12
PESN2
PESN2-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Paper Sensor-2
ON
CN608-13
GND
PESN2-3
Ground
0V
CN608-14
N.C.
Not Used
251
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.27. LCT PC Board

CN551
CN552
CN553
LCT PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN553-1
GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN553-2
GND
LCZNSN3-3
Ground
0V
CN553-3
ZNSNc
LCZNSN3-2
Detected
CN553-4
+5V
LCZNSN3-1
CN553-5
GND
LCZNSN2-3
Not
Detected
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN553-6
ZNSNb
LCZNSN2-2
Detected
CN553-7
+5V
LCZNSN2-1
CN553-8
GND
LCZNSN1-3
Not
Detected
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN553-9
ZNSNa
LCZNSN1-2
Detected
252
Not
Detected
DP-8060/8045/8035
LCT PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN553-10 +5V
LCZNSN1-1
CN553-11
Signal Waveform
+5V
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN554
LCT PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN554-1
+24VO2
LPCSOL-1
CN554-2
LCSOL
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
LPCSOL-2

Control Signal
ON
CN554-3
+5V
LLBSN-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN554-4
+5V
LPESN-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN554-5
LLBSN
LLBSN-2
Upper Limit
CN554-6
LPESN
LPESN-2
Paper Sensor-1
Empty
CN554-7
GND
LLBSN-3
Ground
0V
CN554-8
GND
LPESN-3
Ground
0V
CN554-9
+5V
LOPSN-1
+5V
253
+5 VDC Power Supply
DP-8060/8045/8035
LCT PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN554-10 +5V
LPPSN-1
CN554-11
LOPSN
Signal Waveform
+5V
LOPSN-2
Connected
CN554-12
LPPSN
Function
Not
Connected
LPPSN-2
+5 VDC Power Supply
Connect Detect Sensor

Signal
Pass
CN554-13
GND
LOPSN-3
Ground
0V
CN554-14
GND
LPPSN-3
Ground
0V
CN555
LCT PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN555-1
GND
LCDOSN-3
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN555-2
LCDOSN
LCDOSN-2
Door Open Sensor

Detection Signal
Open
CN555-3
+5V
CN555-4
N.C.
CN555-5
GND
LCDOSN-1
Close
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Not Used
LLDSN-3
Ground
0V
CN555-6
LCSDSN
LLDSN-2
Set Sensor Signal
Lower Limit
254
DP-8060/8045/8035
LCT PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN555-7
+5V
LLDSN-2
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN556
LCT PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN556-1
LCMBB
MM-6
Signal Waveform
Function
Motor BB Signal
+3.3V
0V
CN556-2
+24VO2
MM-5
CN556-3
LCMB
MM-4
+24V
Motor B Signal
+3.3V
0V
CN556-4
LCMAB
MM-3
Motor AB Signal
+3.3V
0V
CN556-5
+24VO2
MM-2
CN556-6
LCMA
MM-1
+24V
Motor A Signal
+3.3V
0V
CN557
LCT PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN557-1
LCLUM1
LUM
Signal Waveform
+24V
Up
Down
CN557-1
LCLUM2
LUM
Down
Up
255
Function
0V
+24V
0V
DP-8060/8045/8035
3.28. FXB PC Board

CN391
FXB PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN391-1 +5VP
MJR PCB
CN25-1
CN391-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
MJR PCB
CN25-2
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN391-3
+24V
MJR PCB
CN25-3
CN391-4
pCMLD
MJR PCB
CN25-4
+24V
+5V(H)
ON
OFF
CN391-5
nHKOF
MJR PCB
CN25-5
Line Switching Relay Drive

Signal
H : CML On
0V(L) L : CML Off
External Phone Off-Hook
Detection Signal
H : On Hook
L : Off Hook
+5V(H)
0V(L)
CN391-6
CN391-7
nCTON
GND
MJR PCB
CN25-6
H: Standby Mode
L: Ringing
Ground
MJR PCB
CN25-7
0V
CN392
FXB PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN392-1 L2 (T)
MJR PCB
CN22-1
CN392-2
N.C.
CN392-3
L1 (R)
Signal Waveform
Function
Line Signal
Not Used
MJR PCB
CN22-3
Line Signal
256
DP-8060/8045/8035
CN393
FXB PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN393-1 pSPKOT
Speaker
CN393-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+1V
(Max)
-1V
(Min)
Speaker
Ground
0V
257
DP-8060/8045/8035
4 Troubleshooting
4.1.
Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart

START
Plug in the Power Cord, and then

turn the Power Switches ON.
Does the unit power up

normally?
No
Does the LCD display
function correctly?
Yes
No
Yes
Troubleshoot Improper
LCD Display
Troubleshoot any 3-digit

CODE displayed
Does the unit produce

normal copies?
No
Yes
Does the original document

feed through correctly?
No
Troubleshoot the
Yes
Document Feeder
Does the recording paper No
exit the unit?
Yes
Troubleshoot communication
problems (transmission,
reception, dialing, polling,
information codes, or
diagnostic codes.)
Troubleshoot printed
copy quality problems
258
Check for recording

paper path problems.
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.2.
Improper LCD Display

START
Check connectors: CN52 (SC PCB),

and CN220 (PNL1 PCB).
Yes
Is LED/LCD displayed?
No
Does CN52, pin 3 on the SC
PCB measure +5 VDC?
Does the display appear normal?

Yes
No
Yes
No
Replace the LCD
Module.
Replace the SC PCB.
Is the trouble
resolved?
Yes
No
Replace the Low

Voltage Power
Supply Unit.
Is the trouble resolved?

Yes
END
END
259
No
Replace the
Touch Panel.
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.3.1.
Printed Copy Quality Problems

Black Copy
Paper Travel
4.3.
START
Is the Test Pattern printout in

Copier F1 Mode, or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Is the OPC Drum/Developer

Unit operational?
Yes
No
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
No
Is the PS normal?
1. Check all connectors, and voltages

on the PS.
2. Check the contacts between
PS, and Developer Unit.
3. Replace the PS.
Yes
Is the SPC PCB normal?

Yes
No
1. Check all connectors, and voltages
on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.
END
260
DP-8060/8045/8035
Blank Copy
Paper Travel
4.3.2.
START

Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes
No
Are there any foreign particles, Yes

or stains in the Charge Unit?
No
Is the PS normal?
No
Yes
1. Check all connectors, and

voltages on the PS.
2. Check the Spring Connector,
and voltage on the PS.
3. Replace the PS.

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
No
Is the SPC PCB normal?

Yes
1. Clean the Corona Wire

with a Corona Cleaner (DP-8045/35).
The Corona Wire is cleaned
automatically (DP-8060).
2. Replace the Charge Unit.
1. Remove the particles from the

laser beam path, or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
No
voltages on the SPC PCB.
END
261
DP-8060/8045/8035
Vertical White Lines
Paper Travel
4.3.3.
START

Yes
Is the recording paper damp?
No
Yes
No
Is the OPC/Developer Unit

operational?
Yes
Replace the recording paper.
No
Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
No

or stains in the Corona Unit?
No
Are the Fuser and Pressure

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
1. Remove the particles from

the laser beam path, or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.

2. Replace the Corona Unit.
No
Clean, or replace the rollers.
END
262
DP-8060/8045/8035
Ghost Images
A
AAA
A
Paper Travel
4.3.4.
START

Yes
No
Yes
No

operational?
Yes
No

No
Are the Fuser, and Pressure

Yes

No
END
263
DP-8060/8045/8035
Vertical Dark Lines
Paper Travel
4.3.5.
START

Yes
No

operational?
Yes
No

No
Is the LSU normal?
No
Yes

Yes
Replace the LSU.
No
END
264
DP-8060/8045/8035
Horizontal Dark Lines
Paper Travel
4.3.6.
START

Yes
No

operational?
Yes
No

No
Is the LSU normal?
No
Yes
Is the HVPS normal?
Replace the LSU.
No
voltages on the HVPS.
and voltage on the HVPS.
3. Replace the HVPS.
Yes

Yes
No
END
265
DP-8060/8045/8035
Dark Background
Paper Travel
4.3.7.
START

Yes
No
Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes
Is the LSU normal?
No
No
Yes
Replace the LSU.
No
Is the PS normal?

voltages on the PS.
and voltages on the PS.
3. Replace the PS.
Yes

Yes
No
END
266
DP-8060/8045/8035
Light Print
Paper Travel
4.3.8.
START

No
Yes
Yes
No

operational?
Yes
Replace the paper.

No
* Reset the Developer Unit as shown
in the Illustration below.
Are there any foreign particles, or

stains blocking the Laser Unit
path?
Yes
1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path, or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
No
Is the HVPS normal?
No
Yes

voltages on the HVPS.
Are the Fuser, and Pressure Roller No

surfaces clean?
Yes
END

and turn it clockwise, then turn it counterclockwise to reset.
(2) Ensure that the Developer unit is installed
properly by checking 2 Guide Pins are in the
right side of the oval holes.
267
DP-8060/8045/8035
Horizontal White Lines
Paper Travel
4.3.9.
START

Yes
No
Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes
No
Are there any foreign particles,

or stains in the Charge Unit?
No
Yes

2. Replace the Charge Unit.
No
Is the PS normal?
Yes

Yes

voltages on the PS.
2. Replace the PS.
No
END
268
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)
START
Yes
No
Is the Fuser Unit normal?

Yes
No
Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)
END
Note:
Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat, and/or the Thermistor caused an open-circuit fault.
269
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.3.11.
Voids in Solid Areas

Paper Travel
P
START
Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes
No

Yes
No
END
Paper Travel
4.3.12. Black Dots
START

Unit operational?
No
Yes

Yes
No
END
270
DP-8060/8045/8035
Paper Travel
4.3.13. Recording Paper Creases
START
Yes
No

or stains in the paper path?
No
Yes
Is the recording paper skewing?
Yes
Remove any obstructions and / or

clean the paper path.
No

Roller surfaces soiled, or are
there any foreign particles, or
stains in the Fuser Unit?
No
Ensure the paper is set correctly in

the Paper Tray, and that the Paper
Guides are properly adjusted.
Yes
1. Remove any foreign particles
and / or clean the stains.
2. Clean, or replace the rollers.
3. Replace the Fuser Unit.
END
271
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.3.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality

START
Is the Test Pattern printout

in Copier F1 Mode, or Fax
Yes
No
2. Replace the LSU.
4. Replace the Developer Unit.
Make a local copy.
Is the printed copy correct?
No
Yes
Check the connections of

CN850/851 on the CCD PCB,
CN 55/56 on the SC PCB,
the Scanning Lamp.
Perform a receiving test

with the reference fax unit.
Is the received copy correct?
No
Yes
Is a poor copy printed only

when receiving from a
specific transmitter?
Yes
1. Check CN390 on the FXB PCB.

2. Check CN22/25 on MJR PCB.
3. Check the Telephone Line Cord.
4. Replace the FXB PCB.
No
Telephone line quality is poor.
The transmitting machine

may be defective.
END
272
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.3.15. Document Skewing

START
Mode
y
p
o
C
le
Samp
Is the Test Pattern printout

in Copier F1 Mode normal?
No
Check the Scanner

mechanism.
No
Check, or replace LSU.
Yes
Is the LSU normal?

Yes
END
273
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.3.16. Abnormal Printing

START
Is the recording paper loaded

in the Paper Tray properly?
No
Yes
1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.

2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.
Is the recording paper size, and No

thickness within specification?
Yes
Is Panasonic Toner being used?
Replace with correct paper.
No
Yes
Are all switches, and sensors

operating properly?
Replace with the Panasonic Toner.
No
Yes

or paper pieces in the receiver
unit?
No
Do the rollers rotate properly?
Adjust, clean, or replace.
Yes
Remove the foreign particles, or paper pieces
from the receiver unit.
No
1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches, and
springs.
2. Adjust, or replace any defective parts.
Yes
Is the receiving mechanism

operating correctly?
Yes
No
Adjust, or replace any defective parts.
END
274
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.3.17. Scanned Copy Quality Problems

START
Is the Xenon Lamp abnormal?
Yes
No

or paper pieces in the scanning
area?
No
Is the scanning area dirty?
Replace the Xenon Lamp.
Yes
Remove the foreign particles, or paper
pieces from the scanning area.
Yes
No
Are the Transmitting

Rollers dirty?
No
1. Clean the Scanning Glass.

2. Clean Mirrors 1 and 2.
Yes
Clean the rollers.
Yes
Is the Scanner Block abnormal?
No
1. Check CN (SC PCB).

2. Check CN (CCD PCB).
3. Replace the CCD Assembly.
4. Replace the SC PCB.
END
275
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.4.
4.4.1.
Troubleshooting the LAN Interface

Checking Network Configuration
START
Print the current Internet Parameters List
Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation
Information form filled out by the Network
Administrator.
Verify this information with the Internet
Parameters List that you just printed.
Are the Internet Parameters entered
correctly into the unit?
No
Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.
Yes
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet
Mask as the unit
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: ipconfig /all
Does the displayed Network configuration,
match the following settings of the unit
Internet Parameters ?
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
No
Ask the Network Administrator to
verify the proper information.
Yes
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: "route
route print
print"
Does the current routing table for the
Gateway match ?
No
Ask the Network Administrator to correct
the routing table on that Gateway.
No
Yes
Does the Default Gateway respond to the
"ping
ping IP
IP" command ?
Yes
Check the power switch, cables, and the

current settings of unit.
Does the DNS Server respond to the

"ping
ping IP
IP" command ?
No
Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway, and system status.
No
Yes
Does the unit respond to the
"ping
ping host name
name" command ?
Ask the Network Administrator to check the

Default Gateway, and system status.
No
Yes
Does the unit respond to the
"telnet
telnet" command ?
Replace the SC and/or LANB PCB
Yes
Ask the Network Administrator to verify the
POP/SMTP account, and system status.
276
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.4.2.
Testing the TCP/IP Network
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent
manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.
In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information, or assistance.
When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call, or during the installation stage, try to
isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't
work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then
you can trace the path, and see where the problem is occurring.
In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole
series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.
As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by
checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).
In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for
troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are
Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.
1. System Diagram Model
Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the
Network Administrator.
A description, or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server, and DNS
server is required.
Network Configuration
Domain Name: labo.pcc.com
Network D
PC Client
[210.232.71.18]
js2.labo.pcc.com
WAN
SMTP/POP DNS
Server
Server
sv2.labo.pcc.com
[192.168.1.2]
Network A
[192.168.3.0]
sv1.labo.pcc.com
[192.168.1.1]
[192.168.3.254]
Router (R1)
[192.168.1.253]
Network B
[192.168.1.0]
"ping"
PC Client
[192.168.1.4]
ec5.labo.pcc.com
Hub
PC Client
[192.168.3.4]
ec4.labo.pcc.com
Network C
[192.168.4.0]
Panasonic Device
[192.168.3.5]
ef1.labo.pcc.com
277
PC Client
[192.168.4.1]
fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Checking Current Configuration

Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the
following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP.
Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter
settings of the unit:
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)
For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XP / Windows Server 2003
The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all
Windows NT IP Configuration
Host Name
DNS Servers
Node Type
NetBIOS Scope ID
IP Routing Enabled.
WINS Proxy Enabled
NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS
Ethernet adapter IBMFE1
Description
Physical Address
DHCP Enabled
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary WINS Server
: ec4.labo.pcc.com
: 192.168.1.1
: Hybrid
:
: No
: No
: No
:
: IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter
: 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8
: No
: 192.168.3.4
: 255.255.255.0
: 192.168.3.254
: 192.168.3.18
From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as
follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP
Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1, and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com
(obtained from the Host Name).
3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity
The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client
(any DOS, or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to
send a test packet to a specified IP Address, or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the
packet is echoed back (returned).
Sample command-line PINGing, and parameters are shown below. There are several available options
that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n,
and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.
-n count
:
-w timeout :
The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.
Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
278
DP-8060/8045/8035
PINGing the Unit

C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com
Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254
Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:
PINGing the SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com
Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:
If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the
destination, and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
279
DP-8060/8045/8035
If the physical destination is far, and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option
command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.
e.g.
-n 10
-w 2000
:
:
The number of echo requests that the command should send.

Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000
Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:
4. Tracing a Packet Route

Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to
reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed, and how long it took to get through each
particular router to reach the specified destination.
The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times, and displayed for each
router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name)
is available, it will be displayed as well.
This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:
a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you
know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the
communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point
where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with
an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.
b. To determine whether a router is slow, and needs to be upgraded, or additional routers should be
installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet
to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it
should be upgraded.
To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address, or Hostname>
Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com
Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254
2 4 ms 5 ms 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
Trace complete.
280
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Managing Network Route Tables

In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join
the two segments needs to know only about these segments.
The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:
Network Address
192.168.3.0
192.168.1.0
Netmask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
Gateway
192.168.3.254
192.168.1.253
Interface
192.168.3.254
192.168.1.253
When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the
ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID
is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.
IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.
Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and
sends the packet to router R1.
The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host, and not the
router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0, and sends the packet through
the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only
a single hop.
When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on
the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it
cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet, and a message indicating
"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.
Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks,
and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing, and
clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some
are shown below:
MASK
If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.
Netmask
If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it
defaults to 255.255.255.255.
Gateway
Specifies the gateway.
METRIC
Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.
All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.
The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.
281
DP-8060/8045/8035
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is
properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route
print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print
Active Routes:
Network Address
Netmask
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
127.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
192.168.3.0
255.255.255.0
192.168.3.2
255.255.255.255
192.168.3.255
255.255.255.255
224.0.0.0
224.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
Gateway Address
192.168.3.254
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
Interface
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
Metric
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6. Host Name Query on DNS Server

Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working
properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me.
From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:
C:\>nslookup
Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com
Address: 192.168.1.1
NS (Name Server) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.
[sv1.labo.pcc.com.]
labo.pcc.com.
NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
MX (Mail Exchange) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com.
MX
10 sv2.labo.pcc.com
A (Address) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t A labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com.
NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
sv1
A
192.168.1.1
sv2
A
192.168.1.2
ec5
A
192.168.1.4
ec4
A
192.168.3.4
ef1
A
192.168.3.5
(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)
282
DP-8060/8045/8035
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command

TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs, and workstations to function as dumb
terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.
From Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP, and SMTP
Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.
For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then,
click on the Terminal menu, and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo", and "Block Cursor" radio
dials, and click on the OK button.
Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.
Enter "25" in the "Port:" field, and click on Connect button.
For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet
telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]
220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx
helo
250 Hello
mail from:test
250 Sender OK
rcpt to:fax@labo.pcc.com
250 Receipient OK
data
354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"
[Press the Enter Key]
Panasonic Internet Fax
test
test
250 OK, Mail accept
quit
221 Closing transaction channel
283
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.5.
Error Codes (For Copier)
The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier.
When any trouble occurs, the copier stops.
4.5.1.
User Error Codes (U Code)
Note:
Uxx, and a message will appear on the Panel Display.
Code
U0
U1
U4
U6
U7
U9
U12
U13
U14
User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Item
Check Points
Key Counter
1. Key Counter is not installed.
2. Key Counter Harness is disconnected.
Close Front Cover
1. Front Cover is open.
2. Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Front Cover Sensor is defective
4. LVPS connector is disconnected.
5. LVPS is defective.
6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
7. SPC PCB is defective.
Close Finisher
1. Finisher is open.
2. Paper is in the output bin.
3. Stapler is empty.
Close Right Cover
1. Right Cover is open.
2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Right Cover Sensor is defective.
Close Right Cover Lower
1. Right Cover is open.
(System Console)
2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Right Cover Sensor is defective.
Close Left Cover
1. Left Cover is open.
2. Left Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Left Cover Sensor is defective.
Close Finisher Staple Cover
1. Close Finisher Staple Cover.
/ Upper Cover
2. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is defective.
Add Toner
1. Toner Bottle is incorrectly installed.
2. Low Toner.
3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor is defective.
Replace Toner Waste
1. Toner Waste Container is full.
Container
(See Sect. 3.5.4.)
284
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
U16
U18
U20
U21
U30
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U90
User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Item
Check Points
No Developer Unit
1. Developer Unit is not installed.
Total Copy Limit Over
1. Department Copy Counter is full.
Close ADF Cover
1. ADF Cover is open.
2. ADF is not installed correctly.
3. ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected.
4. ADF Cover Sensor is defective.
Close ADF
1. ADF, and ADF Cover are open.
2. ADF Sensor is disconnected.
3. ADF Sensor is defective.
Close Punch Cover
1. Punch Cover is open.
2. Punch Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Punch Cover Sensor is defective.
Remove Paper in Saddle
1. Paper Jam in the Saddle Unit.
Unit
2. Paper Sensor is disconnected.
3. Paper Sensor is defective.
Close Saddle Unit Cover
1. Saddle Unit Cover is open.
2. Saddle Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Cover Sensor is defective.
No Saddle Staple Unit
1. Staple Unit is not installed properly.
Close Saddle Unit Front
1. Saddle Unit Front Cover is open.
Cover
2. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is defective.
Close Saddle Unit Exit
1. Saddle Unit Exit Cover is open.
Cover
2. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is defective.
Replace Battery
1. Internal Battery requires replacement.
285
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.5.2.
Jam Error Codes (J Code)
Locations/User Error Codes (J Codes)
DA-FS330
DA-FS355A
DA-FS600
DA-FS605
J
F
C
B
H
I
G
A
E
Section
A
C
E
G
I
Jam Location
System Console (3rd/4th Paper Tray)
Transport Area
Paper Inverting Area
LCT Area
Saddle-Stitch Finisher
Section
B
D
F
H
J
Misfed Location Indicator

Indicates to open each cover, check,
and remove any misfed paper.
Jam Location
Paper Entry Area
Paper Exit/Fuser Area
ADU Area
Finisher
i-ADF
J Code Log View Mode

The 5 most recent J Codes can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing Function, and 3 keys
in Standby mode.
Note:
If the machine is jammed, follow the procedure below.
1. If the machine has the Hard Disk Drive Unit installed, turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the
machine to the OFF position first. After waiting approximately 10 seconds, turn the Main Power
Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position. (This interrupts all the power to the
machine.)
2. Remove the Jammed paper.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back, and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
4. Press the Function, and 3 keys.
286
DP-8060/8045/8035
Jam Sensor Location of Printer

Fuser Unit
Paper Exit Sensor
Exit Sensor
Inverting Exit
Sensor
Timing Sensor
Registration
Sensor
Inverting Paper
Sensor
Paper Path
Sensor
ADU Entrance
Sensor
ADU Intermediate
Sensor
1st Paper Path

Sensor
ADU Exit
Sensor
Intermediate
Roller Sensor
2nd Paper Path

Sensor
System Console
Paper Path Sensor
Inverting Paper
Path Sensor
3rd Paper Path

Sensor
4th Paper Path

Sensor
Timing Chart
Ref No.
Inverting /Face down
Fuser Unit
Paper Exit Sensor
Exit Sensor
8128 Invert Switching Solenoid

(Vertical)
8128 Inverting Roller Solenoid
(Horizontal)
8127 Inverting Motor
Detected Paper
Exit Sensor
8128 Invert Switching Solenoid

(Vertical)
8128 Inverting Roller Solenoid
(Horizontal)
8127 Inverting Motor
Sheet 2
Sheet 3
No Paper
Detected Paper
No Paper
Normal
Inverting
Separation
Contact
In
Stop
Exit
Duplex
Fuser Unit
Paper Exit Sensor
Sheet 1
Detected Paper
Sheet 1
Sheet 2
Sheet 3
No Paper
Detected Paper
No Paper
Normal
Inverting
Separation
Contact
In
Stop
Exit
287
Reverse of Sheet 1
Sheet 4
DP-8060/8045/8035
Jam Sensor Location of i-ADF

ADF Registration
Sensor 1
ADF Registration
Sensor 2
ADF Registration
Sensor 3
ADF Selection
Sensor
ADF Exit
Sensor
Jam Sensor Location of DA-FS330
Face Up Exit Roller Bearing

Face Up Exit Roller
Paddle Roller
Face Down Exit
Roller Bearing
Face Down Exit
Roller
Exit Sensor (B) (Face up Exit)
Paper Path Select Gate

Registration Roller Bearing
Paper Feed Sensor (A)
Paper Feed
Guide
Upper Tray
Registration Roller
Lower Tray
Inverting Roller
Interstage Stack
Exit Sensor (D)

(Face Down Exit)
Paper Pass Sensor (C)
Stapler Unit
288
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
J00
J01
J02
J03
J04
J06
J07
J08
J09
J11
J12
J13
J14
J16
J17
J18
J19
J21
J22
J23
J24
J26
J27
J28
J29
J30
J31
Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table

Contents
Section
The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
C
paper starts feeding. (Sheet Bypass)
The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
B
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (1st Feeder Unit)
The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
B
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (2nd Feeder Unit)
The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
A
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (3rd Feeder Unit)
The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
A
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (4th Feeder Unit)
B, G
The LCT Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (LCT Feeder Unit)
The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the paper
B
starts feeding from 1st Feeder Unit.
The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper
A, B
Feed Roller starts rotating in the 2nd/3rd/4th Feeder Unit.
The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper
B, G
Feed Roller starts rotating in the LCT Unit.
The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the
B
Paper Path Sensor is activated.
The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the
B
The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the
A
The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the
A
The LCT Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the
B, G
The Timing Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path
B, C
Sensor is activated.
B, C
The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the Timing
The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the ADU
C, F
The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time during
B
initialization.
The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time during
B
initialization.
The 3rd Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization.
A
The 4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization.
A
The LCT Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization.
B, G
The Timing Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization.
B
The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization.
B
The 3rd/4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization.
A, B
The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor
C
is activated. (Sheet Bypass)
The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor
C
is activated. (Except Sheet Bypass)
289
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
J33
J40
J41
J42
J43
J44
J45
J50
J51
J52
J53
J54
J55
J60
J61
J62
J63
J64

Contents
Section
The Registration Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode.
C
The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time
C, D
after the Registration Sensor is activated.
The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after
C, D
the Sensor is activated.
The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode.
C, D
The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Fuser
C, D
Unit Paper Exit Sensor is activated.
The Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time.
C, D
The Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time, during nonC, D
printing mode.
The Inverting Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
C, D
Inverting Roller starts turning.
The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Inverting
C, D
Exit Sensor is activated.
The Inverting Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after the
C, D
Inverting Exit Sensor is activated.
The Inverting Paper Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time,
C, D, E
during non-printing mode.
The Inverting Paper Path Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time,
E
The Inverting Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time, during
C, D
non-printing mode.
H
1. The Finisher Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined
time after Exit Sensor is activated.
2. The Finisher Registration Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined
time after Finisher Registration Sensor is activated.
3. The Finisher Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
Finisher Registration Sensor is activated.
4. The Finisher Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time
after Finisher Exit Sensor is activated.
5. The Finisher Registration Sensor, or the Finisher Exit Sensor keeps detecting
paper.
6. The next paper was detected while the current paper is still in the Finisher.
7. The Finisher Door was opened while the paper is passing through the Finisher.
8. Paper Feed Sensor (A) does not go on, and off. (DA-FS330)
9. Exit Sensor (B) does not go on, and off, after Paper Feed Sensor (A) goes on.
(DA-FS330)
The stapler is not activated correctly.
H
The Paper is Jammed in the Inverter.
H
1. Paper Pass Sensor (C) does not go on, and off, after Paper Feed Sensor (A)
goes on. (DA-FS330)
2. Exit Sensor (D) does not go on, and off, after Paper Pass Sensor (C) goes on,
and off. (DA-FS330)
1. The Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time in the
I
Saddle.
2. The Paper Path Sensor keeps detecting paper in the Saddle.
3. Either one of the above Sensors keeps detecting paper in the Saddle during
non-printing mode.
4. The Saddle Door was opened while the paper is passing through the Finisher.
The Puncher is not activated correctly.
H
290
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
J70
J71
J72
J73
J74
J75
J76
J77
J78
J79
J80
J81
J82
J83
J84
J85
J86
J87
J88
J89
J92
J93
J94
J97
J98
J99

Contents
Section
The ADF Registration Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a predetermined time in
J
the ADF.
The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detectiong paper after a predetermined time in
J
the ADF.
1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined
J
time after the ADF Registration Sensor 1 is activated.
2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined
time after the ADF Registration Sensor 3 is activated.
1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the ADF
J
Registration Sensor 1 is deactivated.
2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the ADF
Registration Sensor 3 is deactivated.
The ADF Exit Sensor does not detect paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided Scanning.
J
The ADF Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided Scanning.
J
The ADF Selection Sensor does not detect paper during 2-Sided Scanning.
J
The ADF Registration Sensor 3 keeps detecting paper during the Back Page
J
Scanning.
1. The ADF Registration Sensor 3 does not detect paper after the Face Page is
J
scanned, during 2-Sided Scanning.
2. The ADF Selection Sensor keeps detecting paper during 2-Sided Scanning.
The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detecting paper in the ADF.
J
The Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Entrance Sensor does not detect paper within a
D, E, F
predetermined time.
The ADU Intermediate Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time
F
after ADU Entrance Sensor is activated.
The ADU Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after ADU
F
Middle Sensor is activated.
F
The ADU Entrance Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has
lapsed.
The ADU Intermediate Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has
F
lapsed.
The ADU Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has lapsed.
F
The ADU Entrance Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has
F
lapsed, during non-printing mode.
The ADU Intermediate Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has
F
lapsed, during non-printing mode.
The ADU Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has lapsed,
F
One of the ADU Sensors detects paper during non-printing mode.
F
The paper is not detected.
J
The paper remained in the ADF.
J
The ADF does not turn off after the predetermined time.
J
After passing the Registration Sensor (Roller), the Paper does not clear the sensor
C, D
within a predetermined time period.
The VRDY Signal is not ON after a predetermined time has lapsed.
C, B
No VSNC Signal within a predetermined time after VRDY Signal is activated.
C
291
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.5.3.
Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)

E1: Optical Unit Error
Code
Function
E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass
scanning
E1- 20 Laser Unit horizontal

synchronization 1
E1- 21 Laser Unit horizontal
synchronization 2
E1- 22 Polygon Motor synchronization
E1- 31 Scanning Lamp

(does not turn On)
Check Points
1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected.
2. Home Position Sensor is defective.
3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Scanner Motor is defective.
5. Scanning Mechanism is defective.
6. DRV PCB connector is disconnected.
7. DRV PCB is defective.
1. LSU connector is disconnected.
2. LSU is defective.
1. LSU connector is disconnected.
2. LSU is defective.
1. Polygon Motor connector is disconnected.
3. Polygon Motor is defective.
1. Scanning Lamp connector is disconnected.
2. Scanning Lamp is defective.
5. SC PCB is defective. (Check F4 Chip Fuse)
E2: Lift DC Motor Error

Code
Function
E2- 01 Lift Motor rotation
(1st Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
Check Points
1. Level Sensor connector is disconnected.
2. Level Sensor is defective.
3. Lift Mechanism is defective.
4. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.
5. Lift Motor is defective.
10. APF PCB connector is disconnected.
11. APF PCB is defective.
12. Paper Feed Module connector is disconnected.
292
DP-8060/8045/8035
E2: Lift DC Motor Error

Code
Function
E2- 06 LCT ascending operation (UP)
E2- 07 LCT descending operation
(DOWN)
E2- 10 System Console Drive Motor

rotation
Code
E3- 01
E3- 03
E3- 10
E3- 11
E3- 12
Check Points
1. LCT connector is disconnected.
2. Upper Limit Sensor connector is disconnected.
3. Upper Limit Sensor is defective.
4. Lift Mechanism is defective.
5. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.
6. Lift Motor is defective.
7. Lower Limit Sensor connector is disconnected.
8. Lower Limit Sensor is defective.
9. LCT PCB connector is disconnected.
10. LCT PCB is defective.
1. System Console Cable is disconnected.
2. Drive Mechanism is defective.
3. Drive Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Drive Motor is defective.
5. APF PCB connector is disconnected.
6. APF PCB is defective.
E3: Development System Error

Function
Check Points
Toner Bottle Motor rotation
1. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor connector is
disconnected.
2. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor is defective.
3. Toner Bottle Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Toner Bottle Motor is defective.
5. Toner Bottle Motor Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. Toner Bottle is installed incorrectly.
Toner Density Sensor gain
1. Sensor connector is disconnected.
2. Sensor is defective.
High Voltage Power Supply
1. HVPS connector is disconnected.
leak (1) - Grid Charge Voltage
2. HVPS is defective.
leak (2) - Separation Voltage
5. Corona Wire is abnormal. (Check for: contamination
with foreign particles, broken, not installed in the
leak (3) - Transfer Current
proper position, or the tension is loose)
293
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
E3- 13
E3- 20
E3- 21
E3- 23
E3- 24
E3- 25
E3- 40

Function
Check Points
1. HVPS connector is disconnected.
leak (4) - Developer AC Bias
2. HVPS is defective.
5. Developer Unit Bias Terminal is contaminated with
Toner.
Main Motor rotation
1. Drive Mechanism is defective.
2. Main Motor connector is disconnected.
3. Main Motor is defective.
Dust Collection Fan Motor
1. Dust Collection Fan connector is disconnected.
rotation
2. Dust Collection Fan is defective.
Suction Fan rotation
1. Suction Fan connector is disconnected.
2. Suction Fan is defective.
Ozone Fan 2 rotation
1. Ozone Fan 2 connector is disconnected.
2. Ozone Fan 2 is defective.
Drum Motor rotation
1. Drum Drive Gear is defective.
2. Drum Drive Mechanism is defective.
3. Drum Unit is defective.
4. Drum Motor connector is disconnected.
5. Drum Motor is defective.
Copy Density Sensor output
1. Sensor connector is disconnected.
adjustment
2. Sensor is defective.
294
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
Function
E3- 51 Corona Wire cleaning
E3- 60 Toner Waste collection

Check Points
1. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 connector is
disconnected.
2. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 is defective.
3. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 connector is
disconnected.
4. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 is defective.
5. Cleaner Motor Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. Corona Mechanism is defective.
7. Cleaner Motor connector is disconnected.
8. Cleaner Motor is defective.
1. Toner Waste pipe is clogged up.
2. Toner Waste Mechanism is defective.
(Refer to Flow Chart below)
3. Lock Detect Sensor connector is disconnected.
4. Lock Detect Sensor is defective.
START
Make a Copy.
Does E3-60 Error still occur?
Yes
Check the "Check Points"

again.
No
Make the Lock Detect

Sensor OFF.
(Refer to Procedure below)
No
Does CN764-6 on DRV

PCB measure +5 VDC?
Yes
END
(1) Remove the Drum Unit. (See Sect 2.2.8.)
(2) Turn the Toner Waste Screw Gear towards the
Arrow direction until you hear a click.
295
DP-8060/8045/8035
E4: Fuser Unit Error

Code
Function
E4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature
E4- 02 Paper Jam
E4- 10 Exhaust Fan Motor (1) rotation

Check Points
1. Fuser Thermistor is dirty.
2. Thermistor position is incorrect.
3. Fuser temperature is low. (Adjust F6-31)
4. Thermistor is defective.
5. Fuser Lamp connector is disconnected.
6. Fuser Thermostat is defective.
7. Fuser Lamp is defective.
8. HTC PCB connector is disconnected.
9. HTC PCB is defective.
1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit.
2. Paper Exit Sensor 1, or 2 is disconnected.
3. Paper Exit Sensor 1, or 2 is defective.
1. Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected.
2. Exhaust Fan is defective.
5. LPC PCB is defective.
E5: System Error

Code
Function
E5- 01 Vp (+24V, printer)
E5- 05 Vp (+24V, scanner)
E5- 11 Printer Engine Communication
abnormal
E5- 12 Scanner Engine
Communication abnormal
E5- 17 Scanner synchronization
E5- 19 Scanner Line synchronization
E5- 22 Finisher communication
E5- 40 Sort Memory abnormal

E5- 42 Total Counter connection
Check Points
3. SC PCB connector is disconnected.
4. SC PCB is defective.

3. IPC PCB is disconnected.
4. IPC PCB is defective.
5. Finisher Interface Cable is disconnected.
6. OP LVPS connector is disconnected.
7. OP LVPS is defective.
8. DC PCB connector is disconnected.
9. Finisher is defective.
1. Sort Memory defective.
2. SC PCB connector is disconnected.
3. SC PCB defective.
1. Total Counter connector is disconnected.
2. Total Counter is defective.
296
DP-8060/8045/8035
E5: System Error

Code
Function
E5- 60 Power Supply Cooling Fan
Motor rotation
Check Points
1. Cooling Fan connector is disconnected.
2. Cooling Fan is defective.
E7: Optional Unit Error
Code
E7- 20
E7- 21
E7- 22
E7- 23
E7- 24
E7- 25
E7- 26
E7- 27
E7- 28
E7- 29
E7- 40
E7- 41
E7- 42
E7- 43
E7- 44
E7- 45
E7- 46
E7- 47
E7- 48
E7- 49
E7- 50
E7- 51
E7- 52
E7- 53
E7- 54
E7- 55
E7- 56
E7- 57
E7- 58
Function
Check Points
Finisher Paper Transport Motor See Sect. 11 Finisher Options.
Finisher Paper Exit Motor
Finisher Damper Motor
Finisher Staple Motor
Finisher Staple Sift Motor
Finisher Paper Height Sensor
Finisher Backup RAM Data
Finisher Tray Lift Motor
Finisher Punch Motor
Finisher Punch Shift Motor
Finisher Saddle-Stitch
Communication
Finisher Saddle Positioning
Plate Motor
Finisher Saddle Folding Motor
Finisher Saddle Guide Motor
Finisher Saddle Alignment
Motor
Finisher Saddle Rear Staple
Motor
Finisher Saddle Front Staple
Motor
Finisher Saddle Push Motor
Finisher Swing Motor
Finisher Sensor Connector
Finisher Micro Switch
Finisher Delivery Motor
See Sect. 11 Finisher Options.
For
DA-FS355/355A, DA-SP41 only.
Finisher Paddle Motor
Finisher Saddle Folding Sensor
Finisher Punch Communication
Finisher Punch Power Supply
Finisher Punch Registration
Sensor
Finisher Punch Sensor
(Horizontal Registration)
Finisher Punch Sensor
(Waste Full))
297
DP-8060/8045/8035
E7: Optional Unit Error

Code
Function
E7- 90 Hardware Key Abnormal
E7- 91 Data Security Kit Abnormal
Check Points
1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed.
2. Hardware Key is defective.
Hardware Key for Data Security Kit is not installed.
Note:
These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed. Refer to the appropriate
Optional Unit Service Manual.
E13: Out of Toner
Code
Function
E13 Toner Sensor
Check Points
1. Toner Bottle is not installed correctly.
2. Out of Toner.
3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor is defective.
298
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.6.
Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)

Fax Information Codes
Phase
Description of Problem
Cause
C, D The length of the received
Transmitter Document Jam.
document is over 2 m.
B
Read Point Sensor does not
Document is not set properly.
activate within 10 seconds after
Defective Read Point Sensor.
the document starts feeding.
C
Transmitting document was longer The document may jam.
than 2,000 mm (or 78.7 in).
Defective Read Point Sensor.
(Super Fine: 1,000 mm (or 39.4 in),
600 dpi: 430 mm (or 16.2 in))
A
ADF Door is open.
Cover is not firmly closed.
Connectors are not firmly connected.
C
Decoding process is not completed Defective FXB PCB.
at the end of phase C.
A-E Interface error occurred between Modem is defective. (FXB PCB)
the CPU, and modem.
Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
System fault.
Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
Code
012
Mode
RCV
030
XMT
031
XMT
COPY
061
200
RCV
212
331
XMT
RCV
XMT
RCV
XMT
400
XMT
401
XMT
DCN was returned from receiver

while transmitter is waiting for
CFR, or FTT.
402
XMT
403
RCV
(Polling)
404
XMT
DCN was returned from receiver

while transmitter is waiting for
NSF/DIS.
Transmitter had no polling function. "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is
not set at the transmitter.
Document to be transmitted is not
placed at the transmitter.
Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS)
Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR
followed by TCF three times, but PCB, etc.)
the receiver did not respond. (CFR, FXB PCB, or MJR PCB is defective.
or FTT is usually returned)
Receiver disconnects line during first
NSS (or DCS) is transmitted.
301
8-minutes timer error.

(Germany only)
T1 timer (355 sec) elapsed
without detecting 300 bps signal.
299
Wrong number is dialed, and the Start

button is pushed.
Telephone line is disconnected while
dialing.
FXB PCB (Modem), or MJR PCB is
defective.
Receiver is defective. (It may only be
transmitting CED)
Your machine's ID Number is not
programmed.
Possible incompatibility, or incorrect
Password (Password Reception,
Selective Receive).
Mailbox is full.
Receiver working in non-CCITT mode
only. (Possible incompatibility)
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
405
Mode
XMT
406
RCV
(Password
Comm.)
407
XMT
408
XMT
409
XMT
410
RCV
411
RCV
(Polling)
412
G3 RX
414
RCV
(Polling)
415
XMT
(Polling)
416
RCV
417
RCV

Phase
Cause
B
Transmitter received FTT after it
Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged
transmitted TCF at 2400 bps.
due to line noise)
Received RTN after
communicating at 2400 bps.
PCB, etc.)
FXB PCB, or MJR PCB is defective.
B
XMT-Password mismatched. RCV- XMT, RCV password does not match.
Password mismatched. Selective Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with
RCV incomplete.
the last 4 digits of Auto Dial telephone
number.
D
Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper
after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.)
such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of
received DCN.
excessive error. (Line quality is poor)
FXB PCB (Modem), or MJR PCB is
defective.
D
Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line
transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM.
quality is poor)
PCB, etc.)
D
Transmitter receives PIN after it
Receiver receives data with error due to
transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator
as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.
requests voice contact.
PCB, etc.)
D
Received DCN while waiting for
Interface, or line is faulty.
post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective.
etc.)
B
Received DCN after transmitting
Transmitter is not ready for polling
NSC.
communication.
Password does not match between
transmitter, and receiver.
B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective.
NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After
FXB PCB is defective.
transmitting FTT)
B
No response received after
Password does not match between
transmitting 3rd NSC.
transmitter, and receiver.
Transmitter is defective. (No original,
document jam, etc.)
B
Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your
message from your machine in
machine does not have the polling
polling communication.
transmission feature.
D
Receiver did not detect post
Transmitter is defective.
command, such as EOP, MPS,
Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is
EOM, etc.
distorted due to line noise)
C
Receiver returned RTN in
Line quality is poor. (There are
response to post message.
excessive errors in received data)
300
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
418
Mode
RCV
420
RCV
421
RCV
422
XMT
427
G3
RCV
XMT
RCV
XMT, or
RCV
433
434

Phase
Cause
C
Receiver transmitted PIN in
Line quality is poor. (There are
response to PRI-Q from
excessive errors in received data)
transmitter. (Transmitting operator FXB PCB, or MJR PCB is defective.
requests voice contact)
B
T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without Incoming call is not from a facsimile.
detecting 300 bps signal.
(Non-facsimile communication)
B
Busy Tone is detected after
Remote station disconnected the line.
sending NSF Signal.
Wrong number was dialed.
B
Content of NSF (or DIS), or NSC Manufacturer proprietary capabilities
(or DTC) was invalid.
between the machines are incompatible.
B
DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS
The interface is incompatible.
transmitted.
B, D T.30 Protocol abnormal.
Defective remote station.
B
436
G3 RX
456
RCV
457 RELAY XMT

CONF. XMT/
POLL
459
RCV
490
RCV
494
RCV
495
XMT
RCV
496
XMT
501
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
502
CD (response from Modem) did

not turn OFF within 180 sec. after
receiver detected FLAG signal.
DCN received after transmitting
FTT.
Received relay transfer request, or
confidential document to distribute
to an end receiving station, or all
confidential mailboxes are used.
Remote unit does not have
Relayed XMT, or Confidential
Comm. capability.
Failed training in Phase C.
Sum of error lines exceeded the
limit (Function Parameter No. 70)
of 64 lines.
Interval between two EOLs was
more than 10 sec. when receiver
received message data.
Remote unit is defective.

Transmitter is defective, or incompatible.
Line quality is poor.
Line quality is poor. (Training signal is

distorted due to line noise)
Line quality is poor.
Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged
due to line noise)
C
During reception, CD turned OFF, Line is disconnected.
or continued ON for a long time.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB, or MJR PCB is defective.
current.
C
CS of modem is not able to turn
ON.
B
Incompatible Modem on the
Remote unit.
B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF, Line is disconnected.
or continued ON for long time.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB, or MJR PCB is defective.
current.
301
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
503

Phase
Cause
B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn
ON during training.
Line is disconnected.
B
Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original is set.
station.
B
Polling XMT is rejected.
No polling original is set.
540
Mode
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
RCV/V.34
(Polling)
XMT/V.34
(Polling)
XMT ECM
541
XMT ECM
542
XMT ECM
543
XMT ECM
544
XMT ECM
550
RCV ECM
554
RCV ECM
555
RCV ECM
570
RCV
571
XMT
580
XMT
581
XMT
582
XMT
601
XMT
623
XMT
630
XMT, or
RCV
(Polling)
Redial count over.
631
XMT
"Stop" key was pressed during

Auto Dialing.
504
505
No response after transmitting 3rd

CTC, or DCN received.
No response after transmitting 3rd
EOR, or received DCN.
No response to the 3rd RR
transmitted, or received DCN.
T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without
MCF.
Stopped Transmission after EOR
Transmission.
Timer between frames in phase C
has elapsed.
Transmitted ERR after receiving
EOR.
Transmitted PIN after receiving
EOR.
Password, or machine code did not
match during remote diagnostic
communication.
Remote unit did not have the
remote diagnostic function.
Sub-address transmission to a unit
that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit
155) OFF.
Sub-address Password
transmission to a unit that has their
DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.
Sub-address SEP (for Polling)
transmission to a unit that has their
DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.
ADF Door was opened during ADF
transmission.
No original was in the ADF. (Builtin dialer engaged)
302
Incompatible interface.
Line is faulty.
MJR PCB abnormal.
Remote unit is abnormal.
Remote unit is abnormal.
Line is faulty.
MJR PCB abnormal.
Defective remote station.
Faulty line.
Faulty line, and Operator Call requested
by RX side.
Sub-address transmission to a unit that

has no Sub-address function.
Operator removed the original from the

ADF after dialing was completed.
Original was not set properly in the ADF.
No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone
is not detected. (Country dependent)
Busy tone is detected. (Country
dependent) T1 timer (355 sec) elapsed
without a signal from the receiver.
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
634
Mode
XMT
638
XMT
700
711
XMT
RCV
RCV
712
XMT
714
XMT
RCV
715
XMT
716
XMT
717
XMT
718
XMT
719
RCV
720
POP
721
POP
722
RCV
725
XMT
POP

Phase
Cause
Redial count over with no
response, or busy tone was not
detected.
Note:
U.S.A., and Canadian models
will redial only once if a busy
tone is not detected.
Power turned Off with applicable
Power switched off.
data in memory, or during
Power failure occurred.
communication.
PSTN Communication terminated by
LAN Operator pressing the "Stop" key.
LAN Incorrect LDAP settings.
LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login Name,
LDAP Password, and/or LDAP Search
Base are incorrect.
LAN Unknown email address replied
Mail Server received an incorrect email
from the Mail Server.
address. (Dependent on Server's Mail
application)
LAN LAN Interface error.
The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not
Cannot logon to the LAN.
connected.
An unexpected LAN problem occurred.
LAN TCP/IP connection timed out.
Incorrect IP Address is set.
Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP
Address, SMTP Server IP Address.
LAN Cannot logon to the LAN.
Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is
set.
No email application is activated on the
Mail Server.
LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol
Mail Servers hard disk may be full.
transmission.
Mail Server is defective.
LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size, and
while receiving printing data. The resolution.
paper size selected within your
Ask originator to re-send in a supported
application to print is larger than
size, and resolution.
the paper size loaded in the paper
tray(s).
Ask the originator to re-send with a
LAN Received data via LAN is in a
format that is not supported.
supported file attachment:
* In a TIFF-F format.
* Image data conforming to A4/Letter
size.
LAN Unable to connect to the POP
Incorrect POP Server address is set.
Server.
POP Server is down.
LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name, or Password is
set.
LAN Failed to obtain the Network
DHCP is not available.
Parameters (such as: IP Address, (Contact the Network Administrator.)
Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP
Address, etc.) from the DHCP
server.
LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set.
DNS Server is down.
303
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
726
Phase
LAN
727
Mode
XMT
POP
XMT
728
XMT
LAN
729
XMT
LAN
730
RCV
LAN
731
RCV
LAN
LAN
741 XMT, Polling PSTN

800
Relay
Comm.
814
Conf. XMT
Conf. Polling
Relay
Comm.
815 Conf. RCV
816 Conf. Polled
825
850
Conf. RCV
Conf. Polled
XMT
851
PRINT
870
MEM XMT
Multi-Copy
871
872
TX/RX
RX
873
875
RX
RX
PSTN
PSTN

Cause
Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set.
the DNS Server.
Incorrect SMTP Server address is set.
Received an Error, or No
Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy, or
Response from the Remote
Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT.
Internet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT) (Retry is possible)
Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory
Overflow, or No Power.
(Retry is not possible)
Failed to authenticate (SMTP
SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name,
AUTHENTICATION) when
and/or Password are incorrect.
connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.)
Unable to program the Internet
Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is
parameters, or the autodialer via set to Valid.
Email from a PC.
Dialer full while Relayed
Dial buffer for manual number dialing
Transmission Request was
(70 stations) are being used.
received.
Unable to dial
Deleted the registered station name
before dialing with Timer Controlled
Communications, etc.
The machine was requested to
relay a document but has no Relay
Hub capability.
The remote station does not have
Relay XMT nor Confidential
Communication capability.
PSTN Mailbox is full.

PSTN The received Polling Password did
not match.
PSTN Parameter settings of the remote
station are not properly set.
LAN Dept. Code ID mismatch occurred Set the Dept. Code of the Panafax
between the machine and Panafax Desktop or Fax Driver to a matching ID
Desktop or the Fax Driver.
code, or uncheck the Department Code
check box in the Fax Driver.
Dept. Code Print Page overflow
occurred.
Receiver side does not have correct
PSTN If applicable sub-address is not
LAN registered in the phone book of the sub-address in their phone book.
receiver side when using subaddressing function.
PSTN File number overflow occurred.
PSTN Mail box overflow occurred for
receiving.
PSTN File append error.
PSTN Receiving Page error.
SC PCB is defective.
304
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
879
Mode
Memory
RCV
880
884
961
962
RCV
XMT

Phase
Cause
PSTN Memory overflow occurred during Memory overflow on the Fax side.
substitute memory reception.
LAN Memory overflow.
Memory overflow on the Fax side.
Mail Server sent a reset command Mail server aborted the download (Busy
while downloading the data to the with other higher priority jobs).
machine.
File Access Error.
File Access Error.
LAN Memory file access error.
PSTN Memory file access error.
LAN Memory file access error.
305
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.7.
Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)
The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was
performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.
Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES
01
OK
001
FILE DURATION X/R

129
00:00'42
XMT
IDENTIFICATION
123 456 789
DATE
MMM-dd
TIME
01:55
1st digit
DIAGNOSTIC
C8649003C0000
13th digit
- PANASONIC MACHINE
****************************** - PANASONIC MACHINE- ***** -12345678901234567890- *******
1st Digit: Manufacturer Code

-: Not used/defined
Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Manufacturer
Code
Casio
Canon
Sanyo
Sharp
Tamura
Toshiba
NEC
Oki
Hitachi
Xerox
Fujitsu
Matsushita
Mitsubishi
Murata
Ricoh
306
DP-8060/8045/8035
2nd Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
ID (TSI, CSI, CIG)
RTN
DCN
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
3rd Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Resolution (dpi)
S-Fine
400 x 400
300 x 300
S-Fine
400 x 400
300 x 300
600 x 600
600 x 600
600 x 600
S-Fine
400 x 400
300 x 300

Definition
Paper Width
A4
A4
A4
A4
B4
B4
B4
B4
A4
B4
A3
A3
A3
A3
A3
307
STOP Button
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
DP-8060/8045/8035
4th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
Scanning Rate
20 ms/line
5 ms/line
10 ms/line
40 ms/line
0 ms/line
20 ms/line
5 ms/line
10 ms/line
40 ms/line
0 ms/line
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
Resolution
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
5th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
Memory/
Deferred Comm.
Dialing/RCV
Non-Memory
Manual
Non-Memory
Communication
Used
Manual
Non-Memory
Communication
Auto Dialing
Non-Memory
Used
Auto Dialing
Non-Memory
Auto RCV
Non-Memory
Used
Auto RCV
Non-Memory
Remote RCV
Non-Memory
Used
Remote RCV
Non-Memory
Manual
Memory
Communication
Memory
Used
Manual
Communication
Auto Dialing
Memory
Used
Auto Dialing
Memory
Auto RCV
Memory
Used
Auto RCV
Memory
Remote RCV
Memory
Used
Remote RCV
Memory
308
DP-8060/8045/8035
6th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Polling
XMT/RCV
Selective Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Password
Comm.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
7th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Sub-Address
Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Definition
Confidential
Relayed Comm.
Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
309
Turnaround
Polling
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DP-8060/8045/8035
8th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Advanced
Comm.
Report XMT
Check & Call
Memory Transfer
Report XMT
Check & Call
Memory Transfer
-

Definition
Cover Sheet
XMT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Short Protocol
B
D
B
D

Definition
Standard/ NonStandard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
310
DP-8060/8045/8035
10th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Coding
MH
MR
MMR
JBIG
MH
MR
MMR
JBIG
-

Definition
ECM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
11th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Symbol Rate
(V.34)
2400 sr
2800 sr
3000 sr
3200 sr
3429 sr
-
V.34
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
311
DP-8060/8045/8035
12th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Modem Speed
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC 7200 bps
TC 9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
-

Definition
Modem Speed
(V.34)
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps
-
13th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data

Definition
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
312
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.8.
Troubleshooting (For Printer)
4.8.1.
Checking the Basics
This section explains how to solve problems including error messages, or unexpected printing results.
If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure
what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:
Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly
Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct
Ensure that the Unit is turned On
Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit
No error message is displayed on the Unit
Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box
4.8.2.
Document Does Not Print Properly

Problem
Possible Solution(s)
Character is not printing in the

correct positions, or the
characters near the edges of the
page are missing.
Check, and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer
driver to coincide with the application.
Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.
Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device
requires minimum margins of inches (5 mm) on all sides.
The font type is incorrect
Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.

Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in
the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Select Always use True Type fonts from the Font tab of the Printer
Driver Properties dialog box.
The character is not smooth.
Select an outline font instead of a bit map font.
Fine line print cannot be

obtained.
Select 600 dpi resolution.
Poor photograph print quality.
Different character, or symbol

from the document is printed.
Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.
The printer does not print

anything, or prints irregular
images from the middle of the
1st page.
Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install an

Expansion D-RAM Card, or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the
Quality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Printing is exceedingly slow.
Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled "
from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
313
DP-8060/8045/8035
4.8.3.
Error Message Appears on the PC
Error Message
Network Print DLL Error.
Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On", and the 10Base-T/
100Base-TX cable is properly connected.
Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)
Network Port is Busy.
The Panasonic Device may be processing a different print job,

please wait, and try again later.
The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting, or Receiving an email.
Cannot print because an error is

found in the current printer
setting.
Verify, and specify the paper size, or orientation to coincide with the
application, and the printer driver settings.
4.8.4.
Error Message Appears on the Unit

Error Message
Cannot complete print job;

Image memory overflow
There may not be enough Sort Memory available in the

Panasonic Device to complete the print job.
Either install an optional Sort Memory, or change the
resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Cannot complete print job;

Confirm print condition
The print settings may not match the system requirements.

Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Properties
dialog box.
Ex: Multi-sized printing.
Cannot print;
System error
Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties

dialog box.
4.8.5.
System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Problem
Cannot read the drive.
Insert the CD into the drive, and click Retry.
314
DP-8060/8045/8035
memo
315
DP-8060/8045/8035
5 Service Modes
5.1.
Service Modes (For Copier)
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier, and a
means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.
Caution:
The factory default parameters are preset (country dependent) for optimum performance, and in
compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed.
Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant, or become
inoperable.
5.1.1.
Service Mode Procedure
1. To select the Service Mode

The Service Mode is selected when "Function", "Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and "3" keys on the
keypad are simultaneously pressed, enter the password, and select OK button (default password is
00000000), then F1 (Self Test) appears in the display.
2. To exit the Service Mode
The Service Mode is reset when the "Function", and C (Clear) keys are pressed simultaneously.
5.1.2.
Copier Service Mode Functions

Service Modes (For Copier)
Service
Mode
F1
Self Test
Item
00
01
02
03
CCD Test
LCD/LED Test
Page Memory Test
Print Test Pattern 1
04 Print Test Pattern 2

F2
F3
07 (Factory Use Only)

Single Copy Test
Continuous Copy Test
F4
Input / Output Status Test
F5
Function Parameters
F6
Adjust Parameters
F7
F8
Electronic Counter
Service Adjustment
F9
Unit Maintenance
Function
This test is used for checking the CCD.
This test is used for checking the LCD, and LEDs.
This test is used for checking the Page Memory.
Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position
alignment.
Prints the Slant pattern for setting the Paper
position alignment.
Prints the Grid pattern for setting the Paper position
alignment.
Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex Paper
position alignment.
One sheet is copied when the Start key is pressed.
Multi copies are made when the Start key is
pressed.
The operation of Input / Output items (selected item
numbers) is checked.
Various function settings (selected by code
numbers) can be changed.
Various function settings (selected by code
numbers) can be adjusted.
Electronic Counters for Maintenance
Perform pseudo-operation of an item (selected by
code numbers)
Fax Function Parameters
316
DP-8060/8045/8035
F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F5-00
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
F5-09
Country Version
Frequency Desired
. . . . .
LSU Startup Speed
LSU Off Timer
. . . . .
Job Tracking Server
Language Default
Batch Printing Mode
Fuser Lamp Control
F5-10
F5-11
F5-12
F5-13
F5-14
F5-15
F5-16
F5-17
F5-18
F5-19
. . . . .
. . . . .
Printer Fan Extension
Paper Out Red Indicator
Paper Size Tray 1
Paper Size Tray 2
Paper Size Tray 3
Paper Size Tray 4
Paper Size L (LCT)
. . . . .
F5-20 ADF
F5-21 Finisher
F5-22 System Console
USA/CAN
60Hz
Full
15 Sec
No
English
On
Off
5 min
On
LETTER
Auto
None
None
LETTER
Auto
Auto
Auto
F5-50
F5-51
F5-52
F5-53
F5-54
F5-55
F5-56
F5-57
F5-58
F5-59
Auto Contrast Adjust

Dept. Counter (COPY)
Dept. Counter (FAX)
2-Sided Auto Shift
Margin Reduction
Margin Value Default
Edge Value Default
Book Value Default
Oper. Waste Toner Alarm
Oper. Add Toner Alarm
Yes
No
No
No
No
10mm
5mm
20mm
5 K
Stop
F5-60
F5-61
F5-62
F5-63
F5-64
F5-65
F5-66
F5-67
F5-68
F5-69
Auto Tray Selection

. . . . .
. . . . .
U13 Clear
Dept. Counter (SCANNER)
Dept. Counter (PRINTER)
Interleaving Default
Page Insertion Default
Cover Mode Default
Reduce N in 1 Space
Yes
F5-70 PM Cycle
F5-71 . . . . .
F5-72 Disable At Web PM
Any Keys
Yes
Yes
Blank
Blank
F,Blank
No
120 K
Stop
**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.02

F6-00
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
F6-04
F6-05
F6-06
F6-07
F6-08
F6-09
Adj 100% Side-Side Read

Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read
100% Selection
Original Registration
Main Motor Speed
Polygon Motor Speed
Registration Void
Trail Edge Read Timing
Trail Edge Print Timing
3
-3
0
8
-3
0
0
4
0
5
F6-50
F6-51
F6-52
F6-53
F6-54
F6-55
F6-56
F6-57
F6-58
F6-59
T/P Mode Image Density

P Mode Image Density
LSU Unit PWM Adjust 1
CCD Read Position Adj.
T Mode Contrast
T/P Mode Contrast
P Mode Contrast
Sep. DC Volt. 1-Sided
Sep. AC Volt. 1-Sided
F6-10
F6-11
F6-12
F6-13
F6-14
F6-15
F6-16
F6-17
F6-18
F6-19
Side Adjust (Bypass)

Side Adjust (Tray 1)
Side Adjust (LCT)
Side Adjust (ADU)
Standard Grid Voltage
Standard Laser Power
Std Bias DC Voltage
-2
3
1
0
0
0
1
-30
-3
-10
F6-60
F6-61
F6-62
F6-63
F6-64
F6-65
F6-66
F6-67
F6-68
F6-69

Continuous Print TDC
TDC Gain Voltage Adjust
Lead Edge Read Timing
Side Edge Read Adjust
Black Density Reference
Black Density Output
ADF Image Density
Paper Loop (Tray 3)
Stamp Position Adjust
F6-20 Print Contrast Adjust

F6-21 TDC Gain Voltage
F6-22 Factory use only
0
-46
0
F6-70 . . . . .
F6-71 . . . . .
F6-72 . . . . .
317
0
15
2
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
-3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
-17
0
DP-8060/8045/8035
Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

**********- M A C H I N E S E T U P I N F O R M A T I O N -****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
1.MACHINE INFORMATION
MACHINE NAME
MAC ADDRESS
SERIAL NUMBER
: DP-xxxx
: xxxxxxxxxxxx
:
2.FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
SC BOOT
PNL
SPC
FINISHER
FAX MODEM
PDL FONT1
SC2
DATA SECURITY KIT
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.MEMORY CAPACITY
PAGE MEMORY
SORT MEMORY
FAX MEMRY
: 32 MB
: 32 MB
: 3 MB
4.OPTION
DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)
3rd PAPER FEED MODULE
4th PAPER FEED MODULE
LCT
FINISHER
PUNCH UNIT
FAX BOARD
NETWORK SCANNER
PCL PRINTER
PS PRINTER
IPX/SPX
EMAIL
DDS
HDD
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
5.ERROR LOG
TOTAL PRINT COUNT
: 18700
BxVxxxxxPU
Mxx
AxVxxxxxPU
60cpm Vxxxx
Ver xxxx
CAVxxxxxxxx
CAVxxxxxxxx
Vxxxxx(xxxxxxxx)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes xxx xxxxxxx-xxxxxx
NO. DATE & TIME

ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
NO. DATE & TIME
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J27
XX-00000008
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J41
XX-00000140
(See Remarks)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remarks:
XX-00000140
Page Count
00 : Printer Error
02 : Scanner Error
318
DP-8060/8045/8035
F7 Total Counter List (Sample)

**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F7-01 Application Password
0000
F7-02 Maintenance Count

Total Count
PM Count
Scanner PM Count
ADF Count
OPC Drum Count
Process Unit Count
ADF PM Count
Fuser Web Count
Developer Count
Corona Cleaning Count
Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up
Total OPC Rotation Time
Avg. Min / Drum Rise Up
Developer Using Time
:
16024
:
16024
:
4210
:
908
:
16024
:
16024
:
908
: 225332
:
15664
:
16024
:
3.43
:
5.67
:
0.16
:
43666
F7-03 Paper Feed Count

Sheet Bypass Count
1st Paper Tray Count
2nd Paper Tray Count
3rd Paper Tray Count
4th Paper Tray Count
LCT Tray Count
2-Sided Count
A4 / Letter Count
A4-R / Letter-R Count
A3 / Ledger Count
B4 / Legal Count
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2451
11393
2066
0
0
0
115
11433
836
1065
813
F7-04 Scanner Count

ADF Count
ADF Read Count
Scanner Count
Scanner Read Count
:
:
:
:
908
905
4210
5573
319
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.1.3.
F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test
Set the machine to service mode, and press "4" key on the Keypad.
Press the "Start" key.
Enter the number to activate the test then press "Start" key.
Press "Stop" key to cancel the test.
When the "C (Clear)" key is pressed, the selected code input will not be utilized.
Press "Function", and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
1. Input Check
F4 Mode (Input Check)
Message Display
No.
Function
Condition
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
000 Paper Path Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Intermediate Roller Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Timing Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Registration Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
001 Size Sensor 3
1
(Sheet Bypass)
Size Sensor 2
1
(Sheet Bypass, Inside)
Size Sensor 1
1
(Sheet Bypass, Outside)
NP Sensor
Paper is detected.
1
(Sheet Bypass)
ADU Exit Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
ADU Intermediate Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
ADU Paper Feed Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
320
Remarks
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Function
002 Upper Limit Sensor

(2nd Paper Tray)
NP Sensor
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
Size Sensor 3
(2nd Paper Tray)
Size Sensor 2
(2nd Paper Tray)
Size Sensor 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
003 Toner Bottle Home Position
Sensor
Paper Path Sensor
(1st Paper Tray)
Upper Limit Sensor
(1st Paper Tray)
NP Sensor
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
Paper Path Sensor
(2nd Paper Tray)
004 Right Cover Open/Close
Sensor
(Bias)
(Separation Corona)
(Transfer Corona)
(Charge Corona)
Developer Unit Detecting
Sensor

Message Display
Condition
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Upper Limit is detected. 1
Paper is not detected.
Home position is
detected.
Paper is detected.
1
0
0
Upper Limit is detected.
Paper is detected.
Cover is open.
Normal.
0
1
1
Normal.
Normal.
Normal.
Developer Unit is not

detected.
321
Remarks
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
005
006
007
008
009

Message Display
Function
Condition
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Charge Corona Cleaning End Cleaner is not detected.
0
Detect Sensor
Charge Corona Cleaning
Cleaner is detected.
1
Home position Sensor
Inverting Cover Sensor
Cover is open.
1
Paper Exit Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Inverting Paper Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Inverting Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Dust Fan Lock Signal
Normal.
0
Toner Waste Container Full
1
Detection Sensor
is full.
Exhaust Fan 2 Lock Signal
Normal.
0
Normal.
0
0
Detection Sensor
is detected.
Suction Fan Lock Signal
Normal.
0
Power Supply Fan Lock
Normal.
0
Signal
Ozone Fan 2 Lock Signal
Normal.
0
Normal.
0
Cover Open/Close Sensor
Cover is open.
1
(System Console)
Paper Path Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
(4th Paper Tray)
Upper Limit Sensor
1
(4th Paper Tray)
1
NP Sensor
(4th Paper Tray)
1
(4th Paper Tray)
1
(4th Paper Tray)
1
(4th Paper Tray)
Drive Motor Stop Signal
Drive Motor is stopped.
1
(System Console)
322
Remarks
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Function
010 Paper Path Sensor

(3rd Paper Tray)
Upper Limit Sensor
(3rd Paper Tray)
NP Sensor
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
System Console Detection
Sensor
011 Upper Limit Sensor
(LCT)
NP Sensor
(LCT)
Attach / Un-attach Sensor
LCT Tray Lower Limit
LCT Door Open Detection
Sensor
LCT Detection Sensor
Paper Path Sensor
(LCT)
012 Paper Remaining Sensor 3
(LCT)
(LCT)
(LCT)
013 Upper (No.1) Paper Path
Sensor (Pl18S)
Paper Tray Sensor (Pl6S)
Front Stapler Home Position
Sensor (MS7S)
Rear Stapler Home Position
Sensor (MS5S)
Lower (No.3) Paper Path
Sensor (Pl20S)
Middle (No.2) Paper Path
Sensor (Pl19S)

Message Display
Condition
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Paper is detected.
1
System Console is
connected.
1
1
1
LCT is detached.
Lower Limit is detected.
Door is closed.
1
1
0
LCT is detected.
Paper is detected.
1
0
Paper is detected.
Paper is detected.
Home position
Home position
Paper is detected.
Paper is detected.
323
Remarks
1
1
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605)
Only.
1
1
1
0
0
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Function
014 Paper Path Cover Switch

(Pl3S)
Paper Entry Cover Sensor
(Pl9S)
Front Cover Sensor (Pl2S)
Exit Cover Switch (MS3S)
Front Cover Switch (MS2S)
Paper Entry Cover Switch
(MS1S)
Front Stapler Sensor (MS6S)
Rear Stapler Sensor (MS4S)
015 Stapler Home Position Sensor
(Pl22)
Entrance Paper Path Sensor
(Pl1)
Buffer Paper Path Sensor
(Pl14)
Exit Paper Path Sensor (Pl3)
Buffer Entrance Sensor (Pl17)
016 Stapler Tray Sensor (Pl4)
2nd Tray Sensor (Pl12)
1st Tray Sensor (Pl11)
Stapler Sensor (MS8)
Stapler Cartridge Sensor
(MS8)
Stapler Unit Sensor
017 Upper Cover Sensor (MS1P)
Front Cover Sensor (MS2P)
Move Home Position Sensor
(Pl1P)
Home Position Sensor (Pl3P)
Punch Unit Connection
018 Swing Guide Open Sensor
(Pl18)
Shutter Open Sensor (Pl5)
Tray Unit Home Position
Sensor (Pl18)
Alignment Home Position
Sensor (Pl18)
Stapler Shift Home Position
Sensor (Pl17)
Push Switch 2
Push Switch 3

Message Display
Condition
Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Cover is open.
1
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605)
Only.
Cover is open.
0
Cover is open.
Cover is open.
Cover is open.
Cover is open.
0
0
1
1
Stapler is empty.
Stapler is empty.
Home position is
detected.
Paper is detected.
0
0
1
0
Paper is detected.
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Stapler is detected.
1
Stapler Cartridge is
0
detected.
Stapler Unit is detected.
0
Cover is open.
1
Punch Unit (SP31)
only
Cover is open.
1
Home position is
0
detected.
1
Home position is
detected.
Punch Unit is detected.
0
Guide is open.
1
Shutter is open.
Home position is
detected.
Home position is
detected.
Home position is
detected.
Switch is ON.
Switch is ON.
324
1
1
0
0
1
1
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Function
019 Swing Guide Close Sensor

(MS2, MS6)
Shutter Close Sensor (MS4)
Front Door Open Sensor
(Pl16)
Tray Safety Zone Sensor
(MS3)
Upper Limit Detection Sensor
(MS5)
Saddle Stitch Unit IN Sensor
(Pl16S)
Front Door Open Sensor
(MS1)
Joint Detect Sensor (Pl15)
020 Size Sensor B
Size Sensor A
Size Sensor Z
Size Sensor Y
Size Sensor X
021 ADF/Platen Cover Angle
Sensor
ADF/Platen Cover Open
Sensor
Home Position Sensor
+24V Line Error Detecting
Signal
022- Not Used
029
030 ADF B1 Sensor
ADF B2 Sensor
ADF B3 Sensor
ADF Inverting Sensor
ADF Paper Exit Detection
Sensor
ADF Cover Open Detection
Sensor
ADF Detection Sensor

Message Display
Condition
Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Guide is closed.
1
2-Bin Finisher
(FS600) &
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Shutter is closed.
1
Finisher (FS605).
Front Door is open.
0
Tray Danger Area
Upper Limit
Saddle Unit is detected.
Front Door is open.
Finisher Unit is detected.

Original detected on the
B position.
A position.
Z position.
Y position.
X position.
ADF/Platen Cover is
open more than 30
angle.
ADF/Platen Cover is
open.
Home position is
detected.
+24V Line is OFF.
1
1
325
Front Side
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cover is open.
ADF is not detected.
Z
Y
X
1
1
Platen
Original is detected.
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Function
031 ADF Original Sensor

ADF Original Width Sensor 1
ADF Original Width Sensor 2
ADF Original Length Sensor 1
ADF Original Length Sensor 2
032- Not Used
039

Message Display
Condition
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A) only

No.
Function
Condition
015 Trailing Edge Sensor (PT5)

Paper Entrance Sensor (Pl6)
Paper is detected.
Paper is detected.
Processing Tray Sensor (Pl6) Paper is detected.
Folding Position Sensor (Pl10) Paper is detected.
Joint Switch (MS2)
Open
Front Door Switch (MS1)
Open
Front Door Sensor (Pl22)
Open
Upper Cover Sensor (Pl23)
Open
016 Paddle Home Position Sensor Home position
(Pl2)
Stack Feed Roller Home
Home position
Position Sensor (Pl12)
Delivery Belt Home Position
Home position
Sensor (Pl7)
Aligning Plate Home Position Home position
Sensor (Rear) (Pl5)
Aligning Plate Home Position Home position
Sensor (Front) (Pl4)
Folding Roller Home Position Home position
Sensor (Pl11)
Folding Home Position Sensor Home position
(Pl10)
Bind Tray Sensor (Pl13)
Paper is detected.
017 Staple Connection
Connected
Stapler Slide Home Position
Home position
Sensor (Pl18)
Staple Home Position Sensor Home position
(Pl19)
Stapler Safety Switch (MS3) CLOSE
Staple Empty Sensor (Pl20)
No Staple
No Staple
Staple Top Position Sensor
(Pl21)
326
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
DP-8060/8045/8035

No.
Function
018 Paper Tray Sensor (Pl8)

Paper Surface Sensor (Pl9)
Full Stack Sensor (Pl24)
Shift Upper Limit Sensor
(Pl15)
Shift Lower Limit Sensor
(Pl16)
019 Punch Unit Connection
Condition
Paper is detected.
When paper surface
detected
When paper is full
When the tray is at the
upper limit
lower limit
Connected
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1
1
Remarks
1
1
1
1
2-Bin Finisher (DA-FS330) only

No.
Function
015 Paper Exit Sensor (Inverting)

(PC3)
Paper Path Sensor (PC8)
Paper Exit Sensor (Straight)
(PC2)
Paper Feed Sensor (PC1)
016 Punch Box Detecting Sensor
(PC12)
Belt Home Position Sensor
(PC4)
Jogging Home Position
Sensor (PC6)
Set Switch (SW1)
Condition
Paper is detected.
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1
Paper is detected.
Paper is detected.
Paper is detected.
Punch Box is not
detected
Home Position
1
1
1
1
0
Home Position
When Finisher is slide

from Unit
017 Cartridge Sensor (SW2)
Staple Cartridge
Mounted
Staple Sensor (SW3)
Staple Detected
Staple Home Position Sensor Home Position
(PC13)
Sheet Detecting Sensor (PC7) Paper is detected.
Detect Bottom of Lower
018 Elevating Bottom Sensor
(PC11)
Tray
Paper Upper Surface
Paper is detected.
Detecting Sensor (PC10)
Paper Full Sensor (PC9)
Paper is not Detected
Elevation Ceiling Sensor
Detect Ceiling of Lower
(PC5)
Tray
327
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
Remarks
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Output Check
Press the "Start" key to begin, and press the "Stop" key to reset.
No.
040- Not Used
049
050 Main Motor
Item
051 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In

Forward Direction
052 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In
Reverse Direction
053 Suction Fan / Dust Fan
054 Not Used

055 Ozone Fan 2
056 Exhaust Fan 1/2/3
057 Power Supply Fan

058 Not Used
059 Separator Solenoid
060 Mg Roller Clutch
061 Registration Clutch
062 Total Counter
063 Key Counter
064 Not Used
065 Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(1st Paper Tray)
066 Paper Feed Solenoid
(1st Paper Tray)
067 Lift Motor
(1st Paper Tray)
068 Intermediate Roller Clutch
F4 Mode (Output Check)

Function
Remark
Activate the Main Motor by pressing

the Start key.
When CN719-3 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the
forward direction.
reverse direction.
When CN758-11 is 24V, Suction Fan
rotates.
When CN758-6 is 24V, Dust Fan
rotates.
When CN758-5 is 24V, Ozone Fan 2
rotates.
When CN757-5 is 24V, Exhaust Fan
1 rotates.
2 rotates.
3 rotates.
When CN758-12 is 24V, Power
Supply Fan rotates.
to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.
to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.
When CN716-6 signal level changes 1 minute
When CN768-5 signal level changes 100 ms
to 0V from +24V, counter operates.
to 0V from +24V, counter operates.
When CN712-4 signal level changes 2 seconds
ascending direction.
069 Not Used

328
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
072 Lift Motor
(2nd Paper Tray)
073- Not Used
074
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
077 Lift Motor
(3rd Paper Tray)
078 Clutch
(System Console)
079 Drive Motor
(System Console)
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
082 Lift Motor
(4th Paper Tray)
083- Not Used
084
(Sheet Bypass)
(Sheet Bypass)
087- Not Used
090
(LCT)
092 LCT Paper Tray Lift (Up)
093 LCT Paper Tray Lift (Down)
094 Paper Feed Motor
(LCT)
095- Not Used
099
100 ADU Paper Exit Clutch

Function
Remark

to 0V from +5V, motor rotates.
1 minute
2 seconds
1 minute
1 minute
2 seconds


Motor rotates in the ascending
direction.
(together with upper limit control)
Motor rotates in the descending
direction.
(together with lower limit control)
Motor rotates.

329
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
101 ADU Paper Feed Clutch
102 Inverting Motor Rotating In
Forward Direction
103 Inverting Motor Rotating In
Reverse Direction
104 Paper Guide Solenoid ON
105 Paper Guide Solenoid OFF
106 Roller Solenoid ON
107 Roller Solenoid OFF
108 Saddle Paper Feed Unit Test
109 Tray Elevator Unit Test 1
110 Tray Elevator Unit Test 2
111 Paper Feed Unit Test
112 Paper Exit Unit Test
113 Collation Unit Test

114 Stapler Unit Test
115 Stapler Unit Move Test
116 Rocking Unit Test
117 Shutter Unit Open Test
118 Not Used
119 Shutter Unit Close Test
120 Lamp
121- Not Used
159
160 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating
(67% of rotating speed)

Function
Remark
Inverting motor rotates in the forward
direction.
Inverting motor rotates in the reverse
direction.
When CN763-10 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, clutch
turns ON for Straight Paper Exit.
When CN763-12 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, clutch
turns OFF for Inverting Paper Exit.
to 0V from +24V, clutch turns ON for
the Inverting Roller turning OFF.
to 0V from +24V, clutch turns OFF for
the Inverting Roller turning ON.
Feed Motor turns ON.
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605) Only.
Tray moves to Upward direction.
2-Bin Finisher (FS600),
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Tray moves to Home Position.
Finisher (FS605), and
2-Bin Finisher (FS330).
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS355A).
Collation Plates turns ON.
Stapler turns ON.
Stapler Unit moves.
and 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605).
Guide turns ON.
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Shutter unit is opened.
2-Bin Finisher (FS330).
Shutter unit is closed.
to 0V from +24V, Lamp operates for
4 seconds.
ADF paper feed motor rotates at

67% of rotating speed.
330

and 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605).
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
163 ADF Transport Motor Rotating
166 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch
167 ADF Registration Roller 1 Clutch
168 ADF Registration Roller 2 Clutch
169 ADF Inverting Roller 1 Clutch
170 ADF Inverting Roller 2 Clutch
171 ADF Speed Down Clutch
172 ADF Solenoid
173 ADF Inverting Solenoid
174 ADF Pinch Roller Solenoid
175 ADF Stamp Solenoid

Function
ADF transport motor rotates at 67%
of rotating speed.
of rotating speed.
of rotating speed.
to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for
3 seconds.
3 seconds.
3 seconds.
3 seconds.
3 seconds.
3 seconds.
to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates
for 200ms.
for 200ms.
for 1 second.
for 1 second.
331
Remark
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.1.4.
F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)
Set the machine to Service Mode, and press "5" key on the Keypad.
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display, and select the "OK" button.
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
No.
Item
00 Country Version
01
Frequency Desired
02
03
Not Used
LSU Startup Speed
04
LSU Off Timer
05
06
Not Used
Job Tracking Server
F5 Mode
Function
0 : Japan
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
3 : Other
0 : Auto
1 : 50 Hz
2 : 60Hz
Default Setting
Country Dependent
2 (for USA / Canada)

1 (for Europe)
0 : Low
1 : Full
1 : 5 sec.
2 : 10 sec.
3 : 15 sec.
4 : 20 sec.
6 : 30 sec.
8 : 40 sec.
10 : 50 sec.
12 : 60 sec.
0 : No
1 : Yes
332
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
07 Language Default
08
Batch Printing Mode
09
Fuser Lamp Control
10-11 Not Used

12 Printer Fan Extension
13
Paper Out Red Indicator
14
Paper Size Tray 1
15
Paper Size Tray 2
F5 Mode
Function
0 : English (American)
1 : French
3 : German
4 : Swedish
5 : Italian
6 : Dutch
7 : Portugal
8 : Spanish
9 : Norway
10 : Danish
11 : Finnish
13 : English
17 : Polish
18 : Hungary
19 : Japanese
20 : Czech
21 : Greek
0 : Off
1 : On
0 : Off
1 : Auto
0 : None
2 : 2 min
5 : 5 min
0 : Off
1 : On
0 : None
3 : A4
5 : B5
13 : LETTER
0 : None
1 : A3
2 : B4
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
7 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
16 : INVOICE
17 : Auto
333
Default Setting
13 (for Europe)
Note:
The available
languages for
selection is
dependent on the
destination's
specification.
Ex: For 0 : English
(American)
- English
- C.French
- Spanish
1
1 (for Europe)
5
1
3 (for Europe)
17
Note:
The available
paper size is
dependent on the
destination's
specification.
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
16 Paper Size Tray 3
17
18
Paper Size Tray 4

Paper Size L (LCT)
19
20
Not Used
ADF
21
Finisher
22
System Console
23
LCT
24
QUANTUM TDC Level Adj.

(Factory Use Only)
25
Digital QUANTUM
26
2-Sided Unit
27
COPY Output Bin

(For DA-FS600/605 only)
28 PRINTER Output Bin
29 FAX/EMAIL Output Bin
30- Not Used
31
32 Job Build And SADF Mode
33
34
Not Used
Multi Size Feed Default
F5 Mode
Function
0 : None
1 : A3
2 : B4
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
7 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
15 : INVOICE
Same as F5-16
3 : A4
5 : B5
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
Default Setting
0
Note:
The available
paper size is
dependent on the
destination's
specification.
Same as F5-16
3 (for Europe)
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : Low
2 : Medium
3 : High
0 : Off
1 : On
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : Upper
1 : Bottom
Same as F5-27
Same as F5-27
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Off
1 : On
334
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
35 Not Used
36 Display DD Key
37
Corona Wire Cleaning
38
2-Sided Mode Default
39
Staple Position Setting
40
Double Count
41
Count Up Timing
42
KEY/DEPT. Counter
43
44
Key Counter Timing

Insert Paper Count
45
Dept Code Reentry Again
46
Hole Punch Type
47
TH Sensor (TR DT)
48
TH Sensor (DEV)
49
Auto Contrast Algorithm
50
Auto Contrast Adjust
51
Dept. Counter (COPY)
52
Dept. Counter (FAX)
F5 Mode
Function
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : 1000
1 : 3000
2 : 10000
3:0
0 : No
1 : 1 to 2
2 : 2 to 2
3 : B to 2
0 : Landscape
1 : Portrait
2 : Center
0 : No
1 : LDR
2 : LDR/ LGL
(for USA / Canada)
0 : No
1 : A3
2 : A3, B4
(for Other Destinations)
0 : At Feed
1 : At Exit
0 : No
1 : Key Cntr
2 : DEPT.
3 : Card
Same as F5-41
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Yes
1 : No
0 : 2 Hole
1 : 3 Hole
2 : 4 Hole
0 : No
1 : Mid
2 : Large
0 : No
1 : Mid
2 : Large
0 : Tip Dist
1 : Histgram
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : Yes
335
Default Setting
1 (for Europe)
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
2 (for Europe)
1
1
0
1
1
0
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
53 2-Sided Auto Shift
54
Margin Reduction
55
Margin Value Default
56
Edge Value Default
57
Book Value Default
58
Oper. Waste Toner Alarm
59
Oper. Add Toner Alarm
60
Auto Tray Selection
61- Not Used

62
63 U13 Clear
64
Dept. Counter (SCANNER)
65
Dept. Counter (PRINTER)
66
Interleaving Default
67
Page Insertion Default
68
Cover Mode Default
69
Reduce N in 1 Space
F5 Mode
Function
Default Setting
0 : No
1 : Auto Sft
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : 5 mm
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
0 : 5 mm
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
0 : 15 mm
1 : 20 mm
2 : 25 mm
3 : 30 mm
0 : Stop
1:3K
2:5K
3:8K
4 : 10 K
0 : Stop
1 : Continue
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Any Keys
1 : Func + 1
0 : Yes
1 : No
0 : Yes
1 : No
0 : Blank
1 : Copy
0 : Blank
1 : Copy
0 : F, Blank
1 : F, Copy
2 : FB, Blank
3 : FB, Copy
0 : No
1 : Yes
336
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
70 PM (Preventive Maintenance)
Cycle
71
72
Not Used
Disable At Web PM
73
PM Cycle (Fuser Web)
74
Fuser Web Feeding
75- Not Used

76
77 Text Error Diffusion
78
A4/LTR Size Select
79
HID Mode
80
Paper Size Priority
81
B4/FLS Size Selection
F5 Mode
Function
0 : No
1 : 1.5 K
2 : 2.5 K
3: 5K
4 : 10 K
5 : 15 K
6 : 20 K
7 : 30 K
8 : 40 K
9 : 60 K
10 : 80 K
11 : 90 K
12 : 120 K
13 : 150 K (DP-8060)
14 : 200 K (DP-8060)
15 : 240 K (DP-8060)
0 : Continue
1 : Stop
0 : 120 K
1 : 240 K
0 : 1/10
1 : 1/20
2 : 1/30
0 : Errordif
1 : Multilvl
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Standard
1 : Medium
2 : High
1 : A3
2 : B4
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
7 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
15 : INVOICE
0 : B4
1 : 8 x 13
2 : 8.5 x 13
337
Default Setting
12 (for DP-8045/8035)
15 (for DP-8060)
Note:
The PM Cycle
selections are
dependent on the
destination's
specification.
1
1
1
0
0
0
3 (for Europe)
Note:
The Paper Size
Priority selections
are dependent on
the destination's
specification.
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Item
82 Manual Skyshot Mode
83
Digital Skyshot Mode
84
Paper Tray Priority
85
Side Void Setting (ADF)
86
87
Not Used
PM Cycle (ADF)
88
89
Not Used
LAN Speed/Duplex
90
TCH Panel Beep Sound
91
92
9394
95
96
97
98
99
M1, Size
M2, Size
Not Used
F5 Mode
Function
Default Setting
0 : Off
1 : M1, On
2 : M2, On
3 : M1, M2, On
0 : No
1 : Freeshp
2 : Parallel
0:L>S>C>B
1 : C >S > L > B
2:L>C>S>B
0 : None
1 : Yes
0 : No
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
0 : Auto
1 : 10 Half
2 : 10 Full
3 : 100 Half
4 : 100 Full
0 : Off
1 : Soft
2 : Loud
Set the default size for Manual Skyshot
Mode, M1, and M2.
(Factory Use Only)
338
1
0
0
1
70 x 160
95 x 220
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.1.5.
F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
Note:
The Factory Setting may differ for each model.
F6 Mode
No.
Item
00
Adj 100% Side-Side Read
01
Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read
02
03
100% Selection
Original Registration
04
05
Main Motor Speed
06
Polygon Motor Speed
07
Registration Void
08
Trail Edge Read Timing
09
Trail Edge Print Timing
10
Side Adjust (Bypass)
11
12
13
Remarks
Setting
Range
-9 - +9 0.1%
Adjustment of ratio for vertical position when

scan is made.
Adjustment of ratio for parallel position when -9 - +9 0.1%
scan is made.
Adjustment from 99.1% to 100.9%
-9 - +9 0.1%
Adjustment of platen original registration
-30 - +30
detection timing.
0.2mm
Delay time is adjusted from registration roller
-50 - +50
clutch ON.
0.5mm
Adjustment of Main Motor speed.
-10 - +10
0.1%
Adjustment Polygon Motor speed.
-99 - +99
0.1%
Registration void should be adjusted.
0 - +99
0.5mm
Adjustment of trail edge void.
-9 - 0
0.5mm
-9 - +15
0.5mm
Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass).
-8 - +7
0.5mm
Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray).
-8 - +7
0.5mm
Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray).
-8 - +7
0.5mm
Adjustment of LSU side-side (3rd Tray).
-8 - +7
0.5mm
339
DP-8060/8045/8035
F6 Mode
No.
Item
14
Adjustment of LSU side-side (4th Tray).
15
Side Adjust (LCT)
Adjustment of LSU side-side (LCT).
16
Side Adjust (ADU)
Adjustment of LSU side-side (ADU).
17
Standard Grid Voltage
Adjustment of Grid standard voltage.
18
19
Standard Laser Power

Std Bias DC Voltage
Laser power compensation adjustment.

Adjustment of bias standard voltage.
20
Print Contrast Adjust
21
TDC Gain Voltage
22
23
24
(Factory Use Only)

(Factory Use Only)
Std Bias AC Voltage
(Factory Use Only)
Bias Duty Ratio
(Factory Use Only)
TDC Judgement Level
Halftone adjustment, Print density

for Photo Mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Adjustment of toner density sensor gain
voltage.
QUANTUM parameter 1
QUANTUM parameter 2
AC Bias standard voltage adjustment
25
26
27
28
Bias Frequency
(Factory Use Only)
QUANTUM White Density
(Factory Use Only)
Remarks
Bias duty ratio adjustment

Adjustment of toner supply starting judgement
voltage level.
AC Bias frequency adjustment
29
QUANTUM Black Density

(Factory Use Only)
30
2-Level Laser Power Adj.
31
Fuser Temperature
Adjustment of standard white density level.

(Should not be adjusted in the field, and must
be set to "0")
Adjustment of standard black density level.
(Should not be adjusted in the field, and must
be set to "0")
Laser power compensation adjustment in 2
value mode.
Adjustment of fuser temperature.
32
Fuser Edge Temperature
Temperature compensation for edges
33
34
35
36
37
38
TDC Max. Read Only

TDC Min. Read Only
TDC Avg. Read Only
Paper Loop (Tray 1)
Toner Save Mode Lvl Adj.
ID Standard Voltage
(Factory Use Only)
Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control

Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 1
Adjustment of threshold level.
Adjustment of judgement standard voltage.
39
Adjustment of PWM value of LSU.
340
Setting
Range
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-92 - +61
3.27V
-56 - +65
-77 - 76
3.92V
-7 - +7
-86 - +40
0.033V
-10 - +10
20V
-5 - +5 1%
-26 - +26
19.5mV
-2 - +2
1KHz
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-56 - +25
-15 - +15
0.833C
-15 - +15
0.833C
Read only
Read only
Read only
-99 - +99
-255 - +255
-35 - +35
-99 - +99
DP-8060/8045/8035
F6 Mode
No.
Item
Remarks
40
T Corona Current 1-Side
Adjustment of transfer corona current.
41
42
43
Paper Loop (Bypass)

Paper Loop (Tray 2)
Paper Loop (2-Sided)
Individual Fine Adjustment for Sheet Bypass

Adjustment for the length of the loop formed
before the copier timing roller.
44
45
46
47
FAX Laser Duty Adj.

LCT Paper Feeding
PRINTER Laser Duty Adj.
T Corona Current 2-Side
48
49
QUANTUM TDC Adjust

(Factory Use Only)
T Mode Image Density
50
T/P Mode Image Density
51
P Mode Image Density
52
53

CCD Read Position Adj.
54
55
56
57
61
62
T Mode Contrast
T/P Mode Contrast
P Mode Contrast
(Factory Use Only)
(Factory Use Only)
(Factory Use Only)
(Factory Use Only)
Continuous Print TDC
TDC Gain Voltage Adjust
63
Lead Edge Read Timing
64
Side Edge Read Adjust
65

(Factory Use Only)
Black Density Output
(Factory Use Only)
58
59
60
66
Adjustment of LCT paper feed.

Adjustment of transfer corona current.
Adjustment of QUANTUM TDC
Image density adjustment for Text mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo
mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Image density adjustment for Photo mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Adjustment of PWM value of LSU.
Adjustment of CCD read position.
Compensation of Detach DC voltage for 1

sided copy.
Compensation of Detach AC voltage for 1
sided copy.
Compensation of Detach DC voltage for 2
sided copy.
Compensation of Detach AC voltage for 2
sided copy.
Adjustment of toner density sensor gain
voltage.
Reference voltage for Toner Density Sensor.

Compensate value for Toner Density Sensor
output.
341
Setting
Range
-10 - +10
5.22uA
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-50 - +50
-99 - +99
-10 - +10
5.22uA
-3 - +3
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-42 - +44
0.2mm
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-20 - +30
10V
-6 - +8
100V
-20 - +30
10V
-6 - +8
100V
-20 - +20
-10 - +10
0.033V
0 - +9
0.5mm
0 - +9
0.5mm
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
DP-8060/8045/8035
F6 Mode
No.
67
68
69
Item
ADF Image Density
Paper Loop (Tray 3)
Stamp Position Adjust
70-74 Not Used

75 Adj Read AD Enable
(Factory Use Only)
76 Adj Read LSI Sampling
(Factory Use Only)
77 Adj Read LVDS Clock
(Factory Use Only)
78 Paper Loop (Tray 4)
79 MTF (Modulation Transfer
Function) Adjust
80 QUANTUM Exposure Volt.
81 QUANTUM Bias DC Volt.
Remarks
Compensation of ADF image density.
Adjustment of verification stamp position.
Setting
Range
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-50 - +50
0.3mm
Adjustment of read timing.
-2 - +2
0 - +3
0 - +3

Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital
image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode.
82
QUANTUM Charge Voltage
83
84
85
86
Temperature Sensr Value

Humidty Sensor Value
(Factory Use Only)
ADF Reverse Stop Posi.
Value of Temperature sensor.

Value of Humidity Sensor.
87
ADF Exhaust Stop Posi.
Adjustment of ADF exit stop position
88
ADF Feed Regist.1-Sided
Adjustment of ADF pick up for 1-sided.
89
ADF Feed Regist.2-Sided
Adjustment of ADF pick up for 2-sided.
90
ADF Read Main Scan Pos.
91
Original Lead Edge ADF
Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read

start position.
Adjustment of original detection timing.
92
Original Trail Edge ADF
Adjustment of trail edge detection timing.
93
ADF 100% Image 1-Sided
Adjustment of magnification for 1-sided.
94
ADF 100% Image 2-Sided
Adjustment of magnification for 2-sided.
95
Exp. Volt.
96
Charge V.
97
Bias DC V.
98
99
Paper Loop (LCT)

F5/F6 Initialization
Adjustment of LSU Laser Power.

(QUANTUM is OFF)
Adjustment of Charge Voltage.
(QUANTUM is OFF)
Adjustment of Bias Voltage.
(QUANTUM is OFF)
Individual Fine Adjustment for LCT.
Initialize F5/F6 parameter settings.
Adjustment of ADF reverse stop position.
342
-99 - +99
-2 - +2
-56 - +65
-77 - +76
3.92V
-92 - +61
3.27V
0 - 255
0 - 255
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-99 - +99
0.05mm
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-127 - 127
0.3mm
-9 - +9
0.1%
-9 - +9
0.1%
-56 - +65
-95 - +61
3.27V
-77 - +76
3.92V
-99 - +99
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.1.6.
F7 Mode: Electronic Counter
F7 Mode
Service
Item
Mode
F7
Electronic 00 List Print
Counter
01 Application Password
Remarks
02 Maintenance 00 Total Count

Count
01 PM Count
02 Scanner PM Count
03 ADF Count
04 Not Used
05 OPC Drum Count
06 Process Unit Count
07 ADF PM Count
08 Fuser Web Count
09 Developer Count
10 Corona Cleaning
Count
11 Avg. Print/Drum Rise
Up
12 Total OPC Rotation
Time
13 Avg. Min / Drum Rise
Up
14 Developer Using Time
343
Password for Firmware Version update,

Print job queue functions, and various
PC application operations.
Total count for all copies / prints.
Preventive Maintenance count.
PM count for scanner readings.
PM count of originals fed through the
ADF.
PM count of recording paper fed
through the OPC Drum.
through the Process Unit.
through the Automatic Duplex Unit.
PM Count for Fuser Web.
PM Count for Developer.
Count for Corona Cleaner.
Average Print Count for OPC Drum.
Rotation Time for OPC Drum.
Average Rotation Time for OPC Drum.
Count for Developer.
DP-8060/8045/8035
F7 Mode
Service
Item
Remarks
Mode
F7
Electronic 03 Paper Feed 00 Sheet Bypass Count Total count of paper fed from the sheet
Counter
Count
bypass.
01 1st Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 1st
paper tray.
02 2nd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 2nd
paper tray.
03 3rd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 3rd
paper tray.
04 4th Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 4th
paper tray.
05 LCT Tray Count
Total count of paper fed from the LCT.
06 2-Sided Count
Total count of 2-sided Print.
07 A4 / Letter Count
Total count of A4 / Letter Print.
08 A4-R / Letter-R Count Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print.
09 A3 / Ledger Count
Total count of A3 / Ledger Print.
10 B4 / Legal Count
Total count of B4 / Legal Print.
04 Scanner
00 ADF Count
Total count of originals fed through the
Count
ADF.
01 ADF Read Count
Total count of originals scanned through
the ADF.
02 Scanner Count
Total count of scanning operations.
03 Scanner Read Count Total count of scanner readings.
05 Copy Count 00 Copy Print Count
Total count of copies printed.
01 Copy Scan Count
Total count of copies scanned.
06 PC Count
00 PC Print Count
Total count printed from PC.
01 PC Scan Count
Total count scanned to PC.
07 Fax Count
00 Fax Transmit Count
Total count of Fax transmitted.
01 Fax Receive Count
Total count of Fax received.
02 Fax Print Count
Total count of Fax printed.
08 All Counter Clear
All counters are cleared.
09 Service Mode Password
Password for Service Mode.
344
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.1.7.
F8 Mode: Service Adjustment
F8 Mode
No.
00
Item
Exposure Lamp replacement
01-05 Not Used

06 Error Log Print/View
07
08
09
10
11-12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Error Log Clear
(Factory Use Only)

Toner Density Adj.
Drum Charge Checking
Not Used
(Factory Use Only)
OPC Counter Reset
QUANTUM Pattern
(Factory Use Only)
Not Used
LSU PWM Pattern 1
(Factory Use Only)
LSU PWM Pattern 2
(Factory Use Only)
Remarks
When replacing the exposure lamp.
Procedure:
a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp
to the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics
home position) where it can be replaced.
b) To return the optical system to the home position,
press the Clear key.*
a) Each time the arrow button is pressed, the
machine errors, or the paper jam codes stored in
memory are displayed, beginning with the oldest
code.
Note:
Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.
a) Press the Reset key.
A Message "Error code can be cleared with the
Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*
b) Press the Start key.
Lock operation for Scanner Unit.
Adjustment operation of Toner Density.
Adjustment operation of Drum Charge.
Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor.
Resets the OPC Counter.
Print out the QUANTUM Test Pattern.
Print out the Test Pattern 1.

345
DP-8060/8045/8035
F8 Mode
No.
19
20
21
22
Item
Move Mirror To Lock
TDC Sensor Output Adj.

Not Used
LSU PWM Pattern 3
(Factory Use Only)
23 LSU PWM Pattern 4
(Factory Use Only)
24-46 Not Used
47 ADF Continuous Test
48 Platen Continuous Test
49-54 Not Used
Remarks
a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the
locked position for transporting the copier.
b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will
not accept any numerical key input.
Note:
The locking operation is automatically reset when
the Power switch is turned ON again.
Adjustment of TDC sensor.
Press Start key to begin.

Press Start key to begin.
346
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.1.8.
F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance
F9 Mode
Service
Item
Mode
F9
Unit
00 FAX Service Mode
Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel #
02 Firmware
Version
Remarks
00 SC
01 SC Boot
02 PNL
03 SPC
04 Finisher
05 FAX Modem
06
07
08
~
11
12
03 Print
00
Device Info.
01
02
03
04 RAM Edit
Mode
00
01
05 Serial Number
Not Used
SC2
Not Used
Data Security Kit
Displays the contact number when a

machine malfunction occurs.
Displays the firmware version for SC.
Displays the firmware version for SC
Boot.
Displays the firmware version for PNL.
Displays the firmware version for SPC.
Displays the firmware version for
finisher.
Displays the firmware version for FAX
option 1.
Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.
Displays the firmware version for Data

Security Kit.
F5/F6 Parameters
Prints the memory contents of the F5,
and F6 modes.
Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.
System Address
Prints the system memory setting.
Info.
Prints the RAM data dump list.
RAM Address
Information
Relative Addr Setting Setting of Relative address.
Real Address Setting Setting of Real address.
Registration of Serial Number for
Maintenance.
Clears by Shipment Set.
347
DP-8060/8045/8035
F9 Mode
Service
Item
Mode
F9
Unit
06 RAM
00 Parameter Initialize
Maintenance
Initialize
01 All Job Clear

02 Not Used
03 Shipment Set
04 LBP Fuser Reset
05 Dept. Counter Clear
07 Firmware
00 Update From Master
Update
Card
01 Update From Parallel
Port
08 Program
00 Main
Backup
01 Option 1 All
(Refer to
02 Option 1 A
Sect. 3.6.)
03 Option 1 B
04 Option 2 All
05 Option 2 A
06 Option 2 B
09 Update Program Card
10
11
12
13
14
Remarks
Resets the Fax, and Function
parameters/F5 to default values.
Note:
Turn the Power Switch on the Left
Side of the machine to the OFF, and
back to the ON position to enable the
parameter settings.
Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,
Parameter Initialize & Resets the
Counters (Fax).
Clears the LBP fuser error.
Updates the firmware in the machine

with the Master Firmware Card.
Updates the firmware in the machine
with the Parallel Port.
Onboard F-ROM 4MB
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
Creates a Master Firmware Card using
the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB, or
8MB Flash Memory Card will be
required depending upon the model.
Program
00 From Card To Slot 1 Configuration for Program copy.
Copy
01 From Card To Slot 2
02 From Slot 1 To Card
03 From Slot 1 To Slot 2
04 From Slot 2 To Card
05 From Slot 2 To Slot 1
Parameter Backup
Backup the Parameter.
Parameter Restore
Restore the Parameter.
Page Memory Size
Displays the page memory size (MB).
Sort Memory Size
Displays the sort memory size (MB).
348
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.
Service Modes (For Facsimile)
Caution:
The factory default parameters are preset (country dependent) for optimum performance, and in
compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed.
Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant, or become
inoperable.
5.2.1.
Fax Service Mode Procedure
1. To select the Service Mode

The Service Mode is selected when "Function", "Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and "3" keys on the
keypad are simultaneously pressed, enter the password, and select OK button (default password is
00000000), then F1 will appears in the display.
Press "9", and "Start" keys to enter F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance.
Select "00 FAX Service Mode" on the Touch Panel display to enter Facsimile Service Mode.
2. To exit the Service Mode
The Service Mode is reset when the "Function", and C (Clear) keys are pressed simultaneously.
5.2.2.
FAX Service Mode Table
The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit, and
determining the condition of the unit.
No.
Service Mode
00 Not Used
01 Function Param. Setting
02
03
RAM Edit Mode

Print Param.List/Report
04
MODEM Tests
05
06
Not Used
RAM Initialize
07
08
Not Used
Check & Call
09
System Maintenance
Description
Allows changes to the function parameters (the home
position, etc.).
Factory Use Only.
Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer
Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace, and Toner Order
Form.
Generates various binary, tonal, and DTMF signals, by the
modem.
Initialize RAM, and restore the default value of the function
parameters.
Note:
Turn the Power Switch to the OFF, and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,
Maintenance Alert Report, and Toner Order Form.
Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter
Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the
PC to the Flash Card, and Sending a Received File during a
fatal printer error.
349
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.3.
Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)
Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.

Select the "01 Function Param. Setting" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "OK" button 3 times.
No.
Parameter
000 Monitor/Tel Dial
001 Alarm Status
002 Stop Comm.

JRNL
003 Continuous
Polling
004 Numeric ID Set
Function Parameter Table

Selections
Function
1 = Moniter
Selects whether the machine starts to TX
2 = Tel/Dial
automatically during On-Hook dialing.
Monitor : Begin to TX after pressing Start
TEL/DIAL : Begin to TX automatically
1 = Off
Selects the No Paper, or No Toner alarm status.
2 = Timer
OFF
: Alarm is disabled.
3 = Constant
Timer
: Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.
Constant : Alarm will not shut off until "Stop" is
pressed, or the error is cleared/
corrected.
1 = Off
Selects whether the machine prompts to print the
2 = On
COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to
INC, and Stop is pressed during communication.
1 = Off
Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is
2 = Stn (Tx only)
enabled.
3 = Hub (Rx only)
Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF, or Platen,
then press the assigned Program Key to
store, or add the documents into a polled file.
(See Note 1)
Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the
machine will continuously poll originals from
the remote stations until it is interrupted by
pressing "Stop".
1 = Off (will not accept)
Selects whether the machine accepts, and allows to
2 = On (accepts)
set, or change the Numeric ID.
350
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Parameter
005 Destination
Code
006 ID Display
007 JRNL Column
008 Monitor
009 DC Loop
010 TX Level
011 RX Level

Selections
Function
000 : Austria
Sets the Destination Code after installing the Fax
001 : U.K.
Communication Board (DA-FG600).
002 : Canada
003 : Denmark
Note:
004 : Taiwan
It is not necessary to set the parameter for the
005 : Finland
following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware
006 : Germany
is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware.
007 : Netherlands
PB : UK
008 : Italy
PD : Germany
009 : Spain
PF : France
010 : Hong Kong
PG : Switzerland
011 : Australia
PK : China
012 : Switzerland
PT : Taiwan
013 : Norway
PU : USA
015 : Portugal
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
1 = Number (Numeric ID)
Selects the priority of displaying the ID.
2 = Chara (Character ID)
Selects the contents of the ID to display on the
1 = Station
2 = RCVD ID
Journal.
1 = Off
Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for
2 = On
monitoring fax signals.
(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)
1 = Off (Normal)
Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back
2 = On (Off Hook)
communication test.
00 = 0 dBm
Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~
dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.)
15 = -15 dBm
1 = -43 dBm
Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48
2 = -38 dBm
dBm.
3 = -33 dBm
4 = -48 dBm
351
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Parameter
012 DTMF Level
013 G3 RX EQL
014 G3 TX EQL
015 Not Used

~
016
017 TX Start
018 RX Start
019 ITU-T V.34
020 ITU-T ECM

021 EP Tone
022 Signal Interval

Selections
Function
00 = 0 dBm
Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~
dBm steps.
15 = -15 dBm
1 = 0dB
Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode,
2 = 4dB
0dB, 4dB, 8dB, or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
1 = 0dB
Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission
2 = 4dB
mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB, or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
1 = 2400 bps
2 = 4800 bps
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = TC7200
6 = TC9600
7 = 12000 bps
8 = 14400 bps
1 = 2400 bps
2 = 4800 bps
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = TC7200
6 = TC9600
7 = 12000 bps
8 = 14400 bps
1 = Off
2 = On
3 = Select
1 = Off (Invalid)
2 = On (Valid)
1 = Off (without EP Tone)
2 = On (with EP Tone)
1 = 100 ms
2 = 200 ms
3 = 500 ms
023 TCF Check
1 = Normal (Short)
2 = Long
024 CED Frequency 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T)
2 = 2100 Hz
025 Comm. Start-Up 1 = First
2 = Second
Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/

12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
Note:
This parameter is applicable only when
communicating with regular G3 machines. When
communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
use Parameter No. 32.
Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/
12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
Note:
This parameter is applicable only when
communicating with regular G3 machines. When
communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
use Parameter No. 33.
Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On, or Select.
Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, or On,
when entering Phone Book Dialing
Numbers, or Manual Number Dialing.
Select the ECM mode.
Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29
mode.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
On : Add
Off : Do not add
Selects the time interval between the receiving
signal, and the transmitting signal.
Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short
Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz
Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT,
and Polling).
352
DP-8060/8045/8035

No.
Parameter
Selections
Function
026 Non-Standard
1 = Off (Invalid)
Selects own mode (Panafax mode).
2 = On (Valid)
027 Short Protocol B 1 = Off (Invalid)
Selects the short protocol mode.
2 = On (Valid)
028 Short Protocol D 1 = Off (Invalid)
Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it
2 = On (Valid)
allows the machine to automatically store the
modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.
029 Remote
1 = Off (will not accept)
Selects whether the machine accepts Remote
Diagnostics
2 = On (accepts)
Diagnostics from the service station.
030 CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms
Selects the pause interval between the CED, and the
2 = 1 sec
300 bps signal.
031 RTC = EOL x 12 1 = Off (EOLx6)
Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6, or EOLx12.
2 = On (EOLx12)
032 V34 TX Start
2400-33600bps
Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
033 V34 RX Start
2400-33600bps
Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
034 V34 TX SR
2400-3429sr
Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/
3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
Press V, or /\ to select the symbol rate.
035 V34 RX SR
2400-3429sr
Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3429/
3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
Press V, or /\ to select the symbol rate.
036 Not Used
Selects whether to display the modem speed during
037 Protocol Dislay 1 = Off (not displayed)
2 = On (displayed)
communication.
(Press the Job Status Key to display)
038 Not Used
039 Flash Time
5 = 50 ms
Selects the pause interval before activating the
~
Flash key.
100 = 1000 ms
040 Flash Time
5 = 50 ms
Selects the pause interval before activating the
(PSTN)
~
Flash key.
100 = 1000 ms
(For Germany, Austria, and Czech)
041 Pause Time
1 = 1 sec.
Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for
~
dialing through a switchboard, or for international
10 = 10 sec.
calls.
042 Not Used
043 Redial Interval
0 = no waiting
Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1
~
minute steps.
15 = 15 minutes
044 Redial Count
0 = no redial
Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step
~
intervals.
15 = 15 times
Note:
In order to comply with the requirements TBR21
in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.
0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only)
045 Ring Detect
1 = 1 ring
Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1
Count
~
ring step intervals.
9 = 9 rings
353
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Parameter
046 On-Hook Time
047 Response Wait
Interval

Selections
Function
0 = 0 sec.
Selects the on-hook time between sequential
~
communication calls in 1 second step intervals.
90 = 90 sec.
1 = 1 sec.
Selects the waiting interval for the response after
~
completing the dialing.
90 = 90 sec.
20 ~ 150 sec.
(For France Only)
048 Not Used

~
049
050 Ring Detect
Mode
051 Not Used
052 Pulse Rate
053 Not Used
~
054
055 Busy Tone
Check
056 Dial Tone Check
(Except for USA,
and Canada)
057 DC Loop Check
(Except for USA,
and Canada)
058 Comm. JRNL +
Image
059 Confidential
RCV Report
060 Version
1 = Normal
2 = Rough
Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line

signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the
unit may detect the ringing signals.
1 = 10 pps
2 = 20 pps
Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.
1 = Off
2 = On
1 = Off
2 = On
Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.
1 = Off
2 = On
Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during

communication.
Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing

the telephone number.
1 = Off (without image)

2 = On (with image)
1 = Off (does not print out)
2 = On (prints out)
Indicates the Host software
version.
061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY 1 = Fax Transmit Count
2 = Fax Receive Count
3 = Total Count
4 = Copy Print Count
062 Print Counter
1 = Off
2 = On
Selects whether the machine prints the COMM.

Journal with image.
Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential
RCV Report.
Displays the transmitted, received, total printed, and

copied document count.
Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List,
the counter information that is displayed in the
Function Parameter No. 61.
063 Not Used

~
067
354
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077

Parameter
Selections
Function
NYSE Fax
1 = Off
Selects whether the machine will forward the
Forward
2 = On
incoming, and outgoing faxes to a specified station.
(USA, and
Note:
Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding
Canada Only)
via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled,
an Access Code of "0000" is automatically
assigned, and Fax Parameter 038 has a new
setting added called "NYSE".
NYSE Local
1 = INC
Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes
Print
2 = ON (Always)
after FAX Forwarding.
(USA, and
INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.
Canada Only)
ON : Always prints.
Line Error
1 = 128 lines
1. Selects the line disconnect condition during
2 = 256 lines
reception. If the number of line errors exceed this
3 = 512 lines
setting, the unit will disconnect the line.
4 = 1024 lines
2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP, or RTN/
5 = 2048 lines
PIN.
6 = Off (will not disconnect
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES")
line)
(See Note 1)
Total Error
1 = 5%
Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP, or RTN/
2 = 10%
PIN.
3 = 15%
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
4 = 20%
(See Note 2)
Continuous Error 1 = Off (unlimited)
Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6,
2 = 3 lines/STD
or 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total
3 = 6 lines/STD
error exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/
4 = 12 lines/STD
PIN.
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
Error Detect
1 = Lines
Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.
2 = Rate
RTN Receive
1 = Disconnect
Selects whether to disconnect the phone line, or
2 = Continue
continue when "RTN" is received.
Coding
1 = MH (MH, only)
Selects the coding scheme.
2 = MR (MH, or MR)
3 = MMR (MH, MR, or
MMR)
4 = JBIG
Batch TX
1 = Off
Selects whether the batch transmission is available.
(USA, and
2 = On
Canada Only)
RX JAM Length 1 = Off (unlimited)
Selects the maximum length of a received
2=2m
document that can be printed.
Not Used
078
~
079
080 Original Lead
Edge ADF
081 Original Tail
Edge ADF
-99
~
+99
-127
~
+127
Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor

ON position, and the scanning start position.
Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
OFF position, and the scanning end position.
355
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Parameter
082 JAM Length
083 Not Used
084 Line As NoPaper
085 Not Used
086 Reduction Fine
087
088
089
090
~
091
092
Darker Level
Normal Level
Lighter Level
Not Used
Smoothing

Selections
Function
1=1m
Selects the maximum length of the original that can
2=2m
be scanned.
1 = Ring (ring)
2 = Busy (keep line busy)
Selects whether to ring, or send a busy tone to the

remote station when the recording paper runs out, or
the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.
1 = Off
2 = On
0 = Lightest Contrast
~
15 = Darkest Contrast
Selects whether the resolution is preset to Fine,

when sending with reduction B4A4.
Selects the contrast level.
0
15
Lightest Darkest
1 = Off
2 = On
Selects whether the smoothing function is available.
093 Not Used

~
101
102 Original
Registration
-30
~
+30
103 Trail Edge Read -9
Timing
~
0
104 Not Used
~
109
110 Mac Address
111 Not Used
112 Insert EMAIL
1 = Off
TXT
2 = On
113 Not Used

~
114
115 Time Zone
1 = Scroll
2 = Direct
Adjustment of original registration detection timing.

Indicates the MAC Address.

Selects whether the Text Template (email message)
is programmable, and added on all email sent in the
message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40
characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)
Note:
After enabling this feature, aside from entering
the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be
activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will
take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed
Numbers.
Selects the setting method for Time Zone.

Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll
through the Time Zone Table.
Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly,
(*) key to be used as a switch between +/-.
356
DP-8060/8045/8035
No.
Parameter
116 Overwrite
Warning
117 Not Used
~
121
122 LDAP
123 Not Used
~
174
175 FAX/EMAIL
Default
176 Not Used
~
199

Selections
Function
1 = Yes
Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included
2 = No
on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when
programming the Auto Dialer via email.
1 = Off
2 = On
When LDAP is used, specialize characters may be

displayed as different characters.
Available from May production.
0 = Address Book
1 = Mode Set
Selects the FAX/EMAIL Default.
Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode)

This feature allows you to store, or add documents into a polled file in memory.
To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The last
Program Key will be assigned with the "Store 4 Poll" Key name automatically, and cannot be
changed.
To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF, or Platen, and
then press the Program Key to store, or add the document(s) into a polled file.
(Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will not
be accepted.)
Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP, or RTN/PIN
Signal
MCF/PIP
RTP/PIP
RTN/PIN
1:128
0-31
32-63
64-127
2:256
0-63
64-127
128-255
Setting
3:512
4:1024
0-127
0-255
128-255
256-511
256-511
512-1023
5:2048
0-511
512-1023
1024-2047
6:Off
Always
-
Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP, or RTN/PIN
Signal
MCF/PIP
RTP/PIP
RTN/PIN
1:5%
0-2
3-4
5-
Setting
2:10%
3:15%
0-4
0-7
5-9
8-14
1015-
4:20%
0-9
10-19
20-
Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the countrys specifications, or regulations.
Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.
357
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.4.
Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports, and Test Results)
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All
Document File, Protocol Trace, and the Toner Order Form.
5.2.4.1.
Function Parameter List
A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.

Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "01 Function Parameter List" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "YES button to print Function Parameter List.
358
DP-8060/8045/8035
Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
Monitor/Tel Dial
Alarm Status
Stop Comm. JRNL
Continuous Polling
Numeric ID Set
Destination Code
ID Display
JRNL Column
Moniter
DC Loop
Moniter
Timer
On
Off
On
999
Chara
Station
Off
Off
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
Ring Detect Mode

---------Pulse Rate
------------------Busy Tone Check
------------------Comm. JRNL + Image
Confidential RCV Report
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
TX Level
RX Level
DTMF Level
G3 RX EQL
G3 TX EQL
----------------TX Start
RX Start
ITU-T V.34
-11dBm
-43dBm
-5dBm
0dB
0dB
14400bps
14400bps
On
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
Version
TX/RX/PRT/CPY
Print Counter
---------------------------------------------NYSE Fax Forward
NYSE Local Print
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
ITU-T ECM
EP Tone
Signal Interval
TCF Check
CED Frequency
Comm. Start-Up
Non-Standard
Short Protocol B
Short Protocol D
Remote Diagnostics
On
Off
500ms
Normal
2100Hz
First
On
On
On
On
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
Line Error
Total Error
Continuous Error
Error Detect
RTN Recive
Coding
Batch TX
RX JAM Length
-------------------
128
10
Off
Rate
Discon
JBIG
On
2 m
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
CED & 300bps

RTC = EOL x 12
V34 TX Start
V34RX Start
V34 TX SR
V34 RX SR
--------Protocol Dislay
--------Flash Time
75ms
Off
33600bps
33600bps
3429sr
3429sr
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
Original Lead Edge ADF

Original Tail Edge ADF
JAM Length
---------Line As No-Paper
---------Reduction Fine
Darker Level
Normal Level
Lighter Level
0
0
2 m
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
--------Pause Time
--------Redial Interval
Redial Count
Ring Detect Count
On-Hook Time
Response Wait Interval
-----------------
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
------------------Smoothing
----------------------------------------------------------------
Off
500ms
3sec
3min
5
2
5sec
55sec
Normal
10pps
On
On
On
DP-xxxx BAVxxxxxPU
000001/001350/016024/005704
Off
Off
Inc
Ring
On
2
8
14
On
Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.
********************************
****** -12345678901234567890- ***********
Note:
1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the countrys regulations.
2. * mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
359
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.4.2.
Page Memory Test
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory (IC120, and IC121 on the SC PCB), and printer
mechanism using the following procedure.
Select the "03 Page Memory Test" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "YES" button to print a test pattern.
SC
SC BOOT
PNL
SPC
FINISHER
FAX MODEM
PDL FONT1
SC2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
BxVxxxxxPU
Mxx
AxVxxxxxPU
xxcpm Vxxxxx
TX/RX/PRT/CPY : 000123/001350/016024/005704
MEMORY SIZE
: (3MB)
MAC ADDRESS
: 08002313DBBB
SHIPMENT SET
Ver xxxxx
360
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.4.3.
Printer Report
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.
Select the "04 Printer Report" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "YES" button to print a Printer Report.
**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********

LAST PRINT ERROR
SERIAL NUMBER
CUSTOMER ID
:
:
:
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
PNL
SPC
DATA SECURITY KIT
:
:
:
:
DP-xxxx BAVxxxxxPU
AAVxxxxxPU
xxcpm Vxxxxx
Vxxxxx
TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
:
:
:
:
1
1350
5704
16024
NO.DATE & TIME

ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT
NO.DATE & TIME
ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00
00-00000016
02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02
00-00000016
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC
*****
*******************-
-*******-12345678901234567890-**************
361
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.4.4.
All Document Files
Print the document files from the Flash Memory.

Select the "05 All Document Files" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "YES" button to print All Document Files.
362
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.4.5.
Protocol Trace
Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.

Select the "06 Protocol Trace" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "YES" button to print a Protocol Trace Report.
*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******
STATUS
MODE
SPEED
REMOTE CAPA.
LOCAL CAPA.
:
:
:
:
OK
ECM-TX (STANDARD)
28800bps 0MS/L (3429sr)
NSF
00 00 79 34 12 00 82
10 18 00 0A 95 81 D0
81 05
CSI
33 31 32 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
DIS
20 C2 FA C4 80 95 80
80 80 80 01
: NSS
00 00 79 00 00 00 02
00 10 00 02 81 81 90
01
TSI
32 37 32 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
00 09 03
80 91 D0
20 20 20
20 20 20
80 80 A0
00 01 00
80 80 90
20 20 20
20 20 20
COMMAND LOG.
REMOTE
:
NSF
CSI
DIS
CFR
LOCAL
:
TSI
NSS
PIX
PPS-EOP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE
:
MCF
LOCAL
:
DCN
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE
:
LOCAL
:
-PANASONIC
****************************-
-*************-12345678901234567890-***************
363
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.4.6.
Toner Order Form
The Toner Order Form can be printed manually by the following procedure.
Select the "07 Toner Order Form" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "YES" button to print a Toner Order Form.
364
DP-8060/8045/8035
*************************************
>
TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM
<
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
by Phone:
by Fax:
1 201 111 5555 (2)

1 201 111 4444 (3)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to:
Bill to:
Attention:
Attention:
Phone No.:
Phone No.:
(4)
Customer ID:
Toner Bottle No.:
(5)
P.O. No.(if required):

Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/
Print your name and title
Signature & Date
Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)
The toner supply in your machine is running low
(2) Toner Order Tel #
Up to 36 digits
(3) Toner Order Fax #
Up to 36 digits
(4) Customer ID
Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(5) Toner Bottle No.
DQ-TU38R(PU) : DP-8060/8045/8035
DQ-TU37R(PB) : DP-8060
The order number(s) may differ depending on the Model, and the
Destination.
365
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.5.
5.2.5.1.
Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)

Binary Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "01 Binary Signal" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display, and select the "CLOSE" button.
Binary Signal Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signals
V21 300bps
V27ter 2400bps
V27ter 4800bps
V29 7200bps
V29 9600bps
V17 TC7200bps
V17 TC9600bps
V33 12000bps
V33 14400bps
366
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.5.2.
Tonal Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
Select the "02 Tonal Signal" on the Touch Panel display.
Tonal Signal Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Signals
462 Hz
1080 Hz
1100 Hz
1300 Hz
1650 Hz
1850 Hz
2100 Hz
367
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.5.3.
DTMF Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.
The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.
Select the "03 DTM Single Tone" or "DTMF Dual Tone" on the Touch Panel display.
DTMF Single Tone Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DTMF Signal Tones

697 Hz
770 Hz
852 Hz
941 Hz
1209 Hz
1336 Hz
1477 Hz
1633 Hz
DTMF Dual Tone Table

Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
#
DTMF Dual Tones

941 Hz + 1336 Hz
697 Hz + 1209 Hz
697 Hz + 1336 Hz
697 Hz + 1477 Hz
770 Hz + 1209 Hz
770 Hz + 1336 Hz
770 Hz + 1477 Hz
852 Hz + 1209 Hz
852 Hz + 1336 Hz
852 Hz + 1477 Hz
941 Hz + 1209 Hz
941 Hz + 1477 Hz
368
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.5.4.
Binary Signal (V.34)
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure. (V.34)
Select the "05 V34 MODEM" on the Touch Panel display.
Binary Signal Table
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Signals
V34 2400 sr 2400 bps
V34 2400 sr 4800 bps
V34 2400 sr 7200 bps
V34 2400 sr 9600 bps
V34 2400 sr 12000 bps
V34 2400 sr 14400 bps
V34 2400 sr 16800 bps
V34 2400 sr 19200 bps
V34 2400 sr 21600 bps
V34 2800 sr 4800 bps
V34 2800 sr 7200 bps
V34 2800 sr 9600 bps
V34 2800 sr 12000 bps
V34 2800 sr 14400 bps
V34 2800 sr 16800 bps
V34 2800 sr 19200 bps
V34 2800 sr 21600 bps
V34 2800 sr 24000 bps
V34 2800 sr 26400 bps
V34 3000 sr 4800 bps
V34 3000 sr 7200 bps
Number
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Signals
V34 3000 sr 9600 bps
V34 3000 sr 12000 bps
V34 3000 sr 14400 bps
V34 3000 sr 16800 bps
V34 3000 sr 19200 bps
V34 3000 sr 21600 bps
V34 3000 sr 24000 bps
V34 3000 sr 26400 bps
V34 3000 sr 28800 bps
V34 3200 sr 4800 bps
V34 3200 sr 7200 bps
V34 3200 sr 9600 bps
V34 3200 sr 12000 bps
V34 3200 sr 14400 bps
V34 3200 sr 16800 bps
V34 3200 sr 19200 bps
V34 3200 sr 21600 bps
V34 3200 sr 24000 bps
V34 3200 sr 26400 bps
V34 3200 sr 28800 bps
V34 3200 sr 31200 bps
369
Number
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Signals
V34 3429 sr 4800 bps
V34 3429 sr 7200 bps
V34 3429 sr 9600 bps
V34 3429 sr 12000 bps
V34 3000 sr 19200 bps
V34 3429 sr 16800 bps
V34 3429 sr 19200 bps
V34 3429 sr 21600 bps
V34 3429 sr 24000 bps
V34 3429 sr 26400 bps
V34 3429 sr 28800 bps
V34 3429 sr 31200 bps
V34 3429 sr 33600 bps
ANSam
CM
JM
INFO0c & TONEB
INFO0c & TONEA
PPh & AC & ALT
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.6.
Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)
Initializes RAM, and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.
Note:
This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.
Select the "06 RAM initialize" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "YES" button to initialize RAM.
RAM Initialization Table
No.
01
Initialize Mode
Parameter Initialize
02
03
Journal Clear
Auto Dial Clear
04
05
06
07
Program Dial Clear

LOGO/ID/PSWD Clear
LBP Error Log Clear
Shipment Set
08
09
Flash Memory Clear

All Job Clear
Description
Restores the Fax, and Function Parameters to default
values.
Note:
Turn the Power Switch to the OFF, and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
Clears the Journal contents.
Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers, and Phone
Books.
Clears the Program keys.
Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.
Clears the Printer Error Log.
Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
80, and 81, then set default values.
Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.
Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
370
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.7.
5.2.7.1.
FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)

Overview
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage, and improve the machine maintenance
to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by
alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:
1. The machines printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.
2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.
3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the
pre-registered telephone number, or email address.
4. When the unit detects Low Toner, or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically
transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number, or email address.
Select the "08 Check & Call" on the Touch Panel display.

(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No., or for an email address, press the "Fax/Email"
Mode key, and input the email address.)
Select the "OK" button.
5.2.7.2.
Printer Reports
Conditions under which a report can be printed, or transmitted

1. Manual Print
The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.)
2. Automatic Transmission/Printout
a. Service Alert Report
When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service
Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number, or email address. However, the unit will not
transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.
b. Maintenance Alert Report
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report
to the pre-registered telephone number, or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.
Note:
To activate the transmission of the Maintenance Alert Report, register both numbers
01 Service Alert Fax # & 02 Maint Alert Fax #.
c. Call Counter Report
When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call
Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number, or email address.
Note:
The Service, and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory
transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).
371
DP-8060/8045/8035
Error
Code
Ex-xx
E13
Jxx
Uxx
U13
Log
O
O
O
O
Tx
Remarks
Report
S
Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.3.)
Out of Toner.
Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.2.)
Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.1.)
M
Low Toner.
Note:
TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report
372
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.7.3.
SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********

****************************
>
SERVICE ALERT REPORT
<
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR
(5) SERIAL NUMBER
: MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013
: 01234567890
(1) CUSTOMER ID
:
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
:
PNL
:
SPC
:
DATA SECURITY KIT :
ABC COMPANY
BAV00008PU
AAT00001PU
60cpm T400000
V10101
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:

F7-02 Total Count
PM Count
Scanner PM Count
ADF Count
OPC Drum Count
Process Unit Count
ADF PM Count
Fuser Web Count
Developer Count
Avg Print/Drum Rise Up
Avg Min/Drum Rise Up
CURRENT
:
13
:
13
:
9
:
1
:
13
:
13
:
1
: 240986
:
13
:
13
:
1.00
:
0.03
:
0.01
:
6321
F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count

:
:
:
:
:
PM CYCLE
240000
(------)
(------)
----------(------)
0
3
10
0
0
CURRENT
:
0
:
0
:
3
:
10
:
0
:
0
LCT Tray Count

2-Sided Count
A4/LETTER Count
A4-R/LETTER-R Count
A3/LEDGER Count
B4/LEGAL Count
F7-04 ADF Count
ADF Read Count
Scanner Count
Scanner Read Count
:
:
:
:
1
1
9
9
F7-05 Copy Print Count

Copy Scan Count
:
:
3
4
F7-06 PC Print Count

PC Scan Count
:
:
0
6
F7-07 FAX Transmit Count

FAX Receive Count
FAX Print Count
:
:
:
0
0
0
(4) PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME
ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01
00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LOGO PANASONIC
*****
*********************** -CHARACTER ID
(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Print Error
Last 30 records (Latest on top)
(5) Serial Number
373
- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.7.4.
MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

****************************
> MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)
(5) SERIAL NUMBER

CUSTOMER ID
: 01234567890
: ABC COMPANY (2)
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
PNL
SPC
DATA SECURITY KIT
(3)
: BAV00008PU
: AAT00001PU
: 60cpm T40000
: V10001
TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
000244
000082
000000
000000
:
:
:
:
(4)
-LOGO PANASONIC
************************************ -CHARACTER ID
- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER
(2) Customer ID

(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters
(5) Serial Number
374
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.7.5.
TONER ORDER FORM

*************************************
>
TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM
<
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
by Phone:
by Fax:
1 201 111 5555 (2)

1 201 111 4444 (3)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to:
Bill to:
Attention:
Attention:
Phone No.:
Phone No.:
(4)
Customer ID:
Toner Bottle No.:
(5)
P.O. No.(if required):

Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/
Print your name and title
Signature & Date
The toner supply in your machine is running low
(2) Toner Order Tel #
Up to 36 digits
(3) Toner Order Fax #
Up to 36 digits
(4) Customer ID
(5) Toner Bottle No.
DQ-TU38R(PU) : DP-8060/8045/8035
DQ-TU37R(PB) : DP-8060
The order number(s) may differ depending on the Model, and the
Destination.
375
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.7.6.
CALL COUNTER REPORT

*****************************************************************
>
SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE
<
*****************************************************************
LAST PRINT ERROR
: MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013
(5) SERIAL NUMBER
: 01234567890
(1) CUSTOMER ID
:
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
:
PNL
:
SPC
:
DATA SECURITY KIT :
ABC COMPANY
BAV00008PU
AAT00001PU
60cpm T400000
V10101
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:

F7-02 Total Count
PM Count
Scanner PM Count
ADF Count
OPC Drum Count
Process Unit Count
ADF PM Count
Fuser Web Count
Developer Count
Avg Print/Drum Rise Up
Avg Min/Drum Rise Up
CURRENT
:
13
:
13
:
9
:
1
:
13
:
13
:
1
: 240986
:
13
:
13
:
1.00
:
0.03
:
0.01
:
6321
F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count

:
:
:
:
0
3
10
0
Call Counter Pre-Set Value

(4) PRINT ERROR:
14000
PM CYCLE
240000
(------)
(------)
----------(------)

LCT Tray Count
2-Sided Count
A4/LETTER Count
A4-R/LETTER-R Count
A3/LEDGER Count
B4/LEGAL Count
CURRENT
:
0
:
0
:
0
:
3
:
10
:
0
:
0
F7-04 ADF Count

ADF Read Count
Scanner Count
Scanner Read Count
:
:
:
:
1
1
9
9
F7-05 Copy Print Count

Copy Scan Count
:
:
3
4
F7-06 PC Print Count

PC Scan Count
:
:
0
6
F7-07 FAX Transmit Count

FAX Receive Count
FAX Print Count
:
:
:
0
0
0
NO. DATE & TIME

ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01
00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC
*****
*********************** -CHARACTER ID
(1) Customer ID
(3) Counter Information
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value
(5) Serial Number
376
- ***** -31415926535897932384-********
DP-8060/8045/8035
5.2.8.
Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)
5.2.8.1.
Overview
This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.
Select the "09 System maintenance" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "01 Send RCVD File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.
Select the desired Fax number.
Press "Start" key to send the Fax.

After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.
Note:
If the File is NOT on the designated machine, it has failed.
System Maintenance Table
No.
Maintenance Mode
01 SEND RCV'D FILE
Description
Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine
during a fatal printer error.
377
DP-8060/8045/8035
6 System Description
6.1.
Copy Process
(-DC)
Charger
Discharge Lamp
Cleaning
Laser Exposure
Photoelectric
Conversion
Developer
Toner
Original
(AC) Separation Transfer (+DC)

Fusing
Exit
Paper Feed
ADU
Primary Charge:
Image Exposure:
Illumination
Charge Corona
Developing:
Latent Charge Doctor Blade
Image Gap = 1.05 mm
(See Note)
Toner
Drum
Aluminum
Layer
Drum Surface
Approximately-750V DC
Transfer/Separation
Latent Image
Latent
Charge
Image
Magnetic
Image
Bias: -550 V
Fusing:
Heat Roller
Cleaning:
Fuser Lamp
Cleaning
Blade
Separation
Charge (AC)
Paper
Transfer
Charge
(+DC)
Roller
Paper
Pressure
Roller
Discharge Lamp:
Discharge
Lamp
Note:
For FACTORY ADJUSTMENT ONLY. DO NOT adjust in the field.
378
Drum
DP-8060/8045/8035
6.2.
Precautions with Consumables

(1)
Photoreceptor Drum
Do not touch the surface (with your hands, or anything else).
Stand the drum with the drum gear facing upward during storage.
- Be careful not to smear the surface with saliva, water, oil, etc.
- Do not store in places where the temperature is high.
- Do not store it in strong light (such as direct sunlight, or on the window).
- Do not expose it to chemical gas or vapor.
- Do not store the drum unit with the photoreceptor drum installed without covering
it with clean paper.
(2)
Toner Developer
1) Do not mix different types of toner, and developer.

- The machines are designed to use exclusive toner, and developer for specific
models. Be careful not to use toner, and developer from other models.
2) Do not mix foreign materials.
Be careful not to contaminate toner, and developer with foreign materials. If
you spill toner, or developer on a table, or floor when adding toner, or developer
in the developer unit, discard what was spilled. Such supplies may damage the
drum as well as cause other image problems.
3) Do not place into other containers.
Toner, and developer must not be placed into other containers, as some
containers may change the characteristics of the supplies. Vinyl chloride
potentially changes the characteristics of supplies due to migrating
plasticizers.
4) Precautions during storage, and transportation
- Toner, and developer additives are sensitive to temperature, and humidity (high
temperature, or humidity in particular).
- Store toner, and developer in a dark and cool location (lower than 95 F/35 C),
and out of direct sunlight.
- Be careful not to expose toner, and developer to rain, or direct sunlight during
transportation. When delivered by truck the temperature inside must not
exceed 104 F/40 C. (Under the sun in summer, the inside temperature
can typically be 140 F/60 C, or higher in a closed vehicle compartment.)
- In cold climate, store in a low humidity environment condition.
Do not store supplies near heaters.
379
DP-8060/8045/8035
5) Safety and hygiene

Due to its properties, Toner can be easily wind blown.
Toner on skin does not cause any health risk. However inhalation is undesirable
even if the powder is simply dust. Therefore, be careful not to inhale toner.
- Handle the toner carefully when changing cartridges. Developer should also
be handled carefully when poured into the developer unit.
If you inhale toner by accident, rinse your mouth out with water.
Toner on the skin should be washed off with soapy water.
- Toner stuck on clothing must be removed while in a dry state with a vacuum
cleaner, brush or by beating, then by washing with soapy water.
Wiping off with benzine, alcohol, or thinner is not recommended as the toner
components may partially melt, resulting in a stain and spot.
- Toner spills must be removed with a vacuum cleaner, and then wiped with a
cloth which has been dampened with a neutral detergent.
- If exposed to flames toner, and developer will burn. Keep these supplies away
from open flames.
- Any used consumable (photoreceptor, developer, and toner) should be recycled.
- Wear rubber gloves, eye protection, etc. before handling any solvents such as
IPA.
380
DP-8060/8045/8035
6.3.
New Digital Image Control Qualitative Reasoning Based Adaptive

Controller (New Digital QUANTUM)
To improve the copy quality, a new Toner Density Controller (New Digital QUANTUM System) was
developed.
The most important aim was to stabilize the Toner Density under various office environments.
As a result, the current QUANTUM System was improved with additional Sensors, Parameters, and
Software.
The following diagram illustrates this New System.
Printer with the New QUANTUM System

Timer/Counter (1)
Timer/Counter (2)
Laser Unit
New
Digital
QUANTAM
Toner
Density
Control
Laser Power
Grid Voltage
Drum
Timer/Counter (3)
Temperature (4)
Humidity (4)
Toner Density
Output
Separation Current
Transfer Current
Transfer
Image
Control
Humidity Sensor
Humidity (1)
Temperature Sensor
Temperature (1)
The newly controlled features, and intervals are as follows.

1. OPC Voltage Compensation
The OPC is controlled according to the voltage change detected by the Timer / Counter (1),
Temperature (1), and Humidity (1) Sensors, which is caused by the OPC environment, and
deterioration with passage of time.
2. Long Run Operation Compensation
Under an extended run operating environment, the Toner Density is also controlled by the Long Run
Operation Compensation Parameter, which is activated by the Timer / Counter (2) at each regulation
timing.
The Long Run Operation Parameter is also initialized by the Timer / Counter (2) when the machine is
idle for over 3 hours.
3. Developer Compensation
The Toner Density is also controlled with Developer Compensation Parameter, which is activated by
the Timer / Counter (3) each time the 20 Hour operating time is reached.
4. Humidity, and Temperature Compensation
Humidity, and Temperature factors are also compensated with the Sensors (4), and the TDC Controller
Compensation Software by stabilizing the Toner Density under various High Temperature, and High
Humidity environments.
381
DP-8060/8045/8035
6.4.
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)
The i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds documents into the unit, one
original at a time. When duplex mode is selected, this feature enables two-sided faxing, or copying of
the original(s).
Its main features are:
1. Place originals Face-Up
2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode)
3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre-Feed Roller
The following is the ADF / i-ADF Mechanical operation description.
6.4.1.
Automatic Document Feeder Operation
1. Initialization
The ADF begins its operation by turning on the Feed Motor for a specified time, lowering the Pickup
Roller to re-set the Original Stopper to its standby position.
2. Original Setting, and Size Sensors
Place the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Original Stopper
(513).
Adjust the Original Guides (403, 406) to center the original on the ADF. The Original Stopper (513)
prevents originals from skewing, and multiple feeding. The Original Detection Sensor (401) detects the
presence of documents on the ADF when the original(s) actuate Original Sensor Actuator (521) on the
ADF Cover. The two Sensors mounted on the SNS PC Board which is installed in the Original Tray are
actuated by the Original Guides (403, 406), their position determines the original's width, and the
Original Length Sensor 1 (401), and Length Sensor 2 (401) detect the length of the original.
3. Feeding, and Separation
When the Start button is pressed, the ADF Motor 1 (925) starts to rotate, and drive the Pickup Roller
(511). The 1st original is fed into the Paper Feed Roller (508), and the Separation Roller (610) with the
Torque Limiter Assembly preventing multiple feeding.
4. Transmission, and Ejection
The original is fed into the Registration Roller 1 (817), and when the original actuates the Registration
Sensor 2 (401), the Paper Feed Roller (508) stops rotating. The Registration Sensor 2 (401) detects
the scanning position, and the Registration Roller 2 (818), and Transport Roller (816) transport the
original while scanning. The Stamp Head (724) stamps an [X] mark on the front of the original after the
document is successfully transmitted, or stored. It consists of the Stamp Head (724), and Stamp
Solenoid (726). The Exit Roller (814) feeds, and ejects the original out of the ADF. If there are
additional originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder.
5. Final Operation
After ejecting the last original from the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raising the
Original Stopper (513) to its standby position.
6.4.2.
i-ADF Operation
The i-ADF automatically inverts 2-sided original(s) for faxing, or copying of the second side. This
feature enables your machine to perform duplex faxing, or copying.
An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions like the ADF with the main exception being
the original eject path after scanning. The following is the description of the main differences.
1. Switching from the ADF Mode to the i-ADF Mode
After passing through the Read Point, the path of the original is switched over by the Selection Guide 1
(815), to the Exit Roller (814), or to the Inverting Roller (809). For single-sided scanning, the Selection
382
DP-8060/8045/8035
Guide 1 (815) is rotated clockwise by the Selection Solenoid (621), guiding the original to the Exit
Roller (814). For double-side scanning, the Selection Guide 1 (815) is rotated counter-clockwise by the
Selection Solenoid (621), guiding the original to the Inverting Roller (809). The Selection Guide 1 (815)
moves only once, in the direction according to whether a single, or double-side scanning is selected
(Copier, or Fax) before the Start button is pressed.
It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if the last operation was 2-sided
scanning, a single-side scanning is performed).
2. Scanning the Front, and the Back Side of an Original
The scanning of the Front, and Back side of a 2-sided original is accomplished by means of the
Selection Guide 1 (815), and Selection Guide 2 (713).
After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1
(815), through the Selection Guide 2 (713) that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection
Solenoid (621), and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller (809), and upper Pinch Rollers (626) into the
Sub Tray. The original is carried for a specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original
triggers the Selection Sensor (401), and stops within 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers. Then, the
Selection Guide 2 (713) is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly (615), and the
reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 (925) pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 (817),
and proceeds to scan the Back side of the original.
3. Eject by Reverse Rotation
After the Back is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1 (815), through the
Selection Guide 2 (713), and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller (809), and lower Pinch Rollers
(626), into the Sub Tray (416), again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.
The Selection Guide 2 (713) is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly (621), and the
reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 (925) pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 (817),
however, this time the original is routed to the Exit Roller (814), and exits into the ADF Base.
Original Detection Sensor
Inverting Guide Sheet
Anti Drive Registration Roller

(Pinch Roller)
Anti Drive Exit Roller

(Pinch Roller)
Inverting Roller
Anti Drive Exit Roller
(Pinch Roller)
Exit Roller
Anti Drive Registration

Roller 2 (Pinch Roller)
Exit Sensor
Read Point
Selection Guide 2
Selection Guide 1
Anti Drive Transport Roller (Pinch Roller)

Transport Roller
Selection Sensor
383
Sub Tray
(A3)
420 mm
16.5 in /
(Ledger)
1.8 mm
43
/
in
17
14.3 in /
(B
364 mm
4)
(FLS1.2)
0.2 mm
5-R)
(A4-R)
297 mm
13 in / 33
Original Guide
11.7 in /
Paper Feed Roller

Original Stopper
Pick Up Roller
(B
257 mm
Original Tray
Separation
Roller
10.1 in /
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)
5)
0 mm (A
ICE)
8.3 in / 21 5.9 mm (INVO
8.5 in / 21
4. Sub Tray
The Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray (416), which supports the originals during the ejection
mode of the double-side scanning operation.
DP-8060/8045/8035
6.5.
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Signal Name
+12V
+24V
+24VD
+24VM
+24VO1
+24VO2
+24VS
+3.3V
+5V
+5VD
+5VL
+5VP
ACL
ACLD
ACLRLB
ACN
ACND
ACNRLB
ACSW
ADCLK
ADFRRSN1
ADUCRRSN
ADUINSN
ADURRSN
ADXSN
AFDIN
AFDOUT
AFENB
AFLD
AFLTH
AMMCLK
APMCLK
ARRCNT
ARRSN2
ARST
ARVCL1
ARVCL2
ATA0
ATA1
ATA2
ATAINT
ATCS0
ATCS1
ATD0
Function
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply (Through Front Door SW)
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply (Through Front Door SW)
AC Power Supply
Fuser Relay
FIFO Clock
ADU Intermediate Sensor Signal
ADU Sensor Signal
ADU Registration Sensor Signal
FIFO Data Out
FIFO Data In
FIFO Enable
FIFO Load
FIFO Latch
ADF Paper Feed Motor Clock
Registration Roller Clutch Control Signal
System Reset Signal
HDD Address Bus
HDD Address Bus
HDD Address Bus
Secondary HDD Select Signal
HDD Data Bus
384
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
ATD1
ATD10
ATD11
ATD12
ATD13
ATD14
ATD15
ATD2
ATD3
ATD4
ATD5
ATD6
ATD7
ATD8
ATD9
ATDASP
ATDMAACK
ATDMAREQ
ATIO16
ATIORD
ATIORDY
ATIOWR
ATRST
BLKCLP
BMA
BMAB
BMB
BMBB
BPSN
CDSN1
CDSN2
CHPSN1
CHPSN2
CLIPIN
CLMM1
CLMM2
CPPSN1
CPPSN2
CRRSN1
CSEL
CT
DDFL
DDFM
DFCLK
DFDIN
DFENB
DFLD
Function
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
DMA ACK Signal
DMA Request Signal
HDD 16-bit Transfer Control Signal
Reset Signal
AFE Black Level Clamp Switch Signal
Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal
AFE Sample Hold Clamp Signal
Cable Select Signal
Total Counter
Dust Fan Lock Detection Signal
Driver FIFO Load
Driver FIFO Data In
Driver FIFO Enable
Driver FIFO Clock
385
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
DFLTH
DFOUT
DFRST
DMBRAKE
DMCLK
DMCLK
DMLD
DMPS
DOSN
DXCL1
DXSLCNT1
DXSLCNT2
DXSN
ELPCNT
EXDOSN2
EXFL1
EXFL2
EXFL3
EXFM1
EXFM2
EXFM3
EXSN
FULP1
FULP2
FULP3
GND
GOPSW1
GREFCNT
HEATL
HFCL
HFSOL
HPESN
HPSN
HSSN1
HSSN2
HSSN3
HSYNC
HUMSN
HVBACCLK
HVBACCNT
HVBDCCNT
HVCNT
HVDACCNT
HVDDCCNT
HVLKB
HVLKC
HVLKD
Function
Driver FIFO Latch
Drum Motor Clock
OPC Drum Motor Lock Detection Signal
Discharge Lamp
Paper Exit Door Sensor Detection Signal
Paper Exit Sensor Detection Signal
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
Ground
Developer Missing Detection
Grid Reference PWM
AC Power Supply
Sheet Bypass Clutch Control Signal
Sheet Bypass Solenoid Control Signal
Sheet Bypass Sensor Detection Signal
Scanner Home Position Sensor Signal
Bias AC Clock
Bias AC ON/OFF, PWM
Bias DC ON/OFF, PWM
Charge Corona ON/OFF, PWM
Separation AC ON/OFF, PWM
Separation DC ON/OFF, PWM
Bias Leak Detection
386
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
HVLKT
HVTCNT
IICSCL
IICSDA
IPRXD
IPTXD
KCS
KCT
KCTCNT
KYE
L1 (R)
L2 (T)
LAZENB
LAZERA
LAZERB
LAZREF
LBSN1
LBSN1
LBSN2
LCCFDIN
LCDOSN
LCLUM1
LCLUM2
LCMA
LCMAB
LCMB
LCMBB
LCRRSN
LCSDSN
LCSOL
LLBSN
LLUM
LMA
LMAB
LMB
LMBB
LMCLK
LOPSN
LPCNT
LPCNT
LPESN
LPESN
LPEWSN1
LPEWSN2
LPEWSN3
LPFCL
LPFCL
Function
Bias Transfer Leak Detection
Bias Transfer ON/OFF, PWM
Key Counter
Card Counter
Connector Key
Line Signal
Line Signal
Laser Enable
Laser Compulsion Lighting A
Laser Compulsion Lighting B
Laser Reference
LCC FIFO Data In
Motor A Signal
Motor AB Signal
Motor B Signal
Motor BB Signal
Set Sensor Signal
1st Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal
Scan Motor A Signal
Scan Motor B Signal
Scanner Motor Clock
Connection Detect Sensor Signal
Scanner Lamp Control Clock
Scanner Lamp Control Signal
Paper Sensor-1
387
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
LPPSN
LPUSOL
LUM1
LUM1-1
LUM1-2
LUM2-1
LUM2-2
MAGCL
MMA
MMAB
MMB
MMBB
MMCLK
MMFR
MMLD
MMPS
N.C.
nACK
nADFSES
nATT
nAUTFD
nCTON
nDUACK
nDUPRNT
nERROR
nFAXRST
nGARST
nHKOF
nLD1
nLD2
nLPOW1
nLPOW2
nPACK
nPCIRING
nPNLRST
nPRDY
nPRGDWN
nPRST
nPVSYNC
nSACK
nSELIN
nSENTIM
nSLPKY
nSREQ
nSTROB
nSTRX
nSTTX
Function
2nd Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal
LUM1 Control Signal
LUM2 Control Signal
Magnetic Roller Clutch Control Signal
Main Motor Clock
Main Motor CW/CCW
Main Motor Lock Detection Signal
Not Used
ACK Signal
ADF Document Detect
Attention Signal
Auto Feed Signal
Error Signal
External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal
Not Used
Not Used
Printer ACK Signal
FAX Wake Up Signal
Panel Reset Signal
F-ROM Rewrite
SPC Reset Signal</p>0: Reset
Print Registration
Scan ACK Signal
Select Input Signal
Sleep Key
Strobe Signal
Sorter Reception (-)
Sorter Transmission Signal (-)
388
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
nSYNC
nVRDY
nVREQ
OE
OPSN
OQFCLK
OQFDIN
OQFDOUT
OQFENB
OQFLD
OQFLTH
OQMCLK
OQMCLK
OQMCT
OQMLK
OQRRCL
ORGSN
ORGSN
ORSIZ1
ORSIZ2
ORSIZ3
ORSIZ4
ORSIZ5
OZFL2
OZFM2
P12CNT
PASN
pBDA
pBDB
pBUSY
PCCL
pCMLD
PCRSN
PCSN
PCSSOL1
PCSSOL2
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PD8
PDIAG
pERROR
PESN1
Function
VSYNC Reset Signal
AFE Digital Data Bus Enable
ADF Cover Open Detection Signal
OQ FIFO Clock
OQ FIFO Data In
OQ FIFO Data Out
OQ FIFO Enable
OQ FIFO Load
OQ FIFO Latch
OQ Motor FIFO Clock
Drive Motor Clock
Drive Motor Control
Original Sensor Detection Signal
Ozone Fan Lock Detection Signal
Platen Cover Open Sensor Signal
Print BDA Signal
Print BDB Signal
Busy Signal
Intermediate Clutch Control Signal
Line Switching Relay Drive Signal
Intermediate Sensor Detection Signal
Platen Cover Angle Sensor Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
No Paper Signal
389
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
PESN1
PESN2
PEWSSN1
PEWSSN2
PEWSSN3
PFCL1
PFCL1
PFCL2
PFCLCNT
PFOSN1
PFOSN2
PFSIZSN1
PFSIZSN2
PFSIZSN3
PGND
pINIT
pLD1
pLD2
PMA
PMAB
PMB
PMBB
PMCLK
PMCNT
PMLOCK
PNLDO1
PNLSCLK1
POWSW
pPRXD
PPSOLCNT
pPTXD
PR1SN
pSELECT
pSPKOT
pSTRX
pSTTX
PTG
PTL
PUSOL1
PUSOL1
PUSOL2
PVCNT
PWFL
PWFM
QDOSN
RR1CLCNT
RR2CLCNT
Function
Paper Sensor-1
Paper Sensor-2
Ground
Initiation
Paper Feed Motor AB Signal
Paper Feed Motor BB Signal
Polygon Motor Clock
Polygon Motor Control Signal
Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Data
Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Clock
POW SW
Pinch Solenoid Control Signal
Paper Select Signal
Sorter Transmission Signal (+)
CCD Shift GATE Signal
Pre Transfer Lamp
Printer 24V Control
PS Fan Lock Detection Signal
390
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
RR2SN
RR3SN
RRCL
RRSN
RVCLK
RVEXSN
RVJAMSN
RVMA
RVMAB
RVMB
RVMBB
RVSN
RVSSOL1
RVSSOL2
SB1CLCNT
SB2CLCNT
SCFL
SCFM
SDCLCNT
SEPSOL
SH A
SH B
SIZE1SN
SIZE2SN
SIZE3SN
SIZE4SN
SPCRXD
SPCTXD
SPPSN
SSA1
SSA2
SSA3
STRVP
STSLCNT
SVCNT
TDREF
TDSNIN
TED
TENPSN
TFBOXSN
TFSN
THI1
THI2
TMGSN
TRBLSW1
VCDS
Vcnt
Function
Inverting Exit Sensor Detection Signal
Inverting JAM Sensor Detection Signal
Inverting Sensor Detection Signal
Suction Fan Lock Detection Signal
Slow Down Clutch Control Signal
Separation Solenoid Control Signal
SPC Transmission Data Signal
System Paper Path Sensor Signal
Control Signal
Stamp Solenoid Control Signal
Scanner 24V Control
Toner Density Sensor Reference
Toner Density Sensor Signal
Toner Waste Container Sensor Detection Signal
Fuser Thermistor 1
Fuser Thermistor 2
Timing Sensor Detection Signal
Density Sensor ON
391
DP-8060/8045/8035
Signal Name
VTED
WEBSOL
ZCIN
ZNSN1a
ZNSN1b
ZNSN1c
ZNSN2a
ZNSN2b
ZNSN2c
ZNSNa
ZNSNb
ZNSNc
Function
Web Solenoid Control Signal
Zero Cross
Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Lower)
Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Lower)
Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Lower)
392
DP-8060/8045/8035
7 Installation
7.1.
Precautions During Set Up
Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm,
and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.
Machine performance, and the copy quality is subject to, and dependant on environmental conditions.
To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:
1. For safe operation, and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:
High temperature, high humidity, low temperature, or low humidity.
Ambient conditions Temperature
: 50 - 86 F (10 - 30 C)
Relative humidity : 30 - 80 %
Sudden changes in temperature, or humidity
Exposed to direct sunlight
Dusty environment
Poorly ventilated location
Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas)
Exposed to strong vibration
Exposed to direct air current (ex: Air conditioner vent)
2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:
DP-8060 / 8045 (PU / PB) : Approx. 304 lb (138.0 kg) / 138.0 kg with the i-ADF pre-installed
DP-8035 (PU / PB)
: Approx. 298 lb (135.0 kg) / 135.0 kg with the i-ADF pre-installed
Options:
DA-DS603 / DS604 (System Console) : Approx. 64 lb (29.0 kg) / 66 lb (30.0 kg)
DA-MA301 / TK31 (3000-Sheet Tray) : Approx. 33 lb (15.0 kg) / 42 lb (19.0 kg)
DA-FS330 / FS600 (2-Bin Finisher)
: Approx. 33 lb (15.0 kg) / 70 lb (32.0 kg)
DA-FS355A (1-Bin Saddle Finisher) : Approx. 62 lb (28.0 kg)
DA-FS605 (2-Bin Saddle Finisher)
: Approx. 114 lb (52.0 kg)
Place the machine on a level, and sturdy surface that can withstand the weight of the machine. If tilted,
the machine may tip-over, and cause injuries.
3. The maximum power consumption is 1.5 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet
must be rated for 120 VAC, or 220-240 VAC accordingly. It must also be protected for at least 15 amps
for 120 VAC, or 10 amps for 220-240 VAC. If you are in doubt about a power source, ensure that a
qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated
for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)
4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to a gas, or water pipe)
5. The machine should be installed in a well-ventilated area to minimize the ozone density in the air.
6. This machine has ventilation openings on the side, and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe
operation. The machine should be located at least 3.9 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the
ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.
Using the space requirements shown on the following page, ensures that the machine has the
ventilation it requires, and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.
7. There is a remote possibility of electrocution when installing the Fax option during a Lightning Storm.
As a precaution, plug the AC Power Cord first, before connecting the Telephone Line Cable.
393
DP-8060/8045/8035
8. For PU version only (USA/Canada, etc.) The Hard Disk Drive unit is installed as a standard
component, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed (similar to when the power is
abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the
Power Switches on the machine.
394
DP-8060/8045/8035
Space Requirements With Options
Copier + Exit Tray

3.9 in (100 mm)
23.6"(600 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1462 mm)
12.7 in
(322 mm)
10.4 in (265 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
54.6 in
(1387 mm)
Copier + Finisher
11.8 in
(300 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
29.5 in (750 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1462 mm)
10.4 in (265 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)
83.3 in
(2115 mm)
Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT

11.8 in
(300 mm)
29.5 in (750 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
11.4 in (290 mm) 11 in (280 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1462 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
95.3 in
(2420 mm)
Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT + (LT-R_LGL Adapter)

11.8 in (300 mm)
29.5 in (750 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
17.3 in (440 mm)11 in (280 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1462 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
101.2 in
(2570 mm)
395
DP-8060/8045/8035
7.2.
Unpacking
Visually check the condition, and contents of the packing box for completeness, or any shipping damage
before installation.
Remove all tapes used to secure the Scanner, Fuser, and Process Units during shipment.
Caution:
Depending on your machine's model, it may weight up to approximately 304 lb (138.0 kg) with the i-ADF
pre-installed. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel, and the proper equipment to
lift, or move the machine.
Contents List
No.
1
2
3
Qty.
1
1
1
Description
Operating Instructions CD
5
6
1
1
Panasonic-DMS CD
AC Power Cord
Stop Plate Assy
8
9
10
1
1
1
Exit Tray Assy

Developer
Installation Instructions
Remarks
Main Unit
Basic Operations
Setting Up
- For Copy & Function Parameters
- For Facsimile, and Internet Fax/Email
Functions
- For User Authentication
Includes Operating Instructions
Includes 2 Plates, and 2 Screws
(Euro, and other Destinations)
(Euro, and other Destinations)
PU only (USA/Canada, etc.)
This document
Note:
1. Supplies (Developer, and Toner Bottle) are not included, and are sold separately.
DP-8060
DP-8045 / 8035
Developer:
DQ-Z240R (PU / PB) DQ-Z240R (PU / PB)
Toner Bottle:
DQ-TU38R (PU)
DQ-TU38R (PU)
DQ-TU37R (PB)
DQ-TU33R (PB)
(PU: USA/Canada, etc; PB: Euro, and Other Destinations)
2. The part number(s) may differ depending on the destination, refer to the Service / Parts Manual.
10
9
8
7
2
4
5
396
DP-8060/8045/8035
7.3.
Installation Procedure
Note:
1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing Stands, or other Optional Kits.
2. The following machine illustrations, depicts a DP-8060 with a standard configuration.
3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Blue Screw to prevent damage during transit.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the scanner.
4. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Pressure Roller / OPC Drum locked in the opened
position to avoid the possibility of damaging the Pressure Rollers / OPC Drum.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the Pressure Roller / OPC Drum.
7.3.1.
Installation Procedure
Release
Latch
(1) Open the 4 Handle Covers, and swing the

Handles upward, then pullout to lock them in
place.
Note:
To release the Handles, lift the Release Latch
upwards, and push the Handles toward the
machine.
(2) Lift, and place the machine on a suitable

Stand / Console, aligning with 3 Guide-Pins.
Deluxe Stand
: (DA1D351 / DA-D352R :
USA /Canada only)
System Console : (DA-DS603 / DS604)
2 Guide Pins
(Rear)
1 Guide Pin
(Front)
(3) Remove Tape.
(4) Remove 1 Blue Screw to unlock the Scanner.
Caution:
If the Shipping Material (Blue Screw) is not
removed as instructed, the machine may get
damaged when the Power Switches are turned
ON.
Note:
Store the Shipping Material (Blue Screw) into the
machine as shown in the following steps for future
use.
397
DP-8060/8045/8035

(6) Swing the Hopper open (180).
(7) Store the Blue Screw removed in step (4) into

the Screw Store Hole on the back of the Front
Cover as illustrated.
(8) Remove the Protective Tape from the Battery.
(9) To unlock the Pressure Roller, turn the screw

with the Straight Edge Screwdriver clockwise
until you hear a click.
Jam Release
Knob (Green)
398
DP-8060/8045/8035
(10) Pullout, and remove the Tape and the OPC

Shipping Metal Bracket to unlock the OPC
Drum.
OPC Shipping
Metal Bracket
Tape
OPC Shipping
Metal Bracket
Caution:
If the Shipping Material (Bracket) is not
removed as instructed, the machine may get
damaged when the Power Switches are turned
ON.
Note:
Store the Shipping Material (Bracket) into the
machine as shown in the following step for future
use.
(11) Store the OPC Shipping Metal Bracket
removed in step (10) into the 2nd Paper Tray as
illustrated.

(13) Remove the Developer Harness Cover (Clear),
and disconnect the Harness.
(14) Turn the Release Lever Clockwise (90).
(15) Remove the Developer Unit.
Dev
De
Developer
veloper Unit
Lever
Lev
Release Lever
Developer
Harness Cover
(16) Release 3 Latch Hooks, and remove the Upper

Developer Cover.
399
DP-8060/8045/8035
(17) Shake the Developer Bottle thoroughly

(approx. 30 seconds).
(18) Pour the Developer evenly into the developer
unit as illustrated. Make sure to empty the bottle.
(19) Reinstall the Upper Developer Cover.

Note:
When reinstalling, insert the cover into 2 Hooks at
one end, and ensure that 3 Latch Hooks are
hooked correctly.
(20) Reinstall the Developer Unit.
(21) Reconnect the Harness, reinstall the Developer
Harness Cover / Screw, and turn the Release
Lever counter-clockwise.
Toner Bottle
< Toner Bottle Order No. >

DP-8060
: DQ-TU38R (PU)
DQ-TU37R (PB)
DP-8045 / 8035 : DQ-TU38R (PU)
DQ-TU33R (PB)
Hopper
(22) Shake the new Toner Bottle 10 to 15 times to

loosen the contents.
(23) Remove the Cap from the Toner Bottle.
(24) Insert the Toner Bottle into the Hopper Unit as
far as it will go. Align the Key of the Toner Bottle
with the Key Alignment Channel of the hopper
unit (Arrows on the Bottle, and the Hopper are
aligned). Turn the Toner Bottle clockwise until it
locks in place.
(25) Swing the Toner Bottle / Hopper closed (180).
(26) Close the Front Cover.
(27) Load paper into the Paper Tray.
(28) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Main
Power Switch on the Back, and the Power
Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON
position.
Note:
Perform the following adjustments after the
machine has warmed up, and displays:
Ready To Copy
Set Originals
<For PU version only (USA/Canada, etc.) > Skip to
Sect. 3.2
400
DP-8060/8045/8035
<For Euro, and Other Destinations> Follow the

steps (29) ~ (35) below>
(29) Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit
Cover.
(30) Open the Front Cover, and the Upper Exit
Cover.
Stop Plate
Stop Plate 2
Upper Exit
Cover Stopper
Stop Plate 2
(31) Remove 1 Screw to free the Upper Exit Cover

Stopper (Plastic Strap).
(32) Install the Stop Plate, and secure it with 1 Screw
as illustrated.
(33) Install the Stop Plate 2, and secure it with
1 Screw as illustrated.
(34) Secure the Upper Exit Cover Stopper (Plastic
Strap) with 1 Screw (removed in step (31)
above).
(35) Close the Upper Exit Cover, and the Front
Cover.
401
DP-8060/8045/8035
7.4.
Adjustment
7.4.1. Toner Density Control (TDC) Adjustment

Mode.
4. Press the Start key.
6. Press the Start key to begin the Automatic TDC sensor gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 7 minutes).
7.4.2. OPC Counter Reset

2. Press the Start key for OPC Counter Reset.
Note:
Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until operation ends.
Refer to the Sequence Chart below.
5. Write the contents of F6-21, and 26 on the memory sheet (adhered to the inside the 2nd Paper Tray).
[For your convenience, record these values on this sheet first, then transcribe them onto the memory
sheet.]
F6-21 =
F6-26 =
F8-09 (Installation & Developer Replace)
F8-14 (Installation & OPC Replace)
TDC Adjust
OPC
Counter Reset
7 min
3 sec
7.4.3. Set the Date, and Time

1. Press the "Function" key.
2. Select "GENERAL SETTINGS" button.
3. Select "
" button, and select "09 Key Operator Mode".
5. Select "
" button, and select "20 Date Time Setting".
6. Select "CHANGE" button to input the new Date, and Time. (MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm) [24-hour format].
7. After setting the new information, select "OK" button on the Display Panel.
8. Press the "Reset" key, to exit the General Functions mode.
402
DP-8060/8045/8035
7.4.4. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)

-3, -10.
= -30
= -3
= -10
Mode.
3. Press the "2", and then "Start" keys to enter the F2 Mode.
Set the exposure to the center position.
4. Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
5. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011), and verify the density as shown
a. Gray scale A should not be visible.
b. Gray scale 2 should be clearly visible.
A
. . .
. . .
. . . . .. . . . . . 1 .
.
.
2
3
6. Press the "Reset" key to exit the F2 Mode.

7. Press the 6, and then "Start" keys to enter the F6 Mode.
8. Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).
9. Select "INPUT" button.
10. Enter the new content.
11. Enter a 2-digit value.
Note:
The "Reset" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.
(+) : Lighter side
(-) : Darker side
12. Select "OK" button twice.
13. Enter F2 Mode.
14. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
Repeat Step (4) to (12) until proper density is attained.
F6-49 : Text Mode
F6-51 : Photo Mode
403
DP-8060/8045/8035
7.5.
Internet Fax Function Confirmation
It is not necessary to set the parameter for the following suffix (Destinations). The Internet Fax Firmware is
automatically loaded with the Host Firmware.
PB : UK
PD : Germany
PF : France
PG : Switzerland
PK : China
PT : Taiwan
PU : USA
Note:
For other destinations below, set the Fax Service Mode 1 Function Parameter #005 (Destination Code)
by following the steps below.
000 : Austria
001 : U.K.
002 : Canada
003 : Denmark
004 : Taiwan
005 : Finland
006 : Germany
007 : Netherlands
008 : Italy
009 : Spain
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portugal
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : USA
021 : France
022 : New Zealand 025 : Japan
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea 038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa 049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro
Mode.
2. Enter the password, and touch OK button (default password is 00000000).
3. Press the 9, and then Start keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
4. Select "00 FAX Service Mode".
5. Select "01 Function Param. Setting".
6. Select "005 Destination Code", and then "CHANGE" buttons.
7. Input the new Destination Code, and select "OK" button twice.
8. Press the "Stop" key.
9. Press the "Function", and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
10. Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the machine to the OFF, and back to the ON position to
enable the parameter settings.
7.6.
User Authentication, and/or Via Fax Server Function Confirmation

(Specified Destinations only)
If your customer requires User Authentication, and/or Via Fax Server, setup the feature(s) by referring to the
Operating Instructions (For User Authentication) for the PU (USA/Canada, etc.).
Note:
For other destinations below, set the Fax Service Mode 1 Function Parameter #005 (Destination Code)
by following the steps below.
000 : Austria
001 : U.K.
006 : Germany
009 : Spain
011 : Australia
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
Mode.
2. Enter the password, select OK button (default password is 00000000).
3. Press the 9, and then Start keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
4. Select "00 FAX Service Mode".
5. Select "01 Function Param. Setting".
6. Select "005 Destination Code", and then "CHANGE" buttons.
7. Input the new Destination Code, and select "OK" button twice.
8. Press the "Stop" key.
9. Press the "Function", and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
10. Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the machine to the OFF, and back to the ON position to
404
DP-8060/8045/8035
8 Options, and Supplies

8.1.
Service Notes Firmware Update for PCL-IPX/SPX*1

or PS/PCL-IPX/SPX Option Installation
To use PCL-IPX/SPX (DA-PC800)*1, or PS/PCL-IPX/SPX (DA-MC800) option individually, or in

combination with other options; changing to Type B, or Type D SC firmware is required. The required
firmware is on the CD included with the options.
*1 For PU version only (USA/Canada, etc.), the PCL Firmware is included on the FRM8 board, therefore,
firmware update is not required.
Note:
The 8 MB Expansion Board (DA-EM600) must be installed for the printer controllers above to function.
The only time a DA-EM600 is needed is if you are installing the PCL, or PS/PCL option. There will never
be a need for 2 of these, even if there are other options, such as Fax, added.
Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly
identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read, and follow the Installation Instructions for
the appropriate option.
The firmware for SC, SPC, and PNL must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware
with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.
Firmware Version Table (For DP-8060/8045/8035)
Standard Firmware
(SC = Type B)
SC
PNL
SPC
Slot 1 FROM PCB
PCL Firmware
(SC = Type B)
PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type D)
SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx SFDM_MK3DxVxxxxx

-xx
-xx
-xx
MMK3_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx
MMK3_SPCAxVxxxxx
Not Required
Required
405
Required
DP-8060/8045/8035
Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions

1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest, and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The software CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware
Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:
To:
Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
Start the Network Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
\ DP-8060_8045_8035_xx_xxxxxx
\ PNL \ MMK3_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_STD \ SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_PCL \ SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_PS \ SFDM_MK3DxVxxxxx-xx
When you select the Parent Folder, the
following Firmware Type window
appears. Proper Sub File Folders are
selected automatically by selecting the
Firmware Type.
The transferring order is set up
automatically.
406
DP-8060/8045/8035
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware, or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
3. If the firmware update fails, and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "2.
Updating through the Parallel Port", and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the
unit.
location.
2. Updating through the Parallel Port (Alternate Method)
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the Parallel Port.
1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The software CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:
To:
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the Parallel
Port.
If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below:
a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.).
b. Turn the power On while holding the [Energy Saver] button.
c. When the unit's front panel green lamp turns On, release the [Energy Saver] button, it is now ready
to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port.
Connect the Parallel Cable between the Unit, and PC.
407
DP-8060/8045/8035

Start the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in
the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the
display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.
\ DP-8060_8045_8035_xx_xxxxxx
\ SC_STD \
SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_PCL \
SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_PS \
SFDM_MK3DxVxxxxx-xx
Firmware File
SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx-xx.bin
SFDM_MK3BxVxxxxx_xx.bin
SFDM_MK3CxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
SFDM_MK3CxVxxxxxb.bin
SFDM_MK3DxVxxxxx_xx.bin
SFDM_MK3ExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
SFDM_MK3ExVxxxxxb.bin
MMK3_SPCAAVxxxxx.bin
\ PNL \ MMK3_PNLAxVxxxxx- MMK3_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
xx
When you select the Parent Folder, the following
Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files
are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware
Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note:
1. Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of
the firmware code, and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode
after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
3. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.
location.
408
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.2.
Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC800)
8.2.1.
Contents
No.
1
Qty.
1
Description
Hardware Key
Program Expansion Board (FRM8)
3
4
5
2
1
1
PC Board Supporter
Software CD
1
Remarks
PCL KEY
The PCL Firmware is included on the
FRM8 board, therefore, firmware update is
not required.
This document
Note:
Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number(s), Packing, and Accessories detail.
8.2.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
Screw
Screw
Main
Power
SW
409
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(3) Remove the Black Pin Protector from Slot 1

(CN62), if it was preinstalled.
(4) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 on
the SC PC Board.
(5) Install the Program Expansion Board into
Slot 1 (CN62) on the SC PC Board, and secure
with the Supporters.
Caution:
If the Red LED on the SC Board is ON, the Power
is still ON.
Please read these Installation Instructions once
again.
Note:
The Program Extension Board must always be
installed into Slot 1 (CN62) for the PCL, or PS/PCL
Printer Option to function.
(6) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three
available connectors (CN67, CN68, or CN69) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to
the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.
KEY
(6)
(7) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close, and secure the Rear Plate, and
re-install remaining Covers.
position.
<For PU version only (USA/Canada, etc.) > Skip to
step (10)
The PCL Option firmware is included in the
Program Expansion Board (FRM8), therefore,
firmware update is not required.
If the firmware version does not match, update
the firmware by referring to the Service
Notes.
<For Europe, and Other Destinations> Follow the
step (9) below
(9) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL
Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes".
(10) Install the PCL6 Printer Driver, and NetWare
SetupWizard into the PC with the Operating
Instructions by following the prompts of the
Installation Wizard.
410
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.3.
8.3.1.
Installing the Multi Page Description Language Controller Module for

PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-MC800)
Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Qty.
1
1
2
1
1
1
Description
Hardware Key
Program Expansion Board (FRM8)
PC Board Supporter
Software CD
Adobe Postscript 3 Label
1
Remarks
PS KEY

This document
5
Note:
8.3.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
installation.
Screw
Screw
Main
Power
SW
411
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(3) Remove the Black Pin Protector from Slot 1

(CN62), if it was preinstalled.
(4) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 on
the SC PC Board.
(5) Install the Program Expansion Board into
Slot 1 (CN62) on the SC PC Board, and secure
with the Supporters.
Caution:
If the Red LED on the SC Board is lit (ON), the
Power to the machine is still ON. Please read
these Installation Instructions once again.
Note:
The Program Extension Board must always be
installed into Slot 1 (CN62) for the PCL, or PS/PCL
Printer Option to function.
the SC PC Board.
Note:
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into
the connector if facing the wrong way.
KEY
(6)

position.
(9) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL
Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes".
(10) Install the PS/PCL6 Printer Driver, and
NetWare SetupWizard into the PC with the
Operating Instructions by following the prompts
of the Installation Wizard.
(11) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label to the
Front Cover as illustrated.
412
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.4.
Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600)
8.4.1.
Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
FXB PC Board
MJR PC Board Assembly
MJR Harness
Speaker Assembly
Speaker Harness 2 (Extension)
SDRM Bracket
Stamp Assembly
Stamp Solenoid
Telephone Line Cable
Type Approval Label
Telepermit Label
Line Label
13
10
Screw (Short) (M3 x 6)
14
Screw (Long) (M3 x 8)
15
16
17
18
1
1
1
1
Operating Instructions CD
Quick Guide
Notice
Remarks
For Specified Destination only

For New Zealand only
For DP-60xx/45xx/35xx/etc. (See Note)

For DP-60xx/45xx/35xx/etc. (See Note)
For DP-8060/8045/8035 (See Note)
This document
5
3
1
2
17
7
10
8
11
12
13
14
18
16
15
Note:
1. DP-60xx/45xx/35xx denotes the following models:
DP-6030/6020/6010/4530/4520/4510/3530/3520/3510.
2. Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number(s), Packing, and Accessories detail.
3. The DP-8060/8045/8035 Operating Instructions (For Facsimile and Internet Fax / Email
Functions) is not included with this option, it is on the CD-ROM attached with the main unit.
413
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.4.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
installation.
(1)
(1) Main
Power
SW
(2)
Caution:
Power to the machine is still ON (for DP-8060/
8045/8035 only). Please read these Installation
Instructions once again.

(8)
(6)
(9)
(10)
(7)
(5) Open the Front Door.

(6) Open the Left Cover.
(7) Remove 3 Silver Screws.
(8) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
(9) Remove the Upper Protective Tab on the Left
Rear Cover for the LINE connection.
If installing an External Telephone, remove the
Lower protective tab as well.
(10) Attach the Line Label to the Left Rear Cover as
illustrated.
414
DP-8060/8045/8035
(11) Remove 2 Protective Films.
(11)
(12) Route the Speaker Harness through the speaker

hole in the frame, and install the Speaker
Assembly.
(13) Secure with 2 Screws (Short).
(14) Connect the Speaker Harness 2 (Extension) to
the Speaker Harness.
(12)
(14)
(13)
(15) Connect one end of the MJR Harness, and the

Speaker Harness 2 to the MJR PC Board
Assembly Connectors (CN22, and CN25).
(16) Install the MJR PC Board Assembly from the

rear of the machine by inserting the Hooks into
the slots on the frame.
(17) Secure the MJR PC Board Assembly with 5
Screws (Short).
(16)
(17)
415
DP-8060/8045/8035
(18) Remove 1 Screw from the SC PC Board.

(19) Install the SDRM Bracket into the machine, and
secure it with 1 Screw removed in Step (18).
(19)
(18)
(22)
(20) Route the Harnesses, and pass through the

frame in the rear of the unit as illustrated.
(21) Secure the Harnesses to the 2 Harness
Clamps.
(22) Secure the Harness to the Harness Clamp.
(20)
(21)
<If you have already installed the HDD Unit

Option, follow the step below, otherwise, skip to
Step (24)>
(23)
(24)
(26)
(23) Secure the Harness to the Harness Clamp.
(24) Plug the FXB PC Board into the SC PC Board

with on Board Connector (CN80).
(25) Secure the G3 Fax PC Board with 3 Screws
(Short).
(26) Connect the Harness to 3 Connectors on the
FXB PC Board (CN391, CN392, and CN393).
(25)
416
DP-8060/8045/8035
(28) Open the ADF Cover.

(29) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 2
Assembly.
(30) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.
(31) Lower the Inverting Guide 4 Assembly.
(31)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(32)
(34)
(33)
(35)

(33) Remove the Inverting Guide 3 Assembly.
(34) Remove 4 Screws for DP-8060/8045/8035.

(Remove 2 Screws for DP-60xx/45xx/35xx)
(35) Remove the Lower Exit Guide.
417
DP-8060/8045/8035
(36) Connect the Stamp Harness to the Stamp

Solenoid.
(37) Secure the Stamp Solenoid with 1 Screw (Long).
(38) Secure the Stamp Harness with the Harness
Clamp.
(39) Re-install the Lower Exit Guide removed in

Step (35).
Caution:
When installing the Lower Exit Guide, make sure
that 2 Keys are in the Holes properly, and the
Lower Exit Guide is installed Horizontally.
418
DP-8060/8045/8035
(40) Install the Stamp Assembly.

(41) Re-install all the parts removed above,
and close the ADF Covers.
Type
Approval
Label
LINE
(42) Attach the Type Approval Label (for specified

destinations only) on the top of the other labels
to the Lower Rear Cover as illustrated.
Note: (For New Zealand only)
Attach the Telepermit Label around the LINE Jack
on the Rear Cover.

position.
(44) Connect one end of the Telephone Line Cable
to the LINE Jack on the left side of the machine,
and the other end to the RJ-11C Jack on the
wall.
419
DP-8060/8045/8035
(45) It is not necessary to set the parameter for the Note:

For other destinations, set the Function Parameter
following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware
#005 (Destination Code).
is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware.
000 : Austria
PB : UK
001 : U.K.
PF : France
002 : Canada
PG : Switzerland
003 : Denmark
PK : China
004 : Taiwan
PM : Germany
005 : Finland
PT : Taiwan
006 : Germany
PU : USA
007 : Netherlands
PEU : UK (DP-6020/4520/3520 only)
008 : Italy
PD : Germany (DP-8060/8045/8035 only)
009 : Spain
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portugal
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro
420
DP-8060/8045/8035
(46) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the steps below.

a. Press the "Function", "Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and "3" keys simultaneously to enter the
Service Mode.
b. For DP-8060/8045/8035 enter a password, and select OK button (default password is 00000000);
DP-60xx/45xx/35xx do not require a password.
c. Press the "9", and then "Start" keys to enter the F9 Mode
d. Select "00 FAX Service Mode"
e. Select "06 RAM Initialize"
f. Select "01 Parameter Initialize", and then the "Yes" button
g. Press the "Stop" key
h. Press the "Function", and "C" (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
i. Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the machine to the OFF, and back to the ON position to
(47) Verify the position of the
stamp on the document. If it is not within the desired location at the bottom
of the document, you can adjust its position by following the steps below.
a. Press the "Function", "Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and "3" keys simultaneously to enter the
Service Mode.
b. For DP-8060/8045/8035 enter a password, and select OK button (default password is 00000000);
c. Press "6", and then "Start" keys to enter the F6 Mode
d. Select "69 Stamp position adjust"
e. Select "Input" button, and enter a number (-50 to 50).
Note:
A positive number moves the
stamp position closer to the trail edge of the document,
conversely, a negative number moves it in the opposite direction.
To change the current sign to either +/-, press the Reset key.
(Default setting = 0; 0.3 mm/Step)
a. Select "OK" button twice.
b. Press the "Function" and "C" (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
421
DP-8060/8045/8035
Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is also installed.
<Changing from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>
An additional 800 stations (1,000 total) are available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD60) is
installed. If you wish to use the 1,000 Fax Address Book, please follow the steps below to change the
address book setting of the machine.
Caution:
The registered address book data will be deleted when the address book setting is changed.
If your machine already has registered stations in the Fax Address Book, please make a backup first
before changing the address book setting.
Before changing the Fax Address Book setting, printout the Address Book information, or copy the
Data using the Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software. After executing the setting
change, re-enter the printed Address Book information or copy, and paste the Data from the 200 to the
1,000 station Address Book file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System,
and Printer)
Changing the Address Book Setting
Execute the Auto Dial Clear, and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below.
1. Press the "Function", "Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and "3" keys simultaneously to enter the Service
Mode.
2. For DP-8060/8045/8035 enter a password, and select OK button (default password is 00000000);
3. Press "9", and then "Start" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
4. Select "00 FAX Service Mode"
5. Select "06 RAM Initialize"
6. Select "03 Auto Dial Clear", and then the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then select "Yes" button for
"Address Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress",
then the unit will return to stand-by.
<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied, and transferred (copy, and
paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).
Note:
1. The size, and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200, or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-8060/
8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx.
- The "DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
- The "DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.
2. The model module of the Address Book Editor (NAE) can be confirmed by the following method.
a) Click on Start\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP
Utilities, and select Network Device Locator.
b) The Network Device Locator screen is displayed, DO NOT select any device, and in the menu bar,
click on Tools, and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
c) The Network Address Book Editor screen displays; click "Cancel" if the Startup screen also
appears.
d) Select "Help", and "Supported Models..." from the main menu to open the Supported Models List.
e) Confirm whether your machine is listed. If it is not listed, click "Update" to access the web site, and
download the latest model module, and then install it.
422
DP-8060/8045/8035
Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy, and Paste the Address Book Data
1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax
Address Book is activated on the DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx.
Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
Utilities.
b) Click on Network Device Locator.
c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device.
d) In the menu bar, click on Tools, and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx" screen appears, under
the Address Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save
As..., and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
g) Then click the OK button.
2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.
3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/
35xx (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1, and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data, and
paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer
to Help.)
5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer, and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.
423
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.5.
Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) (Except USA, and Canada)
8.5.1.
Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
DC PCB Assembly
HDD Bracket
HDD2 Harness
HDD Harness
DC12 Harness
Harness Clamp (Metal)
Screw (6-32 x 3/16)
Screw (M4 x 6)
10
Damper
11
Screw (6-32 x 5.5S)
12
Screw (M3 x 6)
13
14
1
1
HDD Ground Harness

Remarks
Power Supply Cable

3 Connectors
This document
4
13
6
2
7
14
10
11
12
Note:
Caution:
1. The HDD is a delicate device, exercise care during installation to prevent the HDD from Shock, and
Vibration damage.
2. Do not use any Electric Driver to install the HDD unit.
424
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.5.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side, and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
installation.
(1)
(1) Main
Power
SW
(2)
Caution:
If the Red LED on the SC Board is ON, the
Power to the DP-8060/8045/8035 is still ON.
again.
(3)

(4) Remove the Rear Upper Cover, and Rear
Lower Cover.
(4)

(6) Remove the Frame.
(5)
(6)
425
DP-8060/8045/8035

(9) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover.
(7)
(9)
(8)
(10)
HDD
Key
Caution:
Exercise care during installation to prevent the
HDD from Shock, and Vibration damage.
UL Tape
(Black)
To
SC
PCB
Note:
Connect the HDD Harness to the HDD as
illustrated.
Shield
(11) Install 4 Dampers into the HDD Bracket (thicker

side facing up).
426
DP-8060/8045/8035
(12) Install the HDD Bracket over the HDD.

(13) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Dampers to the
HDD with 4 Screws 11 .
(14) Attach the HDD Ground Harness with 2 Screws

8 , 9 .
(15) Connect one end of the HDD2 Harness, and

HDD Harness to the HDD.
6-32 x 3/16
M4 x 6
(16) Install the HDD Assembly.

(17) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Screws 12 .
Note:
Route the HDD2 Harness (Power Supply Cable)
through the cutout in the frame, and secure it with
the Harness Clamp as illustrated.
UL Tape (Black)
Shielded Portion
SC PC Board
(18) Connect the HDD Harness to CN59 on the SC

PC Board as illustrated.
(19) Remove the Screw from the frame, and secure
the HDD Harness Clamp with this Screw as
illustrated.
Note:
Ensure that the clamp is around the shielded
portion of the Harness, and not around the UL
Tape (Black).
427
DP-8060/8045/8035
DC PCB
Assembly
M3 x 6
(20) Install the DC PCB Assembly.

Note:
If the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600)
is installed, disconnect the CN392 Harness
on the FX PCB. Route the Harness over the
DC PCB Bracket, and secure it with the
Clamp. Reconnect the Harness to CN392 on
the FX PCB.
(21) Secure the DC PCB Assembly with 3
Screws 12 .
(22) Connect the HDD2 Harness (Power Supply
Cable) to CN143 on the DC PC Board.
(23) Connect the DC12 Harness to CN141, and
CN142 on the DC PC Board.
(24) Secure the DC12 Harness with 4 Clamps.
(23)
(24)
(24)
Gray Connector
(25)
(25) Connect the other end of DC12 Harness to the

LVPS (Gray Connector).
(26) Reinstall the Toner Waste Container.
If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers.
position.
Note:
It takes approximately 10-15 minutes to format the
Hard Disk Drive.
(29) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was
disconnected.
428
DP-8060/8045/8035
CAUTION!
<Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch>
After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar to
when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when
turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive
Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.
(This interrupts all the power to the machine)
4. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the
Telephone Line Cable first, before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax option is installed.)
Perform the following steps if the Optional Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600), or the Internet Fax/EMail Module (DA-NF600) is also installed
<Changing from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>
An additional 800 stations (1,000 total) are available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD60) is
installed. If you wish to use the 1,000 Address Book, please follow the steps below to change the address
book setting of the machine.
Caution:
The registered address book data will be deleted when the address book setting is changed.
If your machine already has registered stations in the Address Book, please make a backup first before
changing the address book setting.
Before changing the Address Book setting, printout the Address Book information or copy the Data
using the Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software. After executing the setting change, reenter the printed Address Book information, or copy, and paste the Data from the 200 to the 1,000
station Address Book file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System, and
Printer)
Changing the Address Book Setting
Execute the Auto Dial Clear, and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below.
1. Press the "Function", "Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and "3" keys simultaneously to enter the Service
Mode.
2. For DP-8060/8045/8035 enter a password, and select OK button (default password is 00000000);
3. Press "9", and then "Start" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
4. Select "00 FAX Service Mode"
5. Select "06 RAM Initialize"
6. Select "03 Auto Dial Clear", and then the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then select "Yes" button for
"Address Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress",
then the unit will return to stand-by.
429
DP-8060/8045/8035
<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied, and transferred (copy, and
paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).
Note:
1. The size, and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200, or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-8060/
8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx.
- The "DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
- The "DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.
2. The model module of the Address Book Editor (NAE) can be confirmed by the following method.
Utilities, and select Network Device Locator.
b) The Network Device Locator screen is displayed, DO NOT select any device, and in the menu bar,
click on Tools, and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
c) The Network Address Book Editor screen displays; click "Cancel" if the Startup screen also
appears.
d) Select "Help", and "Supported Models..." from the main menu to open the Supported Models List.
e) Confirm whether your machine is listed. If it is not listed, click "Update" to access the website, and
download the latest model module, and then install it.
Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy, and Paste the Address Book Data
1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax
Address Book is activated on the DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx.
Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
Utilities.
b) Click on Network Device Locator.
c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device.
d) In the menu bar, click on Tools, and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/35xx" screen appears, under
the Address Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save
As..., and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
g) Then click the OK button.
2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.
3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-8060/8045/8035/60xx/45xx/
35xx (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1, and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data, and
paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer
to Help.)
5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer, and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.
430
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.6.
Installing the DDS Unlock Module (DA-UK10)
8.6.1.
Contents
No.
1
2
Qty.
1
1
Description
Hardware Key
Remarks
DDS KEY
This document
Note:
8.6.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
installation.
(1)
(1) Main
Power
SW
(2)
KEY
(3)

the SC PC Board.
Caution:
Power to the machine is still ON. Please read
these Installation Instructions once again.
Note:
(5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet, and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back, and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
(6) Install the Document Distribution System
software (not included) into the PC by following
the prompts of the Installation Wizard.
431
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.7.
8.7.1.
Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)

Contents
No.
1
2
Qty.
1
1
Description
Accounting Software CD
1
Remarks
This document
2
Note:
8.7.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is installed into
the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit.
2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the
prompts of the Installation Wizard.
3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below.
1) Press the "Function", "Original Size (Ledger/A3)", and "3" keys simultaneously to enter
the Service Mode.
2) Input the password to enter the Service Mode (default password is 00000000).
3) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Service Mode (Function Parameters).
4) Press the "Start" key.
5) Press the "4", "2", and then select "Start" keys sequentially to enter the F5-42 "KEY/DEPT
Counter".
6) Select "DEPT.", and then "OK" buttons to activate the Key/Dept. Counter function.
7) Press the "Stop" key.
Note:
The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "00000000", to ensure security it is
recommended to change this code.
Follow the steps below to change the Key Operator ID Code:
While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Service Mode.
Select "01 Application Password".
Select "CHANGE" button, and then input a new 8-digit ID Code.
Select "OK" button to set it, and "OK" again to exit F7 Service Mode.
8) Press the "Function", and "C" (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below.
1) Press the "Function" key, "General Settings", "09 Key Operator Mode", and input the
8-digit ID Code to enter the Key Operator Mode.
2) Select "19 Dept. Counter Mode", and set the Dept. Counter Codes (up to 300).
3) Press the "Stop" key to return to the stand-by mode.
432
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.8.
8.8.1.
Installing the DD Server Software (DA-WS20)

Contents
No.
1
Qty.
1
License Agreement
3
4
1
1
DD Server Operating Instructions

Description
DD Server Software CD
Remarks
For USA, and Canada only
This document
3
Note:
8.8.2.
Installation
Install the DD Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the
433
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.9.
Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16/64/128 MB

(DA-SM16B/64B/28B)
8.9.1.
Contents
No.
Qty.
Description
SDRM PC Board
Remarks
16 MB
64 MB
128 MB
This document
Note:
8.9.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the
Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)
Screw
Screw
Main
Power
SW
Caution:
If the Red LED on the SC Board is ON, the
Power is still ON only for DP-8060/8045/8035.
again.
434
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on

the SC PC Board as illustrated.
Note:
Make sure to insert the SDRM PC Board at a
20 - 30 angle into the memory socket, and
then lock it down.
If finished, reinstall, and secure the Rear Plate,
and reinstall remaining Covers.
position.
(6) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was
disconnected.
435
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.10. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)

8.10.1. Contents
Qty.
1
Description
Part No.
UE-410047
UE-410048
Image Memory
Remarks
4 MB
8 MB
Note:
8.10.2. Installation
CAUTION!
installation.
(1) Remove 1 Screw.
(2) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.
(3) Gently insert the Expansion Flash Memory

Card as illustrated (Logo facing outward).
Logo
Caution:
Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage
to the card, or the machine.
(4) Reinstall the Flash Memory Cover.

position.
436
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.11. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS603) / Console 2 (DA-DS604)

8.11.1.
Contents
No.
1
2
3
Qty.
1
1
1
Description
System Console
Screw (M3 x 6)
Remarks
Included inside the Paper Tray.
This document
1
2
3
Note:
8.11.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
installation.
Release
Latch
2 Guide Pins
(Rear)
1 Guide Pin
(Front)
(1) Open the 4 Handle Covers, and swing the

Handles upward, then pullout to lock them in
place.
Note:
To release the handles, lift the release latch
upwards, and push the handles toward the
machine.
(2) Lift, and place the machine on the System

Console (DA-DS603/DS604) aligning with
3 Guide-Pins.
Caution:
The machine weights approximately 302 lb
(137.0 kg) or 138 kg with the i-ADF pre-installed.
To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of
personnel, and the proper equipment to lift, or
move the machine.
437
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3) Secure with 1 Screw (M3 x 6) on the left.
(3)
(4) Pull out the 3rd Tray.

(5) Secure with 2 Large Screws attached in the
System Console as illustrated.
(4)
(5)
<Reverse the Gears to Adjust the Speed>

The factory setting is for DP-8045/8035/4530/3530.
If you are installing onto DP-8060/6030, adjust the
speed by following the steps below.
(2) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
(2)
(1)
(3) Remove 2 Snap-Rings.
(3)
438
DP-8060/8045/8035
(Plastic Washers)
DP-8060/6030: 6 Ribs facing out
(Plastic Washers)
(4) Remove the Belt, 2 Gears, and 2 Plastic

Washers.
(5) Turn both Gears over, and re-install 2 Gears,
2 Plastic Washers, and the Belt.
Note:
When re-installing the gears, mount the Plastic
Washers onto the gears first before inserting them
into the shaft.
(6) Make sure the Gear Combination matches the
Speed.
(7) Re-install the Lower Rear Cover.
Note:
The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for
DP-8045/8035/4530/3530 as default setting.
DP-8045/8035/4530/3530: 3 Ribs facing out
<Paper Size setting (Paper Tray 3, and 4) to your

customer's requirement>
Default Paper Size setting
For PU version (USA/Canada, etc.)
Paper Tray 3 : 11 x 17
Paper Tray 4 : 11 x 17
For Europe, and Other Destinations
Paper Tray 3: A3
Paper Tray 4: A3
Europe, and
Other
Destinations
USA/Canada, etc
439
DP-8060/8045/8035
(9) Adjust the Paper Guides.

Note:
1. Adjust the Front Paper Guide to lineup with the
Paper Size Marker as illustrated (Ex: Legal,
Letter or FLS2, etc.).
2. Adjust the Rear Paper Guide proportionally.
Caution:
Confirm that Paper Guides are adjusted to the
correct position.
(10) Secure the Paper Guides with 5 Screws.
(11) Load paper into the Paper Tray.
(12) Close the Paper Tray 3.
Note:
For System Console 2 (DA-DS604), repeat the
same steps for the Paper Tray 4.
1
FLS
A4
2
FLS
LTR
L
LG
8K
B4
Note:
After the machine is installed, be sure to lock the 2
Casters in front. If necessary, adjust the Leveler
behind the right front caster for more stability.
(13)
(13) Connect the System Console Cable to the

Machine.
Note:
Refer to the 3000-Sheet Tray Installation
Instructions if it is installed.
position.
440
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.11.3.
Paper Size Setting (System Console)
Mode.
2. For DP-8060/8045/8035 enter a password, and select "OK" button (default password is 00000000).
3. Press the "5", and then "Start" keys to enter the F5 Service Mode.
4. Select "16 Paper Size Tray 3".
5. Select the desired Paper Size, and then OK.
6. Select a Media Type, and then select OK.
Note:
For System Console 1 (DA-DS603), skip to step (9).
For System Console 2 (DA-DS604), follow the steps below.
7. Select "17 Paper Size Tray 4".
8. Select a desired Paper Size, and then OK.
9. Select a Media Type, and then OK.
10. Press the "Reset" key to exit to the initial screen of the F5 Service Mode.
12. Confirm that System Console (Tray 3, and/or Tray 4) is displayed on the Touch Panel Display.
8.11.4.
Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side
After installing the System Console / LCT option(s), the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment must
be performed. The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, adjust it by the
1. Printer Registration
1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 2nd tray, and change the tray setting to the appropriate
paper size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
Mode.
5. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
7. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.
Service Mode.
<Figure>
Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).

For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.
For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.
5 mm
Top (Lead edge)

5 mm
(5 mm)
441
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray

Mode.
6. Perform the Service Modes F6-10 to F6-15, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
Service Mode.
3. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU

Mode.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-16, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
Service Mode.
442
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.12. Installing the 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-MA301)

8.12.1. Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
Qty.
1
1
1
1
Description
Paper Guide
Rail Assy
Harness Clamp
Screw (M4 x 10)
Screw (M4 x 8)
Remarks
This document
5
6
4
7
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
Note:
The Unit is protected during shipment with Tapes, and Spacers against vibration, and shock.
Remove all Packing Materials by referring to the steps (15) - (16).
(1) Remove the Protective Cover by releasing 3
Latch Hooks using a Slotted Blade Screwdriver
as illustrated.
443
DP-8060/8045/8035
(2) Carefully break off 4 Protective Tabs with the

Phillips type Screw Driver on the Right Upper,
and Bottom Covers as illustrated.
(3)
(3) Install the Paper Guide.

(4) Secure the Paper Guide with 2 Silver Screws
(M4 x 10).
(4)
(6)
(5) Install the Rail Assembly.

(6) Secure the Rail Assembly with 2 Screws
(M4 x 10).
(5)
(7) Install the LCT on the Rail Assembly.

Note:
Make sure 2 Latches fit into 2 Guide Pins of
the Rail Assembly in Front, and Rear.
(8) Secure the LCT with 2 Screws (M4 x 8) in Front,
and Rear.
(8)
444
DP-8060/8045/8035
(9) Adjust the LCT level with 2 Adjusters.

Note:
Make sure the gaps A, and B are the same
in front, and rear.
(9)
(9)
A
B
(9)
(10)
(12) (13)
(11)
(10) Connect the LCT Cable to the machine.

(11) Connect the System Console Cable to the LCT.
(12) Install the Harness Clamp (PLWS4) on the Rear
Cover.
(13) Secure the System Console Cable with the
Harness Clamp.
position.
(15) Load the paper, and make sure that the Lift Table
is in the upper position, then turn the Power
Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the
OFF position.
(16) Open the Door, and remove the packing
materials under the Lift Table.
(17) Close the Door, and turn the Power Switch on
the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.
(15)
(16)
(18) Make a copy, and verify that the Image is

centered.
If the Image is not centered, proceed to step
(19), and perform the Side to Side adjustment.
(19) Loosen 2 Screws, and adjust the Rail Assembly
to the front, and rear accordingly as illustrated.
When finished, verify the image, and repeat the
adjustment if necessary.
(19)
(19)
8.12.3. Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side

Refet to the section 8.11.4.
445
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.13. Installing the Letter / Legal Size Adapter for 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-TK31)
8.13.1. Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Qty.
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Paper Guide
Rear Guide Plate B
Front Guide Plate B
Upper Support Plate
Lower Support Plate
Paper Table
Door (Large)
Paper Size Label, Legal
Paper Size Label, Letter-R
17
Screw (M3 x 6)
10
4
Remarks
This document
6
7
9
10
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
Note:
Make sure that the Paper Table is at the bottom Position.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)

(2) Remove the Top Cover.
(4) Remove the Front Cover.
(4)
(3)
446
DP-8060/8045/8035
(5)
(5) Remove 1 Screw.

(6) Remove the Door (Small).
(6)
(7)
Door Lock
Lever
(7) Remove the Door Lock Lever from the Door

(Small) by lifting the Latch.
Latch
(8)
Door Lock
Lever
(8) Install the Door Lock Lever onto the Door

(Large).
Latch
(9)

(10) Remove the Front, and Rear Guide Plate A.
(10)
447
DP-8060/8045/8035
(11) Install the Lower Support Plate.

(12) Secure with 4 Screws.
(12)
(11)
(14)
(13) Install the Guide Plate A onto the Paper Guides

on both sides as illustrated.
(14) Secure the Guide Plate A with 2 Screws
(M3 x 6).
(13)
Paper Guide
A4
B4
Legal
Letter
(15) Re-install the Front, and Rear Guide Plate A

into the desired paper size slot.
Note:
Insert the Paper Guide into the lower desired
paper size slot of the Base Unit first, then hook to
the upper slot in the Mechanical Assembly.
(16) Secure the Plates with 2 Screws (M3 x 6).
(16)
(16)
(15)
(15)
Legal
B4
Letter
A4
448
DP-8060/8045/8035
(17) Install the Paper Table.

(18) Secure the Paper Table with 3 Screws (M3 x 6)
as illustrated.
(18)
(17)
(19)
(19) Install the Front, and Rear Guide Plate B.

(20) Secure the Guide Plates B with 2 Screws
(M3 x 6).
(20)
(19)
(20)
(22)
(22)
(21) Install the Upper Support Plate by sliding it on

the Guide Screw holes as illustrated.
(22) Secure the Plates with 4 Screws (M3 x 6).
(21)
(22)
(24)
(23)
(23) Install the Door (Large) onto the Mounting Pins.

(24) Secure with 1 Screw (M3 x 6).
449
DP-8060/8045/8035
(25) Place a sheet of paper, and close the Door

(Large).
(26) Turn the Power Switches ON.
(27) After the Tray lifts up, turn the Power Switches
OFF.

(29) Remove the Sensor Assembly from the Letter
position.
(29)
(28)
<For Letter-R Setting>

(30) Reinstall the Sensor Assembly at the Letter-R
position.
(31) Secure with 1 Screw.
(30)
(31)
<For Legal Setting>
(34)
Legal
(33)
(35)
Letter-R
(32) Open the Door (Large).

(33) Remove the Harness from the bottom Clamp.
(34) Reinstall the Sensor Assembly at the Legal
position.
(35) Secure with 1 Screw.
Letter
450
DP-8060/8045/8035
(36)
(38)
(37)
(36) Reinstall the Top Cover.

(37) Reinstall the Front Cover.
(38) Attach the Paper Size Label as illustrated.
Note:
See Installation Instructions of the LCT for
adjusting the LCT level.
position.
451
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.14. Installing the Exit Tray (DA-XT600)

8.14.1. Contents
No.
1
2
Qty.
1
1
Description
Exit Tray Assembly
Exit Roller E Assembly
Exit Roller Gear 1 (Black)
4
5
1
1
Stop Plate
Stop Plate 2
Screw (M3 x 6)
E-Ring
1
Remarks
For USA/Canada, etc. only
(DP-8035/35xx only)

(DP-8035/35xx only)
This document
3
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
(3)
Note:
For USA/Canada, etc, follow the steps below.
For Other Destinations, skip to the step (14).
(4) Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly.
(2)
(4)
452
DP-8060/8045/8035
(5)
(5)

(6)

(8) Remove the Exit Roller U Assembly.
(7)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Note:
For DP-8035/35xx, follow the Steps below.
For DP-8060/8045/60xx/45xx, skip to step (11).
(9) Remove the E-Ring, and Exit Roller Gear 1
(White).
(10) Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 (Black), and
E-Ring included with this kit.
(10)
(11)
(11)
(11) Install the Exit Roller E Assembly included with

this kit, and secure it with 2 Screws.
(12) Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly, and Exit
Guide 3 Assembly.
(13) Close the Upper Exit Cover.
453
DP-8060/8045/8035
(14) Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit

Cover.
(14)
(16)
(18)
(17)

(16) Remove 1 Screw to free the Upper Exit Cover
Stopper.
(17) Install the Stop Plate, and secure it with 1 Screw
(M3 x 6) as illustrated.
(18) Install the Stop Plate 2, and secure it with
1 Screw (M3 x 6) as illustrated.
(19) Secure the Upper Exit Cover Stopper with 1
Screw (removed in step (16) above).
the ON position.
454
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.15. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600)

8.15.1. Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Qty.
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
2 Bin Finisher
Tray
Inlet Guide
Latch Plate
Harness Cover (Longer)
Harness Cover (Shorter)
Base Plate
Face Plate Button
Guide Rail
Connecting Plate
Exit Roller U Assembly
12
Screw (M4 x 8)
13
Black Screw (M4 x 6)
14
Screw (M4 x 25)
15
16
17
18
19
1
1
1
IPC PC Board
Label
Remarks
Except for USA/Canada, etc.
This Document
5
4
2
6
8
7
11
10
14
12
13
15
19
17
455
18
16
DP-8060/8045/8035
Note:
1. For Euro, and other destinations (Except for USA/Canada, etc.), before installing this option,
make sure the Finisher Power Supply (DA-PW600) is installed in the machine first. Refer to
the Installation Instructions of the Finisher Power Supply (DA-PW600).
2. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600), read these entire
instructions.
CAUTION!
installation.
3.9"
(100mm)
1. Selecting the Installation Site
3.9"
(100mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
57.6 "
(1463 mm)
Make sure that there will be adequate space for

working (Ex: Replenishing supplies, removing paper
jams, etc.).
Also ensure that the Finisher is installed on a leveled
floor surface as its host machine.
(Ex: At the same height, slope).
3.9"
(100mm)
83.3 "
(2115 mm)
2. Removing the Packaging Materials

(1)
Note:
The Machine is protected during shipment with
Tapes, and Spacers against vibration, and shock.
When the site has been selected, move the
Machine to the appropriate site, and remove all
Packaging Materials as illustrated below. Although
the Finisher is equipped with Casters, it moves
only in a straight line.
(1) Take the Accessory Box out of the Package.
Caution:
Do not remove the 4 Styrofoam Pads attached to
the Finisher. The absence of these Pads can
cause deformation of the Rail Mount.
456
DP-8060/8045/8035
(2) Without removing the Pads, lift the Finisher, and

stand it on the floor.
Caution:
The Finisher weights approximately 70 lb
(32.0 kg).
move the Finisher.
(3) Remove the Pads from the Top Cover.
(4) Lift the Front Caster slightly, and remove the
Pad. Repeat the same procedure, and lift the
Rear Caster slightly, and remove the other Pad.
Caution:
The Finisher is equipped with Casters, and tends
to roll easily. Be sure to work in a group of two, and
exercise caution not to drop the finisher, or getting
hurt. Moreover, be sure to pay attention when
shifting the Finisher to avoid deforming the Rail
Base.
Tag
(5) Open the Covers, and remove all Tapes, and

Packing Materials.
(6) Close the Covers.
Caution:
The removed Tapes, and Packaging Material will
be required when transporting the Machine for
relocation, or repairs; it is a good idea to store
them for future use.
Tray
3. Preparing for the Installation of the Finisher

Assembly
Caution:
Before connecting the Finisher to its Host
Machine, mount the Trays, and other parts to the
Finisher first.
(1) Install 2 Trays to the Finisher. Starting with the
bottom Tray first, and then install the upper Tray
next.
457
DP-8060/8045/8035
(2) As shown, fit the bosses on the Tray into the

holes in the Horizontal Frames, and lower it. Be
sure that the bosses on both sides of the Tray
slide into the holes in the Vertical Tray, leaving
no gap.
(3) Secure the bottom of the Tray (both sides) using

2 Black Screws (M4x6) that were included with
the finisher.
(3)
(4) Mount the upper Tray in the same way.
(5) Connect the Sensor Cable to the Sensor

Connector found in the left bottom corner of each
Tray.
Sensor Cable
458
DP-8060/8045/8035
(6) Mount the Harness Covers to each Tray Unit.

Starting with the bottom Harness Cover
(Shorter).
Note:
Insert the bottom Hook into the top hole, and snap
it into place.
Harness Cover
4. Preparing the Host Machine for Installation

(1) Loosen 2 Screws, and remove the SPC Cover.
(Refer to Section 2.2.2. of the Service Manual)
(1)
(3)
(7)
(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto SPC PC

Board, Connector CN727.
(4) Reinstall the SPC Cover, and Toner Waste
Container.
Note:
Gently insert the IPC PC Board as illustrated.
Note:
The following steps (5)~(15) are not applicable for
USA, and Canada.
(6)
(8)
459
DP-8060/8045/8035
(9)
(9)

(10)

(12) Remove the Exit Roller E Assembly.
(11)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(13)
(18)
(18)
(17)
(16)
(16)
(13) Secure the Exit Roller U Assembly with 2

Screws.
Guide 3 Assembly.
(16) Insert the bottom 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12) first,

and tighten them 1/2 way.
(17) Place the Latch Plate on top of the Silver
Screws (M4 x 12).
(18) Install the upper 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12), and
then tighten all the 4 Screws.
Note:
If the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) is also being
installed, before continuing to the next step, install
the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) first.
460
DP-8060/8045/8035
(19) Install the Inlet Guide.

(20) Secure it with 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10).
(19)
(20)
(20)
(21) Install the Guide Rail to the back of the machine

as illustrated.
(22) Secure it with 3 Screws (M4 x 8).
(22)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(23) Remove 2 Black Shipping Screws.
(24) Break off the bottom 2 Protective Tabs.
461
DP-8060/8045/8035
(25) Install the Base Plate.

(26) Secure the Base Plate with 2 Screws (M4 x 25).
(26)
(25)
5. Connecting to the Host Machine

(1) Bring the Finisher closer to its Host Machine so
that the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher, and the
Delivery Assembly of the Host Machine match in
height; then, connect the two carefully.
If the connection is correct, the Guide Pin of the
Latch Plate will fit, and there will be no gap
between the two. If there is a gap either at the
front or the rear, adjust the height position of the
Finisher.
Caution:
Be sure to install both Finisher, and the Host
Machine on a flat floor surface. A difference in
height can lead to faulty movement of paper.
Face Plate Button
(3) Install the Connecting Plate.

(4) Install 2 Screws (M4 x 8) first.
(5) Install the remaining 2 Screws (M4 x 8).
Note:
Make sure that the Guide Rail is kept horizontally
on the Floor.
(4)
(5)
(2) As illustrated, install the Face Plate Button in

the round hole of the Right Guide Assembly of
the Finisher. However, do NOT install it if you are
also installing the Punch Unit.
(4)
(3)
462
DP-8060/8045/8035
(6) Connect the Finisher, and its Host Machine with

the Interface Cable.
(6)
<Punch Unit is NOT installed>

Alignment
Lines
6. Adjusting the Height / Slope

Caution:
Install the Finisher, and the Host Machine on an
even, and leveled floor.
If there is a height variation between the Finisher,
and the Host Machine, or the Finisher is tilted,
improper paper feed will occur. If this is the case,
follow the adjustment procedures below.
If planning to install a Punch Unit, see its
installation procedures.
(1) Check the height, and the slope of the Finisher,
and its Host Machine; if adjustment is needed,
be sure to correct the height before adjusting the
slope.
(4)
B
<Punch Unit is installed>

Alignment
Lines
(2) If there is a difference in Height between the

upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of
the Finisher, and the Alignment Lines on the Left
Platen Cover of the Host Machine: Align the
the Finisher to the Alignment Lines on the Left
Platen Cover of the Host Machine.
(3) Adjust the Finisher level with 4 Adjusters.
Note:
Make sure the Gaps A and B are the same.
(4) Attach the Label as illustrated.
(4)
B
463
DP-8060/8045/8035
(5) Open the Finisher Front Cover, and remove the

Screw securing the Wrench behind the Front
Cover; then, detach the Wrench.
Wrench
Screw
(6) Disconnect the Finisher from its Host Machine.

(7) Remove 2 Screws, and open the Lower Front
Cover.
(7)
(7)
(8) Remove 4 Screws, and then, detach each Foot

Cover.
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
Adjusting Bolt
(9) To correct the height, loosen the Fixing Screws

(Black) on the Front, and Rear Casters on the
pickup side of the Finisher.
(10) To increase the height of the Finisher, turn the
Adjusting Bolt clockwise as illustrated; turn the
Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both
Front, and Rear Casters.)
Fixing Screws
(Black)
464
DP-8060/8045/8035
Adjusting Bolt
Fixing Screws
(Black)
Adjusting Bolt
(11) To decrease the height of the Finisher, turn the

Adjusting Bolt counter-clockwise as illustrated;
turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this
for both Front, and Rear Casters.)
(12) To correct any slope, loosen the Fixing Screw
(Black) on both Front, and Rear Casters on the
delivery side of the Finisher.
(13) To decrease the gap between the Finisher, and
the Host Machine, turn the Adjusting Bolt
clockwise. Turn the Adjusting Bolt as required.
(Perform this for both Front, and Rear Casters.)
(14) To increase the gap between the Finisher, and
counter-clockwise; turn the Adjusting Bolt as
required. (Perform this for both Front, and Rear
Casters.)
(15) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine, and
check to see that the difference in height, and
the slope are within the indicated tolerances;
otherwise, make the adjustments once again.
(16) When done, disconnect the Finisher from the
Host Machine, and tighten the Fixing Screws
(Black) on the Casters.
(17) To prevent loosening of the Adjusting Bolts
during relocation of the Machine, turn the
Adjusting Bolts about 90 in the direction of the
arrow; be sure not to over-tighten them, as such
can lead to displacement.
the ON position.
90
465
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.16. Installing the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605)

8.16.1. Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Qty.
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher
Tray
Inlet Guide
Latch Plate
Harness Cover (Longer)
Harness Cover (Shorter)
Base Plate
Face Plate Button
Guide Rail
Connecting Plate
12
Screw (M4 x 8)
13
14
Screw (M4 x 25)
15
16
17
18
19
1
1
1
IPC PC Board
Label
Remarks
This Document
5
4
2
6
8
7
11
10
14
12
13
15
19
17
466
18
16
DP-8060/8045/8035
Note:
1. For Euro, and other destinations (Not for USA/Canada, etc.), before installing thes option,
2. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605), read these
entire instructions.
CAUTION!
installation.
3.9"
(100mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
57.6 "
(1463 mm)

jams, etc.).
3.9"
(100mm)
83.3 "
(2115 mm)
2. Removing the Packaging Material

(1)
Note:
The Machine is protected during shipment with
Tapes, and Spacers against vibration, and shock.
When the site has been selected, move the
Machine to the appropriate site, and remove all
Packaging Materials as illustrated below. Although
the Finisher is equipped with Casters, it moves
only in a straight line.
(1) Take the Accessory Box out of the Package.
Caution:
Do not remove the 4 Styrofoam Pads attached to
the Finisher. The absence of these Pads can
cause deformation of the Rail Mount.
467
DP-8060/8045/8035
(2) Without removing the Pads, lift the Finisher, and

stand it on the floor.
Caution:
The Finisher weights approximately 114 lb
(52.0 kg).
move the Finisher.
(3) Remove the Pads from the Top Cover.
(4) Lift the Front Caster slightly, and remove the
Pad. Repeat the same procedure, and lift the
Rear Caster slightly, and remove the other Pad.
Caution:
The Finisher is equipped with Casters, and tends
to roll easily. Be sure to work in a group of two, and
exercise caution not to drop the Finisher, or getting
hurt. Moreover, be sure to pay attention when
shifting the Finisher to avoid deforming the Rail
Base.
Tag
(5) Open the Covers, and remove all tapes, and

Packing Materials.
(6) Close the Covers.
Caution:
The removed Tapes, and Packaging Material will
be required when transporting the Machine for
relocation, or repairs; it is a good idea to store
them for future use.
3. Removing the Folding Roller Releasing Plate
(1) Remove 4 Screws, and detach the Right Lower
Cover.
(1)
Right Lower
Cover
(1)
468
DP-8060/8045/8035
Screw
Releasing Plate (Front)
Releasing Plate (Rear) Screw
(2) Remove the Shipping Screw, and detach the

Releasing Plate (Front).
(3) Remove the Shipping Screw, and detach the

Releasing Plate (Rear).
Caution:
It is a good idea to store the removed Releasing
Plates, and the Shipping Screws for future use.
(4) Reinstall the Right Lower Cover.
Front Lower Cover
4. Removing the Stitcher Fixing Member

(1) Open the Front Lower Cover.
Saddle Stitch Assembly
(2) Pullout the Stitcher Assembly.
469
DP-8060/8045/8035
Fixing Member
Screw
(3) Remove 1 Screw, and remove the Fixing

Member from the Right Side.
Caution:
It is good idea to store the removed Screws, and
Fixing Member for future use.
(4) Slide the Stitcher Assembly back into the
finisher.
(5) Close the Front Lower Cover.
Tray
5. Preparing for the Installation of the Finisher

Assembly
Caution:
Machine, mount the Trays, and other parts to the
Finisher first.
(1) Install 2 Trays to the Finisher. Starting with the
bottom Tray first, and then install the upper Tray
next.
(2) As shown, fit the bosses on the Tray into the
holes in the Horizontal Frames, and lower it. Be
sure that the bosses on both sides of the Tray
slide into the holes in the Vertical Tray, leaving
no gap.
(3) Secure the bottom of the Tray (both sides) using

2 Black Screws (M4x6) that were included with
the finisher.
(3)
470
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Mount the upper Tray in the same way.
(5) Connect the Sensor Cable to the Sensor

Connector found in the left bottom corner of each
Tray.
Sensor Cable
(6) Mount the Harness Covers to each Tray Unit.

Starting with the bottom Harness Cover
(Shorter).
Note:
Insert the bottom Hook into the top hole, and snap
it into place.
Harness Cover

(Refer to Section 2.2.2. of the Service Manual)
(1)
471
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto SPC PC

Board, Connector CN727.
(4) Reinstall the SPC Cover, and Toner Waste
Container.
Note:
(3)
Note:
The following steps (5)~(15) are not applicable for
USA, and Canada.
(7)

(6)
(8)
(9)
(9)

(10)

(12) Remove the Exit Roller E Assembly.
(11)
(11)
(12)
472
DP-8060/8045/8035
(13)
(13)
(18)
(18)
(17)
(16)
(16)

Screws.
Guide 3 Assembly.
(16) Insert the bottom 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12) first,

and tighten them 1/2 way.
(17) Place the Latch Plate on top of the Silver
Screws (M4 x 12).
then tighten all the 4 screws.
Note:
If the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) is also being
installed, before continuing to the next step, install
the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) first.
(19) Install the Inlet Guide.
(20) Secure it with 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10).
(19)
(20)
(20)
(21) Install the Guide Rail to the back of the machine

as illustrated.
(22) Secure it with 3 Screws (M4 x 8).
(22)
(21)
(22)
473
DP-8060/8045/8035
(23) Remove 2 Black Shipping Screws.
(23)
(24) Break off the bottom 2 Protective Tabs.
(25) Install the Base Plate.

(26) Secure the Base Plate with 2 Screws (M4 x 25).
(26)
(25)
7. Connecting to the Host Machine

(1) Bring the Finisher closer to its Host Machine so
that the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher, and the
Delivery Assembly of the Host Machine match in
height; then, connect the two carefully.
If the connection is correct, the Guide Pin of the
Latch Plate will fit, and there will be no gap
between the two. If there is a gap either at the
front or the rear, adjust the height position of the
Finisher.
Caution:
Be sure to install both Finisher, and the Host
Machine on a flat floor surface. A difference in
height can lead to faulty movement of paper.
474
DP-8060/8045/8035
Face Plate Button
(3) Install the Connecting Plate.

(4) Install 2 Screws (M4 x 8) first.
(5) Install the remaining 2 Screws (M4 x 8).
Note:
Make sure that the Guide Rail is kept horizontally
on the Floor.
(4)
(5)
(2) As illustrated, install the Face Plate Button in

the round hole of the Right Guide Assembly of
the Finisher. However, do NOT install it if you are
also installing the Punch Unit.
(4)
(3)
(6) Connect the Finisher, and its Host Machine with

(6)
475
DP-8060/8045/8035
<Punch Unit is NOT installed>

Alignment
Lines
8. Adjusting the Height / Slope

Caution:
follow the adjustment procedures below.
If planning to install a Punch Unit, see its
installation procedures.
(1) Check the height, and the slope of the Finisher,

and its Host Machine; if adjustment is needed,
be sure to correct the height before adjusting the
slope.
(4)
B
<Punch Unit is installed>

Alignment
Lines
(2) If there is a difference in Height between the

the Finisher, and the Alignment Lines on the Left
Platen Cover of the Host Machine: Align the
the Finisher to the Alignment Lines on the Left
Platen Cover of the Host Machine.
(3) Adjust the Finisher level with 4 Adjusters.
Note:
Make sure the Gaps A and B are the same.
(4)
B
(5) Open the Finisher Front Cover, and remove the

Screw securing the Wrench behind the Front
Cover; then, detach the Wrench.
Wrench
Screw
476
DP-8060/8045/8035
(6) Disconnect the Finisher from its Host Machine,

and remove the Screws; then, detach each Foot
Cover.
(6)
(6)
(6)
(7) Remove 2 Screws, and remove the Lower Rear

Cover.
(7)
(7)
(8) Open the Lower Front Cover.
(8)
Adjusting Bolt
(9) To correct the height, loosen the Fixing Screws

(Black) on the Front, and Rear Casters on the
pickup side of the Finisher.
(10) To increase the height of the Finisher, turn the
Adjusting Bolt clockwise as illustrated; turn the
Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both
Front, and Rear Casters.)
Fixing Screws
(Black)
477
DP-8060/8045/8035
Adjusting Bolt
Fixing Screws
(Black)
Adjusting Bolt
(11) To decrease the height of the Finisher, turn the

Adjusting Bolt counter-clockwise as illustrated;
turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this
for both Front, and Rear Casters.)
(12) To correct any slope, loosen the Fixing Screw
(Black) on both Front, and Rear Casters on the
delivery side of the Finisher.
(13) To decrease the gap between the Finisher, and
clockwise. Turn the Adjusting Bolt as required.
(Perform this for both Front, and Rear Casters.)
(14) To increase the gap between the Finisher, and
counter-clockwise; turn the Adjusting Bolt as
required. (Perform this for both Front, and Rear
Casters.)
(15) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine, and
check to see that the difference in height, and
the slope are within the indicated tolerances;
otherwise, make the adjustments once again.
(16) When done, disconnect the Finisher from the
Host Machine, and tighten the Fixing Screws
(Black) on the Casters.
(17) To prevent loosening of the Adjusting bolts
during relocation of the machine, turn the
Adjusting bolts about 90 in the direction of the
arrow; be sure not to over-tighten them, as such
can lead to displacement.
the ON position.
90
9. Adjusting the Position for Saddle Stitcher

After installing the Finisher, perform the Saddle
Stitcher Operation for each paper size. If paper is
not stitched in the middle, follow the procedure
below.
(1) Adjust the Fold position with the User preset
mode.
(Refer to the Operating Instructions for copier.)
(2) Perform the Saddle Stitcher Operation once
again for each paper size. Make sure that the
paper is stitched in the middle. If not, repeat the
procedures again.
478
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.17. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP31)

8.17.1. Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Shoulder Screw (Silver)
Stepped Mounting Screw (Silver)
10
11
Description
Remarks
Punch Unit
Punch Lower Cover
Punch Relay Harness
Upper Cover Guide
Guide Plate (Long)
Jam Removal Instructions Label
This Document
7
8
4
9
6
11
10
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
Preparing the Host Machine for Installation
479
DP-8060/8045/8035
(1)
(1) Remove the bottom 3 Screws, and remove the

Guide Plate (Short).
Guide Plate (Short)

(2)
(2) Install the Guide Plate (Long), and secure it with

3 Screws.
Guide Plate (Long)
Removing the Punch Fixing Plate

Punch
Fixing Plate
(1) Remove the 2 Screws from the Punch Fixing

Plates found on the Punch Unit; then, detach the
Punch Fixing Plates (both front, and rear).
Note:
It is a good idea to store the removed Punch Fixing
Plates, and Shipping Screws for future use.
(1)
Connecting to the Finisher

(1) Make sure that the copier is unplugged, and the
Finisher is disconnected.
(2) Install the Stepped Mounting Screws as
illustrated.
Stepped Mounting Screws
480
DP-8060/8045/8035
Finisher Side
Connector Cover 2
Connector Cover 1
(3) Remove the 4 Screws as illustrated, and detach

the Connector Cover 1, and Connector
Cover 2.
(3)
(3)
Punch Driver PCB
J3
J4
(4) Firmly connect one end of the Punch Relay

Harness to the Punch Driver PC Board
(J3, and J4).
Note:
Loose connections can result in malfunction. If the
Punch Unit malfunctions after installation, try
disconnecting, and then re-connecting the
Connector.
Punch Relay Harness
(5) Hook the Punch Unit on the Mounting Screw

which was installed in step (2).
(6) Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher in place

using Shoulder Screws as illustrated.
Shoulder Screws
481
DP-8060/8045/8035
(7) Secure the Punch Lower Cover to the Finisher

as illustrated with 1 Silver Screw (M4 x 12) at
the top, and 1 Black Screw (M4 x 6) at the
bottom.
Punch Lower
Cover
(7) Silver (M4 x 12)

(7) Black (M4 x 6)
(8) Firmly connect the other end of the Punch Relay

Harness to the Finisher Controller PC Board
(J21, and J23).
Note:
Loose connections can result in malfunction. If the
Punch Unit malfunctions after installation, try disconnecting, and re-connecting the Connector.
J21
J23
Finisher Controller
PCB
Punch Relay
Harness
Connector
Cover 1
(9)
Upper Cover
(9) Install the Connector Cover 1 you removed

previously to the Rear Cover of the Finisher.
Note:
The Connector Cover 2 removed from the Rear
Cover of the Finisher will no longer be needed
when the Punch Unit is installed;
nevertheless, it may be a good idea to store it for
future use.
a. Secure the Connector Cover 1 with
2 Screws.
b. Open the Punch Unit.
(10) The Jam Removal Instruction Label has
already been attached on the Punch Unit.
If another language is required, please attach the
appropriate language sticker over it.
Jam
Removal
Instruction
Label
482
DP-8060/8045/8035
Upper Cover
Upper Cover
Guide
(11)
(11) Install the Upper Cover Guide as illustrated with

1 Silver Screw (M4 x 12).
Note:
If the Face Plate Button was installed to the right
guide of the Finisher, the Guide Pin of the Upper
Cover Guide will not slide into the Right Guide
when the Upper Cover is closed. Be sure to
remove the Face Plate Button if it was installed.
the ON position.
Note:
See the Finisher Installation Instructions for instructions on how to adjust the height. If the 2 Bin Finisher
(DA-FS600), or the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605) is being installed at the same time as the
Punch Unit, and you were asked to follow these instructions first before continuing with the Finisher
installation. Return to the step of the Finisher installation where you stopped, and proceed installing the
Finisher.
483
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.18. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330)

8.18.1. Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
2 Bin Finisher
Upper Tray
Guide Bar
Lower Tray
Stand
Front Cover
Rear Cover
Front Magnet Catch Plate
Rear Magnet Catch Plate
Switch Bracket
Locking Clamp
13
Screw (M4 x 8)
14
Screw (M4 x 10)
15
Screw (M4 x 30)
16
Screw (M3 x 10)
17
Remarks
Assembled
This Document
3
5
2
1
6
8
10
11
13
14
15
12
16
17
Note:
2. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330), read these entire
instructions.
484
DP-8060/8045/8035
CAUTION!
installation.
3.9 in
(100 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
63.0 in
(1600 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)

working (Ex: Replenishing Supplies, removing paper
jams, etc.).
2. Unpacking
Caution:
The Finisher weights approximately 35 lb (16 kg).
move the Finisher.
Move the Finisher next to the left side of the
Machine, and remove the Packing Materials using
the following procedure.
(1) Take the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories out of
the Package.
(2) Remove the Tapes securing the Stapler,
Finisher, Accessory Cover, etc. along with the
Packing Materials.
Note:
The removed Tapes, and Packing Materials will be
needed when transporting the Finisher for
relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them
away for future use.
(3)

Note:
For USA and Canada, skip to step (15).
(2)
(4)
485
DP-8060/8045/8035
(5)
(5)
(7)
(5) Remove 2 Stopper Plates.

(6) Remove 2 Shafts.
(7) Remove 2 Rollers.
(6)
(6)
(8)
If the Exit Guide 3 Assembly has the Rollers (7),

follow steps (5) ~ (7) to remove.
[If not, skip to step (8)]
(7)
(8)

(9)

(11) Remove, and replace the Exit Roller E
Assembly with the Exit Roller U Assembly.
(10)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(12)

Screws.
Guide 3 Assembly.
486
DP-8060/8045/8035
(18)
(20)
(15)
(19)
(17)
(16)
(15) Place the Front Magnet Catch Plate.

(16) Insert the lower 1 Screw (M3 x 10), and tighten it
1/2 way.
(17) Install the upper 1 Screw (M3 x 10), and then
tighten both screws.
(18) Place the Rear Magnet Catch Plate.
(19) Insert the lower 1 Screw (M3 x 10), and tighten it
1/2 way.
(20) Install the upper 1 Screw (M3 x 10), and then
tighten both screws.
(21) Secure the Switch Bracket with 2 Screws

(M3 x 10).
Note:
Adjustment of the Bracket position is performed at
the end of the installation (See step 8 - 3).
(21)
(22) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips

Screw Driver as illustrated.
(23) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper.
(*)
(23)
(22)
4. Attaching to the Host Machine
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
Caution:
refer to 7. Height, and Perpendicular Position
Adjustment section.
(1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting
holes on the side panel of the Host Machine.
(2) Secure the Stand with 2 Screws (M4 x 30).
(3) Slide the Rails of the Stand to the left as
illustrated.
487
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Place the Finisher on the Rails.

Finisher
Rail
(5) Hook the Bosses of the Finisher to the Rails as

illustrated, and secure the Finisher with 2
Screws (one on each side) (M4 x 8).
Finisher
(6) Install the Front, and Rear Covers as

illustrated.
(7) Secure the Covers with 2 Screws (M4 x 10).
(7)
(6)
(7)
(6)
(8) Install the Upper, and Lower Trays.
488
DP-8060/8045/8035
(11)
(10)
(9) Install the Locking Clamp.

(10) Place the Interface Cable into the Locking
Clamp, and connect it to the Host Machine.
(11) Slide the Finisher towards the Host Machine.
Note:
Ensure that the Magnet Catch Plates are aligned
with the Magnets of the Finisher.
(9)
5. Height, and Perpendicular Position Adjustment

(1) Turn the Adjusters to adjust the height or the
perpendicular position of the Finisher to the
machine. (Gaps A, and B should be identical)
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back, and
the Power Switch on the Left Side of the
machine to the ON position.
A
B
6. Punch Hole Position Adjustment

Before proceeding with this adjustment, make sure
that the Copiers side to side registration is adjusted
properly.
(1)
(2)
(1) Loosen 2 Screws of the Finisher.

(2) Adjust the Finisher to the front, or rear
accordingly.
Note:
Verify that the punch holes are center aligned by
folding a test copy in half. If the holes are not
center aligned, repeat the steps above.
(3) Loosen 2 Screws, and adjust the Switch
Bracket position so that it center aligns into the
rear cut-out (between A, and B).
(3)
489
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.19. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A)

8.19.1. Contents
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher
Stapler
Delivery Tray
Stand
Exit Roller Gear 1 (White)
E-Ring
Latch Plate
Screw (M4 x 7)
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
1
1
IPC PC Board
Spacer
Label
Remarks

Used for DP-8045/45xx only
Used for DP-8045/45xx only

This Document
1
10
6
9
8
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
2. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A), read
these entire instructions.
490
DP-8060/8045/8035
CAUTION!
installation.
3.9 in
(100 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
74.2 in
(1885 mm)

jams, etc.).
2. Unpacking
Caution:
The Finisher weights approximately 60 lb (27 kg).
move the Finisher.
Move the Finisher next to the left side of the
machine, and remove the Packing Materials using
the following procedure.
(1) Take the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories out of
the Package.
(2) Remove the Tapes securing the Stapler,
Finisher, Accessory Cover, etc. along with the
Packing Materials.
Note:
The removed Tapes, and Packing Materials will be
needed when transporting the Finisher for
relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them
away for future use.
3. Preparing the Host Machine for Finisher
Installation
(Refer to Section 2.2.2. in the Service Manual)
(1)
491
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto the SPC

PC Board, Connector CN727.
(4) Reinstall the SPC Cover, and the Toner Waste
Container.
Note:
(3)
(5)
(6)
Note:
For DP-8035/35xx, skip to step (21).

(8) Push the Release Lever down in order to free
the Exit Guide 7.
(8)
(7)

(10) Remove the Fuser Cover.
(9)
(9)
(10)
492
DP-8060/8045/8035

(13) Remove the Fuser Unit.
(11)
(13)
(11)
(12)
(14) Loosen 1 Screw as illustrated.

(15) Install a Spacer.
(16) Secure 1 Screw loosened in the step (14).
Fuser Unit
(Front View)
(14)
(16)
(15)
Fuser Unit
(Rear View)
(17) Loosen 1 Screw as illustrated.

(18) Install a Spacer.
(19) Secure 1 Screw loosened in the step (17).
(20) Reinstall the Fuser Unit, and all remaining parts.
(17)
(19)
(18)
(23)
Note:
For installations in USA/Canada, skip to step (33).
(22)
(24)
493
DP-8060/8045/8035
(25)
(25)

(26)

(28) Remove, and replace the Exit Roller E
Assembly with the Exit Roller U Assembly.
(27)
(27)
(28)
(30)
Note:
For DP-8035/35xx, skip to step (31).
(29) Remove the E-Ring, and Exit Roller Gear 1
(Black).
(30) Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 (White), and
E-Ring included with this kit.
(29)
(31)
(31)

Screws.
Guide 3 Assembly.
494
DP-8060/8045/8035
(36)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(34)
(34) Insert the lower 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10) first

into the 3rd Holes from top, and tighten them 1/2
way.
(35) Place the Latch Plate on top of these Silver
Screws (M3 x 10).
then tighten all 4 Screws.
Note:
Machine, be sure to attach the Latch Plate to the
Host Machine.
(37) Remove 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips type
Screw Driver as illustrated.
(38) Remove 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper.
(*)
(38)
(37)
4. Attaching to the Host Machine

Caution:
improper paper feed will occur.
(1)
(1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting

holes on the side panel of the Host Machine,
then secure the Stand with 2 Silver Screws
(M4 x 30).
495
DP-8060/8045/8035
(2) Slide the Slider of the Stand outward, loosen the

Screws securing the Bracket, then secure the
Slider.
Bracket
Slider
Screw
(3) Place the Finisher on the Slider of the Stand,

and loosely secure it with 2 Screws (M4 x 6).
Finisher
Slider
Screws
Finisher
No Gap
Caution:
When mounting the Finisher in place, be sure to
insert the lower tabs of the Finisher into the holes
on top of the Slider. Ensure that there is no gap
between the Finisher, and the Stand. A gap would
indicate the Finisher is overlapping. Remove, and
re-mount the Finisher correctly.
Stand
496
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Align the positioning lines of the Finisher, and the

Stand by moving the Finisher back, and forth,
and tighten 2 Screws when they are aligned.
Finisher
Screws
Positioning
Line
(5) Place the Bracket to its original position, then

secure it with 1 Screw. Slide the Finisher toward
the Host Machine, and latch it to the Host
Machine.
Finisher
(6)
Bracket
Screw
Finisher
(7) Attach the Delivery Tray with 4 Screws (M4 x 6)

as illustrated.
Screws
Delivery Tray
Screws
497
DP-8060/8045/8035
(8) Open the Front Cover of the Finisher, then

insert the Stapler along the Guide Rails.
Front Cover
Stapler
(9) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher.

(10) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with
Caution:
Before connecting the Interface Cable, make sure
to turn OFF the Host Machine, and unplug the AC
Power Cord from the wall outlet to avoid shock
hazards.
(10)
(11) Turn the Adjusters to adjust the height or the

perpendicular position of the Finisher to the
machine. (Gaps A, and B should be
identical).
the ON position.
Adjuster
Adjuster
A
B
498
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.20. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP41)

8.20.1. Contents
No.
1
Qty.
1
Description
Punch Relay Harness 1
Punch Relay Harness 2
4
5
1
1
Jam Removal Label

Punch Dust Label
Screw (M4 x 6)
Remarks
Punch Unit
This Document
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
1. Removing the Packing Material
(1) Take the Punch Unit, and the accessories out of
the package.
(2) Remove the Tapes securing the Covers, and the
Front Door.
Front Door
2. Preparations for Finisher Installation
Screw
Jam
Release
Dial
Tab
(1) Turn OFF the Host Machine, and disconnect the

Interface Cable of the Finisher from the Host
Machine.
(2) Release the Latch on the Finisher, and separate
the Finisher from the host machine.
(3) Open the Front Door. Holding the tab with your
fingers, remove the Jam Release Dial.
Screw
499
DP-8060/8045/8035
Release Lever
Front Cover
(5) Unlock the Latch under the Release Lever, and

remove the Release Lever.
(6) Remove 3 Screws, open the Jam Access Door,
and detach the Front Cover.
(7) Close the Jam Access Door.
Screws
Jam
Access
Cover
Latch
Screw
(8) Remove 2 Screws on the paper supply side of

the Finisher.
Rear Cover
Screws
(9) Remove 1 Screw on the paper ejection side of

the Finisher, and detach the Rear Cover.
Rear Cover
Screw
500
DP-8060/8045/8035
Upper-Right Cover Assembly
(10) Remove 2 Screws at the front of the Finisher.
Screws
(11) Remove 2 Screws on the back of the Finisher,

and detach the Upper-Right Cover Assembly.
Upper-Right Cover Assembly
Screws
3. Attaching to the Finisher

Upper-Right Cover
(1) Unlock the Latches, and remove the

Upper-Right Cover Assembly outward, then
remove the Upper-Right Cover.
Latch
501
DP-8060/8045/8035
(2) Place the Punch Unit on the paper supply

section of the Finisher as shown below.
Punch Base Cover
Latch
Positioning Pin
(3) Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher with the

original 2 Screws (White, M4 X 6), and the
enclosed 1 Screw (Screw with Threaded Star
Washer, M4 x 6).
Screw
Screw with Threaded

Star Washer
Screw
502
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Open the Upper Cover, fit the Latches on the

Upper-Right Cover in the square holes in the
Punch Unit, and attach the Upper-Right Cover
to the Punch Unit.
(5) Close the Upper Cover.
Upper-Right Cover
Upper Cover
Punch Unit
(6) Secure the Upper-Right Cover to the Finisher

with the original 2 Screws (White, M4 x 6).
Screws
Upper-Right
Cover
Upper-Right Cover
(7) Attach the Jam Removal Instruction Label in

your desired language to the Label Frame on the
Upper-Right Cover.
Jam
Removal
Instruction
Label
Punch
Dust
Label
503
DP-8060/8045/8035
(8) Connect one end of the Punch Relay

Harnesses to the Punch Controller Circuit Board
as follows:
Punch
Controller
Circuit Board
= J1004
= J003
J1004
J1003
(9) Connect the other end of the Punch Relay

Harnesses to the Finisher Controller Circuit
Board as follows:
1 = CN14
2 = CN12
CN14
CN12
Finisher
Controller
Circuit Board
504
DP-8060/8045/8035
(10) Place the Punch Relay Harnesses into the

Harness Clamps, and Harness Guides.
Harness
Clamp
Finisher
Controller
Circuit
Board
Harness
Guide
(11) Attach the Front Cover, Latch Release Lever,

Jam Release Dial, and Rear Cover.
Side
Guide
Front Cover
Note:
When attaching the Front Cover, attach it with the
Side Guide being on the inside of the Front Cover.
See the illustration on the left.
If the Front Cover is attached with the Side Guide
being on the outside, the up, and down operation
of Ejection Tray may malfunction.
(12) Loosen 2 Screws securing the Finisher, and
Finisher Frame.
Screws
505
DP-8060/8045/8035
Finisher
Host Machine
Latch Plate
(13) Slowly move the Finisher back, and forth, close

to the Host Machine, and adjust the Finisher so
that the notch of the Latch Plate aligns with the
protrusion of the Punch Base Cover.
(14) Attach the Finisher to the Host Machine, and
connect the Interface Cable of the Finisher to
the Host Machine.
Align
Punch Base
Cover
506
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.21. Installing the Printer Controller Module for GDI-IPX/SPX (DA-GC601)

(Not Available in the USA/Canada)
8.21.1. Contents
Qty.
1
1
Description
Hardware Key
Part No.
----DZSM000751
Remarks
GDI KEY
Note:
Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number(s), Packing, and Accessories detail..
CAUTION!
installation.
(1)
(1) Main
Power
SW
(2)

available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
KEY
(3)

reinstall remaining Covers.
(6) Install the Printer Driver, and NetWare
SetupWizard into the PC with the Operating
Instructions by following the prompts of the
507
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.22. Installing the Finisher Power Supply (DA-PW600)

8.22.1. Contents
No.
1
2
Qty.
1
1
Description
Power Supply for Finisher
LVSC Harness
Screw (M3 x 6)
1
Remarks
This document
2
Note:
1. For Euro, and other Destinations (Not for USA/Canada, etc.)
CAUTION!
installation.
(3) Pull out 1st Paper Tray.

(5) Remove the LVPS Cover.
(5)
(4)
(3)
508
DP-8060/8045/8035
(6) Connect the LVSC Harness to CN64 on the

Power Supply for Finisher.
(6)
(9)
(7)
(8)
(11)
(7) Release the 2 Harnesses from the Harness

Clamp,which are secured as illustrated. Secure
the 2 Harnesses without forming a loop.
(8) Insert the Power Supply for Finisher into the
Main Machine.
(9) Connect 2 Harnesses to CN65, and CN66 on
the Power Supply for Finisher.
(10) Disconnect the Dummy Connector.
Note:
Discard the Dummy Connector.
(11) Connect the LVSC Harness, and the LVPS
Harness.
(10)
(13)
(12)
(12) Secure the Power Supply for Finisher with

1 Screw (M3 x 6).
(13) Secure the Harness with the Harness Clamp.
(14) Re-install the LVPS Cover.
Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the
ON position.
509
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.23. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit (PJEEF2750PU)

8.23.1. Contents
Note:
The Key Counter is sold separately.
Qty.
1
1
Description
Harness, KCTU
Cover, Connector
Screw (M4 x 10)
Remarks
This document
CAUTION!
installation.

(5) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover.
(3)
(4)
(6) Route the KCTU Harness through the hole in

the Frame as illustrated.
(7) Secure the KCTU Harness to the 2 Harness
Clamps.
(6)
(7)
510
DP-8060/8045/8035
(8) Secure the KCTU Harness to the 4 Harness

Clamps.
(9) Connect the KCTU Harness to CN765 on the

DRV PC Board.
(9)
(10)
(10) Remove the Protective Tab on the Right Rear

Cover.
(11) Reinstall the Right Rear Cover, and Upper
Rear Cover.
Note:
As a safety measure, if the Key Counter is not
being installed, cover up the aperture with the
Connector Cover, and secure it with 2 Screws
(M4 x 10).
Note:
After the Key Counter installation, ensure that the harness, and the connector are not exposed.
511
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.24. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater (DZTQ000041)

(Supplied as a Service Part)
8.24.1. Contents
Qty.
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
Description
Heater
Heater Assembly
Heater Switch Assembly
Connector Holder Bracket
RLB PC Board
RLB Harness
DHT Harness
DF2 Harness
Heater SW Label
Screw
Remarks
4 Connectors
3 Connectors (Long)
3 Connectors (Short)
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
(4)
(3)
(2)
(5)
(2)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(7)
(10)
(12)
(13)

(3) Remove the Left Platen Cover.
(4) Remove the Glass Assembly.
(6) Remove the Left Side Rear Cover.
(10) Remove the Left Side Front Cover.
(13) Remove the Fuser Cover.
512
DP-8060/8045/8035
(17)
(18)
(14) Pull out the 1st Paper Tray.

(16) Remove the LVPS Cover.
(17) Turn the Lifting Lever counter-clockwise.
(18) Pull the ADU Unit out.
(16)
(14)
(15)

(20) Disconnect the Cooling Fan 1 Harness, and
remove the Interlock Cover.
(21) Disconnect the HT Harness.
(20)
(19)
(21)
(24) (23) (22)

(23) Remove the Lower Control Panel Cover.
(24) Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down.
(22)
(22)
(25)
(25)
(25) Secure the DF2 Harness to the existing

2 Harness Clamps.
Note:
Route the right side of the harness over the center
bracket as illustrated.
(26) Connect the DF2 Harness to DHT Harness.
(26)
513
DP-8060/8045/8035
(27) Insert the right side of the DF2 Harness into the
Connector Holder Bracket.
(28) Secure the Connector Holder Bracket with
1 Screw.
(28)
(27)
(Right Side)
(29)
(31)
(33)
(32)
(29) Connect the Heater to DF2 Harness.

(30) Carefully move the Scanner towards the center
to give you access to the screw hole.
(31) Secure the Heater with 1 Screw.
(32) Insert the left side of the DF2 Harness into the
Connector Holder Bracket.
Note:
Observe the direction of the bracket in the
illustration, before inserting the connector.
(33) Secure the Connector Holder Bracket with
1 Screw.
(Left Side)
(34)
(36)
(34) Connect the Heater to DF2 Harness.

(35) Secure the Heater with 1 Screw.
(36) Secure the Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.
(35)
514
DP-8060/8045/8035
(37)
(37) Secure the DF2 Harness with 4 Harness

Clamps.
(38) Secure the DHT Harness with 5 Harness

Clamps.
(38)
(39) Secure the DHT Harness with 4 Harness

Clamps.
(40) Route the DHT Harness through the hole in the
frame as illustrated.
(39)
(40)
(41) Open the Lower Exit Cover.

(43) Remove 1 Snap Ring.
(44) Remove the Lower Exit Cover.
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
515
DP-8060/8045/8035

(46) Remove the Exit Cover 3.
(46)
(45)
<If the System Console option is installed,

perform steps (45) ~ (46) below>
(48) Remove the Left Cover.
(48)
(47)

(51) Remove the Paper Exit Assembly.
Note:
Exercise care not to damage the Inverting Paper
Sensor.
(50)
Inverting
Paper
Sensor
(49)

(49)
(51)

(54) Remove the Exit Guide.
(54)
(53)
(53)

(56) Partially slide out the EL Bracket Assembly.
(56)
(55)
516
DP-8060/8045/8035
(57) Install the RLB PC Board.

(58) Secure the RLB PC Board with 4 Screws.
(59) Connect the RLB Harness to the RLB PC
Board (CN171, and CN172).
(60) Connect the DHT Harness to the RLB PC
Board (CN173).
(59)
(60)
(57)
(58)
(60)
(58)
(61) Slide the EL Bracket Assembly into the

machine.
(62) Secure the EL Bracket Assembly with 2
Screws.
(61)
(62)
(64)
(63) Secure the RLB Harness with 4 Harness

Clamps.
(64) Route the RLB Harness through the hole in the
frame as illustrated.
(63)

(65)
<If the System Console option is installed,

perform steps (61) ~ (62) below>
(68) Remove the Rear Cover of System Console.
(66)
(65)
(68)
(67)
517
DP-8060/8045/8035
(70)

(70) Remove the NFL PC Board Assembly.
(69)
(69)
Used for Japanese

models only.
(71) Connect the RLB Harness to CN134 on NFL PC

Board.
(71)
(72)
(72) With the 1st Paper Tray pulled out, install the
Heater Assembly as illustrated.
(73) Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw.
(74) Connect the Heater Assembly to DHT
Harness.
(73)
(74)
(75) Connect the Harness to Heater Switch

Assembly.
(75)
518
DP-8060/8045/8035
(76) Install the Heater Switch Assembly.

(77) Secure the Heater Switch Assembly with
1 Screw.
(78) Secure the Harness with 2 Harness Clamps.
(78)
(78)
(76)
(77)
(79)
(81)
(80)

(80) Remove the Blind Plate.
(81) Affix the Heater SW Label as illustrated.
If finished, reassemble the machine, and
reinstall all Covers.
519
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.25. Installing the Deluxe Stand (DA1D351/DA-D352R)

for the USA/Canada only
A. Contents
Deluxe Stand
For DP-8060 / 8045 / 8035 / 60xx /

45xx / 35xx
Deluxe Stand (Low)
For DP-8060 / 8045 / 8035 / 60xx /

45xx / 35xx that require Wheelchair
Accessibility.
520
DP-8060/8045/8035
B. Installation
Turn the Deluxe Stand right side up while its still

in the carton and then lift, and remove the carton.
Note:
521
DP-8060/8045/8035
Lift and place the machine on the Deluxe Stand,

align with 3 Guide Pins.
Note:
Open the Front Door of the Deluxe Stand.

Secure the machine and the Deluxe Stand with
the 2 Wing Screws and 2 Lock Washers as
illustrated.
522
DP-8060/8045/8035
8.26. Replacing the OPC Drum

(2) Move the Hopper Unit.
(3) Turn the Developer Unit Lever clockwise (90).

(4) Turn the ADU Lever counter-clockwise (90).
(5) Loosen 1 Screw.

(6) Remove the Drum Unit
Note:
When handling the Drum Unit, hold it by the
Handle.
523
DP-8060/8045/8035
(7) Remove 1 Screw.

Remove the Bias Charge Unit.
(8) Release 2 Latch Hooks, and remove the Frame

Cover.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that 2 Hooks are
fixed properly.
(9) Remove the 4 Screws.

(10) Remove the Front Fixation Plate.
(11) Turn the Front Support Metal

counter-clockwise, and remove it.
Caution:
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
524
DP-8060/8045/8035
(12) Remove the 4 Screws.

(13) Remove the Rear Fixation Plate.
(14) Turn the Rear Support Metal clockwise, and

remove it.
(15) Remove the OPC Drum.

(16) Install New OPC Drum by reverse steps.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.
Caution:
OPC Drum to direct light (even if it is a 1000-Lux
fluorescent lamp).
525
DP-8060/8045/8035
9 General Network Information

9.1.
9.1.1.
Network Protocol
OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most
commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first
released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining,
and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.
The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware)
layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the
opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software)
in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session, and
Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that
describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer
Name
Function
Application
Presentation
Session
Protocol
SMB
SMTP
FTP
DNS
HTTP
Telnet
etc...
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc...

TDI
Transport
Network
TCP, UDP
IP, IPX, etc...
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Net BEUI
Apple Talk
IP Address etc...
etc...
ODI Driver, NDIS Driver
Datalink
Physical
Router
PPP...
NIC
SW Hub
Repeater
Hub
Ethernet
Token Ring
FDDI
ATM
etc...
RS-232C, X21...
MAC Address
OSI Reference Model and Network Terms
526
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.1.2.
Protocol
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA, or
Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to
input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites, and is
supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for
communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.
TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX
operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an
RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the
Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.
The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol
suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
Layer
7
6
5
4
OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base

Function
Application
This layer embraces functions of the OSI
Application
Session, Presentation and Application
Presentation
layers. Protocols at this layer provide
Session
network services.
Compares to OSI Transport layer.
Transport
Transport
Enables peer communication between
hosts on the internetwork.
Network
Internet
Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network
layer. Protocols move data between
devices on networks.
Corresponds to the bottom two layers of
Data Link
Network
the OSI model. This correspondence
Interface
enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist
with existing Data Link and Physical layer
Physical
standards. This layer is concerned with all
aspects of transmitting and receiving data
on the network.
Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model
9.1.3.
Cable
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several
cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.
Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 .
Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.
Category
1
2
3
4
5
Purpose
Voice grade telephone line
ISDN
10Base-T Token Ring (4M)
Token Ring (16M)
100Base-TX, ATM (155M)
527
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.2.
9.2.1.
Layer Functions, and Technology

MAC (Media Access Control)
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.
These addresses are hexadecimal in nature, and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the
left end identify the manufacturers code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical, and
Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For
Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each
station should be unique.
XXXXXX XXXXXX
Unique value
Manufacturer ID
PCC : 080023
9.2.2.
Network Control
CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the
network, transmission from another station is prohibited, and halted until the data transfer is completed, and
the link is off. CSMA/CD, and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The
General sequence is as follows:
Wait for the next available timing to send,
Send out a frame,
Perform collision sensing simultaneously,
Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.
(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)
802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format
Least significant bit

Most significant bit
Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data
FCS
8 byte
6 byte
6 byte
2 byte
46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)
If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it
must be passed to the upper layer.
Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node
immediately.
Token Passing
Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs
to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When
the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.
The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor
station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor
station, and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station
announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active
upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the
beaconing process continues every seven seconds.
528
DP-8060/8045/8035
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token, and transmits a data
frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended
recipient of the frame.
When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer,
updates the frame status field of the data frame, and puts the frame back on the ring.When the computer
that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission,
takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.
Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.
Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.
Token Frame Format

Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)
1 byte
1 byte
P: priority
S: Status
0 = Token Frame
1 = Data Frame
R: Reserved
Data Frame Format

Access Frame
SFD
1 byte Control control
1 byte 1 byte
Data
Destination Source
MAC
MAC
6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte

Frame
ED
FCS
4 byte 1 byte Status
1 byte
Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)

Max 17779 (16M)
There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1, and 5 bit indicates that the
token has been read, 2, and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can
confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.
529
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.2.3.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The
original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks
can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star
physical topology, and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe
10Base-T)
Speed (bps) Topology

Cable Type
10M
Bus
Yellow cable
10Base-5
10Base-T
10M
100Base-TX 100M
Star
Star
Max Length
500 m (1640 ft)
Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)

Twisted Pair (Cat. 5)
100 m (328 ft)
802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type
Max length (x 100m)
10
BASE
Logical speed
(Mbps)
5
BASE : baseband (digital)
BROAD: broadband (analog)
10
BASE
T
TP Twisted Pair
hyphen "-" means type of cable

no "-" means max length
Ethernet Configuration
1
2
3
6
TX (+)
TX (-)
RX (+)
RX (-)
TX (+)
TX (-)
RX (+)
RX (-)
Straight Cable
Crossed Cable
Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.
The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.
"1"
"0"
0V
-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from
further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.
If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped, and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The
530
DP-8060/8045/8035
node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision
detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of
transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.
There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy, and flexible for future
expansion due to the star topology.
9.2.4.
Repeater
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at
the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter, or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal,
passing all network traffic in all directions.
They perform signal amplitude, delete errors, and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3
rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the
segments being populated.
Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify, and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are
called multiport repeaters.
9.2.5.
NIC (Network Interface Card)
NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer, and adapts the network
interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.
531
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.3.
9.3.1.
Network Layer
IP Address
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0, and 255. Each octet is
separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need
a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.
The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B, and class
C addresses.
Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1, and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first
octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node, or host number.
Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that
make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.
Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make
up the host ID.
There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than
223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.
Class A : First octet reserved for the network address
Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address
Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address
Class A 0
Class B 1 0
Class C 1 1 0
Network address represented as

Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP
addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:
Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255
Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255
532
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.3.2.
Subnet Mask
A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.
IP
192.168.32.1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Network
Address
192.168.32.0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
192
168
32
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
255
255
255
0
IP
Subnet Mask
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Network Address Configuration
Global IP
Address
190.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
190.0.3.1
255.255.255.0
190.0.3.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.3.3
255.255.255.0
190.0.2.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.2.3
255.255.255.0
Router
190.0.2.1
255.255.255.0
Note
Upper: IP address
Lower: Subnet mask
190.0.1.1
255.255.255.0
190.0.1.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.1.3
255.255.255.0
Third
Floor
Second
Floor
Ground
Floor
Class B Subnet Outline

For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.
1. Host address is set to all 0
2. Host address is set to all 1
Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.
3. All 4 octets are set to all 1
IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified.
Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.
4. All 4 octets are set to all 0
Reserved for default route for non-destination address
5. Most significant bit starting with 127
Reserved for loop back address
533
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.3.3.
Internet Protocol
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides
datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.
It performs the following typical functions:
1. Identifies the IP address
2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram
3. Routing of the IP address
4 byte
Version
Internet
Header Length
Type Of Service
Total Length
ID
Time To Live
Flags
Fragment Offset
Header Checksum
Protocol
Source Address
Destination Address
Option + Padding (size varies)
Data
IP Datagram
Terms
Version
Internet Header
Length
Type Of Service
ID
Flags
Fragment Offset
Time To Live
Protocol
Header Checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Option
Padding
Detail
Currently version 4
IP Header field length
Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for
precedence)
Identification frame number for upper layer communication
Packet disassembly information
Offset from most significant bit
Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router
Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)
Checksum is used for error checking on the header data
Senders IP Address
Destinations IP Address
When implemented
Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit
534
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.3.4.
Router
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network
segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination
network address and a destination device address.
Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they
also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by
identifying its header information.
These are the typical functions:
1. Routing
This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.
2. Packet Filtering
This performs the access and security control for specified routing.
access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23

192.168.32/24
PC-A
192.168.32.1/24
192.168.33/24
Router B
PC-C
192.168.33.1/24
PC-B
192.168.32.2/24
OK
PC-D
192.168.33.2/24
OK
permission denied
permission denied
Packet Filtering Sample
3. Address Conversion
NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to
single private IP Address.
4. IP Masquerade:
This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.
At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.
Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX
(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known
manufacturer.
5. Designated Reply
These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.
Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well
known techniques to keep a live connection.
535
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.4.
9.4.1.
Transport Layer
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds
to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end
communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for
the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.
The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.
IP Datagram
TCP segment
TCP Header
(20 byte)
IP Header
(20 byte)
Application Data
(vary)
TCP Segment in IP Datagram

Source Port (2 byte)
Destination Port (2 byte)
Sequence Number (4 byte)
Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)
Header Length
(4 bit)
Reserved
(6 bit)
Control Flag
(6 bit)
Checksum (2 byte)
Option
Window (6 byte)
Urgent Pointer (2 byte)
PAD
Data (Segment)
TCP Segment Outline
TCP Header Monitoring Sample
536
DP-8060/8045/8035
Client
SYN, Se
quential
No.=453
8970
Increments No. sequentially
8971
No.=453
K
00
C
A
,
K
AC
9194240
1
.=
o
N
l
quentia
SYN, Se
ACK, AC
K
No.=191
9724001
Server
Panasonic
Device
TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial
sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.
The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The
ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each
packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.
537
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.5.
9.5.1.
Upper Layer
DNS (Domain Name System)
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to
client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain
name structure, to access network resources.
Domain Names are comprised of 2, or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most
specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain
Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:
Panasonic.com
Mail.panasonic.com
ifax.panasonic.com
can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.
Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names
(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be
connected to an actual device.
This is often done so that a group, or business can have an Internet email address without having to
establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of
the listed Domain Name.
Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.
The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.
Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.
Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.
Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.
Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)
DNS Server (root)

DNS Server (jp)
3
2
1
Panasonic
Device
5
4
6
10
8
DNS Server
(panasonic.com)
DNS Server (co.jp)
DNS Server Mail Server

mlsv.panafax.co.jp
(panafax.co.jp)
domain
DNS Name Resolution Sample

The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the
need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be
delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.
There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.
538
DP-8060/8045/8035
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:
1. Query the local DNS Server.
2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.
3. The Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server.
4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.
5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.
6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.
All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not
always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP
address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To
Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary
Name Server.
9.5.2.
Primary Name Server
A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the
copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it
retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.
9.5.3.
Secondary Name Server
A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the
original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then
the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers
in a domain improves performance.
9.5.4.
SOA (Start of Authority) Record
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's
primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as
follows:
IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>
An example of the syntax is shown below:
;
; File:
db.127.0.0 file
; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.
;
SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the
;
default parameters for information this DNS is
;
authorized for:
;
@
IN SOA
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
951213
; serial number
43200
; refresh every 12 hours
; retry after 2 hours
7200
1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks
172800) ; default ttl is 2 days
;
IN NS
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1
IN PTR
localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file
539
DP-8060/8045/8035
The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for
the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have
a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis
must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.
The following list explains the other parameters:
* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.
* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be
expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e.
hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp instead of hostmaster@rdmg.pcc.co.jp).
* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone
file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.
* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for
changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.
* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer
fails.
* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the
expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted.
* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is
sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual
resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.
9.5.5.
A (Address) Record
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machines name
and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy

; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais
; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720
; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy
$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.
rdmg
IN
SOA
nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
721 10800 3600 604800 86400 )
IN
NS
nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.
IN
MX
10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
ifax-gz03
IN
A
172.21.94.216
qmc-cco1
IN
A
133.185.254.212
ifaxos01
IN
A
172.21.97.26
ifpdyna
IN
A
202.244.202.29
A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file
540
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.5.6.
PTR (Pointer) Record
Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.
DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.
They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and
then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in
reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:
<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>
1
;
IN NS
IN PTR
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.

9.5.7.
CNAME (Canonical Name) Record
The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one
name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:
<alias name> CNAME <host name>
Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are
useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME
record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.
9.5.8.
NS (Name Server) Record
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server
record is shown below:
<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>
An example of a name server record follows below:
@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp
The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name
server.
9.5.9.
MX (Mail Exchange) Record
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you
list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail
server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed
to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first
preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.
If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at
your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:
<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>
For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.
541
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.5.10. Reverse Lookup

This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall
within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA
domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four
octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the
domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the
natural grouping of hosts in a network.
9.5.11.
Forwarding
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of
forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries
to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one, or more forwarding servers, and they
are tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do
not wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario
would involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The
workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the
appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the
timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the
query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central
machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage
of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile
commands.
There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary
zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache, or zones will be answered, and
anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.
For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly &
Associates, Inc.
542
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.6.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel.
The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request,
the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP
may be either the ultimate destination, or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the senderSMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP
in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a
MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an
OK reply.
The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver
can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that
recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several
recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating
with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK
reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://
www.imc. org/rfc821
Internet
SMTP Server
PC
DNS Server
SMTP
PC
POP Server
POP 3
Internet Mail Sending and Receiving
9.6.1.
Mail Header Sample

Received: from nwr35
by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157
for <freeport@labo.pcc.com>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Message-Id: <199908200604.PAA09157@mlsv2.labo.pcc.com>
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
From: "Panasonic" <ifax98-us@labo.pcc.com>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: freeport@labo.pcc.com
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572
543
Delivery route
Message ID
Content-Type
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.7.
9.7.1.
ITU T.37 and RFC2305

Mode of Operation
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses
approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet
standards, or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.
Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.
Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to
this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended
that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be
capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.
Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not
required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this
recommendation.
9.7.2.
Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table

Sender
Required
Strongly
Recommended
Optional
Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file

Provide notice in case of local transmission problem
Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME
compliant
Include Message-ID
Use Base 64 encoding for image data
Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are
supported by the receiver
Provide notice on receipt of DSN, or other notifications
Receiver
Required
Optional
Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place

MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than
display
Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files
within a single message
Provide notice in case of reception, or processing problems
Use other TIFF Profiles
544
DP-8060/8045/8035
Offramp Gateway (when implemented)
Required
Strongly
Recommended
Optional
9.7.3.
Be SMTP compliant
Provide delivery failure notification
Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address
Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile
transmission
Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile
terminals
Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification
Use DSN for delivery failure notification
Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple
users
Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3
facsimile terminal
Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient
Definitions and Abbreviations

IETF
RFC
MIME
POP3
SMTP
DSN
MDN
TIFF
IFD
Offramp
gateway
Mailstore
Notice
Internet Engineering Task Force

Request For Comment
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
Post Office Protocol version 3
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Delivery Status Notification
Message Disposition Notification
Tagged Image File Format
TIFF Image File Directory
Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one, or more
G3/G4 facsimile terminals
Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by
receiver
Provision of status information to the originator, or recipient in a
manner to be determined by the device
RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/
File Format for Internet Fax

Tag Image File Format (TIFF) Image/TIFF MIME Sub-type
Registration
Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail
Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail
A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail
Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for Facsimile
545
RFC2301
RFC2302
RFC2303
RFC2304
RFC2305
RFC2306
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.7.4.
File Format for Internet Fax
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also
compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax
devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding
methods.
S (MH)
Color
B/W
C (JPEG)
J
(JBIG)
F
(MMR, MR)
L (JPEG)
M (MRC)
MRC: Mixed Raster Content

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.
Class
S
F
J
C
L
Color
B/W
B/W
B/W
Color
Color
Color
Coding Method
MH
MMR, MR
JBIG
JPEG (lossy)
JPEG (lossless,
grayscale)
Mixed Raster
Content
Remarks
Internet Fax minimal set
Internet Fax full mode
Internet Fax mixed mode
Color minimal set
One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous
tone color and grayscale images
Multiple coders and resolution within a page
546
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.7.5.
Minimal Set
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to
assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.
The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white
facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.
Baseline Fields
Bits Per Sample
Compression
Fill Order
Image Width
Image Length
New Sub File Type
Page Number
Photometric Interpretation
Resolution Unit
Rows Per Strip
Samples Per Pixel
Strip Byte Counts
Strip Offsets
X Resolution
Y Resolution
Extensions Fields
T4 Options
9.7.6.
Values
1
3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0, or 4
Least significant bit first
1728 (A-4)
N: total number of scan lines in image
2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document
N, m: page number n followed by total page count m
0: pixel value 1 means black
2: inch
Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip
1
Number of byte in TIFF strip
Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip
204, 200 (pixels/inch)
98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)
0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs
byte aligned
Addressing
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an
extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to
PSTN-based services.
(1) Offramp
(2) Sub address
(3) Others
FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com

Global-phone
Service selector
Domain
FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org

Sub address
Selector
Global-phone
Service selector
VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com
Global-phone
Service selector
547
Domain
Domain
DP-8060/8045/8035
Note:
For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words
MUST, MUST NOT, REQUIRED, SHALL, SHALL NOT, SHOULD, SHOULD NOT,
RECOMMENDED, MAY, and OPTIONAL in this document are to be interpreted as described in
RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119
1. MUST
This word, or the terms REQUIRED, or SHALL, means that the definition is an absolute requirement
of the specification.
2. MUST NOT
This phrase, or the phrase SHALL NOT, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the
specification.
3. SHOULD
These words, or the adjective RECOMMENDED, means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
4. SHOULD NOT
This phrase, or the phrase NOT RECOMMENDED means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable, or even useful, but the full
implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior
described with this label.
9.7.7.
Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data

Header
Value Offset
IFD (Page 0)
Long Values
Image Data
(Page 0)
Value Offset
IFD (Page 1)
Long Values
Image Data
(Page 1)
IFD (Page 2)
File Structure
548
First IFD Offset

Next IFD Offset
Strip Offset
Next IFD Offset

Strip Offset
DP-8060/8045/8035
Message Header Contents
9.7.8.
Delivery Failure
In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the
format of a DSN.
9.7.9.
Image File Format
The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with
the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.
The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
549
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.8.
Communication Protocols
The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport,
document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.
Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
SMTP Command & Reply Procedure

SMTP Server
(sv2.labo.pcc.com)
your Panasonic Device

(ef1.labo.pcc.com)
TCP 3 Way
Handshake &
Opening Session
[5 minutes]
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready
SMTP Command
HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com
250 ef1.labo.pcc.com
MAIL FROM: <xxx@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
[5 minutes]
250 OK
RCPT TO: <yyy@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
[5 minutes]
250 OK
DATA
[2 minutes]
250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>
DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK 1
[3 minutes]
[3 minutes]
DATA BLOCK n
CR/LF . CR/LF
[10 minutes]
Closing
DATA BLOCK 2
250 OK
QUIT
221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing
transmission channel
Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:
1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or
2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.
A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily
reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.
The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.
550
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.8.1.
Opening and Closing
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts
are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the
transmission channel for opening and closing:
HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>
QUIT:<CRLF>
In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as
saying, Hello, I am <domain>.
9.8.2.
Mail (MAIL)
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one, or more
mailboxes.
9.8.3.
RECIPIENT (RCPT)
This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by
multiple uses of this command.
9.8.4.
Data (DATA)
The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes
the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of
the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the
character sequence <CRLF>.<CRLF>. This is the end of mail data indication.
9.8.5.
Send
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one, or more
terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.
9.8.6.
Reset (RSET)
This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients,
and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK
reply.
9.8.7.
Verify (VRFY)
This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full
name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.
9.8.8.
Quit (QUIT)
This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.
9.8.9.
Reply Codes from SMTP Server
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a
user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The
receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination, or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated
by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the
sender-SMTP in response to the commands.
551
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.8.10.
211
220
221
250
251
354
421
450
451
452
500
501
502
503
504
550
551
552
553
554
NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES

System status, or system help reply
<domain> Service ready
<domain> Service closing transmission channel
Requested mail action okay# completed
User not local; will forward to <forward-path>
Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
<domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel
[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]
Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox busy]
Requested action aborted: local error in processing
Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
Syntax error# command unrecognized
[This may include errors such as command line too long]
Syntax error in parameters, or arguments
Command not implemented
Bad sequence of commands
Command parameter not implemented
Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]
User not local; please try <forward-path>
Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation
Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect]
Transaction failed
552
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.9.
9.9.1.
POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)

Introduction
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport
system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order
to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously
running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an
IP-style network for long amounts of time.
The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a
mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a
workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.
For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
9.9.2.
Basic Operation
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host
wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the
connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange
commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed, or aborted.
Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one, or more
arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable
ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords
are three, or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.
Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional
information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long,
including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.
Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after
sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF
pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet
(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination
octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.
Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line
response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than
CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately
follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing
".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.
A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has
been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.
In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the
server @acquires resources associated with the clients mail drop, and the session enters the
TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the
client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server
releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP
connection is then closed.
A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by
responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the
session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method
for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server
which is unwilling, or unable to process the command.
553
DP-8060/8045/8035
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes
duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto
logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should
close the TCP connection without removing any messages, or sending any response to the client.
9.9.3.
POP3 Command Summary
Minimal POP3 Commands:

USER name
PASS string
QUIT
valid in AUTHORIZATION state
STAT
LIST [msg]
RETR [msg]
DELE [msg]
NOOP
RSET
QUIT
valid in the TRANSACTION state
Optional POP3 Commands:

APOP name digest
valid in AUTHORIZATION state
TOP [msg]
UIDL [msg]
valid in the TRANSACTION state
POP3 Replies:
+OK
-ERR
Note:
With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any
command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this
reply.
From:
To:
Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log
554
DP-8060/8045/8035
POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

(ef1.labo.pcc.com)
TCP 3 way
handshake &
Opening Session
AUTHORIZATION
TRANSACTION
UPDATE
TCP 3 way
handshake &
Opening Session
POP 3 Server
(sv2.labo.pcc.com)

+OK POP Server ready
<1896.697170952@labo.pcc.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
STAT
+OK 2 126040
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

+OK POP Server ready
<1898.697170952@labo.pcc.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION
PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
TOP 1 1
+OK 69762 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 1
+OK 69752 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
TRANSACTION
DELE 1
+OK Message 1 has been deleted.
TOP 2 1
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 2
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 2
+OK Message 2 has been deleted.
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
UPDATE
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
555
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC

Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of
eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as
an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.
One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.
Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network
PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.
Command
Sample
Ping
Ping 192.168.1.30
Ipconfig /all
Tracert
Netstat
Net view
Nslookup
Purpose
Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.1.30)
Ipconfig /all
Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS
server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,
WINS etc)
For Windows 95/98/Me, please type winipcfg instead of
Ipconfig/all
Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.2.245)
Netstat Netstat -nr
Active connection list
Active route for your subnet.
All special assigned IP addresses are also shown
Net view
Checking for the current file sharing Host Name
Nslookup
Checking for the DNS server IP address.
This command is available for Windows NT only.
Note:
Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections, or wiring first.
556
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP, or POP)
START
Is the LAN connected

to an ISP
Yes
No
No
DHCP Client?
Is this a Dialup
connection ?
No
Is static IP address
available ?
Yes
Not supported
Yes
Is G3 Gateway
function being used ?
Yes
Is there a MX, and A Record

entry for your Panasonic
No
Device in the DNS table ?
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Is POP account
available ?
Is POP account
available ?
No
No
Is there a MX, and A Record

entry for your Panasonic
Device in the DNS table ?
No
Yes
Not supported
Yes
Set network parameters
for POP receiving
If not ready
Ask the Network
Administrator to setup
a new POP account.
Set network parameters

for SMTP receiving
If not ready
Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".
Set network parameters for

POP receiving, and set G3
Gateway parameters for
If not ready
Ask the Network
Administrator to setup a
new POP account.
Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".
Important Notice:
Customers wishing to operate a G3 Gateway function for the Panasonic models,
the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware of
how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask
the Security Policy Manager to allow relay of messages by changing
the configuration of the Massage Transfer Agent like the Sendmail.
Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.
557
Not supported
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature

DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself
dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP
address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and
executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the
addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a
host using BOOTP.
DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters
from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.
DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.
In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.
In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the
client explicitly relinquishes the address).
In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one, or more of these
mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.
"DHCP client"
A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network
address.
"DHCP server"
A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.
Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.
Message
Use
DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.
DHCPOFFER
Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration
parameters.
DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server
and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of
previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease
on a particular network address.
DHCPACK
Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network
address.
DHCPNAK
Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client
has moved to new subnet), or client's lease as expired
DHCPDECLINE
Client to server indicating network address and in use.
DHCPRELEASE
Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.
DHCPINFORM
Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has
externally configured network address.
Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use
558
DP-8060/8045/8035
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address.
Client
Server
(not selected)
Server
(selected)
Begins initialization
Determines
configuration
DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPDISCOVER
Determines
configuration
DHCPOFFER
DHCPOFFER
Collects replies
Selects configuration
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPREQUEST
Commits configuration
DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Graceful shutdown
Discards lease
DHCPRELEASE
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers

when allocating a new network address
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server
Client
Server
Begins initialization
Locates
configuration
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPACK
DHCPACK
Locates
configuration
Initialization complete
Subsequent
DHCPACKS ignored
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when
reusing a previously allocated network address
559
DP-8060/8045/8035
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must
be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.
Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE/
REBOOT
DHCPNAK/
Restart
-/Send DHCPREQUES
DHCPACK
(not accepted)/
Send DHCPDECLINE
-/Send DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPNAK, Lease expired/
Halt network
DHCPNAK/
Discard offer
SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/
Collect replies
REBOOTING
Select offer/
send DHCPREQUEST
REQUESTING
REBINDING
DHCPOFFER/
Discard
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
timers T1, T2
DHCPNAK/
Halt network
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
/timers T1,T2
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
/timers T1,T2
T2 expires/
Broadcast
DHCPREQUEST
BOUND
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
timers T1, T2
T1 expires/
Send DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
T1 expires/
Send
DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
RENEWING
The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its
network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server
that originally issued the clients network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and
attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which
the clients lease will expire.
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.
State-transition diagram for DHCP clients
More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
560
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature

The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet
Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents
(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality
such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.
(1) Delivery confirmation (required)
(2) Additional document features (optional)
In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper, or a screen) may be
separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery
agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two
different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.
Your Panasonic device supports MDN.
Delivery Status Notification (DSN)
A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed
delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support
DSNs. Panasonic Iternet FAX does not request DSN while sending.
fail
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
DSN
N returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurre
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)

A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after
successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without
display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
MDN
Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed properly.
The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to
keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message
transmissions.
561
DP-8060/8045/8035
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.
MDN request
MDN notify
Additional Document Capabilities

Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum
subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields, or values
supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any, or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles
defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF
profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.
MDN Response
Read Receipt
Capabilities
(1) MDN Request
Internet FAX
(3)
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
(2)
Internet FAX
Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging
(1) Request
If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message
Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.
Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using the following formula.
562
DP-8060/8045/8035
MDN Request Sample

Mime-Version: 1.0
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500
Message-Id: <200202060018.12345@core.mega.edu>
From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <fax@core.mega.edu>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@huge.com
Disposition-Notification-To: <fax@core.mega.edu>
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
(2) Recipient's MDN Response

Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the
Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response
after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as
convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with
address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.
MDN Response Sample

MESSAGE
HEADER
BODY
TEXT
Mime-Version: 1.0
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500
Message-Id: <20020206154203470001.BE948.fax@huge.com>
From: <fax@huge.com>
Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@core.mega.edu
In-Reply-To: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
References: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
**********
Read Receipt
**********
This message was opened by

fax@huge.com
dd Mmm yyyy 15:42
******************************************
ATTACHED
FILE
Final-Recipient: rfc822;fax@huge.com
Original-Message-ID: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched
Media-Accept-Features:
(& (type="image/tiff")
(color=Binary)
(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
(MRC-mode=0)
(ua-media=stationery)
(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])
(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )
(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )
563
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3) Processing Confirmation

The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected
several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.
To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.
564
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature

The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring
the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).
This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide
read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is
intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.
X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall
namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global
directory structure.
It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement
the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500, or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they
can use a web browser to peruse the global Web.
From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at
directory services.
565
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP)

- Extended Feature
The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called
APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires
that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. ChallengeResponse Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while
retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.
Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific
password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a
sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to
check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the
risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.
An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay
protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP
command provides this functionality.
A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For
example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3
server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:
<process-ID.clock@hostname>
where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system
clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is
running.
Client
Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)
Challenge Response
<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>
Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD
<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>PASSWD
Produces a 16 octet digest value of

c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
+OK POP3 server ready <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>

APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets)
Possible Responses:
+OK
-ERR permission denied
STAT
+OK 1
Continue to follow the POP3 procedure
APOP overview
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name''
parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter
is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and
server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the
secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter
itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.
566
DP-8060/8045/8035
When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct,
the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.
Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.
Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.
567
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth)

- Extended Feature
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the
Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service
extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server,
perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent
protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To
use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for
optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client
Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)
220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready
EHLO jgm.example.com
250-smtp.example.com
250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5
AUTH CRAM-MD5
334
PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA
ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
235 Authentication successful
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
SMTP AUTH overview
The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the
requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and
identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the
requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504
reply.
Challenge Response
334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
BASE64 decoded string
Produces a Challenge
<CByLEDBhSCgnhMZ+N23F6w@elwood.innosoft>
Genrates Digest parameter
Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message
USER
Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:
9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e
Fred
BASE64 encoded string
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are
specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a
334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line
568
DP-8060/8045/8035
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a
line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a
501 reply.
If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the
server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more
specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully
complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.
The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".
Error Codes
The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.
432: A password transition is needed
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected
Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication
mechanism.
538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only
be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.
454: Temporary authentication failure
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server
failure.
530: Authentication required
This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or
QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.
569
DP-8060/8045/8035
9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature

Direct Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as
SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server.
Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an
SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask
the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured
as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the
DNS Server.
For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled
in the General Settings (For Key Operator).
Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.
This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's
Intranet.
Several new service extensions were assigned.
(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"
(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender
Recipient
Establish TCP connection
220
EHLO
Checks for Capability
250 Response of CONNEG

MAIL FROM:<pcc@panasonic.com>
250
Request for Capability
TCP Port No. 25
RCPT TO:<june@panasonic.com> CONNEG

250 Capacity Exchange
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
Direct Internet Fax XMT Overview
570
Capability contents sample

250-<june@panasonic.com> recipient ok
250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
250- (MRC-mode=0)
250- (color=Binary)
250- (|(&(dpi=204)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )
250- (&(dpi=200)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
250- (&(dpi=400)
250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )
250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)
250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)
250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )
250- (size-x<=2150/254)
250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )
250 (ua-media=stationery) )
DP-8060/8045/8035
10 Schematic Diagram
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
*4: For DP-8060/8045
*1 : Factory Use Only
*2 : Depending on the spec. of each destination *5: For DP-8035 only
*6: Not Used
*3 : Japan spec. only
CN650
4
5
6
REGISTRATION
SENSOR 1
2
1
3
2
1
ORGSN
5VP
ORIGINAL
SENSOR
CN661
CN651
CN659
CN662
CN658
CN660
CN652
CN656
CT
7
8
9
PNL GND
10
G6
G5
9
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
14
16
16
17
17
18
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
+5VP
nLPOW2
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
3
4
3
4
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
7
8
22
23
7
8
9
10
23
24
24
10
11
12
13
14
15
+24V
+5VP
11
12
10
14
15
13
11
CN767
nLPOW2
nSLPKYE
nLPOW1
nFCBRST
PNLSCLK
PNLLDO
nPCIRING
15
2
1
nPNLRST
13
14
CN142
CN141
PNLSD
12
CNSCC
PNLRD
13
GND
12
GND
11
+5V
9
10
nADFSES
GND
8
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
14
15
13
14
15
3
4
5
CN224
14
CN223
SC
LCD
2
3
CN1
INV
*2
571
PNL2
ITG
GND
nGARST
GND
+3.3V
GND
+3.3V
GND
+3.3V
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
GND
+12V
GND
+12V
BLKCLP
OE
nSLSYNC
nSEN2
SDI
nSEN1
CLPIN
nTXOUT0
GND
pTXOUT0
nTXOUT1
GND
pTXOUT1
nTXOUT2
GND
pTXOUT2
nTXCLK
GND
pTXCLK
nMCLK
GND
pMCLK
NOUSE-1
GND
NOUSE-0
nSCLK
GND
pSCLK
pGACLK
GND
nGACLK
CN55
8
9
CCD
15
CN225
4
+5VD
11
3
4
10
DC
1
2
6
8
PHN
nLPOW1
10
1
2
24V
CN250
CN280
CN550
PNL3
CN231 *6
CN751
1
2
Y2
nLD2
pLD2
CNOM
nLD1
X1
pLD1
PMLOCK
3
PMCNT
4
PMCLK
5
GND
Y1
CNDCC
1
2
X2
PGND
GND
+3.3V
1
2
+24VM
1
2
6
7
4
5
LAZERB
CN230
LAZERA
CN145
CN222
10
CT
RR1SN
+5V
GND
PNL1
8
9
10
REGISTRATION
CLUTCH 2
REGISTRATION
CLUTCH 1
CN229
+5VP
+5VP
SH_B
+5VP
4
5
SH_A
+5VP
1
+5V
2
+5V
3
+5V
4
+5V
5
GND
6
GND
7
GND
8
GND
9
GND
10
4
5
6
1
2
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D11-8
HARDWARE
KEY I/F
CN69
D11-8
D11-8
CN68
CN67
CN65
SORT
MEM
CN64
FROM
CARD
CN63 *3
CN62
FRM
SLOT 2
FRM
SLOT 1
C
C
1
2
3
2
1
FAN1
INVERTING
SOLENOID
POWSW
5
EXFM1
3
EXFL1
1
PGND
KCTCNT
4
4
+5V
KCS
KCT
GND
3
1
FM
(Option)
FAN3 FAN2
3
4
Key
Counter
FM FM
1
RR2CLCNT
CT
2
24VO1
1
RR1CLCNT
CT
2
1
2
CN850
CNKCT24VM
PGND
PGND
EXFM2
EXFL3
EXFL2
EXFM3
8
7
GND
WEB TOTAL
SOLENOID COUNTER
PAPER PAPER
EXIT
EXIT
DOOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DUST OZONE
FAN
FAN
PS SUCTION
FAN
FAN
ELP
FM FM FM FM
DOOR
SENSOR
1
1
CT
1
2
3
11
CN757
CN765
EXDOSN2
11
GND
10
+5V
9
PFOSN1
12
+5V
14
13
24VM
24VM
ELPCNT
24VM
8
7
+5V
DOSN
WEBSOL
CT
9
GND
10
PWFM
12
SCFM
11
PWFL
10
SCFL
9
PGND
8
PGND
7
DDFM
6
OZFM2
5
DDFL
4
OZFL2
3
PGND
2
PGND
1
2
24VS
LMB
SCAN
MOTOR
CT
2
3
1
3
1 2 3
ADF
ANGLE
SENSOR
LMAB
LMBB
24VS
8
7
LPCNT
PGND
1
9
3
24VS
10
11
12
16
15
GND 14
GND 13
PCSN
17
2
ADF
OPEN
SENSOR
1 2 3
INVERTER
CNSPC
GND
pSPKOT
SPKR
TEL
CN21
1
2
!
CN22
CN20
LINE
G3 FAX
(Option)
+5V
6
7
AGND
nCTON
pCNLD
+24V
GND
nHKOF
1
2
+5Vp
L2
MJR
4
3
2
1
G5
CN759
!
EXP LAMP
CN25
CN22
CN393
CN768
CN758
D11
1
3
CN391
1
3
CN392
+5V
PASN
18
CN756
LMA
SW3
9 LAZREF 9
LAZENB
10
10
3
2
8
7
GND
GND
7
6
4
4
GND
+24V
F1a
80
79
FXB
RR3SN
+5V
CN390
PINCH
SOLENOID
17
CN142
CN750
RR2SN
+5V
GND
3
2
CT
1
REGISTRATION
SENSOR 3
CN228 *1
CN144
DXSLCNT2
D3
1
2
24VO1
GND
1
GND
2
CT
1
CN227 *3
CN4
CN2
DXSLCNT1
EXIT
SENSOR
DXSN
+5V
REGISTRATION
SENSOR 2
1
2
PPSOLCNT
16
LOW VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY 1
24VO1
CN220
+24V
+5V
HSYNC
CN141
CN3
LVS1
3
4
+24V
+3.3V
+24V
ACN
GND
GND
GND
+5VP
+5VL
GND
GND
1
2
to DRV
SYSTEM
CONSOLE
SENSOR
CN5
GND
2
CT
1
3
2
1
CT
INVERTING
CLUTCH 2
STAMP
(Included w/ G3 Fax
Option)
EXSN
+5V
CN221
CN103
9
8
GND
Power Cord
1
2
2
CT 3
3
D3
GND
GND
CNHTC
CN106
HEATL
ACSW
ZCIN
GND
CN226 *1
THI1
THERMISTOR
SSA3
ACL
INTERMEDIATE
SENSOR
10
SSA2
10
DOOR
OPEN
SENSOR
1
2
CT 3
12
11
SSA1
LPHT2 LPHT1
CT
D3
1
2
INVERTING
SENSOR
1
2
STSLCNT
15
THI2
5
1
CN726
+5V
GND
2
1
4 QDOSN
5 GND
GND
6
+5V
7
+5V
8
PCRSN
9
10 SPPSN
CNTH
THI
2
4
+5V
1
3
OPSN
ADF SENSORS
TIMING
SENSOR
GND
TMGSN
11 GND
GND
12
T5
1
2
CT 3
3
CT
24VO1
Vcnt
1
2
INVERTING
CLUTCH 1
2
1
DOOR
SENSOR
14
PFCLCNT
GND
3
2
1 CT
CN2
13
24VO1
1
2
CT
SLOW
DOWN CLUTCH
SB2CLCNT
D11
+5V
+5V
12
+5V
CT
24VO1
CN251
15
SB1CLCNT
3
4
CN290
14
PAPER
FEED
CLUTCH
11
SIZE4SN
CT
24VO1
10
GND
24VO1
+24V
HVLKD
14
13
3
2
CT
1
+5V
CN655
12
SIZE
SENSOR4
SIZE3SN
3
1
SDCLCNT
6
7
CN657
11
HVDDCCNT
13
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
10
HVLKT
HVDACCNT
12
CNHV
HVTCNT
10
HVPS
3
2
CT
1
CN653
CN704
CN710
CN721
SIZE
SENSOR3
MMBB
4
5
GND
MMB
24VO1
+5V
MMAB
1
2
3
5
SIZE2SN
ADF
MAIN
MOTOR
11
24VO1
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
4
GND
CN654
5
4
HVBACCNT
HVLKB
CN1
HVBDCCNT
CN66
80
79
SIZE1SN
+5V
3
2
CT
1
SIZE
SENSOR2
MMA
GND
3
2
CT
1
CN57
T3
HVBACCLK
CN80
5
4
3
GND
3
CT HPESN
2
+5V
1
HFSOL
L +24VM 2
LOW VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY 2
(Option, except N.A.)
LVS2
T2
GREFCNT
CN723
ACD
T1
CN725
+24V
ACN
24VD
+5V
3
2
CN65
1
F1b
1
HUMSN
2
1
1
2
HVLKC
11
12
13
ADF SIZE SENSORS

SIZE
SENSOR1
PGND
HVCNT
11
TENPSN
GND
2
2
CNLVC
ACL
CN64
CN102
F2a
3
4
+24VM
2
3
4
5
9
G6
MM
3
1
PMBB
8
7
10
GND
28
G5
TONER
DENSITY
SENSOR
PAPER
FEED
MOTOR
24VO1
CN51
G3
PGND
PGND
GND
1
2
GND
ORGSN
GND
27
1
2
3
+5VP
CN52
SHEET
BYPASS
SENSOR
SW2
CN718
G4
F2b
CN715
GND
ACLD
ACND
1
CN104
CN133
CN134
N E L
CN66 *1
+24VM
TDREF
TDSNIN
GOPSW1
+24VM
3
5
PM
PMB
24VO1
+5V
24
25
PMAB
12
13
14
11
9
24VO1
8
9
10
11
+5V
23
PMA
3
4
5
6
7
PGND
22
CN551
PGND
21
26
1
22
24VO1
20
LSU
12
CT
GND
+5V
DENSITY
SENSOR
CN552
BPSN
11
1
2
2
3
4
VCDS
CDSN1
21
LUM1
4
3
TEMP
HUMIDITY
SENSOR
TONER
BOTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
CDSN2
20
CN143
+5V
10
GND
24VO1
19
19
PFSIZSN2
18
D3 1
GND
TONER
DETECT
SENSOR
18
GND
16
GND
P18FX
17
PFSIZSN1
+5V
AFDIN
6
18
14
16
7 GND
8 PFSIZSN3
+5V
9
10
2
CT
1
13
AFCLK
AFLD
AFDIN
14
15
AFLD
12
AFENB
AFLTH
13
AFCLK
CN719
2
3
VTED
12
11
AFDOUT
12
AFLTH
TED
11
AFENB
15
GND
D11
2ND
TRAY
LIFT UP
MOTOR
TONER
BOTTLE
MOTOR
2
1
BMA
6
8
PGND
STRVP
+24VM
BM
BMAB
2A
2B
1B
BMB
3
2
CT
1
4
5
9
10
ARST
11
+24V
10
nSTRX
8
pSTRX
9
10 GND
nSTTX
11
pSTTX
12
IPRXD
2
GND
3
IPTXD
4
GND
7
+24VM
SIZE
SENSOR 3
DRHT
SIZE
SENSOR 2
3
2
CT
1
AFDOUT
+5VD
BMBB
CN105
CN59
SIZE
SENSOR 1
ADU SENSORS
AC DRIVER
N E L
PCI 62 *2
ACN
Thermo 1
HDD 40P
REGISTRATION
SENSOR
8
10
17
2
3
GND
1
2
CT 3
2ND PAPER TRAY

SENSORS
(Option)
FULP1
TONER
WASTE
CONTAINER
SENSOR
Thermo 2
15
+5V
16
3
2
CT 1
NFL
CN173
GND
TFBOXSN
TONER
WASTE
SENSOR
F Lamp1
+5V
3
2
CT
1
ACLRLB
FULP3
TONER WASTE COLLECT COIL
ACL
F Lamp3
HDD
(Option)
(Option)
CN172
CNGSW
GND
TFSN
GND
19
CN108
CN101
14
1
2
6
1
13
CT
1
2
18
RRSN
ADU
INTERMEDIATE
SENSOR
ADFRRSN1
10
ADFSN
ADXSN
8
9
ARST
2
3
14
1
2
1
2
CT 3
PAPER
SENSOR 3
ADXSN
ADFRRSN1
16
ARRCNT
ARRSN2
ARRSN2
15
17
1
CN720
24
ADU
REGISTRATION
SENSOR
CN709
13
PAPER
SENSOR 2
CN724
23
1
2
3
CT
1
PEWSSN1
2
GND
3 CT
+5V
1
PEWSSN2
2
GND
CT
3
+5V
1
PEWSSN3
2
GND
CT
3
CLUTCH
ADU
SENSOR
14
CN711
12
+5V
CN722
CN714
CN712
to ADF
CN753
1
24VO2
2
24VO2
CN716
6
7
PGND
PGND
11
REGIST- PAPER
L RATION SENSOR 1
BLACK
10
CT
ROLLER
CLUTCH
WHITE
TRBLSW1
GND
CNHT2
MAGCL
RLB
L MAGNETIC
ACNRLB
CNHT4
24VM
1
CT 2
SEPSOL
10
CT C
+24VM
PUSOL1
+5V
CRRSN1
7
LBSN1
8
GND
9
CT
GND
10
+5V
11
PESN1
+5V
12
CT GND 13
14
L CLUTCH
1
2
1
2
CT C
CT
1
2
3 CT
PFCL1
13
SHEET BYPASS
SOLENOID
CN171
1
2
22
LLUM
G1
CN132
CSS I/F *1
4
5
1
2
20
19
17
18
15
16
(Option)
INVERTING
JAM
SENSOR
3
2
1
SW1
CNSW1
SEPARATION
SOLENOID
24VM
21
FINISHER
CONNECTOR
(Option)
INLET
CT
2
1
Dehumidifier
Heater
(Option)
ACN
CT
SW4
INVERTING
SENSOR
CNSHD1
CN60
20
CN713
PGND
24VM
24VM
PGND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
GND
+24V
GND
P12CNT
PVCNT
SVCNT
RVEXSN
PFOSN1
DMCLK
LPCNT
12
13
14
6
7
8
9
10
11
INVERTING
2
CT 1 EXIT
SENSOR
12
HDD
1
2
3
PAPER
SENSOR
ADU
ADF
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
RVCLK
LMCLK
DFRST
DFDIN
MMCLK
3
CNA
11
CNHD1
16
17
SYSTEM CONSOLE CONNECTOR

(Option)
CNHT1
15
GND
16
PTL *4
D3
+24VM
ARRCNT
1
2
ARVCL2
PRGDWN
15
PAPER
EXIT
SENSOR 2
11
12
3
2
14
3
2
1
16
3
4
ARVCL2
AMMCLK
APMCLK
ARVCL1
14
G2
CNB
CT
18
17
15
19
13
PRST
13
PAPER TRAY
SOLENOID
SREQ
15
+5V
5
GND
8
GND
10
12V
13
12
GND
14
PFOSN2
15
RVEXSN
16
+5V
17
+5V
18
GND
19
GND
20
RVSN
21
22 RVJAMSN
CN143
SENTIM
12
16
18
GND
15
1
2
CT
1
1
PTL
2
11
+24VM
1
2
DXCL1
12
2
+24VM
1
3
RRCL
2
13
+5V
4
+5V
14
ADUINSN
5
ADURRSN
15
GND
6
GND
16
+5V
7
+5V
17
ADUCRRSN
8
CN708
OHTL
11
10
DUPRNT
11
PVSYNC
10
CN702
PCSSOL2
GND
SACK
4 +24V
3
GND
1
2
5
CN764
VREQ
1
2
BD_B
CN141
24VM
BD_A
13
PCSSOL1
CNDCC
12
RVSSOL2
DUACK
CN142
ATT
8
7
PACK
CN53
VRDY
14
+5V
LPEWSN3
CN707
ACL
11
INVERTING
SOLENOID
10
21
22
CN131
20
1
2
24VM
PRDY
27
11
12
13
1
10
GND
9
+5V
8
7
OQFDIN
6
LCCFDIN
5
OQFLD
4
OQFCLK
3
OQFLTH
2
OQFENB
1
OQFDOUT
19
DRV
CN727 (IPC)
5
6 CT
RVMBB
RVSSOL1
GND
CT
ADU
L
S
CLUTCH
+24VM 1
L INTERMEDIATE PAPER
PCCL
CT
C
CLUTCH PATH
2
+24VM
SENSOR
1
L SHEET
CT
HFCL
C
BYPASS
2
UPPER
CLUTCH
LIMIT
SENSOR
D3
ZH
+24VM
DXCL2
LPEWSN2
1
2
3
+24VM
10
GND
CT
+5V
1
2
3
PAPER
SENSOR 2
4
6
LPEWSN1
CT
OQMCLK
RM
18
23 +5V
+5V
24
GND
CT
1
2
PAPER
SENSOR 3
8
7
5
6
17
SPCTXD
CT
3
5
+24VM
16
CNDCC
SPCRXD
1
2
3
CT
15
RVMB
24VM
10
28P
CNHT5
GND
PAPER
SENSOR
+24VM
4 LPUSOL
+5V
5
+5V
6
7 LCRRSN
LLBSN
8
GND
9
GNG
10
+5V
11
LPESN
12
GND
13
14 +5V
1ST PAPER TRAY SENSORS
+5VD
23
25
GND
21
GND
1
2
3
GND
INVERTING
MOTOR
14
RVMAB
GND
UPPER
LIMIT
SENSOR
LPFCL
10
20
1
2
3
4
24VM
8
7
13
19
IICSCL
RVMA
12
13
15
IICSDA
CN703
1
2
3
1ST TRAY LIFT UP MOTOR
5
7
9
11
17
10
ORGSN
(DP-8060 Only)
OHTN
DMLD
CLEANER
POSITON
SENSOR 2
DMBRAKE
2
1
6
7
8
D3 2
PAPER
SENSOR 1
10
CNHT3
DMCLK
+5V
+5V
5VP
+24VM
PAPER FEED PAPER FEED

CLUTCH
SOLENOID
CNN
DMPS
CT
D11
PGND
PGND
CN754
CNHT6
+5V
22
26
1
GND
DM
18
20
24
7
6
16
3
2
1
24VO1
CLEANER
POSITON
SENSOR 1
12
14
PGND
PGND
24VO1
1
2
3
4
SWN2
8
10
24VM
9
8
+5V
24VM
10
+5V
3
2
CT
CHPSN2
CNMM2
GND
CHPSN1
DP-8060/8045/8035
GND
CORONA WIRE
CLEANER MOTOR
1
GND
AMMCLK
APMCLK
ARVCL1
Drawing Name
General Circuit
Diagram
CNDM1
OPC
DRUM
MOTOR
1
2
CLMM2
9
11
Model
MMLD
4
6
11
CN58
nAUTFD
6
nERROR
7
pSELECT
8
nINIT
9
pERROR
10
GND
11
pBUSY
12
nACK
13
GND
1
GND
2
PD8
3
PD7
4
PD6
5
PD5
6
PD4
7
PD3
8
PD2
9
PD1
10
GND
11
nSTROB
12
GND
13
GND
14
MMFR
2
4
CN54
CN211
GND
nSELIN
L1
CN211
MMCLK
28
THE PARTS WITH A

MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES
IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY
WHEN SERVICING IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY
MANUFACTURE'S SPECIFIED PARTS BE USED FOR
THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS WITH
A
MARK OF THE SCHEMATIC.
CN210
36
+5V
PH
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
PRINTER
+5V
Centronics I/F
PR CON
MMPS
3
4
D3
CLMM1
CN61
MM
8P
LAN I/F
GND
+5V
1
2
PGND
PGND
*5
1
OHTL
9
8
For LCT or APF
10
24VM
24VM
10
MAIN
DRIVE
MOTOR
SWN1
1
2
SWL2
6
10
+5V
1
2
OHTN
PGND
SWL1
7
9
*4
24VM
CNL
CN752
CN760
CN762
2
5
HSSN1
GND
CN761
GND
CN763
+5V
HSSN3
GND
14
CN766
GND
CT
13
GND
HPSN
CT
CN755 *3
1
2
3
12
1
CT 2
PAPER
PATH
SENSOR
1A
+5V
1
2
3
PAPER FEED
C
CLUTCH
PAPER FEED
S
SOLENOID
11
SHEET
BYPASS
SENSOR 1
10
GND
HSSN2
CT
1
2
3
2
3
+5V
SHEET
BYPASS
SENSOR 2
GND
DFLD
ORSIZ4
D11
CNMM1
1
2
3
+5V
ORSIZ5
CN701
7P
CN717
1
2
CT
3
DFDOUT
GND
+5V
2
3
CN729 (TEST) *1
1
2
3
4
ORIGINAL
SIZE
SENSOR 2
ORIGINAL
SIZE
SENSOR 3
CN706
DFCLK
+5V
8P
CNADF
GND
7
8
SPC
CN728 (TEST) *1
DFLTH
4
5
DFENB
ORSIZ3
SCANNER
HOME
POSITON
SENSOR
SHEET
BYPASS
SENSOR 3
ORSIZ2
CN705
ORIGINAL
SIZE
SENSOR 1
ORSIZ1
1
2
Touch
Panel
DP-8060/8045/8035
memo
572
DP-8060/8045/8035
11 Finisher Options
11.1. DA-FS605, DA-FS600, DA-SP31
11.1.1.
Introduction
11.1.1.1. Features
1. Large Tray Capacity.
Normally, the Finisher holds a stack of sheets 5.78" (147 mm) in height in its two bins (small-size
paper: equivalent to 1000 sheets) / 2.91" (74 mm) in height (large-size paper: equivalent to 500 sheets)
2. Handles Wide Variety of Paper Thickness.
The Finisher is capable of handling papers between 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2).
3. Job Offset Function.
The Finisher has a job offset function for sorting non-stapled stacks of copies.
4. Four Types of Auto Stapling.
The Finisher offers a choice of four stapling modes (1-point stapling at rear, diagonal stapling in front,
diagonal stapling at rear, and 2-point stapling).
5. Buffer Roller.
The use of a buffer roller enables the finisher to accept copies without interruption from the Copier
even during stapling or offset operation.
6. Saddle Stitch Function.
The Finisher can staple along the center of paper, and fold it in two (up to 15 sheets).
7. Punch Function (Option).
The Punch Unit enables the Finisher to punch the binder sheets before they are ejected. (The Punch
Unit is capable of handling plain papers between 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2). The Punch Unit cannot
handle special papers, postcards, transparencies, etc.)
573
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.2. DA-605, DA-FS600, and DA-SP31 Specifications

1. Finisher Unit
Item
Description
Stacking Method Trays 1 and 2: by lifting tray
Stacking
Face-down
Orientation
Face-up
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R
Stacking Size
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R, FLS
Paper Weight
17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2)
Bins
Trays 1 and 2
Modes
Non-Sort
: Trays 1 and 2
Sort
: Trays 1 and 2
Staple
: Trays 1 and 2
Stacking
Non staple sort
Small-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: Up to 57.8 in (147 mm) high; 1000
Capacity
sheets*2
Large-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: Up to 2.91 in (74 mm) high; 500
sheets
1
Staple sort
Tray 1 and 2: Up to 4.33 in (110 mm) high/30 sets;
Small-size*
750 sheets*2
Large-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: Up to 2.91 in (74 mm) high/30 sets;
500 sheets
Size Mixing
Size mixing : Up to 1.73 in (44 mm); 300 sheets
Stapling
: Up to 0.86 in (22 mm); 150 sheets/30 sets
Stacking Mixing Face-down / Face-up
Notes:
*1: Sizes are approximate when using blank 21 lb (80 g/m2) paper.
*2: Misalignment may occur if more than 750 of small-size sheets are stacked.
*3: The accuracy of the stack height is 7 mm.
Item
Stapling
Stapling Position
Stapling
Capacity
Description
By rotating cam
See Fig. 1-001.
Small-size
50 sheets
21 lb (80 g/m2) paper including two sheets of thick
stock (covers).
Large-size
30 sheets
Staple Supply
Special staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Replacement
FQ-SS66 : For DA-FS605 (Saddle Stitch)
Staples
FQ-SS50 : For DA-FS600 / 605
Staple Detection Provided
Manual Stapling Not available
Stapling Size
1-point diagonal
Front
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R
stapling
Rear
A3, B4, A4, LDR, LTR, B5
1-point
Rear
A4-R, LTR-R, LGL
2-point
A3, B4, A4, LDR, LTR, B5
Paper Detection Provided
Control Panel
Not available
Display
Not available
574
DP-8060/8045/8035
Item
Dimensions
Description
26.3 (29.3) x 26 x 41.3 in; (669 (744.5) x 661 x 1050 mm)
(W (with Punch Unit attached) x D x H; including saddle stitch unit)
Weight
2 Bin Finisher
: 76 lb / 34.5 kg
2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher: 115.7 lb / 52.5 kg
Punch Unit (option)
: 11.7 lb / 5.3 kg
Power Supply
Supplied by the copier machine (24 VDC)
Maximum Power 170 W or less
Consumption
Reference:
The term small-size stands for A4, A5-R, B5, LTR, INV-R, while the term large-size stands for A3,
B4, A4-R, LTR-R, LDR, LGL, FLS, B5-R.
Stapling Position (Finisher Unit)
1- Point Diagonal Stapling; Front)
1- Point Diagonal Stapling; Rear)
4.42 mm
Specified Paper
width -62 mm
52 mm
30
30
4.42 mm
Specified Paper
width -6 2 mm
B4 and B5
LDR and LTR
82.74 mm
202.74 mm
52mm
52mm
A3 and A4
52mm
2- Point Stapling
62.74 mm
182.74 mm
Fig. 1-001
575
73.74 mm
193.74 mm
4.42 mm
1- Point Stapling (Rear)
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Saddle Stitch Unit

Item
Description
Stacking Method Center binding (double folding)
Folding Position See Fig. 1-002
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4-R, LDR, LTR-R
W/binding: 1 sheet (including single cover page)
Capacity
W/out binding: 2 to 15 sheets
Copy Weight
17 - 21 in (64 - 80 g/m2) (cover page up to 35.5 in (133 g/m2))*1
Stacking
10 sets (stack of 11 to 15 sheets)
Capacity
15 sets (stack of 6 to 10 sheets)
25 sets (stack of 5 sheets or less)
Stapling position
2 points (Center distribution; fixed interval)
Staple
2000 staples
accommodation
Staple supply
Special cartridge
Stapling
Staples
Special staples (FQ-SS50)
Staple detection
Provided
Manual stapling
Not available
Folding method
Roller contact
Folding mode
Double folding
Folding
Folding position
Paper center
Position
Provided
adjustment
Power Supply
Supplied by the finisher unit (24V line x 2)
160 W or less
Power
Consumption
Note:
*1:Special paper, transparencies, masters, label paper, and hole-punched paper cannot be handled.
576
DP-8060/8045/8035
Staple and Folding Position (Saddle Finisher Unit)

A3
B4
A4-R
Center of
Staple
148.51.0 mm
Center of
Staple
1821.0 mm
2101.0 mm
Staple Position
88.52.0 mm
68.52.0 mm
208.52.0 mm
188.52.0 mm
Stack Front Edge
LTR-R
2161.0 mm
139.71.0 mm
LDR
79.72.0 mm
199.72.0 mm
482.0 mm
1682.0 mm
Fig. 1-002
577
452.0 mm
1652.0 mm
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Punch Unit (Optional)

Item
Punching
Method
Description
Sequential punching
A3, A4, B4, A4-R, B5, B5-R
2 holes/LGL, LTR-R
3 holes/LTR, LDR
A3, A4
2 holes:
2 or 3 holes:
Paper Size
4 holes:
Paper Weight
Punched Hole
Diameter
64 to 133 g/m2 *1
2 holes:
2 or 3 holes:
4 holes:
2 holes:
Punch Trash
Capacity
Power Supply
Power
Consumption
6.5 mm
2 holes / 8.0 mm
3 holes / 8.0 mm
6.5 mm
10,000 sheets or more (21 in (80 g/m2) or equivalent)

2 holes / 3,000 sheets or more
2 or 3 holes:
3 holes / 3,000 sheets or more
4 holes:
5,000 sheets or more
Supplied by the Finisher Unit (24 VDC, 5 VDC)
120 W or less
Note:
*1:Transparencies, masters, label paper, postcards, and hole-punched paper cannot be handled.
Hole Position (Punch Unit)
801 mm
x1
123 mm
701 mm
2 holes
A3 / A4
B5 / B4
A4-R
B5-R
108.5 3 mm
88.5 3 mm
65 3 mm
51 3 mm
2 or 3 holes
x1
LGL / LTR-R
73 3 mm
x1
123 mm
x1
LDR / LTR
1081 mm
1081 mm
31.5 3 mm
x1
123 mm
4 holes
x1
A3 / A4
801 mm 801 mm 801 mm x 1

123 mm
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

578
28.5 3 mm
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.2.1. Cross Section

1. Finisher Unit
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
[17] [16]
[8] [9] [10]
[15]
[14] [13]
[1] Tray 1 / 2
[2] Shutter
[3] Delivery Roller
[4] Swing Guide
[5] Feed Roller 2
[6] Height Sensor
[7] Wrap Flapper
[8] Buffer Roller
[9] Buffer Inlet Flapper
[11]
[10] Saddle Stitch Flapper
[11] Inlet Feed Roller
[12] Feed Roller 1
[13] Vertical Path
[14] Stapler
[15] Knurled Belt
[16] Tray Lift Motor
[17] Saddle Stitch Unit

Fig. 1-003
579
[12]
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Saddle Stitch Unit
[6]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[9]
[4]
[10]
[3]
[11]
[2]
[12]
[1]
[1] Guide Plate
[2] Paper Folding Roller
[3] Delivery Guide Plate
[4] Holding Roller
[5] Stitcher (Front, Rear)
[6] Inlet Roller
[7] No. 1 Flapper
[8] No. 2 Flapper
[9] Stitcher Mount

[11] Crescent Roller
[10] Butting Plate

[12] Paper Positioning Plate
Fig. 1-004
580
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Punch Unit (Optional)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1] Punch Motor
[2] Cam
[3] Hole Puncher (Punch Blade)
[4] Die
[5] Photosensor PCB
[6] LED PCB
[7] Horizontal Registration Motor
[8] Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit
[9] Punch Trash Container

Fig. 1-005
581
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.3. Using the Machine

11.1.1.3.1. Removing Paper Jams from the Finisher Unit
If the Copier's message indicates a paper jam in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to remove the jam.
(1) Holding the Finisher Unit as shown, detach it
from the Copier.
Fig. 1-006
(2) Remove any jam visible from the outside.
Fig. 1-007
(3) Open the Upper Cover, and check inside of the
Finisher.
Fig. 1-008
582
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Lift the Buffer Roller Cover, and remove the

jam.
Fig. 1-009
(5) Lift the Buffer Roller, and remove the jam.
Fig. 1-010
(6) Return the Buffer Roller, and the Buffer Roller
Cover to their original positions, and close the
Upper Cover.
Fig. 1-011
(7) Attach the Finisher to the Copier Machine.
(8) Operate as instructed on the Display.
Fig. 1-012
583
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.3.2. Replenishing the Finisher Unit with Staples

If the Copier's message indicates that the staples ran out in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to
replenish it with staples.
Fig. 1-013
(2) Turn the Green Lever downward.
Fig. 1-014
(3) Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of
the arrow, as illustrated.
Fig. 1-015
(4) Slide the empty Staple Case out.
Fig. 1-016
584
DP-8060/8045/8035
(5) Insert a new Staple Case (FQ-SS66).

Reference:
You may set no more than one Staple
Cartridge at a time. Make sure that the new
Cartridge is one specifically designed for the
Finisher Unit.
Note:
Do not remove the Tape used to hold the
Staples in place prior to installing the Staple
Cartridge.
Fig. 1-017
(6) Pull the length of Tape (used to hold the Staples
in place) straight out.
Fig. 1-018
(7) Insert the Stapler Unit until it stops, and turn the
Green Lever to the right to lock.
Fig. 1-019
(8) Close the Front Cover.
Fig. 1-020
585
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.3.3. Removing Staple Jams from the Finisher Unit

If the Copier's message indicates a staple jam in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to remove the jam.
(1) Remove the Stack waiting to be stapled from the
Delivery Tray.
Fig. 1-021
Fig. 1-022
(3) Turn the Green Lever downward.
Fig. 1-023
(4) Pull the Staple Cartridge out in the direction of

the arrow as illustrated.
Fig. 1-024
586
DP-8060/8045/8035
(5) Push down Staple Cartridge Tab.
Fig. 1-025
(6) Remove all Slid Staple.
Fig. 1-026
(7) Push the Staple Cartridge Tab up until it stops.

(8) Turn the Green Lever to the right to lock. Close
the Front Cover.
Note:
After a Staple Cartridge has been reinstalled, the
first few sets may not staple. This is due to the
Staples pre-feeding to the stapling position.
Fig. 1-027
587
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.3.4. Removing Paper Jams from the Saddle Stitch Unit

If the Copier's message indicates a paper jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit, perform the following to remove the
jam.
(1) Holding the Finisher Unit as shown, detach it
from the Copier.
Fig. 1-028
Fig. 1-029
(3) Turn the right Green Knob.
Fig. 1-030
(4) Turn the left Green Knob while pushing it in.
Fig. 1-031
588
DP-8060/8045/8035
(5) Open the Saddle Exit Cover.

(6) Remove jammed paper.
(7) Close the Saddle Exit Cover.
Fig. 1-032
(8) Open the Inlet Cover, and remove the jam.
Fig. 1-033
(9) Close the Front Lower Cover.
(10) Attach the Finisher Unit.
Fig. 1-034
589
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.3.5. Replenishing the Saddle Stitch Unit with Staples

If the Copier's message indicates the Saddle Stitch Unit ran out of staples, perform the following to
replenish it with staples.
Fig. 1-035
(2) Slide the Saddle Stitch Unit out.
Fig. 1-036
(3) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you
swing it upward.
Fig. 1-037
590
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Hold the empty Cartridge by its sides, and

remove it.
Fig. 1-038
(5) Insert the new Cartridge (FQ-SS50).
Note:
You must always replace both Cartridges at the
same time.
Fig. 1-039
swing it downward, to return it to its original
position.
Fig. 1-040
(7) Push the Stitcher Unit in, and close the Front
Cover.
Fig. 1-041
591
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.3.6. Removing Staple Jams from the Saddle Stitch

If the Copier's message indicates a staple jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit, perform the following to remove the
jam.
Fig. 1-042
(2) Slide the Saddle Stitch Unit out.
Fig. 1-043
swing it upward.
Fig. 1-044
592
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Hold the Cartridge by its sides, and remove it.
Fig. 1-045
(5) Push down on the area identified as (A), and pull
up the Tab identified as (B).
(B)
(A)
Fig. 1-046
(6) Remove the jammed staple, and return the Tab
(B) to its original position.
(B)
Fig. 1-047
(7) Reinstall the Cartridge to its original position.
Fig. 1-048
593
DP-8060/8045/8035

swing it downward, to return it to its original
position.
Fig. 1-049
(9) Push the Saddle Stitch Unit back to its original
position, and close the Front Lower Cover.
Note:
Whenever removing a jammed Staple, be
sure to execute staple edging.
Fig. 1-050
594
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.3.7. Removing Paper Jams from the Punch Unit (Optional)

If the display indicates a paper jam in the Punch Unit, perform the following to remove the jam.
(1) Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-051
(2) Align the triangle mark on the knob within the
range marked by
Fig. 1-052
(3) Close the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-053
595
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Open the Top Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-054
(5) Remove the jam.
Fig. 1-055
(6) Close the Top Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-056
596
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.1.3.8. Emptying Punch Hole Scrap from the Punch Trash Box (Optional)
If the display indicates to empty the Punch Trash Box, perform the following to empty the punch scrap:
(1) Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-057
(2) Pull the Punch Trash Box out.
Fig. 1-058
(3) Discard the Punch Scrap.
Fig. 1-059
597
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Return the Punch Trash Box to its original

position.
Fig. 1-060
11.1.1.4. Maintenance by the User

No.
Item
1 Replace the Staple Cartridge (Finisher Unit)
2 Replace the Staple Cartridge (Saddle Stitch Unit)
Timing
When the appropriate
indication is made on the
copier's display.
Caution:
The Finisher Unit, and the Saddle Stitch Unit use different cartridge types. Be sure that the appropriate
type is used for each.
Table. 1-004
598
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.
Finisher Unit Operation
11.1.2.1. Basic Operation

This chapter discusses the purpose, and role of each of the Finisher's functions, and the principles of
operation used for the Finisher mechanical, and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which
these systems are operated.
The
symbol in the drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by
together with the signal name indicates the flow of electrical signals.
In descriptions of digital circuits of the Finisher, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0" indicates a
low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to the circuit.
A microprocessor is used in the Finisher to control all the finishing functions.
Descriptions in this chapter also assume that PCBs will not be repaired at user sites. For this reason,
descriptions of circuits on PCBs is limited to block diagrams. Two types of block diagrams are provided for
separate functions: diagrams indicating details from sensors up to input sections of major PCBs, and
diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up to the components.
599
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.1.1. Outline
The Finisher is designed to deliver copies arriving from its Copier, and its modes of delivery include simple
stacking, job offset*1, and staple.
All operations involved in these modes are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB, according to the
appropriate commands from the Copier.
Copies from the Copier may be routed to the Saddle Stitch Unit.
Swing guide drive system
Control system
Alignment drive system

Stapler drive system
Delivery drive system
Feeder drive system
Shutter drive system
Tray drive system
Saddle stitch unit control system
Fig. 2-001
Notes:
*1:The term job offset refers to shifting each sorting job, separating a single stack into several stacks.
600
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.1.2. Outline of Electrical Circuitry

The Finisher's sequence of operation is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller
PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is used for communication with the Copier (serial) in addition to
controlling the finisher's sequence of operations.
The Finisher Controller PCB responds to the various commands coming from the Copier through a serial
communications line to drive solenoids, motors, and other components. In addition, it communicates the
Finisher's various states (information on sensors and switches) to the Copier through a serial
communications circuit.
The Finisher Controller PCB not only communicates with the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB, but it also
communicates the Saddle Stitch Unit's various states (information on sensors, and switches) to the Copier.
The ICS used on the Finisher Controller PCB are designed for the following:
Q1 (CPU)
Controls sequence of operations.
Q2 (EP-ROM)
Backs up adjustment values.
Q7
Contains sequence programs.
Q8 / Q89 (RAM)
Backs up initial setting data.
Q4 (communications IC)
Communicates with the copier, and the saddle stitch unit.
Q14 (regulator IC)
Generates 5V.
Flow of signals between the finisher and the options controller:
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Punch Driver PCB

(Punch Unit
(optional))
Copier
(DC Controller PCB
PCU)
Finisher Controller
PCB communication
Motor
Q1
CPU
Solenoid
Q2
EEP-ROM
Switch
Q4
IC
Sensor
Q7
EP-ROM
Q8/Q89
RAM
Q14
Regulator IC
Fig. 2-002
601
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB
-3
-2
-1
Stapling
Tray
Sensor
PI4
J122-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Shutter
Open
Sensor
PI5
J118-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Alignment
Plate Home
Position
Sensor
PI6
J121-3
-1
-2
-4
-6
-5
Stapler
Shift Home
Sensor
PI7
J129-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Tray Home
Position
Sensor
PI8
J130-3
-1
-2
J202
J134-1
-2
-3
J17-7 +5V
-9 PENT
-8
When the sensor

detects paper, 1.
J208
PI3
Delivery
Sensor
-3
-1
-2
-5
-6
-7
J11-3 +5V
-2 PDEL
-1
When the sensor

detects paper, 1.
J207A
-7
-9
-8
-11
-9
-10
J9A-1 +5V
-3 STPTY
-2
When the sensor

detects paper, 1.
J205
J106-3
-1
-2
-3
-1
-2
J12B-4 +5V
-6 STOPN
-5
J207A
PI1
Inlet
Sensor
-8
-6
-7
J9A-4 +5V
-6 JOGHP
-5
J210
Finisher Controller PCB
-3
-1
-2
J12A-7 +5V
-9 STPHP
-8
When the stapler is

at the home position,
1.
J12A-4 +5V
-6 TRYHP
-5
When the tray is at

the home position,
1.
Fig. 2-003
602
When the shutter

opens, 1.
When the alignment

plate is at the home
position, 1.
DP-8060/8045/8035

Delivery
Motor
Clock
PI10
J120-1
-2
-3
Tray 1
Paper
Sensor
PI11
J101-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Tray 2
Paper
Sensor
PI12
J102-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Buffer
Path
Paper
Sensor
PI14
While the delivery

motor is rotating,
oscillates between
0 and 1.
+5V
DELCLK
-6
-4
-5
J14-1
-3
-2
+5V
FSTTRAY*
When paper is
present on tray 1,
0.
-3
-1
-2
J14-4
-6
-5
+5V
SNDTRAY*
When paper is
present on tray 2,
0.
J110-3
-1
-2
J24-4
-6
-5
+5V
BUFPASS
When paper is in
the buffer path, 1.
PI15
J117-3
-1
-2
J12A-1
-3
-2
+5V
JOINT
When the finisher is

joined with the
copier, 1.
Door
Open
Sensor
PI16
J113-3
-1
-2
J12B-1
-3
-2
+5V
DROPN
When the front door

is open, 0.
Buffer
Path Inlet
Paper
Sensor
PI17
J105-3
-1
-2
J24-1
-3
-2
+5V
BUFENTR
When paper is
present at the buffer
path inlet, 1.
PI18
J127-3
-1
-2
J11-8
-10
-9
+5V
SWGOPN
When the swing

guide is open, 1.
Swing
Guide
Open Sensor
J1010
-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
J1020
-3
-1
-2
-4
-6
-5
-1
-3
-2
J204
Joint
Sensor
J207A
J9A-9
-8
-7
J201
-3
-4
-5
J201
-9
-8
-7
-3
-1
-2
Tray Lift
Motor
Clock
Sensor 1
PI19
J400-3
-1
-2
J14-10
-12
-11
+5V
SPTCLK1
Tray Lift
Motor
Clock
Sensor 2
PI9
J400-6
-4
-5
J14-7
-9
-8
+5V
SFTCLK2
Sensor PCB
Fig. 2-004
603
When the tray lift

motor is rotating,
oscillates between
1 and 0.
When the tray lift
motor is rotating,
oscillates between
1 and 0.
DP-8060/8045/8035
PS1
Height
Sensor
J125-1
-2
-3
J114-3
-4
-2
-1
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-3
-4
J212
PI20
Swing
Motor Clock
Sensor
J207B

J9B-5 +5V
-4 SWGCLK
-3
-7
-8
-9
-3
-4
-2
-1
J6-2
+5V
-1
V0
-3
Vin
-4
-1
J5-1
-2
-3
When the swing motor is

rotating, oscillates
between 0 and 1.
Measures the distance

between the sensor, and
the top of the stack on the
tray.
Door Switch
+24V
J112
N.O.
MS1
+24VMOVE
DRSW
Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch 1

J209
N.O.
MS2
-1
J5-9
-2
-10
-3
J5-11
-4
-12
When the
front door,
and the upper
cover are
closed, 1.
Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch 2

J209
N.O.
MS6
+24VSTPL
SWGGCLD
When the
swing guide is
closed, 1.
Safety Zone Switch

C.
N.O.
N.C.
MS3
J5-4
-5
-6
+24VHIFT
-3
-2
-1
J7-3
-2
-1
SHUTCLD
-1
J5-7
-2
-8
J131-3
-2
-1
TRAYSAF
When the tray

is at the
delivery, 1.
N.C.
N.O.
C.
MS4
J140-1
-2
-3
J206
Shutter Closed Detect Switch
Tray Upper Limit Detect Switch

MS5
JI32
N.C.
Fig. 2-005
604
+24VSHIFT
TRYLMT
When the
shutter is
closed, 1.
When the tray

is at the upper
limit, 0.
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

Stapler Unit
PI22
+5V
J8-8
Staple Home
Position Sensor
STPDRHP*
When a stapler is at the

home position, 0.
+5V
Staple Switch
MS8
J8-10
+5V
J8-11
HOOKEMP*
+5V
When staple are

present in the cartridge,
1.
J8-12
J8-7
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
J131-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
J400-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
J3-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
J132-1
J500-1
J19-1
-2
-2
-2
STPCON*
When the stapler is

connected, 0.
Communication line
+24V
+24V
J2-2
-3
-4
-5
-7
Copier
Communication line
+24V
J1-1
-2
Fig. 2-006
605
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

Flapper Solenoid
+24V
SL1
-2
J107
-1
-2
J12A-10
-1
-11
-3
J12B-9
-2
-10
-2
J24-7
-1
-8
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
FLPSL*
Buffer Inlet Solenoid

SL2
-2
J108
-1
+24V
ENTSL*
Buffer Outlet Solenoid

SL3
-2
J109
-1
+24V
EXITSL*
Paddle Solenoid
-2
-1
-1
-2
-3
-10
-2
-11
J207B
J128
-2
-11
J9B-1
-10
-2
PDLSL*
Escape Solenoid
J207A
J123
-2
-2
J9A-10
-1
-11
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
ESCPSL*
Belt Escape Solenoid

-2
J500
-1
SL7
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
+24V
-1
SL6
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
+24V
-1
SL5
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
+24V
-2
J12B-7
-1
-8
BESCPSL*
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
+24V
First Feed Motor
J10-1
-2
-3
B*
-4
A*
-5
B
-6
A
M1
Fig. 2-007
606
According to rotation
direction/speed,
changes between +
and - in sequence.
DP-8060/8045/8035
6. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

J119-2
-2
-4
-1
-1
-5
M2
J208
Delivery Motor
-4
J11-4
-3
-5
direction/speed, changes
between + and -.
+24V
Alignment Motor
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
J9B-6
-7
B*
-8
A*
-9
B
-10
A
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
J207B
M3
J124
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
+24V
Stapler Shift Motor
M4
between + and - in
sequence.
J306
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
J304-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J302-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J307
1 1
2 2
3 3
J305-1
-2
-3
J302-6
-5
-4
J301-14
-15
-16
-17
-18
J8-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
between + and - in
sequence.
B*
A*
B
A
Staple Motor
M6
J301-6
J8-13
-5
-14
-4
-15
between + and -.
between + and -.
Tray Lift Motor

J115-2
-2
J7-4
-3
-1
-5
J501-1
-1
-7
-2
-2
-6
M5
M7
J208
Swing Motor
-1
J11-7
-2
-6
between + and -.
+24V
Second Feed Motor
J16-1
-2
-3 B*
-4 A*
M8
between + and - .
-5 B
-6 A
+24V
M9
J502-1
-1
-6
-4
J17-6
-2
-2
-5
-5
-5
-3
-3
-4
-6
-4
-4
-4
-3
-7
-3
-5
-5
-2
-8
-2
-6
-6
-1
-9
-1
J202
Inlet Feed Motor
Fig. 2-008
607
A
B
A
B
between + and - in
sequence.
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2. Feed / Drive System

11.1.2.2.1. Outline
The Finisher is designed to operate according to the commands from its Copier, to deliver arriving copies to
trays in the appropriate mode: simple stacking, job offset, stapling.
See Fig. 2-009 for a diagram of the 4 delivery modes.
Method of delivery
Normal delivery
Simple stacking
Job offset
Staple
Front diagonal
Rear 1-point
Rear diagonal
2-point
Saddle stitch delivery
Fig. 2-009
Normal Delivery Tray
Normal Delivery Tray
To Saddle Stitch Unit
Fig.2-010
608
DP-8060/8045/8035
1. Normal Delivery
a. Simple Stacking
The Finisher delivers copies directly to the Tray.
Tray
A
B
C
Tray
A
B
C
Copies
Copies
Feed Roller 1
Feed Roller 2
Delivery Roller
Fig. 2-011
b. Job Offset
The Finisher forwards all copies of each sort job to the Stapling Tray. The first sort job on the
Stapling Tray is delivered with a shift to the front of about 30 mm, and the second sort job is
delivered without being shifted. Whether the first copy, or the last copy of a sort job should be shifted
is determined by the Copier.
Tray
Each sort job is
stacked alternately.
Fig. 2-012
Swing Guide
Stapling Tray
Stopper
Delivery Roller Feed Roller 1
Fig. 2-013
Results of Delivering 4 Sets
Copies handled
by job offset
Direction of delivery
Fig. 2-014
609
DP-8060/8045/8035
c. Stapling
The Finisher stacks copies on the Stapling Tray, then it staples and delivers the copies to the
appropriate tray.
Tray
Copies
Staple
Swing Guide
Stapling
tray
Stopper
Delivery Roller
Feed Roller 1
Fig. 2-015
A
B
C
A
B
C
Front diagonal stapling
Paper width/2
2-point stapling
A
B
C
A
B
C
Rear diagonal stapling
Rear 1-point stapling
Fig. 2-016
2. Saddle Stitch Delivery
A copy arriving in the Finisher from the Copier is routed to the Saddle Stitch by the Paper Deflecting
Plate. The Saddle Stitch executes stitching, and saddling operations on the copy, and then delivers it to
the Saddle Stitch Tray. For discussions of stacks in the Saddle Stitch, see 11.3.4.
To Saddle Stitch
Fig.2-017
610
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.2. Delivery Paths

This Finisher has three different paper paths for delivery, each selected to suit paper size, and delivery
mode.
1. Straight Path
When stacking copies shown in Table. 2-001, the copies pass under the Buffer Roller.
Copy size
Typical copy
examples
Length or width 182 mm or less

A5-R, INV-R, thick stock
Table. 2-001
Delivery Roller
Buffer Roller
Fig. 2-018
2. Buffer Paper Path 1
When stacking copies shown in Table. 2-002, the copies pass over the Buffer Roller, increasing the
distance between copies.
Copy size
Typical copy
examples
Length and width 182 mm or more

A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, LDR, LGL, LTR,
LTR-R, Transparencies
(excluding thick stock)
Table. 2-002
Buffer Roller
Feed Roller 2
Delivery Roller
Fig. 2-019
611
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Buffer Paper Path 2

This is the paper path when copy sizes shown in Table. 2-003 are stacked. A maximum of two copies
(two originals, or more in the staple mode) are wrapped around the Buffer Roller, during which job
offset, and stapling are performed on the Stapling Tray.
Copy size
Typical copy
examples
Length 182 to 232 mm, and width 182 to 297 mm

A4, B5, LTR,
(excluding transparencies and thick stock)
Table. 2-003
The following shows paper delivery operation in the case of two originals in the staple mode.
a. The first copy is moved in the direction of the Buffer Roller.
Buffer Roller
1st Copy
Fig. 2-020
b. The first copy wraps around the Buffer Roller and, at the same time, the second copy arrives from
the Copier.
1st Copy
2nd Copy
Fig. 2-021
c. The second copy is laid over the first copy.
1st Copy
Fig. 2-022
612
2nd Copy
DP-8060/8045/8035
d. The first, and second copies are simultaneously pulled into the Stapling Tray.
2nd Copy
1st Copy
Fig. 2-023
Caution:
The second copy as explained here is moved through the buffer paper path 1.
Details are omitted from the discussion to avoid interrupting the sequence of operations.
613
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.3. Feeding and Delivering

1. Outline
The Finisher transports copies arriving from the Copier to the Delivery Tray, Stapling Tray, or the
Saddle Stitch Unit according to the mode of delivery. On the Stapling Tray, the copies are subjected to
job offset, or stapling as instructed by the Copier. The First Feed Motor (M1), Second Feed Motor (M8),
and Inlet Feed Motor (M9) are stepping motors, and Delivery motor (M2) is a DC motor. These motors
are controlled by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB, and rotate either clockwise
or counter-clockwise.
The paper paths are equipped with the following four sensors for detection of paper (arrival,
passage):
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Delivery Sensor (PI3)
Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4)
Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
In addition, each delivery tray is equipped with a sensor designed to detect the presence/absence of
paper on it.
No. 1 Paper Tray Sensor (PI11)
No. 2 Paper Tray Sensor (PI12)
If a copy fails to reach, or move past each sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher
Controller PCB identifies the condition as a jam, and stops the ongoing operation, and at the same time
informs the Copier of the condition.
When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17)
checks whether, or not copies are being detected. In addition to the above four sensors, the Inlet
Sensor, Delivery sensor, Stapling Tray Sensor, and Buffer Path Paper Sensor are also checked for the
presence of paper. If the sensors detect paper, the Finisher Unit judges that paper jams have not
completely been removed, and sends the paper jam removal signal to the Copier again.
614
SL6
SL5
M5
M8
615
M1
PI20
M7
M2
PI10
M3
M4
Fig. 2-024
PI19
M9
PI9
SL3
SL2
SL1
SL7
M6
Stapler shift motor drive signal
Stapler motor drive signal
Belt escape solenoid drive signal BESCPSL
Flapper solenoid drive signal FLPSL
Buffer inlet solenoid drive signal EXTSL
Buffer outlet solenoid drive signal EXITSL
Inlet feed motor drive signal
First feed motor drive signal
Second feed motor drive signal
Paddle solenoid drive signal PDLSL
Tray lift motor drive signal
Shift motor clock detection signal 2 SFTCLK2
Shift motor clock detection signal 1 SFTCLK1
Swing motor clock signal SWGCLK
Swing motor drive signal
Delivery motor clock signal DELCLK
Delivery motor drive signal
Alignment motor drive signal
Escape solenoid drive signal ESCPSL
DP-8060/8045/8035
PI11
PI4
PI12
Fig. 2-025
616
PI3
Inlet paper detection signal PENT
Buffer path inlet paper detection

signal BUFENTR
Delivery detection signal PDEL
Buffer path paper detection

signal BUFPASS
Stapling paper tray detection signal STPTY
FSTTRAY
No.1 paper tray detection signal FSTTRA
No.2 paper tray detection signal SNDTRAY

SNDTRA
DP-8060/8045/8035
PI7
PI14
PI1
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.4. Job Offset

1. Outline
In the job offset mode, sort jobs and entire copy groups are shifted to the front for delivery to the tray,
and other copies are delivered to the tray without a shift.
The copies are shifted by the alignment plate. The alignment plate is checked by the Alignment Home
Position Sensor (PI6) to find out whether it is at the home position.
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Motor (M3) at power-on to return the Alignment
Plate to its home position.
The Finisher Controller PCB stops the Delivery Motor (M2) when the trailing edge of the copy has
moved past the Feed Roller 2. Then, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Delivery Motor counterclockwise, and drives the Swing Motor (M7). As a result, the drive of the Delivery Motor is transmitted
to the Swing Guide to move up the guide. When the Swing Guide Open Detection Sensor (PI18)
detects the Swing Guide, the Delivery Motor stops, and the Swing Guide is held at the up position.
When the Swing Guide has moved up, the Feed Belts attached to the Feed Roller 2 move the copy to
the Stapling Tray. The presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is monitored by the Stapling Paper Tray
Sensor (PI4). (The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up.)
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Motor (M3) in advance, and keeps the Alignment
Plate poised 10mm behind the trailing edge of a sheet. Whenever one sheet is moved to the Stapling
Tray, each sheet is aligned, and when the fifth or last sheet in a sort job/group is fed to the Stapling
Tray, the Guide Plate Retaining Solenoid (SL6) moves the Guide Plate away and under the Stapling
Tray. From then on, the Alignment Motor shifts the sheets to the front by 30 mm.
When the copy has been shifted, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Alignment Motor counterclockwise to move the Alignment Plate to a point 10 mm behind the trailing edge of the sheet.
This alignment operation is repeated until alignment of the fifth, or last sheet in a sort job is completed.
At this time, the Swing Guide is moved down and is closed, and the Delivery Motor rotates clockwise to
deliver the sheet.
Alignment
Plate
Guide
Plate
Alignment Plate
Home Position
Sensor (PI6)
Alignment
Motor (M3)
Paper
Escape
Solenoid (SL6)
Fig. 2-026
617
DP-8060/8045/8035
Sequence of Operation (Job Offset)

Delivery Motor (M2)
First Feed Motor (M1)

Second Feed Motor (M8)
Alignment Plate Motor
(M8)
Alignment Plate Home
Position Sensor (PI6)
Swing Guide Open
Detection Switch (PI8)
Swing Guide Closed
Detection Switch (SW2)
Swing Motor (M7)

Stapling Paper Tray
Sensor (PI4)
Guide Plate Escape
Solenoid (SL6)
: Motor CW rotation
: Motor CCW rotation
Fig. 2-027
2. Flow of Job Offset Operations
a. The Swing Guide moves up and, at the same time, the Feed Belts move the sheet to the Stapling
Tray.
Swing Guide
Offset Sheet
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stopper
Fig. 2-028
b. The Alignment Plate shifts the sheet to the front.
Existing Stack
Alignment Plate
Offset Sheet
Fig. 2-029
618
DP-8060/8045/8035
c. The Swing Guide moves down and, at the same time, the Delivery Roller delivers the sheet.
Offset Sheet
Swing Guide
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stopper
Fig. 2-030
619
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.5. Staple Operation

1. Outline
The Stapler Unit staples a stack of as many sheets as specified.
The stapling position differs according to the selected staple mode, and paper size. The Stapler Unit is
checked by the Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor (PI7) to find out whether it is at the home position.
When starting operation after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Stapler Shift Motor (M4)
to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. If the Stapler is already at the home position, then (M4)
is not turned on.
Stapler Shift Motor (M4)
Sheets
Stapler
Stapler Shift Home

Fig. 2-031
Paper
width/2
Front diagonal stapling
2-point stapling

Rear diagonal stapling
Fig. 2-032
620
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. First Sheet
The Finisher Controller PCB stops the Delivery Motor (M2) as soon as the trailing edge of the first
sheet has moved past the Feed Roller 2. Then, it rotates the Delivery Motor clockwise to switch the
gear drive to the Swing Motor (M7), causing the Swing Guide to move up.
When the Swing Guide Open Sensor (PI18) finds the Swing Guide at the up position, the Swing Motor
stops, maintaining the Swing Guide at the up position.
When the Swing Guide has moved up, the feed belts of the Feed Roller 2 move the sheet to the
Stapling Tray. (The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up.) The
presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is detected by the Stapling Paper Tray Sensor (PI4).
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Shift Motor (M3) when the Stapling Paper Tray
Sensor has detected paper to put sheets in order. The Alignment Plate is kept poised 10 mm behind
the trailing edge of the paper.
The Swing Guide is kept in wait at the up position until the last sheet is output onto the Stapling Tray.
Swing Guide
1st Sheet
Feed Roller 2
Tray 1/2
Feed Belts
Delivery
Roller
Stapling
Tray
Stapler
Fig. 2-033
Swing Guide
Swing Guide Open
Sensor (PI18)
Swing Guide
Closed
Detect
Switches
(MS2/MS6)
Delivery Roller
Swing Motor Clock

Sensor (PI20)
Delivery
Motor Clock
Sensor (PI10)
Swing Motor (M7)
Delivery Motor (M2)
Fig. 2-034
621
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. 2nd and Subsequent Sheets

The Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Belt Escape Solenoid (SL7) before the trailing edge of the
second, and subsequent sheets have moved past the Feed Roller 2 to make the Feed Belt escape.
This operation is performed to reduce the time it takes for the trailing edge of the paper to fall on the
Stapling Tray, and to improve the duty cycle.
The Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Paddle Solenoid (SL5) as soon as the trailing edge of the
second, and subsequent sheets have moved past the Feed Roller 2, causing the drive of the Second
Feed Motor (M8) to rotate the Paddle. The sheets are pushed by the Paddle and moved to the Stapling
Tray.
Almost simultaneously with the trailing edge of the sheet falling into the Stapling Tray, the Belt Escape
Solenoid turns off to return the Feed Belts that were in the escape position to its original position, and
feed the sheet onto the Stapling Tray. When the sheet has been output onto the Stapling Tray, the
Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Alignment Motor (M3) to put the sheets in order.
Swing Guide
2nd and Subsequent
Sheets
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
SL7
Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Belt Escape
Solenoid
Stapler
Fig. 2-035
Feed Belts
Escape Direction
Belt Escape
Solenoid (SL7)
Fig. 2-036
622
DP-8060/8045/8035
Paddles
Paddles
Paddle
Solenoid (SL5)
2nd and Subsequent

Sheets
1st Sheet
Stapler
M8
2nd Feed Motor
Stopper
Fig. 2-037
4. Last sheet
When the last sheet has been put in order, the Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Alignment Motor
(M3) to move the Alignment Plate to the alignment position (to butt the plate against the stack). Then,
the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Swing Motor (M7) counter-clockwise to move down the Swing
Guide.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler according to the staple mode for stapling. From then
on, it rotates the Delivery Motor (M2) clockwise to delivery the stack to the tray.
Swing Guide
Sheets
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stapler
Fig. 2-038
623
DP-8060/8045/8035
Swing Guide
Delivery Roller
Swing Motor (M7)

Delivery Motor (M2)
Fig. 2-039
11.1.2.2.6. Staple Unit

Stapling is executed by the Stapler Motor (M6). A signal rotation of the cam by the motor results in one
stapling operation.
The cam is checked by the Stapling Home Position Sensor (PI22) to find out whether it is at the home
position.
The Stapler Motor is controlled by the Microprocessor (Q1) on the Finisher Controller so that it is rotated
clockwise or counter-clockwise.
When the Stapling Home Position Sensor is off, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Stapler Motor
clockwise until the sensor turns on so as to return the Stapling Cam to its initial state.
The presence/absence of staples inside the Staple Cartridge is detected by the Staple Detecting Switch
(MS9). The Finisher Controller PCB does not drive the Stapler Motor (M6) unless the Swing Guide Closed
Detecting Switch 2 (MS6) is on (i.e., the swing guide is closed). This is to protect against injuries that could
occur when a finger is stuck inside the Stapler.
Fig. 2-041
624
Staple detection signal
Cartridge detection signal
Stapling home
position detection signal
Staple motor
drive signal
Staple edge detection signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
Fig. 2-042
Start signal Mode selected
Stacking
Delivery Motor (M2)
Stapling Delivery
1st sheet 2nd sheet

(M3)
Swing Guide Open
Sensor (PI8)
Stapling Paper Tray
Sensor (PI4)
Swing Guide Open/Closed
Detecting Switch (MS2)
Stapler Home Position
sensor (PI7)
Paddle Solenoid (SL5)
Stapler Shift Motor
(M4)
Stapler Motor (M4)
: Motor CW rotation
Fig. 2-043
625
DP-8060/8045/8035
1. Shifting the Staple Unit

The Stapler Unit is moved by the Stapler Shift Motor (M4). Its home position is detected by the Stapler
Shift Home Position Sensor (PI7). When the start signal arrives from the Copier, the Stapler moves to
the center of its movement range. This movement occurs regardless of the selected mode of delivery,
as no specific mode is recognized at this point in time.
When the command for stapling arrives from the Copier after the first sheet has reached the Copier
Pre-registration Sensor, the Stapler moves to the staple wait position to suit the appropriate stapling
position, and paper size.
See Fig. 2-044 and later for an idea of the wait position according to the stapling mode.
a. Front Diagonal Stapling
The position is the same as the stapling position.
Stopper
Stapling Tray
Delivery
Direction
Stopper
Guide Plate
Stapler
Fig. 2-044
b. Rear 1-point Stapling
The Stapler is kept in wait at the center position. The Stapler is moved to and from the stapling
position for each stapling operation.
Stopper
Stapling Position
Wait Position
Stapling Tray
Delivery Direction
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-045
626
Stapler
DP-8060/8045/8035
c. Rear Diagonal Stapling

For A4, B5 and LTR sizes, the Stapler is kept in wait toward the rear away from the stapling
position. The Stapler is moved to and from the stapling position for each stapling operation.
Stapler
Wait Position
Stapling Position
Stopper
Stapling Tray
Delivery Direction
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-046
d. 2-Point Stapling
The Stapler is kept in wait at the center of paper. Stapling occurs at two points, first at the rear, and
then at the front.
Stopper
Stapling position
Wait position
Stapler
Stapling Tray
delivery direction
Stapling position
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-047
627
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.7. Tray Operation

The Finisher has two delivery trays for normal delivery, each accepting sheets. Each tray is moved up, and
down by the Tray Lift Motor (M5).
The position of tray is identified with reference to the number of clock pulses of the Tray Lift Motor Clock
Sensor 1/2 (PI9/PI19) coming from the Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8). The Finisher Controller PCB finds
out in which direction (up or down) the tray is moving based on combinations of pulses from the two clock
sensors.
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Tray Lift Motor (M5) to return the tray to the home position at poweron. If the tray is already at the home position, then (M5) is not turned on.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves up, and down the tray selected by the Copier so that it is positioned at
the delivery slot.
The upper limit of the tray is detected by the Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch (MS5). The Finisher
Controller PCB stops the drive (up) of the Tray Lift Motor (M5) as soon as the Tray Upper Limit Detecting
Switch turns on.
The height of the stack on the tray is identified by the Height Sensor (PS1), which measures its distance
from the top of the stack. The tray is moved down when the distance between the top of the stack, and the
Delivery Assembly drops to a specific measurement.
The Finisher Controller PCB cuts off the +24V power of the Tray Lift Motor (M5) as soon as the Safety Zone
Detecting Switch (MS3) turns on while the Shutter, and the Swing Guide are open, stopping the operation of
the Finisher.
Tray Guide
Tray 1
Tray Upper Limit

Detecting Switch
(MS5)
Tray 2
Encoder
Tray Lift Motor Clock
Sensor 2 (PI9)

Sensor 1 (PI19)
Safety Zone Switch (MS3)
Tray Home Position
Sensor (PI8)
Tray Lift Motor (M5)
Fig. 2-048
628
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.8. Detecting the Height of Output on the Tray

1. Outline
The number of sheets delivered to the tray, and the number of sets (number of stapling operations) are
stored in memory by the Finisher Controller PCB. The height of the paper checked by the Height
Sensor (PS1). See Table. 2-004 for the maximum loading capacity of each tray.
The Finisher Controller PCB stops operation when the conditions in Table. 2-004 occur, informing the
Copier that the tray is full.
Stacking mode
Non-staple sort
Tray
Small-size Large-size
5.79 in
(147 mm)
Tray 1 high
(1000
sheets)
5.79 in
(147 mm)
Tray 2 high
(1000
sheets)
1.73 in
(44 mm)
high
(500
sheets)
2.91 in
(74 mm)
high
(500
sheets)
Staple sort
Mixed
sizes
1.73 in
(44 mm)
high
(300
sheets)
1.73 in
(44 mm)
high
(300
sheets)
Mixed
sizes
4.33 in
2.91 in
0.87 in
(110 mm) (74 mm)
(22 mm)
high
high
high
(750 sheets (500 sheets (150 sheets
/ 30 sets)
/ 30 sets)
/30 sets)
4.33 in
2.91 in
0.87 in
(110 mm) (74 mm)
(22 mm)
high
high
high
(750 sheets (500 sheets (150 sheets
/ 30 sets)
/ 30 sets)
/ 30 sets)
Small-size Large-size
Notes:
1. The capacity for the non-staple sort mode is approximate and computed based on 21 lbs
(80g/m2) paper.
2. Alignment for stacks containing 750 sheets or more is not guaranteed.
3. Stacking height specification is 7 mm.
Caution:
1. The term small-size stands for A4, A5-R, B5, LTR, and INV-R.
2. The term large-size Stands for A3, A4-R, B4, B5-R, LGL, LDR, LTR-R, and FLS.
Table. 2-004
Height Sensor (PS1)

Paper
Fig. 2-049
629
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.9. Shutter Operation

When the Top Output Tray reaches capacity, the output is then switched to another tray. Using the Tray Lift
Motor (M5) the Finisher Controller PCB closes the shutter mounted on the delivery slot before moving the
tray. This prevents the existing stack on the tray from interfering with the delivery slot, and prevents any
access by hand while the trays are moving.
The shutter moves up (to close) when the Second Feed Motor (M8) rotates counter-clockwise, and is held
in position when the motor stops. When the Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise once again, it
moves down (to open) to enable delivery.
When the shutter is held at the up position, claws slide out of the Swing Guide to engage the back of the
shutter. This way, the existing stack and the Swing Guide engage while the tray is moved, preventing the
guide from opening. The claws slide in when the shutter is moved down to release the engagement.
The upward movement of the shutter is monitored by the Shutter Closed Detecting Switch (MS4), and the
downward movement is monitored by the Shutter Open Sensor (PI5).
See the following diagrams for how these operations take place.
1. The Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise to move the shutter up.
M8
Second Feed Motor
Fig. 2-050
2. The Tray Lift Motor rotates, and the new tray moves to the stacking lower limit. The distance of
movement is detected by the Tray Shift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9/19).
M5
Tray Lift Motor
Fig. 2-051
630
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. The Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise, and the shutter moves down.
M8
Second Feed Motor
Fig. 2-052
4. The Tray Lift Motor rotates, and the tray moves to suit the height of the stack. The appropriate height in
relation to the existing stack is checked by the Height Sensor (PS1).
Height Sensor
(S1)
M5
Tray Lift Motor
Fig. 2-053
Claw
Shutter
Claw
Shutter Closed
Detecting
Switch (MS4)
Shutter Open
Sensor
(PI5)
Second Feed Motor
Fig. 2-054
631
M8
One-Way
Cam
DP-8060/8045/8035
Sequence Operations (shutter drive)

Move from Tray 1 to Tray 2
Shutter
closed
Tray
moved
Shutter
opened
Tray
moved

Shutter Closed Detecting
Switch (MS4)
Shutter Open Sensor (PI5)
Correct height detected
Height Sensor (PS1)
: Motor CW rotation
Fig. 2-055
632
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.10. Buffer Path Operation

This machine is provided with a buffer paper path for continuously receiving paper from the Copier during
stapling, and stack job offset operation on the Stapling Tray. A maximum of three copies (three originals or
more in the staple mode) are wrapped around the Buffer Roller. During this time, stack job offset, and
stapling are performed on the Stapling Tray.
1st Sheet
SL2
OFF
The following shows operation on the buffer paper path.

1. When the first sheet arrives, the Buffer Inlet Solenoid (SL2) remains off.
The first sheet enters the buffer path.
Buffer Inlet Solenoid
Fig. 2-056
2. When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17), the
Buffer Outlet Solenoid (SL3) turns on so as to cause the sheet to wrap around the Buffer Roller.
Buffer Outlet
Solenoid
SL3
Buffer Path Inlet

Paper Sensor (PI17)
ON
Fig. 2-057
3. When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14), the Buffer
Roller stops, and waits for the second sheet.
1st Sheet
2nd Sheet
Fig. 2-058
633
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. When the second sheet arrives, and its leading edge reaches the Inlet Sensor (PI1), the Buffer Roller
starts to operate once again.
1st Sheet
2nd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-059
5. The Buffer Roller continues to rotate, and the 2nd sheet stacks on the 1st sheet.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
Fig. 2-060
6. When the leading edge of the 2nd sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14), the
Buffer Roller stops, and waits for the 3rd sheet.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
3rd Sheet
Fig. 2-061
634
DP-8060/8045/8035
7. When the 3rd sheet arrives, and its leading edge reaches the Inlet Sensor (PI1), the Buffer Roller starts
to operate once again.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
3rd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-062
8. When the Buffer Roller starts to operate, the Buffer Outlet Solenoid (SL3) turns off so that the path is
directed in the direction of delivery. (The actual switch-over will occur after the trail edge of the first
sheet has moved past the flapper.)
Buffer Outlet
Solenoid
SL3
1st Sheet
OFF
3rd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-063
9. The Buffer Roller continues to rotate, and all the sheets are fed together towards the Delivery Roller.
Fig. 2-064
635
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.2.11. Detecting Jams

The following sensors are used to detect the presence/absence of paper and to make sure that
sheets are moved properly:
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4)
A jam is identified with reference to the presence/absence of paper at each specific sensor at the times
programmed in the memory of the Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB.
When the CPU identifies a jam, it suspends the Finisher's delivery operation and informs the Copiers DC
controller of the presence of a jam. When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the Buffer
Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17) checks whether paper is being detected in addition to the above four
sensors (Inlet Sensor, Delivery Sensor, Stapling Tray Sensor, and Buffer Path Paper Sensor). If the sensors
detect paper, the Finisher Unit judges that paper jams have not completely been removed, and sends the
paper jam removal signal to the Copier again.
The Tray 1 Paper Sensor (PI11), and Tray 2 Paper Sensor (PI12) are not used to detect jams.
PI3
PI14
PI1
PI4
Fig. 2-065
No.
PI1
PI3
PI4
PI14
Sensor Names
Inlet Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Stapler Tray Sensor
Buffer Path Paper Sensor
Table. 2-005
636
DP-8060/8045/8035
1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (11H)

The Inlet Sensor does not detect paper when feeding an equivalent of 400 mm from when the copier
delivery signal has been issued.
Copier delivery signal
Copier delivery signal
Equivalent of 400 mm
Jam check
Jam check
Jam
Normal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Inlet Feed Motor (M9)
Fig. 2-066
2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (21H)
The sheet does not move past the Inlet Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of the
sheet has been fed after the sensor turned on.
Equivalent of size x2
Jam check
Jam check
Jam
Normal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-067
3. Buffer Path Paper Sensor Delay Jam (13H)
The Buffer Inlet Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 540 mm has been fed after the
Inlet Sensor turned on.
Jam check
Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1)

Buffer Path Paper
Sensor (PI14)
Inlet Sensor (PI1)

Normal
Buffer Path Paper

Sensor (PI14)
Fig. 2-068
637
Jam
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Buffer Path Paper Sensor Stationary Jam (23H)

The sheet does not move past the Buffer Inlet Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of
the sheet has been fed after the sensor turned on.
Equivalent of Size x2
Equivalent of Size x2
Jam check
Buffer Path Paper
Sensor (PI14)
Jam check
Buffer Path Paper
Sensor (PI14)
Normal
Jam
Fig. 2-069
5. Delivery Sensor Delay Jam (14H)
a. Straight Path
The Delivery Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 285 mm has been fed after the
Jam check
Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Inlet Sensor (PI1)

First Feed Motor
(M1)
Second Feed Motor
(M8)
Normal
Jam

First Feed Motor
(M1)
Second Feed Motor
(M8)
Fig. 2-070
b. Buffer Path
The Delivery Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 480 mm has been fed after the
Jam check
Jam check
Normal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Inlet Sensor (PI1)

Second Feed Motor
(M8)

Second Feed Motor
(M8)
Fig. 2-071
638
Jam
DP-8060/8045/8035
6. Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam (24H)

The sheet does not move past the Delivery Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of
the sheet has been fed after the Delivery Sensor turned on.
Jam check
Jam check
Normal

Second Feed Motor
(M8)
Delivery Motor (M2)
Jam
Second Feed Motor
(M8)
Delivery Motor (M2)
Fig. 2-072
7. Stapling Tray Sensor Stationary Jam (25H)
The sheet does not move past the Stapling Tray Sensor 1 sec after the Delivery Motor (M2) turned on.
1 sec
Jam check
Stapling Tray
Sensor (PI4)
1 sec
Jam check
Stapling Tray
Sensor (PI4)
Normal
Delivery Motor (M2)
Jam
Delivery Motor (M2)
Fig. 2-073
8. Timing Jam (05H)
The Inlet Sensor (PI1) detects a sheet before the delivery signal is received from the Copier.
9. Staple Jam (05H)
When the Staple Motor (M6) is rotating clockwise, the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI22) does not
turn on within 0.5 sec. after it has turned off. However, the sensor turns on within 0.5 sec. after the
motor has been rotated counter-clockwise.
10. Power-On Jam (07H)
The Inlet Sensor (PI1), Delivery Sensor (PI3), Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI4) and/or Buffer Path Inlet
Paper Sensor (PI17) detects paper at power-on.
11. Door Open Jam (08H)
The Joint Sensor (PI15), Door Open Sensor (PI16), or Door Switch (MS1) detects the cover open
during operation (including the Upper Door Switch (MS1P), and Front Door Switch (MS2P) when the
optional punch unit is mounted).
12. Punch Jam (0AH)
The Punch Home Sensor (PI3P) does not turn on again within 200 misc. after turning off.
639
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.2.3. Power Supply System

11.1.2.3.1. Outline
The Finisher Controller PCB is supplied with 24 VDC power when the Copier is turned on. The 24 VDC
power line is used to drive the motor, and solenoids. It also serves for sensors and ICs on PCBs after being
converted to 5 VDC by the Regulator IC(Q14) on the Finisher Controller PCB. The 24 VDC power is also
used to feed power from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. The power is also
supplied to the Punch Driver PCB when the optional Punch Unit is mounted.
Some of the 24 VDC power used to drive motors is cut off when the Door Switch (MS1) is open.
The power to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB, and the Punch Driver PCB, however, will not be cut off.
Fig. 2-074 is a block diagram showing the power supply system.
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Door Switch (MS1)

24V
Motor
24V
Motor
24V
Circuit Breaker
(CB1)
Copier
24V
Solenoid

5V
Sensors
(Q14)
5V
Regular IC
Logic
Punch Driver PCB

(Punch Unit (optional))
Fig. 2-074
11.1.2.3.2. Protection Functions

The 24 VDC power line used to drive motors, and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker (CB1) for
protection against overcurrent. The 24V line used to drive the First Feed Motor (M1), Alignment Motor (M3),
and Stapler Shift Motor (M4) are equipped with a fuse, which is designed to blow when an overcurrent
occurs.
640
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.
Saddle Stitch Unit Operation

This chapter discusses the purpose and role of each of the saddle stitch functions, and the principles of
operation used for the saddle stitch mechanical, and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which
The
symbol in drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by
In descriptions of digital circuits on the Saddle Stitch, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0"
indicates a low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to circuit.
A microprocessor is used in the Saddle Stitch to control all finishing functions.
diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up the components.
11.1.3.1.1. Outline
The unit stitches (2 points) a stack of sheets delivered by the Finisher Unit and folds it in two for delivery.
All these operations are controlled by the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB in response to commands from the
Copier via the Finisher Unit.
Finisher Unit Control System
Guide Plate Drive

System
Control System
Paper Positioning
Plate Drive System
Alignment Drive
System
Saddle Stitch Drive
System
Delivery Drive System
Feed Drive System
Paper Pushing Plate
Drive System
Paper Folding Roller
Drive System
Fig. 3-001
641
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.1.2. Electrical Circuitry

The sequence of operations used for the Saddle Stitch is controlled by the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.
The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB has a microprocessor. This microprocessor is used to control the
sequence of operations and to handle serial communications with the Finisher Controller PCB, driving
solenoids and motors in response to the various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is also used to communicate the state of various sensors and switches to
the Finisher Controller PCB in serial.
The functions of the major ICs mounted on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB are as follows:
Q1
Controls the sequence of operations.
Q2
Contains sequence programs.
Q3
Controls the sequence of operations.
Q4
Handles IPC communications.
Electrical Circuitry Block Diagram
Sensor
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Motor
Q1 CPU
Switch
Solenoid
Q2
ROM
Q3
RAM
Q4
Communications IC
Fig. 3-002
642
Copier
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
J107-1
-2
-3
J11-15 +5V
-14 LUNGECLK
-13
PI2S
J104-3
-1
-2
J11-10 +5V
-12 FDR
-11
PI3S
J103-3
-1
-2
PI4S
J102-1
-3
-2
PI5S
J101-3
-1
-2
PI6S
J100-3 -1
-1 -3
-2 -2
PI7S
J106-3
-1
-2
Delivery Cover
Sensor
Paper Folding
Motor Clock
Sensor
Alignment
Plate Home
Position Sensor
Paper Tray
Sensor
Paper
Positioning Plate
Home Position
Sensor
J303-1
-3
-2
J203-3
-1
-2
J309-1
-3
-2
J209-3
-1
-2
-3 -4
-1 -6
-2 -5
-1
-3
-2
J302
J202A
J202
Front Door
Open/Closed
Sensor
PI1S
J502
J209A
J402
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor
Clock Sensor
When the front door is

open, 0.
When the delivery
cover is open, 0.
J11-6 +5V
-5 FLDCLK
-4
When the Paper

folding motor is
rotating, it pulsates
between 1 and 0.
J11-1 +5V
-3 JOGHP
-2
When the alignment

plate is at home
position, 1.
-3
-1
-2
J6-7 +5V
-9 TRYPAR
-8
When paper is present

on the tray, 1.
-6
-4
-5
J6-4
-6 +5V
-5 PAPPOS
When the Paper

positioning plate is at
the home position
sensor, 1.
Fig. 3-003
643
J11-7 +5V
-9 EJCVR
-8
When the Paper

pushing plate motor is
rotating, it pulsates
between 1 and 0.
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Inputs to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Paper
Positioning
Plate Paper
Sensor
J105-3
-1
-3
PI9S
J124-3
-1
-2
PI11S
J525-3
-1
-2
PI12S
J126-3
-1
-2
J9-4 +5V
-6 FDRLHP
-5
PI13S
J117-3
-1
-2
J9-7 +5V
-9 GIDHP
-8
PI14S
Paper
Pushing
Plate Home
Position Sensor
J128-3
-1
-2
J9-10 +5V
-12 LUNGEHP
-11
PI15S
Paper
Pushing
Plate Top
Position Sensor
J129-3
-1
-2
J9-13 +5V
When the paper
-15 LUNGETOP
pushing plate is at
-14
PI16S
J131-3
-1
-2
J13-1 +5V
-3 STPLHP*
-2
When the saddle

stitch unit is properly
inserted, 0.
PI17S
J132-3
-1
-2
J13-4 +5V
-6 VPJM
-5
When paper is
present in the vertical
path, 1.
PI21S
J130-3
-2
-1
J18-1 +5V
-3 PAFLDHP*
-2
When the paper

folding roller is at
home position, 0.
Crescent
Roller Phase
Sensor
Guide Home
Position
Sensor
Saddle Stitch
Unit IN
Sensor
Vertical Path
Paper
Sensor
Paper Folding
Home
Position Sensor
-2
-4
-3
-3
-1
-2
J225
J125
-2
-4
-3
J425
J325
Delivery
Sensor
-3
-1
-2
J6-1 +5V
-3 PPOSPAR
-2
J10-6 +5V
-8 INLTCVR
-7
-3
-1
-2
J9-1 +5V
-3 DELV
-2
When paper is
present at the paper
positioning plate, 1.
When the inlet cover
is closed, 1.
When paper is
present in the delivery
sensor unit, 1.
When the flag of the
crescent roller is at
the sensor, 1.
When the guide is at
home position, 1.
When the paper

pushing plate is at
home position, 1.
the
leading edge, 1.
-1
-3
-2
J308
J208A
J208
Inlet Cover
Sensor
-1
-3
-2
J301
J201A
J201
PI8S
-4
-2
-3
Fig. 3-004
644
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Inputs to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Paper Sensor PCB
PI19S
No. 2 Paper
Sensor
J123-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J304
J204A
J204
PI18S
No. 1 Paper
Sensor
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
J10-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
+5V
1STPA
2NDPA
3RDPA
PI20S
No. 3 Paper
Sensor
When paper is present at

the No.1 paper sensor, 1.
-1
-2
-7
-6
Saddle Stitch Unit (rear)

Saddle Stitch
Home Position
MS5S
Sensor (rear)
J316-3
-5
MS4S
-1
-2
-5
J8-3 STCHHP1*
-7
-6
-1 HKEMP1
-2
-7
-6
-5
-7
-6
J8-10
STCHHP2*
-8
HKEMP2
-9
Inlet Door Switch
When the saddle stitch

unit is at the home
position for stitching,
0.
When no staple is
present 0.
When the saddle stitch

unit is at the home
position for stitching,
0.
When no staple is
present, 0.
+24V
N.O.
J4-1
MS1S
-2
INLTCVRMS
When the inlet door

is closed, 1.
FDROPN
When the front

door is closed, 1.
DELVMS
When the delivery

door is closed, 1.
Front Door Switch

N.O.
J4-3
MS2S
-4
Delivery Door Switch

N.O.
MS3S
J305
J205
Staple
Sensor (rear)
MS6S
J120
-5
JD2
JD1
J315-3
J121
MS7S
J306
Saddle Stitch
Home Position
Sensor (front)
Staple
Sensor (front)
J305
Saddle Stitch Unit (front)
Fig. 3-005
645
J4-5
-6
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

No. 1 Paper Deflect Solenoid
-1
-2
J118
SL1S
+24V
-2
J15-1
-1
-2 FLPSL1*
No. 2 Paper Deflect Solenoid

SL2S
+24V
-2
J15-3
-1
-4
-2
J15-5
-1
-6
-1
-4
J5-1
-2
-3
-2
-2
-3
-1
-4
-2
J117
-1
When 0, the
solenoid turns ON.
FLPSL2*
Feed Plate Contact
+24V
-2
J116
-1
SL4S
When 0, the
solenoid turns ON.
When 0, the
solenoid turns ON.
RLNIPSL*
M1S
-3
-4
J115A
Feed Motor
A
A*
B
The pulse signals

change according to the
rotation of the motor.
B*
Paper Folding Motor

J112-2
J4-8
-1
-7
J119-5
J12-1
-4
-2
-3
-3
-2
-4
-1
-5
J114-5
J7-6
-4
-7
-3
-8
-2
-9
-1
-10
J113-5
J7-1
-4
-2
-3
-3
-2
-4
-1
-5
The state (+ and -)

changes according to
the rotation of the motor.
M2S
+24V
Guide Motor
M3S
Paper Positioning Plate Motor
M4S
Alignment Motor
M5S
Fig. 3-006
646
B*
A*
The pulse signals

B
A
B*
A*
+24V
The pulse signals

B
A
B*
A*
B
A
+24V
The pulse signals

DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Saddle Stitch Unit (front)

J8-4
-3
-5
-2
-6
-1
-7
J316-4
-4
J8-11
-5
-3
-12
-2
-13
-1
-14
-6
J120
-4
-5
J305
M7S
J315-4
-7
The state (+ and -)

changes according
to the rotation of
the motor.
M6S
-6
J306
Saddle Stitch Unit (rear)
J121
JD2
JD1
Saddle Stitch
motor (front)
-7
The state (+ and -)

changes according
to the rotation of
the motor.
Saddle Stitch
motor (rear)
Paper Pushing Plate Motor

J108-1
J4-9
-2
-10
M8S
The state (+ and -)

changes according
to the rotation of
the motor.

J400-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
J131-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
J2-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Communication line
+24V
+24V
J500-1
J132-1
J1-1
-2
-2
-2
Fig. 3-007
647
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.2. Feeding / Drive System

11.1.3.2.1. Outline
The Saddle Stitch Unit aligns the sheets coming from the Finisher unit, and stitches the resulting stack for
delivery to the Delivery Tray according to the commands coming from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The machine's operation consists of the following:
1. Receives the sheets
2. Aligns the sheets
3. Stitches the stack
4. Feeds the stack
5. Folds and delivers the stack
1. Receives the sheets
3. Stitches the stack
2. Align the sheets
5. Folds and
delivers the stack
4. Feeds the stack
Fig. 3-008
648
DP-8060/8045/8035
1. Receiving Sheets
The Saddle Stitch Unit receives the sheets from the Finisher unit, and sends them to the vertical path in
a vertical orientation.
The vertical path assembly uses two deflecting plates, and a paper positioning plate to position the
center of the stack so it matches the stapling / folding requirements.
Sheets coming later are output closer to the delivery slot, and the volume of paper that may be output
is as follows:
15 sheets (maximum of 14 sheets of 80g/m2 + 1 sheet of 133g/m2)
Direction of delivery
2nd Sheet
1st Sheet
Paper Positioning Plate
Fig. 3-009
2. Aligning the Sheets
The Alignment Plates operate to set the sheets in order each time a sheet of paper is sent to the
vertical path assembly. The Alignment Plates are mounted at the edge of the vertical path assembly.
The Alignment Plates also operate after stapling to prepare the stack for delivery.
Sheets
Alignment Plate
Alignment Plate
Fig. 3-010
649
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Stitching
When all the sheets are properly set in the vertical path assembly, the two stitchers, stitch the stack.
The Stitchers are positioned so that they face the center of a stack.
The two Stitchers are not operated simultaneously so as to prevent the paper from wrinkling between
the two staples and to limit the load on the power supply.
If only one sheet of paper arrives from the Copier, stitching does not take place, and the sequence
goes to the next operation (stack feeding).
Stitcher
Staple
Fig. 3-011
650
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Feeding the Stack

The unit folds the stitched stack of sheets, and then feeds them to the point of delivery. This point is
where the center of the stack (i.e., stapling position), matches the height of the Paper Pushing Plate
and the Paper Folding Roller nip. The stack is moved forward by operating the Paper Positioning Plate.
When the plate is operated, the Guide Plate which has been covering the Paper Folding Rollers, also
moves down so that the Paper Folding Rollers directly face the stack.
Paper Folding Roller

Paper Pushing Guide

Guide Plate
Fig. 3-012
5. Folding / Delivering the Stack
The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the center of the stack again to move it in the direction of the Paper
Folding Rollers. In response, the Paper Folding Rollers pick the stack along its center and folds it in
two. The Paper Folding Rollers together with the Delivery Roller then move the stack along to output it
on the Delivery Tray.
Paper Folding
Roller
Delivery Roller
Fig. 3-013
651
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.3. Paper Output Mechanism

11.1.3.3.1. Outline
The paper output mechanism serves to keep a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher in place for the
next operation (stapling, folding). The paper inlet is equipped with the No. 1 Flapper and the No. 2 Flapper,
which operate to configure the paper path to suit the paper size. The Paper Positioning Plate is kept poised
at a predetermined location to suit the paper size. The Paper Positioning Plate is driven by the Paper
Positioning Plate Motor (M4S), and the position of the plate is identified in reference to the number of motor
pulses coming from the Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI7S).
A sheet moved by the Inlet Roller is handled by the Feed Rollers and the Crescent Roller, and held in a
predetermined position. The Feed Plate moves the sheets by coming into contact with or moving away from
the sheets as needed. The Alignment Plates sets the stack in order each time a sheet is ejected. The
Alignment Plates are driven by the Alignment Motor (M5S), whose position is identified in reference to the
number of motor pulses coming from the Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S).
To prevent interference between paper, and the Paper Folding Rollers when the paper is being ejected, the
Folding Rollers are designed to be covered by a Guide Plate. The Guide Plate moves down before paper is
folded so as to expose the Paper Folding Rollers. The Inlet is equipped with the No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3
Paper Sensors (PI18S, PI19S, PI20S) each suited for a specific paper size, and the Paper Positioning Plate
is equipped with a Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor (PI8S).
652
Fig. 3-014
653
M6S/
M7S
M3S
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB (2/2)

Paper pushing motor clock signal LUNGECLK
SL2S
No. 2 paper deflecting plate

solenoid drive signal FLPSL2
No. 1 paper deflecting plate

solenoid drive signal
FLPSL1
Feed plate contact solenoid drive signal RLNIPSL
SL1S
Paper folding motor clock signal FLDCLK
Paper positioning plate motor drive

signal
Paper folding motor drive signal
Paper pushing motor drive signal
Alignment motor drive signal
Stitcher motor drive signal (front/rear)
Guide motor drive signal
Feed motor drive signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB (1/2)
M5S
M1S
SL4S
M8S
PI1S
M2S
PI4S
M4S
PI8S
PI7S
Fig. 3-015
654

No. 1 paper detection signal 1STPA
No. 2 paper detection signal 2NDPA
No. 3 paper detection signal 3RDPA
PI12S
Paper pushing plate home position

detection signal LUNGEHP
Paper pushing plate leading edge

position detection signal LUNGETOP
Vertical path paper detection signal VPJM
Paper folding home position detection signal PAFLDHP
Delivery detection signal DEIV
Crescent roller position detection signal FDRLHP
Guide plate home position detection signal GIDHP
Paper tray detection signal TRYPAR
Paper positioning plate paper detection signal PPOSPAR
Paper positioning plate home position detection signal PAPPOS
DP-8060/8045/8035
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI17S
PI11S
PI21S
PI15S
PI14S
PI13S
PI6S
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.3.2. Controlling the Inlet Flappers

1. Outline
The two Flappers mounted at the Paper Inlet are operated to configure the feed path according to the
paper size.
The Flappers are used to enable the following:
a) To detect the passage of the trailing edge of the paper being detected by an appropriate Sensor.
b) To prevent the following sheet from butting against the top of the existing stack Table. 3-001 shows
the relationship between Sensors, and paper sizes.
Sensor
No. 1 Paper Sensor
(PI18S)
No. 2 Paper Sensor
(PI19S)
No. 3 Paper Sensor
(PI20S)
Ledger / 11 x 17 in
(A3 / 279 x 432 mm)
B4
LTR-R/A4-R
Used
Used
Used
Not Used
Used
Used
Not Used
Not Used
Used
Table. 3-001
Each Flapper is driven by its own solenoid.
Table. 3-002 shows the relationship between solenoids, and paper sizes.
Solenoid
No. 1 Paper Deflecting
Plate Solenoid (SL1S)
Plate Solenoid (SL2S)
Ledger / 11 x 17 in
(A3 / 279 x 432 mm)
B4
A4-R/LTR-R
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Table. 3-002
655
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm)
No. 1 Paper Sensor

PI18S
Passage of paper
SL1
Plate Solenoid
OFF
No passage of paper
No. 2 paper
Sensor PI19S SL2
OFF
No passage of paper
Plate Solenoid
No. 3 Paper Sensor
PI20S
Top edge
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Entry of 2nd sheet
Entry of 3rd sheet
Fig. 3-016
656
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. B4 Paper Path (3 sheets)
Passage of paper
No. 1 Paper
Sensor PI18S
SL1
No. 2 Paper
Sensor PI19S
ON
Passage of paper
SL2
No. 3 Paper
Sensor PI20S
OFF
No passage of paper
PI18S
PI19S
Top edge
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Entry of 1st sheet
Entry of 2nd sheet
Entry of 3rd sheet
Fig. 3-017
657
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. A4-R / LTR-R Paper Path (3 sheets)
No.1 Paper
Sensor PI18S
Passage of paper
SL1
No.2 Paper
Sensor PI19S
ON
Passage of paper
SL2
No.3 Paper
Sensor PI20S
ON
Passage of paper
PI18S
PI19S
Top edge
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Enty of 1st sheet
Enty of 2nd sheet
Enty of 3rd sheet
Fig. 3-018
658
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.3.3. Controlling the Movement of Sheets

When the leading edge of a sheet has moved past the Inlet Flapper, the Intermediate Feed Roller, and the
crescent Roller starts to move the sheet forward.
The Intermediate Feed Roller is normally not in contact with the Path Bed. When the leading edge of a
sheet reaches the Intermediate Feed Roller contact section, the Feed Plate contact Solenoid (SL4S)
causes the roller to come into contact with the Path Bed so as to move the sheet. The contact is broken as
soon as the leading edge of the sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate. This series of operations is
executed each time a sheet arrives.
When the leading edge of the first sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate, the Paper Positioning Plate
Paper Sensor (PI18S) turns ON. The arrival of the second and subsequent sheets will not be checked since
the first sheet will still be over the sensor. The Crescent Roller keeps rotating while the sheets are being
output, butting the leading edge of each sheet against the Paper Positioning Plate, and ultimately, keeping
the leading edge of the stack in order.
The Alignment Plate Motor (M5S) drives the Alignment Plates for each sheet so as to set both left, and right
edges of the sheet in proper alignment.
1. The Solenoid turns ON while the paper is being moved so that the Feed Plate comes into contact.
Intermediate Feed Roller
Feed Roller
M1S
ON
SL4S
Feed Plate Contact Solenoid
Fig. 3-019
2. The Solenoid turns OFF when the paper butts against the Paper Positioning Plate. The Feed Motor
continues to rotate.
M1S
OFF
Fig. 3-020
659
SL4S
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. The Solenoid turns ON when the next sheet arrives, and the Feed Plate comes into contact.
M1S
ON
SL4S
Fig. 3-021
11.1.3.3.4. Aligning the Sheets

The Alignment Plate Motor (M5S) drives the Alignment Plates each time a sheet is ejected, setting both left,
and right edges of the sheet in proper alignment. The Alignment Plate Motor is a 4-phase stepping motor.
The position of Alignment Plate is identified in reference to the number of motor pulses from the Alignment
Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S).
The following briefly describes what takes place when the saddle stitching mechanism operates on two
sheets.
1. When the first sheet has been ejected, the Alignment Plates butts against the left, and right edges of
the stack (first alignment). The Alignment Plates leave the home position in advance and remain
separated by 10 mm from the edges of the stack.
Sheets
Alignment
Plate
Alignment
Plate

Paper
Positioning Plate
Fig. 3-022
2. The Alignment Plates move away from the edges of the stack over a short distance, and then butt
against the edges once again (2nd alignment).
Fig. 3-023
660
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. The Alignment Plates separate by 10 mm from the edges of the stack.
Fig. 3-024
4. When the following stack arrives, steps 1 through 3 above are repeated.
5. The Alignment Plates butt against the stack once again, during which, stitching takes place.
Fig. 3-025
6. The Alignment Plates separate by 10 mm from the edges of the stack, after which, folding and delivery
take place.
Fig. 3-026
7. When the first sheet of the following stack reaches the No. 1 Paper Sensor, the Guide moves to a
position 10 mm from the edge of the stack, and prepares for the next alignment operation.
Fig. 3-027
661
DP-8060/8045/8035
In case of 2 sheets:
Entry of Entry of
1st sheet 2nd sheet
[1]
1st sheet of following

stack entry
[2] [3]
[4]

Position Sensor (PI5S)
Alignment Motor (M5S)

Motor (M4S)
: Alignment
[1] :
[2] :
[3] :
[4] :
: Escape
Move to poised position

Stapling period
Paper folding/delivery period
Move to following stack size poised position
Fig. 3-028
Alignment Plate
Alignment Motor
M5S
Alignment Plate
Stack
Alignment Plate
Home Position
Sensor (PI5S)
Paper
Positioning Plate
Fig. 3-029
662
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.3.5. Controlling the Phase of the Crescent Roller

1. Outline
If alignment was executed with the Crescent Roller in contact with the stack of sheets, the resulting
friction against the roller causes the stack to move inappropriately (Fig. 3-030). To prevent this
problem, the phase of the roller is identified, and used to determine the timing of alignment.
The phase of the Crescent Roller is identified by the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor (PI12S). The flag
for the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor is mounted to the Crescent Roller Shaft. The flag will leave the
Sensor while the Roller Shaft rotates, turning the Sensor ON or OFF, enabling the assumption that the
Crescent Roller is positioned at the opposite side of the stack (Fig. 3-032). The Alignment Plates are
operated to correspond with this change in the state of the Sensor.
Crescent Roller Phase
Sensor (PI12S)
Alignment Plates
Flag
Crescent Roller
M1S
Feed Motor
Stack
Fig. 3-030
Alignment Plates

Sensor (PI12S)
Sensor Flag
Crescent Roller
If the crescent roller was
in contact with the stack,
alignment operation
could be obstructed.
Fig. 3-031
663
DP-8060/8045/8035
Alignment operation is
started when the flag
has covered the sensor
and the crescent roller is
away from the stack.
Fig. 3-032
1st sheet
3rd sheet
2nd sheet
4th sheet
Sensor (PI12S)
Alignment operation
Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 3-033
664
Feed motor
stops
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.4. Stitching System

1. Outline
The stitching system stitches the center of an output stack with Staples.
To enable stitching at two locations on a stack, two Stitcher Units (front, rear) are used. Each Stitcher
Unit is equipped with a Stitcher Motor (M7S, M6S) for drive, a Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S,
MS5S) for detection of position, and a Staple Sensor (MS6S, MS4S) for detection of the presence/
absence of staples.
The Stitcher Base is designed so that it may be drawn out to the front from the Saddle Stitch for
replacement of the Staple Cartridge or removal of a staple jam. The Stitcher Unit in Sensor (PI16S) is
used to make sure that the Stitcher Base is properly fitted to the Saddle Stitcher.
Safety Switches are not mounted for the Saddle Stitch Unit (front, rear), as the location does not allow
access by the user.
Stitcher (rear)
Stitcher (front)
Stack
Fig. 3-034
665
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Saddle Stitch Unit Operation

The Saddle Stitch Base Unit consists of two Stitchers, and Stitcher Bases. The Stitchers are fixed in
position, and are not designed to slide or swing.
Stitching is executed by driving the Rotary Cam by the Stitcher Motor (M7S, M6S). The Front and Rear
Stitcher Units are operated with a time delay so as to prevent wrinkling of paper, and to limit the load
applied to the Power Supply. (A time delay for initiating the Stitcher Motor startup current helps
decrease the load on the Power Supply.)
The Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S, MS5S) is used to monitor the movement of the Rotary
Cam, enabling identification of individual stitcher operations. The presence/absence of staples inside
the Staple Cartridge fitted to the Stitcher is detected by the Staple Sensor (MS6S, MS4S).
The Alignment Plates keep both edges of the stack in place while stitching takes place.
Fig. 3-035
Stitcher Home Position Sensor
(front) (MS7S)
Stitcher Motor (front) (MS7)
Stitcher Home Position Sensor
(rear) (MS5S)
Stitcher Motor (rear) (M6S)
No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S)
: Alignment
Fig. 3-036
Cam
Mount
Fig. 3-037
666
: Escape
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.5. Folding / Delivery System

1. Outline
The paper folding mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Folding Rollers, Paper Pushing Plate,
and Paper Positioning Plate.
The Guide Plate is used to cover the Folding Rollers while sheets are output as to prevent sheets from
coming into contact with the Folding Rollers during output. Before the stack is folded, the Guide Plate
moves down to enable the Folding Rollers to operate. The Folding Rollers are driven by the Paper
Folding Motor (M2S), and the drive of the motor is monitored by the Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor
(PI4S). The mechanism is also equipped with a Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI12S) for
detecting the position of the Paper Folding Rollers.
The Paper Pushing Plate is driven by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S), and the drive of the Paper
Pushing Plate Motor is monitored by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor (PI1S). The Paper
Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S), and the Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor
(PI15S) are used to detect the position of the Paper Pushing Plate.
After being folded in half by the Paper Folding Rollers, the stack is moved ahead by the Delivery Roller
for delivery. The Delivery Roller is driven by the Paper Folding Motor. The Delivery Sensor (PI11S) is
mounted to the Delivery Assembly to detect delivery of paper. The Paper Tray Sensor (PI6S) is used to
detect the presence/absence of paper on the tray, but does not detect jams. The Vertical Path Paper
Sensor (PI17S) serves to detect the presence of paper after jam removal.
2. Controlling the Movement of Stacks
When a stack has been stitched (2 points), the Paper Positioning Plate lowers so that the stack will
move to where the Paper Folding Rollers come into contact with the stack, and where the Paper
Pushing Plate is located. The position of the Paper Positioning Plate is controlled in reference to the
number of motor pulses coming from the Paper Positioning Home Position Sensor (PI7S).
At the same time as the Paper Positioning Plate operates, the Guide Plate lowers so that folding may
take place.
Stitcher ends
Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S)
Guide Motor (M3S)

Guide Plate Home Position Sensor
(PI13S)
Fig. 3-038
667
Equivalent of specific
number of pulses
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Folding a Stack
A stack is folded by the action of the Paper Folding Rollers, and the Paper Pushing Plate. The Paper
Pushing Plate pushes against the center of a stack toward the roller contact section. The Paper
Pushing Plate starts at its home position, and waits at the leading edge position until the stack has
been drawn to the Paper Folding Roller, and is gripped for a length of 10 mm. When the Paper Folding
Roller has gripped the stack for a length about 10 mm, the Paper Pushing Plate Motor starts to rotate
once again, and the Paper Pushing Plate returns to its home position. The stack gripped in this way by
the Paper Folding Roller is drawn further by the Paper Folding Roller, and then is moved by the
Delivery Roller to the Paper Tray.
Half of the peripheral area of the Paper Folding Rollers excluding the center part is punched out. This
punched out area only feeds the paper as the Paper Feeding Roller (lower) contacts the Paper
Feeding Roller (upper) only at the center of the roller to prevent the paper from wrinkling. As the Paper
Feeding Roller (lower) contacts the Paper Feeding Roller (upper) at their entire surfaces on the
remaining half of the peripheral area, paper folding starts from this half of the peripheral area, and
paper is fed while it is being folded. The stop position of the Paper Folding Rollers is in this half of the
peripheral area.
The paper folding start and stop positions on the Paper Folding Rollers is controlled according to the
motor lock signals from the Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S).
Paper Pushing Plate Top
Paper Pushing Plate Home

Paper Folding Roller (upper)

Sensor Flag
Paper Folding Home
Position Sensor
(PI21S)
Paper Folding
Roller (lower)
Paper Pushing Plate
M8S
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor
Stack of Sheets Paper
Folding Motor
M2S
Fig. 3-039
Paper Pushing Plate Top Paper Pushing Plate Home
Position Sensor (PI15S) Position Sensor (PI14S)
Sensor Flag
Paper Folding Home
Position Sensor
(PI21S)
Paper Pushing Plate
M8S
M2S
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor
Paper
Folding Motor
Fig. 3-040
668
DP-8060/8045/8035
[Paper folding start position]

Stack of Sheets
Paper Pushing Plate

Delivery Outlet
Paper Feed Inlet
Sensor Flag
Paper Folding
Home Position
Sensor (PI21S)
Paper folding/feeding is performed.
Paper feeding is performed.
Fig. 3-041
[Paper folding roller stop position]
Delivery outlet
Paper feed inlet
Sensor flag
Paper folding
home position
sensor (PI21S)
Paper folding/feeding is performed.
Paper feeding is performed.
Fig. 3-042
669
DP-8060/8045/8035
Paper Folding Motor (M2S)
Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S)

Paper Pushing Plate Home Position
Sensor (PI14S)
Equivalent of 10mm by paper folding motor
Paper Pushing Plate Top Position
Sensor (PI15S)
Delivery Sensor (PI11S)
Paper Tray Sensor (PI6S)

Paper Folding Home Position
Sensor (PI21S)
: Motor CW
: Motor CCW
Fig. 3-043
4. Double Folding a Stack
To fold a stack consisting of 10 or more A4-R or LTR-R sheets, folding is executed twice for the same
sheet.
The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse for an equivalent of 20 mm after gripping the stack for a
length of 20mm, enabling the Paper Folding Rollers to apply an increased degree of pressure along
the crease on the stack. Then, the Paper Folding Rollers rotate normally, and the Paper Pushing Plate
returns to its home position while the stack is being delivered. This way, a stack requiring a large force
may properly be folded with less pressure.
a. The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the stack in the direction of the Paper Folding Rollers.
Paper Pushing Plate
M2S
M8S
Paper Folding Motor

Paper
Folding
Roller
Fig. 3-044
670
DP-8060/8045/8035
b. The Paper Folding Rollers grip the stack for a length of about 20 mm.
20mm
(appro
x
.)
M2S
Paper Folding Motor
Fig. 3-045
c. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse, pushing back the stack for a length of about 20 mm
(reverse feeding).
20mm
(appro
x
.)
M2S
Paper Folding Motor
Fig. 3-046
671
DP-8060/8045/8035
d. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate again, feeding out the stack. The Paper Pushing Plate returns to
its home position.
M2S
M8S
Paper Folding Motor
Fig. 3-047
Gripping of paper stack
Equivalent of 20mm
Equivalent of 20mm (reverse feeding)

(M8S)
Paper Pushing Plate Home
Delivery Sensor (PI11S)
Paper Tray Sensor (PI6S)
Paper Folding Home
: Motor CW
Fig. 3-048
672
: Motor CCW
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.6. Checking for a Jam

1. Checking for a Jam
The Saddle Stitch Unit identifies any of the following conditions as a jam, and sends the jam signal to
the Copier. In response, the Copier may stop copying operation, and indicate the presence of a jam on
the Control Panel.
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI11S
PI17S
PI15S
PI14S
Fig. 3-049
No.
PI11S
PI14S
PI15S
PI17S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor
Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor
Vertical Path Paper Sensor
No. 1 Paper Sensor
No. 2 Paper Sensor
No. 3 Paper Sensor
Table. 3-003
673
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Inlet Delay Jam (91H)

The No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) on the Paper Sensor PCB does not turn ON for a specific period of
time after the Inlet Sensor (PI1) of the Finisher turned ON.
T
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
No. 1 Paper Sensor

(PI18S)
No. 1 Paper Sensor

(PI18S)
Feed Motor (M1S)
Feed Motor (M1S)
T:
100 (mm)
Delivery speed (mm/sec)
T:
Jam
Load stops
100 (mm)
Delivery speed (mm/sec)
Fig. 3-050
3. Inlet Stationary Jam (A1H)
The No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S), No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S), and No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S) on the
Paper Sensor PCB do not turn OFF when the stack has been fed for a specific period after the No. 1
Paper Sensor (PI18S) turns ON. The Paper Sensor used varies according to the paper size.
a. Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm) Stack
No. 1 Paper Sensor
(PI18S)
Normal
No. 1 Paper Sensor

(PI18S)
T
Jam
Feed Motor (M1S)
Feed Motor (M1S)
T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm
Fig. 3-051
674
Load stops
DP-8060/8045/8035
b. B4 Stack
T
No. 1 Paper Sensor
(PI18S)
T
No. 2 Paper Sensor

(PI19S)
T
Normal
No. 1 Paper Sensor

(PI18S)
Normal
No. 2 Paper Sensor

(PI19S)
Feed Motor (M1S)
Jam
T
Jam
Feed Motor (M1S)
Load stops
Note:
The illustration shows two Sensors checking for jams. Single detection, however, uses only one
sensor.
Fig. 3-052
c. LTR-R / A4-R Stack
T
No. 1 Paper Sensor

(PI18S)
T
No. 2 Paper Sensor

(PI19S)
No. 3 Paper Sensor
(PI20S)
Normal
No. 1 Paper Sensor

(PI18S)
Normal
No. 2 Paper Sensor

(PI19S)
Normal
No. 3 Paper Sensor

(PI20S)
Feed Motor (M1S)
Jam
Jam
Jam
Feed Motor (M1S)
Load stops
Note:
The illustration shows two Sensors checking for jams. Single detection, however, uses only one
sensor.
Fig. 3-053
4. Delivery Delay Jam (92H)
a. By Delivery Sensor
The Delivery Sensor (PI11S) does not turn ON within a specific period of time after the Paper
Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor has turned ON.
T
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
T
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Normal
Paper Folding Motor

(M2S)
Jam
Paper Folding Motor

(M2S)
Load stops
T : Equivalent of 180 mm
T : Equivalent of 180 mm
Fig. 3-054
675
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Delivery Stationary Jam (A2H)

a. By Vertical Path Paper Sensor
The Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) does not turn OFF within a specific period of time (feeding)
after the Delivery Sensor (PI11S) has turned ON. (i.e., the trailing edge of the stack does not leave
the Vertical Path Paper Sensor.)
T
Vertical Path Paper

Sensor (PI17S)
Vertical Path Paper

Sensor (PI17S)
Normal
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Paper Folding Motor

(M2S)
Paper Folding Motor

(M2S)
T : Feeding of
Paper length
130 +50 mm
2
T : Feeding of
Jam
Paper length
130 +50 mm
2
Note:
The length 130 mm is the length of the feeding path from the Vertical Path Paper Sensor to the
Delivery Paper Sensor, while the length 50 mm is a margin.
Fig. 3-055
b. By Delivery Sensor
T
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Normal
Paper Folding Motor

(M2S)
T : Feeding of
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Jam
Paper Folding Motor

(M2S)
Load stops
Paper length
x 1.5 mm
2
T : Feeding of
Paper length
x 1.5 mm
2
Fig. 3-056
6. Power-ON Jam (87H)
Any of the No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S), No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S), No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S),
Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) and Delivery Sensor (PI11S) on the Paper Sensor PCB detects
paper at power-ON.
7. Door Open Jam (88H / 89H)
The Front Door Open/Closed Sensor (PI2S), Outlet Cover Sensor (PI3S), or Inlet Cover Sensor (PI9S)
finds that the Respective Cover is open during operation.
8. Stitcher Staple Jam (86H)
When the Stitcher Motor (M7S/M6S) is rotating clockwise, the Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S/
MS5S) does not turn ON within 0.5 sec. after it has turned OFF. In addition, the sensor turns ON within
0.5 sec after the motor has been rotated counter-clockwise.
Reference:
When all doors are closed after the user has removed the jam, the Saddle Stitch Unit checks
whether the Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) has detected the presence of paper. If the sensor
has detected paper, the unit will identify the condition as being faulty jam removal, and send the jam
signal to the Copier once again.
676
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.3.7. Power Supply

1. Outline
When the Copier Power Switch is turned ON, two 24V Power Lines are supplied by the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Of the two 24V Lines, one is used to Drive Solenoids. The 24V Power from the Finisher Controller PCB
to solenoids does not pass through any interlocks. The 24V Power to motors, on the other hand, will
not be supplied if any of the three door Switches is open.
The 24V line is used for the generation of 5V power intended for sensors.
Inlet Door Front Door Delivery
Switch
Switch Door Switch
(MS1S)
(MS2S)
(MS3S)
24V
24V
Circuit
Breaker
(CB1)
Finisher
Controller
PCB
24V
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
5V
Motor systems
Solenoids
Sensors
(Q6)
24VR
Regulator IC
5V
Logic
Fig. 3-057
2. Protective Mechanisms
The 24VDC Power Supply used for motors, and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker (CB1).
The 24V Power Supply used to drive the Feed Motor (M1S), Alignment Motor (M5S), and the Paper
Positioning Plate Motor (M4S) is equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows.
677
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.4.
Punch Unit (Option) Operation

This chapter discusses the purpose, and role of each of the Punch Unit's functions, and the principles of
operation used for the Punch Unit mechanical, and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which
The
symbol in drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by
In descriptions of digital circuits on the Punch Unit, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0"
indicates a low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to the circuits.
diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up the components.
11.1.4.1.1. Outline
The Punch Unit (option) is attached on the feed path between the Copier, and the Finisher.
The Punch Unit does not have a paper feed mechanism. Paper from the Copier is fed by feed drive from the
Finisher via the Punch Unit. When the trailing edge of the paper from the Copier reaches the Punch Unit,
the paper stops temporarily, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch the trailing edge of the paper. This
operation is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB, and each of the parts on the Finisher is driven by the
Punch Driver PCB.
Punch Driver PCB
Finisher unit control system
Punch
drive
system
Fig. 4-001
678
Horizontal
registration
drive
system
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.4.1.2. Inputs to and Outputs from Punch Driver PCB

1. Inputs to Punch Driver PCB (1/3)
Punch Driver PCB
PI1P
J102-3
-2
-1
J1A-1
+5V
-2
SREGHP
-3
When the punch

slide unit is at the
home position, 1.
PI2P
J105-1
-2
-3
J1B-6
+5V
-5
PUNCHCLK
-4
When the punch

motor is rotating
oscillates between
1 and 0.
PI3P
J104-2
-3
-1
J1B-2
+5V
-3
PUNCHHP*
-1
When the hole

puncher is at the
home position, 0.
Horizontal
Registration
Home
Position Sensor
Punch
Motor
Clock
Sensor
Punch
Home
Position
System
Upper
Door
Switch
+24V
N.O.
J5-1
-2
Front
Door
Switch
When the upper

door is closed, 1.
MS1P
N.O.
UDROPN
J5-3
When the front door

is closed, 1.
MS2P
-4
FDROPN
Photosensor PCB
+5V
PTR1
PTR2
PTR3
PTR4
PTR5
+5V
J115-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
J7-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-1
-13
Fig. 4-002
679
SREG1*
SREG2*
SREG3*
SREG4*
PAEND*
When a paper is
detected, 0.
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Outputs from Punch Driver PCB (2/3)

Punch Driver PCB
LED PCB
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
J116-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
J7-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-1
-6
LEDON5
LEDON4
LEDON3
LEDON2
LEDON1
Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB
When 1, LED is
ON.
+5V
LED6
J1B-8
PTR6
LEDON*
When light is blocked, 0.

9
10
DFULL
Punch Motor
J114-1
J2-1
-2
-2
M1P
Horizontal Registration
Motor
+24V
J1A-7
J114-5
-8 B*
-9 A*
-4
M2P
According to direcrtion of
motor rotation, changes
between + and -.
-3
-10 B
-11 A
-2
-1
Fig. 4-003
680
The pulse signal is

switched according to
motor rotation.
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Outputs from Punch Driver PCB (3/3)

Punch Driver PCB
J21A-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
J3A-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
J21B-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
J3B-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
+24V
J4-4
-3
-2
-1
Fig. 4-004
681
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.4.2. Punch Operation

11.1.4.2.1. Outline
The Punch Unit is located on the feed path between the Copier and the Finisher, and successively punches
holes when the paper stops temporarily. When the trailing edge of the paper reaches the Punch Unit, the
Inlet Roller of the Finisher Unit temporarily stops the paper, and holes are punched on the trailing edge of
the paper.
The Punch Unit consists of a die and hole puncher (punch blade). The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch
Motor (M1P). The Hole Puncher is attached to the eccentric cam of the Punch Shaft, and rotary action of
the Punch Shaft is converted to reciprocal motion to perform punching.
Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC Motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by Punch Home
Position Sensor (PI3P). To stop the DC Punch Motor accurately at its home position, the Punch Motor Clock
Sensor (PI2P) counts a predetermined number of clock pulses to stop the Punch Motor. A single punch
operation is performed by rotating the Punch Shaft 180 from its home position. Five Light Sensors
(Photosensor PCB) are located at the upper side of the inlet paper feed path of the Punch Unit, and a set of
five LEDs (LED PCB) are located at the lower side. These Sensors and LEDs function as five Sensors. The
Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PTR5) are the Trailing Edge Sensor, and are used for detecting the trailing edge
of the paper. The remaining Sensor (LED1 to LED4, PTR1 to PTR4) are Horizontal Registration Sensors,
and are used for detecting the inner position of the paper for determining the hole punching position.
The Punch Motor, Punch Unit, and above Sensors comprise the Punch Slide Unit. This Unit moves
backwards and forwards according to the size of the paper. Backward, and forward movement is driven by
the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the
Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI1P). The Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a 2phase stepping motor.
The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor is driven by the Punch Driver PCB according to control
signals from the Finisher Controller PCB.
Punch scraps caused by punching are stored in the Punch Trash Box. Detection of the paper scraps in the
Punch Trash Box is performed by a deflective sensor (LED6 and PTR6 on the Punch Trash Box Full
Detector PCB unit).
682
Punch Driver PCB (2/2)
Fig. 4-005
683
3
5
2
Horizontal registration motor (M2P) drive signal
Horizontal registration home position (PI1P)

detection signal SREGHP
Scrap full detection signal

(LED6, PTR6) DFULL
Punch home position (PI3P)

detection signal
Punch motor clock (PI2P)

detection signal PUNCHCLK
Punch motor (M1P) drive signal
Horizontal registration detection signal

(LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4) SREG1
SREG to 4
Trailing edge detection signal PAEND
DP-8060/8045/8035
Punch Driver PCB (1/2)
PTR1
LED1
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.4.2.2. Punch Operation

The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The hole puncher home position is detected by the
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P).
In all there are four types of Punch Unit depending on the destination: 2- hole type (Punch Unit A1), 2-/3hole Dual Use (Punch Unit B1), and two 4-hole types (Punch Unit C1 and Punch Unit D1). With the 2-hole,
and 4-hole types, the Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally, and punching is performed by the Punch Shaft
rotating 180 from its home position. With the 2-/3-hole dual use type, too, the Hole Puncher is moved
reciprocally and punching is performed by the Punch Shaft rotating 180 from its home position. However,
half of the peripheral area of the Punch Shaft can be used as a 2-hole type while the other half can be as a
3-hole type. Whether the Punch Shaft is used as a 2-hole punch or a 3-hole punch depends on the
instructions from the Copier.
1. 2- / 4-hole Type
At the home position, the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. Punching of the first sheet ends when
the Punch Shaft has rotated in the forward direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position
Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. Punching of the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has
rotated in the reverse direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed
from OFF to ON.
The following illustrates when two sheets are punched.
a. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the first sheet.
Punch Home
Position
Sensor (PI3P)
Sensor Flag
Punch Shaft
Eccentric
Cam
Die
Hole
Puncher
Sheet
Die
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
Punch Trash
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
forward direction/
hole punched]
Fig. 4-006
684
[punch shaft is rotated

180 in the forward
direction/punch
operation completed]
DP-8060/8045/8035
b. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the second sheet.
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
reverse direction/
hole punched]
Fig. 4-007
685

180 in the reverse
direction/punch
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. 2- / 3-hole Dual Use Type

At the home position, the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To punch two holes, punching of the first
sheet ends when the punch shaft half peripheral area has rotated in the forward direction 180, and the
state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. At this time, the 3-hole
puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction) on the remaining
half peripheral area on the Punch Shaft.
Punching of the second sheet ends when the punch shaft half peripheral area has rotated in the
reverse direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed from OFF to
ON. Also at this time, the 3-hole puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher
rise direction) on the remaining half peripheral area on the Punch Shaft. To punch three holes, the 2Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction).
The following illustrates punching when two sheets are punched with two holes.
a. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the first sheet.
Punch Home
Position
Sensor (PI3P)
Sensor Flag
Punch Shaft
Eccentric
Cam
Die
Hole
Puncher
Sheet
Die
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
Punch Trash
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
forward direction/
hole punched]

180 in the forward
direction/punch
Fig. 4-008
When two holes are punched, the 3-Hole Puncher is fed reciprocally in the escape direction (hole
puncher rise direction) as shown below.
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
reverse direction/
hole puncher rises
to topmost position]
Fig. 4-009
686

180 in the reverse
direction/hole puncher
returns to original
position]
DP-8060/8045/8035
b. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the second sheet.
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
reverse direction/
hole punched]

180 in the reverse
direction/punch
Fig. 4-010
When two holes are punched, the 3-Hole Puncher is fed reciprocally in the escape direction (hole
puncher rise direction) as shown below.
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
reverse direction/
hole puncher rises
to topmost position]
Fig. 4-011
687

180 in the reverse
direction/hole puncher
returns to original
position]
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.4.2.3. Horizontal Registration Operation

Horizontal registration drive of the Punch Slide Unit is performed by the Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position
Sensor (PI1P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of the paper by the Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PTR5), and Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 to 4, SREG1 to 4), and is moved to the trailing
edge position matched to the paper size.
The following shows horizontal registration operation.
1. When the leading edge of the paper from the Copier is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5,
PTR5) on the Punch Unit, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit
towards the front.
Punch Slide Unit

Motor (M2P)
Trailing Edge
Detection Sensor
(LED5, PTR5)
Sheet Delivery
Direction
Sheet
Fig. 4-012
2. After the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4) detect the edge of the paper at its
inner side in keeping with the paper size signals arriving from the Copier, the Horizontal Registration
Motor (M2P) drives the Punch Slide Unit to a predetermined position further towards the front, and
stops the Unit at this position.
Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1):

detects the edge of A3, A4, LTR and 279mm x
432mm (11" x 17") papers
detects the edge of B4, B5, LTR-R, and LGL
papers.
detects the edge of A4-R paper
Horizontal Registration Sensor 4(LED4, PTR4):
detects the edge of B5-R paper
Fig. 4-013
688
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PTR5) detects the trailing edge of the paper, drive of the Inlet
Feed Motor (M9), and First Feed Motor (M1) on the Finisher is stopped to stop paper feed. Next, the
Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to punch the holes.
Punch
Fig. 4-014
4. When the punching operation ends, drive of the Inlet Feed Motor (M9), and First Motor (M1) on the
Finisher is started, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is operated in the reverse direction, and the
Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position where it comes to a stop.
5. Even if paper to be punched continues to arrive, the Punch Slide Unit returns to its home position for
each arriving sheet, and steps 1 to 4 are repeated.
Trailing Edge Detection Sensor
(LED5, PTR5)
Horizontal Registration Sensor
(LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4)
Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P)
Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Motor (M1P)
Punch Home Position Sensor
(PI3P)
: Motor CW
Fig. 4-015
689
: Motor CCW
DP-8060/8045/8035

1. Outline
24V power and 5V power are supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB when the Power Switch on the
Copier is turned ON.
24V power is used for driving Motors, while 5V power is used for driving Sensors and the ICs on the
Punch Driver PCB.
24V power to the Motors is not supplied when either of the two Door Switches on the Punch Unit is
open.
Upper Door
Switch
(MS1P)
Front Door
Switch
(MS2P)
24V
24V
Motor System
Punch Driver PCB
Finisher
Controller
PCB
5V
5V
5V
Sensor
Logic
Fig. 4-016
2. Protection Function
The 24V power supplies for the Punch Motor (M1P) and Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) are
equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows.
690
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.5.
Mechanical Construction
11.1.5.1. Finisher Unit

This chapter describes the mechanical features, operations, disassembly and reassembly procedures.
Be sure to observe the following points when disassembling and reassembling the Machine:
1.
Before disassembling or reassembling, be sure to unplug the Power Plug from the wall outlet.
2. Reassemble parts in reverse order, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Reassemble Screws to their original locations, ensuring their correct length and diameter.
4. As a rule, do not operate the Machine with any parts removed.
11.1.5.1.1. External Components

Tray [1]
[4] Upper Door Assembly

[2] Rear
Cover (3)
Figures in parentheses ( ) indicate the number of

mounting Screws.
[3]
Front
Door
Fig. 5-001
1. Removing of the Front Door Assembly.
[4]
[5]
(1) Open the Front Door Assembly [1].

(2) Remove the Screw [2], and remove the Bushing
[3] (center).
(3) Remove the Screw [4], and remove the Bushing
(top) [5]. Then, remove the Front Door Assembly.
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 5-002
691
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Removing the Rear Cover.

[1] Upper
Door
Assembly
[3]
Rear
Cover
(1) Open the Upper Door Assembly [1].

(2) Remove the 3 Screws [2], and lift the Rear
Cover [3] to remove.
[2] Screws
Fig. 5-003
3. Removing the Upper Door Assembly.
[1]
(1) Open the Upper Door Assembly [1].

(2) Remove the 2 Claws [2], and remove the Upper
Door Assembly.
[2]
Fig. 5-004
4. Removing the Front Cover.
(2) Remove 1 Screw [2], and remove the Front
Cover [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 5-005
692
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Removing the Tray Rack Assembly.

[2]
(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.)

(2) Remove the Rear Lower Cover also.
(See Fig. 5-031.)
(3) Disconnect the J201 [1] Connector, Ground
Wire [2], and release the Harness Stop [3].
[3]
[1]
Fig. 5-006
[6]
[4] [5]
(4) Remove the Slide Guide [4].

(5) Remove the End Cap (F) [5] and End Cap (R)
[6].
(6) Carefully lift the Tray Rack Assembly [7] to
remove.
[7]
Fig. 5-007
[1]
Caution:
When reinstalling the Tray Rack Assembly back
into the Finisher Assembly, before inserting it, be
sure to release the Tray Lift Motor Gear Clutch [1]
with a Screwdriver or a similar object. Take extra
care during this operation.
Fig. 5-008
693
DP-8060/8045/8035
6. Removing the Grate-Sharped Upper Guide.

[1]
[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]

(2) Release the Tray Lift Motor Gear Clutch with a
Screwdriver or a similar object while supporting
the Tray Rack Assembly, to its lowest position.
(See Fig. 5-008.)
(3) Remove the Slide Guide [1].
(4) Remove 5 Screws [2] (M4).
(5) Remove 1 Screw [3] (M3), and remove the
Grate-Shaped Upper Guide [4].
Fig. 5-009
7. Removing the Grate-Sharped Lower Guide.
[1]
[2]
(1) Remove the Tray Rack Assembly.

(See Fig. 5-006.)
(2) Remove 3 Screws [1] (M4).
(3) Remove 3 Screws [2] (M3), and open the GrateShaped Lower Guide [3] to the front.
[3]
Fig. 5-010
[6]
[4]
(4) Free the Harness [5] from the Harness Stop [4].
(5) Disconnect 2 Connectors [6], and remove the
Grate-Sharped Lower Guide [3].
[5]
[3]
Fig. 5-011
694
DP-8060/8045/8035
8. Removing the Right Guide Assembly.
[3]
[1]

(3) Remove 5 Screws [2], and remove the Right
Guide Assembly [3].
[2]
[2]
Fig. 5-012
11.1.5.1.2. Feeding System

1. Removing the Swing Unit.
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
(1) Remove the Tray Rack Assembly.

(See Fig. 5-006.)
(2) Remove the Grate-Shaped Upper Guide.
(See Fig. 5-009.)
(3) Remove the Grate-Shaped Lower Guide.
(See Fig. 5-010.)
(4) Remove the Harness from the 2 Harness Stops
[1], and disconnect the 4 Connectors [2].
(5) Remove 1 Screw [3], and remove the Stapler
Stay Holder [4].
Fig. 5-013
[5]
[6]
(6) Open the Front Cover [5] and push the Stapler
Unit [6] backward as illustrated.
Fig. 5-014
695
DP-8060/8045/8035
(7) Remove the RB Link Spring [7].

[7]
Fig. 5-015
[8]
(8) Remove 3 Screws [8], and draw out the Swing

Unit [9] towards you.
[9]
[8]
[8]
Fig. 5-016
696
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Removing the Feed Drive Unit.

[1]
[2]
(1) Remove the Finisher Controller PCB.

(See Fig. 5-028.)
(2) Remove the Harness Leads [2] from 2 Harness
Stops [1] at the PCB Base, and disconnect
2 Connectors [3].
[1]
[3]
Fig. 5-017
(3) Remove the Ground Lead [4] and 3 Screws [5],
and pull down the PCB [6] towards you.
[6]
[5]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 5-018
(4) Remove the Harness Leads [8] from 2 Edge
Saddles [7], and remove the PCB Base.
[8]
[7]
[7]
Fig. 5-019
[10]
(5) Remove 3 Screws [9], and remove the Feed

Drive Unit [10].
[9]
[9]
[9]
Fig. 5-020
697
DP-8060/8045/8035
Caution:
Before re-attaching the Feed Drive Unit back on
the Finisher Unit, loosen the Move Gear Stop
Screw [11] to relieve the tension, and then fasten
the Screw after attaching the Feed Drive Unit.
The Move Gear Attachment must be adjusted
when removing and attaching the Swing Unit.
If you forget to fasten the Screw, the Gear Teeth
may disengage, resulting in defective feed.
[11]
Fig. 5-021
698
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Removing the Buffer Roller Assembly.

(1) Remove the Finisher Controller PCB.
(See Fig. 5-027.)
(2) Remove the Feed Drive Unit. (See Fig. 5-021.)
(3) Remove 1 Screw [1], and remove the Guide
Support Plate Assembly [2] to draw out the
Harness Leads [3] towards the Buffer Roller
Assembly side.
[3]
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-022
[5]
[4]
(4) Remove the Front Cover. (See Fig. 5-005.)

(5) Remove 1 Screw [4], and remove the Guide
Support Plate Assembly [5]. Then remove the
Buffer Roller Assembly [6].
[5]
Fig. 5-023
4. Removing the Stapler.
[2]
(1) Open the Front Cover, and move the Stapler

Assembly to the front.
(2) Remove 1 Screw.
(3) Turn the Green Tab to the left, pull out the
Stapler Assembly [2] forward and lift it up by
rotating upwards.
Fig. 5-024
699
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Disconnect 1 Connector [4] of the Stapler

Assembly [3] and remove the Earth Ground.
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-025
(5) Remove 2 Screws (M4) used to hold the Stapler
Cover.
[5]
Stapler
Cover
Fig. 5-026
11.1.5.1.3. PCBs
1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB.
[2]
[3]

(2) Disconnect 16 Connectors [1].
(3) Remove 4 Screws [2], and remove the Finisher
Controller PCB [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-027
700
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.5.2. Saddle Stitch Unit

Figures in parentheses ( ) indicates the number of
mounting Screws
[1]
Rear
Lower
Cover
(4)
Front Lower Door [2]
Fig. 5-028
1. Removing the Front Lower Door Assembly.
(1) Open the Lower Door Assembly [1].
(2) Remove 1 Screw [2] and remove the Bushing
[3], and then remove the Front Lower Door
Assembly.
[3]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-029
2. Removing the Rear Lower Cover.
(1) Remove 4 Screws [1], and remove the Rear
Lower Cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-030
701
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Removing Front Inside Cover.

(1) Open the Front Lower Door Assembly [1].
(2) Remove 1 Screw [2], and remove the Folding
Roller Knob [3].
(3) Remove 5 Screws [4], and remove the Front
Inside Cover [5].
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 5-031
4. Removing the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly.
[1]
(1) Lift up the Open / Close Lever [2] of the Saddle

Delivery Tray Assembly [1], and open the
Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly.
[2]
Fig. 5-032
(2) Remove the Door Shaft [3] in the direction of the
arrow, and draw out towards the front of the
Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [4].
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-033
702
DP-8060/8045/8035
[5]
[6]
(3) Remove the Harness Leads from the Harness

Stop [5], and Edge Saddle [6].
(4) Disconnect 2 Connectors [7], and remove the
Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [8].
[7]
[8]
Fig. 5-034
5. Removing Upper Delivery Guide Assembly.
[2]
[1]

(See Fig. 5-010.)
(2) Remove 2 Screws [1] and Ground Lead [2],
and remove the Upper Delivery Guide
Assembly [3].
[3]
[1]
Fig. 5-035
6. Removing the PCB Cover.
[1]
(1) Remove 4 Screws [4], and remove the PCB

Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-036
703
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.5.2.2. Saddle Unit

1. Removing the Saddle Unit.
[1]
[2]

(See Fig. 5-010.)
(2) Remove the Right Guide Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-012.)
(3) Remove the Front Lower Door Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-030.)
(4) Remove the Rear Lower Cover.
(See Fig. 5-031.)
(5) Remove the Front Inside Cover.
(See Fig. 5-032.)
(6) Remove the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-033.)
(7) Remove the Upper Delivery Guide.
(See Fig. 5-036.)
(8) Remove the PCB Cover. (See Fig. 5-037.)
(9) Disconnect 2 Connectors [1] and remove
2 Screws [2].
Fig. 5-037
(10) Remove Harness Stop [3], and
Harness Lead [4].
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-038
(11) Remove 1 Screw [5].
[5]
Fig. 5-039
704
DP-8060/8045/8035
[6]
(12) Remove 2 Screws [6], and remove the Saddle

Stitch Unit [7] by moving it in the upward
direction.
[6]
[7]
Fig. 5-040
Caution:
When removing the Saddle Unit from the Finisher
Unit Body, prevent the Timing Belt [8] from
catching on the Communications Cable Bracket
[9].
[8]
[9]
Fig. 5-041
705
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Removing the Paper Folding Roller.

(1) Remove the Front Lower Door Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-030.)
(See Fig. 5-032.)
(3) Remove the Upper Delivery Guide.
(See Fig. 5-036.)
[1]
Fig. 5-042
(6) Disconnect 2 Connectors [2], remove 3 Screws
[3], and remove the Paper Pushing Motor
Mount [4].
[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 5-043
(7) Remove the Tension Springs (front [5],
rear [6]).
[5]
Fig. 5-044
[6]
Fig. 5-045
706
DP-8060/8045/8035
(8) Remove 2 C-Rings [7], and remove the Sensor

Flag [8], and 2 Bearings [9] on the rear.
[9]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 5-046
(9) Remove 2 C-Rings [10], and remove the 2
Gears [11] on the front.
[11]
[10]
Fig. 5-047
(10) Remove 2 Bearings [12].
[12]
Fig. 5-048
[16]
(11) Open the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [13].

(12) Remove 2 Screws [14], and remove the 2
Alignment Plates [15].
(13) Slide the Paper Folding Roller [16] to the front,
and pull it out in the delivery direction.
[14]
[14]
[15]
[13]
Fig. 5-049
707
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Installing the Paper Folding Roller.

(1) Attach the Gear [2] so that the grooved section
[1] on the Gear is facing the grooved section [1]
on the Paper Folding Roller to align the
phases.
[1]
Fig. 5-050
4. Removing the Stitcher Mount Unit.
(See Fig. 5-032.)
(2) Remove 1 E-Ring [1], Roller [2], and Shaft [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
Fig. 5-051
(3) Pull out the Stitcher Mount Unit [4] to the front.
[4]
Fig. 5-052
708
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Adjusting the Stitcher Position.

(1) Remove the Front Lower Door.
(See Fig. 5-030.)
(See Fig. 5-032.)
(3) Open the Front Door Assembly.
(4) Pull out the Saddle Stitch Mount Unit to the
front, then pull out the Saddle Stitch towards
you and then pull the Saddle Stitch down.
(5) Remove 3 Screws [1], and remove the Saddle
Stitch Mount Unit Cover [2].
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-053
(6) Remove the Saddle Stitch Positioning Tool [3]
from the back of the Cover.
[3]
Fig. 5-054
(7) If you must adjust the Front Saddle Stitch,
remove the Center Guide Plate [5] and Front
Guide Plate [4] (one screw each). If you must
adjust the Rear Saddle Stitch, remove the
Center Guide Plate [5] and the Rear Guide
Plate [6] (one screw each).
[6]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 5-055
[9]
[8]
(8) If you must adjust the Front Saddle Stitch,

loosen 2 Screws [8] on the Saddle Stitch
Mount [7].
If you must adjust the Rear Saddle Stitch,
loosen 2 Screws [9].
[7]
Fig. 5-056
709
DP-8060/8045/8035
(9) Insert the Tool [10] into the Staple Slot of the
Saddle Stitch [9].
[10]
[9]
Fig. 5-057
(10) Shift down the Saddle Stitch, and turn the
Saddle Stitch Gear so that the boss on the Tool
[11], and the recess of the Mount Match. Then,
tighten the Screws [12] on the Mount to fix them
in place.
[11]
[12]
Fig. 5-058
710
DP-8060/8045/8035
6. Removing the Positioning Plate Unit.

[2]
[3]
(1) Remove the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.

(See Fig. 5-063.)
(2) Disconnect 2 Connectors [1], remove 3
Harness Stops [2], and remove the Harness
Leads [3] from the 2 Edge Saddles [4].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [5], slide the Positioning
Plate Unit [6] once towards the front and remove
from the rear side.
[6]
[1]
[4]
[5]
Fig. 5-059
7. Removing the No. 1 and No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plates.
[1]
[2]

(See Fig. 5-031.)
(3) Remove the Claw [1] of the No. 1 Deflect Plate
Bushing, and pull out the No. 1 Deflect Plate
Shaft [2] toward the rear. (The procedure is the
same for the No. 2 Paper Deflect Plate.)
Fig. 5-060
[3]
(4) After detaching the Front Shaft of the No. 1

Paper Deflect Plate [3] from the Front Side
Plate, remove the No. 1 Paper Deflect Plate.
Fig. 5-061
711
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.5.2.3. PCBs
1. Removing the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
[1]
[2] [3] [2] [2]
[1]
[2]

(2) Remove 4 Screws [1], and 14 Connectors [2],
and remove the Saddle Stitch Controller
PCB [3].
[1]
[1]
Fig. 5-062
11.1.5.3. Punch Unit (Optional)

Upper Cover (3) [1]
[2]
Upper
Cover 2
Figures in parentheses ( ) indicate the number of

mounting Screws.
[4]
Right Guide
Assembly (5)
Front
Door [3]
Fig. 5-063
1. Removing the Right Guide Assembly.
(1) Remove 5 Screws [1], and remove the Right
Guide Assembly [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
Fig. 5-064
712
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Removing the Upper Cover.

(1) Open the Front Door [1], remove 3 Screws [2],
and slacken the inner side of the Right Cover
[3] to remove the Upper Cover [4] from the
hook.
[4]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 5-065
11.1.5.3.2. Puncher Driver System

1. Removing the Punch Motor.
[1]
[3]
(1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See Fig. 5-066.)

(2) Disconnect 1 Connector [1].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [2], and remove the Punch
Motor [3].
[2]
Fig. 5-066
2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor.
[2]
[1]

(See Fig. 5-065.)
(2) Disconnect 1 Connector [1].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [2], and slide the Horizontal
Registration Motor [3] in the direction of the
arrow.
[3]
Fig. 5-067
713
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Removing the Punch Slide Unit.
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-068
Caution:
Exercise care as the Punch Slide Unit opens when
it is removed.
If necessary, perform operations with the Punch
Slide unit open.
(See Fig. 5-065.)
(3) Remove the Photosensor PCB.
(See Fig. 5-078.)
(4) Hold the 2 Lock-type Tie Wraps [1] between
your fingers to remove. (Exercise care not to cut
the Tie Wraps when removing.)
(6) Remove the Harness Lead [4] from the 3
Harness Stops [3].
(7) Remove the E-Ring [5], and Puncher
Spring [6].
[6]
[5]
Fig. 5-069
714
DP-8060/8045/8035
(8) Rotate the Gear [7] in the direction of the arrow,

and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly [8] to
the front.
[8]
[7]
Fig. 5-070
(9) Disconnect the Connector [9], and remove 1
Screw [10] and Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor [11].
[11]
[10]
[9]
Fig. 5-071
(10) Remove 2 Screw [12], and Sensor Base [13].
[12]
[13]
[12]
Fig. 5-072
715
DP-8060/8045/8035
(11) Disconnect the Connector [14].
[14]
Fig. 5-073
(12) Rotate the Gear [7] in the direction of the arrow,
and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly [8]
away from you.
[8]
[7]
Fig. 5-074
(13) Lift up the front side of the Punch Slide Unit
Assembly, and then slide the Unit in the
direction of the arrow to remove.
Fig. 5-075
716
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.5.3.3. PCBs
1. Removing the LED PCB.
(1) Remove the Punch Slide Unit Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-069.)
(2) Remove 1 Screw [1] and the LED PCB [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-076
2. Removing the Photosensor PCB.
[4]
[3]

(2) Remove 2 Screws [1], and remove the Sensor
Plate [2].
(3) Disconnect the Connector [2], and remove the
Photosensor PCB [4].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-077
3. Removing the Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit.
[3]
[2]

(See Fig. 5-065.)
(2) Remove 1 Screw [1], disconnect the Connector
[2], and remove the Punch Trash Box Full
Detector PCB Unit [3].
[1]
Fig. 5-078
717
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Removing the Punch Driver PCB.

[3]
(1) Remove the Punch Unit from the Finisher.

(2) Remove 4 Screws [1], disconnect 4
Connectors [2], and remove the Punch Driver
PCB [3].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-079
718
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.6.
11.1.6.1. Unit Breakdown

11.1.6.1.1. Finisher Unit
The Finisher Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a fixed schedule. Please refer to the section
noted for its estimated parts replacement.
11.1.6.1.2. Saddle Stitch Unit

The Saddle Stitch Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.
11.1.6.1.3. Punch Unit (option)

The Punch Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.
11.1.6.2. PM Items
Some of the parts of the Machine may need to be replaced once or more times because of wear, or tear
during the machines warranty period. Replace them as necessary.

No.
Name
Parts No.
Qty.
Estimated Life
Stapler
FB2-9999-000
500,000 operations
Feed belt
Paddle
2
2
4
1,000,000 copies
FB4-6656-000
FG5-8178-000
FB4-5825-000
1,000,000 copies
Remarks
5,000 operations /
cartridge
Paddle unit
Paddle rubber only

No.
1
Name
Stitch
Parts No.
FB3-7860-000
Qty.
2
Estimated Life
200,000 operations
Remarks
2,000 operations /
cartridge

No.
1
Name
Parts No.
FG6-6156-000
Punch Slide Unit FG6-6157-000
FG6-6158-000
Qty.
1
Remarks
2-hole (Punch Unit)
1,000,000 operations 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit)
4-hole (Punch Unit)
719
Estimated Life
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.6.3. PM Interval
Item
Interval
Feed Belt
When preventive
Paddle
maintenance is performed
Transmission Sensor on the copier.
(Punch Unit) (option)
720
Work
Cleaning
Remarks
Use moist cloth
Use dry cloth
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.
Troubleshooting
11.1.7.1. Adjustments
11.1.7.1.1. Electrical System (finisher unit)
1. Adjusting the Height Sensor (PS1)
Perform the following adjustments whenever you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or the
Height Sensor (PS1).
a. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-001
b. Make sure that there is no unwanted paper on the Trays.
c. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
This causes the Finisher to execute automatic adjustment, in which the Tray Unit will shift Tray 1,
and Tray 2 in sequence.
At the end of adjustment, Trays will return to their home positions.
During adjustment, LED1 flashes. At the end of adjustment, LED1 turns, and remains ON.
If automatic adjustment fails, the mechanism stops while the Tray in question is being adjusted. (At
the same time, LED1 turns OFF.)
d. Shift all bits on SW3 to OFF, and turn OFF the Copier once.
2. Adjusting the Alignment Position
If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or if an alignment fault occurs, adjust as follows.
Performing the steps will affect all paper sizes.
a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit.
b. Set SW3 of the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-002
c. If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. If you are using LTR paper,
press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide, and cause the Alignment Plate to move to A4/LTR
positions.
d. Place 10 sheets of A4/LTR paper between the Alignment Plate, and the Guide Plate, butting them
against the stoppers.
e. Press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB, and butt the Alignment Plate against the sheets.
Pressing SW1 will shift the Alignment Plate to the front in 0.35 mm increments.
Pressing SW2 will shift the Alignment Plate to the rear in 0.35 mm increments.
721
DP-8060/8045/8035
Alignment Plate
Shift by SW2
A4/LTR Paper
Shift by SW1
Stopper
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 7-003
f. Press SW1, and SW2 simultaneously to store the adjustment value.
(This will lower the Swinging Guide.)
g. Shift all bits of SW3 to OFF, and install the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit.
3. Adjusting the Staple Position (stapler movement range)
Adjust as follows if you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB. Performing the steps will affect all
paper sizes, and all stapling positions.
a. Remove the Rear Cover from the Finisher Unit.
b. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-004
c. If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. If you are using LTR paper,
press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide, and cause the feed belt to rotate.
d. Within 5 sec. after pressing the Switch, place one sheet of A4/LTR paper between the Alignment
Plate, and the Guide Plate, butting it against the stoppers.
When the Finisher detects the paper, it will lower the Swing Guide, and execute stapling (rear, 1position). Take out the stapled paper manually as delivery will not be executed.
722
DP-8060/8045/8035
Alignment Stapler
Plate
Stopper
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 7-005
e. If the stapling position is correct, set all bits on SW3 to OFF to end the adjustments. If you need to
change the stapling position, on the other hand, go to the next step.
f. To suit the position of the staple on the paper, press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB as
many times as necessary.
Pressing SW1 will shift the stapling position to the front in 0.3 mm increments.
Pressing SW2 will shift the stapling position to the rear in 0.3 mm increments.
2902mm (A4)/
2732mm (LTR)
Staple
Paper
Shift by
SW2
Shift by
SW1 Feeding direction
Fig. 7-006
g. Press SW1, and SW2 simultaneously.
This will open the Swing Guide, and cause the feed belt to rotate. Placement of one sheet of A4/
LTR paper will cause the Finisher to start stapling.
h. Check the stapling position. If good, set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If re-adjustments are necessary, go
back to step f).
Caution:
The settings held by the Finisher Controller PCB are changed as soon as SW1 or SW2 is
pressed. As such, to recover the previous settings after the press, you must press the other of
the two Switches as many times as you pressed previously.
723
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Adjusting the Buffer Roller Winding Amount

Perform this adjustment in the following instances:
(1) When the Finisher Controller PCB or the EEPROM (Q2) on the Finisher Controller PCB has been
replaced.
(2) When something causes the winding amount to fluctuate
The winding amount is the amount of difference between the 1st, and 2nd sheets wound onto the
Buffer Roller Device in the freed direction.
2nd sheet
Paper exit direction
3rd sheet
Winding
amount
1st sheet
Fig. 7-007
a. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-008
b. Turn the Copier OFF then back ON again.
c. Set the mode setting on the Copier to 1, and the number of originals (A4 or LTR) to 3 in the staple
mode.
d. Press the Copy Start key.
Copying starts, three sheets for the first copy are output as a stack on the Staple Tray, and copying
stops with the copies held at the Exit Roller.
e. Remove the stack of sheets from the Finisher exit taking care to prevent the offset of the output
sheets from changing.
724
DP-8060/8045/8035
f. Measure the winding amount (shift) of the stack of sheets, and compare this amount with the
standard amounts.
This amount should be measured at the center of the paper leading edge.
1st sheet and 2nd sheet: 0 1mm

1st sheet and 3rd sheet: 4mm or less
2nd sheet and 3rd sheet: 4mm or less
Paper exit direction

3rd sheet
2nd sheet
1st sheet
Fig. 7-009
g. If the amount is within the standard, turn the Copier OFF, and then set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If the
amount is outside the standard, perform the following.
h. Turn the Copier OFF, and set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated. If EEPROM (Q2) on
the Finisher Controller PCB has been replaced, proceed to step j).
ON
Fig. 7-010
i. Turn the Copier ON, and then press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
The current setting values are displayed at LED1.
Adjustment value 0
Adjustment value +N
Adjustment value N
Lights for 1 second (once)

Blinks (lights for 0.2 second) for N times.
Lights for 1 second (once), and blinks
(lights for 0.2 second) for N times.
The adjustment width is 0.72 mm for each N=1.

Table 7-001
j. Turn the Copier OFF, and then set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-011
725
DP-8060/8045/8035
k. Press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB as necessary.

Each press of SW1 increments the winding amount in 0.72 mm increments.
Each press of SW2 decrements the winding amount in 0.72 mm increments.
Paper exit
direction
3rd sheet
2nd sheet
1st sheet
Movement of
direction of
1st sheet by SW2
Movement of
direction of
1st sheet by SW1
Fig. 7-012
l. Repeat steps a. though f. twice. Check that the winding amount is within the standard in both times.
m. Turn the Copier OFF, and set all bits of SW3 to OFF.
This completes the adjustment.
5. Setting the Upward Curling Sheet Mode
(1) Outline
Upward curling of sheets stacked on the Tray sometimes increases depending on the state of the
copy paper. If this happens, the stacked sheets are pushed out by subsequent output sheets. This
sometimes increases the alignment deviation.
See the stacking example below.
Subsequent output
sheets contact stacked
sheets
Subsequent output
sheets contact stacked
sheets.
Fig. 7-013
If this happens:
a. Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray, and load the paper again.
If upward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again, return the paper in the Paper
Tray to its original orientation.
From here on, too, if upward curling is excessive, resulting in stacked sheets being pushed out
by subsequent output sheets, try setting the upward curling sheet mode as indicated.
726
DP-8060/8045/8035
(2) Setting the upward curling sheet mode

a. Turn the Copier OFF.
ON
Fig. 7-014
c. Turn the copier ON.
When the Machine enters the upward curling sheet mode, the stop position of the Stacking Tray
is lowered by about 15 mm when stack sheets are output to prevent subsequent output sheets
from catching on the sheets on the Stacking Tray.
After setting this mode, if sheets with little curling or downward curling sheets are output, and
stacked, the Stacking Tray is lowered too far. For this reason, sheets are sometimes stacked
away from the stacking wall. (Fig 7-015). Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper
used by the customer.
Fig. 7-015
6. Setting the Downward Curling Sheet Mode
(1) Outline
Downward curling of sheets stacked on the tray sometimes increases depending on the state of the
copy paper, If this happens, the sheets are sometimes stacked away from the stacking wall when
they are output, and stacked on the Stacking Tray.
See the stacking example below.
Fig. 7-016
727
DP-8060/8045/8035
If this happens:
a. Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray, and load the paper again.
If downward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again, return the paper in the
Paper Tray to its original orientation.
From here on, too, if downward curling is excessive, resulting in output sheets being stacked
incorrectly, try setting the downward curling sheet mode as indicated.
(2) Setting the downward curling sheet mode
a. Turn the Copier OFF.
ON
Fig. 7-017
c. Turn the Copier ON.
When the Machine enters the downward curling sheet mode, the stop position of the Stacking
Tray is raised by about 10mm when stack sheets are output so that output sheets are stacked
without being away from the stacking wall.
After setting this mode, if sheets with little curling or upward curling sheets are output, and
stacked, the stacking tray is raised too far. For this reason, sheets are stacked pressed out by
subsequent output sheets. (Fig. 7-018). Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper
used by the customer.
Fig. 7-018
728
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.1.2. Electrical System (Saddle Stitch Unit)

1. Adjusting the Folding Position
The folding position is adjusted by changing the settings of bits 6 through 8 of DIPSW1 on the Saddle
Stitch Controller PCB to match the stitching position (i.e., adjusting the distance over which the Paper
Positioning Plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position.)
If you have replaced the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB, be sure to set the new DIPSW1 so that the
settings will be the same as those on the old DIPSW1. If, for any reason, you must change the
following position, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the PCB cover, and set bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB as
indicated.
ON
Do not change bits 5 through 8.
Fig. 7-019
b. Remove the Rear Cover of the Saddle Stitch Unit, and tape the actuator of the Inlet Cover Open
Sensor (PI9S), and the Inlet Cover Open Detection Switch (MS1S) of the Saddle Stitch Unit in
place.
c. Press SW2 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB so that the Feed Motor (M1S) starts to rotate.
d. Open the Inlet Cover, and insert two sheets of A3 or LDR paper. (Push them in by hand until the
leading edge of the sheets butts against the Paper Positioning Plate.)
Ledger / A3 Paper
Insert direction
Fig. 7-020
729
DP-8060/8045/8035
Sheets
Mark
Fig. 7-021
e. Close the Inlet Door while holding it down with your hand.
f. Press SW2 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.
The Saddle Stitch Unit will stitch the sheets, and fold, and deliver the stack automatically.
g. Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position, and the folding position. Then, perform
positive width adjustment or negative width adjustment to suit the relationship between the
stitching position, and the folding position.
If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform positive width adjustment.
If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform negative width adjustment.
Positive Width
Adjustment
Negative Width
Adjustment
Folding position
Stitching position
Stitching position
Folding position
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide +1 mm.
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide -0.5 mm.
Fig. 7-022
h. Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on DIPSW1 referring to Table 7-001 below.
If the width adjustment is 0,
The stitching position, and the folding position match, requiring no change.
If for positive width adjustment,
Set DIPSW1 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate
setting in Table 7-001 is provided.
For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to +2, and the interval is +1 mm, set DIPSW1 to reflect
2.
If for negative width adjustment
Set DIPSW1 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting is
provided.
For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to 1, and the interval is +0.5 mm, set DIPSW1 to
reflect +1.
730
DP-8060/8045/8035
DIPSW1 Bit Settings

Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Settings
(in units of 0.5 mm)
+3
+2
+1
0
-1
-2
-3
Do not touch the following:

Bit 6
ON
Bit 7
OFF
Bit 8
OFF
Table 7-002
i. Set bits 1 through 4 on DIPSW1 to OFF.
11.1.7.1.3. Electrical System (Punch Unit (option))

1. Sensor Output Adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the Punch Driver PCB, Transmission Sensor (Photosensor PCB / LED
PCB) or Reflection Sensor (Punch Trash Box Full Detection PCB unit) has been replaced.
b. Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-024
Pressing this Switch automatically adjusts sensor output.
d. Set all bits on DIPSW2 to OFF.
2. Registering the Number of Punch Holes
This operation registers which Punch Unit is attached to the IC on the Punch Driver PCB so that the
Punch Unit can be identified by the Finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed when
the Punch Driver PCB has been replaced. This operation, however, is not necessary on the Japanese
market as the 2-Hole Puncher is already registered as the default for new service parts.
The following describes a reference example of how to register the number of punch holes.
ON
Fig. 7-025
c. Set bits 7, and 8 on DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB to match the number of punch holes of
731
DP-8060/8045/8035
the attached punch unit according to Table 7-002.

DIPSW3 bit settings
Bit 7
Bit 8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Number of Punch Holes

2-hole (punch Unit)
2-/3-hole (Punch Unit)
4-hole (punch Unit)
Table 7-003
As the number of punch holes on domestic models is two, bits 7, and 8 of DIPSW3 are both OFF.
Settings for overseas models are provided for reference.
d. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Press SW2 when setting a 2-/3- hole model (Punch
Unit-B1). Pressing this switch registers the number of punch holes to the Punch Driver PCB.
e. Set all bits on DIPSW3 to OFF.
3. Checking the Sensitivity Level of the Transmission Sensor
How dirty the Transmission Sensor (Photosensor PCB/LED PCB) can be checked by the number of
times that LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB lights. For this reason, how dirty the Transmission
Sensor is serves as a guide for when to perform cleaning during periodic maintenance.
ON
Fig. 7-026
Pressing this Switch lights LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated in Table 7-003 so that
you can check the sensitivity level of the Transmission Sensor.
Sensitivity Level
Sensor not dirty
Sensor slightly dirty
Sensor dirty
Number of LED Lightings

Lit 1X
Lit 2X
Lit 3X
Table 7-004
d. Set all bits of DIPSW3 of OFF.
732
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.2. Component Location

1. Sensors
PI18
PI17
PS1
PI10
PI14
PI20
PI6
PI3
PI4
PI8
PI19
PI16
PI11
PI15
PI1
PI9
PI12
PI5
PI7
Fig. 7-027
733
PI21
PI22
DP-8060/8045/8035
Name
Photo-interrupter
Height Sensor
Notation
PI1
PI3
PI4
PI5
PI6
PI7
PI8
PI10
PI11
PI12
PI14
PI15
PI16
PI17
PI18
PI19
PI9
PI20
PI21
PI22
PS1
Function
Detects paper in the inlet area
Detects paper in the delivery area
Detects paper on the Stapling Tray
Detects the state (open) of the Shutter
Detects alignment plate at home position
Detects the stapler at home position
Detects the tray at home position
Detects delivery motor clock pulses
Detects paper on Tray 1
Detects paper on Tray 2
Detects paper in the buffer path
Detects the finisher joint
Detects the state (open) of the Door
Detects paper at the inlet to the buffer path
Detects the state (open) of the Swing Guide
Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 1 (on sensor PCB)
Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 2 (on sensor PCB)
Detects swing guide clock
Detects edging of staples (inside stapler)
Detects staple drive home position (inside stapler)
Detects the height of the stack on the tray
Table. 7-005
734
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Micro Switches
MS5
MS2
MS6
MS3
MS1
MS4
MS8
Fig. 7-028
Name
Micro Switches
Notation
Function
MS1
Detects the state (open) of the front door, and the upper
door
MS2
Detects the state (closed) of the swing guide 1
MS3
Detects the safety range
MS4
Detects the state (closed) of the shutter
MS5
Detects the tray at the upper limit
MS6
Detects the state (closed) of the swing guide 2
MS8
Detects the presence/absence of staples (inside stapler)
Table 7-006
735
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Motors
M8
M7
M1
M9
M2
M3
M5
M4
M6
Fig. 7-029
Name
Motor
Notation
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
Function
First Feed motor
Delivery motor
Alignment motor
Stapler shift motor
Tray lift motor
Staple motor
Swing motor
Second feed motor
Inlet feed motor
Table 7-007
736
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Solenoids
SL2
SL5
SL3
SL7
SL1
SL6
Fig. 7-030
Name
Solenoid
Notation
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL5
SL6
SL7
Function
Flapper solenoid
Buffer inlet solenoid
Buffer outlet solenoid
Paddle solenoid
Escape solenoid
Belt escape solenoid
Table 7-008
737
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. PCBs
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
Fig. 7-031
Reference
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Relay PCB 4
Relay PCB 3
Sensor PCB
Tabl3 7-009
738
DP-8060/8045/8035

1. Photo-interrupters
PI18S
PI19S
PI16S
PI20S
PI9S
PI14S
PI21S
PI2S
PI15S
PI11S
PI17S
PI6S
PI12S
PI13S
PI5S
PI8S
PI3S
PI7S
PI4S
PI1S
Fig. 7-032
739
DP-8060/8045/8035
Name
Photo-interrupter
Notation
PI1S
PI2S
PI3S
PI4S
PI5S
PI6S
PI7S
PI8S
PI9S
PI11S
PI12S
PI13S
PI14S
PI15S
PI16S
PI17S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI21S
Function
Detects clock pulses from the paper pushing plate motor
Detects the state (open) of the front door
Detects the state (open) of the delivery cover
Detects clock pulses from the paper folding motor
Detects the alignment plates at home position
Detects paper on the tray
Detects paper positioning plate at home position
Detects paper on the paper positioning plate
Detects the state (open) of the inlet cover
Detects paper in the delivery area
Detects the phase of the crescent roller
Detects the guide at home position
Detects the paper pushing plate at home position
Detects the paper pushing plate at top position
Detects the state (in) of the stitcher unit
Detects paper in the vertical path
Detects paper (No.1; on paper sensor PCB)
Detects paper (No. 2; on paper sensor PCB)
Detects paper (No. 3; on paper sensor PCB)
Detects the paper folding at home position
Table 7-010
740
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Micro Switches
MS1S
MS4,5S
MS6,7S
MS2S
MS3S
Fig. 7-033
Name
Micro Switches
Notation
MS1S
MS2S
MS3S
MS4S
MS5S
MS6S
MS7S
Function
Detects the state (open) of the inlet door
Detects the state (open) of the front door
Detects the state (open) of the delivery door
Detects the presence of staples (rear)
Detects stitching home position (rear)
Detects the presence of staples (front)
Detects stitching home position (front)
Table 7-011
741
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Motors
M6S
M7S
M4S
M3S
M1S
M5S
M2S
M8S
Fig. 7-034
Name
Motor
Notation
M1S
M2S
M3S
M4S
M5S
M6S
M7S
M8S
Function
Feed Motor
Paper Folding Motor
Guide Motor
Paper Positioning Plate Motor
Alignment Motor
Stitcher Motor (rear)
Stitcher Motor (front)
Table 7-012
742
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Solenoids
SL1S
SL2S
SL4S
Fig. 7-035
Name
Solenoid
Notation
Function
SL1S
No. 1 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid
SL2S
No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid
SL4S
Feed Plate Contact Solenoid
Table 7-013
743
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. PCBs
[2]
[1]
Fig. 7-036
Reference
[1]
[2]
Paper Sensor PCB
Name
Table 7-014
744
DP-8060/8045/8035

1. Photo-interrupters
PI2P
PI3P
PI1P
Fig. 7-037
Name
Photo-interrupter
Notation
Function
PI1P
Horizontal registration home position detection
PI2P
Punch motor clock detection
PI3P
Punch home position detection
Table 7-015
745
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Micro Switches
MS1P
MS2P
Fig. 7-038
Name
Micro Switches
Notation
Function
MS1P
Upper door open detection
MS2P
Front door open detection
Table 7-016
746
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Motors
M1P
M2P
Fig. 7-039
Name
Motor
Notation
Function
M1P
Punch Motor
M2P
Table 7-017
747
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. PCBs
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
Fig. 7-040
Reference
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Punch Driver PCB
Photosensor PCB
LED PCB
Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB
Fig. 7-018
748
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.2.4. Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB

This section discusses the LEDs, and check pins used in the Machine that are needed in the field.
Caution:
The VRs, and check pins not discussed in this section are for factory use only. Making adjustments, and
checks using these will require special tools, and instruments, and adjustments must be to high
accuracy.
Do not touch them in the field.
1. Finisher Controller PCB
11
11
8 1
J3
J12 11
12 11
7 1
SW1
41
J6
J14
J2
11
6
J16
J9 11
SW2
J17
1
1
J27
LED1
LED2
1
14
J21
SW3
1
14
J11
4
J25
1
10
1
CB1
J1
1 2
J19
J7
15
J5
J10
6
1 15
2 J19
Fig. 7-041
Switch
SW1
SW2
SW3
Function
Adjust the height sensor / alignment plate position / stapling position, and move
the trays up, etc.
Adjust the alignment plate position / staple position, and move the trays down,
etc.
Adjust the height sensor / alignment plate position, and stapling position, etc.
Table 7-019
749
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

SW1
15
J18
1
J13
3 1
J2
7
J11
1
10
J7
J10
8
1
1
10
J9
J4
1
15
CB1
1
J6
2
1
J1
J8
14
J15
1
J5
1
J12
1
Fig. 7-042
Switch
DIPSW1
(bits 1-2)
DIPSW1
(bits 6-8)
SW2
Function
Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position, and folding position.
Stores corrected settings for stapling position, and folding position.
Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position, and folding position.
Table 7-020
750
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.3. Troubleshooting
1. E7-40 (Fault in communication with Saddle Stitch Unit)
Cause
Yes
/ No
Yes End.
Step
Checks
Finisher Controller
PCB, Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Wiring
Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Is

the problem corrected?
Power Supply
Is the wiring between the Finisher No

Controller PCB, and the Saddle
Stitch Controller PCB normal?
Measure the voltage between J3- No
2(+), and J3-1(-) on the Finisher
Controller PCB. Is it 24 VDC?
Yes
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Action
Correct it.
Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
2. E7-25 (Faulty height sensor)
Cause
Finisher Controller
PCB
Wiring
Power Supply
Connector
Height Sensor (PS1)
Adjustment
Checks
Turn the Copier OFF then ON.
Is the problem corrected?
Is the wiring between the Finisher
Controller PCB, and the sensors
normal?
Measure the voltage between J6-2(+),
and J6-4(-) on the Finisher Controller
PCB. Is it 5 VDC?
Is J6 on the Finisher Controller PCB,
J114 on the height sensor, or the relay
connector J212 disconnected?
Measure the voltage between J6-2(+),
and J6-4(-) on the Finisher Controller
PCB. Is it 5 VDC?

Controller PCB, and the sensors
normal?
Try making adjustments using the DIP
switch once again. Is the problem
corrected?
751
Yes
/ No
Yes End.
Action
No Correct the wiring.

No Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Yes Connect the connector.
Yes Adjust the height sensor
once again. If an error
occurs again, replace the
height sensor.
Controller PCB.
Yes Replace the height sensor.
Yes End.
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. E7-26 (Faulty Back-up RAM)
Cause
Finisher Controller
PCB, Punch Drive
PCB
Checks
Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Is the
problem corrected?
Replace the Finisher Controller PCB,
and punch driver PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
Yes
/ No
Yes End.
Action
Yes End.
4. E7-21 (Faulty Delivery Motor)
Cause
Deliver Roller
Delivery Motor Clock
Sensor (PI10)
Finisher Controller
PCB
Yes
Action
/ No
Turn the delivery roller by hand. Does it No Correct mechanical
turn smoothly?
operation.
Check the delivery clock sensor. Is the
No Replace the sensor.
sensor normal?
Does the voltage between J11-4, and
J11-5 on the Finisher Controller PCB
Controller PCB.
change to 24 VDC as soon as the
Yes Check the wiring from the
delivery motor starts to rotate?
motor to the controller PCB.
If normal, replace the motor.
Checks
5. E7-22 (Faulty Alignment Motor)
Cause
Checks
Yes
Action
/ No
Alignment Plate Home Check the alignment plate home

Position Sensor (PI6) position sensor. Is it normal?
Wiring
Controller PCB, and the alignment plate
motor normal?
Alignment Plate
Is there any mechanical obstacle in the Yes Remove the mechanical
path of the alignment plate?
obstacle.
Alignment Motor (M3) Replace the alignment motor. Is the
Yes End.
problem
corrected?
Finisher Controller
PCB
Controller PCB.
6. E7-23 (Faulty Staple Motor)
Cause
Wiring
Stapler
Finisher Controller
PCB
Checks
Is the wiring between the stapler, and
the Finisher Controller PCB normal?
Replace the stapler. Is the problem
corrected?
752
Yes
Action
/ No
Yes End.
Controller PCB.
DP-8060/8045/8035
7. E7-24 (Faulty Stapler Shift Motor)
Cause
Checks
Stapler Shift Home

Check the stapler shift home position
Position Sensor (PI7) sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
Controller PCB, and the stapler shift
motor normal?
Stapler Shift Base
Is there any mechanical obstacle in the
path of the stapler shift base?
Stapler Shift Motor
Replace the stapler motor. Is the
(M4)
problem corrected?
Finisher Controller
PCB
Yes
Action
/ No
Yes Remove the mechanical
obstacles.
Yes End.
Controller PCB.
8. E7-48 (Faulty Swing Motor)
Cause
Checks
Swinging Mechanism Turn the Swing Motor in reverse by

hand. Does the swing guide move up,
and down?
Swing Guide Closed Is the swing guide closed detection
Detection Switch 2
switch 2 normal?
(MS6)
Is the swing guide closed detection
switch 2 pressed correctly?
Swing Motor (M7)

Finisher Controller
PCB
Swing Guide Open
Sensor (PI18)
Safety Range Switch
(MS3)
Swing Guide Clock

Sensor (PI20)
Finisher Controller
PCB
Yes
Action
/ No
No Correct the swing
mechanism.
No Replace the microswitch.
No Correct mechanical
operation.
Yes Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Does the swing motor rotate in reverse No Replace the motor.
at a specific timing?
Controller PCB.
Is the swing guide open sensor normal? No Replace the sensor.
Check the safety range switch. Is the
No Replace the switch.
switch normal?
Is the safety range detection switch
pressed correctly?
operation.
Check the swing guide clock sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
the sensor normal?
Does the voltage of the swing motor
between J11-6, and -7 on the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Controller PCB reach 24 V at a specific Yes Check the wiring from the
rotation timing?
motor to the Finisher
Controller PCB. If normal,
replace the motor.
753
DP-8060/8045/8035
9. E7-27 (Faulty Tray Lift Motor)
Cause
Tray Home Position
Sensor (PI8)
Tray Lift Mechanism
Finisher Controller
PCB
Wiring
Tray Position
Tray Upper Limit
Switch (MS5)
Wiring
Finisher Controller
PCB
Finisher Controller
PCB
Tray Lift Mechanism
Sensor 1/2 (PI9 / 19)
Finisher Controller
PCB
Yes
Action
/ No
Check the tray home position sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
it normal?
Check the tray lift mechanism. Is the
No Correct the mechanism.
mechanism normal?
Is the tray lift motor supplied with 24
VDC by the Finisher Controller PCB as
Controller PCB.
soon as the tray is driven?
Check the wiring from the finisher
controller PCB to the tray lift motor. Is
Yes Replace the tray lift motor.
the wiring normal?
Is the tray at the tray upper limit switch? Yes Lower the tray.
Check the tray upper limit switch. Is the No Replace the switch.
switch normal?
Check the wiring from the Finisher
Controller PCB to the tray upper limit
switch. Is the wiring normal?
Controller PCB.
Does the tray move up / down?
No Go to a. on the left.
Yes Go to c. on the left.
a. Is the motor supplied with power by
Yes Go to b. on the left.
the Finisher Controller PCB as soon
as the tray moves up / down?
Controller PCB.
Yes Correct the tray lift
b. Is there a fault in the tray lift
mechanism?
mechanism.
No Replace the tray lift motor.
c. Is the tray lift motor clock sensor 1/2 No Replace the sensor PCB.
normal?
Controller PCB.
Checks
754
DP-8060/8045/8035
10. E7-20 (Faulty Second Feed Motor)
Cause
Second Feed Motor
(M8)
Shutter Mechanism
Shutter Open
Detection Sensor
(PI5)
Finisher Controller
PCB
Shutter Closed
Detection Switch
(MS4)
Safety Range Switch
(MS3)
Finisher Controller
PCB
Yes
Action
/ No
Does the second feed motor in reverse No Replace the second feed
motor or the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Are the shutter, and the shutter upper / No Engage them correctly.
lower bar engaged correctly?
Turn the feed roller 2 in reverse by
No Correct mechanism from
hand. Does the shutter upper / lower
the shutter upper/lower bar
bar move up / down?
to the gear of the feed roller
2.
Is the shutter open detection sensor
normal?
Checks
Is the shutter closed detection switch

normal?
Check the safety range switch. Is the
switch normal?
Is the safety range detection switch
passed correctly?
Is the shutter closed detection switch
pressed correctly?
755

Controller PCB.
operation.
Controller PCB.
DP-8060/8045/8035

1. E7-41 (Faulty Paper Positioning Plate)
Cause
Paper Positioning
Plate Home Position
Sensor (PI7S)
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Paper Positioning
Plate Motor (M4S)
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Yes
Action
/ No
Check the paper positioning plate home No Replace the sensor.
position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Checks
Do the paper positioning plates operate Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
No Check the positioning plate
drive mechanism. If a fault
is found, correct it.
Otherwise, go to step 3.
Replace the paper positioning plate Yes End.
motor. Is the problem corrected?
No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
2. E7-42 (Faulty Paper Folding Motor)
Cause
Paper Folding Motor
Clock Sensor (PI4S)
Paper Folding Home
Position Sensor
(PI21S)
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Paper Folding Motor
(M2S)
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Checks
Check the paper folding motor clock
sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Check the paper folding home position
sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Yes
Action
/ No
Does the paper folding motor operate at Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
a specific timing?
Controller PCB.
No Check the paper folding
roller drive mechanism. If a
fault is found, correct it.
Replace the paper folding motor. Is the Yes End.
problem corrected?
Controller PCB.
756
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. E7-43 (Faulty Guide Motor)

Yes
Action
/ No
Guide Home Position Check the guide home position sensor. No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI13S)
Is the sensor normal?
Saddle Stitch
Does the guide motor operate at a
Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
specific timing?
Controller PCB.
Guide Motor (M3S)
No Check the guide plate drive
mechanism. If a fault is
found, correct it. Otherwise,
go to step 3.
Saddle Stitch
Replace the guide motor. Is the problem Yes End.
Controller PCB
corrected?
Controller PCB.
Cause
Checks
4. E7-44 (Faulty Alignment Motor)
Cause
Checks

Position Sensor
(PI5S)
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Check the alignment plate home

Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Replace the alignment motor. Is the

problem corrected?
Does the alignment motor operate at a

specific timing?
Yes
Action
/ No
Controller PCB.
No Check the alignment plate
drive mechanism. If a fault
is found, correct it.
Yes End.
Controller PCB.
5. E7-45 / 46 (Faulty Stitcher)
Cause
Stitcher (installation)
Stitching Home
Position Switch
(MS7S / MS5S)
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Checks
Are the front (E7-46), and rear (E7-45)
stitchers, and bases installed correctly?
Is the stitching home position switch of
the front, and the rear stitchers normal?
Do the front, and the rear stitchers
operate at a specific timing?
Stitcher Motor
(M7S / M6S)
757
Yes
Action
/ No
No Install them correctly.
No Replace the front or rear
stitcher.
Yes Check the wiring between
the stitcher, and the Saddle
Stitch Controller PCB. If
normal, replace the
controller PCB.
No Replace the front or the rear
stitcher.
DP-8060/8045/8035
6. E7-47 (Faulty Paper Pushing Plate Motor)
Cause
Paper Pushing Plate
(PI14S)
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Paper Pushing Plate
Motor (M8S)
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Paper Pushing Top
Position Sensor
(PI15S)
Paper Pushing Plate
Motor Clock Sensor
(PI1S)
Checks
Check the paper pushing plate home
Yes
Action
/ No
Does the paper pushing plate motor

operate at a specific timing?

Controller PCB.
No Check the paper pushing
plate drive mechanisms. If a
fault is found, correct it.
Replace the paper pushing plate motor. Yes End.
Is the problem corrected?
Controller PCB.
Check the paper pushing plate top
Check the paper pushing plate motor
clock sensor. Is the sensor normal?
7. E7-49 (Disconnected Sensor Connector)
Cause
Checks
Guide Home Position

Sensor (PI13S;
disconnected)
Wiring
Yes
Action
/ No
No Connect the connectors.
Are the connectors of the guide home

position sensor, and the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB connected correctly?
Is the wiring between the sensor, and
Yes Correct the wiring.
the Saddle Stitch broken?
Power Supply
Is 5 VDC present at J9-7 on the Saddle No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Stitch Controller PCB?
Controller PCB.
Is 5 VDC present at J9-10 on the
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB?
Is 5 VDC present at J9-13 on the
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB?
Ground
Is J9-8 on the Saddle Stitch Controller
No
PCB grounded correctly?
Paper Pushing Plate Are the connectors of the paper pushing No Connect the connectors.
Home Position Top
plate top position sensor, and the
Position Sensor
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB connected
(PI14S; disconnected) correctly?
Paper Pushing Plate
Home Position Top
Position Sensor
(PI15S; disconnected)
758
DP-8060/8045/8035
8. E7-50 (Faulty Microswitch)
Cause
Checks
Switch Actuator
Yes
Action
/ No
Check the switch actuator of the inlet

door. Do the switch, and the sensor
operate correctly?
Check the switch actuator of the front
door. Do the switch, and the sensor
operate correctly?
Check the delivery door switch actuator.
Do the switch, and the sensor operate
correctly?
Inlet Door Switch
Check the inlet door switch. Is the
(MS1S)
switch normal?
Inlet Cover Sensor
Measure the voltage at J10-8 on the
Yes The sensor is faulty.
(PI9S)
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB with the
Replace the sensor.
inlet cover open. Is it 5V?
Power Supply, Wiring Measure the voltage between J19-1 (+), No Replace the Saddle Stitch
and J19-2 () on the Finisher Controller
Controller PCB.
PCB. Is it 24V?
Yes Check the wiring between
J19 on the Finisher
Controller PCB, and J1 on
the Saddle Stitch Controller
PCB. If a fault is found,
correct it. Otherwise,
replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
Front Door Switch
Check the front door switch. Is the
(MS2S)
switch normal?
Front Door Open /
Closed Sensor
Replace the sensor.
(PI12S)
front door open. Is it 5V?
Controller PCB.
Delivery Switch
Check the delivery door switch. Is the
(MS3S)
switch normal?
Delivery Cover
Sensor (PI3S)
Replace the sensor.
delivery door open. Is it 5V?
Controller PCB.
759
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.3.3. Puncher Unit (option)

1. E7-28 (Faulty Punch Motor)
Yes
Action
/ No
Punch Motor Clock
Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI2P)
the sensor normal?
Punch Home Position Check the punch home position sensor. No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI3P)
Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
Is the wiring between the punch home
position sensor, and the Finisher
Controller PCB normal?
Punch Mechanism
Is there any trouble with the punch
Yes Correct the punch
mechanism?
mechanism.
Punch Motor (M1P)
No Replace the punch motor.
Punch Driver PCB
Replace the punch driver PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
Controller PCB.
Yes End.
Cause
Checks
2. E7-29 (Faulty Horizontal Registration Motor)
Cause
Horizontal
Registration Home
Position Sensor
(PI1P)
Wiring
Horizontal
Registration
Mechanism
Horizontal
Registration Motor
(M2P)
Punch Driver PCB
Checks
Check the horizontal registration home
Yes
Action
/ No
Is the wiring between the horizontal

registration home position sensor, and
the Finisher Controller PCB normal?
Is there any problem with the horizontal Yes Correct the horizontal
registration mechanism?
registration mechanism.
No Replace the horizontal
registration motor.
Replace the punch driver PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
760

Controller PCB.
Yes End.
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.4. Self Diagnosis

The CPU (Q1) on the machines Finisher Controller PCB or on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is equipped
with a self diagnosis function. This function runs a check at programmed times, and sends an error code to
the copier upon detection of any detected abnormalities.

Error
Code
E7-40
E7-25
E7-26
E7-21
E7-22
E7-23
E7-24
Error Type
Description
Communication Error
Communications with the saddle stitch unit is

disrupted.
Height Sensor (PS1)
Communications is not possible between the height
sensor, and the Finisher Controller PCB. Or, there is
a fault in communication data.
Communications between the sensor, and the
Finisher Controller is not possible for a specific
period of time.
The sensor is identified as being disconnected at
power-ON.
Sensor adjustment using a DIP switch has a fault.
Back-up RAM
There is a fault in the checksum value of the
Finisher Controller PCB at power-ON.
There is a fault in the checksum value of the punch
driver PCB at power-ON.
Delivery Motor (M2)
A specific number of clock pulses have not been
Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PI10)
obtained from the delivery motor clock sensor at the
beginning of operation.
Clock pulses in numbers equivalent to a feed length
of 200 mm are not obtained while paper is being fed.
Alignment Motor (M3)
The alignment plate does not leave the alignment
Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor home position sensor even after the alignment
motor has operated for 2 sec.
The alignment plate does not return to the alignment
plate home position sensor even after the alignment
motor has operated for 2 sec.
Staple Motor (M6)
The stapler does not leave the stapling home
Staple Home Position Detection Switch
position even after the stapler motor has operated
(MS7)
for 0.5 sec.
The stapler does not return to the stapling home
position even after the stapler motor has operated
for 0.5 sec.
Stapler Shift Motor (M4)
The stapler shift home position sensor does not turn
Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor
OFF even after the stapler shift motor has operated
(PI7)
for 4 sec.
The stapler shift home position cannot be detected
even after the stapler shift motor has operated for 4
sec.
761
DP-8060/8045/8035
Error
Code
E7-48
E7-27
E7-20
Error Type
Description
Swing Motor (M7)

Swing Guide Closed Detection Switch
2 (MS6)
Swing Motor (M7)
Swing Guide Open Detecting Sensor
(PI18)
Safety Range Switch (MS3)
Swing Guide Closed Detection Switch
2 (MS6)
Swing Motor (M7)
Swing Motor Clock Sensor (PI20)
Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9 /
PI19)
Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8)
Tray Upper Limit Detection Switch
(MS5)
Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9 /
PI19)
Shutter Closed Detection Switch (MS4)
The swing guide closed detection switch does not

turn ON even after the swing motor has rotated
counter-clockwise for 1 sec.
The swing guide open detection sensor does not
turn ON even after the swing motor has rotated
clockwise for 1 sec.
The swing guide closed detection switch is OFF
when the tray 1/2 is at the safety range switch OFF
position.
The clock pulse is discontinued for 200 ms during
swing operation.
The movement does not end within 15 sec after the
tray lift motor is driven.
The tray home position can not be detected after the
tray lift motor has been driven for 15 sec.
The tray upper limit detection switch is ON while the
tray is moving up.
Clock pulses from the clock sensor 1/2 are not
obtained for 200 ms after the tray lift motor has been
driven.
The shutter closed detection switch does not turn
ON after the second feed motor has rotated counterclockwise for 1 sec or more.
The shutter open sensor does not turn ON after the
Shutter Open Sensor (PI5)
second feed motor has rotated counter-clockwise for
1 sec or more.
Safety Range Detection Switch (MS3) The shutter closed detection switch is OFF when the
Shutter Closed Detection Switch (MS4) tray 1/2 is at the safety range switch OFF position
during operation of the tray lift motor.
762
DP-8060/8045/8035

Error
Code
E7-41
E7-42
E7-43
Error Type
Description
Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S)

Paper Positioning Plate Home Position
Sensor (PI7S)
The paper positioning plate home position sensor

does not turn ON even after the paper positioning
plate motor has been driven for 1.33 sec or more.
The paper positioning plate home position sensor
does not turn OFF even after the paper positioning
plate motor has been driven for 1 sec or more.
The number of detecting pulses from the paper
folding motor clock sensor drops below a specific
value.
The state of the paper folding home position sensor
does not change even after the paper folding motor
has driven for 3 sec.
The guide home position sensor does not turn ON
even after the guide motor has been driven for 0.455
sec or more.
The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF
even after the guide motor has been driven for 1 sec
or more.
The alignment plate home position sensor does not
turn ON even when the alignment motor has been
driven for 0.5 sec or more. (During initial operation,
the motor is driven for 1.67 sec.)
The alignment plate home position sensor does not
turn OFF even when the alignment motor has been
driven for 1 sec or more.
The stitching home position sensor does not turn
OFF even when the stitcher motor (rear) has been
rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
ON even when the stitcher motor (rear) has been
rotated counter-clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
OFF even when the stitcher motor (front) has been
rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
ON even when the stitcher motor (front) has been
rotated counter-clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.

Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor
(PI4S)
Paper Folding Home Position Sensor
(PI21S)
Guide Motor (M3S)
Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13S)
E7-44

Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor
(PI5S)
E7-45
Stitcher Motor (rear, M6S)

Stitching Home Position Sensor (rear,
MS5S)
E7-46
Stitcher Motor (front, M7S)

Stitching Home Position Sensor (front,
MS7S)
763
DP-8060/8045/8035
Error
Code
E7-47
E7-49
E7-50
Error Type
Sensor (PI4S)

Sensor (PI15S)
Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock
Sensor (PI1S)
Sensor (PI5S)
Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13S)
Connector
Sensor (PI14S) Connector
Sensor (PI15S) Connector
Inlet Door Switch (MS1S)
Front Door Switch (MS2S)
Delivery Door Switch (MS3S)
Front Door Switch (MS2S)

Description
The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
not turn ON even when the paper pushing plate
motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
not turn OFF even when the paper pushing plate
motor has been driven for 80 msec or more.
The paper pushing plate top position sensor does
not turn OFF even after the paper pushing plate
motor has been driven for 80 msec or more.
The number of clock pulses for the paper pushing
plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific
value.
The paper pushing plate top position sensor does
not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has
been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
The connector of the guide home position sensor is
identified as being disconnected.
The connector of the paper pushing plate home
position sensor is identified as being disconnected.
The connector of the paper pushing plate top
position sensor is identified as being disconnected.
After any of the following three photo-interrupters
used for the covers has found that its respective
door is closed, the inlet door switch is identified as
being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
more after the start of the copier initial rotation.
Inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
Front door open / closed sensor (PI2S)
Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
(The front door switch (MS2S) or the delivery door
switch (MS3S) may be also open.)
door is closed, the front door switch is identified as
being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
(The delivery door switch (MS3S) may be also
open.)
door is closed, the delivery door switch is identified
as being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
764
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.4.3. Punch Unit (Optional)

Error
Code
E7-28
E7-29
Error Type
Punch Motor (M1P)
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI2P)
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P)
Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P)

Horizontal Registration Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Description
The punch motor clock sensor cannot detect the
clock pulse within 100 ms.
The puncher does not leave the punch home
position sensor even after the punch motor has
operated for 200 ms.
The puncher does not return to the punch home
position sensor even after the punch motor has
operated for 200 ms.
The target number of clock pulses cannot be
obtained from the punch motor clock sensor at start
of operation.
The puncher does not leave the horizontal
registration home position even after the horizontal
registration motor has operated for 4 sec.
The puncher does not return to the horizontal
registration home position even after the horizontal
registration motor has operated for 4 sec.
765
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.7.4.4. Finisher User error

Note:
UXX will appear in the message display.
Code
U4
U11
U12
U30
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
oF
Item
Finisher / Inverting Unit / Inverting Shift Tray (option) open
Finisher Copy Paper removal
Staple Cover / Top Door open (option)
Finisher Punch Cover open
Finisher Saddle Unit paper removal
Finisher Saddle Unit Feed Cover open
Finisher Saddle Staple Unit is not installed
Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Front Cover open
Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit Cover open
Finisher overflow
See Page
1. User Error
Code
Item
U4 Finisher Inverting Unit / Inverting Shift
Tray (option)
U11
Finisher copy paper removal

Note:
When clearing U11, all paper must be
removed from bins.
Check Points
1) Are the exit options installed correctly?
2) Exit options connector is shorted or broken.
3) Exit options connector is defective.
4) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
6) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
7) LVPS is defective.
8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
9) CPU PCB is defective.
1) Copy paper is already in at least one bin.
2) Copy paper which is unsuitable size for stapler
use is in the bin.
3) There is a double feed from the duplex unit in the
bin.
4) Finisher paper detecting sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
5) Finisher paper detecting sensor is defective.
broken.
766
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
Item
U12 Staple Door / Top Door open
U30
Finisher Punch Cover open
U31
Finisher Saddle Unit paper removal
U32
Finisher Saddle Unit Feed Cover open
Check Points
1) Is the stapler door or top door closed correctly?
2) Stapler door or top door open/close sensor
connector is shorted or broken.
3) Stapler door or top door open close sensor is
defective.
broken.
1) Is the punch cover closed correctly?
2) Punch cover open/close sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
3) Punch cover open/close sensor is defective.
4) Punch unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Punch unit CPU PCB is defective.
broken.
1) Copy paper is already in finisher saddle unit.
2) Copy paper which is unsuitable size is in saddle
unit.
3) Too many copy paper in saddle unit.
4) Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor
5) Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor is
defective.
broken.
1) Is the saddle unit feed cover closed correctly?
2) Saddle unit feed cover open / close sensor
3) Saddle unit feed cover open / close sensor is
defective.
4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective.
broken.
767
DP-8060/8045/8035
Code
Item
U33 Finisher Saddle Staple Unit is not
installed
U34
U35
oF
Check Points
1) Is the saddle staple unit installed properly?
2) Saddle staple unit storage sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
3) Saddle staple unit storage sensor is defective.
broken.
broken.
Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Front Cover
1) Is the saddle front cover closed correctly?
open
2) Saddle front cover open / close sensor connector
is shorted or broken.
3) Saddle front cover open / close sensor is
defective.
broken.
broken.
Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit
1) Is the saddle paper exit cover closed correctly?
Cover open
2) Saddle paper exit cover open/close sensor
3) Saddle paper exit cover open/close sensor is
defective.
broken.
broken.
Finisher over flow
Too many copies in the finisher bin.
The paper must be removed, and press the finisher
mode key.
768
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.8.
Appendix
11.1.8.1. Signal Names and Abbreviations

Provided below are the abbreviations, and signal names used in this manual, and in drawings for all the
Finisher, and punch functions.
Note:
Signals enclosed by brackets [ ] are electrical signals. However, the state 1 or 0 of these analog
signals cannot be indicated, Otherwise, the state of digital signals 1 or 0 can be indicated.
Finisher Unit
BESCPSL
BUFENTR
BUFPASS
CRTSET
DELCLK
DROPN
DRSW
ENTSL
ESCPSL
EXITSL
FLPSL
FSTTRAY
HOOKEMP
HOOKTOP
JOGHP
JOINT
PDEL
PDLSL
PENT
SFTCLK1
SFTCLK2
SHUTCLD
SNDTRAY
STOPN
STPCON
STPDRHP
STPHP
STPTY
SWGCLK
SWGGCLD
SWGOPN
TRAYSAF
TRAYHP
TRYLIM
Belt Escape Solenoid Drive Signal

Buffer Path Inlet Paper Detect Signal
Buffer Path Paper Detect Signal
Cartridge Detect Signal
Delivery Motor Clock Detect Signal
Door Open Detect Signal
Door Switch Signal
Buffer Inlet Solenoid Drive Signal
Escape Solenoid Drive Signal
Buffer Outlet Solenoid Drive Signal
Flapper Solenoid Drive Signal
Tray 1 Paper Detect Signal
Hook Empty Detect Signal
Hook Stop Position Detect Signal
Alignment Plate HP Detect Signal
Joint Detect Signal
Delivery Detect Signal
Paddle Solenoid Drive Signal
Inlet Paper Detect Signal
Shift Motor Clock Detect Signal 1
Shift Motor Clock Detect Signal 2
Shutter Closed Detect Switch Signal
Tray 2 Paper Detect Signal
Shutter Open Detect Signal
Stapler Connect Detect Signal
Stapler Drive HP Detect Signal
Stapler HP Detect Signal
Staple Paper Tray Detect Signal
Swing Guide Clock Detect Signal
Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch Signal
Swing Guide Open Detect Signal
Tray Safety Switch Signal
Tray Home Position Detect Signal
Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch Signal
769
DP-8060/8045/8035
Saddle Stitch Unit

1STPA
2NDPA
3RDDPA
DELV
DELVMS
EJCVR
FDR
FDRLHP
FDROPN
FLDCLK
FLPSL1
FSPSL2
GIDHP
HKEMP1
HKEMP2
INLTCVR
INLTCVRMS
JOGHP
LUNGECLK
LUNGEHP
LUNGETOP
PAFLDHP
PAPPOS
PPOSPAR
RLNIPSL
STCHHP1
STCHHP2
STPLHP
TRAYPAR
VPJM
No. 1 Paper Sensor Detect Signal

Delivery Detect Signal
Delivery Door Open Detect Switch Signal
Delivery Door Open Detect Signal
Front Door Open Detect Signal
Crescent Roller Phase Detect Signal
Front Door Open Detect Switch Signal
Fold Motor Clock Signal
Flapper Drive Signal 1
Flapper Drive Signal 2
Paper Guide Home Position Detect Signal
Hook Empty Detect Signal 1
Hook Empty Detect Signal 2
Inlet Cover Open Detect Signal
Inlet Cover Open Switch Signal
Alignment HP Detect Signal
Lunge Motor Clock Signal
Lunge Home Position Detect Signal
Lunge Top Position Detect Signal
Paper Fold Home Position Detect Signal
Paper Position Plate HP Detect Signal
Paper Positioning Guide Paper Detect Signal
Feed Plate Contact Solenoid Drive Signal
Stitching HP Detect Signal 1
Stitching HP Detect Signal 2
Stitcher IN Detect Signal
Paper Tray Detect Signal
Vertical Path Paper Detect Signal
770
DP-8060/8045/8035
Puncher Unit (Option)

DFULL
FDROPN
LEDON
LEDON1
LEDON2
LEDON3
LEDON4
LEDON5
PAEND
PUNCHHP
PUNCHCLK
SREG1
SREG2
SREG3
SREG4
SREGHP
UDROPN
Dust Full Detect Signal

Front Door Open Detect Switch Signal
LED ON Signal
LED1 ON Signal
LED2 ON Signal
LED3 ON Signal
LED4 ON Signal
LED5 ON Signal
Paper End Detect Signal
Punch Home Position Detect Signal
Punch Motor Clock Detect Signal
Side Registration Detect Signal 1
Side Registration Home Position Detect Signal
Upper Door Open Detect Switch Signal
771
772
3
2
1
J109
1
2
3
SL7
PI11
PI12
PS1
MS1
PI16
SL1
Belt Escape
Solenoid
No. 1 Paper
Tray Sensor
No. 2 Paper
Tray Sensor
Height Sensor
Door Switch
Door Open
Sensor
Flapper
Solenoid
3
2
1
J12A-1
J12A-2
J12A-3
J12A-4
J12A-5
J12A-6
J14-12
J14-11
J14-10
J14-9
J14-8
J14-7
J5-6
J5-5
J5-4
J5-7
J5-8
J107-1
J107-2
J210-1
J210-2
J210-3
J130-1
J130-2
J130-3
J117-1
J117-2
J117-3
J108-1
J108-2
J500-1
J500-2
J205-3
J205-1
J205-2
J205-3
J113-1
J113-2
J113-3
J112-1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J12A
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24V
TRYLIM
+24VSHIFT
TRAYSAFE
+24VSHIFT
+24VMOVE
DRSW
SWGGCLD
+24VMOVE (TRYLMT)
+24VSHIFT
+24VMOVE
SHUTCLD
BESCPSL
+24V
STOPN
G
+5V
DROPN
G
+5V
ENTSL
+24V
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FLPSL
+24V
STPHP
G
+5V
TRYHP
G
+5V
JOINT
G
+5V
J12A
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J12B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J12B
J5
J5
J7
J7
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4 G
3 Vin
2 +5V
1 V0
4
3
2
1
ESCPSL
+24V
+5V
DELCLK
+5V
JOGHP
G
+5V
STPTY
G
+5V
A
B
A
B
+24V
+5V
SWGCLK
G
PDLSL
+5V
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J9A J9A
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J9B J9B
7
6
5
4
+5V 3
PDEL 2
G 1
J11 J11
SWGOPN 10 10
G 9
9
+5V 8
8
FSTTRAY
G
+5V
SNDTRAY
G
+5V
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J207A-1
J207A-2
J207A-3
J207A-4
J207A-5
J207A-6
J207A-7
J207A-8
J207A-9
J207A-10
J207A-11
J207B-1
J207B-2
J207B-3
J207B-4
J207B-5
J207B-6
J207B-7
J207B-8
J207B-9
J207B-10
J207B-11
J204-1
J204-2
J204-3
J206-1
J206-2
J206-3
J206-4
J206-5
J206-6
J206-7
J400-1
J400-2
J400-3
J400-4
J400-5
J400-6
J201-1
J201-2
J201-3
J201-4
J201-5
J201-6
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J128-6
J128-5
J128-4
J9A-11
J9A-10
J9A-9
J9A-8
J9A-7
J9A-6
J9A-5
J9A-4
J9A-3
J9A-2
J9A-1
J9B-11
J9B-10
J9B-9
J9B-8
J9B-7
J9B-6
J9B-5
J9B-4
J9B-3
J9B-2
J9B-1
J11-7
J11-6
J11-5
J11-4
J11-3
J11-2
J11-1
J11-10
J11-9
J11-8
1
2
3
J206
1
2
3
J205
1
2
3
J206
3
2
1
J205
J207A
J207A
FG4
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J207B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J207B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J208
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J208
J204
1
2
3
J204
4
3
2
1
MS4-C
MS4-N0
MS4-NC
J118-1
J118-2
J118-3
J123-2
J123-3
J120-1
J120-2
J120-3
J121-1
J121-2
J121-3
J122-1
J122-2
J122-3
J124-1
J124-2
J124-3
J124-4
J124-5
J125-1
J125-2
J125-3
J126-1
J126-2
J501-1
J501-2
J119-1
J119-2
J134-1
J134-2
J134-3
J127-1
J127-2
J127-3
MS6-N0
MS6-C
MS2-N0
MS2-C
J206-1
J206-2
J206-3
J205-1
J205-2
J205-3
J206-4
J206-5
J207A-7
J207A-8
J207A-9
J206-1
J206-2
J206-3
J207A-4
J207A-5
J207A-6
J207A-1
J207A-2
J207A-3
J207A-11
J207A-10
J207B-6
J207B-7
J207B-8
J207B-9
J207B-10
J207B-2
J207B-2
J206-8
J206-7
J207B-3
J207B-4
J207B-5
J204-1
J204-2
J204-3
J209-2
J209-2
J209-4
J209-3
1
2
3
2
1
2
1
SL
3
2
1
J140
3
2
1
J118
2
1
J119
3
2
1
J120
3
2
1
J134
3
2
1
J121
3
2
1
J122
J123
5
4
3
2
1
J124
J128
J501
3
2
1
J125
3
2
1
J127
C
N0
NC
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
3
2
1
N0
N0
FG5
PI5
Shutter
Closed
Sensor
3
2
1
J117
3
2
1
J130
1
2
3
4
5
6
J400
2
1
J209-4
J209-3
J209-2
J209-1
J132-2
J132-1
J131-1
J131-2
J131-1
J112-2
J6
J6
PENT
G
+5V
+24V
+24V
B
A
B
A
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J14 J14
J16-6
J16-5
J16-4
J16-3
J16-2
J16-1
4
3
2
1
J209
M2
Delivery
Motor
J12B-10
J12B-9
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
2
1
J131
1
2
J17-1
J17-2
J17-3
J17-4
J17-5
J17-6
J17-7
J17-8
J17-9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SFTCLK1
G
+5V
SFTCLK2
G
+5V
6
5
4
3
2
1
J5-12
J5-11
J5-10
J5-9
J2-2
J2-4
J2-5
J2-6
J2-7
11
Swing Guide
J12A-11
J12A-10
PI9
Tray Shift
Motor Clock
Sensor 1
1
2
J12B-1
J12B-2
J12B-3
PI19
Tray Shift
Motor Clock
Sensor 2
1
2
3
2
1
MS3
Safety Range
Switch
J113
C
NC
N0
C
NC
N0
J132
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J115-1
J115-2
J206-3
J206-2
J206-1
J17
J17
EXITSL
+24V
BUFPASS
G
+5V
BUFENTR
G
+5V
6
5
4
3
2
1
J16 J16
JS1-5A
JS1-7A
JS1-1A
JS1-2A
JS1-3A
JS1-4A
7A
6A
5A
4A
3A
2A
1A
J2-1
JS1
SL
J107
1
2
3
J5-1
J5-3
MS5
Tray Upper
Limit Detect
Switch
1
2
3
2
1
J106
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J202
J7-5
J7-4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
B
A
B
+24V
+24V
4
3
2
1
G 6
+24V 5
JS1-C2
JS1-C3
C4
C3
C1
C2
J1-1
FG-1
J1-2
10
PI10
Delivery
Motor
Clock
Sensor
3
2
1
J113
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
J115
J24
J24
J2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
J2
G 2
+24V 1
J1
J1
PI3
Delivery
Sensor
1
2
J112
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
Inlet Sensor
1
2
3
2
1
J1020
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J14-4
J14-5
J14-6
PI1
Inlet Feed Motor
J112
1
2
3
6
5
4
3
2
1
J201
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
V
V
V
1
2
3
4
5
6
M9
J114
3
2
1
3
2
1
J1010
Tray Lift
Motor
J102
1
2
3
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
J114-1
J114-2
J114-3
J114-4
J202-2
J202-3
J202-4
J202-5
J202-6
J202-1
J202-2
J202-3
J202-4
J109-1
J109-2
J110-1
J110-2
J110-3
J105-1
J105-2
J105-3
1 2 3 4 5 6
HOOKEMP
CRTSET
STPDRHP
STPCON
HOOKTOP
+24V
B
A
B
A
J10
PI6
Alignment
Guide Home
Position Sensor
3
2
1
Buffer Path
Inlet Sensor
J502
M5
3
2
1
J12-8
J12-7
J12-7
J12-8
J12-9
G
+5V
J6
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J6
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI4
Stapling
Tray Sensor
C
N0
NC
PI17
Buffer Path
Paper Sensor
SL6
Escape
Solenoid
4
3
2
1
PI14
Buffer
Outlet
Solenoid
1
2
J500
PI7
V
V
V
SL3
J101
2
1
3
2
1
J210
J301
J10 1 2 3 4 5 6
JS1-C1
SL
1
2
J24-8
J24-7
J24-6
J24-5
J24-4
J24-3
J24-2
J24-1
3
2
1
J210
M3
Alignment
Motor
3
2
1
3
2
1
SL
J600
1
2
3
J105
3
2
1
J129
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
J10-6
J10-5
J10-4
J10-3
J10-2
J10-1
2
1
1
2
3
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J305
5
4
3
2
1
J304
SL5
Paddle
Solenoid
1
2
Stapler Shift
Home Position
Sensor
1
2
3
M6
Staple Motor
J110
Stapler Unit
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J307
M4
Stapler Shift
Motor
1
2
3
2
1
J109
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
J306
Relay PCB 3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Relay PCB 4
M7
Swing Motor
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
PI20
PI18
MS2
MS6
Swing Guide
Swing Guide Swing Guide Swing Guide
Closed Detect Closed Detect Closed Sensor Clock Sensor
Switch 1
Switch 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
A
B
A
B
+24V
+24V
1
2
3
J302
12
11.1.9.
DP-8060/8045/8035
Schematic Diagram
11.1.9.1. Finisher Unit Circuit Diagram
Shutter Unit
MS4
Shutter Closed
Detect Switch
Host Machine
M8
Second Feed Motor
M1
First Feed Motor
Sensor PCB
PI8
PI15
Tray Home
Position
Sensor
Joint
Sensor
Buffer Inlet
Solenoid
SL2
SL
Stitcher Unit
(Front)
Stitcher Unit
(Rear)
773
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
M6S
Stitcher
Motor
1
2
3
4
PI20S
PI19S
PI18S
No. 3 Paper No. 2 Paper No. 1 Paper
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
3
2
1
J9-1
J9-2
J9-3
J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
J125
J2
3 G
2 1PAFDJP
1 +5V
3
2
1
INLTCVR
G
+5V
G
3RDPA
2NDPA
1STPA
+5V
J18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J18
J10
J10
1
2
3
4
+24V 5
G 6
J225
J130-1
J130-2
J130-3
J124-1
J124-2
J124-3
J204-1
J204-2
J204-3
J204-4
J204-5
LUNGETOP
G
+5V
LUNGEHP
G
+5V
GIDHP
G
+5V
FDRLHP
G
+5V
DELV
G
+5V
J17
J13
J13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J325
J8-8
J8-9
J8-10
J8-11
J8-12
J8-13
J8-14
J9
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J9
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TRYPAR
G
+5V
PAPPOS
G
+5V
PPOSPAR
G
+5V
B
B
A
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J425
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J129-1
J129-2
J129-3
J128-1
J128-2
J128-3
J127-1
J127-2
J127-3
J126-1
J126-2
J126-3
J125-1
J125-2
J125-3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+5V
G
STPLHP
+5V
G
VPJM
J525
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J121
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
J8-4
J8-5
J8-6
J8-7
J6
J6
Saddle Sticher
Controller PCB
J9-4
J9-5
J9-6
J306
J316
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J120
J202-1
J202-2
J202-3
J202-4
J202-5
J202-6
J201-1
J201-2
J201-3
J14
STDHP1
G
HKEMP1
3
2
1
J9-7
J9-8
J9-9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
STDHP2
G
HKEMP2
J126
3
2
1
J127
J9-10
J9-11
J9-12
J305
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
4
3
2
1
J120
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J11
3
FDROPN 4
5
DELVMS 6
7
8
9
10
J7
+24V 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J11
J16
+5V
G
JOGHP
G
FLDCLK
+5V
+5V
G
EJCVR
+5V
G
FDR
G
LUNGECLK
+5V
B
A
B
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
J4
J4
+24V 1
INLTCVRMS 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
B
A
B
A
+24V
J1
J1
+24V 1
G 2
J209-3
J209-2
J209-1
J102-3
J102-2
J102-1
J203-3
J203-2
J203-1
J104-3
J104-2
J104-1
J107-3
J107-2
J107-1
J113-5
J113-4
J113-3
J113-2
J113-1
J114-5
J114-4
J114-3
J114-2
J114-1
J109-1
J109-2
J110-1
J110-2
J205-1
J205-2
J112-1
J112-2
J108-1
J108-2
J132-1
J132-2
J11-7
J11-8
J11-9
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J6-4
J6-5
J6-6
J6-7
J6-8
J6-9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
J303
1
2
3
J203
3
2
1
J309
J402
J11-13
J11-14
J11-15
J11-10
J11-11
J11-12
J11-4
J11-5
J11-6
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
N0
N0
N0
PI2S
Front Door
Open/Closed
Sensor
PI21S
Paper folding
home position
sensor
PI9S
Inlet cover
sensor
3
2
1
J107
3
2
1
J104
3
2
1
J103
3
2
1
J102
3
2
1
J101
J100
1
2
3
3
2
1
J106
3
2
1
J105
3
2
1
J131
3
2
1
J132
1
2
3
J111
3
2
1
J110
3
2
1
J109
J502
1
2
3
3
2
1
J301
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
J201
J308
4
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
J208
1
2
J108
1
2
3
J112
2
1
J205 J305
3
2
1
J209
J302
J202
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J13-1
J13-2
J13-3
J13-4
J13-5
J13-6
J4-9
J4-10
J4-7
J4-8
J4-6
J4-5
J4-4
J4-3
J4-2
J4-1
11
PI3S
Delivery
Cover
Sensor
SL
PI15S
Paper Pushing
Plate Top Position
Sensor
PI14S
Paper Pushing
Plate Home Position
Sensor
PI13S
Guide Home
Position Sensor
PI12S
Crescrent Roller
Phase
Sensor
PI11S
Delivery
Sensor
MS4S
Staple Sensor (Rear)
3
2
1
M7S
Stitcher
Motor
(Front)
J9-13
J9-14
J9-15
MS5S
Stitcher
Home Position
Swtich (Rear)
3
2
1
MS6S
Staple Sensor (Front)
M
J128
MS7S
Stitcher
Home Position
Switch (Front)
3
2
1
M3S
Guide
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M4S
Paper
Positioning
Plate Motor
A
B
A
B
+24V
J315
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
J129
J5-2
J5-1
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
J7-6
J7-7
J7-8
J7-9
J7-10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J12
J118
J118a
J5-4
J5-3
5
4
3
2
1
J114
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J31
J12
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J31
2
1
J19
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
J117
J117a
J5-6
J5-5
J2-1
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-5
J2-6
2
1
2
1
J5
4
3
2
1
RLNPSL
+24V
FSPSL2
+24V
FLPSL1
+24V
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
J32
J32
J5
SL2S
SL1S
No. 2 Deflecting No. 1 Deflecting
Plate Solenoid
Plate Solenoid
J116
J116a
4
3
2
1
J1-2
J1-1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI4S
Paper Folding
Motor Clock
Sensor
1
2
3
SL4S
Feed
Plate Contact
Solenoid
SL
J15
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI5S
Alignment Plate
Home Position
Sensor
J124
SL
J15
PI6S
Paper Tray
Sensor
1
2
3
J115
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
J119-1
J119-2
J119-3
J119-4
J119-5
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI7S
Paper Positioning
Plate Home Position
Sensor
J123
1
2
3
4
5
4
3
2
1
J115-1
J115-2
J115-3
J115-4
J8
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI8S
Paper Positioning
Plate Sensor
1
2
3
J113
J116-1
J113-2
J117-1
J117-2
J118-1
J118-2
J8
PI16S
Stitcher Unit
Home Position
Sensor
J10-8
J10-7
J10-6
1
2
3
5
4
3
2
1
J121-1
J121-2
J121-3
J121-4
J121-5
J121-6
J121-7
J120-1
J120-2
J120-3
J120-4
J120-5
J120-6
J120-7
PI7S
Vertical
Path
Sensor
J304
Finisher Unit
M8S
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor
J107
J18-3
J18-2
J18-1
M5S
Alignment
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
M1S
Feed
Motor
M2S
Paper Folding
Motor
5
4
3
2
1
M
MS3S
Delivery Door
Switch
J204
1
2
3
4
5
MS2S
Front Door
Switch
5
4
3
2
1
MS1S
Inlet Door
Switch
J10-1
J10-2
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
12
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.9.2. Saddle Stitch Unit Circuit Diagram
PI1S
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor Clock
Sensor
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J131-3
J131-2
J131-1
J208-4
J208-3
J208-2
1
2
J131-6
J131-5
J131-4
J131-3
J131-2
J131-1
774
3
2
1
J106
J5
4 FDROPN
3
2 UDROPN
1 +24V
J5
4
3
2
1
J7
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J7
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
G
SREGHP
+5V
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1A J1A
A 11 11
B 10 10
9
A 9
8
B 8
7
+24V 7
LEDON
+5V
+5V
PUNCHCLK
G
8
7
6
5
4
PUNCHHP 3
+5V 2
G 1
G 10
DFULL 9
11
J1B J1B
2
1
2
1
J102-1
J102-2
J102-3
J101-1
J101-2
J101-3
J101-4
J105-1
J105-2
J105-3
J104-1
J104-2
J104-3
J112-1
J112-2
J112-3
J112-4
J10-1
J10-2
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
J10-6
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J11-4
J11-5
J11-6
J11-7
2
1
2
1
J114 J114
2
1
J113
2
1
J1A-1
J1A-2
J1A-3
J1B-4
J1B-5
J1B-6
J1B-3
J1B-2
J1B-1
J1A-7
J1A-8
J1A-9
J1A-10
J7-7
J7-8
J7-9
J7-10
J7-11
J7-12
J7-13
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
J7-6
J1B-7
J1B-8
J1B-9
J1B-10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
J102
3
2
1
J105
3
2
1
J104
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
J101 J101
J11
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J10
J10
J11
4
3
2
1
J112
4
3
2
1
J112
PI2P
Punch Motor Clock
Sensor
MS2P
Front Door Switch
MS1P
Upper Door Switch
Finisher Unit
NC
C
N0
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
G
+5V
SREG1
SREG2
SREG3
SREG4
PAEND
G
LEDON1
LEDON2
LEDON3
LEDON4
LEDON5
J2
J2
PI3P
Punch Home Position
Sensor
3
2
1
J106
J4
J4
J23
M2P
Motor
NC
C
N0
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4 +24V
3
2
1 G
J3A J3A
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J38 J38
J21A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J21B
Photosensor PCB
LED PCB
Scrap full
Detection PCB
M1P
Punch Motor
10
11
12
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.1.9.3. Punch Unit Circuit Diagram
PI1P
Punch Home Position
Sensor
Punch Driver PCB
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2. DA-FS330
11.2.1.
Introduction
11.2.1.1. DA-FS330 Specifications

Applicable Models : DP-3510/3520/3530 Series
Item
Ambient Conditions
Relative Humidity
Installation
Condition
Loading Style
Copy Paper Size
Description
50 - 95 F / 10 - 35 C
15 - 80% RH
Horizontal
Lower Bin Lift
Upper Bin:
Lower Bin:
LDR/A3, LGL/B4
LTR/A4, LTR-R/A4-R
INV-R/A5-R
B5, B5-R Post card
LTR/A4 only
Copy Paper Weight 16 - 34 lb / 60 - 133 g/m2 (Non-Finishing)

16 - 28 lb / 64 - 105 g/m2 (Punching, Stapling)
Number of Bins
2
Sort Mode, Hole Punch Mode,
Modes
Staple Mode (Lower Bin only),
Shift Mode (Lower Bin only)
Upper Bin: 100 sheets
Non-Staple Sort
Lower Bin: 1,000 sheets
Loading Capacity
Lower Bin: 30 sets
Staple Sort
(regardless the number of sheets, max. 30 sheets/set)
Shift Operation
Shift 23 mm (Lower Bin only, LTR/A4 only)
15.9 x 20.5 x 17.2 in / 420 x 520 x 430 mm
Size (W) (D) (H)
(not including the Finisher Stand)
Weight
Approx. 36 lb / 16 kg
Power Source
+24 VDC supplied from Copier
Power
60 W
Consumption
Rear Diagonal Stapling
Stapling Position
Refer to the illustration as follows.
Stapled Number of
Max. 30 sheets/set
Copies
Replacement
FQ-SS32
Staples
3 Holes (North America)
Hole Punch
4 Holes (Europe / others)
Position
Refer to the illustration as follows.
775
DP-8060/8045/8035
Stapling Position:
60
62.5 mm
62.5 mm
ABCDE
FGHIJK
62 mm
ABCDE
FGHIJK
62 mm
Hole Punch Position:
<North America>
<Europe / Others>
D
B
B
A
C2
C2
A
C1
A
A
B
l C1 - C2 l
D
106 0.5 mm
8 0.5 mm
Less than 2 mm
9.5 1.0 mm
C1
80 0.5 mm
6 0.5 mm
Less than 2 mm
10.5 1.0 mm
Function
Upper Bin
Lower Bin (LTR/A4 only)
Shift Mode
No
Yes
Staple Mode
No
Yes
776
Hole Punch Mode

Yes
Yes
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.1.2. Features
1. Small-size 2-bin finisher with stapling, and hole punch function
The Finisher is equipped with a stapling function as well as a hole punch function.
2. Large Capacity
A maximum of 1,100 sheets can be stacked in 2 bins.
(20 lbs/80g/m2 small size paper, not stapled).
3. Improved Paper Transport Performance
Copy paper 16-34lbs/60 - 133g/m2 can be used. (Max 28 lbs/105g/m2 for staple, and punch mode)
4. Shift
Copies of each job can be discharged to the foreground position, so that copies in a bin can be sorted.
(A4, LTR Only)
11.2.1.3. External Parts

Front Cover
Paper Exit (Face Up)
Top Cover
Rear Cover
Upper Tray
Paper Exit
(Face Down)
Lower Tray
Guide Plate
Assembly
Lower Left Cover
I/F Cable
777
Stapler Cover Assembly
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.1.4. Component Location

1. Mechanical Parts
Face Up Exit Roller Bearing

Face Up Exit Roller
Paddle Roller
Face Down Exit
Roller Bearing
Face Down Exit
Roller
Exit Sensor (B) (Face up Exit)
Paper Path Select Gate

Paper Feed Sensor (A)
Paper Feed
Guide
Upper Tray
Registration Roller
Lower Tray
Inverting Roller
Interstage Stack
Exit Sensor (D)

(Face Down Exit)
Paper Pass Sensor (C)
Stapler Unit
2. Electrical Parts
Punch Clutch (CL2)
Punch Registration Clutch (CL1)

Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor (PC10)
Exit Sensor (B) (Face Up Exit) (PC2)
Paper Feed Sensor (A) (PC1)
Jogging Home Position Sensor (PC6)
CPU PCB
Jogging Motor (M2)
Transport
Motor (M1)
Punch Box Detecting Sensor (PC12)

Gate Solenoid (SL1)
Paper Full
Detecting
Sensor (PC9)

(PC5)
Sheet Detecting
Sensor (PC7)
Cartridge Sensor
(SW2)
Staple Home
Position Sensor
(PC13)
Staple Sensor
(SW3)
Staple Motor
(M5)
Exit Sensor (D) (Face Down Exit)
(PC3)
Belt Motor (M3)

Elevating Motor (M4)
Elevating Bottom Sensor (PC11)
Paper Pass Sensor (C) (PC8)
Set Switch (SW1)
Belt Home Positon Sensor (PC4)
778
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.2.
Mechanism and Operation
11.2.2.1. Outline of Operation

DA-DS330 and Host Machine exchange signals through serial communication, and carry out the following 8
modes of operations.
11.2.2.1.1. Upper Bin Exit

Discharge the paper into upper bin.
11.2.2.1.2. Upper Bin Punch Exit

Punch the end of paper, and discharge into upper bin.
11.2.2.1.3. Lower Bin Exit

Discharge the paper into lower bin from interstage stack.
11.2.2.1.4. Lower Bin Punch Exit

Punch the end of paper, and discharge the paper into lower bin from interstage stack.
11.2.2.1.5. Lower Bin Staple Exit

Jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, then staple when they reach specified number,
and discharge into lower bin.
11.2.2.1.6. Punch Staple Exit

Punch the end of paper, jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, staple when they reach
specified number, and discharge into lower bin.
11.2.2.1.7. Shift Exit

Jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, carry out shift operation, and discharge into
lower bin.
11.2.2.1.8. Punch Shift Exit

Punch the end of paper, jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, carry out shift operation,
and discharge into lower bin.
779
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.2.2. Paper Transport Mechanism

When the Punch Registration Sensor detects the paper, the Transport Motor (M1), and Belt Motor (M3) are
driven, driving gears, and belts, which revolve rollers.
1. Upper Paper Tray path (Discharged into Upper Tray)
The Paper Transport Sensor detects the paper when the Transport Motor (M1) is driven, and each
roller is rotated. Then the Path Select Gate is switched to the direction of [A] by Gate Solenoid, and the
paper is discharged into the Upper Tray by the Exit Roller.
Exit Sensor (Straight)

Punch Registration
Sensor
Upper Tray
Face Up Exit Roller
Bearing
[A]
Registration Roller
Face Up Exit Roller
Path Select Gate
(Transport Switching Mechanism)
Path Select Gate

Gate Solenoid
780
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.2.2.1. Paper Transport Mechanism (Interstage Stack)

1. Lower Paper Tray Path (Discharged into Lower Tray)
The rollers are rotated by the Transport Motor (M1). The paper passes through the Registration Roller,
Path Gate, Paddle Roller, and is received by the stack. After the paper is detected by the Paper Path
Sensor, and jogged, the Belt Motor is driven, and the paper is discharged into the Lower Tray.
Path Select Gate
Paddle Roller
Paper Feed Sensor

Lower Tray
Registration Roller
Paper Stack
Paper Pass Sensor
Belt Motor
Paper Stack
Belt Motor
Paper Pass Sensor

Sheet Detecting Sensor
Belt
781
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.2.3. Punch Mechanism

Cam Lifter
Cam
Drive Shaft
Punch Bar
Punch Clutch (CL2)
Paper Feed
Sensor
Registration Roller
Bearing
A
B
Registration
Punch Registration
Roller
Clutch (CL1)
11.2.2.3.1. Paper Transport Stop Mechanism

Stops the paper momentarily at the punching position.
Process
The leading edge of the paper being transported into the Finisher passes through the Paper Feed Sensor.
Punch Registration Clutch is turned ON.

When the normally closed type CL1 is turned ON, the driving force to the Registration Roller is cut off,
stopping the paper at the Registration Roller.
Papers are transported from the printer continuously. The leading edge of the paper is pressed against
the nip of the Registration Roller, which allows positioning of each paper. The Guide Plate, equipped with
a spring moves downward to compensate for the paper loop created during this process.
The leading edge of the paper is punched by the Punch Unit.
CL1 is turned OFF, the driving force is transmitted to the Registration Roller, and the paper is transported.
11.2.2.3.2. Punch Unit Drive Mechanism

Punch Unit is composed of Guide A, B, Punch Bar, Cam, Cam Lifter, Drive Shaft, and Single Punch Clutch
(CL2).
11.2.2.3.3. Punch Unit Drive

When the Transport Motor is driven, the Punch Units drive gear rotates the Punch Units clutch gear.
But the driving force is not transmitted to Drive Shaft because the Punch Clutch (CL2) is normally OFF, and
locked.
When CL2 is turned ON, and the lock is released, the clutch gears rotation is transmitted to the drive, and
the drive shaft is rotated.
(CL2 is turned ON momentarily, and locks after one rotation, stopping the movement of the shaft)
A rotation of the Drive Shaft causes a single vertical movement of the Punch Bar which is supported by the
Cam, thus punching the paper.
782
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.2.4. Jogging/Shift Mechanism

Holding Spring Shift Bar
(Rack A)
Reference Plate
Jogging Home Position Sensor
Pinion
Gear
Jogging Motor
B
A
Jogging Bar (Rack B)

<Jogging Operation>
The Jogging Bar moves the papers stacked in interstage stack to the Reference Plate, and jogs the
papers toward the STS. The papers are detected by the Sheet Detecting Sensor when they are in the
position where stapling is possible.
This procedure ensures stapling of the arranged papers.
The Reference Plate also ensures the discharge into a fixed position.
<Shift Operation>
Papers jogged to the direction of the STS go through a shift operation. Therefore, single paper shifts by
the Shift Bar are sorted when discharged.
(There is no shift operation for the stapled paper.)
<Jogging/Shift Mechanism>
Jogging, and shift operations are carried out by the Jogging Bar, and Shift Bar which are moved by the
pinion, which is driven by the A, and B movement of the Jogging Motor (M2) Gear.
The Holding Spring pushes the rack toward the pinion to ensure proper engagement of the Rack, and
Pinion. The Jogging Bars range of movement differs depending on the paper size (A4, LTR only).
<Home Position Detection>
The Jogging Bars home position is decided by the light blocking plate integrated into the Pinion, and the
Home Position Sensor.
The Jogging Bars home position is the point where the sensors light starts being blocked by the
Blocking Plate.
The Jogging Bar, and Shift Bars range of movement, which differs depending on paper size, is calculated
based on this position.
783
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.2.5. Stapling Mechanism

Stapling Mechanism 1.
FQ-SS32
Staple Cartridge
Staple Motor
Cam
Staple Sensor
Cartridge
Sensor
Staple Home Position
Sensor
Staple Table
The Staple Motors rotation drives the stapler by rotating the cam via a gear.
The link is in contact with the Cam. When the Cam revolves, the link moves around its supporting point.
Stapling Mechanism 2.
Cam
Staple Plate
Staple Table
784
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.2.6. Elevating Mechanism

Belt
Paper Full Detecting Sensor

Paper Upper Surface Detecting
Sensor
Wire
Hook Plate

Belt Motor
Elevating Bottom
Sensor
Elevating Motor (M4)

When the Elevating Motor rotates the wire drum, the Wire is wound, and the Hook Plate moves up, and
down, vertical movement of Lower Tray.
11.2.2.6.1. Lower Tray Up/Down Movement Control

1. The Lower Tray is elevated by the Elevating Motor (M4) to the point where the Elevation Ceiling or
Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is activated.
If paper is not in the Tray, the elevation is stopped when the Elevation Ceiling Sensor is activated.
If paper is in the Tray, elevation is stopped when the Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is
activated.
When the Elevation Ceiling Sensor is activated, a signal indicating that the Tray is empty is transmitted
to the Host.
2. When the Paper Full Detecting Sensor is activated after papers are discharged, the Lower Tray moves
until the Paper Full Sensor is deactivated.
3. When the Lower Tray is fully loaded, and both, the Elevation Bottom Sensor, and Paper Full Detecting
Sensor are activated, the Printer stops discharging papers.
4. When papers are removed from the Lower Tray, and the Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is
deactivated, the Lower Tray is elevated.
785
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.3.
11.2.3.1. General
1. A Preventive maintenance inspection should be performed on the Finisher at a regular basis. If the
preventive maintenance inspection is correctly performed, the Finisher can be maintained for a long
period of time, machine down time, and the number of service calls can be minimized.
2. Refer to the attached chart for parts replacement schedule.
3. A high voltage hazard remains even when the machine is not operating.
Always disconnect the Copier System from its power source (wall outlet) before servicing or
disassembly.
11.2.3.2. Recommended Tools

1. The following items are necessary to perform an effective, time efficient P.M.
a. Vacuum cleaner
b. Blower brush
c. Isopropyl alcohol
d. Cleaning cotton
e. Lint free wiper (Kim wipes)
f. Cotton swabs
11.2.3.3. Cleaning Recommendations

1. Refer to the appropriate PM cycle on the maintenance chart, where the cleaning cycles is broken down
by Finisher.
Note:
Use of Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) is strongly suggested, and only to be used when dry cleaning is
ineffective. Excessive use of IPA can decrease the operating life of rubber components.
2. IPA should be used sparingly to clean the transport roller (only when required).
11.2.3.4. Maintenance Chart

Parts Name
Stapler Unit
Hole Punch Unit
Paddle Roller
Discharge Brush
Registration Clutch
Parts Number
GH03 - 7811
GH03 - 7801
(North America)
GH03 - 7802
(Except North America)
GH03 - 3504
GH03 - 4601
GH03 - 4602
GH03 - 6204
Qty per
Maintenance Cycle
Unit
1
200,000 copies
1
1
2
2
1
786
500,000 copies
(including electro-magnetic clutch)
500,000 copies
500,000 copies
500,000 copies
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.3.5. Disassembly and Assembly

Upper Tray
1. Removal of the External Covers

(1) Remove the Finisher Tray (x2).
(2) Remove the Front Cover (2 Screws).
(3) Remove the Rear Cover (2 Screws).
(4) Remove the Top Cover (2 Shoulder Screws).
Lower Tray
2. Removal of the Hole Punch Unit

(1) Remove the External Covers.
(2) Remove the Hole Punch Unit Harness (x2).
(3) Remove the Tension Spring.
(4) Remove the Tension Bracket (1 Screw, 1 E
ring).
Note:
When the tension bracket is reinstalled, use the
left side screw hole for the 3 Hole Punch Unit, and
the right side screw hole for the 4 Hole Punch Unit.
(5) Remove the Hole Punch Unit (2 Screws).
(5)
787
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Removal of the Hole Punch Unit Roller
(2)
(2)
(2) (2)
(1) Remove the Hole Punch Unit.

(2) Remove the Hole Punch Unit Roller Assembly
(x4, 1 Screw each).
4. Removal of the CPU PCB

(1) Remove the External Covers.
(2) Disconnect all Connectors.
(3) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Screws
(4 Screws).
(3)
(3)
5. Removal of the Registration Roller Clutch

(2)
(1) Remove the Harness from the Harness Clamp

(9 positions).
(2) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket
(3 Screws).
(2)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(3) Remove the Registration Clutch Mounting

Screw (1 Set Screw).
(4) Remove the Registration Clutch Connector
(x1).
(5) Remove the Registration Clutch.
788
DP-8060/8045/8035
6. Removal of the Registration Roller

(1) Remove the Hole Punch Unit.
(2) Remove the Registration Roller Clutch.
(3) Remove the Registration Roller Bushing.
(Front/Rear, 1 E-Ring each)
(4) Remove the Registration Roller.
7. Removal of the Transfer Motor

(2)
(1) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket.

(2) Loosen the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw.
(3) Disconnect the Transfer Motor Connector.
(4) Remove the Transfer Motor Mounting Bracket
(3 Screws, 1 Connector).
(5) Remove the Transfer Motor Knob (1 Screw).

(6) Remove the Transfer Motor Belt.
(6)
(5)
(7) Remove the Transfer Motor from the Bracket

(3 Screws).
789
DP-8060/8045/8035
(8) Remove the Transfer Motor Pulley (1 E-Ring).

(9) Remove the Transfer Motor.
(8)
8 Removal of the Timing Belt 1 and 2

(2) Remove the Transfer Motor Mounting Bracket.
(3) Remove the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw.
(5) Remove Timing Belt 1.
(6) Loosen the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw of
Timing Belt 2.
(7) Remove Timing Belt 2.
(6)
(7)
9. Removal of the Paddle Roller
(3)
(1) Remove the Front, and Rear Cover.

(3) Remove the Upper Left Panel
(2 Screws. Shoulder Screw on the front side).
(3)
790
DP-8060/8045/8035
(6)
(5)
(6)
(4) Disconnect the Sensor Connector.

(5) Remove the Sensor Harness from the Harness
Clamp.
(6) Remove the Upper Guide Plate for the Inverting
Paper Exit (4 Screws).
(4)
(7)
(7) Remove the Inverting Guide Plate (4 Screws).

(2 positions, Front/Rear).
Note:
Use the upper hole when the Spring is reinstalled.
(8)
(7)
(8)
(9) Remove the Gear, and Bushing

(Front/Rear, 1 E-Ring each).
(9)
(10) Remove the Paddle Roller.
(10)
791
DP-8060/8045/8035
10. Removal of the Inverting Paper Exit Roller
(2)
(1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear).

(2) Remove the Lower Left Panel
(4 Screws, Shoulder Screws on the front side).
(3) Disconnect the Harness Connector of the Left
Panel.
(4) Remove the Inverting Paper Exit Roller

Bushing (Rear) (1 E-Ring).
(4)
(7)
(5) Remove the Inverting Idle Gear (1 E-Ring).

(6) Remove the Inverting Drive Gear, and Bushing
(Front) (2 E-Rings).
(7) Remove the Inverting Paper Exit Roller.
(5)
(6)
11. Removal of the Straight Paper Exit Roller
(3)
(1) Remove the External Covers (Front and Rear).

(2) Remove the CPU PCB.
(3) Remove the Upper Left Panel.
792
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller

Bushing (Front) (1 E-Ring).
(4)
(5) Remove the Belt, and Pulley (1 E-Ring).

(6) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller
Bushing (Rear) (1 E-Ring).
(5)
(5)
(7) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller.

(7)
12. Removal of the Path Select Gate
(5)
(5)
(3)

(2) Remove the Top Cover (2 Screws).
(3) Remove the Gate Solenoid with Mounting
Bracket (2 Screws, 1 Spring, 1 Gate Arm, and 1
Connector).
(4) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Sensor
Connector.
(5) Remove the Upper Guide Plate for the Straight
Paper Exit (2 Screws and 2 Springs).
793
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4)
(6) Remove the Path Select Gate (1 E-Ring)

(Adjustment of the Gate Solenoid). Adjust the
solenoid bracket mounting position so that the
Gate Arm is contacting the Solenoid.
(6)
13. Removal of the Belt Drive Motor

(1) Remove the Outer Covers.
(2) Remove the Drive Belt.
(2)
(3) Remove the Belt Drive Motor Unit

(3 Screws and 1 Connector).
(3)
(4) Remove the Belt Drive Motor Mounting

Bracket 1 (2 Screws).
(5) Remove the Pulley (1 E-Ring).
(5)
(4)
(4)
794
DP-8060/8045/8035
(6) Remove the belt Drive Motor Mounting Bracket

2 (3 Screws).
(7) Remove the Drive Gear (1 E-Ring).
(8) Remove the Motor from the Bracket.
(6)
(7)
(6)
(6)
14. Removal of the Straight Paper Exit Discharge

Brush
(2) Remove the Top Cover (2 Screws).
(3) Remove the Lever (2 Screws).
(4) Remove the Discharge Brush (2 Screws).
(4)
(3)
(3)
(4)
15. Removal of the Inverting Paper Exit Discharge

Brush
(2) Remove the CPU PCB.
(3) Remove the Upper Left Panel.
(4) Remove the Discharge Brush (2 Screws).
(4)
(4)
16. Removal of the Tractor Belt

(2) Remove the Lower Left Panel (Front/Rear).
(3) Remove the Harness Connector of the Left
Panel.
(4) Remove the Belt Motor Unit.
(5) Remove the Lower Guide Support Plate for the
Inverting Paper Exit (4 Screws).
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
795
DP-8060/8045/8035
(6) Remove the Tension Spring from the Shaft.
(6)
(7) Remove the Knob for paper jam removal

(1 Screw).
(7)
(8) Remove the Tractor Belts (x2).

Note:
When the Belt is reinstalled, install the Belt so that
the Belt tooth just under the Plastic Hook is aligned
with the slit on the Pulley.
(8)
(8)
17. Removal of the Staple Unit

(1) Open the Staple Cover.
(2) Remove the Staple Connector (x1).
(3) Remove the Staple Unit.
(3)
(2)
796
DP-8060/8045/8035
18. Removal of the Stack Area Discharge Brush

(1) Remove the Staple Unit.
(2) Remove the Stack Area Discharge Brushes
(x2, 1 Screw each).
(2)
(2)
19. Removal of the Jogging Motor

(1) Remove the Dust Box.
(2) Remove the Cover (2 Screws).
(3) Disconnect the Jogging Motor Connector.
(4) Disconnect the Jogging Home Position
Sensor Connector (x1).
(5) Remove the Jogging Unit (3 Screws).
(6) Remove the Jogging Motor Cover (2 Screws).
(7) Remove the Jogging Motor (2 Screws).
(5)
(2)
(2)
(4)
(6)
(6)
(3)
(5)
(5)
(5)
797
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.4.
Electrical
11.2.4.1. Electrical Parts (Functions of Switches and Sensors)

No.
1
Set Switch
(SW1)
2
3
Cartridge Sensor
Staple Sensor
Sensor
(SW2)
(SW3)
Function
Detects the setting condition of the Finisher, resets paper
jam, and resets staple jam.
Detects the Staple Cartridge.
Detects staples.
(PC13)
Detects the home position for stapling.
Sensor
Symbol
Paper Feed Sensor
(PC1)
Paper Exit Sensor (Straight)
(PC2)
Paper Path Sensor
(PC8)
Paper Exit Sensor

(Inverting)
Jogging Home Position
Sensor
(PC3)
Detects papers taken into paper feeder, and paper jam.

Detects trigger for punching operation.
Detects paper jam, and paper exit.
(Straight)
Detects paper jam, and trigger of the Jogging Bar
operation.
Detects paper jam, and paper exit. (Inverting)
(PC4)
(PC5)
Detects home position of the belt.

Detects ceiling of the Lower Tray.
(PC6)
Detects home position of the Jogging Bar.
12
(PC7)
13
Paper Full Sensor
(PC9)
14
Paper Upper Surface

Detecting Sensor
(PC10)
15
Elevating Bottom Sensor
(PC11)
9
10
11
Detects the paper when it is jogged to the position where

stapling is possible.
Detects papers in the Lower Tray when they reach a
specified height.
Detects upper surface of the papers in the Lower Tray.
Detects when papers in the Lower Tray are removed
during the stacking process.
Detects the bottom of the Lower Tray.
798
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.4.1.1. Control of Transport Motor

1. Paper Transport Motor for Finisher is of outer rotor type DC, brushless. Its control circuit is shown
below.
2. Pulse signals from P35 of P.C.B. (PWB-A) IC1 controls the speed. Signal L from IC1-P10 starts the
motor, while signal H stops the Motor.
GND
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M1
R10
PJ6 6
PJ6 7
IC1
RA1
IC7
2
79
99
R10
P10
P35
IC7
GND
DC24V
PAPER FEED MOTOR
11.2.4.1.2. Jogging Motor Control

1. Jogging Motor, which jogs papers in stack, and carries out offset operation, is a two phase exciting
type, 2-phase pulse motor. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Each pulse signal output from Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, of IC12 in P.C.B. (PWB-A) excites, and rotates the coil
in each phase.
3. Motor is stopped when Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, of IC12 change to Low signal level, and the power supply to
motor coil is cut off.
DC5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
10
15
A
3 PJ5
A
5 PJ5
B
4 PJ5
B
6 PJ5
15
SM
1
2
3
4
5
6
COM
SM
DC24V
IC15
COM
DC24V
RA3
O1
O2
O3
O4
IC12
IC9
3
I1
6
I2
11
I3
14
I4
4
8
3
9
2
5
6
9
O1
O2
O3
O4
M2
JOGGING MOTOR
11.2.4.1.3. Belt Motor Control

1. The Motor for discharging papers out of stack is a two phase exciting type, 2-phase pulse motor. Its
control circuit is shown below.
2. Each pulse signal output from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC1 in P.C.B (PWB-A) excites, and rotates the coil
in each phase.
3. Motor is stopped when P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC1 change to Low signal level, and the power supply to
motor coil is cut off.
DC24V
DC5V
C6
1
OUTA
RSA
11
C5
C4
R9
R5
GND
799
R4
R3
IC1
RA1
6
INA
5
INA
17
INB
16
INB
C7
OUTA
2
TdA
13
TdB
REFA
R6
R7
REFB
R6
14
M3
BELT MOTOR
OUTB
18
A
PJ4 3
A
PJ4 5
B
PJ4 4
B
PJ4 6
OUTB
1
2
3
4
5
6
RSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
SM
10
SM
R2
18
20
19
23
P23
P21
P22
P20
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.4.1.4. Elevation Motor Control

1. Elevation Motor, which moves the Lower Tray up, and down, is a +24V DC motor. Its control circuit is
shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P30 and P31 of IC1 in P.C.B. (PWB-A).
3. Lower tray is elevated when H and L are output from P30 and P31 respectively. Lower Tray descends
when L and H are output from P30 and P31 respectively.
4. Motor is stopped when L is output from P30 and P31, and brakes when H is output from P30 and P31.
DC5V
1
2
SM
3
7 PJ4
1
2
8 PJ4
M4
ELEVATION MOTOR
C15
5
C17
OUT1
OUT2
VCC 7
SM
IC16
1
IN1
4 GND
DC24V
IN2
RA3
IC3
6
P30
P31
GND2
C19
C18
GND
11.2.4.1.5. Staple Motor Control

1. Staple Motor, which carries out stapling, is a +24V DC motor. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P32 and P33 of IC1 in P.C.B (PWB-A).
3. Stapling is done when H and L are output from P32 and P33 respectively.
4. If an anomaly occurs during stapling, P32 and P33 changes to L and H respectively, inverting the
Staple Motor.
M5
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
STAPLE MOTOR
PLT8
PJ1
PJ1
PJ1
PJ1
8
9
11
12
PLT9
GND
DC5V
R18
DC24V
R16
3
4
5
R15
R14
Q2
R17
IC8
Q3
RA1
IC8
12
Q6
Q1
Q5
R12
R13
1
2
13
Q4
GND
800
IC5
R15
IC1
IC5
2
P32
P33
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.4.1.6. Gate Solenoid Control

1. Gate Solenoid, which switches between straight discharge, and invert discharge, is a +24V DC plunger
solenoid. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Solenoid is turned ON, and switched to straight discharge when signal L is transmitted from P25 of IC1
in PC Board (PWB-A), and invert discharge when the signal H is transmitted.
DC24V
DC5V
IC1
SM
SM
IC14
RA3
10
PJ4
16
15
14
13
SL1
PATH SELECT SOLENOID
12
11
10
O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
O4
I4
O5
I5
O6
I6
O7
I7
13
P25
2
3
4
5
6
7
11.2.4.1.7. Punch Registration Clutch Control

1. Punch Registration Clutch, which stops the movement of Paper Feed Roller at the time of punching, is
a +24V electromagnetic clutch. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Clutch is turned ON when signal L is transmitted from P27 of IC1 in PC Board (PWB-A).
DC5V
DC24V
IC14
IC1
SM
1
2
16
SM
15
1
4
14
PJ7
13
12
11
CL1
PAPER STANDSTILL CLUTCH
10
O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
O4
I4
O5
I5
O6
I6
O7
I7
1
2
RA3
11
P27
4
5
6
7
11.2.4.1.8. Punch Clutch Control

1. Punch Clutch, which drives Punch Unit, is a +24V electromagnetic clutch. Its control circuit is shown
below.
2. Punching is done when signal L is transmitted from P26 of IC1 in PC Board (PWB-A).
DC5V
DC24V
SM
1
2
16
1
2
PJ7
15
14
13
12
CL2
PUNCH CLUTCH
IC1
IC14
SM
11
10
801
O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
O4
I4
O5
I5
O6
I6
O7
I7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RA3
12
P26
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.4.2. Connector Signal

PJ1
No. Signal Name
Connection
Input/Output
1 5V
12
2 GND
11
Function
DC+5V
+5V
Ground
0V
3 NC
10
Staple Home
4 Position
Sensor
IC1
P45
5 Staple Sensor
IC1
P46
Not Used
5V
Home
Stapler Home Position

Detecting Signal
0V
5V
Staple
Staple Detecting Sensor
0V
Stapler
Cartridge
Sensor
7 NC
Staple
Motor +
Staple
9
Motor +
8
10 NC
Staple
Motor Staple
12
Motor 11
IC1
P13
5V
Cartridge
Staple Cartridge Detecting

Signal
0V
5
4
Ground
Normal
Rev.
24V
Inverse
Rev.
0V
2
1
Staple Motor Drive Signal +
Not Used
Normal
Rev.
802
Inverse 24V
Rev.
0V
Staple Motor Drive Signal -
DP-8060/8045/8035
PJ3
No. Signal Name
Connection
24V
1 (from Power
Outlet)
Input/Output
5
Function
DC+24V
+24V
Power PCB
CN2B
2 NC
GND
3 (from Power
Outlet)
Not Used
Ground
0V
PJ4
No. Signal Name
Connection
Input/Output
Function
1 24V
+24V
DC+24V
2 24V
+24V
DC+24V
3 Belt Motor A
4 Belt Motor B
5 Belt Motor A
6 Belt Motor B
Elevation
Motor
IC1
P23
IC1
P22
IC1
P21
IC1
P20
Belt Motor
3
Belt Motor Drive Pulse A
Belt Motor Drive Pulse B
Pulse
IC1
P30
Belt Motor Drive Pulse B
24V
CCW
CW
0V
Elevation
Motor
8
Elevation
Motor
IC1
P31
IC1
P25
24V
CCW
CW
0V
Gate
Solenoid
9 24V
Gate
10 Solenoid
(Signal)
Belt Motor Drive Pulse A
24V
ON
0V
803
Elevation Motor Drive

Signal -
DC+24V
+24V
Elevation Motor Drive

Signal +
Gate Solenoid Drive Signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
PJ5
No. Signal Name
Connection
Input/Output
Function
1 24V
+24V
DC+24V
2 24V
+24V
DC+24V
3
4
5
6
Joging Motor
A
Joging Motor
B
Joging Motor
A
Joging Motor
B
IC12
Q1
IC12
Q3
IC12
Q2
IC12
Q4
Joging Motor
6
Joging Motor Drive Pulse A
Joging Motor Drive Pulse A
Pulse
4
3
Joging Motor Drive Pulse B

Joging Motor Drive Pulse B
PJ6
No. Signal Name
Connection
Input/Output
1 24V
2 GND
Function
DC+24V
+24V
Ground
0V
3 5V
DC+5V
+5V
Transport
Motor
4 GND
Ground
0V
5 H/L
Ground
0V
Transport
Motor Clock
Transport
7 Motor ON/
OFF
IC1
P10
IC1
P35
Pulse
24V
ON
0V
804
Transport Motor Drive

Speed Pulse Signal
Transport Motor Drive ON/

OFF Signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
No. Signal Name

8
Transport
Motor LD
Connection
IC1
P12
Input/Output
Function
24V
Normal
0V
Transport Motor Normal

Control Drive Detecting
Signal
PJ7
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 24V
Input/Output
1
Function
DC+24V
+24V
Punch Clutch
2
Punch Clutch IC1

(Signal)
P26
IC1
P27
ON
Punch Clutch Drive Signal
0V
3 24V
Punch
Registration
4 Clutch
(Signal)
24V
DC+24V
+24V
Punch
Registration
Clutch
24V
Normal
0V
Punch Registration Clutch

Drive Signal
PJ8
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Paper Exit
Sensor
2 (Inverting)
(Signal)
3 5V
Paper Exit
IC1
Sensor
P01
(Inverting)
5V
No Paper
0V
+5V
805
Invert Exit Paper Detecting

Signal
DC+5V
DP-8060/8045/8035
No. Signal Name
Connection
4 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Paper Exit
Sensor
5 (Straight)
(Signal)
Paper Exit
IC1
Sensor
P41
(Straight)
5V
No Paper
0V
6 5V
7 GND
Straight Exit Paper

Detecting Signal
DC+5V
+5V
Ground
0V
Paper Feed
8 Sensor
(Signal)
IC1 Paper Feed

P40 Sensor
9 5V
5V
No Paper
0V
Paper Feed Detecting

Signal
DC+5V
+5V
PJ9
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Paper Full
Detecting
2 Sensor
(Signal)
3 5V
Paper Full
IC1
Detecting
P44
Sensor
5V
No Paper
0V
+5V
806
Lower Paper Tray Full

Detecting Signal
DC+5V
DP-8060/8045/8035
No. Signal Name
Connection
4 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Paper Upper
Surface
IC1
5 Detecting
P14
Sensor
(Signal)
Paper Upper
Surface
Detecting
Sensor
5V
Not
Detected 0V
6 5V
7 GND
Lower Paper Tray Upper

Surface Detecting Signal
DC+5V
+5V
Ground
0V
Paper Path
8 Sensor
(Signal)
IC1 Paper Path

P16 Sensor
5V
No Paper
0V
9 5V
10 GND
Stacked Paper Detecting

Signal
DC+5V
+5V
Ground
0V
Belt Home
Position
11 Sensor
(Signal)
Belt Home
IC1
Position
P43
Sensor
5V
Home
0V
12 5V
13 GND
Tractor Belt Home Position

Detecting Signal
DC+5V
+5V
Ground
0V
Sheet
Detecting
14 Sensor
(Signal)
15 5V
Sheet
IC1
Detecting
P42
Sensor
5V
No Paper
0V
+5V
807
Stapled Paper Detecting

Signal
DC+5V
DP-8060/8045/8035
PJ10
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Joging Home
Joging Home
Position
IC1
2 Sensor
Position
P15
Sensor
(Signal)
3 5V
4 GND
5V
Home
0V
Joging Home Position

Detecting Signal
DC+5V
+5V
Ground
0V
Elevation
Celing
5
Sensor
(Signal)
Elevation
IC1
Celing
P17
Sensor
6 5V
7 GND
Elevation
Bottom
8 Sensor
(Signal)
IC1
P03
Punch Box
Detecting
11 Sensor
(Signal)
12 5V
IC1
P43
Ground
0V
5V
Bottom
0V
Punch Box
Detecting
Sensor
Lower Tray Celing Detecting

Signal
DC+5V
+5V
9 5V
10 GND
Ceiling
0V
1
Elevation
Bottom
Sensor
5V
Lower Tray Bottom

Detecting Signal
DC+5V
+5V
Ground
0V
5V
No box
0V
+5V
808
Punch Dust Box Detecting

Signal
DC+5V
DP-8060/8045/8035
No. Signal Name
Connection
Input/Output
Function
13 NC
Not Used
PJ12
No. Signal Name
1 ISOTRX
2 SOTRX
Connection
IC13
TZ
IC13
1Y
3 GND
Input/Output
Function
Inverse Signal Received by
Finisher
11
Pulse
12
I/F Cable
10
Signal Received by Finisher
Ground
0V
4 ISOTTX
5 SOTTX
IC13
1B
IC13
1A
Pulse
Inverse Signal Transmitted

to Finisher
Inverse Signal Transmitted
to Finisher
PJ13
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 Set Switch
Input/Output
1
Function
DC+24V
+24V
Set Switch
2 Set Switch
24V
Set
0V
809
Finisher Set Detection

Signal
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.5.
Section V Troubleshooting
11.2.5.1. Error Detection by Self-Diagnostics

The self-diagnostics function detects troubles in important areas of the Finisher. When any trouble occurs,
the Machine stops. The error indication appears in the message display of the Copier, and the Alarm
indicator on the copier turns ON.
1. User Error
Code
U4
oF
Problem
Finisher Inverting Unit/Inverting Shift Tray
(Option)
Cause/Check
1) Are the exit options installed correctly?
2) Exit option connector(s) is shorted or loose.
3) Exit option connector(s) is defective.
loose.
6) LVPS connector is shorted or loose.
8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or
loose.
Copies exceeded the maximum capacity of
the finisher tray. Remove the copies from the
finishers tray, and press the Start key. (Face
Down only)
Finisher Tray Capacity
2. Paper Jam
Code
J60
J62
Contents
When the finisher is installed.
a) The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time
after the copier paper exit sensor detected paper.
b) The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not turn off within a predetermined time.
c) The finisher paper exit sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
finisher entry paper feed sensor detected paper.
d) The finisher paper exit sensor (straight) does not turn off within a predetermined time.
e) The finisher paper exit sensor (invert) does not turn off within a predetermined time.
The Paper is Jammed in the Inverter.
The Paper Exit Sensor (Inverting) (PC3) detects paper jam in the Inverter or/and paper exit.
810
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.2.5.2. Service Mode

1. F4 Mode
a. Input Check
Code
No.
C15
Function
Condition
a) 2 bin finisher paper exit sensor Paper is detected.

(inverting exit)
b) 2 bin finisher paper Path sensor Paper is detected.
c) 2 bin finisher paper exit sensor Paper is detected.
(straight exit)
d) 2 bin finisher paper feed sensor Paper is detected.
C16
C17
C18
a) 2 bin finisher Punch Waste

Case detecting sensor
b) 2 bin finisher belt home position
sensor
c) 2 bin finisher jogging home
position sensor
d) 2 bin finisher set switch
Dust box is not detected.
a) 2 bin finisher stapler cartridge

detecting sensor
b) 2 bin finisher staple detecting
sensor
c) 2 bin finisher stapler home
position sensor
d) 2 bin finisher sheet detecting
sensor
a) 2 bin finisher elevator bin lower
limit sensor
b) 2 bin finisher paper top
detecting sensor
c) 2 bin finisher paper full
detecting sensor
d) 2 bin finisher elevator bin upper
limit sensor
Cartridge is installed.
Belt in home position.

Jogging in home position.
2 bin finisher is pulled out.
Staple is detected.
Stapler in home position.
Paper is detected.
Bin is placed beyond the lower
limit.
Paper is detected.
Bin is placed beyond the upper
limit.
811
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DP-8060/8045/8035
b. Output Check
Activate the door switch before executing output check. Press the Start key to start, and press the
Stop key to reset.
Code
Item
No.
C109 Finisher bin movement 1
C110
Finisher bin movement 2
C111
C113
C114
C116
C117
Finisher paper transport motor

Finisher tamper drive motor
Finisher staple motor
Finisher belt motor
Finisher gate change solenoid
C118
Finisher hole punch
Function
The bin moves downward for one second,
then moves up to the home position.
The bin moves downward, then moves up to
the home position.
Paper transport motor rotates.
Tamper drive motor rotates.
The stapler operates one time, then resets.
Belt motor rotates once.
The solenoid turns on/off for one second
cycle.
The hole punch operates one time, then
resets.
812
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3. DA-FS355, DA-SP41

11.3.1.
General Description
11.3.1.1. Features
1. Through-type Stapler
Adoption of a through-type stapler allows a stapler to carry out saddle stitching.
2. Three Different Auto Stapling Positions
Three different stapling positions (Front 1-point stapling, Rear 1-point stapling, and Middle 2-point
stapling) are supported.
3. Saddle Stitching
A maximum of ten sheets of paper can be delivered stapled, and folded in the middle.
4. Punch Mechanism (Option)
Installation of a Punch Unit enables punching holes in sheets before delivery (64 to 133 g/m2 paper; no
transparencies).
813
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.1.2. DA-FS355, DA-SP41 Specifications

1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly
Item
Stacking
Feed Reference
Stacking Paper Size
Paper Weight
Mode
Stack Height (Note 1)
Mixed Stack
Paper Detection
Control Panel
Display
Size (W x D x H)
Weight
Power Supply
Maximum Power
Consumption
Stapling
Stapling Position
Stapling Thickness
Staple Supply
Replacement Staples
Staple Detection
Description
2 locations
(1) Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray)
Face-down
(2) Bind Tray (fixed type)
Center reference
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, LDR, LGL, LTR,
LTR-R, INV-R, FLS
Finisher assembly: 64 to 90 g/ m2
Saddle Assembly : 64 to 90 g/ m2
Non-Sort stack
Sort stack
Staple stack
Bind stack
Non-Sort Staple
Large-size : 500 sheets
Small-size : 1000 sheets (Note 2)
Staple Sort
Large-size : 30 sets or 500 sheets
Small-size : 30 sets or 1000 sheets
Folded stack
Stack of 6 to 10 sheets : 10 sets
Stack of 1 to 5 sheets : 20 sheets
Size mix : 500 sheets (Note 3)
Staple mix: 30 sheets (same paper configuration)
Delivery tray : Yes
Bind tray
: Yes
No
No
26.18 x 24.21 x 21.85 in
(665 x 615 x 555 mm)
59.40 lb (27 kg)
24 VDC from host machine
At standby
: 13 W
In operation : 84 W (staple sort)
Rotary cam type
See Fig. 1-001.
Finisher
Large-size
: 25 sheets
Small-size
: 50 sheets
Saddle
: 10 sheets
Cartridge of special staples (5000 Staples)
DQ-SS35
Yes (nearly empty : 40 remaining staples)
814
Remarks
Large-size: A3, B4, LDR,

LGL, FLS
(excl. installation kit)
(80 g/m2 paper)

(80 g/m2 paper)
(80 g/m2 paper)
DP-8060/8045/8035
Item
Stapling Size
Manual Stapling
Folding Method
Folding Mode
Folding Position
Saddling Size
Description
Remarks
Front 1-Point Stapling :
A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LGL, LTR-R
Rear 1-Point stapling :
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR
Middle 2-Point Stapling :
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR- With the saddle in use.
R
Middle 2-Point Stapling :
A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R
None
Roller contact
Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available)
Center of sheet
Requires a margin of 0.2
in ( 5 mm) in the center of
the sheet for a middle
margin.
No special paper.
Note 1 :
The number of sheets is computed based on 80 g/m2 paper.
Note 2 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of 750 sheets or more.
Note 3 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of sheets of different sizes.
815
DP-8060/8045/8035
Staple Position
Front 1-point stapling
0.180.08 in
(4.52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
0.180.08 in
(4.52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
A3 or A4
3.270.16 in (834 mm)
2.480.16 in (634 mm)
6.280.16 in (159.54 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
B4 or B5
1.560.16 in (39.54 mm)
7.990.16 in (2034 mm)

LDR
or LTR
A4-R
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
Middle 2-point stapling
2.920.16 in (74.24 mm)
7.20.16 in (1834 mm)
LGL or LTR-R
8.5 FLS
1.670.16 in (42.54 mm)

6.40.16 in (162.54 mm)
7.650.16 in (194.24 mm)
B4
Folding
position
A4-R
Transfer direction
A3
Middle 2-point stapling (w/ saddle in use)
LDR
LTR-R
3.270.16 in (834 mm)

1.560.16 in (39.54 mm)
2.480.16 in (634 mm)
1 1.5 mm
1 1.5 mm
1 1.5 mm
2 2102.0 mm 7.990.16 in (2034 mm) 2 148.52.0 mm 6.286.16 in (159.54 mm) 2 1822.0 mm 7.20.16 in (1834 mm)
2.920.16 in (74.24 mm)

1.670.16 in (42.54 mm)
1 1.5 mm
1 1.5 mm
2 2162.0 mm 7.650.16 in (194.24 mm) 2 139.72.0 mm 6.40.16 in (162.54 mm)
Fig. 1-001
1.57 in max.(40 mm)
Stacked Paper Alignment
Delivery Direction
0.79 in max.(20 mm)
Fig. 1-002
816
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Punch Unit (Option)

Item
Punching Method
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Description
Reciprocating method
(sequential processing method)
2- / 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) :
2-hole / LGL, LTR-R
3-hole / LDR, LTR
4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) :
A3, A4
Weight
Power Supply
Maximum Power
Consumption
Manual Stapling
Folding Method
Folding Mode
Folding Position
64 g/m2~ 133 g/m2

2-/3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) :
2-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm
3-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm
0.26 in / 6.5 mm
2-/3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) :
2-hole / 1500 sheets
3-hole / 1500 sheets
1500 sheets
3.54 x 22.05 x 6.69 in
(90 x 560 x 170 mm)
5.5 lb (2.5 kg) (approx.)
24 VDC / 5 VDC supplied by the Finisher Unit.
Standby : 2 W max.
Operating : 21 W max. (punching)
None
Roller contact
Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available)
Center of sheet
Saddling Size
Punch Hole Diameter
Punch Waste
Size (W x D x H)
Table 1-002
817
Remarks
For USA and Canada

For EU and Other
Destinations
No transparencies.
For USA and Canada
For EU and Other
Destinations
For USA and Canada
For EU and Other
Destinations
Requires a margin of 0.2

1n ( 5 mm) in the center of
the sheet for a middle
margin.
No special paper.
DP-8060/8045/8035
Hole Position
[1] 2-Holes (Puncher Unit-J1)
A3/A4
B5/B4
A4-R
B5-R
3.150.04 in (801 mm)
4.270.12 in (108.53 mm)

3.480.12 in (88.53 mm)
2.560.12 in (653 mm)
2.010.12 in (513 mm)
0.470.12 in
(123 mm)
[2] 2-/3-Holes (Puncher Unit-K1)
1
LGL/LTR-R
2.870.12 in (733 mm)
2.760.04 in (701 mm)

0.470.12 in
(123 mm)
LDR/LTR
4.250.04 in 4.250.04 in
(1081 mm) (1081 mm)
1.240.12 in
(31.53 mm)
0.470.12 in
(123 mm)
[3] 4-Holes (Puncher Unit-G1)
A3/A4
3.150.04 in 3.150.04 in 3.150.04 in
(801 mm) (801 mm) (801 mm)
0.470.12 in
(123 mm)
Fig. 1-003
818
1.120.12 in (28.53 mm)
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.1.3. Names of Parts

11.3.1.3.1. Cross Section
1. Finisher Unit
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[7]
[10] [11]
[1] Delivery Tray
[2] Aligning Plate (Front, Rear)
[3] Paddle
[4] Delivery Roller
[5] Processing Tray Stopper
[6] Feed Roller
[7] Punch Unit (Option)
[8] Delivery Belt
[9] Stack Delivery Roller
[10] Stapler
[11] Saddle Unit

Fig. 1-004
819
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Saddle Unit
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1] Bind Stopper
[2] Bind Tray
[3] Stack Feed Roller
[4] Bind Delivery Roller
[5] Paper Fold Roller
[6] Paper Pushing Plate

Fig. 1-005
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
(1) Die
(2) Cam
(3) Hole Puncher (Punch Blade)
(4) Punch Waste Case

Fig. 1-006
11.3.1.4. Routine Maintenance by the User

No.
Item
1 Staple Cartridge (Replacement)
2 Punch Waste Removal (Optional)
Timing
When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)
When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)
Table 1-003
820
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.
Outline of Operation
11.3.2.1. Basic Operations

11.3.2.1.1. Specifications
The Finisher serves to deliver sheets coming from its host machine. The mode of delivery may be non-sort
stack, job offset*, or staple delivery.
The Saddle Unit build into the Finisher is used to fold a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher Unit in half
for delivery.
All these operations are controlled by various commands sent by the Host Machine in addition to the
commands from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Punch Unit (option) is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher, and is used to
punch holes in sheets coming from the Host Machine.
The above operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as
the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.
Control System
Puncher Unit Drive

System (Puncher Unit;
Option)
Alignment Drive System
Stapler Drive System
Delivery Drive System
Feed Drive System
Tray Drive System
Saddle Unit Drive System
Fig. 2-001
Caution:
The position of delivery is shifted to the Front/Rear for each stack to assist sorting.
821
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.1.2. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

The sequence of finisher operations is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller
PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is also used for combination with the Host Machine (serial).
The Finisher Controller PCB Drive Motors, and other loads in response to the various commands from the
Host Machine. It also communicates such data as on the states of various sensors, and switches to the
Host Machine by way of the serial communication line.
The ICs mounted to the Finisher Controller PCB have the following functions:
IC13 (CPU)
Controls sequence of operations.
IC12 (EEP-ROM)
Backs up adjustment settings.
IC6 (EP-ROM)
Stores sequence programs.
IC11 (communication IC)
Communicates with the host machine.
IC1 (regulator IC)
Generates 5 V.
Fig. 2-001 shows the flow of signals between finisher and options controller.
Finisher Unit
Finisher
Controller
PCB
IC13
CPU
Host Machine DC
Controller PCB
PCU
Motor
Clutch
IC12
EEP-ROM
Switch
IC11
Communication
IC
Sensor
IC6
EP-ROM
Punch Unit (Option)

Sensor
Punch Controller
PCB
IC1
Regulator IC
Motor
Fig. 2-002
822
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)
PI1
Inlet Sensor
Paddle Home
Position Sensor
Swing Guide
Home Position
Sensor
Aligning Plate
Home Position
Sensor (Front)
Aligning Plate
Home Position
Sensor (Rear)
PI2
PI3
PI4
PI5
-1
-2
-3
-2
-1
-2
CN16-10
+5V
-12 ENT_S
-11
CN51-1
+5V
-3 PDL_HP
-2
CN55-3
CN54-1
CN53-3
-1
-2
-3
-2
-1
-2
+5V
-9 BDL_ROL_HP
-8
CN23-3
CN4
+5V
-3 F JOG_HP
-2
CN36-3
CN5-13
+5V
-15 R JOG_HP
-14
CN29-1
CN28-9
-1
-2
-3
-2
-7
-8
+5V
-3 ADJ_TRAY_S
-2
CN31-3
-4
-6
-4
-1
-2
-6
-5
-4
-5
+5V
-6 EJCT_BLT_HP
-5
CN32-3
-7
-3
-7
-1
-2
-9
-8
-1
-2
CN35-3
CN34-1
CN33-3
-1
-2
-3
-2
-1
-2
PI10 CN39-3
CN38-1
CN37-9
-2
-1
-2
-3
-8
-7
Paper Tray Sensor
PI9
When the swing guide

is at home position, 1.
When the aligning

plate (Front) is at
home position, 1.
When the aligning
plate (Rear) is at
home position, 1.
CN5-1
+5V
-9 TRY_EMPS
-8
CN5-10
+5V
-12 LVL_S
-11
When the sensor

detects paper, 1.
When the delivery belt

is at home position, 1.
When paper is present

on the tray, 1.
When the paper

surface is detected,
1.
CN16-1
Fig. 2-003
823
When the paddle is at

home position, 1.
CN9-7
CN30-3
PI7
When the sensor

detects paper, 1.
CN9-1
-1
-2
PI8
Folding Position
Sensor
CN42-3
-1
-2
PI6
Paper Surface
Sensor
CN43-1
-3
-2
Processing
Tray Sensor
Delivery Belt
Home Position
Sensor
CN44-3
+5V
-2 BIND_P
-3
BIND_L
When paper is
detected, 0.
When LED is lit, 1.
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)

Folding Home
Position Sensor
Stack Feed Roller
(Upper) Home
Position Sensor
PI11
PI12
PI13
Bind Tray Sensor

PI14
Staple/Fold Motor
Clock Sensor
PI15
Shift Upper Limit

Sensor
PI16
Shift Lower Limit

Sensor
PI17
Shift Motor Clock

Sensor
PI22
Front Door Sensor

PI23
Upper Cover Sensor

PI24
Full Stack Sensor
Joint Switch
Front Door Switch
Stapler Safety
Switch
MS2
N.O.
MS1
N.O.
MS3
N.O.
CN40-3 CN38-4
-1
-6
-2
-5
CN41-3
-1
-2
-7
-9
-8
CN37-6 CN16-4 +5V

-4
-6 BIND_HP
-5
-5
-7 +5V
-9 BIND_ROL_HP
-8
-3
-1
-2
CN47-3
-1
-2
CN15-1 +5V
-3 BIND_EMPS
-2
CN52-1
-2
-3
CN9-6 +5V
-5 BIND_CLK
-4
CN50-3
-1
-2
CN15-10 +5V
-12 SIFT_UPLMT
-11
CN49-3
-1
-2
CN15-7 +5V
-9 SIFT_DNLMT
-8
CN48-3
-1
-2
CN15-4 +5V
-6 SIFT_CLK
-5
CN25-3
-1
-2
CN4-7 +5V
-9 FDOOR_S
-8
CN24-3
-1
-2
CN4-4 +5V
-6 TOPCOV_S
-5
CN73-3
-1
-2
CN19-1 +5V
-3 PAPER_F
-2
When at folding home position, 0.
When the stack feed roller

(Upper) is at home position, 1.
When the sensor

detects paper, 1.
When the staple/fold motor is
rotating, alternates between
1 and 0.
upper limit, 1.
lower limit, 1.
While the shift motor
is rotating, alternates
between 1 and 0.
When the front door
is open, 1.
When the upper cover
is open, 1.
When the paper is

full, 1.
+24VP
CN69-2
CN8-6
-1
-5
CN68-2
CN8-4
-1
-3
CN66-2
CN8-2
-1
-1
Fig. 2-004
824
JOINT SW
When connected to
the host machine, 1.
FRONT SW
When the front

door is closed, 1.
STPLSAFE SW
When the swing

guide is closed, 1.
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)

+24V
-1
CN72
Binding Clutch
-2
CN18-1
-1
-2
CL1
-2
Feed Motor
-6
-1
CN10-7
-5
-2
-8
-4
-3
-9
-4
-10
-2
-5
-11
-1
-6
-12
B_CLU
When the drive is transmitted,

1.
M1
-3
CN57
+24V
PDLMTR_A
PDLMTR_*A
PDLMTR_B
Switches between 1 and

0 according to the
direction of motor rotation.
PDLMTR_*B
+24V
Paddle Motor
CN56-2
M2
CN10-1
-5
-2
-3
-3
-1
-4
-4
-5
-6
-6
FEEDMTR_A
FEEDMTR_*A
FEEDMTR_B

0 according to the
FEEDMTR_*B
+24V
M3
Alignment Motor
(Front)
M4
Alignment Motor
(Rear)
M5
-6
-1
CN13-1
-5
-2
-2
-4
-3
-3
-4
-4
-2
-5
-5
-1
-6
-6
-3
CN59
Delivery Motor
EJCTMTR_A
EJCTMTR_*A
EJCTMTR_B

0 according to the
EJCTMTR_*B
+24V
CN63-1
CN62-5
CN3-1
-2
-4
-2
-3
-3
-3
-4
-2
-4
-5
-1
-5
FJOGMTR_A
FJOGMTR_*A
FJOGMTR_B

0 according to the
FJOGMTR_*B
+24V
CN65-1
CN64-5
CN3-6
-2
-4
-7
-3
-3
-8
-4
-2
-9
-5
-1
-10
Fig. 2-005
825
RJOGMTR_A
RJOGMTR_*A
RJOGMTR_B
RJOGMTR_*B

0 according to the
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)

Shift Motor
-2
-2
-1
-1
-2
CN70
-1
CN70
-2
M6
CN6-1
SIFTMTR_1
-2 SIFTMTR_0
-1
Switches between + and

- according to the
Staple/Fold Motor
-1
-2
CN71
-2
M7
CN6-3
BINDMTR_1
-4 BINDMTR_0
-1
Fig. 2-006
826
Switches between + and

- according to the
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller

Stapler Unit
Slide Home
Position Sensor
+5V
PI18
CN72-5 CN72A-5
CN72A-5 CN11-3 SLID_HP
When the stapler is at home

position, 1.
CN72-4 CN72A-4
CN72A-4 CN11-4 STPL_HP
When the stapler is at

stapling home position, 0.
CN72-3 CN72A-3
CN72A-3 CN11-5 HOOK_S
When the cartridge has

staples, 0.
CN72-2 CN72A-2
CN72A-2 CN11-6
When the staple is at top

the stapler, 0.
+5V CN72-6 CN72A-6
CN72A-6 CN11-2
CN72-1 CN72A-1
CN72A-1 CN11-7
CN72-7 CN72A-7
CN72A-7 CN11-1
CN72-10 CN72B-5
CN72B-5
CN72-11 CN72B-4
CN72B-4
CN72-12 CN72B-3
CN72B-3
CN72-13 CN72B-2
CN72B-2
Staple Home
Position Sensor
+5V
PI19
Staple Empty
Sensor
PI20
+5V
Staple Top
Position Sensor
+5V
PI21
Slide Motor
M8
SELF_P
+5V
STPL_CNCT
CN7-3 SLIDMTR_A
CN7-4
SLIDMTR_*A
CN7-5
SLIDMTR_B
CN7-6
SLIDMTR_*B
When the stapler is

connected, 0.

0 according to the direction
of motor rotation.
+24V
CN2-1
-3
-4
-5
-7
-6
Host
Machine
GND
GND
TXD
RXD
+24V
CN1-1
-2
Fig. 2-007
827
Communication line
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.1.4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB (Option)
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB
Punch Controller PCB
PI1P
Punch Home
Position Sensor
Horizontal
Registration
Home Position
Sensor
J1006-4
J2008-3
+5V
-6
-5 PUNCH
-1
-2
PI2P
J2007-3
J1006-1
+5V
-3
-2 SLIDE
-1
-2
PI3P
J1006-7
J2009-3
Punch Motor
Clock Sensor
+5V
-9
-8 CLOCK
-1
-2
Waste full LED PCB
When the hole puncher is

at home position, 0.
When the punch slide
unit is at home position,
1.
While the punch motor
is rotating, alternates
between 0 and 1.
+5V
J1005-1
LED121
-2
DUSTLED
When the light is

blocked, 0.
Waste Full Photosensor PCB

PT131
J1005-3
DUSTPTR
-4
Photosensor PCB
+5V
+5V
J1007-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
PT1
PT2
PT3
PT4
PT5
-13
Fig. 2-008
828
SREG1*
SREG2*
SREG3*
SREG4*
PAEND*
When paper is
detected, 0.
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB

LED PCB
+5V
J1007-6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
-1
-5
-4
-3
-2
LEDON5
LEDON4
LEDON3
LEDON2
LEDON1
When 1, LED goes ON.
Punch Motor
J1002-1
M1P
Switches between +
and - according to
the direction of motor
rotation.
-2
Horizontal
Registration
Motor
J1001-1
-2
M2P
-3
-4
Fig. 2-009
829
A
B
A*
B*
Switches the pulse

signals according to
the rotation of the motor.
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.2. Feed / Drive System

11.3.2.2.1. Outline
The Machine performs the following in response to the commands coming from its host machine on the
sheets arriving from the Host Machine for delivery: simple stacking, job offset, and stapling or folding (in
two).
If a Punch Unit (option) is installed, the sheets are punched, and delivered to the Delivery Tray.
Sheets may be delivered in either of five ways (including one for the Punch Unit):
Delivery
method
Normal
delivery
Punching
Simple stacking
Job offset
Stapling
Front 1-point stapling

Saddle delivery
Stitching
Fig. 2-010
1. Normal Delivery
a. Simple Stacking
The Machine pulls in the sheet once to the processing tray, and then delivers it to the Delivery Tray.
Tray
Paper
Fig. 2-011
830
DP-8060/8045/8035
b. Job Offset
The Machine pulls the sheet once to the Processing Tray. It then moves the sheet to the front or the
rear using the Aligning Plate. When it has deposited a specific number of sheets, it delivers them in
the form of an aligning plane. When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches
a specified value, the sheets are delivered in a form of a stack. Even if the specified value is not
reached, stacked sheets are temporarily delivered when 10 sheets of large-size paper (300 mm or
longer) or 30 sheets of small-size paper (299 mm or shorter) have been stacked. (5- and STMTsizes: 10 sheets)
Results of offset delivery (4 jobs)

4th set
3rd set
2nd set
1st set
(Delivery Direction)
Fig. 2-012
831
DP-8060/8045/8035
c. Stapling
The Machine stacks sheets coming from its host machine on the Processing Tray. When the
number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value, the Finisher staples
them, and delivers the stapled stack to the Delivery Tray.
Fig. 2-013
d. Saddle Delivery
The Machine deposits a stack of sheets on the Processing Tray, staples it (middle 2-point), and then
moves it to the Saddle Unit. The Saddle Unit folds the stack in two, and delivers it to the Bind Tray.
Fig. 2-014
832
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.2.2. Feed / Delivery

1. Outline
The Machine forwards the sheets coming from its host machine to the Delivery Tray, Processing Tray,
or Saddle Unit according to the type of delivery used. The sheets forwarded to the processing tray or
the Saddle Unit are offset, stapled, or folded.
Fig. 2-015 shows the motors that are associated with moving, and aligning sheets. These motors are
controlled (rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise) by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher
Controller PCB.
The paper path is equipped with the sensors shown in Table 2-002 used to monitor the arrival or
passage of sheets.
If a sheet fails to arrive at or move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher
Controller will assume a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and, at the same time, communicates
the presence of a jam to the Host Machine.
Notation
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M7
Name
Paddle Motor
Feed Motor
Delivery Motor
Alignment Plate Motor (Front)
Alignment Plate Motor (Rear)
Staple / Fold Motor
Description
Stepping Motor
Stepping Motor
Stepping Motor
Stepping Motor
Stepping Motor
Brush DC Motor
Table 2-001
833
Connector on Finisher
Controller PCB
CN10
CN10
CN13
CN3
CN3
CN6
M5
M2
Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)
Fig. 2-015
834
Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal
BIND_CLK
M4
Staple/Fold Motor Drive

Signal BINDMTR
Slide Motor Drive Signal SLIDMTR
Delivery Motor Drive Signal EJCTMTR
Shift Motor Drive Signal SIFTMTR
Feed Motor
Drive Signal FEEDMTR
Bind Clutch Drive Signal B_CLU
Paddle Motor
Drive Signal PDLMTR

(rear) drive signal RJOGMTR

(front) drive signal FJOGMTR
DP-8060/8045/8035
Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)
M1
M3
CL
M6
M8
PI14
M7
DP-8060/8045/8035
Fold position paper detect signal BIND_P
Inlet paper detect signal ENT_P
PI1
PI10
Fig. 2-016
Notation
PI1
PI10
Name
Inlet Sensor
Fold Position Sensor
Description
Photo Interrupter
Photo Interrupter
Table 2-002
835
Connector on Finisher
Controller PCB
CN16
CN16
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.2.3. Job Offset

1. Outline
"Job offset" refers to the operation by which the machine delivers a set of sheets with them pulled
forward or backward for sorting.
Switching between the forward, and backward directions is accomplished by using an aligning plate
(Front), and an aligning plate (Rear).
The sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray, and then fed toward
the stopper by the Paddle.
A swing guide is at the upper position while a sheet is being pulled onto the Processing Tray or during
alignment. It is at the lower position during stack feeding, stack delivery, or stapling.
At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Aligning Plate (Front) Motor (M4), and the Aligning
Plate (Rear) Motor (M5) to return the two aligning plates to their home positions.
Sensor
Aligning Plate (Front)
Aligning Plate (Rear)
Swing Guide Home
Position Sensor
Paddle Home Position
Sensor
Symbol Connector
Function
PI4
CN4-3
Drives the Aligning Plate
(Front)
PI5
CN5-15
Drives the Aligning Plate
(Rear)
PI3
CN9-9
Drives the Swing Guide
Drive
PI2
CN9-3
Drives the Paddle (feeds
paper)
Motor
Aligning Plate
(Front) Motor
Aligning Plate
(Rear) Motor
Paddle Motor
Symbol
M4
Paddle Motor
M2
Table 2-003
Aligning plate (Rear)

home position sensor (PI5)
Light-shielding plate
Alignment Plate (Front)

Motor (M4)

motor (M5)
Aligning Plate
(Front)
Light-Shielding Plate
Paper
(Front)
Aligning Plate (Front) Home Position Sensor (PI4)
Fig. 2-017
836
M5
M2
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Processing Paper Tray Stacking Operation

A sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray. Then, the Paddle Taps
on the sheet surface twice (once for the second and subsequent sheets) to position the sheet against
the Processing Tray Stopper.
Paper
Aligning Plate
Paddle
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)
Swing Guide
Delivery Belt
Processing Tray Stopper

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)
Fig.2-018
3. Offset Operation
Each sheet is pulled forward or backward using the Aligning Plate (Front), and the Aligning Plate
(Rear).
The offset operation is performed each time a sheet is pulled onto the Processing Tray.
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Fig. 2-019 Offsetting in the forward direction

Sheet to be offset
Tray
Fig. 2-020 Offsetting in the backward direction
837
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. Stack Delivery Operation

Stack delivery takes place when 10 sheets of large-size paper or 30 sheets of small-size paper (A5and STMT-sizes: 10 sheets) have been stacked on the Processing Tray with them offset in either
direction.
The Paddle Motor rotates, and the Swing Guide descends to hold the paper stack between the Upper,
and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery Motor rotates in the forward direction to rotate the
Delivery Rollers, feeding the paper stack in the delivery direction. The Delivery Belt Home Position
Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Swing
Guide to ascend. Next, the Paper Delivery Motor is driven. Next, the Delivery Motor is driven to deliver
the paper stack with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Swing Guide
Fig. 2-021
Job offset sequence
Start signal
Host machine delivery signal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Processing Tray Sensor
(PI6)
Feed Motor (M1)
Delivery Motor (M3)
Delivery Belt Home
Paddle Motor (M2)
Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
Stapler Safety Switch
(MS3)
Alignment Motor (Front)
(M4)
Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor (Front) (PI4)
Alignment Motor (Rear)
(M5)
Sensor (Rear) (PI5)
360msec
360msec
60msec
360msec
30msec
220msec
CW rotation
Fig. 2-022
838
360msec
CCW rotation
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.3. Stapling Operation

11.3.2.3.1. Outline
Staple operation is performed to staple specified sheets of paper using a stapler unit.
The stapling position depends on the staple mode and paper size.
When the Machine starts immediately after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Slide Motor
(M8) to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. The Stapler Unit starts moving toward the front of the
Stapler Frame. It stops when the Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18) on the Slide PCB located under the
Stapler Unit. Next, the Slide Motor is driven a specified number of pulses. The Stapler Unit moves to rear
standby position at the back of the Machine, entering the standby state.
Sensor
Slide Home Position
Sensor
Sensor
Staple Empty Sensor
Symbol
PI18
Staple Top Position

Sensor
PI19
PI20
PI21
Function
Moves the Stapler.
Performs Stapling Operation.
Connector
Function
CN11-3
Detects the home position for the
stapler moving back and forth
CN11-4
Detects the home position for the
stapling operation
CN11-5
Detects presence or absence of
staples in the cartridge
CN11-6
Detects the staple top position
Motor
Slide Motor
Staple/Fold
Motor
Symbol
M8
M7
Stapler
(Deliver Direction)
Paper Stack
Slide Motor
(M8)
Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)
839
In the stapler
In the stapler
In the stapler
Remarks
Table 2-004
Fig. 2-023
Remarks
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.3.2. Stapling Operation

When stacking, and alignment of paper on the Processing Tray are complete, the Finisher Controller PCB
drives the Paddle Motor (M2) in the reverse direction, and lowers the Swing Guide. When the Swing Guide
descends, the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper, and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler for stapling according to the specified stapling position
(when rear 1-point stapling is specified, the stapler does not move but it staples at the standby position). As
a stapler moves forward, the Processing Tray Stopper is folded forward.
Paper Stack
Swing Guide
Processing Tray Stopper
Stapler
Delivery Tray
Stack
Delivery
Roller
(Lower)
Fig. 2-024
Swing Guide Home
Paddle Motor (M2)
Staple Safety Switch

(MS3)
Swing Guide
Stack Delivery Roller
(Upper)

(Lower)
123 mm
Fig. 2-025
840
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.3.3. Delivery Operation after Stapling

When stapling is complete, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Deliver Motor in the forward direction to
feed the paper stack (sandwiched between the Stack Delivery Rollers) in the delivery direction.
The Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of
pulses, causing the Swing Guide to ascend. At the same time, the Slide Motor is driven to return the stapler
back to the standby position, followed by driving of the Delivery Motor. Then, the paper stack is delivered
with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Paper Stack
Swing Guide
Stapler
Delivery Tray
Delivery Belt
Stack Delivery
Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-026
Swing Guide
Home Position Sensor (PI3)
Paddle Motor (M2)

Staple Safety
Switch (MS3)
Swing Guide
Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-027
841
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.3.4. Stapler Unit

The Staple/Fold Motor (M7) is used to perform stapling operation. This motor rotates the Cam one turn for
stapling. The home position of this cam is detected by the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19).
The Staple/Fold Motor is rotated in the forward or reverse direction under the control of the Micro Computer
(IC13) on the Finisher Controller PCB.
When the Staple Home Position Sensor is OFF, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Staple/Fold Motor in
the forward direction until the sensor turns ON, allowing the Staple Cam to the original position.
The Staple Empty Sensor (PI20) is used to detect presence/absence of a staple cartridge in the Machine,
and presence/absence of staples in the Cartridge.
The Staple Top Position Sensor (PI21) is used to determine whether staples are pushed up to the top of the
Staple Cartridge.
The Finisher Controller circuit does not drive the Staple/Fold Motor (M7) unless the staple safety switch
(MS3) is ON (the Swing Guide is closed). This assures safety in case where you happen to put your finger
in the stapler.
Fig. 2-028
Staple/hold motor drive signal
Staple top position detect signal
Staple empty detect signal
Staple home position detect signal
M7
Fig. 2-029
842
DP-8060/8045/8035
1. Stapler Movement Controller

The Stapler Unit is moved by the Slide Motor (M8). Its home position is detected by the Slide Home
Position Sensor (PI18). The Stapler waits at the back irrespective of the staple mode, and paper size.
After paper has been stacked on the Processing Tray, the Stapler is moved to the specified stapling
position in response to the stapling command from the Host Machine.
Fig. 2-030 shows the standby position of the Stapler, and the stapling position depending on the staple
mode.
a. Front 1-Point Stapling
The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to, and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation.
Standby position
Stapler
Feed direction
Stopper
Stapling position
Fig. 2-030
b. Rear 1-Point Stapling
The Stapler waits at the back. The stapling position is the same as the standby position.
Standby position
Stapling position
Stapler
Feed direction
Stopper
Fig. 2-031
843
DP-8060/8045/8035
c. Middle 2-Point Stapling

The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to, and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation. The Stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position, and then
staples it at the front stapling position.
Standby position
Stapler
Stapling position
Stopper
Feed direction
Stapling position
Fig. 2-032
d. Middle 2-Point Stapling (Bind Mode)
The Stapler waits at the back. The stapler moves to, and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation. The stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position, and then
staples it at the front stapling position.
Standby position
Stapler
Stapling position
Stopper
Feed direction
Stapling position
Fig. 2-033
844
DP-8060/8045/8035
Stapling Operation Sequence

Rear 1-Point Stapling of 2 Sheets
Start Signal
Host Machine Delivery Signal
Staple
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
???
Processing Tray Sensor

(PI6)
Feed Motor (M1)
Delivery Motor (M3)
10msec
Delivery Belt Home

360msec
360msec
Paddle Motor (M2)

Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
(MS3)
Alignment Motor (front)
(M4)
Sensor (front) (PI4)
20msec
Staple/Fold Motor (M7)
Sensor (PI9)
CW rotation
Fig. 2-034
845
CCW rotation
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.4. Delivery Tray Operation

11.3.2.4.1. Outline
The Machine has a delivery tray in the Finisher Unit, and a bind tray in the Saddle Unit.
The Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit is of the fixed type, and all the folded paper stacks are delivered to this
tray. This tray has a bind tray sensor (PI13) to detect presence/absence of paper.
The Delivery Tray in the Finisher Unit is moved up, and down using a shift motor (M6).
The Finisher has a Paper Tray sensor (PI8) to detect presence/absence of paper on the Stack Tray.
The Home Position Sensor of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Paper Surface Sensor (PI19). When
paper has already been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is on the top surface of the stacked
paper. When paper has not yet been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is at the position
where the edge of the Delivery Tray is detected. At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Shift
Motor (M6) to return the Delivery Tray to the home position.
When the paper coming from the Processing Tray is stacked on the Delivery Tray, the Shift Motor is driven
a specified number of pulses, causing the Delivery Tray to descend. Clock pulses are detected by the Shift
Motor Clock Sensor (PI17). Then, the Delivery Tray returns to the home position for the next stacking
operation.
The upper limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15). When the Shift
Upper Limit Sensor (PI15) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is
ascending.
The lower limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16). When the Shift Lower
Limit Sensor (PI16) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is descending.
The Finisher Unit has a full stack sensor (PI24) to detect overstacking of large-size or mixed paper
according to the stack height.
Shift Upper Limit Sensor

(PI15)
Paper Tray Sensor (PI8)

Shift Lower Limit Sensor
(PI16)
Paper Surface Sensor (PI9)
Edge
Delivery Tray
Shift Motor Clock Sensor

(PI17)
Full Stack Sensor (PI24)
Shift Motor (M6)
Fig. 2-035
846
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.5. Saddle Unit

11.3.2.5.1. Basic Operations
1. Outline
The Machine stitches a stack of sheets (middle 2-point), then folds the stack in two in the Finisher.
These operations are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Finisher Controller PCB is controlled by the commands from the Host Machine.
11.3.2.5.2. Feed / Drive System

1. Outline
This machine stitches the paper stack coming from the Finisher, folds it, and delivers it to the Bind Tray
in the Saddle Unit in response to the commands from the Host Machine.
That is, the machine performans the following operations :
1) Paper Feed-in
2) Stitching
3) Stack Feed
4) Folding / Delivery
2) Stitching
1) Paper feed-in
3) Stack feed
4) Folding/delivery
Fig. 2-036
847
DP-8060/8045/8035
a. Paper Feed-in
After being aligned on the Processing Tray, a stack of sheets is sandwiched between the Stack
Delivery Rollers. As the Stack Delivery Rollers rotate, the stack is fed toward the Saddle Unit.
Paper Stack

(Lower)
Fig. 2-037
b. Stitching
When the center of the paper stack (stitching position) reaches the stapler's staple position, the
Stapler stitches the paper stack.
When only one sheet is fed from the Host Machine, the next step (stack feed) is performed without
performing the stitching operation.
Staple
Stapler (Upper)
Stapler (Lower)
Fig. 2-038
848
DP-8060/8045/8035
c. Stack Feed
The Stack Feed Rollers feed the paper stack to the stack folding/delivery position where the center
of the stack (stitched position) is level with the Paper Pushing Plate, and Paper Folding Roller's nip
part.
Stack Feed Roller (Upper)
Paper Pushing Plate
Stack Feed Roller (Lower)
Paper Fold Roller
Fig. 2-039
d. Folding / Delivery
The Paper Pushing Plate pushes in the center of the paper stack to feed it toward the Paper Fold
Rollers. Then, the Paper Fold Rollers, and Bind Delivery Rollers deliver the paper stack to the Bind
Tray.
Bind Delivery Rollers

Paper Fold Rollers
Fig. 2-040
849
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.5.3. Paper Feed System

1. Outline
The paper feed system feeds a stack of sheets (coming from the Finisher) to the position where the
center of the paper stack (stitching position) is aligned to the stapler's staple, allowing the next step
(stitching and folding) to be performed.
When sheets of paper have been stacked, and aligned on the Processing Tray, the Paddle Motor (M2)
rotates in the reverse direction, causing the Swing Guide to descend. As the Swing Guide descends,
the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper, and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery
Motor (M3) rotates in the reverse direction, feeding the paper stack toward the Saddle Unit. When the
leading edge of the paper stack reaches the Folding Position Sensor (PI10), the Finisher Controller
PCB drives the Delivery Motor a specified number of motor pulses to stop the center of the paper stack
(stitching position) at the stapler's staple position. Before the paper stack passes through the Stack
Feed Rollers, the Feed Motor (M1) is driven to rotate the Stack Feed Roller (lower) so that the leading
edge of the paper stack is not bent.
Paper stack
Fold Position Sensor

(Lower)
Fig. 2-041
850
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.5.4. Stack Feed System

1. Outline
The stack feed system feeds the stitched paper stack to the folding position.
When stitching is complete, the Feed Motor (M2) rotates, causing the Stack Feed Roller (upper) to
descend. The paper stack is sandwiched between the Stack Feed Rollers. Then, the Bind Clutch (CL1)
is turned ON to rotate the Feed Motor (M2) in the forward direction, thus feeding the paper stack to the
folding position. The feed amount is equivalent to the number of pulses used to drive the Feed Motor
(M2) unit the paper stack reaches the folding position.
Fe
e
dA
mo
un
Fig. 2-042
851
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.5.5. Fold / Delivery System

1. Outline
The paper fold mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and a Paper Pushing Plate.
The Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and Paper Pushing Plate are driven by the Staple/Fold Motor
(M7). The drive force is transferred with a combination of gears and cams. Motor operation is
monitored by the Staple/Fold Motor Lock Sensor (PI14).
Until the paper stack reaches the folding position, the Guide Plate covers the Paper Fold Rollers to act
as a paper path through which a paper stack is fed to the Saddle Unit, and to prevent a paper stack
from touching the rollers.
A Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11) is provided to detect the positions of the Paper Fold Rollers,
and Paper Pushing Plate.
The paper stack folded in two by the Paper Fold Rollers is delivered by Bind Delivery Rollers.
The Bind Delivery Rollers are also driven by the Staple/Fold Motor (M7).
A Bind Tray Sensor (PI13) is provided on the Bind Tray to detect presence/absence of a paper stack;
however, it is not used to detect a jam.
2. Paper Folding
Paper is folded using paper fold rollers, and a paper pushing plate.
Almost concurrently with the start of roller rotation, the Paper Pushing Plate starts operating to push
the paper stack into the gap between the Paper Fold Rollers. When the paper stack is fed about 10 mm
with the rotation of the Paper Fold Rollers, the Paper Pushing Plate returns to the home position. Then,
the paper stack is delivered to the Bind Tray using the Paper Fold Rollers, and Bind Delivery Rollers.
Half the entire surface of each paper fold roller is uncovered excluding the central area, and the area at
the left and right ends. The uncovered surface of the Upper Paper Fold Roller comes in touch with the
uncovered surface of the Lower Paper Fold Roller only at the center, and left and right ends, allowing a
paper stack to be fed without causing creases. The other half of the Upper Paper Fold Roller that is
covered comes in touch with the other half of the Lower Paper Fold Roller that is also covered, allowing
a paper stack to be folded while being fed.
Sensor Flag
Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11)
Cam
Paper Pushing Plate
Paper stack
Paper Fold Roller (Upper)
Staple/Fold
Motor
M7
Paper Fold Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-043
852
DP-8060/8045/8035
Folding
Paper Pushing Plate
Paper Fold Roller (Upper)
Staple/Fold M7
Motor
Paper Fold Roller (Lower)
Paper stack
Fig. 2-044
[Paper Folding Start Position]
Paper Stack
Inlet
Paper Push Plate

Outlet
Folds/feeds a paper stack.

Feeds a paper stack.
Fig. 2-045
853
DP-8060/8045/8035
Staple
?????
Feed Motor (M2)

Delivery Motor (M3)
Paddle Motor (M1)
Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
(MS3)
Slide Motor (M8)
13571msec
Staple/Fold Motor (M7)

Sensor (PI19)
50msec
Folding Position Sensor

(PI10)
Binding Clutch (CL1)
Folding Home Position
Sensor (PI11)
Bind Tray Sensor (PI13)
CW rotation
Fig. 2-046
854
CCW rotation
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.6. Punch Unit (Option)

11.3.2.6.1. Basic Operations
1. Outline
The Punch Unit is an option, and is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher.
The Punch Unit is not equipped with a paper feeding mechanism, and the sheets from the Host
Machine move through the Punch Unit, and then the feed system of the Finisher.
When the trailing edge of a sheet from the Host Machine reaches the Punch Unit, the sheet is stopped
once, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch a hole along the trailing edge. These operations are
controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the
Punch Controller PCB.
Punch Drive System
Finisher Unit Control System
Drive System
Punch Controller
PCB
Fig. 2-047
855
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.6.2. Punching Operation

1. Outline
The Punch Unit is located in the pickup assembly of the Finisher, and is used to punch holes in sheets
that have been sent from the Host Machine, and stopped inside it. When the trailing edge of a sheet
reaches the Punch Unit, the Inlet Roller of the Finisher Assembly stops the sheet to punch a hole along
the trailing edge of the sheet.
The Punch Unit consists of a Die and Hole Puncher (Punch Blade).
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). It is attached to the Eccentric Cam of the Punch
Shaft, and the rotation of the Punch Shaft is converted into reciprocating motion for punching
operation.
The Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by the Punch
Home Position Sensor (PI1P). To make sure that the Punch Motor, which is a DC motor, stops exactly
at its home position, the Punch Motor is stopped in relation to the count of the clock pulses kept by the
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P).
A single punching operation is executed by rotating punch shaft 180 from its home position.
As many as five light-receiving transistors (Photo Sensor PCB) are mounted over the inlet paper path
of the Punch Unit; on the other hand, as many as five LEDs (LED PCB) are mounted under the path,
together serving as five Sensors. The Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PT5) is used to detect the training
edge of sheets, and the remaining four (LED1 through LED4, PT1 through PTR4) are used as
Horizontal Registration Sensors to detect the rear position of sheets when punching holes.
The Punch Motor, Punch Unit, and Sensors make up the Punch Slide Unit, which moves to the Front/
Rear to suit the selected paper size. The movement to the Front/Rear is driven by the Horizontal
Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal
Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P), and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a Stepping
Motor.
The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor are controlled with various commands from the
Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.
The waste paper occurring as the result of punching is collected in the Waste Paper Case. The case is
monitored by the LED121 on the Waste Full LED PCB and PT131 on the Waste Full Photo Sensor
PCB.
856
LED121
5
4
2
Punch Controller PCB (2/2)
Fig. 2-048
857
Punch Home Position (PI1P)
Detection Signal PUNCHHP
Horizontal Registration Home Position

(PI2P) Detection Signal SREGHP
Waste Full Detection Signal

(LED121, PT131) DFULL
Punch Motor Clock (PI3P)

Detection Signal PUNCHCLK

(M2P) Drive Signal
Punch Motor (M1P)

Drive Signal
Horizontal Registration Detection

Signal (LED1~4, PT1~4) SREG1~4
Trailing Edge Detection Signal

(LED5, PT5) PAEND
DP-8060/8045/8035
Punch Controller PCB (1/2)
3
PT1
3
LED1
PT131
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Punching Operation
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The home position for the Hole Puncher is
detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P).
The Punch Unit comes in three types, selected to suit the country of installation: 2-hole (Punch Unit
DA-SP41-AZ), 2- and 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU), or 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB).
The 2-hole and 4-hole types punch a hole when the Punch Shaft is rotated 180 from the home
position, causing the punch to make a single round trip. The 2-/3-hole type punches a hole, but the
circumference of the Punch Shaft is divided into two (half for 2-hole and the other half for 3-hole).
a. 2-Hole, 4-Hole Type
The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position is ON. The punching operation for
the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180, and the Punch Home Position Sensor
goes ON; the punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180
in reverse, and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON.
The punching operation takes place as follows when making a hole in two sheets of paper.
1) A hole is punched along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag
Punch Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Cam
Die
Hole
Puncher
Paper
Die
(Punch Shaft at
Rest/Home Position)
Waste Paper
(Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /
by 90 /Hole Made)
Punching operation Ends)
Fig. 2-049
2) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.
(Punch Shaft at Rest/

Home Position)
(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation

by 90 /Hole Made)
Fig. 2-050
858
(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by

180 /End of Punching Operation)
DP-8060/8045/8035
b. 2-/3-Hole Type
The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To make two holes,
the punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft rotates 180 (half
circumference), and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON. At this time, the 3-Hole Puncher
makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on a half circumference
of the Punch Shaft.
The punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180 counterclockwise, and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON (half circumference). At this time, the 3Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on the
other half circumference of the Punch Shaft.
The punching operation takes place as follows when making two holes in two sheets of paper:
1) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag
Punch Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Cam
Die
Hole
Puncher
Paper
Die
Waste Paper

Home Position)
(Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /

by 90 /Hole Made)
End of Punching Operation)
Fig. 2-051
While two holes are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape
direction.

Home Position)
(Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 90 / (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /

Punch at Upper Limit)
Punch Back to Limit Position)
Fig. 2-052
2) Holes are made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.

Home Position)
(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation

by 90 /Hole Made)
Fig. 2-053
859
(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 180 /

End of Punching Operation)
DP-8060/8045/8035
While two hole are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction
(moving up the Hole Puncher).

Home Position)
(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by

90 /Punch at Upper Limit)
(Punch CCW Rotation by 180 /

Punch Back at Initial Position)
Fig. 2-054
3. Horizontal Registration Operation
The horizontal registration drive for the Punch Slide Unit is provided by the Horizontal Registration
Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration
Home Position Sensor (PI2P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of sheets using the
Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5), and the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 through 4, SREG1
through 4), and causes a move to a specific position matching the trailing edge of each sheet (in
relation to the size of the sheet).
The horizontal registration operation takes place as follows:
1) When the leading edge of a sheet from the Host Machine is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PT5), the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit toward
the front.
Punch Slide Unit

Motor (M2P)
Trailing Edge Sensor

(LED5, PT5)
(Direction of
Paper Delivery)
Paper
Fig. 2-055
860
DP-8060/8045/8035
2) When the Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1 though 4, PT1 through) suited to the paper size
signal from the Host Machine detects the rear edge of the sheet, the Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P) causes a farther move to a specific position, and stops the Punch Slide Unit.
Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1, PT1);
used to detect the edge of sheets of A3, A4,
LTR, 279x432 (11"x17").
Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 (LED2, PT2);
used to detect the edge of sheets of B4, B5,
LTR-R, LGL.
used to detect the edge of sheets of A4-R.
used to detect the edge of sheets of B5-R.
Fig. 2-056
3) When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) detects the trailing edge of the sheet, the drive of the
Feed Motor (M2) is stopped, thereby stopping the sheet. Then, the Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to
punch holes in the sheet.
Punch
Fig. 2-057
4) When the punching operation ends, the Feed Motor (M2) of the Fisher Unit is driven and, at the
same time, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is rotated in reverse to return the Punch Slide
Unit to its home position.
5) For each sheet that arrives in succession, the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position, and
is caused to repeat steps 1 through 4.
Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PT5)
Sensor (LED1~4, PT1~4)
Punch Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor (PI2P)
Motor (M2P)
Punch Motor (M1P)
Feed Motor (M2)
CW Rotation
Fig. 2-058
861
CCW Rotation
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.2.7. Detecting Jams

11.3.2.7.1. Outline
The Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB is programmed to check for jams in the Finisher/
Saddle/Puncher (option) at such times as set in advance. It identifies a jam in reference to the presence/
absence of paper at a specific sensor. If a jam is found, the Finisher Controller PCB communicates the
nature of the jam to the Host Machine in the form of a code (which may be checked in service mode of the
Host Machine).
PI1
PI10
PI1 : Inlet Sensor

PI10 : Folding Position Sensor
Fig. 2-059
1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (1011)
If the Inlet Sensor does not detect the paper 3 times the specified period of time after the paper out
signal was sent from the hooked-up machine.
approx. 1.5sec.
approx. 1.5sec.
Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Jam check
Normal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Feed Motor (M1)
Jam
Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 2-060
2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (1021)
If the paper does not pass the Inlet Sensor 3 times the specified period of time after the Inlet Sensor
detected the paper's front edge.
approx. 2sec.
approx. 2sec.
Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Jam check
Normal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Feed Motor (M1)
Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 2-061
862
Jam
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. Folding Position Sensor Delay Jam (1012)

In bind mode, the Folding Position Sensor does not detect paper 1200 msec after the Intermediate
Processing Tray starts to send paper to the stapling position.
1200 ms
Jam Check
Folding Position
Sensor (PI10)
1200 ms
Jam Check
Folding Position
Sensor (PI10)
Normal
Delivery Motor (M3)
Jam
Delivery Motor (M3)
Fig. 2-062
4. Folding Position Sensor Stationary Jam (1022)
In bind mode, paper does not leave the Holding Position Sensor approximately 10.5 sec after the
Staple/Fold Motor is driven.
Approx. 10.5sec.
Approx. 10.5sec.
Jam Check
Folding Position
Sensor (PI10)
Staple/Fold
Motor (M7)
Jam Check
Normal
Folding Position
Sensor (PI10)
Staple/Fold
Motor (M7)
Jam
Fig. 2-063
5. Door Open Jam (paper present)(1008)
The Finisher is disconnected from its host machine or the Front Door, or the Upper Cover is opened
while the system is in operation (paper on the move).
6. Staple Jam (1006)
The Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19) does not go OFF 600 msec after the Stapler is driven. Or, it
does not return to its home position (where the sensor goes ON).
7. Punch Jam
Paper stuck at punch stapler
Punching not ended 1 second after the punching request signal.
863
DP-8060/8045/8035

11.3.2.8.1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly
1. Outline
When the Host Machine is turned on, it supplies the Finisher Controller PCB with two channels of 24
VDC; one is for the motors, and clutches, and the other is turned into 5 VDC by the Regulator IC (IC1)
of the Finisher Controller PCB for use by the sensors, and ICs on PCBs.
If a punch unit (option) is installed, power is also supplied to the Punch Controller PCB. Some of 24
VDC used to drive motors is cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2), Front Door Switch (MS1), or Stapler
Safety Switch (MS3) is open.
Fig. 2-061 is a block diagram of the power supply system :
Joint Switch
(MS2)
Front Door Switch

(MS1) Stapler Safety Switch
(MS3)
24V
24V
Motor
Motor
24VP
24V
Circuit Breaker
(CB1)
Clutch
Finisher
Controller PCB
Host
Machine
5V
Sensor
(IC1)
24VL
5V
Regulator IC
Logic System

(Puncher Unit; Option)
Fig. 2-064
2. Protective Mechanism
A circuit breaker (CB1) is monitored to protect the 24 VDC system sued to drive the motors against
overcurrent. The 24-V system used to drive the Feed Motor (M1), paddle motor (M2), and delivery
motor (M3) is equipped with a fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.
11.3.2.8.2. Punch Unit (Option)

1. Outline
When the Host Machine is turned on, the Punch Unit is supplied by the Finisher Controller PCB with
24-V and 5-V power.
The 24-V power is used to drive the motors, while the 5-V power is used by sensors, and the ICs on
the Punch Controller PCB.
The 24-V power to the motors will be cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2) or the Front Door Switch
(MS1) of the Finisher Unit is open.
864
DP-8060/8045/8035
Fig. 2-062 is a block diagram for the power supply system :

24V
24V
Finisher
Controller
PCB
Motors

5V
5V
5V
Sensors
Logic System
Fig. 2-065
2. Protective Mechanisms
The 24-V system used to drive the Punch Motor (M1P), and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is
equipped with a built-in fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.
865
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.3.
Mechanical Systems
11.3.3.1. Finisher Saddle Unit

[1]
[5]
[6] [2]
[7]
[4]
[1] Tray (4)

[2] Rear Cover (3)
[3] Front Cover (5)
[4] Front Door
[5] Upper Door
[6] Upper Right Cover Assembly (4)
[7] Jam Removal Cover
The number in parentheses indicates the number of
Mounting Screws used.
[3]
Fig. 3-001
1-1. Removing the Delivery Tray
(1) Remove the 4 Screws [1], and detach the
Delivery Tray [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-002
[1]
1-2. Removing the Front Cover

(1) Open the Front Door [1].
(2) While picking the Claw [2], detach the Fold Jam
Releasing Dial [3].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [4].
[4]
[3]
[2]
[4]
Fig. 3-003
866
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Remove 3 Screws [5], and detach the Front

Cover [6].
[6]
[5]
[5]
Fig. 3-004
[3]
1-3. Removing the Rear Cover

(1) Remove 2 Screws [1] on the pickup side, and
remove 1 Screw [2] on the delivery side; then,
detach the Rear Cover [3].
[1]
Fig. 3-005
[3]
Rear Cover
[2]
Fig. 3-006
867
DP-8060/8045/8035
1-4. Removing the Upper Cover

(1) Open the Upper Cover [1], and turn the Cover
Band Retainer [2] to the left to remove it.
(2) Remove the Cover Band [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-007
[6]
(3) Remove 1 Screw [4], and detach the

Processing Tray Rear Cover [5]; then, detach
the Upper Cover [6].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-008
868
DP-8060/8045/8035
1-5. Removing the Processing Tray Upper Cover

(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.)
(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(3) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.)
(4) Disconnect the Connector [1], and remove the
Screw [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-009
(5) While lifting the Processing Tray Upper Cover
[3], disconnect the Connector [4]; then, detach
the Processing Tray Upper Cover [3].
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-010
869
DP-8060/8045/8035
1-6. Removing the Upper Right Cover Assembly

(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.)
(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.)
(3) Remove 2 Screws [1] at the front, and the 2
Screws [2] at the rear; then, detach the Upper
Right Cover Assembly [3].
[3]
[1]
Fig. 3-011
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-012
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
1-7. Removing the Saddle Guide

(1) Remove the Delivery Tray. (See 1.)
(2) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.)
(3) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.)
(4) Free the Delivery Tray Support Plate (front) [1],
and the Delivery Tray Support Plate (rear) [2]
to the outside from the rail grooves.
Fig. 3-013
(6) Shift the Side Guide [4] lightly to the front, and
free the engagement of the Paper surface
Detecting Lever (rear) [5]; then, detach the Side
Guide [4].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-014
870
DP-8060/8045/8035
[5]
[6]
Caution:
Be sure to mount the Side Guide after securely
fitting the Paper Surface Detecting Lever (rear) [5]
in the groove of the Paper Surface Detecting Lever
(middle) [6].
After mounting, push the Paper Surface Detecting
Lever several times to make sure that Side Guide
is mounted securely.
[5]
[6]
Fig. 3-015
871
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.3.1.2. Feeding System

2-1. Removing the Stapler Unit
[1]
(1) Open the Front Door [1].

(2) Slide out the Stapler Unit [3] while pressing the
Stopper Lever [2].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-016
Caution:
Do not remove the stapler from the Stapler Frame
Shaft. If removed, the position where the Staple
Driver (Lower Unit of the Stapler) [4] shoots
staples will shift from the position where the Staple
Clincher (Upper Unit of the Stapler) [5] receives
Staples.
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-017
Gear
Timing Belt
2-2. Adjusting the Stapler Phase

When the Gears or Timing Belt at the front of the
Stapler is replaced or removed for some reason, the
staple shooting timing of the Staple Driver (Lower Unit
of the Stapler) does not match the staple bending
timing of the Staple Clincher (Upper Unit of the
Stapler). Adjust the Stapler phase following the
procedure described below.
Gear
Fig. 3-18
872
DP-8060/8045/8035
[4]
(1) Detach the Gear Cover [2] from the Staple

Driver [1].
(2) Remove the E-Ring [3] to detach the Side
Cover [5] of the Stapler Clincher [4].
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-019
[7]
[8]
[6]
[9]
[11]
[10]
(3) Remove 2 E-Rings [6] to remove the Staple

Jam Releasing Gear [7], Timing Belt [8], and
Relay Gear 1 [9]. Remove the Spacer and
Spring at the back of the Staple Jam Releasing
Gear.
(4) Remove 1 Screw [10] and Spring [11] to remove
the Belt Tentioner [12].
[12]
Fig. 3-020
[15]
[14]
(5) Remove the Timing Belt [13].

(6) Remove 1 E-Ring [14] to remove the Staple
Position Check Gear [15].
[13]
Fig. 3-021
873
DP-8060/8045/8035
(7) Turn the Gear [16] to align the round hole in the
Staple Driver Gear with the Round Hole [17] at
the back.
[16]
[17]
Fig. 3-022
(8) Insert a Pin [18] with a diameter of
approximately 2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen
wrench is recommended) in the Round Hole to
secure the Gear.
[18]
Fig. 3-023
[19]
(9) Turn the Gear [19] to align the Round Hole in

the Staple Clincher Cam with the Round Hole
[20] at the back.
[20]
Fig. 3-024
874
DP-8060/8045/8035
(10) Insert a Pin [21] with a diameter of

approximately 2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen
wrench is recommended) in the Round Hole to
secure the Gear.
[21]
Fig. 3-025
(11) With the Gears and Cam fixed, install the
Timing Belt [22] on Gears [23] and [24].
[23]
[22]
[24]
Fig. 3-026
[26]
[25]
[27]
Fig. 3-027
[28]
[31]
[29]
(12) Mount the Staple Position Check Gear [27] so

that the Blue Mark [25] on the Staple Position
Check Gear is aligned with the Round Hole [26]
in the frame.
Caution:
The position where the Blue Mark is aligned with
the Round Hole is the home position for stapling. If
the Staple Jam Cancel Dial is turned for some
reason, the home position deviates, making it
impossible to remove the Stapler Cartridge. If such
a case, the Gear can be returned to the home
position by checking Blue Mark position.
Therefore, it is necessary to mount the Gear at the
correct position.
(13) Remove the Pin securing the Gear to the Cam.
(14) Assemble the Spring [28], Spacer [29], Staple
Jam Releasing Gear [30], Timing Belt [31], and
Relay Gear [32], and secure them with 1 E-Ring
[33].
[32]
[30]
[33]
Fig. 3-028
875
DP-8060/8045/8035
2-3. Adjusting the Phase of the Gear in the Saddle

Unit
If the Gears at the front of the Saddle Unit or the
Paper Fold Rollers in the Sale Unit are replaced or
removed for some reason, adjust the Gear phase
following the procedure described below.
(1) The Paper Fold Rollers [1], and Saddle Cam
[2] must be positioned as shown below.
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-029
[3]
[4]
[5]
(2) With the Paper Fold Rollers, and Saddle Cam

positioned as shown in Fig. 3-029, mount Gears
as shown in Fig. 3-030.
Align the mark (either of two marks) on the
saddle cam drive gear [3] with the mark on
the relay gear [4] (on the half of the periphery
where gears with a smaller face width are
arranged).
With the mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear
[3] aligned with the mark on the Relay Gear
[4], align the other mark on the relay gear with
the rib of the Paper Folding Roller Drive Gear
[5].
Fig. 3-030
[3]
[2]
2-4. Removing the Saddle Unit

(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.)
(3) Open the Jam Removal Cover [1]; then, remove
2 Screws [2], and the Right Stay [3].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-031
876
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Turn the Fold Jam Releasing Dial Assembly

[4] to move the Paper Retaining Plate
Assembly [5] to the inside.
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-032
[6]
(5) Remove the Stop Ring [6], and detach the

Timing Belt [7].
[7]
[8]
Fig. 3-033
[10]
[9]
(7) Remove 3 Screws [9], and slide out the Stapler

Unit [10] slightly to the front.
(8) Slide out the Saddle Unit [11] to the front.
[9]
[11]
Fig. 3-034
2-5. Removing the Processing Tray Assembly
(1) Remove the processing Tray Upper Cover.
(See 1-5.)
(2) Remove the Side Guide. (See 1-7.)
(3) Remove 2 Screws [1], and disconnect 5
Connectors [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-035
877
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Pull the processing Stopper Base [3] to the

front, and free the Claw [5] at the front, and the
Claw [6] at the rear of the Processing Stopper
[4].
[6]
[5]
[4]
[4]
[3]
Fig. 3-036
(6) Release 2 Claws [8] of the harness retainer, and
detach the Motor Harness [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
Fig. 3-037
878
DP-8060/8045/8035
(7) Remove the Stop Ring [10], the Flange [15],

and detach the Timing Belt [11].
(8) Disconnect the Connector [12], and free the
Harness [14] from the Edge Saddle [13].
[12]
[11]
[14]
[15]
[10]
[13]
Fig. 3-038
(9) Remove 2 Screws [15], and slide the
Processing Tray Assembly [16] to the rear;
then, lift it to detach.
[16]
[15]
Fig. 3-039
879
DP-8060/8045/8035
2-6. Removing the Paddle Assembly

(1) Remove the Processing Tray Assembly.
(See 2-3.)
(2) Place the Processing Tray Assembly [1] as
shown.
Caution:
Be sure to take care not to damage the Aligning
Plate [2].
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-040
(3) Detach the Timing Belt [3], and remove 2
Screws [4].
[4]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-041
(4) Separate the Processing Tray Assembly [5],
and the Paddle Assembly [6] as shown.
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-042
880
DP-8060/8045/8035
2-7. Removing the Staple/Fold Drive Unit

(1) Open the Front Door [1], and slide out the
Stapler Unit [2] slightly to the front.
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-043
(2) Remove 1 Screw [3], and detach the Interface
Retainer [4].
(3) Free the 6 Harness Retainers [5], and
disconnect the Connector [6].
(4) Free the Harness [7] from the Harness
Retainer [5].
(5) Free the Harness [7] from the Edge Saddle [8];
then, disconnect the 2 Connectors [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[5]
[4] [5] [7]
Fig. 3-044
[14]
[11]
[12]
[13]
(6) Release the Harness Retainer [10], and

(7) Free the Harness [12] from the Harness
Retainer [10].
(8) Free the Harness [12] for the Edge Saddle [13];
and disconnect the 2 Connectors [14].
[10]
Fig. 3-045
881
DP-8060/8045/8035
[15]
[16]
(9) Remove 1 Screw [15], and free the Claw [17] of

the Harness Guide from the Long Angle [16] of
the Base Plate.
[17]
Fig. 3-046
(10) Disconnect 2 Connectors [18], and free the
Harness [20] from the Edge Saddle [19].
[18]
[20]
[18]
[19]
Fig. 3-047
[21]
[21]
[21]
Fig. 3-048
882
DP-8060/8045/8035
(12) Remove 1 Screw [22], and detach the Staple/

Fold Drive Unit [23].
[22]
[23]
Fig. 3-049
[3]
[3]
[7]
[1]
2-8. Removing the Feed Motor Unit

(2) Release the Harness Retainer [5], and
(4) Remove 1 Screw [1], and detach the Harness
Guide [2].
(5) Remove 3 Screws [3], and detach the Feed
Motor Unit [4].
[2]
[4]
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-050
883
DP-8060/8045/8035
2-9. Removing the Feed Roller

(1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.)
(2) Remove the Upper Right Cover Assembly.
(See 1-6.)
(3) Remove the Feed Motor Unit. (See 2-6.)
Bushing [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
Fig. 3-051
[4]
Fig. 3-052
884
DP-8060/8045/8035
[8]
(7) Remove the Gear [5], and detach the Gear [6]
while spreading the Claw.
Bushing [8].
(9) Remove 1 Screw [9], and detach the Inlet
Sensor [10].
(10) Remove the Lower Paper Guide [11].
[5]
[9]
[10]
[7]
[6]
[11]
Fig. 3-053
(11) Remove the Feed Roller [12].
[12]
Fig. 3-054
[1]
2-10. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (upper)

(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.)
(2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.
Fig. 3-055
885
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to

move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly
(upper) [3].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-056
(4) Push up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4]
from below to free the Stack Deliver Roller
(upper) [4] from the Shaft [5].
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-057
[6]
[4]
(5) Shift up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4],

and then push it down to detach the Stack
Deliver Roller (upper) [4].
(6) Likewise, remove the Stack Delivery Roller
(upper) [6] at the front.
Fig. 3-058
886
DP-8060/8045/8035
[1]
2-11. Removing the Paddle

(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.)
(2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.
Fig. 3-059
(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to
move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly
(upper) [3].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-060
(4) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free
one side of the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft
[5].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-061
887
DP-8060/8045/8035
(5) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free

the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft [5].
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-062
[1]
(6) Remove the Paddle [6] in the direction of the

arrow.
(7) Likewise, remove the other Paddle.
Fig. 3-063
[1]
[3]
2-12. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (lower)/

Delivery Belt
(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly, and separate it
from the Processing Tray Assembly. (See 2-4.)
(2) Slide the Aligning Plate (front) [2], and the
Aligning Plate (rear) [3] of the Processing Tray
Assembly [1] by sliding them to the outside.
[2]
Fig. 3-064
(3) Remove the Processing Tray Stopper [4].
[4]
Fig. 3-065
888
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Remove the Screw [5], and detach the Paper

Guide (front) [7] while freeing 2 Claws [6].
[5]
[7]
[6]
Fig. 3-066
(5) Remove 1 Screw [8]; then, while freeing the
Claw [9], detach the Paper Guide (rear) [10].
[8]
[10]
[9]
Fig. 3-067
(6) Remove 2 Stop Rings [11]; then, move 2
Bushings [12] to the inside.
[12]
[11]
[11]
[12]
Fig. 3-068
(7) Remove 4 Screws [13]; then, lift the Stack
Delivery Roller Assembly (lower) [14] to
detach.
[13]
[13]
[14]
Fig. 3-069
889
DP-8060/8045/8035
(8) Remove the Stack Delivery Roller (lower) [15]

and 2 Delivery Belts [16].
[16]
[15]
Fig. 3-070
Caution:
Be sure to mount them so that the Edges [17] of
the Claws of the Delivery Belts are flush.
[17]
Fig. 3-071
11.3.3.1.3. PCBs
[2]
3-1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB

(2) Disconnect 17 Connectors [1], and remove 1
Screw [2].
(3) Free the PCB Retainer [3], and detach the
Finisher Controller PCB [4].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[4]
Fig. 3-072
3-2. Removing the Slide Home Position PCB
(1) Open the Front Door [1], and turn the Tab [2] on
the stapler slide in the direction of the arrow to
slide the Stapler to the frontmost point.
(2) Remove the Stapler Unit. (See 2-1.)
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-073
890
DP-8060/8045/8035
(3) Place the Stapler Unit [3] as shown.

(4) Remove 2 Screws [4], and detach the Guide [5].
[3]
[4]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-074
[2]
(5) Turn the Tab [2] on the Stapler side in the

direction of the arrow so that the Fixing Screw
[7] of the Slide Home Position PCB [6] is in
view through the round hole.
(6) Remove the Fixing Screw [7].
[6]
[7]
Fig. 3-075
[8]
[10]
[11]

(8) Remove the Flexible Cable Retainer [9].
(9) Free the Lock [10] of the Connector in the
direction of the arrow; then, detach the Flexible
Cable [11], and then detach the Slide Home
Position PCB [12].
[12]
[9]
Fig. 3-076
891
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.3.2. Punch Unit (Option)

11.3.3.2.1. Puncher Driving System
1-1. Removing the Punch Motor
(2) Disconnect the Connector [2] to remove the
Punch Motor [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Fig. 3-077
[4]
[3]
1-2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor

(1) Disconnect Connector J1001 [1].
(2) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness
Guide [2].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [4] to remove the Horizontal
Registration Motor [5].
[1]
[2]
[5]
Fig. 3-078
[1]
1-3. Removing the Punch Unit

(1) Remove the Waste Case.
(2) Remove 1 Screw [1] to detach the Jam
Processing Cover [2].
[2]
Fig. 3-079
[3]
(3) Disconnect the Connector J1005 [3].

Guide [4].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-080
892
DP-8060/8045/8035

(6) Remove 1 Screw [7], and Sensor Support
Plate [8].
[6]
[8]
[7]
Fig. 3-081
(7) Remove 1 Screw [9] and Washer [10].
(9) Remove 2 Screws [12] to detach the Base
Cover [13].
[9]
[10]
[13]
[11]
[12]
Fig. 3-082
893
DP-8060/8045/8035
(10) Remove 4 Screws [14] to remove the Upper

Transmission Sensor Unit [15] and Lower
Transmission Sensor [16].
[15]
[14]
[14]
[16]
[14]
Fig. 3-083
(11) Remove the Punch Unit [18] from the
Horizontal Registration Motor Assembly [17].
[17]
[18]
Fig. 3-084
11.3.3.2.2. PCBs
[3]
[2]
[2]
2-1. Removing the Punch Controller PCB

(2) Disconnect 5 Connectors [2] to remove the
Punch Controller PCB [3].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-085
894
DP-8060/8045/8035
[4]
2-2. Removing the Photo Sensor PCB

(1) Remove the Punch Motor. (See 1-1.)
Guide [2] on the PCB, then detach the PCB
Cover [4].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-086
Photosensor PCB [6].
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-087
[1]
2-3. Removing the LED PCB

(1) Remove the Waste Case.
(2) Disconnect Connector J1005 [1].
Guide [2].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-088
895
DP-8060/8045/8035
(4) Remove the Screw [4] and Washer [5].

(6) Remove 1 Screw [7] to detach the Base Cover
[8].
[4]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
Fig. 3-089
[10]
[9]

LED PCB [11].
[11]
Fig. 3-090
896
DP-8060/8045/8035
2-4. Removing the Waste-Full Photo Sensor PCB

(1) Remove the Punch Controller PCB. (See 2-1.)
(2) Remove 2 Screws [1] to remove the PCB Film
[2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-091
Waste-full Photosensor PCB [4].
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-092
2-5. Removing the Waste Full LED PCB
Waste-full LED PCB [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Fig. 3-093
897
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.4.
Maintenance and Inspection
11.3.4.1. Periodically Replaced Parts

11.3.4.1.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.
11.3.4.2. Consumables and Durables

Some components of the Machine may require replacement once or more over the period of machine
warranty because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as needed.
11.3.4.2.1. Saddle / Finisher Unit

No.
1
Part Name
Stapler
Part No.
4G1-4268-000
Qty
1
Expected Life
300,000 operations
Remarks
A single cartridge is
good for about 5,000
operations.
Table. 4-001
11.3.4.3. Scheduled Maintenance

Item
Interval
Feeding Assembly Roller
Feeding Assembly Member
Minimum maintenance intervals
Paper Path Guide
of host machine
Transmission Type Sensor
(Optional Punch Unit)
Table. 4-002
898
Description
Cleaning
Remarks
Wiping with water.
Dry wiping.
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.5.
Troubleshooting
11.3.5.1. Standards and Adjustments

11.3.5.1.1. Electrical System (Finisher / Saddle Unit)
1. Adjusting the Folding Position
The folding position is adjusted by matching it with the stapling position.
IF you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new
PCB. Perform the following if the folding position must be adjusted for some reason.
Caution:
Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper. In such a case, change
the "Fold Position" in the User Mode, located in the General Settings, Key Operator Mode,
Parameters No. 15 through 17 of the Host Machine.
1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :
Fig. 5-001
2) Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0.16mm.
To move the folding position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.
To move the folding position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.
Turn on Points 1, 4 and 8 of SW1 on the circuit board first, and then press PSW1 and PSW2 at
once, and settings can be cleared.
- direction
+ direction
Fig. 5-002
3) When adjustment of the folding position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher
Controller PCB to OFF.
4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine, and check whether the folding position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the folding position again (Adjustable range 5 mm).
899
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Adjusting the Middle 2-Point Stapling Position (Adjustment area : 5 mm)

The stapling position is adjusted by matching it with the folding position.
If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new
PCB. Perform the following if the stapling position must be adjusted for some reason.
Caution:
Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper.
In such a case, change the "Fold Position" in the User Mode, located in the General Settings, Key
Operator Mode, Parameters No. 15 through 17 of the Host Machine.
1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :
Fig. 5-003
2) Adjust the stapling position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the stapling position about 0.14mm.
To move the stapling position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.
To move the stapling position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.
Turn on Points 1, 4 of SW1 on the circuit board first, and then press the PSW1 and PSW2 at the
same time clears the adjustment value.
- direction
+ direction
Fig. 5-004
3) When adjustment of the stapling position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher
Controller PCB to OFF.
4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine, and check whether the stapling position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the stapling position again.
900
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.5.1.2. Electrical System (Punch Unit; Option)

1. Adjusting the Sensor Output
Perform the following when the Punch Controller PCB, Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photosensor
PCB/LED PCB), or Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photosensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB) has been
replaced.
1) Shift bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON
Fig. 5-005
2) Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB. A press will automatically adjust the
sensor output.
The adjustment is over when all LEDs on the Punch Controller PCB are ON: LED1001, LED1002,
LED1003.
3) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
2. Registering the Number of Punch Hole
Perform the following to register the type of punch unit (number of holes) used to the IC on the Punch
Controller PCB for identification by the Finisher. Be sure to register the type whenever you have
replaced the Punch Controller PCB.
1) Set bits 1 through 4 on the DIPSW1001 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON
Fig. 5-006
2) Press SW1002 on the Punch Controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes.
Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following (repeatedly from top to bottom).
Number of Punch Hole
2 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-AZ)
2 / 3 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU)
4 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB)
LED1001
ON
ON
OFF
LED1002
OFF
ON
ON
LED1003
OFF
OFF
OFF
Table 5-001
3) Press SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB twice. The presses will store the selected number of
punch holes on the Punch Controller PCB.
A single press on SW1003 will cause the LED indication to flash; another press on SW1003 will
cause the indication to remain ON to indicate the end of registration.
4) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
901
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. After Replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002)

1) Turn off the Host Machine.
2) Set bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON
Fig. 5-007
3) Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB at the same time.
The presses will initialize the EEP-ROM. At the end, all LEDs (LED1001, LED1002, LED1003) will
go ON.
4) Adjust the sensor output, and store the number of punch holes.
902
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.5.2. Arrangement of Electric Components

11.3.5.2.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
1. Sensors, Microswitches, and Clutch
PI16
PI24
PI4
MS1
PI23
PI17
PI22
PI13
MS2
0
21
PI15
PI3
PI2
PI5
PI7
PI8
PI12
PI9
PI6
PI11
PI10
Fig. 5-008
903
DP-8060/8045/8035
Name
Photo-interrupters
Micro Switch
Clutch
Notation
PI1
PI2
PI3
PI4
PI5
PI6
PI7
PI8
PI9
PI10
PI11
PI12
PI13
PI14
PI15
PI16
PI17
PI18
PI19
PI20
PI21
PI22
PI23
PI24
MS1
MS2
MS3
CL1
Description
Inlet paper detection
Paddle home position detection
Stack roller home position detection
Aligning plate home position (front) detection
Aligning plate home position (rear) detection
Processing paper tray detection
Delivery belt home position detection
Paper tray detection
Paper surface detection
Folding position detection
Folding home position detection
Folding roller home position detection
Bind paper tray detection
Stapler / fold motor clock detection
Shift upper limit detection
Shift lower limit detection
Shift motor clock detection
Slide home position detection (inside stapler)
Stapler drive home position detection (inside stapler)
Staple detection (inside stapler)
Staple top position detection (in stapler)
Upper cover open detection
Paper full detection
Joint open detection
Staple safety detection
Bind clutch
Table 5-002
904
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Motor PCBs
M1
M2
M8
M3
M7
M5
M4
[1]
M6
Fig. 5-009
905
DP-8060/8045/8035
Name
Motor
Finisher Controller
PCB
Notation
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
[1]
Description
Paddle Motor
Feed Motor
Delivery Motor
Alignment Motor (front)
Alignment Motor (rear)
Shift Motor
Staple / Fold Motor
Slide Motor
Finisher Control
Table 5-003
906
DP-8060/8045/8035

1. Sensors
PI3P
PI1P
PI2P
Fig. 5-010
Name
Photo-interrupters
Notation
PI1P
PI2P
PI3P
Description
Puncher home position detection
Horizontal registration home position detection
Punch motor clock detection
Table 5-004
907
DP-8060/8045/8035
2. Motors
M1
M2
Fig. 5-011
Name
Motor
Notation
M1P
M2P
Description
Punch Motor
Table 5-005
908
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. PCBs
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
Fig. 5-012
Ref.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Name
Photosensor PCB
LED PCB
Waste Full Photosensor PCB
Waste Full LED PCB
Table 5-006
909
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.5.3. LEDs and Check Pins by PCB

Of the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine, those needed during servicing in the field are discussed.
Caution:
Do not touch the check pins not found in the list herein. They are exclusively for factory use, and require
special tools, and a high degree of accuracy.
12
1
CN15
CN19
CN5
15
CN4
CN
11.3.5.3.1. Finisher Controller PCB
Fig. 5-013
Switch
SW1
PSW1
PSW2
PSW3
Description
Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
Factory mode
Table 5-007
910
DP-8060/8045/8035
LED1001
LED1002
LED1003
J1001
SW1002
SW1003
J1002
SW1001
J1006
J10
11.3.5.3.2. Punch Controller PCB
Fig. 5-014
Switch
SW1001
SW1002
SW1003
Description
Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.
Table 5-008
911
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.5.4. Troubleshooting
11.3.5.4.1. Troubleshooting (Finisher / Saddle Unit)
1. E7-26, Finisher Unit Back-Up Memory Fault
1)Turn off and then on the Host Machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Table 5-010
2. E7-21, Feed Motor Fault
Stack Feed Roller (upper) Home Position Sensor (PI12)
1) Check the stack feed roller (upper) home position sensor. Is it normal?
NO : Replace the sensor.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the feed motor normal?
NO : Correct the wring.
Feed Roller
3) Try turning the stack feed roller (upper) shaft by hand. Does the stack feed roller
(upper) move up/down normally?
NO : Correct the mechanical system.
Feed Motor (M1), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the feed motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-011
3. E7-51, Delivery Motor Fault
Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7)
1) Check the delivery belt home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the delivery motor normal?
3) Try turning the stack delivery roller by hand. Is the rotation smooth?
NO : Correct the mechanical system.
Delivery Motor (M3), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the delivery motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Table 5-012
912
DP-8060/8045/8035
4. E7-22, Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Fault

Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (rear; PI5)
1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (rear). Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the rear alignment motor
(rear) normal?
Aligning Plate (rear)
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the path of the aligning plate?
YES: Correct the mechanical mechanism.
Alignment Motor (rear; M5), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the alignment motor (rear). Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-013
5. E7-23, Staple / Fold Motor Fault
Wiring
1) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Staple/Fold Motor
normal?
Stapler Unit
2) Try turning the staple jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?
YES : Correct the mechanical system.
Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB
3) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-014
Finisher Controller PCB, Stapler Unit
1) Does the stapler / fold motor operate at the appropriate timing?
YES: Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
NO : Check the stapler unit drive mechanism: if faulty, correct it; if normal.
Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB
2) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-015
Saddle Unit
3) Try turning the fold jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?
Table 5-016
913
DP-8060/8045/8035
6. E7-24, Slide Motor Fault

Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)
1) Check the slide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
NO : Replace the sensor PCB.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the slide motor normal?
Stapler Unit
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the stapler path?
Slide Motor (M8), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the slide motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-018
7. E7-22, Alignment Motor (front) Fault
Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (front; PI4)
1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (front). Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the front aligning plate
motor (front) normal?
Aligning Plate (front)
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the aligning plate path?
Alignment Motor (front; M4), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the Alignment motor (front). Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-019
8. E7-27, Shift Motor Fault
Paper Surface Sensor (PI9)
1) Check the paper surface sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Tray Up / Down Mechanism
2) Check the tray up/down mechanism. Is the mechanism normal?
NO : Correct the mechanism.
3) Is 24 VDC supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB to the shift motor as soon as
the tray is driven?
914
DP-8060/8045/8035
Shift Motor (M6), Wiring

4) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the shift motor normal?
YES: Replace the shift motor.
Table 5-020
9. E7-52, Paddle Motor Fault (For DA-FS355 only)
Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2)
1) Check the paddle home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3)
2) Check the swing guide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the paddle motor normal?
Paddle, Swing Guide Assembly
4) Try turning the paddle motor clockwise and counter-clockwise by hands. Is there
mechanical tapping in the rotation of the paddle or the up/down movement of the
swing guide?
Paddle Motor (M2), Finisher Controller PCB
5) Try replacing the paddle motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-024
915
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.5.4.2. Troubleshooting (Punch Unit, Option)

1. E7-54, Communication Faulty
Finisher Controller PCB, Punch Controller PCB
1) Turn off and then on the host machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB
normal?
Power Supply
3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN14-3 (-) on the Finisher
Controller PCB. Is it 24VDC?
YES: Replace the punch controller PCB.
Table 5-025
2. E7-55, Punch Unit Power Supply Fault
Finisher Controller PCB, Host Machine DC Controller PCB
1) Turn off and then off the host machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB
normal?
Power Supply
3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN4-3 (-) on the Finisher
Controller PCB. Is it 24 VDC?
YES: Replace the punch controller PCB.
Table 5-027
916
DP-8060/8045/8035
3. E7-28, Punch Motor Fault

Punch Motor Home Position Sensor (PI1P)
1) Check the punch home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P)
2) Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the sensor normal?
Punch Mechanism, Punch Motor (M1P)
4) Is there a fault in the punch mechanism?
YES: Correct the punch mechanism.
NO : Replace the punch motor.
Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB
5) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-028
4. E7-57, Punch Sensor (Horizontal Registration) Fault
Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photo Sensor PCB / LED PCB)
1) Check the horizontal registration sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the horizontal registration
sensor normal?
3) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem correct?
YES: End.
Table 5-029
917
DP-8060/8045/8035
5. E7-58, Punch Sensor (Waste Full) Fault

Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photo Sensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB)
1) Check the waste full sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the waste full sensor normal?
YES: End.
Table 5-030
6. E7-29, Horizontal Registration Motor Fault
Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P)
1) Check the horizontal registration home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the horizontal registration
home position sensor normal?
Horizontal Registration Mechanism, Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P)
3) Is there a fault in the horizontal registration mechanism?
YES: Correct the horizontal registration mechanism.
NO : Replace the horizontal registration motor.
YES: End.
Table 5-031
918
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.5.5. Self Diagnosis

11.3.5.5.1. Alarm
1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
Error
Condition
Stapler Absent The stapler is not

set.
Timing of
Detection
Monitored at all
times
Operation
The staple / fold

motor (M7), and
the slide motor
(M8) will stop.
Stapler Absent The staple
Monitored at all
Normal operation
cartridge has run
times
will continue;
out of staples.
however, operation
is subject to
instructions from
the host machine.
Mixed Sheets Sheets of different When a sheet of a The sheet will be
sizes are deposited different size is
aligned based on
in the
placed.
maximum size
compartment.
width, and
delivered as a
stack.
Overstacking The number of
When an extra
The sheets will be
for Stapling
sheets in the
sheet is placed.
delivered with
compartment has
stapling.
exceeded the limit
imposed on
stapling.
Stack Tray
The number of
When an extra
Normal operation
Overstacking sheets deposited sheet is placed.
will continue.
on the delivery tray
has exceeded the
limit imposed on
the tray. (sheets,
sets)
Saddle
Remove the stack When an extra
Normal operation
Overstacking from the bind tray. sheet is placed.
will continue.
More than 10
stacks are
deposited on the
folded stack tray.
Table 5-034
919
Resetting
Set the stapler.
Replace the staple

cartridge; or, set it
correctly.
Remove the sheets

from the delivery
tray.
Remove the stack

from the bind tray.
DP-8060/8045/8035
Error
Punch Waste
Paper Full
Punch Waste
Paper Excess
(Overflow)
Condition
Timing of
Detection
During punching.
The amount of
waste paper in the
waste case has
reached the limit.
The amount of
During punching.
waste paper in the
waste case has
exceeded the limit.
Table 5-035
920
Operation
Resetting
Normal operation
will continue.
Remove the waste

paper from the
waste case.
Punching will be
disabled.
Remove the waste

paper from the
water case.
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.6.
Appendix
11.3.6.1. Signals and Abbreviations

The following presents the abbreviations of signals used in this manual and in drawings, and the meaning of
each signal.
Reference:
Signals enclosed by brackets [ ] are electrical signals.
Finisher / Saddle-Stitch Unit
ADJ_TRAY_S
Jog Paper Tray Detect Signal
B_CLU
Bind Clutch Drive Signal
BDL_ROL_HP
Swing Guide HP Detect Signal
BIND_CLK
Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal
BIND_EMPS
Bind Paper Tray Detect Signal
BIND_HP
Folding HP Detect Signal
BIND_L
Fold Position LED ON Signal
BINDMTR
Staple/Fold Motor Drive Signal
BIND_P
Fold Position Paper Detect Signal
BIND_ROL_HP
Bundle Feed Roller HP Detect Signal
EJCT_BLT_HP
Eject Belt HP Detect Signal
EJCTMTR
Eject Motor Drive Signal
ENT_S
Inlet Paper Detect Signal
FDOOR_S
Front Door Open Detect Signal
FEEDMTR
Feed Motor Drive Signal
FJOG_HP
Front Jog Plate HP Detect Signal
FJOGMTR
Front Jog Motor Drive Signal
FRONT_SW
Front Door Switch Signal
HOOK_S
Hook Empty Detect Signal
JOINT_SW
Joint Switch Signal
LVL_S
Paper Surface Detect Signal
PAPER_F
Paper Full Detect Signal
PDL_HP
Paddle HP Detect Signal
PDLMTR
Paddle Motor Drive Signal
RJOG_HP
Rear Jog Plate HP Detect Signal
RJOGMTR
Rear Jog Motor Drive Signal
SELF_P
Hook Top Position Detect Signal
SIFT_CLK
Sift Motor Clock Detect Signal
SIFT_DNLMT
Sift Down Limit Detect Signal
SIFTMTR
Sift Motor Drive Signal
SIFT_UPLMT
Sift Upper Limit Detect Signal
SLID_HP
Slide HP Detect Signal
SLIDMTR
Slide Motor Drive Signal
STPL_CNCT
Stapler Connect Detect Signal
STPL_HP
Staple HP Detect Signal
STPLSAFE_SW
Staple Safety Switch Signal
TOPCOV_S
Top Cover Open Detect Signal
TRY_EMPS
Paper Tray Detect Signal
921
DP-8060/8045/8035
Punch Unit (Option)

CLOCK
DUSTLED
DUSTPTR
PAEND
PUNCH
SLIDE
SREG1
SREG2
SREG3
REG4
LEDON1
LEDON2
LEDON3
LEDON4
LEDON5
Punch Motor Clock Detect Signal

Dust LED ON Signal
Dust Full Detect Signal
Paper End Detect Signal
Punch HP Detect Signal
Side Registration HP Detect Signal
LED1 ON Signal
LED2 ON Signal
LED3 ON Signal
LED4 ON Signal
LED5 ON Signal
922
Aligning Plate Upper Cover

Home Position
Sensor
Sensor (Front)
PI23
Front Door
Sensor
Processing Delivery Belt Paper Tray

Tray
Home Position
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Paper Surface Aligning Plate

Sensor
Home Position
Sensor (Rear)
PI5
Folding
Position
Sensor
923
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_DNLMT
CN49-3
CN49-2
CN49-1
PI13
PI17
PI16
PI15
PI2
Bind Tray
Sensor
Shift Motor
Clock
Sensor
Shift
Limit
Sensor
Shift Upper
Limit
Sensor
Paddle Home
Position
Sensor
Staple/Fold Swing Guide

Clock
Home Position
Sensor
Sensor
PI3
DC+5V
SGND
PAPER_F
DC+5V
SGND
BDL_ROL_HP
CN55-3
CN55-2
CN55-1
PI14
CN73-3
CN73-2
CN73-1
DC+5V
BIND_CLK
DC+5V
DC+5V
SGND
PDL_HP
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_UPLMT
CN52-3
CN52-2
CN52-1
CN51-3
CN51-2
CN51-1
CN50-3
CN50-2
CN50-1
DC+5V
SGND
BIND_EMPS
PI1
Inlet
Sensor
CN47-3
CN47-2
CN47-1
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_CLK
DC+5V
SGND
ENT_S
PI12
CN48-3
CN48-2
CN48-1
Folding
Stack Feed
Home Position Roller (Upper)
Sensor
Home Position
Sensor
CN44-3
CN44-2
CN44-1
PI11
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
10
11
12
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
DC+5V
8
SGND
9
BIND_ROL_HP
CN41-3
CN41-2
CN41-1
4
5
6
1
2
3
13
14
15
1
2
3
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
DC+5V
SGND
BIND_HP
PI10
CN40-3
CN40-2
CN40-1
DC+5V
BIND_P
BIND_L
PI9
CN39-3
CN39-2
CN39-1
DC+5V
SGND
RJOG_HP
PI8
CN36-3
CN36-2
CN36-1
DC+5V
SGND
TRY_EMPS
CN32-3
CN32-2
CN32-1
PI7
DC+5V
SGND
LVL_S
DC+5V
SGND
EJCT_BLT_HP
CN31-3
CN31-2
CN31-1
PI6
CN35-3
CN35-2
CN35-1
DC+5V
SGND
ADJ_TRAY_S
PI22
CN30-3
CN30-2
CN30-1
DC+5V
SGND
FDOOR_S
DC+5V
SGND
TOPCOV_S
CN24-3
CN24-2
CN24-1
PI4
CN25-3
CN25-2
CN25-1
DC+5V
SGND
FJOG_HP
11
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN54-1
CN54-2
CN54-3
CN43-1
CN43-2
CN43-3
CN38-1
CN38-2
CN38-3
CN38-4
CN38-5
CN38-6
CN38-7
CN38-8
CN38-9
CN34-1
CN34-2
CN34-3
CN29-1
CN29-2
CN29-3
CN29-4
CN29-5
CN29-6
CN29-7
CN29-8
CN29-9
CN33-3
CN33-2
CN33-1
CN28-9
CN28-8
CN28-7
CN28-6
CN28-5
CN28-4
CN28-3
CN28-2
CN28-1
CN42-3
CN42-2
CN42-1
DC+5V
CN53-3
SGND
CN53-2
BDL_ROL_HP CN53-1
DC+5V
SGND
ELT_S
DC+5V
CN37-9
BIND_P
CN37-8
BIND_L
CN37-7
DC+5V
CN37-6
SGND
CN37-5
BIND_HP
CN37-4
DC+5V
CN37-3
SGND
CN37-2
BIND_ROL_HP CN37-1
DC+5V
SGND
LVL_S
DC+5V
SGND
ADJ_TRAY_S
DC+5V
SGND
EJCT_BLT_HP
DC+5V
SGND
TRY_EMPS
To Host
Machine
10
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
SGND
DC+24VP
RXD
TXD
SGND
N.C.
SGND
CN20A-1
CN20A-2
CN20A-3
CN20A-4
CN20A-5
CN20A-6
CN20A-7
CN20B-1
CN20B-2
CN20B-3
CN20B-4
CN20B-5
CN20B-6
CN20B-7
CN20B-8
FGND
PGND
DC+24VP
N.C.
CN20-1
CN20-2
CN20-3
CN20-4
CN20A-1
CN20A-2
CN20A-3
CN20A-4
CN20A-5
CN20A-6
CN20A-7
CN20-1
CN20-2
CN20-3
CN20-4
4
3
5
6
8
9
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
5
6
7
8
CN5-1
CN5-2
CN5-3
CN5-4
CN5-5
CN5-6
CN5-7
CN5-8
CN5-9
CN5-10
CN5-11
CN5-12
CN5-13
CN5-14
CN5-15
CN4-1
CN4-2
CN4-3
CN4-4
CN4-5
CN4-6
CN4-7
CN4-8
CN4-9
CN2-1
CN2-2
CN2-3
CN2-4
CN2-5
CN2-6
CN2-7
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
SGND
TXD2
RXD2
DSR
DTR
RESET
DC+5V
SGND
PAPER_F
DC+5V
SGND
PDL_HP
SGND
BIND_CLK
DC+5V
DC+5V
SGND
BDL_ROL_HP
DC+5V
SGND
BIND_EMPS
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_CLK
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_DNLMT
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_UPLMT
CN17-1
CN17-2
CN17-3
CN17-4
CN17-5
CN17-6
CN19-1
CN19-2
CN19-3
CN9-1
CN9-2
CN9-3
CN9-4
CN9-5
CN9-6
CN9-7
CN9-8
CN9-9
CN15-1
CN15-2
CN15-3
CN15-4
CN15-5
CN15-6
CN15-7
CN15-8
CN15-9
CN15-10
CN15-11
CN15-12
DC+5V
CN16-1
BIND_P
CN16-2
BIND_L
CN16-3
DC+5V
CN16-4
SGND
CN16-5
BIND_HP
CN16-6
DC+5V
CN16-7
SGND
CN16-8
BIND_ROL_HP CN16-9
DC+5V
CN16-10
SGND
CN16-11
ENT_S
CN16-12
DC+5V
SGND
ADJ_TRAY_S
DC+5V
SGND
EJCT_BLT_HP
DC+5V
SGND
TRY_EMPS
DC+5V
SGND
LVL_S
DC+5V
SGND
RJOG_HP
DC+5V
SGND
FJOG_HP
DC+5V
SGND
TOPCOV_S
DC+5V
SGND
FDOOR_S
DC+24VL
N.C.
SGND
SGND
TXD
SGND
RXD
DC+24V
N.C.
PGND
+24V
FJOGMTR_A
FJOGMTR_*A
FJOGMTR_B
FJOGMTR_*B
+24V
RJOGMTR_A
RJOGMTR_*A
RJOGMTR_B
RJOGMTR_*B
CN3-1
CN3-2
CN3-3
CN3-4
CN3-5
CN3-6
CN3-7
CN3-8
CN3-9
CN3-10
CN14-1
CN14-2
CN14-3
CN14-4
CN14-5
CN12-1
CN12-2
CN12-3
CN12-4
CN12-5
CN7-1
CN7-2
CN7-3
CN7-4
CN7-5
CN7-6
CN7-7
CN11-1
CN11-2
CN11-3
CN11-4
CN11-5
CN11-6
CN11-7
CN18-1
CN18-2
CN6-1
CN6-2
CN6-3
CN6-4
PNCH_+5V
PNCH_SGND
PNCH_PGND
N.C.
PNCH_+24V
PNCH_TXD
SGND
PNCH_RXD
PNCH_CNCT
PNCH_TM_S
+24V
+24V
SLIDMTR_A
SLIDMTR_*A
SLIDMTR_B
SLIDMTR_*B
N.C.
STPL_CNCT
DC+5V
SLID_HP
STPL_HP
HOOK_S
SELF_P
SGND
+24V
B_CLU
SIFTMTR_1
SIFTMTR_0
BINDMTR_1
BINDMTR_0
STPLSAFE_SW
FRONT_SW
FRONT_SW
JOINT_SW
JOINT_SW
DC+24VP
+24V
+24V
EJCTMTR_A
EJCTMTR_*A
EJCTMTR_B
EJCTMTR_*B
CN13-1
CN13-2
CN13-3
CN13-4
CN13-5
CN13-6
CN8-1
CN8-2
CN8-3
CN8-4
CN8-5
CN8-6
+12V
+12V
FEEDMTR_A
FEEDMTR_*A
FEEDMTR_B
FEEDMTR_*B
+24V
+24V
PDLMTR_A
PDLMTR_*A
PDLMTR_B
PDLMTR_*B
CN10-1
CN10-2
CN10-3
CN10-4
CN10-5
CN10-6
CN10-7
CN10-8
CN10-9
CN10-10
CN10-11
CN10-12
12
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
1
2
CN72-2
CN72-1
CN71-2
CN71-1
CN70-2
CN70-1
To Punch Unit (Option)
14
8
9
10
11
12
13
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24V
B_CLU
1
2
1
2
1
2
SGND
SELF_P
HOOK_S
STPL_HP
SLID_HP
DC+5V
STPL_CNCT
N.C.
+24V
+24V
SLIDMTR_A
SLIDMTR_*A
SLIDMTR_B
SLIDMTR_*B
N.C.
FG
CN72-1
CN72-2
CN71-2
CN71-1
CN70-2
CN70-1
CN72A-1
CN72A-2
CN72A-3
CN72A-4
CN72A-5
CN72A-6
CN72A-7
CN72A-8
CN72B-7
CN72B-6
CN72B-5
CN72B-4
CN72B-3
CN72B-2
CN72B-1
CN72C-1
BINDMTR_1
BINDMTR_0
SIFTMTR_1
SIFTMTR_0
CN72-1
CN72-2
CN72-3
CN72-4
CN72-5
CN72-6
CN72-7
N.C.
CN72-8
CN72-9
CN72-10
CN72-11
CN72-12
CN72-13
CN72-14
CN72-15
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
STPL_HP
Stapler Home
Position Sensor
SLIP HP
Stapler Slide Home
Position Sensor
HOOK S
Hook Sensor
SLIDMTR
Slide Motor (M8)
NO
COM
NO
COM
CN70-2
CN70-1
JOINT_SH
DC+24VP
FDOOR_SH
JOINT_SH
STPLSAFE_SH NO
FDOOR_SH COM
CN65-1
CN65-2
CN65-3
CN65-4
CN65-5
CN63-1
CN63-2
CN63-3
CN63-4
CN63-5
CN59-6
CN59-5
CN59-4
CN59-3
CN59-2
CN59-1
CN57-6
CN57-5
CN57-4
CN57-3
CN57-2
CN57-1
CN56-6
CN56-5
CN56-4
CN56-3
CN56-2
CN56-1
SIFTMTR_1
SIFTMTR_0
CN69-2
CN69-1
CN68-2
CN68-1
CN66-2
CN66-1
+24V
RJOGMTR_A
RJOGMTR_*A
RJOGMTR_B
RJOGMTR_*B
+24V
FJOGMTR_A
FJOGMTR_*A
FJOGMTR_B
FJOGMTR_*B
+24V
+24V
EJCTMTR_A
EJCTMTR_*A
EJCTMTR_B
EJCTMTR_*B
+24V
+24V
PDLMTR_A
PDLMTR_*A
PDLMTR_B
PDLMTR_*B
+12V
+12V
FEEDMTR_A
FEEDMTR_*A
FEEDMTR_B
FEEDMTR_*B
CN70-2
CN70-1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN64-5
CN64-4
CN64-3
CN64-2
CN64-1
CN62-5
CN62-4
CN62-3
CN62-2
CN62-1
CN59-1
CN59-2
CN59-3
CN59-4
CN59-5
CN59-6
CN57-1
CN57-2
CN57-3
CN57-4
CN57-5
CN57-6
CN56-1
CN56-2
CN56-3
CN56-4
CN56-5
CN56-6
Stapler Unit
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
M8
P121
P120
P119
P118
CLU
MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT
Slide Motor
Staple/Fold Motor
Shift Motor
Joint Switch
Front Door Switch
Alignment Motor (Rear)
M5
M4
M3
M2
M1
CL1
M7
M6
MS2
MS1
MS3
Alignment Motor (Front)
Delivery Motor
Paddle Motor
Feed Motor
11.3.7.
CN23-3
CN23-2
CN23-1
12
DP-8060/8045/8035
Schematic Diagram
11.3.7.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit General Circuit Diagram
Full Stack
Sensor
PI24
10
Finisher Unit
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
CN14 CN14
CN12 CN12
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
J2003
J1003
J1007
J2004
J1004
J1007
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11
J2011-1
J2011-2
J2011-3
J2011-4
J2011-5
J2011-6
J2011-7
J2010-1
J2010-2
J2010-3
J2010-4
J2010-5
J2010-6
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1
1
2
J1002
J1002
1
2
J1001
5
4
3
2
1
J1006
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1006
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1001
5
4
3
2
1
J1005
4
3
2
1
J1005
4
3
2
1
J2010
1
2
3
4
5
6
J2010
1
2
3
4
5
6
J1007-6
J1007-5
J1007-4
J1007-3
J1007-2
J1007-1
J2002
1
2
M1P
Punch Motor
PI2P
Home Position
Sensor
PI1P
Punch Home Position
Sensor
PI3P
Punch Motor Clock
Sensor
M2P
Motor
1
2
3
J2007
1
2
3
J2001
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
J2008
1
2
3
J2009
1
2
3
J2005 J2005 Waste Bottle

Full LED PCB
1
1
2
2
J2006 J2006 Waste Bottle Full

Photo-sensor
1
1
PCB
2
2
LED PCB
J2011
1
2
Photo-sensor
3
PCB
4
5
6
7
J2011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J1007-13
J1007-12
J1007-11
J1007-10
J1007-9
J1007-8
J1007-7
924
12
DP-8060/8045/8035
11.3.7.2. Punch Unit General Circuit Diagram
Panasonic
Software
Network Firmware Update Tool
for Service Technicians
Version 3
DZSD001829-14
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)
Table of Contents
1.
General
1.1
Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2.
Installation
2.1
Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4
2.2
Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4
2.3
Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5
3.
Preparing the Firmware Update
3.1
Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6
3.1.1
For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
6
3.1.2
For other models
6
3.2
4.
Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6
Using the Network Firmware Update Tool
1st Edition :
2002 March 20
2nd Edition :
2002 August 1
3rd Edition :
2002 December 5
4th Edition :
2003 April 10
5th Edition :
2003 April 22
6th Edition :
2003 December 18
7th Edition :
2004 April 7
8th Edition :
2004 August 3
9th Edition :
2004 August 20
10th Edition :
2004 October 22
11th Edition :
2005 March 18
12th Edition :
2006 March 27
13th Edition :
2006 Ma 08
14th Edition :
2006 June 26
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright 1999 - 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of these Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to
program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the
Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
Windows 98 / Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool
1.
Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
2.
Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.
3.
Enter the installation password.

Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.
4.
Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.
5.
The completion message is displayed when the installation is completed.

Check Yes, I want to and click [Finish] to restart your PC.
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool
1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network
Firmware Update, then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.
2.
The Configuration dialog box appears.

General Tab
Please change the settings if necessary.
File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode
When you select this mode, the tool acquires
the type of firmware and version from the
device(s) of the specified address, and
updates the device to the latest version from
the Local Firmware Folder.
However, this mode cannot change the type of
firmware, so you must use the manual mode
when changing from the standard firmware to
the option firmware.
3.
Page 4
Click [OK] to finish the setup.

2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool
The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.
1.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or
2.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
Update, then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.
3.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.
4.
The completion message is displayed when the uninstall is completed.
Page 5
3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
3.1.1
For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
1.
If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is
not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box, or enter the password at each communication.
2.
Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.1.2
1.
For other models

If the device password (Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation Password) is
changed from the default value (0000 or 000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In
this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box,
or enter the password at each communication.
For the 3-digit Key Operator Password devices, only the first three digits 000 of the default value
are singled out of the 4-digit 0000 value.
2.
Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note:
It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 6
4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool

1.
Please close all applications that are currently running.

Note: When using the Network Firmware Update Tool on Windows 2000/XP OS, you must be
logged on as an Administrator.
2.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon
to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.
Click [Next>].
Note:
1) Make sure the device password (Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation
Password) on the remote unit and the password on this application are set correctly.
2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...).
3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote
unit, or a communication error may occur.
4) Do not operate, or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the
firmware update will fail, and the device will not boot up again.
5) If the Network Firmware Update fails, and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than
20 minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using
the Local Firmware Update Tool, or with the FROM card.
3.
Click [Device Address List].
Page 7

4.
Enter the destination device(s) by using

Manual Input, or Device Address List.
Click [OK].
5.
Confirm the destination device(s).

Click [Next>].
Page 8

6.
Specify the Firmware Code File using the

following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 6a1
With this choice you can directly select the
Firmware Code Archive File.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically,
and it is chosen as a set when the update
of multiple firmware code files are
necessary.
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 6b1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly from here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select Independent File Folders
--> Step 6c1
the local \Data folder, you can select
independent file folders from here.
Note: Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 is not shown.
6a1

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
Set)" and click [Browse...] button.
Page 9

6a2
Select the Firmware Archive file, and

click [Open].
Ex: DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe
6a3
Extracting...
6a4
Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].
6a5
Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 10

6b1

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete
Set)", and click [Browse...] button.
6b2
Select the Parent File Folder, and Click [OK].

Ex: \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228
6b3
Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].
Page 11

6b4

Click [Next>].
6c1
Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders", and
click [Browse...] button.
6c2
Select the Firmware Code File Folder, and

click [OK].
Ex: SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
Page 12

6c3
Select the other Firmware Code File Folder,

and click [OK].
6c4

Click [Next>].
7.
The version check for the specified devices

starts.
Click [Next>].
Page 13

8.
Verify that the information you want to update

is correct.
Then click [Next>].
Note: If "Send at once" is checked, all
firmware will be sent at once, and then
erase, write and reboot.
If "Send at once" is checked out, each
firmware (SC, PNL, SPC, etc...) are
transmitted separately, and each time
the unit erases, writes and reboots in
the normal mode.
This "Send at once", function cannot be
used if the model is DP-6010 / 4510 /
3510, firmware type is PCL or PS, and
the unit SC version is V1.xxxx.
9.
Confirm the destination device(s) again.

Set timer communication if necessary.
Then click [Next>].
10. Data is transferred to the Spooler, and the

update is started.
The Spooler screen appears automatically

showing the progress of the data transfer.
The spooler will take time to open depending
on the number of addresses to update.
Page 14

11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in
the spooler disappear, and the communication

log is displayed.
Click [Finish] to close the tool.
After each firmware code is successfully
programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in
the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again
automatically.
Page 15
Panasonic
Software
Local Firmware Update Tool
for Service Technicians
Version 3
DZSD000965-17
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)
Table of Contents
1.
General
1.1
Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2.
Installation
2.1
Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4
2.2
Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4
2.3
Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5
2.4
Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6
3.
Preparing the Firmware Update
3.1
Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7
3.2
Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7
4.
Using the Local Firmware Update Tool
1st Edition :
1999 February 10
2nd Edition :
1999 September 30
3rd Edition :
2000 September 8
4th Edition :
2000 November 28
5th Edition :
2001 June 20
6th Edition :
2001 September 7
7th Edition :
2003 April 10
8th Edition :
2003 April 22
9th Edition :
2003 December 18
10th Edition :
2004 January 19
11th Edition :
2004 February 10
12th Edition :
2004 April 20
13th Edition :
2004 August 3
14th Edition :
2004 August 20
15th Edition :
2004 October 22
16th Edition :
2005 March 18
17th Edition :
2006 June 26
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright 1999 - 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)
1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash
Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit
directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of
the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are
very similar to the Printer Interface.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
Windows 98 / Me
Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)
Windows 2000 / XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1
Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine
Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed.
Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and
your PC.
Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic
Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2.2
Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or
change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
Page 4
Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk.
Installation Destination Folder
Program Folder
Click [Next] button.
Click [Next] button.
2.3
Copying...
The installation is completed.

Check Yes, I want to and click [Finish] to
restart your PC.
Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)
After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware
Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service
Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed
automatically.
Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service
Manual.
Searching...
Installing driver...
When the install screen disappears, the

installation of the Firmware Update (USB)
Driver is completed.
Note:
1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.
2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be
displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please
click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation
3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1
4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the
Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.
Page 5

2.4
Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.
1.
2.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.
3.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.
4.
The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control
Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it
after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be
deleted properly.
Page 6
3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 7
4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool
Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel
cable or USB cable.
Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the
USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If
this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver
installation.
Please close the all applications that are

currently running.
Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or
Port Controller are closed. If they are
running, right click on the icons in the system
tray and select Exit/End.
Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using
Network Firmware Update Tool, the
authority more than a Power User is
required.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut
icon to start the Panasonic Firmware
Programming Wizard.
Click [Next>].
Note: Please close all applications that are
currently running.
Also ensure that the Status Monitor
and/or Port Controller are closed. If
they are running, right click on the icons
in the system tray and select Exit/End.
Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or

Parallel.
Click [Next>].
Note: The Firmware Update Driver (USB) is
only displayed if you installed it with the
unit Plug and Play.
Page 8
Status Monitor
Port Controller
Specify the Firmware Code File by the

following methods.
--> Step 5a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
--> Step 5b1
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
Select an Independent File
--> Step 5c1
the local \Data folder, you can select an
independent file here.
When updating multiple firmware files, you
must repeat the file selection operation.
5a1

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
5a2
Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe
5a3
Extracting...
Page 9

5a4
Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
5a5

Click [Next>].
Page 10

5b1

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete
5b2
Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].

ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327
5b3
Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
Page 11

5b4

Click [Next>].
Page 12

5c1
Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click
[Browse...] button.
5c2
Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
5c3

Click [Next>].
Page 13
The selected Firmware Code File(s) are

indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need
to transfer a file.
On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.
Click [Next>].
The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

When there is more than one file to be
updated, the operation will be the following;
For USB connected unit:
they are transferred in turn automatically if the
unit is ready to receive the next firmware code
file.
Note: If you are updating the
DP-2310/3010, the sending of
sequential multiple files to the unit
isn't done automatically. The
"Waiting..." display on the PC will not
advance to "Executing..." until you set
the unit back to USB Firmware
Update on the machine to start
receiving the next file. See Unit
information of the Firmware
Update Mode on the next page.
For Parallel connected unit:
the confirmation screen is displayed when the
current firmware code file transfer is finished
and there are remaining firmware code files.
Click [OK] when the machine is ready to
receive the next file.
Page 14

Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode:
For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to
USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the
firmware update.
When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return
to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the
PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code
file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode.
For USB Connected Unit (Other models):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the
firmware update automatically.
When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and
return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The
display returns to Update in Progress) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware
code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed.
For Parallel Connected Unit:
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite
of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service
Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
When the transfers of all the firmware files are

finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.
Note: For USB Connected Unit only.

When the unit returns to standby, Plug
and Play of the printer will popup.
Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug
and Play window.
Page 15
Published in Japan

DP-8060 ServiceManual Ver.1.4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DP-8060 ServiceManual Ver.1.4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Order Number: MGCS060601C1

Digital Imaging Systems

DP-8060 / 8045 / 8035

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2008.

Notice: California only:

3.25. LVPS for Finisher Unit.......................... 245

3.26. APF PC Board...................................... 246

Fax, Printer, Network Scanner,

3.27. LCT PC Board ...................................... 252

Options and Supplies List ...................... 32

External View ......................................... 34

Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart.......... 258

Control Panel ......................................... 37

Improper LCD Display .......................... 259

Fans and Motors .................................... 38

Printed Copy Quality Problems ............ 260

Troubleshooting the LAN Interface....... 276

Clutches and Switches........................... 40

Error Codes (For Copier)...................... 284

Information Codes Table

Disassembly Instructions ..................... 42

Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile) ........ 306

Troubleshooting (For Printer) ............... 313

Disassembly Instructions ....................... 43

Screw Identification Template.............. 123

Troubleshooting .................................. 258

Service Modes ..................................... 316

Maintenance, Adjustments, and Check

Preventive Maintenance ...................... 129

Required Tools..................................... 131

Preventive Maintenance Points ........... 132

Preventive Maintenance Check List..... 134

Resetting the P/M

Updating the Firmware......................... 138

Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure

Adjusting the Printer Registration,

Calibrating the LCD.............................. 155

Service Modes (For Copier) ................. 316

Service Modes (For Facsimile)............. 349

System Description ............................. 378

Copy Process ....................................... 378

Precautions with Consumables ............ 379

New Digital Image Control Qualitative

Inverting Automatic Document Feeder

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations..... 384

3.10. Signal Waveform.................................. 156

Precautions During Set Up................... 393

Unpacking ............................................ 396

Installation Procedure........................... 397

Options, and Supplies......................... 405

3.13. ADF PC Board ..................................... 183

Service Notes Firmware Update for

Installing the Printer Controller Module

Installing the Multi Page Description

Installing the Fax Communication Board

Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit

3.19. DCB PC Board..................................... 238

Installing the DDS Unlock Module

9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail

Installing the Accounting Software

9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Installing the DD Server Software

9.13. Message Disposition Notifications

Installing the Sorting Image Memory